ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 CONNON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRAaiCAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc. 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK : : LONDON 
 The International College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES. 
 
 Entered at 
 
 aTATlONKRS' HALL, LONDON, ENO. 
 
RV;y 
 
 r. I 
 
 1 1 1:1; /-C í 
 
 oi m 
 
 V 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 Or 
 
 > 
 
 N 
 
 H 
 
 FRENCH, GERMAN. 
 SPANISHorITALIAN 
 
 ^ To S P K A K it, to under- 
 stand it, to read it, to write it, 
 there is but one best way. 
 
 You must hear it SPOKEN 
 correctly, over and over, till 
 your EAR knows it. 
 
 ^ You must see it printed cor- 
 rectly till your eye knows it. 
 
 ^ You must T A ly K it and 
 write it. 
 
 q All this can be done best by 
 the 
 
 Language-Phone Method 
 
 In connection with Dr. Rosenthal’s Common 
 Sense Method of Practical Linguistry 
 
 ^ With this method you buy a native professor outright. You own him 
 He SPEAKS as you choose, slowly or quickly ; when you choose, night 
 or day ; for a few minutes or hours at a time. 
 
 ^ Any one can learn a foreign language whoHEARS it SPOKEN often 
 enough ; and by this method you can HEAR it as often as you like. 
 The method has been recommended by well-known members of the 
 faculties of the following universities and colleges: Yale, Celumbia» 
 Fordham, Brown, Harvard, Pennsylvania, Boston, Princeton, Cornell, 
 Syracuse, Manhattan, Johns Hopkins, Virginia, Colorado, Michigan, 
 Chicago, Minnesota, De La Salle, St. Josephs, St. Francis Xavier, 
 
 We ask you to investip^ate this marvelous system^ and read what its 
 users say. Mail Inquiry Coupon and it will bring you booklet^ 
 explanatory literature and facsimile letters from men who know. 
 
 O 
 
 Si 
 
 Please mail to me full particulars concerning the Language- 
 Phone Method for Acquiring French, German, Spanish or Italian. 
 
 NAME 
 
 POST OFFICE 
 
 STATE 
 
 the: la.ngua.ge phone method 
 
 223 Hess Building, 554 Fourth Avenue, New York 
 
 985158 
 
https://archive.org/details/rosenthalscommon110rose 
 
 ’ j 
 
Teachers^ students, and book-reviewers are requested to 
 carefully read the ^^Explanation of RosenthaFs Common- 
 Sense Method of Practical Linguistry ” before taking up the 
 system itself 
 
;:C'' hi- 
 
Explanation of Rosendial^s G>mmon-Sense 
 Method of Practical Linguistry. 
 
 Some years ago, in an address delivered by an author- 
 ity before the students of one of our prominent univer- 
 sities, the futility of the plan of language teaching pursued 
 in our colleges was pointedly set forth. 
 
 In a very clear, conclusive, and elaborate argument he 
 showed that the study of Latin and Greek, as taught, was 
 practically worthless ; that few of our students could read 
 the ancient classics with ease and enjoyment, and that not 
 even the teachers themselves were able to use these 
 tongues colloquially. 
 
 He closed his speech with an eloquent appeal to the 
 college authorities that greater attention should hence- 
 forth be paid to the study of modern languages, and 
 many of our leading universities have since then en- 
 deavored to act upon his advice. 
 
 But were his suggestions carried out in the right 
 spirit by any of our schools? Have the results been 
 reached which he foretold and expected? Can our pres- 
 ent college graduates express themselves with fluency 
 and correctness in French, German, Spanish or Italian? 
 Or, isn’t it rather a fact that, despite all efforts, the 
 modern tongues have remained just as lifeless to our 
 students as the so-called dead languages? 
 
 In our times, when international intercourse is con- 
 stantly increasing, when steam and electricity are 
 uniting the whole world into one great brotherhood, 
 when the deep thoughts of philosophy and the marvel- 
 ous discoveries of science are no longer confined to any 
 
6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 one tongue, but are almost simultaneously expressed and 
 carried out by all the great civilized nations, 
 
 THE PRACTICAL MASTERY OF MODERN LANGUAGES 
 
 has become an absolute necessity. 
 
 It is no longer sufficient to teach the pupils the 
 intricacies of the German declensions or the grammatical 
 technicalities of the French language — the present civiU 
 ization demands higher and more practical results. 
 
 LINGUISTRY MUST BE TAUGHT IN PLACE OF PHILOLOGY. 
 
 Our students must not only know the grammatical 
 peculiarities of French and German, but must be able 
 to use foreign languages just as readily and correctly as 
 their own; they must not only be acquainted with the 
 classical mas ter- works of France or Germany, but must 
 speak and understand the practical every-day language 
 of common life. 
 
 Everybody knows how languages are taught in our 
 seminaries, schools and universities. 
 
 For four, five, frequently seven years our young men 
 and women study various text-books, manuals and gram- 
 mars. They learn to parse, to analyze, to decline and 
 conjugate; they can repeat whole pages of grammatical 
 rules and foreign words by heart; they are capable of 
 taking a piece of classical French or German and render- 
 ing it into smooth English ; they frequently know the 
 grammars of these tongues better even than the natives 
 themselves, and yet on 
 
 GOING ABROAD ' 
 
 they are unable to ask for the common necessities of life 
 in idiomatic French or German, nor do they understand 
 the polite utterances of even a waiter or a chamber- 
 maid. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 7 
 
 LANGUAGE AND GRAMMAR 
 
 are in no sense synonymous, though our prevailing 
 school methods might lead us to suppose so. 
 
 Grammar is the science of language, and while nec- 
 essary and desirable is by no means so important as the 
 ability of speaking the language itself. 
 
 Can any one doubt this? 
 
 Look around at the majority of people you meet. 
 Listen to their speech and examine it. Do they know 
 the rules of English grammar? Do not the children of 
 educated persons express themselves correctly without 
 ever having studied a single line of grammatical defi- 
 nitions? Must not every one — cultivated or unrefined 
 — speak and understand English first, before .he can 
 take up the grammatical study of his mother- tongue? 
 Isn’t it true that if grammar were a necessary element 
 of speech nine-tenths of the American nation would 
 surely be dumb? 
 
 Examine now in the light of these suggestions any of 
 our school methods, and it will at once be apparent why 
 I enter a solemn protest against them. 
 
 They are one and all 
 
 ANALYTICAL SYSTEMS. 
 
 They give a multiplicity of rules and exceptions which 
 the student cannot possibly remember when trying to 
 speak in a foreign language ; they teach theory of speech 
 instead of practising it ; they tear apart instead of build- 
 ing up; in a word, they educate philologists and gram- 
 marians and never try to impart practical linguistry. 
 
 THE STUDY OF GRAMMAR IS INDISPENSABLE, 
 
 ‘n^ut it must be taught,” as the great Erasmus long ago 
 
8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 advised, the proper time and kept within proper 
 limits/’ 
 
 Colloquial mastery must precede it. Grammar will 
 then no longer confuse, but assist the pupil; it will cease 
 to be a drudgery and hindrance and will become a plain 
 and simple explanation of forms and idioms already 
 mastered; it will no longer be an uncertain foundation, 
 but will adorn, complete and cap the edifice which has 
 been reared by practical linguistic exercises. 
 
 This is 
 
 THE TRUE OFFICE OF GRAMMAR 
 
 and in this sense it is taught throughout my method. 
 
 I have in my possession a letter from the celebrated 
 explorer of Greek antiquities, 
 
 THE LATE DR. HEINRICH SCHLIEMANN, 
 
 whom I had the privilege of knowing intimately, and 
 whose opinion as to the merits of any language system 
 is of unquestionable value, he having been one of the 
 most distinguished linguists of his day. 
 
 ‘'Your method,” he writes, “is the only correct one, 
 because it is a scientific adaptation of 
 nature’s own way, 
 
 by which all persons, whether children or adults, edu- 
 cated or otherwise, rapidly and correctly acquire the 
 language which they constantly hear and which they are 
 instinctively impelled to imitate when resident in a 
 foreign country.” 
 
 In this cosmopolitan land of ours every intelligent 
 observer must have noticed the ease and rapidity with 
 which foreigners master our mother-tongue. 
 
 They have neither books, teachers, nor interpreters; 
 they may be Russians, Germans, Frenchmen, Spaniards, 
 or Swedes ; they generally understand nothing about the 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 9 
 
 principles of grammar ; they may be too young or unedu- 
 cated even to read or write their own language; yet, 
 despite all, they invariably, within a few months, master 
 sufficient English not only to make themselves understood, 
 but to speak grammatically and correctly, provided they 
 have mixed with the cultured classes of society, and, of 
 course, they speak faultily and badly, if they have had the 
 misfortune of associating with uneducated people. 
 
 From these facts it is obvious that some system must 
 exist which we intuitively follow when we reside abroad, 
 and which always and under all circumstances leads to 
 complete control of a foreign tongue. 
 
 The first question before us therefore is : 
 
 WHAT IS THIS SYSTEM WHICH WE INSTINCTIVELY FOL- 
 LOW WHEN RESIDING IN A FOREIGN COUNTRY? 
 
 If you lived, for instance, in Paris, or Berlin, or the 
 city of Mexico, or had gone, like Stanley, to darkest 
 Africa, or, like those poor sailors of the 
 the wilds of Siberia, in acquiring a foreign language you 
 would invariably pass through the following stages of 
 experience : 
 
 At first, the mind is confused by the mutiplicity of 
 foreign sounds heard. We try to fathom the ideas which 
 are expressed in the unknown tongue ; failing to do so we 
 naturally get bewildered. 
 
 This state of mental ccmfusion — which, by the way, 
 is exceedingly disagreeable — is generally passed in about 
 three or four weeks. 
 
 The ear, by that time, has grown accustomed to some 
 of these sounds, and quite instinctively we begin to im- 
 itate that PHRASE which we have heard most frequently 
 
10 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 pronounced by the persons surrounding us, and which, 
 at the same time, is most necessary to our wants. 
 
 Now, which is our greatest necessity? Which of the 
 various needs to which humanity is subject is of para- 
 mount importaííice to young and old alike? 
 
 It is nourishment, food, eating and drinking. 
 
 Consequently the first sentence which is usually mas- 
 tered is a phrase like this : ''Please give me something to 
 eat,'^ or "Please bring me the bill of fare,'' or "Pray give 
 me a steak and some potatoes." 
 
 Not a very intellectual phrase, but a sentence abso- 
 lutely necessary to every one; and, let me observe that 
 nature, through the mastery of this first simple phrase, 
 has pointed out 
 
 THE TRUE AND ONLY WAY 
 
 in which alone languages can be learned. 
 
 It is through sentences, and never through single, 
 isolated words. Disconnected words are never language. 
 
 Nature teaches phrases ; grammarians and books, 
 blind to the instructions which nature has placed so 
 plainly before them, give words, and most absurdly of 
 all, isolated nouns, which — as experience teaches — are 
 not by any means the most important branch of the 
 language. The verbs are the soul and backbone of all 
 speech, and it is by and through the proper study of 
 verbs that mastery of a language can alone be reached. 
 
 But to return to our sentence : "Please bring me the 
 bill of fare." 
 
 Not knowing any other expressions, we naturally 
 cling to these words and use them again and again for 
 our various necessities. 
 
 For instance, when you want some matches, or an 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 11 
 
 umbrella, or some towels, instead of saying to the at- 
 tendant, ''Please bring me the bill of fare/' you will 
 point to the object and address him thus: "Please bring 
 me 
 
 Consider here the simplicity of nature’s mode of 
 teaching. By mastering this first little phrase nature 
 has furnished you a "sentence-mould" by the use of 
 which thousands of correct and absolutely necessary sen- 
 tences may be composed, as is plainly seen by the phrase 
 given. 
 
 The attendant, understanding your abbreviated phrase 
 
 and gesture, "Please bring me will give 
 
 you the words, "some matches," "an umbrella," or "some 
 towels," in Spanish, Chinese, or Teloogoo, wherever you 
 may happen to reside; you repeat these new words a 
 number of times until by repetition and reiteration they 
 come quite naturally to you. In this way we go on from 
 day to day, in fact from hour to hour, until finally, at 
 the end of a few months, we are capable of expressing 
 ourselves quite readily and fluently. 
 
 This is the process by which sounds become language 
 This is the mode in which any language is mastered 
 when we reside abroad. This is the way in which our 
 missionaries, for instance, when they go to countries of 
 whose language no civilized man has the faintest idea, 
 and of whose grammar everybody is ignorant; this, I 
 say, is the way in which our missionaries, in one year’s 
 stay, master a language so fully that they not only can 
 preach the Gospel therein, but abstract from a hitherto 
 unknown tongue a scientific theory or grammar. 
 
 They have not studied a single book, have never seen 
 a written sentence, have never learned a grammatical 
 
12 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 rule of this unknown, uncivilized tongue; and why in- 
 deed should they? 
 
 No one will ever learn a language by studying 
 isolated words, disconnected expressions, and abstract 
 rules. 
 
 "‘A man is not a carpenter and cannot pass himself 
 off for one,'’ says a celebrated French writer, '‘simply 
 because he has just purchased a complete outfit of car- 
 penter's tools. The mere acquisition of the tools has 
 not advanced him a single step in his art." 
 
 So also it is with the student who has mastered only 
 the grammatical technicalities and isolated words of a 
 language. 
 
 But the way I have endeavored to describe, is 
 nature's own mode 
 
 of acquiring a foreign language, and presents a rational» 
 simple, and in fact the only true system. This is 
 
 PRACTICAL LINGUISTRY, 
 
 and my method follows it as closely as possible. 
 
 But in following nature my method does not copy or 
 repeat nature, otherwise it would no longer be a method. 
 
 A true linguistic method is essentially a systematic 
 art. Now, art can never in itself be natural. It is 
 inspired by nature, but it exists only in so far as it 
 does better than nature. To become art, nature must 
 be recast in the mould of a human concept. To become 
 a method, it must be scientifically adapted to the require- 
 ments of students who wish to master a foreign tongue 
 while remaining in their own country. It must in no 
 case be a "natural" method, but must follow and sys- 
 tematize nature. It must produce the same results which 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 13 
 
 nature does, but in a much shorter time and by the sim- 
 plest and yet most systematic means. 
 
 “Steam,” says Frangois Gouin, “is a natural force, 
 but the railway train set in motion by man is not a 
 natural fact ; it is a thing which is not in nature and far 
 superior to that which would be realized by Nature if 
 left to herself.” . 
 
 The same is the case with a good language method. 
 The system that cannot compete with nature both in 
 quantity and quality of its products, would indeed be de- 
 fective. Its results must be superior to those of nature, 
 and its means systematic, simple, scientific and both 
 psychologically and philologically true. 
 
 In 1872 I was appointed General Interpreter of New 
 York. To my horror, I very soon found that though I 
 understood the grammars of about twenty languages 
 and could read and translate them without difficulty, I 
 was nevertheless incapable of carrying on an hour’s con- 
 versation in any of them. 
 
 Colloquial mastery of numerous tongues was an abso- 
 lute necessity to me, and by degrees I began to develop 
 a system of study for myself, and became a linguist. 
 
 The first results of my investigations were contained 
 in my Meisterschaft, i, e.. Mastery System. 
 
 Despite its phenomenal success no one can be more 
 conscious of its glaring faults, imperfections and crudi- 
 ties than I am. It was the work of an immature man 
 who had not investigated his subject sufficiently, and it 
 should be judged as such. 
 
 Science is ever progressive and must be so from its 
 very nature. 
 
 “The wisdom of the ancients,” says Prof. Henry 
 Drummond, ^where is it T It is wholly gone. A school- 
 
14 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 boy to-day knows more than Sir Isaac Newton knew. 
 His knowledge has vanished away. You put yesterday’s 
 ■newspaper in the fire. Its knowledge has vanished away. 
 You buy the old editions of the great encyclopedias for a 
 few cents. Their knowledge has vanished away. The 
 science and philosophy of this day will soon be old. But 
 yesterday in the University of Edinburgh, the great fig- 
 ure in the faculty was Sir James Simpson, the discoverer 
 of chloroform. The other day his successor and nephew, 
 Professor Simpson, was asked by the Librarian of the 
 University to go to the Library and pick out the books 
 on his subject that were no longer needed. And his 
 reply to the Librarian was this: ‘Take away every text^ 
 book that is more than ten years old, and put it down in 
 the cellar/ Sir James Simpson was a great authority 
 only a few years ago. Men came from all parts of the 
 earth to consult him, almost the whole teaching of 
 that time is consigned by the science of to-day to ob- 
 livion, and in every branch of science it is the same.” 
 
 The old has to give way to the new. The greater 
 knowledge of to-day supersedes the imperfect works of 
 the past. Science is an eternal fire to which each thinker 
 can contribute but a small brand. 
 
 After twenty years of practical experience as a teacher, 
 and aided by the investigations of many minds, I have 
 at last completed a work which not only contains a 
 full presentation of my views in regard to rational lin- 
 guistry, but gives such practical idiomatic exercises, vo- 
 cabularies, and conversations as will make the book what 
 it is intended to be, viz. : 
 
 A VADE-MECUM TO ALL LANGUAGE STUDENTS. 
 
 In the foregoing pages I have endeavored to explain 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 15 
 
 Nature’s way for the acquisition of foreign languages. 
 Let us see how 
 
 THE ROSENTHAL METHOD OF PRACTICAL LINGUISTRY 
 follows it : 
 
 In the first place I divide the whole language, which 
 is infinite, and which no one, not even a Shakespeare, has 
 ever mastered in its entirety, into 
 
 THE LANGUAGE OF LITERATURE AND THE LANGUAGE OP 
 EVERY DAY LIFE. 
 
 A very simple and rational division, and yet, despite 
 its evident simplicity, the idea has never been acted upon. 
 
 What part of English is used by the generality of 
 people? The language of literature or the expressions 
 of common life ? What do our children speak when they 
 enter school and receive their first lessons in spelling 
 and reading? The language of every day life. 
 
 They understand, and must be able to understand 
 and follow their teachers, before they can proceed to the 
 study of English grammar. They must know common, 
 every day English before they can appreciate and com- 
 prehend the beauties of Milton’s, Shakespeare’s and Ten- 
 nyson’s works. 
 
 Consequently I hold that in studying foreign tongues 
 we must first acquire a working knowledge of practical 
 every day French, German, Spanish and Italian before we 
 can enter upon the study of classical literature. 
 
 Is this the way in which languages are taught in our 
 schools and universities? Decidedly not! How do our 
 professors instruct? 
 
 After the students have stumbled through about fifty 
 pages of German declensions and eii^hty more of regu- 
 lar and irregular conjugations, the teachers suddenly an- 
 
16 
 
 The Rosenthal Method* 
 
 notince that ‘'the class is now far enough advanced to 
 commence the study of Schiller's Tell or Goethe's Faust.” 
 
 Goethe's Faust, indeed ! What utter absurdity ! We 
 might just as well put Hamlet or Paradise Lost in our 
 children's hands as to expect mere tyros in German to 
 appreciate the beautiful style and deep thoughts of Goethe 
 or Schiller. 
 
 The study of literature can be pursued only after the 
 language of practical life has been acquired. 
 
 This is the first point to be insisted upon. 
 
 But here we meet immediately with a new and very 
 great difficulty. 
 
 What is the language of practical life, which every 
 child speaks and understands? Does it refer to exter- 
 nal facts only? Or is it not rather true that in each lan- 
 guage there are two languages, one referring to external 
 objects and the other to internal sentiments and refiec- 
 tions ? 
 
 Man is not merely an animal. He does not only per- 
 ceive the phenomena of the external world — as all ani- 
 mals do to a higher or lesser degree, but he is a think- 
 ing, reasoning being. He judges, he weighs, he receives 
 this and rejects that; he enjoys certain things while 
 others pain him; he believes this and doubts that; he 
 reasons from effect to cause; he ha^— to use the biblical 
 expression — eaten the fruit of the tree of knowledge and 
 distinguishes between good and evil. 
 
 Hence we have an objective and subjective language. 
 
 In actual life these two cross each other constantly 
 and are so closely and finely interwoven that they form 
 so to say, the warp and the woof of the whole texture. 
 
 A true language method must therefore deal with 
 these two brandies from the very start. Mere object- 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 17 
 
 teaching — as some books advocate — is consequently 
 wrong, because it is one-sided. Side by side these two 
 languages must progress, working into one grand har- 
 monious whole. Only thus can a real method be devel- 
 oped. 
 
 Secondly : I divide the words of the language into the 
 necessary and unnecessary on$s. 
 
 This is a simple and common-sense division. 
 
 The necessary words, the expressions which all men 
 use and understand, must be mastered first, before more 
 unusual ones are taken into consideration. 
 
 The question presents itself at once: 
 
 WHAT WORDS ARE NECESSARY? 
 
 Let me illustrate my meaning. 
 
 Take, for instance, the three words, money, fan and 
 chisel; how do they compare with each other ? 
 
 The word money is so important that no one can get 
 on without the use — and I might add — the substance of 
 it. Everybody has to employ it and every one must con- 
 sequently know it. It is plainly a necessary word. 
 
 Fan — our second example — ^belongs to a different class 
 of expressions. Though no doubt necessary, the word, as 
 well as the object itself, is by no means so imperatively 
 needful as money; it therefore belongs to another class, 
 that is to say, two words which, though they ought to be 
 learned, may be learned later. 
 
 Now, take our third example, the word chisel. A 
 lady might live for twenty years in France without hav- 
 ing any use for this word, while to a carpenter it would 
 be absolutely necessary. 
 
 The word, therefore — as far as the generality of stu- 
 
18 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 dents is concerned — ^belongs to the class of unnecessary 
 expressions. 
 
 Now, put these few simple remarks to the test. Take 
 any of 
 
 OUR TEXT-BOOKS, GRAMMARS, MANUALS, OR VOCABU- 
 LARIES, 
 
 and what do we find? 
 
 In the first place, mere grammatical rules and tech- 
 nicalities which, though very important in themselves, 
 teach nothing but the theory or science of language, in- 
 stead of giving us LANGUAGE ITSELF. 
 
 Then glance at the vocabularies. Do they teach the 
 necessary expressions of common life? Or doesn't it 
 rather seem as if the author had drawn the words at 
 random out of the dictionary more with the view of giv- 
 ing every word some chance of representation than to 
 teach those expressions which we actually need and must 
 know? 
 
 And finally look at the examples! Who does not 
 know how the majority of grammars fill page after page 
 with the most useless, and frequently the most absurdly 
 ridiculous sentences ? 
 
 Imagine plodding through pages like the following, 
 and I wish to remark that I quote verbatim from a widely- 
 used French grammar: 
 
 ''I have a rose. He has a book. You have a stick. 
 My brother has a pen. His sister has an apple/^ and so 
 forth, through fifty pages. 
 
 Think of learning French from a so-called ‘^Conver- 
 sation Grammar" published a few years ago in New 
 York, and from which I quote the first four ^^con- 
 versations^^ only: ‘'Where are the monks? They are in 
 the refectory. Who killed the elephant? It zvas the gro^ 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 19 
 
 cer. Where is the bird? It is sitting on the blacksmith^ s 
 shop?' 
 
 Would any one believe that such stuflf could find a 
 publisher, or that a book like this would be used in any 
 school ? 
 
 Or let us examine a German grammar, the work of a 
 well-known teacher, used in almost every High School 
 in the land. I open it at random, and here is the state- 
 ment I find: 
 
 ^^The Italian shoemaker has purchased an Egyptian 
 antelope from the Andalusian merchant?' 
 
 A truly startling sentence condensing the splendors of 
 three nationalities in one grand luminous thought. 
 
 I scarcely venture to make another quotation after this 
 sublime effort of word painting, but the fourth author, 
 whose works I have before me, has composed some 
 phrases worthy to be preserved as curiosities! Think 
 of studying sentences like these : 
 
 *'Has the baker our breads No, but he has our Une 
 asses. Has he our nails and hammers? No, but he has 
 our good loaves. Hcrue you seen the red cozv of the sick 
 general's wife? No, I have not seen the red cow of the sick 
 general's wife, but I have seen the ñerce dog of your 
 mother-in-law." 
 
 Can any one read such barren nonsense without a 
 smile? Are such phrases ever used by rational people? 
 Is this the language of practical life? 
 
 I readily admit that all school methods do not sin as 
 grievously as the books from which I quote, but they are 
 all miore or less tainted with the same defect, and ''not one 
 of them," as Macaulay once remarked, "teaches actual, 
 living speech." 
 
 And yet actual, living speech is exactly what must be 
 
20 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 taught. What .else do common-sense people wish to 
 acquire ? 
 
 Throughout my books I have endeavored to give 
 nothing but useful and practical phrases, sentences 
 which we are in the habit of using in the common trans* 
 actions of life, expressions which every one must em- 
 ploy, be he merchant, scholar, physician, lawyer or 
 tourist. 
 
 It is, of course, self evident that only 
 
 A LIMITED VOCABULARY 
 
 can be employed by the generality of mankind, and the 
 question arises at once : 
 
 HOW MANY WORDS ARE NECESSARY FOR CONVERSATION OH 
 ALL GENERAL TOPICS? 
 
 No one uses the 450,000 words which we find in the 
 last edition of the Standard Dictionary, or Century, or 
 Webster. No one knows them. Open your dictionaries 
 and you will find at least five words on every page which 
 you either do not know at all, or, at any rate, so im- 
 perfectly that their meanings have to be explained to 
 you. 
 
 Shakespeare, the greatest mind the world ever pro- 
 duced, had only 12,000 words at his command. Milton 
 ranks next to him with about 11,000, while Carlyle, de- 
 spite his drastic style and numerous original word for- 
 mations, uses but 9,000 words in all his works. 
 
 THE EXTENT OF OUR EVERY DAY VOCABULARY 
 is, comparatively speaking, exceedingly small. I^epsius, 
 the famous Egyptologist, limits the number of words 
 necessary for conversation on all general subjects to 
 600. Prendergast estimates that only 300 words are 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 21 
 
 used by the generality of mankind, and Bayard Taylor 
 concludes that 1,500 words are needed for practical puj- 
 poses. 
 
 My own estimate is considerably higher. I base it on 
 the fluency of speech attained by the average educated 
 man, and feel sure that at least 4,000 words are employed 
 in the common transactions of life. 
 
 Even this number appears at first glance utterly in- 
 sufficient. If you were to count the single words thus far 
 used in my introductory remarks, their number would be 
 far in excess of my above calculation. But you must con- 
 sider how frequently the same words occur and reoccur ; 
 that with 40 words, for instance, we are able to form 
 1,024,000 sentences of 20 words each ; then try to calculate 
 how many phrases could be constructed with 4,000 words, 
 and you will surely be convinced that with such a vocabu- 
 lary, properly selected, you would be equipped for any 
 and all transactions of life. 
 
 ‘‘Figures cannot lie,’’ says the proverb. Nothing, 
 however, is more elastic than figures. Just listen to con- 
 gressmen of different parties, and you will soon find that 
 from the same statistical figures diametrically opposite 
 results can be proved. Nothing is so deceptive as fig- 
 ures, and those given by me are no exception ; in fact, 
 they are misleading, for, while arithmetically it is per- 
 fectly correct, that with 40 words we can form 1,024,000 
 sentences of 20 words each, in practice we would have 
 to strike out at least nine-tenths of these phrases. The 
 words would appear so unnaturally arranged that no one 
 could use them. 
 
 But this apparent drawback does not affect the gen- 
 eral result of my estimate in the slightest degree. One- 
 tenth of the enormous number of sentences which can be 
 
22 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 constructed from 4,000 words is sufficient, and more than 
 sufficient, for any man. They would supply him with a 
 quantity of expressions needed in all walks of life. They 
 would equip you for all practical purposes, whether you 
 stay at home or travel, buy or sell, in pleading or preach- 
 ing, in places of amusement or worship, in the halts of 
 Congress or common every day transactions. 
 
 The proper selection of the vocabulary of prac- 
 tical LIFE IS THE FIRST DISTINGUISHING FEATURE OF MY 
 METHOD, and while Nature never fails in providing a per- 
 son with words best adapted for his own necessities, it has 
 taken the investigations of many minds to determine the 
 limits and extent of speech for a scientific system of lin- 
 guistry. 
 
 Highly important, however, as this part of my work 
 is, it is a mere detail of my whole plan, for it must not be 
 overlooked that 
 
 DISCONNECTED, ISOLATED WORDS ARE NOT LANGUAGE. 
 
 A person might learn a whole dictionary by heart and 
 yet would not be able to speak. 
 
 As long as a child can use single words only, he can 
 not carry on a conversation. He may be capable of say- 
 ing drink, milk, walk, candy, out, garden, tired, bed, etc., 
 thus making his wants and desires known, but he is still 
 utterly unable to sustain a connected conversation. 
 
 Now, why is this? 
 
 There exist in every language certain substrata of 
 speech, certain formulae of expression containing its 
 life and character, which can never be translated literally 
 from one language into another, which cannot be parsed 
 or analyzed, and which in themselves are absolutely sense- 
 less and absurd. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 23 
 
 Let me illixstrate my meaning. 
 
 The first question which we ask each other, and we 
 ask it many times a day, is an utter absurdity, 
 *'How do you dot' Parse this if you can. Do what? 
 What are we supposed to be doing that we should anx- 
 iously inquire of each other how we do it? 
 
 Now, if we were to take this phrase, the meaning of 
 which is perfectly clear to all of us, and translate it 
 literally into French or German, we would render our- 
 selves just as ridiculous as a Frenchman would, who, 
 instead of saying: ''How is your grandmother?'' would 
 gravely inquire : "How carries herself Madam your 
 grandmother? Comment se porte madame votre grand- 
 ^mére?" Or, as a German would, who, instead of stating: 
 
 am very sorry you have a headache," would literally 
 say: "It does to me great pain that you headache have. 
 'Es thut mir sehr leid, doss Sie Kopfweh haben," Or, as 
 a Spaniard would, who, instead of asking: "How old is 
 your brother?" would put his question thus from his na- 
 tional standpoint : "How many years possesses his brother 
 cf your worship? ¿Cuántos años tiene su hermano de 
 
 y?" 
 
 Now, what is the inference? To my mind it is per- 
 fectly clear and obvious. 
 
 I hold that instead of beginning our studies with those 
 little bits of baby sentences, which no common-sense per- 
 son was ever known to use, and with which all books 
 and teachers commence their instructions, like : ‘T have, 
 I have not. I have the hat. I have not the hat. I have 
 the hat of my father. I have the hat of my mother. I 
 have the hat of the good aunt of the wicked undertaker,’* 
 and so on through the whole relationship; I hold that 
 instead of beginning with these simple phrases which no 
 
24 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 one can ever put to practical use, we ought to commence 
 with complex, long, flowing, connected, rational sentences, 
 such as we are in the habit of employing in practical life. 
 Instead of teaching phrases whose constructions are the 
 same as those of our own native tongue, we ought on the 
 contrary, to commence with idiomatic sentences, whose 
 formations are utterly foreign to our mode of speaking, 
 thereby dis-accustoming our minds from thinking in Eng- 
 lish, and becoming familiarized with the foreign ways 
 of expression and thought. 
 
 For this, after all, is the great difficulty; this is the 
 '^punctum saliens’’ of the whole problem. We must learn 
 
 TO THINK IN THE FOREIGN LANGUAGE ITSELF. 
 
 We must no longer think about our French or about 
 our German, Spanish or Italian, but in the language itself. 
 No one can speak a foreign tongue who does not think 
 in it 
 
 This is so old established a maxim that no one can 
 doubt it, but while unquestionably true, the difficulty of 
 thinking in a foreign language seems at first glance so 
 insurmountable that most of our teachers have hopelessly 
 given up the task, convinced that it is impossible. 
 
 Can it be accomplished ? 
 
 Is it -possible to learn to think in a foreign tongue 
 without residing in the country itself, where one, so to 
 say, lives in the very atmosphere of these sounds and 
 modes of expression? 
 
 Can this be effected here, in this land of ours? 
 
 Of course, when we reside abroad, it is easily under* 
 stood how we acquire the power of thinking in a foreign 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 25 
 
 language. There we are surrounded by Frenchmen, 
 Spaniards, Italians or Germans ; we hear nothing but the 
 foreign vernacular, and being continually obliged to 
 make use of these strange sounds, we imperceptibly get 
 so accustomed to them that finally they come just as read- 
 ily and unconsciously to our tongues as the sounds of 
 our own native language. The words become, in fact, 
 so fully our mental and bodily property, that, as the 
 French say, “we possess them” and think in them. 
 
 But how can we hope to effect the same results here, 
 in the United States, where we cannot always associate 
 with foreigners, where we speak nothing but English 
 and think in English solely, where other cares, duties 
 and avocations continually crowd in upon us, and where 
 the little French, German, Spanish or Italian learned to- 
 day is almost wiped out and forgotten by to-morrow? 
 How can we with all these drawbacks and disadvantages 
 learn to think in a foreign tongue? 
 
 Various replies have been given to this question, and 
 the most plausible answer has been furnished by the 
 teachers of the objective, or so-called “natural” methods. 
 
 “Learn a foreign language as a child learns his own,” 
 say these gentlemen. 
 
 * But reasonable as this proposition sounds, it is never- 
 theless based on a grave and erroneous misconception. 
 
 “Learn a foreign language as a child learns his own.^* 
 How does a child learn it? 
 
 I shall have occasion to speak of this interesting psy- 
 chological process later; just now I desire to call your 
 attention only to the following facts : 
 
 Every parent can tell you that long before a child can 
 talk he understands what is said to him. The sounds 
 he has so frequently heard sugg-est ideas to him and he 
 
26 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 naturally associates them with certain objects, facts, ac- 
 tions, commands, etc. During two long yeafs he hears 
 and listens before he constructs a single phrase; he is in 
 possession of both the sound and its corresponding idea 
 long before attempting to produce it himself. 
 
 Is that the student's case when trying to master a for- 
 eign tongue? Do the strange sounds we hear in French, 
 German, Spanish or Italian suggest any meaning to us? 
 Do we associate them with certain facts, objects or ideas? 
 Certainly not! 
 
 ‘"But," reply these gentlemen in answer to this, ''you 
 do not understand our system perfectly. Ours is the ob- 
 ject method. We point to certain objects surrounding 
 us, and by uttering little phrases referring to them and 
 repeating them hundreds of times in the foreign lan- 
 guage, the pupils are enabled not only to understand what 
 we say, but to think at once in French, as we speak noth- 
 ing but French during our lessons." 
 
 But how can you think in French if you don't know 
 any French? 
 
 I grant that you may understand the meaning of cer- 
 tain phrases by pointing to certain objects. But how 
 about things which you cannot point out? How about 
 abstract thoughts? How about past or future actions? 
 How about idiomatic expressions? How can they be 
 explained or mastered when you confine yourself to a 
 language which the student does not understand, instead 
 of giving him a clear explanation in his own tongue? 
 Why substitute the imperfect language of gestures and 
 signs when a perfect medium of communication between 
 teacher and student exists? 
 
 ‘'Every one, at times," says Prof. Maltus Ouestell 
 Holyoake in a very able article on "A Cosmopolitan 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 27 
 
 Language/^ ‘'has doubtless had recourse to the univer- 
 sal languag-e of gesticulation, signs and sounds. In every 
 clime and age there has always been an international 
 language of this kind. There is an amusing anecdote 
 which illustrates this. An English traveler, being desir- 
 ous of knowing the nature of the meat on his plate at 
 some remote Chinese entertainment, turned to the native 
 waiter behind him and, pointing to the dish with an in- 
 quiring look, said: 'Quack? quack?’ The Chinaman at 
 once replied with a natural imitation of the canine : 'Bow ! 
 wow!’ Thus the two parties were mutually intelligible, 
 though they did not understand one word of each other’s 
 language.” 
 
 Gesticulations and signs in a case of this kind are not 
 only appropriate, but necessary. As a method of teaching 
 a language, however, they are but an awkward and un- 
 satisfactory substitute. 
 
 Consider, moreover, how many years must of neces- 
 sity elapse before a child can attain practical mastery of 
 his mother tongue. 
 
 Can any adult devote the same length of time to the 
 study of foreign languages? 
 
 Is it not also true that the adult’s state of mind is 
 vitally different from that of a child ? 
 
 No adult can study as a child learns. The child in 
 mastering his own tongue reaches not only the power of 
 expression, but the ability of thinking. From the per- 
 ception of external facts he proceeds to mental concep- 
 tions. Each new word is a new discovery to him; each 
 sound reveals to him a new world. Language is the 
 basis of his whole mental development, it underlies the 
 acquisition of all knowledge. 
 
 The adult, on the other hand, has passed all these 
 
28 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 preliminary stages; he has attained all this. His intel- 
 lect has been developed and trained. His mind is no 
 longer a ‘‘tabula rasa/’ and his memory is not nearly 
 so fresh and retentive as that of an untutored infant. 
 He can already express his thoughts in one language, 
 and in studying other tongues he aims solely at the 
 acquisition of 
 
 A NEW VEHICLE OF SOUNDS 
 
 which shall enable him to convey the same thoughts 
 which he is in the habit of uttering to his own country 
 people, to natives of other climes and nationalities. 
 
 Herein lies the vital difference between the so-called 
 natural methods (of which Gouin, Henness and Sauveur 
 are the main representatives) and my own. 
 
 Their views and arguments — ingenious though they 
 may be — are based, as I think I have shown, on a grave 
 misconception. We cannot learn foreign tongues as a 
 child learns his own, but must acquire them as foreigners 
 master our language when they come to the United 
 States. 
 
 For, when we learn a foreign language, we know one 
 tongue already, our own native language. Whether we 
 are seven, seventeen, or seventy years old, is immaterial. 
 The fact remains the same; we speak and can use one 
 language. All we want, therefore, is the mastery of an 
 additional tongue, a new medium of sounds for express- 
 ing our thoughts. 
 
 The distinction is obvious, and the difference between 
 the two methods vital. 
 
 But all this is no answer to our previous question: 
 HOW CAN WE LEARN TO THINK IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE? 
 
 Of recent years great progress has been made in the 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 29 
 
 study of psychological problems. Inspired and guided 
 by the teachings of Schopenhauer and Hartmann a new 
 school of thinkers has arisen, and a strikingly original 
 system of philosophy has been developed in Germany, 
 France and England. 
 
 The first results of these deeply interesting investiga- 
 tions were embodied in Hartmann’s ‘'Philosophic des 
 Unbewussten,” the Philosophy of the Unconscious, or, 
 as Professor Carpenter more aptly calls it, “The Philoso- 
 phy of Unconscious Cerebration.’’ The work is of stand- 
 ard value and has been translated into English. 
 
 Without entering into details, which in an essay of 
 this kind would oe out of place, I will only state the 
 central idea of the system. 
 
 It is this : No action can be done well which is not 
 done unconsciously. 
 
 Mark the principle! Any action which is to be done 
 well, must be done unconsciously, and not consciously. 
 
 This sounds like a paradox, but is nevertheless abso- 
 lutely true. 
 
 Take walking, one of out simplest actions, as an in- 
 stance. How is it accomplished? Consciously or un- 
 consciously? Are we conscious of the active exercise 
 of our nerves and muscles while we are walking? Do 
 we realize that our mind superintends the effort and that 
 our will-power through the nerves sets the various nec- 
 essary muscles in motion? Do we walk consciously or 
 unconsciously ? 
 
 How, on the other hand, does a child learn to walk? 
 In the most painful and self-conscious manner. For 
 months he watches and observes how his parents and' 
 brothers move around. His innate, imitative faculties 
 lead him to copy their actions He first learns to creep, 
 
30 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 in an awkward and self-conscions manner ; then he begins 
 to stand, and finally he toddles from chair to chair. He 
 now walks, badly as yet, because he does it consciously, 
 but by and by rapidly and well, because by repeated exer- 
 cises the play of the muscles has become second nature 
 to him. At last he can run. The whole circle has now 
 been accomplished. He stands; he walks; he runs. He 
 does it well, because he does it unconsciously. 
 
 How do we learn to read ? In the most laborious and 
 self-conscious manner. Months elapse before a child 
 knows his letters; years must pass before be can spelL 
 Finally he reads, badly at first, because he is still con- 
 scious of all his actions. At last he does it so well that 
 his eyes unconsciously glide over the pages. And then 
 what happens? Why, frequently we sit down with the 
 most interesting novel of the season. We read it rapidly, 
 excitedly. Suddenly our mind is taken up with some 
 other subject. A great care may be upon us; a new line 
 of thought, foreign to the matter we are reading about, 
 has somehow been suggested to us. Still we read on, 
 mechanically perusing page after page. Finally we stop ; 
 we look at our book; we turn back ten, twenty, thirty 
 pages, and exclaim in startled tones: ‘‘Bless me! Here 
 I have been reading for the last half hour without the 
 faintest idea as to what it is !” 
 
 Have we read consciously or unconsciously? 
 
 Nothing can be done well, unless we do it uncon- 
 sciously. We cannot even breathe naturally unless we 
 do so without being self-conscious of the act. 
 
 Do you doubt this? Ask any one who has been un- 
 fortunate enough to have his lungs examined by a phy- 
 sician. What is his experience? After pounding your 
 back and chest in various spots and listening to your 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 31 
 
 breathing, the medical expert finally places his stetho- 
 scope on your chest and says; '‘Now breathe just as 
 naturally as you can/' 
 
 Breathe as naturally as you can! The moment you 
 try to do so you become self-conscious and your breath- 
 ing grows at once unnatural and labored. 
 
 We cannot even look natural unless we are uncon- 
 scious of our outward appearance. 
 
 What renders the dressed-up maid so absurd and 
 ridiculous ? She is conscious of her fine clothes, and the 
 same girl who seemed pretty in her simple calico gown, 
 becomes a guy in her finery. Why? Because she is 
 self-conscious and consequently awkward. 
 
 Or let me give you another instance. 
 
 You go to a photographer to have your picture taken. 
 After placing you in a chair and posing you to his liking, 
 the artist puts that modern instrument of torture, the so- 
 called head-rest, behind your ears and cheerfully says: 
 ^'Now look here, right here, if you please. At this bird- 
 cage, pray. That's very nice! Now, just for one mo- 
 ment, please sit quiet. Steady now, and just look as nat- 
 á^ral as you can !" 
 
 Look just as natural as you can! The moment you 
 try to appear so you become self-conscious. Either a 
 most idiotic grin spreads over your countenance, or such 
 a woe-begone, melancholy expression settles down upon 
 your features, that your best friends cannot recognize 
 the picture when it gets home. You were self-conscious 
 and hence the consequences. 
 
 And yet, when you go back to the photographer and 
 complain to him, he will reply with calm superiority: 
 *‘Why, Madam, this is an exact likeness of you. That 
 
32 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 is just the way you looked. My machine is true and 
 cannot lie/’ 
 
 And it did not lie ; the picture is true. It is an abso- 
 lutely perfect likeness of the idiot you looked, when self- 
 conscious of your outward appearance. 
 
 Nothing can be done well, unless it is done uncon- 
 sciously. 
 
 This is especially noticeable in speaking. No one 
 realizes that any mental activity of thought is going on 
 in his brains while he is talking, and yet there is and 
 must be such action of the mind, although he is entirely 
 unconscious of it. 
 
 Now try a simple experiment. Watch yourself and 
 see if you can find out whether you are thinking while 
 you make some commonplace remarks, and you will soon 
 discover that you can neither think nor talk. You have 
 grown self-conscious, and neither the brain nor the tongue 
 can act when that is the case. 
 
 By constant use and application the words of our own 
 language become, as a matter of course, flesh and blood 
 to us. We think in them ; in fact, we cannot think with- 
 out them, and, while we talk, our mind — unconscious to 
 ourselves — thinks the very thoughts we utter. It guides 
 and superintends all our efforts and is in constant activ- 
 ity, though we are unconscious of it. 
 
 I have shown before how a child listens and hears 
 for two long years before attempting to construct a 
 single phrase. He is in possession of both the sound and 
 its corresponding meaning long before he ventures to 
 produce it himself. 
 
 Thus each infant passes his first two years; another 
 year must elapse before he can talk and converse. 
 
 How does he reach it? How does it happen that 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 33 
 
 bright and stupid children alike can prattle intelligently 
 when but three years old? Why is this a universal fact, 
 true without exception among civilized and uncivilized 
 nations alike, among the poor as well as the wealthy ? Can 
 this problem be solved, and if so, would not its solution 
 furnish us with the key to a rational and true method? 
 For Nature's teaching is true and must be true ; the uni- 
 versal results prove this. 
 
 What happens in this short space of time that changes 
 the lisping infant into an intelligently speaking being? 
 
 For years I tried in vain to fathom Nature’s secret. 
 I watched my children’s mental and bodily development, 
 but though I made many valuable observations I was 
 for a long time on a wrong track. I counted the words 
 they could utter and gathered a vocabulary instead of dis- 
 covering Nature’s method of teaching. 
 
 Suddenly the whole truth dawned upon me. 
 
 A carpenter was employed in my house mending a 
 damaged ceiling which a fire had destroyed. My young- 
 est boy was eagerly watching him. Every slight act, the 
 use of every instrument, had to be explained to him. 
 
 ‘‘What has he in his hand, papa ?” the little one would 
 ask. “That is a saw, my boy.” “What does he do with 
 it?” “He saws the beams to their proper length.” 
 
 While the man was busy sawing the boy watched and 
 watched, never uttering a word. 
 
 The man raised the beam and put it in its proper 
 spot, using the hammer and driving in the nails. 
 
 “And what is he doing now ?” “He drives in the nails 
 with his hammer, and the nails keep the beam in its 
 proper place.” And again the boy watched and stayed 
 there and asked his questions and listened to my explana^ 
 tions for over two hours. 
 
S4 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 What happened then? For more than an hour the 
 little fellow was quiet. He evidently was thinking of 
 all he had seen. Then he began to play. He got a little 
 hammer, some nails, a ruler, and some wood. He played 
 carpenter and he played aloud. 
 
 ‘T am the carpenter,’’ he began. ‘'Where is my saw?’^ 
 “Here is my saw,” and he grasped the ruler. “Now I 
 must saw this beam,” and he made believe that he was 
 sawing with the ruler. 
 
 “Now I must put the beam in its place. Here is my 
 hammer, and here are the nails. Now I must drive them 
 in and keep the beam in its proper place.” 
 
 And he suited his action to the words and went on 
 playing and chattering. And day after day, until some 
 new occurrence attracted his attention, he would play 
 carpenter, always proceeding in exactly the same man- 
 ner as the real carpenter had done, and always using 
 the same or nearly the same expressions he had heard. 
 
 This simple observation showed me Nature’s whole 
 process. 
 
 The child observes the various actions of his elders. 
 
 From perception of external facts he proceeds after a 
 sort of “mental incubation” to an imitation of all he 
 has seen and heard. He repeats the acts and corre- 
 sponding sentences over and over during his childish 
 play, and in one year he has learned to talk. He has 
 learned to express in living sounds all his perceptions of 
 external facts and his various mental conceptions cxf 
 them. 
 
 He has acquired a language. 
 
 He knows nothing about grammar, and yet the child 
 of cultured parents uses correct expressions. He has 
 never seen a printed word, nevertheless his pronuncia- 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 ÓÓ- 
 
 tion is perfect. He has never read a single book, but 
 his speech is fluent and idiomatic. By Nature^s method 
 he has accomplished what no college graduate attains: 
 he has gained colloquial mastery of a tongue. 
 
 How has he reached it ? How has he learned his lan- 
 guage ? What is the meaning of this phrase, ‘‘to lean? 
 a language’’? 
 
 ^ It means to translate our own individuality into com- 
 jprehensible sounds. It does not mean to study gram- 
 matical peculiarities. It is not to be attained by the 
 [ Study and translation of the classic works of literature. 
 It is vain to attempt it by any school system. It must 
 be accomplished by a sort of mental reconstruction and 
 visualization — if such word is permissible — of our whole 
 ¡ outer and inner life. We must live over again the vari- 
 ous incidents and sentiments of our life and must learn 
 jto express them in a foreign tongue. Life’s various 
 I scenes have to be represented anew in strange sounds 
 which constantly repeated will soon become second 
 nature to us. “Repetitio est mater studiorum.” Again 
 and again we have to hear and repeat these sounds; 
 
 I again and again we must apply them until, at last, they 
 become just as familiar to us as the sounds of our native 
 tongue. 
 
 ¡ There will then no longer be any talk of translation 
 from one language into the other. The words will have 
 become so thoroughly impressed upon the nerves of our 
 memory that they come just as easily, readily, and un-* 
 consciously to our lips as the sounds of our mother 
 tongue. 
 
 Remember that we possess but one intelligence, and 
 our thoughts must ever be the same whether we express, 
 them in English, Spanish, French, German or Italian. 
 
36 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Language appeals, therefore — at first at least — solely 
 to the ear, tongue and memory, but though our intellect 
 superintends and guides the whole initiatory process, it 
 does not and cannot come into real action until the for- 
 eign sounds come just as unconsciously to our tongue as 
 the sounds of our native language. 
 
 The eloquence of a Gladstone, the brilliancy of a 
 Blaine, the depth of a Pasteur, the poetic fancy of a 
 Tennyson, the learning of a Virchow, would all be use- 
 less and of no avail among a nation whose language 
 they have not mastered. A child or a waiter speaking 
 the tongue would have the advantage of the greatest 
 intellect unversed in that language. 
 
 Remember also that the ear is the natural organ of 
 language. To substitute for it the eye — ^as is done in 
 all schools — is to commit a blunder so vital that the 
 greatest philologist is unable to accomplish in ten years 
 what a humble, illiterate child attains in six months. To 
 learn from a dumb book leaves the student just as 
 speechless as the source from whence his knowledge 
 proceeds. If you want to learn to swim, plunge in the 
 water and strike out boldly. If you desire to learn to 
 speak, listen to foreign speech and imitate what you have 
 heard until by habit it becomes second nature to you. 
 
 This is the method of Nature, and this is the method I 
 teach. 
 
 Since. 1873 I have instructed thousands of adult stu- 
 dents in this manner. The results have invariably been 
 satisfactory to pupils as well as to myself. Numerous 
 other teachers who have used my method have had the 
 same experience. I therefore liave no doubt as to the 
 soundness of my system. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 37 
 
 All my sentences are practical phrases, based on the 
 actual occurrences of practical every day life. 
 
 Other authors, like Frangois Gouin, whom I consider 
 the greatest teacher of the so-called '‘Natural Method,’* 
 make the same claim. I leave the student to judge whose 
 system is more practical, his or mine. 
 
 Here is Gouin’s first lesson : 
 
 THE WELL. 
 
 THE MAID GOES TO DRAW WATER AT THE WEIX. 
 
 The maid takes the bucket, takes 
 
 The maid goes out of the house, goes out 
 
 The maid bends her steps towards the well, bends her steps 
 The maid draws near to the well, draws near 
 
 The maid gets to the well, gets to 
 
 The maid stops at the well, stops at 
 
 and sets down the bucket on the brink of the well, sets down 
 The maid leans over the well, leans 
 
 She stretches out her arm, stretches out 
 
 She catches hold of the chain, catches hold 
 
 DRAWS 
 OPENS 
 PLACES 
 CLOSES 
 PUTS 
 PUSHES 
 
 She draws this chain toward her, 
 
 She opens the hook, 
 places the handle of the bucket in 
 the hook, and closes this hook. 
 
 She puts one hand to the crank, 
 and with the other pushes the bucket into the mouth 
 of the well. 
 
 The bucket swings to and fro over the depths, the swings 
 chain rattles, rattles 
 
 and makes the depths resound, makes resouni 
 
 It would be unfair to judge a whole system by one les* 
 son. I shall therefore quote Gouin’s fourteenth chapter: 
 
 THE STOVE. 
 
 THE girl chops SOME WOOD. 
 
 The girl goes and seeks a piece of wood, goes and seeks 
 
 She takes a hatchet, takes 
 
38 
 
 The Rosenthal Method» 
 
 She draws near to the block. 
 
 She places the wood on the block. 
 
 She raises the hatchet, 
 
 She brings down the hatchet, 
 
 The blade strikes against the wood. 
 
 The blade penetrates the wood, 
 
 The blade cleaves the wood, 
 
 The pieces fall right and left. 
 
 The girl picks up one of the pieces, 
 places it upon the block, 
 raises her hatchet, 
 brings down her hatchet, 
 and chops the piece of wood. 
 
 She chops another piece, and then another. 
 She chops up all the wood. 
 
 She puts down her hatchet, 
 gathers up the pieces into her apron, 
 takes one or two logs and some shavings, 
 and carries them to the stove. 
 
 DRAWS NEAR 
 PLACES 
 RAISES 
 
 BRINGS DOWN i 
 STRIKES 
 PENETRATES 
 CLEAVES 
 FALL 
 PICKS UP 
 PLACES 
 RAISES 
 BRINGS DOWN 
 CHOPS 
 CHOPS 
 CHOPS 
 PUTS DOWN 
 GATHERS UP 
 TAKES 
 CARRIES 
 
 Without pronouncing an opinion upon Mn Gouin’s 
 method, I simply desire to draw the reader's attention 
 to it, leaving a comparison between the two systems to 
 him. It will be seen from the following pages that my 
 method does not begin with the pump, or well, or wood- 
 shed, or stove, but with such events of every day life 
 as concern and interest the adult student. After a fev/ 
 necessary and merely preliminary exercises we com- 
 mence with phrases which refer to the speaking and 
 understanding of a language, expressions which are of 
 absolute necessity in our intercourse with foreigners. I 
 shall quote but a few of them from the first part : 
 
 I speak French. I do not speak it. I speak it but 
 brokenly. Are you speaking to me? Do you understand 
 me? Don’t you understand me when I speak German 
 to you? I understand yon when you speak slowly and 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 39 
 
 distinctly, but cannot follow you when you speak rapidly, 
 etc., etc. 
 
 We continue our studies by entering a store to make 
 some purchases. The next lesson transfers us to the 
 railway; we take tickets, check the baggage, arrive at 
 the station, take a cab and drive to the hotel, we enter 
 it, select rooms, give some necessary orders to the waiter, 
 sit down to' our meal and finally retire. 
 
 Surely these are actual scenes of practical every day 
 life; these are occurrences with wihich any adult is 
 familiar. 
 
 After these lessons have been thoroughly mastered, 
 we proceed to conversational exercises. English is now 
 discarded and the foreign tongue alone is used. 
 
 No new words or constructions are introduced. 
 Every sentence is based on the previous exercises. 
 Each phrase, therefore, presents facts and conceptions 
 just as clearly to the students as the English equivalents, 
 and translation becomes unnecessary. Our own life is 
 thus lived over again in the sounds of the foreign lan- 
 guage. Our individuality is reconstructed in French, 
 German, Spanish or Italian. 
 
 In this way the foreign language becomes in reality 
 
 tongue’’ to the learner. Its study is now no longer 
 a laborious translation, dependent on a clumsy calcula- 
 tion which of the numerous grammatical rules is to be 
 used in a given case. The words cease to be meaning-* 
 less, printed, dumb signs, and are at once associated 
 with actual, living facts. The student now no longer 
 hesitates and weighs, but expresses his own ideas just as 
 readily in the foreign tongue as his own. He thinks 
 and lives in French, German, Spanish or Italian. The 
 
40 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 language has become flesh and blood to him. He '^pos- 
 sesses it/’ as the French say, it is his own. 
 
 In another chapter some useful directions for private 
 Study are given. They are based on practical experi- 
 ence a^id ought to be followed by teachers and students. 
 
 RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 41 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR PRIVATE STUDY. 
 
 The ear is the natural organ, the first organ, the most 
 immediate organ of language. 
 
 The ear, therefore, must be addressed first and princi- 
 pally. The student must have the accent and intonation 
 of a phrase in his ear, before the tongue is able to re- 
 produce it. 
 
 The spoken word must precede the word as spelled or 
 written. The foreign sounds must be heard before the 
 pupil can pronounce them. 
 
 Pronunciation marks are of limited value. They refer 
 solely to the eye. 
 
 The ear, as stated above, is the natural organ of sound, 
 and it is the ear, therefore, which must familiarize itself 
 with the foreign intonation and pronunciation before the 
 tongue can imitate them. 
 
 In fact, complete mastery of a foreign tongue can be 
 attained only by training the eye, ear, tongue and mem- 
 ory at one and the same time : the ear by giving the sound 
 and intonation of every word and phrase ; the eye by see- 
 ing the spelling; the tongue by imitating and uttering ihe 
 words heard, and the memory by such continuous repeti- 
 tion of the foreign sounds that they will become second 
 nature to the student, so that he no longer thinks about 
 them, but in them. 
 
 This great result, so long aimed at has now been 
 reached, and The International College of Languages is 
 now, by its Pronouncing Records and Talking Machine, 
 in a position to place the living voice of the most cultured 
 native teachers at any pupil’s command, without losing 
 one atom of their pure accents and clear enunciation. 
 
 The enormous advantages of this new method of teach- 
 ing are so self-evident that we only state facts in saying 
 
42 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 that every one can henceforth learn to actually speak and 
 understand foreign languages, and that the oldest and 
 dullest students can succeed just as well as talented and 
 youthful people. 
 
 Study has ceased to be laborious drudgery and weari- 
 some work, and has been changed to enjoyment and 
 pleasure ; and a ''royal road to learning,’' which heretofore 
 was considered an absolute impossibility, is now pre- 
 sented for the first time in the history of education, and 
 has become an actual fact. 
 
 There is an inestimable advantage in having a highly 
 educated French, German, Spanish or Italian professor 
 always at your service, or whenever it suits you to study. 
 By merely turning the lever of the machine you summon 
 this marvelous educational aid at any moment, and can 
 take your lessons at home at your convenience. 
 
 After the sentence has been pronounced several times 
 by The Teaching Records, the student must pronounce it 
 with the machine, word by word first and then the whole 
 phrase in connection. 
 
 The student should always practice aloud. The ear 
 and tongue must be exercised at the same time. While 
 practising the pronunciation the student, who has, of 
 course, read the English equivalent, knows the general 
 meaning of the phrase, and by the time that he can pro- 
 nounce the sentence smoothly and correctly, the words 
 will have become associated with the meaning. 
 
 This does away with literal translation. 
 
 The pupil must not attempt to memorize the main sen- 
 tence. By frequently hearing and pronouncing it 
 aloud, the words will unconsciously impress themselves 
 so indelibly upon his memory that in a few days they will 
 become flesh and blood to him and can never be for» 
 gotten. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 43 
 
 After the pronunciation of the main sentence has been 
 mastered the pupils will proceed in a similar manner with 
 the variations given in the exercises. 
 
 All study — whether private or in classes — must be car- 
 ried on aloud. 
 
 This rule is all-important and must never be neglected. 
 
 Study should never exceed fifteen to twenty minutes; 
 the mind must always be fresh for it. As soon as the 
 slightest fatigue shows itself the study must be inter- 
 rupted, whether the pupil knows his lesson or not. 
 
 After mastering the foreign sounds by pronouncing 
 them with the machine, take up the study of the books by 
 themselves, i. e., without the talking machine. 
 
 First read the foreign exercises aloud; then turn the 
 book over, look only at the English words and without 
 trying to translate, give the foreign equivalent as smooth- 
 ly and naturally as possible. 
 
 Never trust to the memory. If a word has escaped 
 you do not think about it, but prompt your memory by 
 reading the foreign sentence once more. 
 
 These short exercises should be repeated at least 
 three or four times a day. 
 
 In a few days the phrases will become second nature 
 to the learner. He will no longer think about them but 
 in them. He will begin to think in the foreign language 
 itself, and will now be able to form thousands of new 
 phrases by inserting a new noun here, a verb there, an 
 adverb in another place, and so on. 
 
 The stud}^ of grammar is carried on in connection with 
 each sentence. The foot-notes, which contain the gram- 
 matical peculiarities, must therefore be carefully studied. 
 
 A full grammatical outline is found in Part X of the 
 Rosenthal Method. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Alphabet 
 
 The Vowels 
 
 Diphthongs and Triphthongs 
 
 Consonants 
 
 Accent 
 
 Punctuation 
 
 Main Sentence 
 
 General Exercises 
 
 To Speak 
 
 Conjugations 
 
 To Understand 
 
 In a Store 
 
 Vocabulary 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 50 
 
 SI 
 
 56 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 62 
 
 68 
 
 80 
 
 86 
 
 94 
 
 98 
 
46 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 THE SPANISH ALPHABET. 
 
 A, 
 
 a. 
 
 á in ah. 
 
 N, 
 
 n. 
 
 ain'-a. 
 
 B, 
 
 b. 
 
 bá in bale. 
 
 Ñ, 
 
 ñ. 
 
 ain'-yey. 
 
 c, 
 
 c. 
 
 thá in thane. 
 
 0, 
 
 0. 
 
 Ó. 
 
 Ch, 
 
 ch. 
 
 cha in chase. 
 
 P, 
 
 P- 
 
 pa in pale. 
 
 D, 
 
 d. 
 
 da in dale. 
 
 Q, 
 
 q- 
 
 coo in cool. 
 
 E, 
 
 e. 
 
 a in ale. 
 
 R, 
 
 r. 
 
 a'-rey. 
 
 F, 
 
 f. 
 
 a'-fey. 
 
 Rr, 
 
 rr. 
 
 a'-rrey. 
 
 G, 
 
 g- 
 
 ha in hate. 
 
 s, 
 
 s. 
 
 a'-cey. 
 
 H, 
 
 h. 
 
 a'-tchey. 
 
 T, 
 
 t. 
 
 tá in take. 
 
 I, 
 
 i. 
 
 é in eve. 
 
 Ü, 
 
 u. 
 
 oa in ooze. 
 
 J, 
 
 j- 
 
 ho'-ta. 
 
 V, 
 
 V. 
 
 va in vale. 
 
 K, 
 
 k. 
 
 kah. 
 
 X, 
 
 X. 
 
 a'-keece. 
 
 L, 
 
 1. 
 
 a'-ley. 
 
 Y, 
 
 y- 
 
 e-gre'-a-ga. 
 
 LI, 
 
 11. 
 
 ail'-yey. 
 
 z, 
 
 z. 
 
 thá'-tá. 
 
 M, 
 
 m. 
 
 a'-mey. 
 
 
 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 47 
 
 THE VOWELS. 
 
 1. General Law: — In Castilian, the vowel sounds pre- 
 dominate over those of the consonants. They are pro- 
 nounced in a full and sonorous manner, while the con- 
 sonants are frequently smothered and even suppressed. 
 
 2. The vowels have but one quality of sound,'^which 
 they preserve uniformly. (Compare the observations 
 on e and o.) 
 
 3. The vowels are a, e, i (y), o and u. 
 
 1 4. They are pronounced as follows: 
 
 { A, a. 
 
 1 A, a is pronounced like the English open (Italian) a 
 in father; marked a. 
 
 Examples: más (más), more; andar (án-dárr'), to go; 
 hablar (á-blárr'), to speak; para (pa'-ra), for, in order to. 
 
 E, e. 
 
 E, e sounds like a in pale; marked á. 
 
 1 Examples: creo (krá'-o), I believe; es (as), is; semana 
 I (sá-má'-ná), week; veo (va'-o), I see; medico (má'-dé-kó), 
 I physician. 
 
 ^ Observation: Before a final n or r the Spanish e sounds 
 like e in there, marked é. 
 
 j Examples: comer (ko-mérr'), to eat; placer (plá-thérr'), 
 pleasure; poner (po-nérr'), to put; en (én), in. 
 
 , Final e, though retaining its quality of sound, is sounded 
 I short like y in vanity, marked f. 
 
 I Examples: triste (tres-ty), sorry. 
 
 I 
 
48 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 I, i (y) is sounded like e in eve; marked é. 
 
 Examples: minuto (m6-noo'-tó), minute; frío (fré'ó), 
 cold; sí (sé), yes; día (dé'-á), day; americano (á-ma-ré- 
 ká'-nó), American. 
 
 Y, y standing alone or final, is a vowel and is then a 
 mere substitute for the Spanish i, pronoimced é. (Com- 
 pare remarks on y as a consonant.) 
 
 O, o. 
 
 O, o is sounded like o in note; marked 5. 
 
 Examples: otro (o'-trO), other; veo (va'-ó), I see; yo 
 (yo), I; como (ko'-mO), I eat; libro (léb'-ró), book. 
 
 Observation: Before a final n or r, the Spanish o sounds 
 like o in gone, as error (airr-rorr'), error; nación (na- 
 the'^on'), nation. 
 
 Ü, u. 
 
 U, u is sounded like oo in room; marked óó. 
 
 Examples: uno (óó'-nó), one; ultimo (óbl'-té-m5), last; 
 lunes (lób'-nes), Monday; su (soo), his. 
 
 STRONG AND WEAK VOWELS. 
 
 The five vowels are divided into 
 
 the strong = a, o, u, and 
 the weak = e and i 
 
 with reference to the phonetic influence which they exert 
 on c, g, j and q. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 49 
 
 Influence of the Vowels on c, g, j and q. 
 
 The phonetic influence of the vowels on c, g, j and q is 
 as follows: 
 
 A. 
 
 I. C before a, o, u sounds like k: ca, co, cu = ká, ko, koo. 
 
 e, i “ “ th (in thin) : ce, ci = tha, 
 
 the. 
 
 a, o, u “ “ g (in go) : ga, go, gu = gá, 
 
 2. C 
 
 3. G 
 
 4. G 
 5- Gu 
 6. Qu 
 
 e, 1 
 
 e, 1 
 
 e, 1 
 
 go, goo. 
 
 “ “ a guttural ‘h: ge, gi = ‘ha, 
 
 ‘he. 
 
 “ “ g (in go): gue, gui = ga, 
 
 gé. 
 
 “ “ k: que, qui = ka, ke. 
 
 B. 
 
 When u has the diaeresis (ü), and whenever it is not 
 mute, it is pronounced kw or gw, as the case may be. 
 
 "We have, therefore, the following combinations: 
 
so 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 1. Like k: ca, co, cu = ká, ko, koo. 
 
 2. Like th: ce, ci == tha, the. 
 
 3. Like gh: ga, go, gu = ghá, gho, ghoo. 
 
 4. Like ‘h: ge, gi = ‘ha, ‘he. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 1. Like kw: cua, cue, cui, cuo = kwa, kwa, kwe, kwo. 
 
 2. Like gw: gua, giie, giii, guo = gwa, gwa, gwe, gwo. 
 
 3. Like ‘hw: jua, jue, jui, juo = ‘hwa, ‘hwa, ‘hwe, ‘hwo. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 These are vowels in juxtaposition, which are pronounced 
 in one wave of sound forming but a single syllable with the 
 preceding consonant or by themselves (when standing 
 alone). 
 
 They cannot be divided either in printing or prosody. 
 They preserve the alphabetic sound of each of the vowels 
 composing them, never passing over into new phonetic 
 combinations as in French or English. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 51 
 
 The complex sounds they produce are reckoned as one, 
 and the tonic accent, if it be on that syllable, is distributed 
 over these vowels, as if they constituted a single long 
 vowel. Hence, if one of the vowels i or u is accentuated, 
 no diphthong or triphthong can be formed with the other 
 vowels. 
 
 True diphthongs and triphthongs are: ai, (ay), au, 
 
 ei, (ey), eu, ia, ie, io, iu, oi, (oy), ou, ua, ue, ui, (uy), uo, 
 uai, (uay), uei, (uey). 
 
 Illustrations of their sounds will be found in the figured 
 pronunciation-marks. 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 B, b. 
 
 B and V have practically the same sound, though 
 the Castilians do not give to either of them the full 
 English sound. As a general rule it may be stated that 
 b before vowels, and especially in the middle of a word, 
 is sounded almost like the English v. 
 
 Examples: Abra (á'-brá), open; abogado (á-vó-gá'-dó), 
 lawyer; escribir (ás-kré-vér'), to write. 
 
 C, c. 
 
 C, c before the vowels a, o, u, and before consonants 
 has the sound of English k. 
 
 Examples: casa (ká'-sá), house; cosa (ko'-sá), thing; 
 creo (kra'-ó), I believe; clase (klá'-sy), class. 
 
 C, c before the vowels e and i sounds like th in thin, ' 
 It may be stated, however, that the great majority of Mexi- 
 cans, Cubans and South Americans pronounce it like s 
 in sound. 
 
52 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Examples: conocer (ko-nó-thérr'), to know; decir 
 (dá-ther'), to tell; décimo (dá'-thé-mó), the tenth. 
 
 cc are foimd together only before the vowels i and e 
 and are pronounced like kHh^ as: lección (lák-thé'^on'), 
 lesson; acción (ák-thé'^on'), action; acceso, access. 
 
 Ch, ch. 
 
 Ch, ch has the sound of our English ch in church. 
 
 Examples: mucho (moó'-chó), much; noche (nó'-ch^^), 
 night; chocolate (cho-ko-la'-tj?’), chocolate; chico (ché'-kó), 
 small. 
 
 D, d. 
 
 D, d has a peculiar sound which ought to be heard 
 in order to be imitated. It sounds similar to a soft, 
 smothered th in though. This is especially the case at 
 the end of words — ^where the foreigner can scarcely hear 
 it — and in the endings ado, edo, ido, odo and udo. 
 
 Examples: marido (má-ré'-do), husband; verdad (vér- 
 dád'), truth; usted (óós-tád'), you. 
 
 F, f. 
 
 F, f has the sound of English /. 
 
 G, g. 
 
 G, g has the soimd of English g in go: 
 
 1. before other consonants; 
 
 2. before the vowels a, o, u; 
 
 3. gu before the vowels e and i, viz., gue=ga 
 andgui=ghe. 
 
 Examples: cegando (sá-goón'-do), second; inglés (en- ; 
 glás'), English; lugar (lóó-gár'), place; gorra (gór'-rá), , 
 cap; guerra (gar'-rá), war; por consiguiente (pór-kón- j 
 sé-ghé''^án'-t}^), in consequence. | 
 
The Spanish Language. 53 
 
 Gua, guo, güe, güi. 
 
 When combinations gua and guo are pronounced 
 .gwa and gwo. 
 
 When giie and güi occur, i. e., when the diaeresis has 
 been placed over the u, they are pronounced gwa and 
 gwe. 
 
 Examples: lengua (lan'-gwa), language; agua (á'-gwá), 
 water; lingüista (len-gues'-tá), linguist; antigüedad (án- 
 té-gwa-dád'), antiquity. 
 
 G-, g {guttural). 
 
 G, g before the vowels e and i has a peculiar guttm*al 
 sound, for which we have no exact equivalent in English. 
 It sounds like a strongly aspirated h and ought to be 
 learned from a native. It resembles the guttural sound in 
 ¡Arabic of hhá. (Compare the remarks on J, j.) 
 
 Examples: general (há-ná-rál'), general; género (ha'« 
 na-ro), gender; genitivo (ha-ne-te'-vo), genitive; legis« 
 latura (lá-hes-lá-tóo'-rá), legislature. 
 
 H, h. 
 
 H, h is never pronounced and remains absolutely 
 silent. (It is inappreciably aspirated before ue.) 
 
 J> j* 
 
 J, j has the same peculiar guttural sound before all 
 vowels which g has only before e and i. Many modem 
 writers have discarded the use of g before e and i and usej 
 in its stead. 
 
 Examples: hijo (e'-ho), son; hija (é'-há), daughter; 
 mujer (móo-hérr'), woman; joven (ho'-vén), young; viejo 
 (ve"^a'-hó), old; jurar (hób-rárr'), to swear. 
 
54 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 L, 1. 
 
 L, 1 has the sound of the English 1. 
 
 LI, 11. 
 
 LI, 11 has about the same sound of ll in William, bil- 
 liards, etc. 
 
 Examples: bolsillo (ból-sel'-yó), pocket; llamo (lyá'- 
 mo), I call; calle (kál'-yé), street; llevo (lya'-vo), I take. 
 
 M, m. 
 
 M, m has the sound of the English m. 
 
 N, n. 
 
 N, n has the sound of the English n. 
 
 Ñ, ñ. 
 
 Ñ, ñ has the sound of n^y as in ‘‘slu yew’’ or m in 
 onion, and is always written with a tilde (J), 
 
 Examples: mañana (mán-yá'-ná), to-morrow; niña 
 (nén'-yá), girl; niño (nen'-yo), boy; enseno (án-san'-yo), 
 I teach. 
 
 P, p. 
 
 P, p sounds like English p. 
 
 Q, q- 
 
 Q, q is always followed by u and sounds like the 
 English k. 
 
 Examples: que (ká), which, what; pequeño (pa-kan'- 
 yo), small; por qué (porr-ka'), why? 
 
 R, r. 
 
 R, r has a sharper and more rolling sound than in 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 55 
 
 English, especially when occurring immediately before 
 or after a consonant. At the beginning of words, and at 
 the end of them it has a very sharp, prolonged, rolling 
 sound, and whenever the r is doubled, it should be pro- 
 nounced very strongly. 
 
 Examples: rico (ré'-kó), rich; quiero (ke^a'-ró), I 
 will; hablar (áb-lárr'), to speak; error (ar-rorr'), error. 
 
 S) s. 
 
 S, s has the sharp sound of s in sound, some, seen, etc. 
 (Never like s in transition). 
 
 Examples: mesa (ma'-sa), table; sus (soos), his; ne- 
 cesario (ná-tha-sá'-ré^o), necessary; sombrero (sOm- 
 bra'-ro), hat. 
 
 T, t. 
 
 T, t sounds as in English. 
 
 V, V. 
 
 V, V has the sound of the English v, (Compare re- 
 marks on B, b). 
 
 X, X. 
 
 X, X is pronounced like the English x, i, e., ks, as: 
 Exacto (ak-sak'-to), exact. 
 
 Y, y. 
 
 Y, y at the beginning of a word or syllable (standing 
 between vowels) is considered a consonant, with the 
 phonetic value of y in year, enunciated with emphasis. 
 (Compare remarks on y under vowels). 
 
 Examples: yo (yo), I; ya (ya), now; leyes (la'-yés), 
 laws; reyes (rá'-yés), kings. 
 
56 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 2/j z* 
 
 Z, z is pronounced like the English th in thin. This 
 letter only precedes the vowels a, o and u. Mexicans 
 and South-Americans generally pronounce it like a sharp 
 hissing s. (Compare remarks on c before e and i). 
 
 Examples: mozo (mó'-thó), waiter; almorzar (ál-morr- 
 thárr'), to breakfast; taza (tá'-thá), cup; zapatero (thá- 
 pá-ta'-ró), shoemaker. 
 
 INTONATION AND ACCENT. 
 
 Every language has its own peculiar intonation. It 
 stands, so to say, in a certain key; is sung according to a 
 certain melody. 
 
 What color is to a picture, intonation is to a language. 
 
 The peculiarly sonorous inflection of Spanish voices 
 cannot be described; it must be heard in order to be 
 imitated. 
 
 As regards the 
 
 TONIC ACCENT 
 
 the following rules must be observed: — 
 
 I. Words ending in a vowel or a diphthong, which is 
 always considered as constituting a single syllable, are 
 regularly accentuated on the penultimate syllable, i. e., 
 the syllable preceding the final one. 
 
 All exceptions to this rule are invariably iparked by a 
 written accent. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 S7 
 
 Examples: Americano (á-má-ré-ká'-no), American; 
 
 I presidente (pra-se-dan'-t^), president; posada (po-sá'-dá), 
 
 ! inn; iglesia (é-glá'-sé^á), church. 
 
 2. Words ending in a consonant (not inflectional) 
 have the accent on the last syllable, unless otherwise 
 graphically indicated. (See exceptions.) 
 
 Examples: decir (dá-thérr'), to tell; lugar (lóó-gárr'), 
 place; español (as-pán-yól'), Spanish; señor (san-yórr'), 
 sir. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. The inflectional plural signs s and es do not affect 
 j the original accent of the singular, i. e., the accent remains 
 * where it is in the singular. 
 
 Examples: el niño (al nen'-yo), the child; los niños 
 I (los nén'-yós), the children; el sombrero (al sOm-bra'- 
 ro), the hat; los sombreros (los sóm-brá'-ros), the hats; 
 la mujer (la moo-har'), the woman; las mujeres (las 
 mób-há'rés), the women; la flor (la flor), the flower; las 
 flores (las fló'-rés), the flowers; el francés (al frán-thás'), 
 the Frenchman; los franceses (los frán-tha'-sés), the 
 Frenchmen. 
 
 2. In the conjugation of verbs the penultimate syllable 
 gets the accent, unless otherwise graphically indicated by 
 a written accent. 
 
 Examples: 
 
 hablo 
 
 (á'-bló). 
 
 I speak. 
 
 hablas 
 
 (á'-blás). 
 
 thou speakest. 
 
 habla 
 
 (á'-blá). 
 
 he speaks. 
 
 hablamos 
 
 (á-blá'-mos). 
 
 we speak. 
 
 habláis 
 
 (á-blá'-és). 
 
 you speak. 
 
 hablan 
 
 (á'-blán), 
 
 they speak. 
 
58 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 3. Proper names ending in ez accentuate the penulti- 
 mate syllable. 
 
 Examples: Pérez (pá'-réth), López (lo'-péth), Fernán- | 
 dez (far-nán'-déth), I 
 
 THE WRITTEN ACCENT. 
 
 1. In all words bearing acute accent (') the above 
 rules are superseded and the written accent serves as 
 sole guide of pronunciation. 
 
 The acute accent (') is the only one used in Spanish. 
 
 Examples: el décimo (al dá'-thé-mó), the tenth; el 
 último (al ool'-te-mo), the last; médico (má'-dé-kó), 
 physician. 
 
 2. The written accent is also used to distinguish hom- 
 onyms, i. e., words having the same sounds, but different 
 significations. 
 
 Examples: si (sé), if; si (sé), yes. 
 
 se (sa), one’s self; sé (sa), I know. 
 
 3. To distinguish certain pronouns, adverbs, etc., when 
 used in questions and exclamations. Thus: 
 
 donde (dón'-dy), where; dónde (don'-dy), where? 
 
 que (ka), which, that; qué (ká), what? 
 
 cuando (kwán'-do), when; cuándo (kwán'-do), when? 
 como (kó'-mo), as; cómo (ko'-mó), how? 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 
 
 I. A single consonant in the middle of a word goes 
 with the following syllable, as: casa (ká'-sá), house = 
 ca-sa; llamo (lya'-mo), I call = lla-mo; hijo (é'-ho), son 
 = hi-jo. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 59 
 
 2 . The letters ch, 11 and rr are considered single con- 
 sonants and can never be divided, as: Calle (kál'-yé), 
 street = ca-lle; caballo (ká-vál'-yo), horse = ca-ba-llo; 
 muchacha (móó-chá'-chá), girl = mu-cha-cha. 
 
 3. Two separable consonants in the middle of a word 
 are divided so that the first belongs to the previous and 
 the second to the following syllable, as: Gusto (góbs'-tó), 
 taste = gus-to; puerta (póo-ár'-ta), door = pu-er-ta. 
 
 4. Diphthongs or triphthongs can not be divided, as: 
 Bueno (bóó^á'-no), good = bue-no; gracioso (grá- 
 the^o'-so), graceful = gra-cio-so. 
 
 PUNCTUATION, 
 
 Punctuation in Spanish is the same as in English, 
 except in questions and exclamations, where the inverted 
 marks are placed at the beginning of phrases, in addition 
 to the regular signs at the end of such sentences, as: 
 
 ¿ Qué dice usted? (ka áé'-thf óós-tád'). What do you 
 say? 
 
 ¿ Qué desea usted? (ká da-sá'-á óós-tád'). What do 
 you want? 
 
 ¡ Cómo llueve! (kó-mó lyóó"^á'-vy). How it rains! 
 
6o 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 MAIN SENTENCE. 
 
 What do you want to do this forenoon? I should like 
 to leave by the first train for Mexico, but that is impossible ; 
 for I expect a friend from Chicago and must stay in Vera- 
 cruz till the steamer arrives. 
 
 LITERAL TRANSLATION. 
 
 What will you do this morning? (I) would leave 
 for Mexico by the first train, but not to me (it) is possible, 
 because (I) expect a friend from Chicago and must myself 
 be in Veracruz until may arrive the steamer. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 6 note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 6i 
 
 FRASE FUNDAMENTAL. 
 
 ¿Qué quiere usted hacer esta mañana? Quisiera 
 salir para Méjico por el primer tren, pero no me es 
 posible, porque espero a un amigo de Chicago y debo 
 estarme en Veracruz hasta que llegue el vapor. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 I Ka ks'~'a'-i^ óós-tad' á-thérr' as'-tá mán-yá'-ná? Ke- 
 se'~'a'-rá sá-lér' pá'-rá Ma'-he-k5 porr al pre-mér' tran, 
 pa'-ro n5 ma as p0-s6'-bl^, porr'-ka as-pa'-ro á óón á- 
 mS'-go da Chicago 6 da'-vó ás-tárr'-ma én Va'-rá-cróó'th 
 ás'-tá ka lya'-ghj^ al vá-porr'. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; oo room. 
 
Ó2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 What do you want to do this forenoon? 
 
 What 
 
 will you? (do you want to? do you desire to? (Ques- 
 tions in English are asked with the auxiliary 
 verb to do. We say: What do you want to 
 do? The Spaniards say simply: What will you 
 do? We say: Do you go? The Spaniards say: 
 Go you?) 
 
 do (to do, to make) 
 
 this 
 
 morning (forenoon)? 
 
 VARIATIONS. 
 
 1. What do you want? (Literally: What will you)? 
 
 2. What do you want to do? (Literally: What will 
 
 you do)? 
 
 3. What do you want to do this morning? (Liter- 
 
 ally: What will you do this morning)? 
 
 4. What do you desire to do to-morrow? (Literally: 
 
 What will you do to-morrow (mañana^)? 
 
 ^ In questions qué (with the acute accent) means what? Que 
 (without the accent) means that or which, or who. 
 
 2 Usted is a contraction of vuestra merced (voo^as'trá mar-thad'), 
 your Honor, your Lordship. This form is always written in an 
 abbreviated manner, viz., V. (sometimes Vd.). It is always used 
 for you when one person is addressed, except in cases where famil- 
 iarity exists when tú (too), ihou^ is used. JJsted, however, is the 
 only form taught in this system. 
 
 The plural ustedes, written Vds., is employed when several 
 persons are addressed. This form is an abbreviation of 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 63 
 
 ¿Qué quiere usted hacer esta mañana? 
 
 ká óos-tád' á-thérr' as'-tá mán-yá'-ná. 
 
 Qué^ (ka) 
 
 quiere V.^ (ké"^á'-ry oós-tád') 
 
 hacer (á-thérr') 
 esta (ás'-tá) 
 mañana (mán-yá'-ná)? 
 
 VARIATIONS. 
 
 1. ¿ Qué quiere V.? (oós-tád'). 
 
 2. ¿ Qué quiere V. hacer? (oós-tád'). 
 
 3. ¿ Qué quiere V. hacer esta mañana? (oós-tád'). 
 
 4. ¿ Qué quiere V. hacer mañana^? (óós-tád'). 
 
 vuestras mercedes (voó'^as'-trás márr-thá'-das), your Lordships. 
 It is generally written V. V. 
 
 Naturally V. requires the verb in the third person singular, 
 and V. V., the third person plural. Compare the conjugation and 
 remarks on page 65. 
 
 3 Mañana means mornings when used as a noun ; la mañana, 
 the morning. When used as an adverb, mañana signifies to-morrow. 
 
 á far; a pale; S eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
^4 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 5. Will you do it? (Literally: It (loO will you do? 
 Or: Will you do it (hacerlo^) ? 
 
 6. Do you want to do it to-morrow? (Literally: It 
 will you do to-morrow? Or: Will you do it (hacerlo) 
 to-morrow) ? 
 
 7. Do you wish to do it to-day? (Literally: It will 
 you do to-day (hoy)? Or: Will you do it to-day 
 (hoy)? 
 
 I want. 
 
 you want.^ 
 he wants, 
 we want, 
 you want.2 
 they want. 
 
 iThe conjunctive personal pronouns me, him, her, it, us, you, 
 them are placed before the verb in Spanish, except in affirmative 
 imperative sentences, or if the verb stands in the infinitive or present 
 participle. 
 
 In the latter three cases the pronouns are placed after the verb 
 and merged into one word with it. 
 
 The pupil should commit these pronouns to memory:— 
 
 me, me (to me). 
 
 (te), (thee, to thee), 
 se, to you, or to him. 
 le, him (to him), 
 la, her 
 lo, it. 
 
 We say in English: Will you 
 
 nos, us (to us). 
 
 (os), (ye, to ye), 
 se, to you, or to them, 
 les, them (to them), 
 las, them (fern.), 
 los, them (mase.). 
 
 do it? In Spanish: It will you 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 65 
 
 5. ¿ Lo^ quiere V. hacer? (lo oos-tád'). ¿ Quiere V. 
 hacerlo?^ (óós-tad' á-thérr'-lo). 
 
 6. ¿Lo quiere V. hacer mañana? (óós-tad'). ¿ Quiere 
 V. hacerlo mañana? (óos-tád' á-thérr'-lo). 
 
 7. ¿Lo quiere V. hacer hoy? (óos-tád' ó"^é'). ¿ Quiere 
 V. hacerlo hoy? (óós-tád' o'^e'). 
 
 Yo quiero 
 V. quiere^ 
 él quiere 
 
 nosotros queremos 
 V. V. quieren^ 
 ellos quieren 
 
 do? ¿Lo quiere V. hacer? Or: Will you do it? ¿Quiere V. 
 hacerlo? (In the latter case we add lo directly to the infinitive 
 hacer and write the two forms in one word.) 
 
 For further rules see Page 72, and Part X. 
 
 2 In giving the conjugations the plan of Professor Cándido Rosi 
 has been followed. The pronouns tú, tJiou^ and vosotros, ye^ are 
 used only among relatives and intimate friends (also in scripture 
 and poetry). 
 
 Mr. Rosi's plan simplifies not only the conjugations, but pre- 
 vents the confusion which must necessarily arise in pupils’ minds 
 when told that you governs the third person in Spanish. 
 
 With the exception of usted and ustedes the pronouns are usually 
 omitted in the conjugations, unless required on account of ambiguity 
 or emphasis. In questions, however, they must always be used. 
 
 The personal pronouns yo, él, ella, nosotros, ellos and ellas 
 are given here for the purpose of making the pupil familiar with 
 them. 
 
 (yo ke^á'-ró). 
 
 (óos-tád' ke"^á'-rj^). 
 
 (ál ke'^á'-r}^). 
 (nó-so'-trós ká-rá'-mós) 
 (óos-tá'-dás ké'^á'-rén). 
 (ál'-yos ké"^á'-rén). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
66 
 
 T'he Rosenthal Method. 
 
 8. I do not want to do it this afternoon. (Literally^ 
 Nofi- (I) want^ to do it this (esta^) afternoon. 
 Or: Not it (I) want to do this afternoon). 
 
 9. Why do you not want to do it to-day? (Liter- 
 ally: Why (por qué^) not will you do it to-day? 
 Or: Why not it will you do to-day) ? 
 
 10. When do you want to do it? (Literally: When 
 (cuándo) will you do it? Or: When it will you 
 do)? 
 
 11. Can you do it this afternoon? (Literally: It can 
 you (puede V.) do this afternoon? Or: Can you 
 do it this afternoon)? 
 
 12. No, I can not do it this afternoon. (Literally: 
 No (no^), not (I) can (puedo) do it this after- 
 noon. Or: No, not it (I) can (puedo) do this after- 
 noon). I can. 
 
 you can. 
 he can. 
 we can. 
 you can. 
 they can. 
 
 13. Can you do it to-morrow? Yes, I can do it to- 
 morrow. (Literally: Can you do it (hacerlo) to- 
 morrow? Yes (si), (I) can do it to-morrow. Or: 
 It can you do to-morrow? Yes, it (I) can do 
 to-morrow). 
 
 ^ The negation no, not, must always be placed before the verb. 
 In English we use the auxiliary verb to do for negative statements. 
 We say: I do not want to do it. In Spanish we express this by: 
 Not I want to do it, no quiero hacerlo. We say: Don’t you speak 
 English? In Spanish: Not speak you English? ¿No habla V. 
 inglés ? 
 
 2 Instead of quiero the synonymous verb deseo (da-sa'-O), I want^ 
 1 wishf I desire^ is frequently used. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 67 
 
 8. No^ quiero^ hacerlo esta^ tarde, (no ke"^á'-ró 
 ás'-tá tárr'-dy). 
 
 No lo quiero hacer esta tarde. 
 
 9. I Por qué^ no quiere V. hacerlo hoy? (óos-tád'). 
 
 ¿ Por qué no lo quiere V. hacer hoy? 
 
 10. ¿ Cuándo quiere V. hacerlo? (kwán'-do óós-tád'). 
 
 I Cuándo lo quiere V. hacer? 
 
 11. ¿ Lo puede V. hacer esta tarde? (ló poó'^á'-djf 
 óos-tad'). 
 
 i Puede V. hacerlo esta tarde? 
 
 12. No;^ no puedo hacerlo esta tarde, (poó^á'-do). 
 
 No; no lo puedo hacer esta tarde. 
 
 Yo puedo 
 V. puede 
 él puede 
 
 nosotros podemos 
 V. V. pueden 
 ellos pueden 
 
 (yo póo^a'“do). 
 
 (óós-tad' póo"^a'-d^). 
 
 (al póó'^á'-dy). 
 (no-so'-tros pó-da'-mós). 
 (óos-tá'-dás póo'^á'-dyn). 
 (ál'-yós póo'^a'-dyn). 
 
 13. I Puede V. hacerlo mañana? Sí; puedo hacerlo 
 mañana. (póo"^a'-d^ óos-tád' — sé). 
 
 ¿ Lo puede V. hacer mañana? Sí; lo puedo hacer 
 mañana. 
 
 3 Tarde, afternoon, is feminine, consequently esta must be em- 
 ployed. The masculine form is este. Compare Part X. 
 
 4 See remarks on the use of the written accent in questions and 
 exclamations, page 58. Study also remarks on punctuation, page 
 59, which explain the use of the inverted interrogation marks at 
 the beginning of phrases. 
 
 ® No pieans no as well as not. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
68 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 To speak. 
 
 14. Do you speak Spanish? (Literally: Speak you 
 (habla V.) Spanish (español) ? 
 
 1 5. I speak it slightly. (Literally: It (I) speak (hablo) 
 a (un) little (poco). 
 
 16. Do you speak it well? (Literally: It speak you 
 well (bien) ? 
 
 17. No, sir, I do not speak it very well. (Literally: 
 No, sir (señor), not it (I) speak very (muy) well). 
 
 I speak, 
 you speak, 
 he speaks, 
 she speaks, 
 we speak, 
 you speak, 
 they speak (mase.) 
 they speak (fern.) 
 
 18. Can you express yourself in Spanish? (Literally: 
 
 Can you express yourself (expresarse) in (en) Span- 
 ish? Or: Can you give yourself (darse) to under- 
 
 stand (a entender) in Spanish) ? 
 
 1 Adjectives referring to nationality are written with small letters, 
 as: español, Spanish; francés, French; aleman, German. 
 
 2 Compare the remarks on verbs of the first conjugation, page 80. 
 
 ^ This phrase might be translated: Can you make yourself 
 
 understood in Spanish? 
 
 The two Spanish phrases given above mean exactly the same 
 thing. Synonymous expressions are frequently introduced in 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; ob room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 Hablar (á-blárr). 
 
 69 
 
 14. I Habla V. español?^ (áb'-lá óos-tád' ás-pán-yol'). 
 
 15. Lo hablo un poco, (lo áb' 4 o oon po'-ko). 
 
 16. ¿Lo habla V bien? (lo áb'-lá óos-tád' be'^án'). 
 
 17. No señor; no lo hablo muy bien, (nó sán-yorr', 
 no lo áb'-ló móo'-e bé'^án'). 
 
 yo hablí>2 
 V. habla 
 él habla 
 ella habla 
 nosotros hdhlamos 
 V. V. hsblan 
 ellos habla;^ 
 ellas hablan 
 
 (yo áb'-lo). 
 
 (óos-tád' áb'-lá). 
 
 (ál áb'-lá). 
 
 (ál'-yá áb'-lá) . 
 (nó-só'-trós áb-lá'-mós). 
 (óos-tá'-dás áb'-lán). 
 (ál'-yós áb'-lán). 
 
 (ál'-yás áb'-lán). 
 
 18. ¿ Puede V. expresarse en español? (áks-prá-sárr'- 
 sá). 
 
 ¿ Puede V. darse a entender^ en español? (dárr'- 
 sá á án-tán-dérr' án ás-pán-yól'). 
 
 order to accustom the student to a variety of diction. The most 
 common-place statement may be rendered in various ways, and it 
 has been my aim to give all the synonyms which are generally used. 
 
 The most polite way for: What do you want? is not: ¿Qué 
 quiere V. ? or: ¿ Qué desea V. ? A polite Spaniard would not use 
 these forms at all when addressing a lady or gentleman, but would 
 say: ¿Qué se le ofrece a V.? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
70 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 19. I speak it sufficiently to make myself understood. 
 (Literally: It (I) speak sufficiently (bastante) in 
 order to (para) give myself (darme) to under- 
 stand). 
 
 20. I can not express myself very well in Spanish, but 
 I speak it sufficiently to get along. (Literally: 
 Not (I) can express myself very well in Spanish, 
 but (pero) it (I) speak sufficiently in order to give 
 myself to understand). 
 
 21. Does this gentleman speak Spanish? (Literally: 
 Speaks this gentleman (este caballero) the (el) 
 Spanish) ? 
 
 22. Yes, he speaks it fluently. (Literally: Yes (si), 
 it (he) speaks with ease. 
 
 23. Is he a Spaniard? (Literally: Is he (es él) Span- 
 ish)? 
 
 24. Yes, sir, he is a Spaniard. (Literally: Yes, sir, 
 (he) is Spanish). 
 
 I am. 
 you are. 
 he is. 
 she is. 
 we are. 
 you are. 
 
 they are (mase.) 
 they are (fern.) 
 
 1 The personal pronoun must be used in questions. 
 
 2 We say in English: Are you a Spaniard? In Spanish this is 
 
 á far; a pale; 0 eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 71 
 
 19. Lo hablo bastante para darme a entender, (lo 
 áb'-ló bás-tán'-ty pá'-rá dárr'-ma á án-tan-dérr'). 
 
 20. No puedo expresarme muy bien en español, pero 
 lo hablo bastante para darme a entender or: para 
 darme a comprender, (kóm-pran-dérr'). 
 
 21. ¿Habla este caballero el español? (ás'-tj^ ká-vál- 
 ya'-ro) . 
 
 22. Sí, lo habla con facilidad. 
 
 23. ¿Es éh español (as ál ás-pán-yól'). 
 
 24. Sí señor; es español.^ 
 
 Yo soy 
 V. es 
 él es 
 ella es 
 
 nosotros somos 
 V. V. son 
 ellos son 
 ellas son 
 
 (sé san-yorr'). 
 
 (yo so^é). 
 
 (óós-tad' as). 
 
 (ál ás). 
 
 (ál'-yá ás). 
 (nó-só'-tros so'mós). 
 (óós-tá'-dás son), 
 (ál'-yos son). 
 
 (ál'-yás son). 
 
 expressed by: Are you Spanish? ¿ Es V. español? This gentleman 
 is a Frenchmany este señor es francés. 
 
 á far; á pale; S eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
72 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 25. And you, sir, are you an American or a Spaniard? 
 (Literally: And (y) you, sir, are you American 
 (americano) or (o) (Spanish)? 
 
 26. Why do you ask that? (Literally: Why me it® ask 
 you (pregunta V.) ? 
 
 27. I put this question, because you speak English so 
 well. (Literally: You (se^) it I ask, because (por- 
 que) speak you the English very weU). 
 
 1 Caballero means literally knight, but is used in the same way 
 as señor. 
 
 2 Porque (written without accent) means because; por qué, two 
 words and the latter with an accent, means why. 
 
 3 We have seen that the conjunctive pronouns are placed before 
 the verb. (Compare note page 64.) 
 
 When a verb governs two conjunctive pronouns, the dative 
 must precede the accusative (with the exception of the reflexive 
 pronoun se, which always stands first, and which is fully explained 
 in the next note). 
 
 As: Why do you ask me? (Literally: Why to me it ask you)? 
 — ¿ Por qué me lo pregunta V.? 
 
 Will you give it to me? (Literally: To me it will give you )? — 
 I Me lo dará V. ? 
 
 ^ The use of le and se — both meaning you in the dative and 
 accusative singular — presents great difficulty to foreigners. The 
 explanation will, of necessity, be somewhat long, but should, on 
 account of its importance, be studied with great care. 
 
 a. Usted is inflected like any noun, viz.: 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. usted, you. 
 Gen. de usted, of you. 
 Dat. a usted, to you. 
 Acc. (a) usted, you. 
 
 ustedes, you. 
 de ustedes, of you. 
 a ustedes, to you. 
 (a) ustedes, you. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 73 
 
 25. ¿Y V., caballero/ es V. americano o español? 
 (é óós-tád' ká-vál-ya'-ro as óós-tád' á-má-re-ká'-no 
 ó ás-pán-yol'). 
 
 26. ¿ Por qué^ me lo^ pregunta V.? (pOr-ká' ma lo prá- 
 goón'-tá óós-tad') . 
 
 27. Se lo^ pregunto, porque^ habla V. el inglés muy 
 bien, (sa lo pra-góon'-to p 5 r'-k^ áb'-lá óós-tád' 
 ál en-glás' móo'-é be"^án'). 
 
 h. In the accusative, which is the case for the direct object, an 
 a is placed before usted and ustedes. 
 
 The reason for this is that active verbs require a before the object, 
 when a person, as: I see this man ^ veo a este hombre. — Do you not 
 know this lady? — ¿ No conoce V. a esta señora ? — I ask you^ pregunto 
 a V . — I hear you, oigo a V. 
 
 c. For the dative and accusative of usted Spaniards very fre- 
 quently use le (dative and accusative, masculine) or la (accusative, 
 feminine) in the singular, and les (dative, masculine) and los, las 
 (accusative, masculine and feminine) in the plural. 
 
 This is often done to avoid repetition, but its use is almost uni- 
 versal. 
 
 Thus we say: 
 
 Oigo a V., mas no le veo. 
 Vengo a ver a V. y a decirle. 
 Le digo. 
 
 Les digo. 
 
 I hear you, hut I do not see you, 
 I came to see you and to tell you, 
 I tell you (singular). 
 
 I tell you (plural). 
 
 d. The Spaniards never say le lo, le la, etc., when two conjunc- 
 tive pronouns occur, but invariably change it for euphony’s sake 
 into se lo, se la, se los, se las, etc. 
 
 Thus in the above phrase: 
 
 Se lo pregunto, I ask it of you. 
 
 For full rules and tables see Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
74 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 28. I am a Spaniard, but my mother was an English- 
 
 woman, and I speak both Spanish and English 
 fluently. (Literally: I am Spanish, but (pero) 
 
 my mother (mi madre) was (era) English and I 
 speak easily both languages (ambos idiomas), the 
 English and the Spanish). 
 
 29. Is Spanish a difficult language? (Literally: Is 
 difficult (difícil) the language (el idioma) Span- 
 ish2)? 
 
 30. I was bom in Madrid and Spanish is my mother- 
 tongue. (Literally: (I) was bom (nací) in Madrid, 
 and the Spanish is my mother-tongue. 
 
 31. Is the Spanish pronunciation very difficult? (Lit- 
 erally: Is very difficult the pronunciation Span- 
 ish (la pronunciación española) ? 
 
 32. The Spanish pronunciation is not very difficult, on 
 the contrary, it is very easy. (Literally: The pro- 
 nunciation Spanish not is very difficult, on the con- 
 trary (al contrario) (it) is very easy (fácil). 
 
 1 Adjectives agree in gender and number with the noun they 
 qualify, as: el libro nuevo (mase, singular), the new hook; libros 
 nuevos (mase, plural), new hooks; una easa nueva (fern, singular), 
 a new house; casas nuevas (fern, plural), new houses. 
 
 The feminine of adjectives is generally formed by changing the 
 final o of the masculine form into a, as: bueno, buena, good; malo, 
 mala, had. 
 
 Adjectives referring to nationality and ending in a consonant, 
 add a for the feminine, as: inglés, inglesa, English; francés, francesa, 
 French; alemán, alemana, German; español, española, Spanish. 
 
 Adjectives not referring to nationality and ending in any other 
 letter remain unchanged in the feminine, as: 
 
 á far; a pale; é eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 75 
 
 28. Soy español, pero mi madre era inglesa^ y yo hablo 
 fácilmente ambos idiomas, el inglés y el español, 
 (pa'-ro me mád'-ry a'-rá én-glá'-sá ám'-bos). 
 
 29. ¿Es difícil el idioma españoP? (de-fé'-thel ál 
 é-dé"^ó'-má). 
 
 30. Nací en Madrid, y el español es mi lengua materna 
 (ná-thé' én mád-réd' me). 
 
 31. ¿Es muy difícil la pronunciación española? (la 
 pró-nóón-the'^á-thé'^on' as-pán-yo'-lá) . 
 
 32. La pronunciación española no es muy difícil; al 
 contrario, es muy fácil, (ál k 5 n-trá'-ré"^ó fá'- 
 thel). 
 
 un hombre cortés, a polite man. 
 
 una mujer cortés, a polite woman. 
 
 el trabajo es difícil, the work is difficult. 
 
 la cosa es difícil, the matter is difficult. 
 
 2 The adjective stands generally after the noun qualified, as: 
 una mujer hermosa, a beautiful woman (literally: a woman beauti- 
 ful); una pintura española, a Spanish picture; una madre amada, 
 a beloved mother. 
 
 There are, however, many cases where the adjectives are placed 
 before the nouns. No satisfactory rule can be given; it is almost 
 entirely a matter of style. 
 
 Adjectives denoting nationality y color and shape are placed after 
 the noun. 
 
 For full rules see Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
76 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 33. It is very difficult for me to pronounce Spanish 
 phrases correctly. (Literally: To me (it) is very 
 difficult to pronounce (pronunciar) correctly (corr- 
 ectamente) phrases Spanish (frases españolas^). 
 
 34. I think the Spanish pronunciation very difficult. 
 
 (Literally: (I) believe (creo) that (que) the pro- 
 
 nunciation Spanish is very difficult). 
 
 35. On the contrary, the English pronunciation is 
 much more difficult than ours. (Literally: On 
 the contrary, the pronunciation English (inglesa) 
 is much (mucho) more (más) difficult than the 
 ours (la nuestra). 
 
 36. English is my mother-tongue. (Literally: The 
 
 English is my mother-tongue). 
 
 1 The Spanish declension is very simple: 
 
 There are two articles: the definite el, the^ for the masculine, 
 la, they for the feminine form, and the indefinite un, a, an (mascu- 
 line), una, a, an (feminine). 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLES. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. el los 
 
 Gen. del de los 
 
 Dat. al a los 
 
 Acc. el los 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 la las, the. 
 
 de la de las, of the, or from the. 
 
 a la a las to the, or at the. 
 
 la las, the. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 una, a. 
 
 de una, of a, or from a. 
 a una, to, or at a. 
 una, a. 
 
 Nom. un. 
 Gen. de un. 
 Dat. a un. 
 Acc. un. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 77 
 
 33. Me es muy difícil pronunciar correctamente frases 
 españolas.^ (pro-nóon-the'^árr' korr-rák-tá-mán'-t;J^ 
 frá'-sas ' ás-pán-yo'-lás). 
 
 34. Creo que la pronunciación española es muy difícil, 
 (krá'-o ká). 
 
 35. Al contrario, la pronunciación inglesa es mucho 
 más difícil que la nuestra, (ál kón-trá'-re'^ó én- 
 gla'-sá as móó'-chó más dé-fe'-thel ká la nóo'^és'- 
 trá). 
 
 36. El inglés es mi^ lengua materna. 
 
 Spanish nouns have two genders^ — masctdine and feminine. 
 
 The gender of a noun may be determined partly by its significa- 
 tion, and partly by its ending. 
 
 Nouns ending in o are generally masculine, and those ending in 
 a feminine (except those which designate males). 
 
 Nouns ending in an unaccented vowel form their plural by adding 
 
 s, as: 
 
 el padre, the father. 
 
 la madre, the mother. 
 
 los padres, the fathers. 
 
 las madres, the mothers. 
 
 Nouns ending in a consonant or in an accented vowel (except e) 
 
 add es in the plural, as: 
 
 el general, the general. los generales, the generals. 
 
 la mujer, the woman. las mujeres, the women. 
 
 For full rules see Part X. 
 2 See note page 78. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
78 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 37. Were you born in New York? No, sir, I was 
 bom in Chicago. (Literally: Were bom (nació) 
 you in New York (Nueva York) ? No, sir, (I) was 
 bom (nací) in Chicago). 
 
 38. The Spanish pronunciation is much easier than 
 
 yours. We have definite mies for the pronun- 
 ciation. (Literally: The pronunciation Spanish 
 
 is much more easy than the of yours (la de ustedes). 
 We have (tenemos) rules fixed (reglas fijas) for 
 (para) the pronunciation). 
 
 affirmatively: 
 
 I have, 
 you have, 
 he has. 
 she has. 
 we have, 
 you have, 
 they have (mase.) 
 they have .(fern.) . 
 
 interrogatively: 
 
 Have I? 
 
 have you? 
 
 has he? 
 
 has she? 
 
 have we? 
 
 have you? 
 
 have they? (mase.). 
 
 have they? (fern.). 
 
 ^ The conjunctive possessive adjectives should be committed to 
 memory. They are: 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 my^ mi. mis. 
 
 {thy), (tu). (tus). 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; O note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 79 
 
 37. I Nació V. en Nueva York? No señor, nací en 
 Chicago, (ná-thé'^o' — ^nóoa-vá — ^ná-thé') . 
 
 38. La pronunciación española es mucho más fácil 
 que la de ustedes. Tenemos reglas ñjas para la 
 pronunciación, (ta-na'-mos rag'-lás fe'-hás pá'- 
 rá la pr 5 -nó^n-the"^á-thé"^ón'). 
 
 AFIRMATIVO (á-fer-má-te'vo) . 
 
 INTERRO CATIVO : (én-térr-r5-gá-té'-vo) . 
 
 ¿ Tengo yo? 
 
 I tiene V. ? 
 
 I tiene él? 
 
 I tiene ella? 
 
 I tenemos nosotros? 
 I tienen ustedes? 
 
 I tienen ellos? 
 
 ¿ tienen ellas? 
 
 Yo tengo 
 V. tiene 
 él tiene 
 ella tiene 
 nosotros tenemos 
 ustedes tienen 
 ellos tienen 
 ellas tienen 
 
 (yó tán'-go). 
 
 (óos-tad' te'^a'-njr). 
 
 (ál te^a'-n;^). 
 
 (al'-yá te'^a'-n;$^). 
 (nó-so'-tros tá-ná'-mós) 
 (óos-ta'-dás te"^a'-nén) 
 (al'-yós té^á'-nen). 
 (ál'-yás te'^a'-nén). 
 
 hiSy her^ its, your 
 our, 
 
 su. 
 
 nuestro, nuestra, 
 vuestro, vuestra, 
 su. 
 
 sus. 
 
 nuestros, nuestras, 
 vuestros, vuestras, 
 sus. 
 
 {your), 
 their, your, 
 
 For full rules see 
 
 Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
So 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 To Speak.i 
 
 affirmatively: 
 
 I speak, 
 you speak, 
 he speaks, 
 she speaks, 
 we speak, 
 you speak, 
 they speak (mase.), 
 they speak (fern.). 
 
 To 
 
 affirmatively: 
 
 I wish, 
 you wish, 
 he wishes, 
 she wishes, 
 we wish, 
 you wish, 
 they wish (mase.), 
 they wish (fern.). 
 
 interrogatively: 
 Do I speak? 
 do you speak? 
 does he speak? 
 does she speak? 
 do we speak? 
 do you speak? 
 do they speak (mase.) ? 
 do they speak (fern.) ? 
 
 I. 
 
 INTERROGATIVELY : 
 
 Do I wish? 
 do you wish? 
 does he wish? 
 does she wish? 
 do we wish? 
 do you wish? 
 do they wish (mase.) ? 
 do they wish (fern.) ? 
 
 ^ There are three conjugations in Spanish. 
 
 The verbs of the first conjugation end in ar in the infinitive, 
 as: hablar, to speak; desear, to wish; pronunciar, to pronounce; 
 llamar, to call. 
 
 The infinitive is the ground form of the verb on which its conju- 
 gation depends. Ar is called the ending. By striking off this ar we 
 find the root or stem of the verb. 
 
 Thus hahl is the stem of the verb hablar; dese the stem of desear; 
 pronuncia the stem of pronunciar; //am, the stem of llamar. 
 
 The stem remains unaltered in all regular verbs. 
 
 To the stem various terminations are added by which persons, 
 tenses and moods are distinguished, and which are common to all 
 regular verbs of the same conjugation. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; óó room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 8i 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Habl-ar.i 
 
 afirmativo: interrogativo : 
 
 Yo habl-í?. 
 
 ¿ Hablo yo? 
 
 V. habl-o. 
 
 ¿ hablo V.? 
 
 él habl-a. 
 
 ¿ hablo él? 
 
 ella habl-a. 
 
 ¿ hablo ella? 
 
 nosotros h.3b\-amos. 
 
 ¿ hablomo^ nosotros? 
 
 V. V. habl-a». 
 
 ¿hablan V. V.? 
 
 ellos habl-a;^. 
 
 ¿ hablo^ ellos? 
 
 ellas hahl-an. 
 
 ¿ hablan ellas? 
 
 Dese-ar.i 
 
 AFIRMATIVO 
 
 INTERROGATIVO 
 
 Yo dese- 0 . 
 
 ¿ Deseo yo? 
 
 V. dese-a. 
 
 ¿ desea V? 
 
 él dese-a. 
 
 ¿ deseo él? 
 
 ella dese-a. 
 
 ¿ deseo ella? 
 
 nosotros dese-amos 
 
 ¿ deseamos nosotros? 
 
 V. V. dese-aii. 
 
 ¿ deseo;^ V. V. ? 
 
 ellos dese-a/í. 
 
 ¿ deseo;^ ellos? 
 
 ellas dese-a;^. 
 
 ¿ deseos ellas? 
 
 For days of the week and months 
 
 of the year, see pages 236-237. 
 
 In the present tense of the first 
 
 conjugation the following ter- 
 
 minations are added: 
 
 
 yo O. 
 
 nosotros amos. 
 
 V. a. 
 
 V. V. an. 
 
 él a. 
 
 ellos an. 
 
 ella a. 
 
 ellas an. 
 
 The accompanying pronouns — with the exception of usted and 
 ustedes — are generally omitted. 
 
 In questions^ in cases of doubtful meaning and when specially 
 emphasized the pronouns must always be expressed as: ¿Pago yo 
 o paga él? Do I pay or he? El estudia y ella escribe, he studies 
 and she writes. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
82 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 
 SECOND CONJUGATION.! 
 
 To Sell.! 
 
 affirmatively: 
 I sell, 
 you sell, 
 he sells, 
 we sell, 
 you sell, 
 they sell. 
 
 interrogatively: 
 Do I sell? 
 do you sell? 
 does he sell? 
 do we sell? 
 do you sell? 
 do they sell? 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION.^ 
 To Receive.2 
 
 affirmatively: 
 I receive, 
 you receive, 
 he receives, 
 we receive, 
 you receive, 
 they receive. 
 
 INTERROGATIVELY 
 
 Do I receive? 
 do you receive? 
 does he receive? 
 do we receive? 
 do you receive? 
 do they receive? 
 
 1 Verbs of the second conjugation end in er in the infinitive. 
 
 It will be observed that the endings of the present tense of the 
 first conjugation preserve the a of the infinitive; in fact a is the 
 characteristic vowel of all verbs of the first conjugation. 
 
 In the second conjugation it is e. 
 
 2 Verbs of the third conjugation end in ir in the infinitive. 
 
 The endings of the present tense are the same as those of the 
 
 second conjugation, with the exception of the first person plural, 
 which ends in irnos. 
 
 There are, therefore, the following endings for the indicative of 
 the present tense in the three conjugations: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 83 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 
 SECOND CONJUGATION.! 
 
 Vend-er.! 
 
 afirmativo: 
 
 Yo vend“í7. 
 
 V. vend-e. 
 él vend-e. 
 
 nosotros Yená-emos, 
 V. V. vend-e;^. 
 ellos vend-ew. 
 
 interrogativo: 
 
 I Vendí? yo? 
 
 ¿ vende V. ? 
 
 ¿ vende él? 
 
 I vendemos nosotros? 
 ¿ venden V. V. ? 
 
 ¿ venden ellos? 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION.^ 
 Recib-ir.2 
 
 afirmativo: 
 
 Yo recib-e. 
 
 V. recib-e. 
 él recib-e. 
 
 nosotros reáb-imos. 
 V. V. redb-ew. 
 ellos recib-e;^. 
 
 interrogativo: 
 
 ¿ Recibe yo? 
 
 ¿ recibe V. ? 
 
 ¿ recibe él? 
 
 ¿ recibimos nosotros? 
 ¿ reciben V. V. ? 
 
 ¿ recibe;^ ellos? 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3 - 
 
 0. 
 
 0. 
 
 0. 
 
 a. 
 
 
 e. 
 
 amos. 
 
 e 
 
 emos. 
 
 e. 
 
 irnos. 
 
 an. 
 
 en. 
 
 en. 
 
 an. 
 
 en. 
 
 en. 
 
 By comparing this table carefully and conjugating the various 
 verbs occurring in our phrases, the pupils will soon master the 
 Spanish conjugations. 
 
 The irregular verbs will be taken up seriatim. 
 
 For full tables see Part X. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
84 
 
 T'he Rosenthal Method, 
 
 1. Will you please pronounce this word for me? (Liter- 
 ally: Have you the kindness (¿Tiene V. la bondad) 
 of ^ to pronounce me this word (esta palabra) ? 
 
 I do (make), 
 you do (make), 
 he does (makes), 
 we do (make), 
 you do (make), 
 they do (make). 
 
 2. Would you please pronounce it once more? (Liter- 
 ally: Me would you do (haria^) the favor of to return 
 (volver^) to (a) pronounce her^)7 
 
 3. How is this word pronoimced? (Literally: How 
 (cómo) itself (se^) pronotmces this word)? 
 
 4. I cannot pronounce this word. Would you be kind 
 enough to pronounce it once more ? (Literally : 
 Not can I pronounce this word. Woiild you be so 
 amiable of to return to pronounce her) ? 
 
 5. Do you know how this word is pronounced? (Liter- 
 ally: Know you (sabe V.®) how itself pronounces 
 this word)? 
 
 I know. we know, 
 
 you know. you know, 
 
 he knows. they know. 
 
 1 After such expressions as: you have the kindness to do 
 
 it?'^ where we could say in English: ''Will you have the kindness of 
 doing it” de must be used before the infinitive. 
 
 2 Hacer, to do^ to make, belongs to the irregular Verbs. The 
 indicative of the present tense is conjugated on the next page (the 
 first person singular alone being irregular). 
 
 3 Volver means literally, to return. The above phrase is, of 
 course, idiomatic. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 8S 
 
 I. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3 - 
 
 4 - 
 5 * 
 
 I Tiene V. la bondad de^ pronunciarme esta palabra? 
 (té-á-ná óos-tád' la bón'dád' da pro-noon-the^^árr' 
 
 — ^my ás'-ta pá-lá'-brá). 
 yo hago 
 V. hace 
 él hace 
 
 nosotros hacemos 
 V. V. hacen 
 ellos hacen 
 
 I Me haría^ V. el favor de 
 
 (á'-gó). 
 
 (á'-thy). 
 
 (á'-thy). 
 (á-tha'-mos). 
 (á'-thén). 
 
 (á'-thén). 
 volver^ a pronunciarla^? 
 
 (vól-vérr' á pro-noón-thé^árr' — la). 
 
 ¿ Cómo se^ pronuncia esta palabra? (kó'-mo sá pro- 
 nóon'-the'^á). 
 
 No puedo pronunciar esta palabra. ¿ Sería V. tan 
 amable de volver a pronunciarla? 
 
 ¿ Sabe V.® cómo se pronuncia esta palabra? (sá'-bj^). 
 Yo sé (sa). 
 
 V. sabe (sá'-b;$^). 
 
 él sabe (sá'-b^). 
 
 nosotros sabemos (sá-ba'-mós). 
 
 V. V. saben (sá'-bén). 
 
 ellos saben (sá'-bén). 
 
 ^ La must be used here, because it refers to palabra, which is 
 feminine. 
 
 5 Active verbs are often used passively with the pronoun se in 
 the third person singular or plural, as: 
 
 El idioma español se habla en The Spanish language is spoken 
 la América central. in Central America. 
 
 No se puede ver nada. Nothing can he seen. 
 
 ® Saber, to know^ is an irregular verb. The indicative of the 
 present tense is conjugated as above (the first person singular 
 alone being irregular). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; oo room. 
 
86 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 6. Yes, now I know how it is pronounced. (Liter- 
 ally: Yes, now ( = already, ya) (I) know (sé) how 
 itself (it) pronounces). 
 
 7. Do you understand Spanish? (Literally: Under- 
 stand you (comprende V.) the Spanish) ? 
 
 8. I imderstand it very slightly. (Literally: It (I) 
 understand very little). 
 
 9. Can you understand me when I speak Spanish? 
 (Literally: Me understand you when (I) speak in 
 Spanish) ? 
 
 10. I can understand you when you speak slowly and 
 distinctly. (Literally: You (le^) understand (I) 
 (to) you (a V^) when (you) speak slowly (des- 
 pacio) and distinctly (claro). 
 
 11. Do you not imderstand me when I speak rapidly? 
 (Literally: Not me understand you when (I) speak 
 quickly (aprisa, or pronto) ? 
 
 12. No, sir, I cannot understand you when you speak 
 so fast. (Literally: No, sir, not you (I) understand 
 when (you) speak so (tan) fast). 
 
 13. Will you please speak slowly and distinctly? I 
 am an Englishman and cannot understand you 
 when you speak so rapidly. (Literally: Will you 
 do me the favor of to speak slowly and distinctly? 
 (I) am English and not you (I) understand when 
 (you) speak so fast). 
 
 1 Le comprado a V., I understand you. The Spanish language 
 has many pleonastic expressions. Le, it must be remembered, 
 can mean either him or you. Consequently, in order to make it 
 clearly understood that you is meant and not him, a V. is added. 
 Wherever such a misunderstanding could not arise, a V. may be 
 left out. 
 
 There are therefore three ways to express the phrase: I under- 
 stand you. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 87 
 
 6. Si; ya sé como se pronuncia, (sé ya sa). 
 
 7. ¿ Comprende V. el español? (kOm-prán'-dy). 
 
 8. Lo comprendo muy poco, (móó'-é pó'-kó). 
 
 9. ¿ Me comprende V. cuando hablo en español? 
 
 10. Le comprendo a V.^ cuando habla^ despacio y 
 claro. (dás-pá'-the"^o é klá'-ro). 
 
 11. ¿No me comprende V. cuando hablo aprisa {or: 
 cuando hablo pronto)? (á-pré'-sá prón'-to). 
 
 12. No, señor; no le comprendo a V. cuando habla tan 
 aprisa, (tan á-pré'-sá) . 
 
 13. ¿ Quiere V. hacerme el favor de hablar despacio y 
 claro? Soy inglés y no le comprendo cuando habla 
 tan aprisa. 
 
 a. Comprendo a V., (a has to be used before the personal object); 
 h. Le comprendo; 
 c. Le comprendo a V. 
 
 2 Usted is left out here, because the meaning of the phrase is 
 clear without it. In cases where any doubt might arise, usted 
 must be used. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
88 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 14. Will you please repeat this phrase? I cannot un- 
 derstand you when you speak so fast. (Liter- 
 ally: Will you do me the favor of to repeat (repetir) 
 this phrase? Not you (I) understand (to) you 
 when (you) speak so fast). 
 
 15. Do you understand me now? (Literally: Me un- 
 derstand you now (ahora) ? 
 
 16. Yes, now I understand you perfectly. (Literally: 
 Yes, now you (I) understand perfectly (perfecta- 
 mente). 
 
 17. What do you say? (Literally: What say you (dice 
 
 V.')? 
 
 I say. 
 you say. 
 he says, 
 we say. 
 you say. 
 they say. 
 
 18. What does he say? (Literally: What says he)? 
 
 19. What does this man say? (Literally: What says 
 this man (este hombre) ? 
 
 ^ Decir, to say^ to tell, is an irregular verb. The indicative of 
 the present tense is conjugated on page 89. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 89 
 
 14. ¿ Qiiiere V. hacerme el favor de repetir esta frase? 
 No le comprendo a V. cuando habla tan aprisa, 
 (rá-pá-tér'). 
 
 15. I Me comprende V. ahora? (á-o'-rá). 
 
 16. Sí; ahora le entiendo perfectamente, (pér-fak-tá- 
 
 mán'-t^). 
 
 17. ¿ Qué dice V.^? (ka dé'-th; 5 ^ oos-tad'). 
 
 Yo digo, 
 V. dice, 
 él dice. 
 
 (de'-go). 
 
 (dé'-th^). 
 
 (dé'-th^). 
 
 nosotros decimos, 
 V. V. dicen, 
 ellos dicen. 
 
 (da-the'-mós). 
 
 (de'-thén). 
 
 (de'-thén). 
 
 18. ¿ Qué dice él? 
 
 19. ¿ Qué dice este hombre (ás'-tf om'-br;$^)* 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; o& room. 
 
90 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 20. Do you understand what this man says? (Liter- 
 ally: Understand you (entiende Y}) that which 
 (lo que^) says this man) ? 
 
 I understand, 
 you understand, 
 he understands, 
 we understand, 
 you understand, 
 they understand. 
 
 21. No, I do not understand him. (Literally: No, not 
 him (I) imderstand). 
 
 22. Do you understand every thing I say? (Liter- 
 ally: Understand you all (todo) which I say)? 
 
 23. Yes, I can understand every thing you say, if 
 you speak slowly and distinctly. (Literally: Yes, 
 (I) understand all which you say if (si^) (you) 
 speak slowly and distinctly). 
 
 24. I do not understand this word; please repeat it 
 once more. (Literally: Not (I) understand this 
 word; please (sirvase^) to fepeat (repetir) her). 
 
 25. Do you imderstand it now? Yes, now I understand 
 
 it. (Literally: Her understand you now? Yes, 
 
 now her (I) understand). 
 
 ^ Entender, to understand^ is synonymous with comprender. 
 Entender is slightly irregular. The e of the second syllable ten is 
 changed into ie in the whole of the singular and in the third person 
 plural of the present tense. A number of other verbs have similar 
 irregularity. Compare Part X. 
 
 2 Which (the relative pronoun) can never be omitted, as is fre- 
 quently done in English. It must be expressed by lo que, that, 
 which, what, when it relates to an idea, not a word. All that (com- 
 pare phrase 22) is expressed by todo lo que. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 91 
 
 20. I Entiende V.^ lo que^ dice este hombre? (an- 
 ie^an'-df óós-tad' ló ka dé'-th^ as'-ty óm'-br;$^). 
 
 21. No; no le entiendo. (an-te"^an'-do). 
 
 22. ¿ Entiende V. todo lo que digo? (tó'-dó ló ka dé'- 
 gó). 
 
 23. Sí; entiendo todo lo que V. dice, si^ habla despa- 
 cio y claro. 
 
 24. No entiendo esta palabra; sírvase^ repetirla, (sér'- 
 vá'S^ ra-pa-tér'-lá) . 
 
 25. ¿La entiende V. ahora? Sí; ya la entiendo. 
 
 3 Si (without the acute accent) means if, whether; si (with the 
 acute accent) means yes. Both words sound alike. 
 
 ^ Sírvase, or sírvase V. means pray, please. It really is the im- 
 perative mood of the irregular verb servir, to serve, to wait upon. 
 
 Sírvase, me hace V. el favor, quiere V. tener la bondad — are all 
 phrases which practically mean the same thing. 
 
 For the conjugation of servir see Part X. 
 
 Yo entiendo, 
 V. entiende, 
 él entiende, 
 
 (án-té"^án'-dó). 
 (an-té^án'-d}^) . 
 (án-té"^án'-d^). 
 
 nosotros entendemos. 
 V. V. entienden, 
 ellos entienden. 
 
 (an-tén-da'-mós) . 
 (án-te"^án'-dén) . 
 (án-té'^an'-dén) . 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
Q2 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 26. What does this word mean? (Literally: What will 
 say (decir) this word) ? 
 
 27. What is the meaning of this word in English? 
 (Literally: What will say this word in English)? 
 
 28. What does this mean? (Literally: What will say? 
 Or: What means (significa) ? 
 
 29. Will you please repeat that once more. I do not 
 understand what that means. (Literally: Will you 
 do me the favor of return to repeat it. Not (I) 
 understand which (it) will say). 
 
 30. Will you please explain this word? (Literally: 
 Pray to explain (explicar) this word). 
 
 31. Will you please explain this word once more to 
 me? (Literally: Me do you the favor of return to 
 explain me this word) ? 
 
 32. Do you know what this word means in English? 
 (Literally: Know you which will say in English 
 this word) ? 
 
 33. Yes, now I know the meaning of this word. (Liter- 
 ally: Yes, now (I) know what signifies this word). 
 
 34. Would you please explain this Spanish phrase to 
 me; I do not know what it signifies. (Literally: 
 Would you have the kindness of to explain me this 
 phrase Spanish; not (I) know what (it) will say). 
 
 35. Do you understand the meaning of this phrase 
 now? (Literally: Understand you now what sig- 
 nifies this phrase) ? 
 
 36. Yes, now I know what this phrase means and can 
 say it in Spanish and English. (Literally: Yes, 
 now (I) know what signifies this phrase and can 
 say her in Spanish and in English). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 93 
 
 26. I Qué quiere decir esta palabra? (dá-thér'). 
 
 27. ¿ Qué quiere decir esta palabra en inglés? 
 
 28. ¿ Qué quiere decir? 
 
 ¿ Qué significa? (ség-né-fé'-ká). 
 
 29. I Quiere V. hacerme el favor de volver a repetirla? 
 No entiendo lo que quiere decir. 
 
 30. Sírvase explicar esta palabra, (áks-plé-karr'). 
 
 31. ¿ Me hace V. el favor de volver a explicarme esta 
 palabra? 
 
 32. I Sabe V. lo que quiere decir en inglés esta pala- 
 bra? 
 
 33. Sí, ahora sé lo que significa esta palabra. 
 
 34. I Tendría V. la bondad de explicarme esta frase 
 española? No sé lo que quiere decir. 
 
 35. I Entiende V. ahora lo que significa esta frase? 
 (seg-né-fé'-ká). 
 
 36. Sí, ahora sé lo que significa esta frase y puedo de- 
 cirla en español y en inglés. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
94 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 37. It is very hard for me to pronounce all these 
 phrases. I think the Spanish pronunciation is very 
 difficult. (Literally: Me (it) is very difficult to 
 pronounce all these phrases. I think that the pro- 
 nunciation Spanish is very difficult). 
 
 38. On the contrary, the Spanish pronunciation is very 
 easy. Spanish words are pronounced in accordance 
 with definite rules. (Literally: On the contrary, 
 the pronunciation Spanish is very easy. The words 
 Spanish themselves (se) pronounce according to 
 (según) rules definite (reglas definidas). 
 
 In a Store. 
 
 1. What do you want to do in this store? I want to 
 buy something. (Literally: What will you do in 
 (en) this store (esta tienda)? (I) want to buy 
 (comprar) something (algo). 
 
 2. What do you want to buy? I wish to purchase a 
 hat. (Literally: What will you buy? (I) will buy 
 a hat (un sombrero). 
 
 3. Please accompany me. I want to buy a hat and I 
 do not speak Spanish well enough. (Literally: 
 Please (sírvase V.) to accompany me (acompa- 
 ñarme). (I) want to buy a hat and not (I) speak 
 sufficiently (bastante) well the Spanish). 
 
 4. Good day, sir. My friend wants to buy a hat. 
 
 (Literally: Good day (buenos dias^. My friend 
 
 (mi amigo) wishes to purchase a hat) . 
 
 5. Do you wish a silk hat or another kind? (Liter- 
 ally: Will you a hat of silk (seda) or of other 
 class) ? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 95 
 
 37. Me es muy difícil pronunciar todas estas frases. 
 Creo que la pronunciación española es muy difí- 
 cil. (to'-dás). 
 
 38. Al contrario; la pronunciación española es muy 
 fácil. Las palabras españolas se pronuncian según 
 reglas deñnidas. (sá-góon' rág'-lás da-fé-né'-dás) . 
 
 En Una Tienda. 
 
 én óó'-ná te"^én'-dá. 
 
 1. I Qué quiere V. hacer en esta tienda? Quiero 
 comprar algo, (kom-prárr' ál'-go). 
 
 2. ¿ Qué quiere V. comprar? Quiero comprar un 
 sombrero, (sóm-brá'-ró) . 
 
 3. Sírvase V. acompañarme. Quiero comprar un som- 
 brero y no hablo bastante bien el español, (á-kom- 
 pán-yárr'-my bás-tán'-t}^) . 
 
 4. Buenos días.^ Mi amigo desea comprar un som- 
 brero. (boó"^á'-nos dé'-ás mé á-me'-go da-sá'-á). 
 
 5. ¿ Quiere V. un sombrero de copa o de otra clase? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
96 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 6 . I want a felt hat. (Literally: (I) want one of 
 
 felt) . 
 
 7. Try on this one. (Literally: Try yourself (prué- 
 bese V.) this (este). 
 
 8. It is too^ small for me. (Literally: Me (to me) 
 remains (queda) very (muy^) small (chico). 
 
 9. I also want to get a pair of gloves. (Literally: 
 Also (también) (I) want a pair of gloves (un par 
 de guantes). 
 
 10. What kind of gloves do you wear? Kid gloves. 
 (Literally: Of what kind (clase) them want you? 
 Of kid (cabritilla). 
 
 11. And what number do you wear? Number six. 
 (Literally: Of what size (tamaño) ? {Or: Of what 
 number (número)? Of the number six (seis). 
 
 ^ The Spaniards never say ‘‘Good Morning,” but always buenos 
 días, good day. Good afternoon or good evening^ buenas tardes. 
 Buenas noches, good night. All these forms are used only in the 
 plural, 
 
 2 This is the imperative of the (slightly) irregular verb probar, 
 to prove. Probar belongs to a class of verbs which change the 
 stem-vowel o into ue throughout the singular and in the third 
 person plural of the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the 
 same persons in the imperative. The conjugation of the present 
 
 indicative is therefore: 
 
 
 Yo pruebo. 
 
 I prove. 
 
 V. prueba. 
 
 you prove. 
 
 él prueba. 
 
 he proves. 
 
 nosotros probamos. 
 
 we prove. 
 
 V. V. prueban. 
 
 you prove. 
 
 ellos prueban. 
 
 they prove. 
 
 3 The English one in this and similar connections can not be 
 translated. 
 
 4 There are two verbs in Spanish for our verb to he^ viz., ser and 
 estar, the use of which offers peculiar difficulty to English-speaking 
 persons. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 60 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 97 
 
 6. Quiero xino de fieltro, 
 
 7. Pruébese Y? este.^ (próó-á'-vá-sj^ ás'-t^^). 
 
 8. Me queda^ muy chico. (Or: Me está^ muy chico), 
 (ás-tá' ché'-kó). 
 
 9. También quiero un par guantes. (tám-bé"^én' 
 < 5 on párr dé gwán'-tés). 
 
 10. ¿De qué clase los quiere V.? De cabritilla, (klá'- 
 sy ká-bre-tél'-yá). 
 
 11. ¿ De qué tamaño? (Or: De qué número)? Del 
 número seis, (tá-mán'-yó nóó'-ma-ro sa'-es). 
 
 Ser — of which thus far the student has learned the indicative 
 present — must be used, when the attribute is permanent^ inherent 
 or essential y as: 
 
 I Es V. francés? Are you a Frenchman? 
 
 Yo soy médico. I am a physician. 
 
 La puerta es alta. The door is high. 
 
 All these are inherent or permanent attributes: consequently 
 ser must be used. 
 
 Estar must be used, when the attribute is temporary or acci- 
 dental y as: 
 
 Estoy bueno, I am well. 
 
 La puerta está cerrada, The door is locked. 
 
 The attributes here are temporary, consequently estar is used. 
 For conjugation of estar see Part X. 
 
 See Part X for full particulars, rules and conjugations. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
q8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABULARIO, 
 
 £1 Idioma; Los Idiomas, 
 
 LA PRONUNCIACIÓN. 
 
 Tiene V. buena pronuncia- 
 ción. 
 
 Su pronunciación es muy 
 mala. 
 
 El acento (á-thén'-to). 
 
 Los acentos (á-thén'-tOs). 
 
 No acentúa V. bien esta 
 sílaba (sé'-lá-bá). 
 
 Acentúe V. bien esta sílaba. 
 
 Pronunciar. 
 
 Pronuncia V. bien. 
 
 Pronuncia V. mal. 
 
 No pronuncia V. bien esta 
 palabra. 
 
 Pronuncia V. mal esta pa- 
 labra. 
 
 Corregir (korr-rá-^hér') 
 
 La equivocación (á-ké-vo- 
 ká-the'^on'). 
 
 Las equivocaciones (a-ké- 
 v5-ká-the^o'-nés) . 
 
 Hágame V. el favor de corr- 
 egirme cuando me equi- 
 voque^ en la pronuncia- 
 ción. (a-ké-vo'-ká) . 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
 The Language ; Lan- 
 guages. 
 
 THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 You have a good promm- 
 ciation. 
 
 His pronunciation is very 
 bad. 
 
 The accent. 
 
 The accents. 
 
 You do not put the right 
 accent on this syllable. 
 
 Put the right accent on 
 this syllable. 
 
 To pronoimce. 
 
 You pronounce well. 
 
 You pronounce badly. 
 
 You do not pronounce this 
 word correctly. 
 
 You pronoimce this word 
 incorrectly. 
 
 To correct. 
 
 The mistake. 
 
 The mistakes. 
 
 Please correct me when I 
 make mistakes in the 
 pronunciation. 
 
 ^ This is the present tense of the subjunctive mood. Its use 
 will be fully explained in a later lesson. 
 
fifllitiiirv'trJMiWíií; 
 
 n'^íí, 
 
 
 Y I, i: /. 
 
 
 ■■•W. ; ■ ^ . 
 
 ^í íé / 
 
 yf"; 
 
 
 
 
 ,■■ "f'pf, 
 
 ■ ■ ■VH'.T,. 
 
 
 ^ ' ■ . ■' .: , , , ■- - •'.■ 
 

LIBRARY 
 ■ THE 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRSCTICSL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc. 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 tSTEW YORK : : LONDON 
 The International College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE international COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES. 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers’ Hall. London, Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 99 
 
 ml 
 
 /]/', 1 - 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Cardinal Numbers loo 
 
 In a Store — Continued 102 
 
 Future Tense 108 
 
 Arrival, Hotel, Rooms no 
 
 A Journey 124 
 
 Vocabulary 130 
 
lOO 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS.» 
 
 Uno, una, 
 
 óo'-nó (na). 
 
 I 
 
 Dos, 
 
 dos. 
 
 2 
 
 Tres, 
 
 trés. 
 
 3 
 
 Cuatro, 
 
 kwá'-tro. 
 
 4 
 
 Cinco, 
 
 thén'-ko. 
 
 5 
 
 Seis, 
 
 sa'-es. 
 
 6 
 
 Siete, 
 
 sé'^á'-t^. 
 
 7 
 
 Ocho, 
 
 ó'-cho. 
 
 8 
 
 Nueve, 
 
 nóó'^a'-vj^, 
 
 9 
 
 Diez, 
 
 dé'-ath. 
 
 10 
 
 Once, 
 
 on'-th^. 
 
 II 
 
 Doce, 
 
 dó'-th^. 
 
 12 
 
 Trece, 
 
 tra'-th^. 
 
 13 
 
 Catorce, 
 
 ka-tor'-thj?-. 
 
 14 
 
 Quince, 
 
 kén'-th^^. 
 
 15 
 
 Diez y seis,^ 
 
 dé'-áth é sá'-6s, 
 
 16 
 
 Diez y siete. 
 
 
 17 
 
 Diez y ocho. 
 
 
 18 
 
 Diez y nueve, 
 
 
 19 
 
 Veinte, 
 
 vá-én'-t^^, 
 
 20 
 
 Veintiuno, 
 
 
 21 
 
 Veintidós, 
 
 
 22 
 
 Veintitrés, 
 
 
 23 
 
 Veinticuatro, 
 
 
 24 
 
 Veinticinco, 
 
 
 25 
 
 Veintiséis, 
 
 
 26 
 
 Veintisiete, 
 
 
 27 
 
 Veintiocho, 
 
 
 28 
 
 Veintinueve, 
 
 
 29 
 
 See fcK>tnotes on page 102 . 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 65 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, loi 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS— Continued. 
 
 Treinta, 
 
 trá-én'-tá. 
 
 30 
 
 Cuarenta, 
 
 kwá-rén'-tá. 
 
 40 
 
 Cincuenta, 
 
 thhn-kwén'-tá. 
 
 SO 
 
 Sesenta, 
 
 sa-sén'-tá. 
 
 60 
 
 Setenta, 
 
 sá-tén'-tá 
 
 70 
 
 Ochenta, 
 
 o-chén'-tá. 
 
 80 
 
 Noventa, 
 
 nó-vén'-tá. 
 
 90 
 
 Ciento,^ 
 
 the'^én'-tO, 
 
 100 
 
 Ciento uno, 
 
 
 lOI 
 
 Ciento dos, 
 
 
 102 
 
 Ciento tres. 
 
 
 103 
 
 Ciento cuatro. 
 
 
 104 
 
 Ciento cinco, etc.. 
 
 
 IOS 
 
 Doscientos, 
 
 dós-thé^én'-tos. 
 
 200 
 
 Trescientos, 
 
 tras-the'^én'-tos. 
 
 300 
 
 Cuatrocientos, 
 
 
 400 
 
 Quinientos, 
 
 ke-nh'^én'-tos. 
 
 500 
 
 Seiscientos, 
 
 
 600 
 
 Setecientos, 
 
 sá-ta-the'^én'-tOs, 
 
 700 
 
 Ochocientos, 
 
 
 800 
 
 Novecientos, 
 
 n 5 -va-the'^én'-tós. 
 
 900 
 
 Mü," 
 
 mél. 
 
 1,000 
 
 Diez mil. 
 
 
 10,000 
 
 Cien mil. 
 
 thé'^én' mhl. 
 
 100,000 
 
 Doscientos mil. 
 
 
 200,000 
 
 Quinientos mil. 
 
 
 500,000 
 
 Un millón. 
 
 óon mel-yón'. 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 Dos millones. 
 
 dos mOl-yo'-nés, 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 Tres millones. 
 
 
 3,000,000 
 
 See footnotes on page 102. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; oh room. 
 
102 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 12. Do these gloves fit? Yes, these gloves fit me very 
 well. (Literally: To you serve (sirven) to you 
 these? Yes, me (they) serve very well). 
 
 13. And how does this hat fit? It fits very well. 
 
 (Literally: And how (qué tal) you serves this 
 
 hat? Well, very well). 
 
 I serve, 
 you serve, 
 he serves, 
 we serve, 
 you serve, 
 they serve. 
 
 14. Please show me some other gloves; these do not fit 
 well. (Literally: Pray to show me (enseñarme) 
 other (otros) gloves; these not me serve). 
 
 15. How much is this hat? This hat costs ten dollars. 
 (Literally: How much is worth (vale) this hat? 
 This is worth ten dollars (pesos). 
 
 ^ The numerals are most important and ought to be mastered 
 at once. They are rather difficult, but the pupil must learn them 
 so thoroughly that he can give any number at once. and without 
 hesitation. 
 
 2 Observe that lé, 17, 18 and 19 are also rendered dieciseis, 
 diecisiete, dieciocho and diecinueve. 
 
 3 Ciento is changed into cien when standing before any noun 
 or adjective (masculine as well as feminine) as: cien hombres, one 
 hundred men; cien mujeres, one hundred women. 
 
 ^ Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, etc., can not be given as in 
 English, but must be rendered by mil, as: mil ochocientos, 1800. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 103 
 
 12. ¿Le sirven^ a V. estos? Sí, me sirven muy bien, 
 (sér'-vén). 
 
 13. ¿Y qué taP le sirve este sombrero? Bien, muy 
 bien. 
 
 Yo sirvo 
 V. sirve 
 él sirve 
 
 nosotros servimos 
 V. V. sirven 
 ellos sirven 
 
 (yo sér'-vó). 
 
 (óós-tad' ser'-vj^). 
 
 (al sér'-v}^). 
 
 (nó-so'-trós sar-vé'-mós). 
 (óos-ta'-das sér'-vén). 
 (ál'-yos sér'-vén). 
 
 14. Sírvase enseñarme otros guantes; estos no me sir- 
 ven. (én-sén-yárr'-m^ ot'-rós gwán'-tés). 
 
 15. ¿ Cuánto vale^ este sombrero? Este vale diez pe- 
 sos.^ (dé'-ath pá'-sos). 
 
 ^ Servir, as stated before, is an irregular verb of which the in- 
 dicative present is given above. 
 
 2 How ? is very frequently expressed by qué tal. In this con- 
 nection its use is strictly idiomatic. 
 
 2 Valer, to he worth, is an irregular verb. The indicative present 
 is conjugated: 
 
 Yo valgo, 
 
 V. vale, 
 él vale, 
 
 nosostros valemos, 
 V. V. valen, 
 ellos valen. 
 
 / am worth, 
 you are worth, 
 he (it) is worth, 
 we are worth, 
 you are worth, 
 they are worth. 
 
 ^ Peso in South and Central America. Duro in Spain. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
104 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 1 6. And what is the price of these gloves? Two dol- 
 lars. (Literally : And how much are worth (valen) 
 these gloves? Two dollars). 
 
 17. That is very dear. (Literally: That is too much 
 
 (demasiado) {Or: They are (están) very dear 
 
 (muy caros). 
 
 I am. 
 you are. 
 he is. 
 we are. 
 you are. 
 they are. 
 
 18. Oh! no, sir, that is very cheap. (Literally: Oh! 
 no, sir, (they) are very cheap (baratos). 
 
 19. Do you want to pay for these gloves now? (Liter- 
 ally: Desire you to pay (pagar) now for these 
 gloves) ? 
 
 20. Yes, I want to pay for them now. Here is your 
 money. Many thanks. (Literally: Yes, (I) will 
 pay them now. Here have you the money (el di- 
 nero). Many thanks (muchas gracias), or: A 
 thousand thanks (mil gracias). 
 
 21. Do you wish to pay for this hat now? (Literally: 
 Desire you to pay now for this hat) ? 
 
 22. No, please send this hat and your bill to my hotel; 
 I will pay for it there. (Literally: No, pray to 
 send (mandar) to the hotel (al hotel) this hat with 
 (con) the bill (la cuenta). It (I) shall pay (pagaré^ 
 there (aUi). 
 
 23. I have not money enough with me. (Literally: 
 Not (I) have here sufficient (bastante) money). 
 
 ^ For information of the future tense and for rules as to its use 
 see Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 1 6. ¿ Y cuánto valen estos guantes? Dos pesos. 
 
 105 
 
 1 7 . Eso es demasiado. (dá-má-sé"^á'-do) . 
 
 Están muy caros. (és-tán' ká'-rós). 
 
 Yo estoy 
 V. está 
 él está 
 
 nosotros estamos 
 V, V. están 
 ellos están 
 
 (yo és-tó''^e). 
 
 (óós-tad' és-tá'). 
 
 (ál és-tá'). 
 
 (nó-so'-tros és-tá'-mOs). 
 (oos-tá'-dás és-tán'). 
 (ál'-yós és-tán'). 
 
 18. O no, señor, están muy baratos, (bá-rá'-tós). 
 
 O no, señor, son muy baratos. 
 
 19. ¿ Desea V. pagar ahora por estos guantes? 
 
 20. Sí, quiero pagarlos ahora. Aquí tiene V. el di- 
 nero. Muchas gracias. Mil gracias, (á-ké' dé- 
 ná'-rO móó'-chás grá'-thé"^ás mél grá'-thé'^ás). 
 
 21. I Desea V. pagar ahora por este sombrero? 
 
 22. No, sírvase V. mandar al hotel este sombrero con 
 la cuenta. Lo pagaré^ allí, (mán-dárr' ál ó-tél' 
 kon lá kwán'-tá pá-gá-rá' ál-yé')-. 
 
 23. No tengo aquí bastante dinero. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
io6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 24. Have you any money with you? (Literally: 
 Carry you (trae V.) any (algún) money in the pocket 
 (el bolsillo)? 
 
 I carry. 
 
 you carry. 
 
 he carries. 
 
 we carry. 
 
 you carry. 
 
 they carry. 
 
 25. How much money have you with you? (Liter- 
 ally: How much money have you? Or: How 
 
 much money carry you) ? 
 
 26. Have you much money with you? (Literally: 
 Carry you much money in the pocket or purse)? 
 
 27. I have very little with me. (Literally: I carry 
 very little). 
 
 28. I have not much money with me. Send this hat 
 to my hotel; I will pay for it there. (Literally: 
 Not (I) carry much money in the pocket. Send 
 (mande; envie) to the hotel this hat. It (I) shall 
 pay (pagaré) there). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; oó room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 107 
 
 24. I Trae V. algún dinero en el bolsillo? (trá'-;$^ obs- 
 tad' ál-góon' de-na'-ró én al ból-sél'-yó). 
 
 Yo traigo 
 
 (yo trá'^^e-go). 
 
 V. trae 
 
 (óós-tád' trá'-;^). 
 
 él trae 
 
 (al trá'-;>^). 
 
 nosotros traemos 
 
 (no-so'-tros trá-á'mós). 
 
 V. V. traen 
 
 (oós-ta'-das trá'-én). 
 
 ellos traen 
 
 (ál'-yós trá'-én). 
 
 25. ¿ Cuánto dinero tiene V. ? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto dinero trae V. ? 
 
 26. ¿ Trae V. mucho dinero en el bolsillo? 
 
 27. Traigo muy poco. 
 
 28. No traigo mucho dinero en el bolsillo. Mande (or: 
 envie) al hotel este sombrero. Lo pagaré allí. 
 
 á far; a pale; 5 eve; é there; 0 note; óó room. 
 
io8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE FUTURE TENSE. 
 FIRST CONJUGATION.! 
 
 I shall speak. 
 
 I shall pay. 
 
 you will speak. 
 
 you will pay. 
 
 he will speak. 
 
 he will pay. 
 
 we shall speak. 
 
 we shall pay. 
 
 you will speak. 
 
 you will pay. 
 
 they will speak. 
 
 they will pay. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION.! 
 
 I shall sell. 
 
 I shall dine. 
 
 you will seU. 
 
 you will dine. 
 
 he wül sell. 
 
 he will dine. 
 
 we shall sell. 
 
 we shall dine. 
 
 you will sell. 
 
 you will dine. 
 
 they will sell. 
 
 they will dine. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION.! 
 
 I shall live. 
 
 I shall receive. 
 
 you wiU live. 
 
 you will receive. 
 
 he will live. 
 
 he will receive. 
 
 we shall live. 
 
 we shall receive. 
 
 you will live. 
 
 you will receive. 
 
 they will live. 
 
 they will receive. 
 
 ^ The future tense of all regular verbs is formed by adding the 
 following endings to their stem: 
 
 I. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3. 
 
 aré. 
 
 eré. 
 
 — — iré. 
 
 ará: 
 
 erá. 
 
 irá. 
 
 ará. 
 
 erá. 
 
 irá. 
 
 aremos. 
 
 eremos. 
 
 iremos. 
 
 arán. 
 
 erán. 
 
 irán. 
 
 arán. 
 
 erán. 
 
 irán. 
 
 It will be seen that a is the characteristic vowel of verbs of the 
 first conjugation, e of the second, i of the third. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 109 
 
 CONJUGACIÓN DEL TIEMPO FUTURO. 
 PRIMERA CONJUGACIÓN.! 
 
 Yo pagaré. 
 
 V. pagará, 
 él pagará. 
 
 nosotros pagaremos. 
 V. V. pagarán, 
 ellos pagarán. 
 
 SEGUNDA CONJUGACIÓN.! 
 
 Yo hablaré. 
 
 V. hablará, 
 él hablará, 
 nosotros hablaremos. 
 V. V. hablarán, 
 ellos hablarán. 
 
 Yo venderé. 
 
 V. venderá, 
 él venderá, 
 nosotros venderemos. 
 V. V. venderán, 
 ellos venderán. 
 
 Yo comeré. 
 
 V. comerá, 
 él comerá. 
 
 nosotros comeremos. 
 V. V. comerán, 
 ellos comerán. 
 
 TERCERA CONJUGACION.! 
 
 Yo viviré. 
 
 V. vivirá, 
 él vivirá. 
 
 nosotros viviremos. 
 V. V. vivirán, 
 ellos vivirán. 
 
 Yo recibiré. 
 
 V. recibirá, 
 él recibirá. 
 
 nosotros recibiremos. 
 V. V. recibirán, 
 ellos recibirán. 
 
 Form and conjugate the future tense of the following verbs: 
 comprar, to buy; tomar, to take; representar, to repres-mt; volver, 
 to return; entender, to understand; perder, to lose; sentir, to feel; 
 preferir, to prefer. 
 
 The future must be used in Spanish for the English ‘T will” or 
 “I shall” when futurity is expressed, that is to say, whenever 
 will” can not be changed to ‘T want to, I wish, I desire,” the future 
 tense must be used as: 
 
 When will you do it? ( = When do you want to do it) ? ¿ Cuándo 
 quiere V. hacerlo? 
 
 But: We will consider it. Lo consideraremos. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
no 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Arrival. — ^Hotel. — Rooms. 
 
 1. What do you want to do when we get there? (Liter- 
 ally: What desire you to do on arriving (al llegar)? 
 
 2. I am very tired. I would like to go at once to a 
 
 good hotel. (Literally: (I) am (estoy^) very tired 
 
 (cansado). I would like (quisiera) to go (ir) im- 
 mediately (inmediatamente) to a good hotel). 
 
 I should like, 
 you would like, 
 he would like, 
 we should like, 
 you would like, 
 they would like. 
 
 3. To which hotel do you want to go? To the ^‘Hotel 
 of England.” (Literally: To which hotel will you 
 go? To the “Hotel of England” (Inglaterra). 
 
 4. Are you going to walk? No, I am going to take a 
 
 cab. (Literally: Go you (va V.) afoot (a pie)? 
 
 No, (I) go (voy) to take (tomar) a coach (un coche). 
 
 I am going 
 you are going, 
 he is going, 
 we are going, 
 you are going, 
 they are going. 
 
 or: I go. 
 
 “ you go. 
 
 “ he goes. 
 
 “ we go. 
 
 “ you go. 
 
 “ they go. 
 
 ^Why must estoy be used here? Compare page 97, note 4. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 III 
 
 La Llegada. — El Hotel. — Cuartos. 
 
 la lyá-gá'>dá — al 5-tel' — ^kwar'-tos. 
 
 1. I Qué desea V. hacer al llegar? (ál lya-gárr'). 
 
 2. Estoy^ muy cansado. Quisiera ir inmediatamente a 
 un buen hotel, (kán-sa'-dó ke-sg'^á'-rá ér én-ma- 
 dé^á-tá-mén'-t;$^ bóó"*^án'). 
 
 Yo quisiera. 
 
 (yó ké-sé^a'-rá). 
 
 V. quisiera. 
 
 
 él quisiera. 
 
 
 nosotros quisiéramos 
 
 (ke-sé"^a'rá-mós) . 
 
 V. V. quisieran. 
 
 (ke-se'^á'rán). 
 
 ellos quisieran. 
 
 
 ¿A qué hotel quiere V. 
 
 ir? Al Hotel de Ingla- 
 
 terra, (én-glá-térr'-rá). 
 
 j 
 
 
 ¿Va V. a pie? No, voy 
 
 a tomar un coche, (vá á 
 
 pe"^a' vo'^^e to'már oon ko'-chj?"). 
 
 Yo voy 
 
 (vs'^e). 
 
 V. va 
 
 (va). 
 
 él va. 
 
 
 nosotros vamos 
 
 (vá'-mOs). 
 
 V. V. van 
 
 (van). 
 
 ellos van. 
 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; oo room. 
 
II2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 5. I am very tired. I cannot walk to the hotel. I 
 am going to take a cab. (Literally: (I) am very 
 tired. Not (I) can walk (caminar^) to (hasta) the 
 hotel. (I) go to take a cab). 
 
 6. Are you going to walk to your hotel or will you 
 take a cab? (Literally: Go you afoot to the hotel 
 or will you take a cab) ? 
 
 7. I am not tired, I am going to walk. (Literally: 
 Not (I) am tired, (I) go to walk). 
 
 8. Have you any baggage? (Literally: Have you 
 
 baggage (equipaje)? 
 
 9. Have you much baggage? 
 
 10. How much baggage have you? 
 
 11. I have very little baggage. I am going to take 
 
 the street-car. (Literally: (I) have very little 
 
 baggage. (I) go to take the street-car (el tranvía). 
 
 12. I have a great deal of baggage. I cannot walk to 
 my hotel. I am going to take a cab. (Literally: 
 (I) have much baggage. Not (I) can walk to the 
 hotel. (I) go to take a cab). 
 
 13. Driver, to the '‘Hotel of England!^’ (Literally: 
 Driver, (cochero) to the Hotel of England (Hotel 
 de Inglaterra). 
 
 ^ Caminar, to walk, is synonymous with ir a pie. As stated be- 
 fore, S3mon5nTious expressions have frequently been introduced 
 into the exercises for the purpose of accustoming the student to 
 diversity of expression. 
 
 2 Hasta means to = as far as; it also means till^ until. In the 
 latter case it denotes timef in the former place ^ as: 
 hasta mañana, till to-morrow. 
 
 hasta la vista, au revoir (auf Wiedersehen) i.e,, till we 
 
 meet again. 
 
 voy hasta Madrid, I go as far as Madrid, 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 113 
 
 5. Estoy muy cansado. No puedo caminar^ hasta^ 
 el hotel. Voy a tomar un coche, (ká-mé-nárr' 
 ás'-tá). 
 
 6. ¿ Va V. a pie hasta el hotel o quiere V. tomar un 
 coche? 
 
 7. No estoy cansado; voy a caminar. 
 
 8. ¿ Tiene V. equipaje^? (a-ke-pá'-‘hj^). 
 
 9. ¿ Tiene V. mucho equipaje? 
 
 10. ¿ Cuánto equipaje tiene V.? 
 
 11. Tengo muy poco equipaje. Voy a tomar el tran- 
 vía.*^ (trán-vé'-á). 
 
 12. Tengo mucho equipaje. No puedo caminar hasta 
 el hotel. Voy a tomar un coche. 
 
 13. Cochero, al ‘‘Hotel de Inglaterra.’’ (ko-chá'-ro) . 
 
 ^ Any in this and similar connections need not be rendered. 
 
 ♦ This word is, of course, of English origin. Street-cars in England 
 are called “tramways,*’ and as most street-car lines in Spain, Mexico 
 and South America were built by English capital and engineers, 
 the English expressions were adopted. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 114 
 
 14. Good day, sir; can you give me a good room? 
 
 (Literally: Good day, me can you give a good 
 
 room (un buen^ cuarto) ? 
 
 15. Can you give me a good room on the first fioor? 
 (Literally: Can you give me a good room in the 
 first floor (el primer piso^) ? 
 
 16. I am very tired and wish to go to bed at once. 
 
 (Literally: (I) am very tired and wish (deseo) 
 
 to retire myself (acostarme^) at once (inmediata- 
 mente or luego). 
 
 17. Please give me a good room on the first floor. (Lit- 
 erally: Pray to give me a good room in the first 
 floor). 
 
 18. Please show me a good room on the second floor. 
 (Literally: Pray to show me (enseñarme) a good 
 room on the second (segundo) floor). 
 
 1 The following adjectives drop the final 0 before a masculine 
 noun in the singular: bueno, good; malo, bad; alguno, anyone, 
 someone, somebody; ninguno, no one, nobody, not any one; uno, 
 a, an, one; primero, first; tercero, third; postrero, last, as: 
 
 Buen amo, good master. Un hábil médico, a skillful physician. 
 
 el primer hombre, the first man. ningún cuarto, no room. , 
 
 But if they stand after the noun the 0 is preserved, as: 
 
 Un hombre malo, a had man. El libro tercero, the third hook. 
 
 The o is also preserved whenever the noun referring to the ad- 
 jective Is not expressed, as: 
 
 Es bueno, he is good. 
 
 Uno de estos señores, one of these gentlemen. 
 
 2 El primer piso in Spanish hotels and houses corresponds to 
 our second floor; the second to our third floor, etc. 
 
 3 This verb is a reflexive or pronominal verb. Reflexive verbs 
 are conjugated with two personal pronouns, the first (expressed 
 or understood) being the subject, and the second the object, as: 
 él se engaña or se engaña, he deceives himself. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 IIS 
 
 14. Buenos días, ¿me puede V. dar un buen^ cuarto? 
 (óón bóó^án' kwár'-tó). 
 
 15. ¿ Puede V. darme un buen cuarto en el primer pi- 
 so^? (pré-mérr' pe'-so). 
 
 16. Estoy muy cansado y deseo acostarme^ inmedia- 
 tamente {or luego), (á-kos-tár'-m^ én-má-dé^á- 
 tá-mén'-ty loo^a'-go). 
 
 17. Sírvase darme un buen cuarto en el primer piso, 
 (pré-mérr' pé'-so). 
 
 18. Sírvase enseñarme un buen cuarto en el segundo 
 piso, (sa-góón'-dó) . 
 
 Almost any verb may be used reflexively in Spanish, which fre- 
 quently occasions a modification of the meaning, as: dormir, to 
 sleep; dormirse, to go to sleep; ir, to go; irse, to go away. 
 
 The pronouns used in connection with reflexive verbs are: 
 
 me, myself. nos, ourselves. 
 
 The conjugation presents no difficulties. 
 
 Indicative Present. 
 
 (Yo) me equivoco, 
 
 V. se equivoca, 
 
 (él) se equivoca, 
 
 (nosotros) nos equivc camos, 
 V. V. se equivocan, 
 
 (ellos) se equivocan. 
 
 I am mistaken. 
 
 you are mistaken, 
 he is mistaken. 
 
 we are mistaken, 
 you are mistaken, 
 they are mistaken. 
 
 For full rules and conjugation see Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 19. At what price can you give me this room? (Liter- 
 ally: For what price (por qué precio) me give you 
 this room? Or: For how much (por cuánto) me 
 give you this room) ? 
 
 I give, 
 you give, 
 he gives, 
 we give, 
 you give, 
 they give. 
 
 20. What is the price of this room per day? (Liter- 
 ally: How much is (es) this room for (por) day? 
 Or: What (cuál) is the price of this room to the 
 (al) day)? 
 
 21. How much is this room per day? (Literally: At 
 how much (a cuánto) per day is this room) ? 
 
 22. This room is three dollars per day. (Literally: 
 This room is of (de^) to (a) three dollars (pesos) 
 per day). 
 
 23. I can give you this room very cheap. 
 
 24. This room is too dear. I do not want to take it. 
 
 Please show me another one. (Literally: This 
 
 room is very dear. Not it (I) will take (tomar). 
 Please to show me other (otro). 
 
 ^ Dar is an irregular verb. See Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
T he Spanish Language. 
 
 117 
 
 19. I Por qué precio me da V. este cuarto? 
 
 ¿ Por cuánto me da V. este cuarto? (pra'-thé"*^ó). 
 
 20. ¿ Cuánto es este cuarto por día? (de'-á), 
 
 ¿ Cuál es el precio de este cuarto al dia? 
 
 21. ¿A cuánto por día es este cuarto? 
 
 22. Este cuarto es de^ a tres pesos por día. 
 
 23. Puedo darle este cuarto muy barato. 
 
 24. Este cuarto es muy caro. No lo quiero tomar. 
 Sírvase enseñarme otro. 
 
 2 This de is strictly idiomatic. 
 
 Yo doy^ 
 V. da 
 él da 
 
 (dó''^é). 
 
 (dá). 
 
 (dá). 
 
 nosotros damos (dá'-mós). 
 V. V. dan (dan), 
 
 ellos dan (dan). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; óo room. 
 
ii8 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 25. I have not another room on this floor, but I can 
 give you a very large and cheap room on the 
 third story. (Literally: Not (I) have no (nin- 
 gún^) other (otro) room in this story, but (I) can 
 give you one (uno) very large (grande) and cheap 
 in the third (el tercero). 
 
 26. This room is large and handsome. At what price 
 can you give it to me? (Literally: This room is 
 large and handsome (hermoso). For how much 
 me it give you)? 
 
 27. This room is very cheap. It costs only two dol- 
 dars a day. (Literally: This room is very cheap. 
 Not (it) costs (cuesta^) but (sino) two dollars to 
 the day). 
 
 28. All right, I will take it. Please send my baggage 
 up and pay the cabman. (Literally: Very well, 
 it (I) take (tomo^). Pray to make send up (hacer 
 subir) the^ baggage and to pay to the (al) driver). 
 
 ^ No, not, stands always — ^as we have seen already — before the 
 verb, as: no lo quiero, I don't want it. 
 
 It will furthermore be observed that the Spaniards use a double 
 negative. 
 
 In English a double negative is equivalent to an affirmative, but 
 this is not the* case in Spanish, where nada, nothing, ninguno, no 
 one, not any one, jamás, never, etc., are placed after no, as: 
 
 No quiero nada, I don't want anything. 
 
 no lo he visto jamás, I have never seen it. 
 
 no lo sabe nadie, no one knows it. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 119 
 
 25. No tengo ningún^ otro cuarto en este piso, pero 
 puedo darle uno muy grande y barato en el ter- 
 cero. (nen-góón' tér-tha'-ro). 
 
 26. Este cuarto es grande^ y hermoso. ¿ Por cuánto 
 me lo dá V.? 
 
 27. Este cuarto es muy barato. No cuesta^ sino dos 
 pesos al día. 
 
 28. Muy bien, lo tomo.^ Sírvase hacer subir eP equi- 
 paje y pagar al cochero. 
 
 The negative no is, however, omitted when the negative adjec- 
 tives or adverbs stand at the beginning of the sentence, as: 
 
 Nada quiero, I don't want anything, 
 
 jamás lo he visto, I have never seen it, 
 
 nadie lo sabe, nobody knows it. 
 
 Grande loses its final syllable when standing before any noun 
 beginning with a consonant, as; Una gran casa, a large house; un 
 gran peligro, a great peril. 
 
 3 Costar, to cost, belongs to the class of verbs whose stem- vowel 
 o is changed into ue throughout the singular and in the third per- 
 son plural of the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the same 
 persons in the imperative. See Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 6 b room. 
 
120 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 29. Do you wish to dine now, sir? (Literally: Wish 
 you to dine (comer) now, sir)? 
 
 30. No, thanks, I am very much fatigued and want to 
 retire at once. (Literally: No, thanks, (I) am very 
 tired and wish to retire myself at once). 
 
 31. Do you wish anything else? — No, thanks, I have 
 everything I need. (Literally: Wish you some- 
 thing (algo) more? — No, thanks, (I) have all which 
 I need (necesito). 
 
 32. I do not see any matches in the room. Please 
 bring me a box of matches, waiter. (Literally: 
 Not (I) see matches (fósforos) in the room. Waiter 
 (mozo), bring me (tráigame) a box (una caja) of 
 matches). 
 
 33. Here are the matches, sir. Do you wish anything 
 
 else? (Literally: Here (aquí) are (están^) the 
 
 matches. Want you any (alguna) other (otra) 
 thing (cosa)? 
 
 34. No, thanks, nothing else. I wish to retire at once. 
 (Literally: No, thanks, nothing more. (I) want to 
 retire myself immediately). 
 
 35. Good night, sir, sleep well! (Literally: Good night 
 (buenas noches^), sir. Or, May you pass (que 
 pase V.) good night (buena noche). 
 
 1 The Present is used very frequently in Spanish, where we 
 employ the Future, as: 
 
 Voy al instante, I will go at once, 
 
 I Me hace V. el favor? Will you do me the favor? 
 
 ■ 2 The definite article is frequently employed in Spanish in place 
 of our possessive pronoun. This is especially the case when parts 
 of the body or articles of dress are mentioned, as: 
 
 I Qué tiene V. en la mano? What have you in your hand? 
 
 á far; a pale; é eve; é there; 5 note; óó room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 29. ¿ Desea V. comer ahora, caballero? 
 
 121 
 
 30. No, gracias. Estoy muy cansado y deseo acos- 
 tarme inmediatamente. 
 
 31. I Desea V. algo más? — No gracias, tengo todo lo 
 que necesito, (ná-tha-se'-tó). 
 
 32. No veo fósforos en el cuarto. Mozo, tráigame ima 
 caja de fósforos, (vá'-o fos-fo-rós trá'^é-gá-má 
 oó'-ná ká'-há). 
 
 33. Aquí están^ los fósforos. ¿Quiere V, alguna otra 
 cosa? (á-ke' ko'-sa). 
 
 34. No, gracias, nada más. Quiero acostarme inme- 
 diatamente. 
 
 35. Buenas noches,^ señor. 
 
 ¡Que pase V. buena noche! 
 
 Me duele la cabeza, My head oches. 
 
 Me quito los zapatos, I am taking off my shoes. 
 
 3 Estar must always be used when temporary existence in a 
 certain place or locality is expressed, as: 
 
 Yo estoy aquí, I am here. 
 
 está en el café, he is at the Café. 
 
 estaba a la puerta, he was at the door. 
 
 ^Good nighty good day, etc., must always be in the plural. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
122 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 I should like to leave by the first train for Mexico, but 
 that is impossible. 
 
 I would like (I should like). 
 
 to leave 
 
 for' 
 
 Mexico 
 
 by^ 
 
 the 
 
 first 
 
 train, 
 
 but 
 
 not 
 
 to me 
 
 it is 
 
 possible. 
 
 ^ The pupil should distinguish well between para and por. 
 
 Para means for^ to^ and denotes direction, destination, aim or 
 purpose, as: 
 
 Estudio para aprender, I study in order to learn. 
 
 Esta carta es para el señor Diaz, This letter is for Mr. Diaz, 
 
 Pienso partir para Italia, I think of starting for Italy. 
 
 Por means for^ hy^ and is used like par in French, with passive 
 verbs, denoting bodily , not mental, actions, as: 
 
 El mundo fué hecho por Dios, The world was created by God. 
 
 Este cuadro fué pintado por Murillo, 
 
 This picture was painted by Murillo. 
 
 Por denotes motive, aim, and is also used in connection with 
 the price of things, as: 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; ó note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 123 
 
 Quisiera salir para Méjico por el primer 
 
 ke-se^á'-rá sá-ler' pá'-rá ma'-^he-kó por ál pre-mér' 
 tren, pero no me es posible, 
 trán, pa'-ró no ma as p5-sébl^. 
 
 Quisiera (ké-se"^a'-rá) 
 salir (sá-lér') 
 para^ (pá'-rá) 
 
 Méjico (má'-‘hé-k5) 
 por^ (por) 
 el (ál) 
 
 primer (pre-mér') 
 tren (trán) 
 pero (pá'-ró) 
 no (no) 
 me (má) 
 es (ás) 
 
 posible (p5-seb'-l}^). 
 
 Lo hace por temor, 
 
 Lo hago por favorecerle, 
 
 I Por cuánto ? 
 
 Daré la casa por dos mil pesos. 
 
 In other words: 
 
 Por signifies: 
 
 Origin^ CausCy Motion. 
 
 ¿ Por qué ? Why? 
 
 ¿ Por quién ? By whom? 
 
 Voy a Madrid por Paris, / 
 travel to Madrid by way of 
 Paris. 
 
 Por la mañana. In the morning. 
 
 He does it from fear. 
 
 I do it to favor him. 
 
 For how much? At what price? 
 I shall sell the house for two 
 thousand dollars. 
 
 Para signifies: 
 Destination y Aimy Intention. 
 
 I Para qué ? For what pur- 
 pose? 
 
 I Para quién? For whom? 
 Quiero salir para Paris, I want 
 to leave for Paris. 
 
 Para mañana, TUI to-morrow. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
124 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 A Journey. 
 
 1. What do you want to do to-morrow forenoon? I 
 should like to leave by the first train for Madrid. 
 (Literally: What wish you to do to-morrow in 
 (por) the morning? (I) should wish (desearía^) 
 to leave for Madrid by the first train). 
 
 2. Excuse me, sir, I should like to go to Madrid. 
 Please tell me where the depot is. (Literally: 
 Excuse you (dispense V.) sir, (I) would wish to go 
 (ir) to (a) Madrid. Do me the favor of to tell me 
 (decirme) where is the station (estación) of the 
 railroad (del ferrocarril). 
 
 3. Excuse me, where is the Central Station? (Liter- 
 ally: Excuse you, where is the Station Central 
 (Central) ? 
 
 4. Pardon me, which is the way to the Central Sta- 
 tion? (Literally: Excuse you, through (por) where 
 one goes to the Station Central)? 
 
 ^ Desearía is the Conditional of desear, to wish, to desire. 
 
 If, therefore, we take the verbs hablar, to speak; vender, to 
 sell, and vivir, to live, as paradigms, the Conditional is formed 
 thus: 
 
 I. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3- 
 
 yo hablana. 
 
 Yenáería. 
 
 viviría. 
 
 V. hablaría. 
 
 venderla. 
 
 viviría. 
 
 él hablana. 
 
 vendería. 
 
 viviría. 
 
 nosotros hablaríamos. 
 
 venderíamos. 
 
 viviríamos. 
 
 V. V. hablarían. 
 
 venderían. 
 
 vivirían. 
 
 ellos hablarían. 
 
 venderían. 
 
 vivirían. 
 
 It will be apparent that a is the characteristic vowel of the first 
 conjugation, e of the second and i of the third. Of course, this 
 would be rendered: I should speaks you would speaks etc. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 125 
 
 Un Viaje. 
 
 óon 
 
 1. ¿ Qué desea V. hacer mañana por la mañana? De- 
 searía^ salir para Madrid por el primer tren, (dá- 
 sa-á-ré'-á). 
 
 2. Dispense V., caballero, desearía ir^ a Madrid. 
 Hágame el favor de decirme dónde está^ la esta- 
 ción^ del ferrocarril, (des-pén'-sj^ da-ther'-m^^ dál 
 fár'-ro kárr-rél'). 
 
 3. Dispense V., ¿ dónde está la estación central? 
 (thén-trál'). 
 
 4. Dispense V., ¿ por dónde se va a la estación central? • 
 
 To the stem of the regular verbs the following terminations are 
 added in 
 
 The Conditional. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 AX 1 a* 
 
 " 6Ixa* 
 
 ■ ItIa* 
 
 aria. 
 
 eria. 
 
 iría. 
 
 
 
 
 ana. 
 
 ^ 6jT1a* 
 
 ■■ UIa* 
 
 arlamos. 
 
 eriamos. 
 
 iríamos. 
 
 
 
 
 ■ anan. 
 
 61 IaXI* 
 
 ■ man. 
 
 arian. 
 
 erian. 
 
 irían. 
 
 2 Ir, to go, is generally followed by a. 
 
 3 Estar is used in reference to localities. 
 
 ^ The depot or station is called la estación, while el ferrocarril or 
 el camino de hierro means the railroad. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
126 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 5. Excuse me, which is the Waiting Room? (Liter- 
 ally: Excuse you, which (cuál) is the parlor of wait- 
 ing (la sala de espera)? 
 
 6. I beg your pardon; where is the ticket-office? 
 
 (Literally: Excuse you, where is the office (el 
 
 despacho) of tickets (de boletos)? 
 
 7. I beg your pardon; I would like to go to Madrid. 
 
 Where is the ticket office? (Literally: Excuse 
 
 you; (I) want to go to Madrid. Where is the 
 office of tickets)? 
 
 8. Pardon me; I would like to leave by the express- 
 train for Madrid. Could you please tell me where 
 the ticket-office is? (Literally: Excuse you, (I) 
 would like to leave by the train express (expreso) 
 for Madrid. Could you (podría V.) tell me where 
 is the office of tickets)? 
 
 9. Go straight ahead. (Literally: Follow you (siga 
 V.) straight. Or: Through there straight). 
 
 10. The ticket-office is on the right side. (Literally: 
 The office of tickets is on the right (a la derecha). 
 
 11. I beg your pardon, could you please tell me on 
 which side the ticket-office is? (Literally: Excuse 
 you, me could you tell on which side (a qué lado) 
 is the office of tickets)? 
 
 ^ Podría is the conditional of the verb poder, to he able. The stu- 
 dent has previously learned the present tense puedo. The future 
 and conditional are conjugated thus: 
 
 Future. 
 yo podré. 
 
 V. podrá, 
 él podrá. 
 
 nosotros podremos. 
 V. V. podrán, 
 ellos podrán. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 podría. 
 
 podría. 
 
 podría. 
 
 podríamos. 
 
 podrían. 
 
 podrían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 127 
 
 5. Dispense V., ¿cuál es la sala de espera? (sá'-lá da 
 as-pa'-rá). 
 
 6. Dispense V;, ¿dónde está el despacho de boletos? 
 (dés-pá'-cho da bó-la'-tos). 
 
 7. Dispense V., quiero ir a Madrid. ¿ Dónde está el 
 
 despacho de boletos {or: el despacho de papeletas, 
 or: el despacho de billetes), (pá-pa-la'-tas bél- 
 
 ya'-tés). 
 
 8. Dispense V., quisiera salir por el tren expreso para 
 Madrid. ¿ Podría V.^ decirme dónde está el des- 
 pacho de billetes? (áks-pra'-só p 5 d-re'-á). 
 
 9. Siga V .2 derecho, (sé'-gá da-ra'-chó). 
 
 Por ahí derecho, (á-é'). 
 
 10. El despacho de billetes^ está a la derecha, (dá-rá'- 
 chá). 
 
 11. Dispense V., ¿me podría V. decir a qué lado está 
 el despacho de boletos? (lá'-do). 
 
 2 Siga V. is the imperative of the irregular verb seguir, to follow. 
 The indicative present is conjugated thus: 
 
 Yo sigo, 
 
 V. sigue, 
 él sigue, 
 
 nosotros seguimos, 
 
 V. V. siguen, 
 ellos siguen, 
 
 3 A ticket is either un billete, un 
 
 I follow, 
 you follow, 
 he follows, 
 we follow, 
 you follow, 
 they follow. 
 
 », una boleta or una papeleta. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; Ó5 room. 
 
128 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 12. On which side is the ticket-office? — On the right. 
 On the left (a la izqtderda). 
 
 13. Please give me a ticket to Madrid. (Literally: 
 Please to give me a ticket for (para) Madrid). 
 
 14. Which class? — Second, please. (Literally: Of what 
 class (clase)? — Of second). 
 
 15. Please give me a second-class ticket to Burgos. (Lit- 
 erally: Please to give me a ticket of second for 
 Burgos). 
 
 16. Single or retmn? (Literally: It want you only 
 (solo) of going (de ida) or .of going and returning 
 (vuelta) ? 
 
 17. Please give me a round-trip ticket. (Literally: 
 Please to give me one of going and returning). 
 
 18. How much is a ticket to Burgos? (Literally: How 
 much is worth (vale) the ticket for Burgos)? 
 
 19. How much is a second class ticket to Burgos? 
 (Literally: How much is worth a ticket of second 
 class for Burgos? Or: How much is (es) the ticket 
 of second class for Burgos)? 
 
 20. How much is a return-ticket third class? (Liter- 
 ally: How much is worth a ticket of going and re- 
 turning of third class (de tercera clase) ? Or: How 
 much is a ticket of going and returning in third 
 (en tercera) ? 
 
 21. Ten dollars, sir. — Here you are. — ^And here is your 
 ticket and your change. (Literally: Ten dollars, 
 sir. — Here them have you, and here have you the 
 ticket and the change (el cambio). 
 
 22. Have you any luggage? Yes, I have a trunk. 
 (Literally: Have you luggage? Yes, (I) have a 
 trunk (un baúl). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 6b room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 129 
 
 12. ¿ A qué lado está el despacho de billetes? A la 
 derecha. A la izquierda, (éth-ké^érr'-dá). 
 
 13. Sírvase darme un billete para Madrid. 
 
 14. ¿De qué clase? De segunda. 
 
 15. Sírvase darme im billete de segunda para Burgos. 
 
 16. ¿Lo quiere V. solo de ida o de ida y vuelta? (só'- 
 ló e'-da é voo'^ál'-tá). 
 
 17. Sírvase darme imo de ida y vuelta. 
 
 18. ¿ Cuánto vale el billete para Burgos? 
 
 19. ¿ Cuánto vale un billete de segunda clase para 
 Burgos? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto es el billete de segunda clase para Bur- 
 gos? 
 
 20. ¿ Cuánto vale un billete de ida y vuelta de tercera 
 clase? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto es un billete de ida y vuelta en tercera? 
 (térr-thá'-rá). 
 
 21. Diez duros, señor. Aquí los tiene V. y aquí tiene 
 V. el billete y el cambio. (kám'-b6'^ó). 
 
 22. ¿ Tiene V. equipaje? Sí, tengo im baúl, (bá-óol'). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
130 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABULARIO. VOCABULARY. 
 
 Continued. 
 
 Se ha equivocado V. (sa á You have made a mistake, 
 a-k e-v 5-k a'-d 5 óós- 
 
 tad'). 
 
 ¿ Qué quiere decir eso? 
 
 El sentido (sén-té'-do). 
 
 Usar, emplear (óó-sárr' am- 
 pla-árr'). 
 
 Esta palabra no se usa en 
 este sentido. 
 
 ¿ Cómo se emplea esta pa 
 labra? 
 
 La frase; las frases. 
 
 La oración; las oraciones. 
 
 Para Hacer Compras. 
 
 Quisiera hacer unas com- 
 pras. 
 
 I Cuánto vale eso? 
 
 I Cuánto es esto? 
 
 I Es eso lo más barato? 
 
 No. se lo puedo dar más 
 barato. 
 
 La cuenta (kwén'^tá). 
 
 El recibo (ra-thé'-vó). 
 
 Sírvase mandar al hotel 
 estos efectos y con 
 ellos la cuenta recibi- 
 da. 
 
 What does that mean? 
 
 The sense. 
 
 To use; to employ. 
 
 This word is not used in 
 this sense. 
 
 How is this word used? 
 
 The phrase; the phrases. 
 
 The sentence; the sen- 
 tences. 
 
 To Make Purchases; to do 
 some shopping. 
 
 I would like to do some 
 shopping. 
 
 How much does that cost? 
 
 What is the price of this? 
 
 Is that the cheapest price? 
 
 I cannot give it to you any 
 cheaper. 
 
 The bill. 
 
 The receipt. 
 
 Please send these goods 
 with a receipted bill to 
 my hotel (please to 
 send to the hotel these 
 goods and with them 
 the bill receipted). 
 
ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 LIBRARY 
 ■ THE 
 
 JNMVERSITY OF (LLINOIF 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 PRAaiCAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc. 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK ; : LONDON 
 The International College erf* Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES. 
 
 Entered a.t 
 
 Stationers' Hall, London, Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 131 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 A Journey 132 
 
 The Ordinal Numbers 138 
 
 To Inquire One^s Way 142 
 
 Purchases, Shopping 146 
 
 Salutations 156 
 
 In a Café. (Exercise) 162 
 
132 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 A Journey. 
 
 Continued. 
 
 23. I would like to check my trunk. Where is the 
 baggage office? (Literally: (I) would like to check 
 (facturar) my trunk. Where is the office of bag- 
 gages (de equipajes)? 
 
 24. Could you please inform me where the baggage- 
 office is? I would like to check this trunk. (Lit- 
 erally: Could you tell me where is the office of 
 baggages? (I) would like to check this trunk. 
 
 25. I will call the porter; he will check your trunk for 
 
 you. (Literally: (I) will call to the (al) porter 
 
 (portero); he to you it will check.) 
 
 26. Porter, this gentleman would like to have his trunk 
 checked. (Literally: Porter, this gentleman would 
 like to check his trunk). 
 
 27. All right; where are you going, sir? (Literally: 
 (It) is very well. To where go you, sir)? 
 
 28. I am going to Madrid. (Literally: (I) go to (para) 
 Madrid). 
 
 29. Have you your ticket? Certainly; here it is. 
 (Literally: Have you already (ya) your ticket? Of 
 course (por supuesto). (I) have it here (helo aquí). 
 
 30. Please give it to me. Go into the waiting-room. 
 I will check your baggage and bring you the check. 
 (Literally: Pray to give me it. Pray to go to the 
 room of waiting. I will check the baggage and 
 you (I) will bring to you the check (el recibo). 
 
 ^ Of the imperative mood of haber, to have^ only one person is 
 used, viz.: hé (accented to distinguish it from he, I have). It is 
 used in the sense of to possess ^ to be and to see. As: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 133 
 
 Un Viaje. 
 
 Continuación, 
 
 23. Quisiera facturar mi baúl. ¿ Dónde está el des- 
 pacho de equipajes? 
 
 24. I Podría V. decirme dónde está el despacho de 
 equipajes? Quisiera facturar este baúl. 
 
 25. Llamaré al portero; él se lo facturará, (pór-tá'-ro 
 fák-tóó-rá-rá'). 
 
 26. Portero, este caballero quisiera facturar su baúl. 
 
 27. Está muy bien. ¿A dónde va V., caballero? 
 
 28. Voy para Madrid. 
 
 29. I Tiene V. ya su billete? Por supuesto. Hélo 
 aquí. Or: Aquí lo tiene V.^ (por sóó-poo^as'-tO 
 á'-lo á-ke'). 
 
 30. Sírvase dármelo. Sírvase ir a la sala de espera. 
 Yo facturaré el equipaje y le traeré a V. el talón, 
 (trá-a-ra' tá-lon). 
 
 heme aquí, here I am. 
 For rules see Part X. 
 
 hé allí su libro, there is your hook. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
134 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 31. Here is your check, sir. There is some overweight 
 to pay. (Literally: Here have you your check. 
 There is (hay que^) to pay overweight (exceso) for 
 the baggage). 
 
 32. Oh! thanks. Here is the money for the over- 
 weight. And how much do I owe you? (Liter- 
 ally: Many thanks. Here have you the money for 
 (para) the overweight. And how much you owe 
 (debo) (I) to you)? 
 
 33. We have no tariff. You may give what you like. 
 (Literally: Not have (we) tariff (tarifa). Give you 
 (dé V.) which you (it) may please (plazca^). 
 
 ^ Haber, to have^ is often used impersonally, t.e., in the third 
 person singular (even when referring to the plural), as: 
 
 Hay un hombre a la puerta. There is a man at the door. 
 
 Hay dos hombres abajo. There are two men downstairs. 
 
 When followed by que and the infinitive of some other verb, it 
 expresses obligation or necessity, and is rendered by to he necessary ^ 
 or its equivalents, as: 
 
 Hoy hay mucho que hacer. There is a great deal to he done to-day, 
 I Qué hay que hacer? What is to he done? 
 
 Mañana habrá mucho que hacer. There will he much to he done 
 
 to-morrow, 
 
 Haber is used to form a great variety of idiomatic expressions; 
 they will be taught seriatim. For conjugation and full rules see 
 Part X. 
 
 2 Dé V. is the imperative mood of dar, to give, 
 
 ® Plazca is the subjunctive mood of placer, to please. 
 
 Verbs ending in cer or cir preceded by a vowels insert before the 
 stem ending a z whenever the stem meets an a or an o, as: 
 
 Indicative Present. 
 Yo plazco. 
 
 V. place, 
 él place. 
 
 nosotros placemos. 
 V. V. placen, 
 ellos placen. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 que yo plazca, 
 que V. plazca, 
 que él plazca, 
 que nosotros plazcamos, 
 que V. V. plazcan, 
 que ellos plazcan. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 135 
 
 31. Aquí tiene V. su talón. Hay^ que pagar exceso 
 por el equipaje, (ak-sá'-só). 
 
 32. Muchas gracias. Aquí tiene V. el dinero para el 
 exceso. ¿ Y cuánto le debo a V.? 
 
 33. No tenemos tarifa. Dé V.^ lo que le plazca.® (tá- 
 ré'-fá dá pláth'-ká). 
 
 The terminations of the present subjunctive are exceedingly 
 simple. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 e. 
 
 
 a. 
 
 — — — 0, 
 
 — — Q,, 
 
 -- - 0 
 
 a. 
 
 emos. 
 
 amos. 
 
 amos. 
 
 ~~~~~ en. 
 
 dll. 
 
 an. 
 
 ■■ ■ ■ en. 
 
 ■■ an. 
 
 an. 
 
 If, therefore, we take the verbs hablar, to speak; vender, to sell; 
 vivir, to livOy as paradigms, the following is: 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I. 
 
 2 . 
 
 3- 
 
 Yo hable. 
 
 venda. 
 
 viva. 
 
 V. hable. 
 
 venda. 
 
 viva. 
 
 él hable. 
 
 venda. 
 
 viva. 
 
 nosotros hablemos. 
 
 vendamos. 
 
 vivawe5. 
 
 V. V. hablew. 
 
 vendan. 
 
 vivan. 
 
 ellos hablen. 
 
 vendan. 
 
 vivan. 
 
 Of course, this form would be rendered: I may speak y you may 
 speak y he may speak y etc. {Footnote continued on next page.) 
 
 á far; a pale: e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
136 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 I* 
 
 34. Oh yes! That’s a “tip,” isn’t it? (Literally: Oh 
 yes! (ya ya)! that (eso) is a tip (una propina^), 
 not is (it) so (así)? 
 
 35. Yes, sir. — Ever so much obliged to you! Americans 
 are always liberal and generous and give good tips. 
 (Literally: Yes, sir, thus (it) is. — Thousand thanks, 
 sir. The Americans are noble (nobles) and gen- 
 erous (generosos) as (pues) (they) give good tips 
 (buenas propinas). 
 
 36. At what time does this train leave? (Literally: 
 At what hour (a qué hora) leaves this train) ? 
 
 37. This train leaves in five minutes. (Literally: 
 This train leaves within (dentro de) five minutes 
 (minutos). 
 
 38. Is there a smoking-car? (Literally: Is there (hay) 
 smoking-car (vagón de fumar)? 
 
 39. Here it is and there is plenty of room (= enough* 
 seats, bastantes asientos). 
 
 40. Do you know when this train arrives in Burgos? 
 At eight P.M. Here is a time-table (un itinerario). 
 
 The subjunctive is rarely used in English conversation; in Span- 
 ish the opposite is the case. English speaking persons experience, 
 therefore, great difficulty in understanding this mood, for which 
 no proper equivalents exist in their tongue. One must really be 
 * ‘Latin-born” to appreciate and use it properly. 
 
 As a general rule, it may be stated that the subjunctive mood 
 is used in clauses dependent on a verb expressing possibility ^ wishj 
 doubts apprehension^ command^ or broadly speaking, emotions of 
 the mind. 
 
 The two clauses are connected by the conjunction que, as: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; óo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 137 
 
 34. Ya ya; eso es una propina,^ ¿ no es así? (ya ya 00'- 
 ná pro-pé'-ná no as á-se')* 
 
 35. Sí señor, así es. — Mil gracias, señor. Los ameri- 
 canos son nobles y generosos pues dan buenas 
 propinas, (nob'-lés é ‘há-ná-ró'-sos póó^as' dan 
 bóo"^á'-nás pró-pé'-nás). 
 
 36. ¿A qué hora sale este tren? (o'-rá). 
 
 37. Este tren sale dentro de cinco minutos, (dén'-tró 
 me-nóó'-tós). 
 
 38. ¿ Hay vagón de fumar? (fob-márr'). 
 
 39. Helo aquí y hay bastantes asientos. 
 
 40. ¿ Sabe V. cuándo llega este tren a Burgos? A las 
 ocho de la noche. Aquí tiene V. un itinerario. 
 (é-te-na-rá'-ré"^ó) . 
 
 ¿ Qué quiere V. que yo haga? What do you want me to do? 
 Quiero que V. escriba a su amigo. 
 
 I wish you would write to your friend. 
 
 In the above sentence the subjunctive mood is used, because 
 uncertainty is implied. 
 
 These general hints must suffice for the present. For full rules 
 see Part X. 
 
 1 The Spaniards — like all European nations — tip almost every 
 one who renders service. Every driver, waiter or servant expects 
 and gets a small ‘‘propina.” 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
138 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.^ 
 
 Primero,^ a. 
 Segundo, a. 
 Tercero, a. 
 
 Cuarto, a. 
 
 Quinto, a. 
 
 Sexto, a. 
 
 Séptimo, a. 
 Octavo, a. 
 
 Nono, a. 
 
 Noveno, a. 
 Décimo, a. 
 Undécimo, a. 
 Duodécimo, a. 
 Décimo tercio. 
 Décimo cuarto. 
 Décimo quinto. 
 Décimo sexto. 
 Décimo séptimo. 
 Décimo octavo. 
 Décimo nono 
 Vigésimo, a. 
 Vigésimo primo. 
 Vigésimo segundo. 
 Vigésimo tercio. 
 Vigésimo cuarto. 
 Vigésimo quinto. 
 Vigésimo sexto. 
 Vigésimo séptimo. 
 
 pré-má'-ró, rá. 
 
 ist. 
 
 sa-góon'-dó, da. 
 
 2nd. 
 
 térr-tha'-ró, rá. 
 
 3rd. 
 
 kwár'-tó, tá. 
 
 4th. 
 
 kén'-tó, tá. 
 
 Sth. 
 
 sás'-to, tá. 
 
 6th. 
 
 sáp'-te-mo, má. 
 
 7th. 
 
 Ok-tá'-vó, vá. 
 n 5 '-nó, ná. 1 
 
 8th. 
 
 9th. 
 
 nO-vá'-nO, ná. J 
 
 dá'-the-mó, má. 
 
 loth. 
 
 óón-dá'-the-mó. 
 
 iith. 
 
 dóo "^o-dá'-thg-mó. 
 
 i2th. 
 
 térr'-the'^ó. 
 
 13th. 
 14th. 
 15th. 
 16th. 
 17th. 
 1 8th. 
 19th. 
 
 vé-‘há'-se-mo, má. 
 
 i 
 
 20th. 
 
 2 ISt. 
 
 22nd. 
 
 23rd. 
 
 24th. 
 
 25th. 
 
 26th. 
 
 27th. 
 
 1 Ordinal numbers are treated like adjectives and agree in gender 
 and number with the noun to which they refer, as: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 139 
 
 THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.' 
 
 Vigésimo octavo. 
 
 
 28th. 
 
 Vigésimo nono. 
 
 
 29th. 
 
 Trigésimo, a. 
 
 tre-‘ha'-sé-mo, má. 
 
 30th. 
 
 Trigésimo primo, etc. 
 
 
 31st. 
 
 Cuadragésimo, a. 
 
 kwá-drá-'ha'-sé-mo. 
 
 40th. 
 
 Quincuagésimo, a. 
 
 kén-kwá-‘ha'-sé-mó. 
 
 50th. 
 
 Sexagésimo, a. 
 
 sák-sá-‘ha'-sé-mo. 
 
 60th. 
 
 Septuagésimo, a. 
 
 sép-tóo^á-^ha'-sé-mó, 
 
 70th. 
 
 Octagésimo, a. 
 
 ók-tá-^ha'-sé-mó. 
 
 80th. 
 
 Nonagésimo, a. 
 
 no-ná-^há'-sé-mo. 
 
 90th. 
 
 Centésimo, a. 
 
 thén-tá'-se-mó. 
 
 1 00th. 
 
 Centésimo primo, etc. 
 
 
 lOISt. 
 
 Ducentésimo, a. 
 
 dóo-thén-tá'-sé-mó. 
 
 200th. 
 
 Trecentésimo, a. 
 
 trá-thén-ta'-se-mó. 
 
 300th. 
 
 Cuadragentésimo, a. 
 
 kwá-drá-^hén-ta'“Sé-mó. 400th. 
 
 Quingentésimo, a. 
 
 ken-‘hén-ta'-sé-mo. 
 
 500th. 
 
 Sescentésimo, a. 
 
 sás-thén-tá'-sé-m 5 . 
 
 600th. 
 
 Septegentésimo, a. 
 
 sáp-té-‘hén-ta'-se-mO. 
 
 700th. 
 
 Octogentésimo, a. 
 
 ok-to-^hén-ta'-se-mó. 
 
 800th. 
 
 Nonagentésimo, a. 
 
 nó-ná-^hén-tá'-se-mó. 
 
 900th. 
 
 Milésimo, a. 
 
 " mé-la'-sé-mo. 
 
 1 000th. 
 
 í Dosmilésimo, a. 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 j doo-mé-la -sé-mo. 
 
 2000th. 
 
 \ Dumilésimo, a. 
 
 
 
 Diez milésimo, a. 
 
 
 1 0,000th. 
 
 Cien milésimo, a. 
 
 100,000 th. 
 
 Millonésimo, a. 
 
 mél-yO-ná'-sé-mo. i,ooo,oooth. 
 
 Postrero, a. 
 
 pos-tra'-ro, rá. 
 
 the last. 
 
 Ultimo, a. 
 
 óol'-te-mó, má. 
 
 the last. 
 
 Este muchacho es el primero, This hoy is the first. 
 
 La Quinta Avenida, Fifth Avenue, 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
140 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES. 
 
 What they are and how they should be studied. 
 
 Having thoroughly mastered the foregoing sentences 
 the student must now familiarize himself with the Con- 
 versational Exercises. 
 
 They consist of purely practical phrases, such as we 
 are in the habit of using -in common every day life. 
 But as every person employs of necessity his own pe- 
 culiar mode of diction, 
 
 Diversity of Expression 
 
 must be acquired from the very start by the student of 
 foreign tongues. 
 
 The most commonplace thought can be expressed in 
 numerous ways, and throughout my books, and espe- 
 cially in the Conversational Parts, I have therefore given 
 a vast number of sentences, which, though worded dif- 
 ferently, are identical in their meanings. 
 
 The Advantages of this Plan 
 
 are self-evident. The pupil is no longer confined to a 
 single phrase, but becomes familiar with a variety of 
 expressions. He does not only learn one sentence by 
 which he may state his wants, but controls the whole 
 
 2 Primero, first, tercero, third, and postrero, last in order, drop 
 the final o in the singular before a noun, as: 
 
 El primer día, the first day. 
 
 el tercer libro, the third hook. 
 
 el postrer discípulo, the last pupil. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 141 
 
 colloquial vocabulary on any one subject, and is thus ena- 
 bled to carry on a conversation with almost any one. 
 
 At the same time 
 
 The Conversations are Graded 
 
 in such a manner, that only such constructions, idioms, 
 moods and tenses are given as have been previously 
 mastered by the student. 
 
 Mere questions and answers of the guide-book style 
 have — as far as possible — been avoided. Later on, all 
 conversations are carried on in Spanish. 
 
 All phrases used are so to say 
 
 Sentence— Moulds. 
 
 They are intended to teach the pupil to think in Spanish 
 and with this end in view, they must always be studied 
 aloud and rendered frequently in Spanish until the 
 pupil can utter them just as smoothly and rapidly in the 
 foreign language as in his own. 
 
 Let it always be remembered that 
 
 ^^Repetitio est mater studiorumJ^ 
 
 Nothing is so essential in the mastery of a foreign tongue 
 as constant repetition. 
 
 ‘Vutta cavat lapidem, non vi, sed saepe cadendo^ 
 
 Primo and tercio are used in place of primero and tercero after 
 another ordinal number, as: 
 
 vigésimo primo, twenty-first, trigésimo tercio, thirty-third. 
 With the exception of primero, the first, the' Spaniards use the 
 cardinal numbers for dates, as: 
 
 I Qué día del mes tenemos hoy? What date is tq-day? 
 Tenemos el quince de junio. It is the i^th of June, 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
142 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 CONVERSATION. 
 
 To Inquire One’s Way. 
 
 1. Excuse me, sir; could you please tell me where 
 Alcalá Street is? (Literally: Excuse me, sir; me 
 could you tell where is the Street of Alcalá (la 
 calle de Alcalá)? 
 
 2. Will you kindly show me the way to St. Joseph’s 
 Street? (Literally: Me do you the favor of to 
 show me (enseñarme), through where lies (queda) 
 the Street of St. Joseph (la calle de San José)? 
 
 3. I beg your pardon, which is the way to St. Joseph’s 
 
 Street? (Literally: Excuse you, through where 
 
 one goes to the Street of St. Joseph)? 
 
 4. Pray is this the way to the Hotel of England? 
 (Literally: Excuse you, is through here the Hotel 
 of England)? 
 
 5. Pardon me, how do I go to the Royal Theatre? 
 
 (Literally: Excuse you, through where lies the 
 
 Theatre Royal (el Teatro Real)? 
 
 6. Pardon me, which is the way to the Variety-Thea- 
 tre? (Literally: Excuse you, through where is the 
 Theatre of Varieties (el Teatro de Variedades)? 
 
 7. Would you be kind enough to tell me the way to 
 
 the depot? (Literally: Would you be so kind 
 
 (seria V. tan amable) to indicate me (de indicar- 
 me) through where (I) can go to the station of the 
 railroad) ? 
 
 ’ Santo, Saint, drops the last syllable before proper names of 
 Saints, as: 
 
 San Juan, St. John. San Pedro, St. Peter. 
 
 The names of the following Saints are exceptions to this rule, 
 viz.: Domingo, Dominic; Tomas, Thomas and Tomé and Toribio^ sls: 
 Santo Tomas, St. Thomas. Santo Domingo, St. Dominic. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 143 
 
 CONVERSACIÓN. 
 
 kón-vérr-sá-thé'^on'. 
 
 Para hacer preguntas acerca del camino. 
 
 pá'-rá á-thérr' pra-góón'-tás á-thérr'-ká dél ká-mé'-nO. 
 
 1. Dispense V. caballero ¿ me podría V. decir dónde 
 está la calle de Alcalá? (kál'-yé da ál-ká-lá')* 
 
 2. ¿ Me hace V, el favor de enseñarme {or: de decir- 
 me), por dónde queda la calle de San^ José? (san 
 ‘hó-sa). 
 
 3. Dispense V., ¿ por dónde se va a la Calle de San 
 José? 
 
 4. Disculpe V., I está por aquí el Hotel de Ingla- 
 terra? 
 
 5. Dispense V., ¿por dónde queda el Teatro Real? 
 (ta-á'-tr 5 rá-ál'). 
 
 6. Disculpe V., ¿ por dónde está el Teatro de Varieda- 
 des? (vá-ré^á-dá'-dás). 
 
 7. ¿ Seria V. tan amable de indicarme por dónde puedo 
 ir a la estación del ferrocarril? 
 
 But when speaking of the Island of St. Thomas we say la isla 
 de san Tomas. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
144 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 8. Will you please tell me whether this street leads to 
 the theatre? (Literally: Me do you the favor of 
 to tell me if I can go through this street to the 
 theatre) ? 
 
 9. Yes, go straight ahead till you come to the 'Tuer- 
 ta del Sol.” (Literally: Yes, sir, foUow you straight 
 (derecho) through her (ella) until that (you) may 
 arrive to the (a la) Puerto del Sol). 
 
 10. Take the second street on the right and go straight 
 ahead till you come to a square. (Literally: Turn 
 you (doble V.) to the right (a la derecha) through 
 the second street and follow you straight on (dere- 
 cho) till that (you) may arrive at a square). 
 
 11. Go across the bridge, then diagonally across the 
 square. You cannot miss your way. (Literally: 
 Pass you (pase V.) the bridge (el puente) and then 
 (entonces) cross you (cruce V.) the square. Not 
 can you mistake yourself (equivocarse) or mistake 
 the way (equivocar el camino). 
 
 12. Is it far from here? No, it is not far (lejos). 
 
 13. Shall I accompany you? Yes, please. (Literally: 
 Want you that you (I) may accompany (acom- 
 pañe)? Me will do you (hará V.) a great favor). 
 
 ^ After the following conjunctions the subjunctive mood must 
 be used, when uncertainty or doubt is expressed or implied: 
 
 a fin de que, in order that, 
 
 a menos que, unless. 
 
 aunque, 
 
 aun cuando, J 
 
 bien que, though. 
 
 en caso que, in case that. 
 
 lejos de que, far from. 
 
 por poco que, however little. 
 
 por mucho que, 1 , 
 
 ^ , ) however. 
 
 por mas que, j 
 
 para que, in order that. 
 
 siempre que, whenever. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 MS 
 
 8. ¿ Me hace V. el favor de decirme, si puedo ir por 
 esta calle al teatro? 
 
 9. Sí, señor, siga V. derecho por ella hasta que llegue^ 
 a la Puerta del Sol.^ (ás'-tá ká lya'ga póó'^érr'-tá 
 dél sol). 
 
 10. Doble V. a la derecha^ por la segunda calle y siga 
 V. derecho hasta que llegue a una plaza, (do'-bl^ 
 plá'-thá) . 
 
 11. Pase V. el puente y entonces cruce V. la plaza* 
 No puede V. equivocarse {or: equivocar el camino)* 
 (én-tón'-thés króo'-thy). 
 
 12. ¿Está lejos de aquí? No, no está lejos, (lá'-^hos). 
 
 13. ¿ Quiere V. que le acompañe? Me hará V. un gran 
 favor, (á-kóm-pán'-yé ár-rá'). 
 
 con tal que, provided that. supuesto que, supposing that, 
 
 hasta que, until. ojalá! would to God! 
 
 2 La puerta del Sol is the name of the most magnificent square 
 in Madrid. Thirteen different streets lead to it. The principal 
 hotels, stores and Cafés are located here, and it may be compared 
 to Trafalgar Square in London or to La Place de l’Opéra in Paris. 
 
 ^ A la derecha, to the right; a la izquierda, to the left. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
146 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Purchases. Shopping, 
 
 1. What do you want to do this forenoon? 
 
 2. I would like to go out to do some shopping. (Lit- 
 erally: (I) wish to go out in order to (para) make 
 some purchases (unas compras). 
 
 3. And where do you want to make your purchases? 
 (Literally: And in where will you make the pur- 
 chases) ? 
 
 4. I really do not know. But you have been several 
 
 times in Madrid. Can you not tell me where I 
 can get some good gloves? (Literally: Truly 
 
 (verdaderamente) not it (I) know; you who 
 have been (ha estado) in Madrid several (varias) 
 times (veces/) will you tell me in where (I) can 
 purchase good gloves)? 
 
 affirmatively: 
 
 I have been, 
 you have been, 
 he has been, 
 we have been, 
 you have been, 
 they have been. 
 
 ^With vez, time, turn, veces, times, turns, the multiplicative 
 numbers are formed: 
 
 una vez, once, 
 
 dos veces, twice. 
 
 tres veces, three times. 
 
 esta vez, this time. 
 
 aquella vez, that time. 
 
 todas las veces, every time. 
 varias veces, several times. 
 
 algunas veces, sometimes. 
 
 la primera vez, the first time. 
 la última vez, the last time. 
 cada vez, each time. 
 
 muchas veces, many times. 
 otra vez, another time. 
 
 a veces, hy turns, sometime. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 147 
 
 Para Hacer Compras. 
 
 1. I Qué quiere V. hacer esta mañana? 
 
 2. Deseo salir para hacer unas compras, (óo'-nás 
 kóm-prás). 
 
 3. ¿ Y en dónde quiere V. hacer las compras? 
 
 4. Verdaderamente no lo sé; V. que ha estado en 
 Madrid varias veces/ ¿ quiere V. decirme en dónde 
 puedo comprar buenos guantes? (vérr-dá-da-rá- 
 mén'-t^ á és-tá'-do vá'-ré^ás va'-thés). 
 
 afirmativo: 
 
 Yo he estado/ (á és-tá'-do). 
 
 V. ha estado, (á ). 
 
 él ha estado, (á 
 
 nosotros hemos estado, (á'-mos ). 
 
 V. V. han estado, (án ). 
 
 ellos han estado, (án ). 
 
 2 There are two verbs in Spanish for to havCy viz., haber and 
 tener. 
 
 The difference between them is this: 
 
 Haber is used exclusively in the formation of compound tenses^ 
 while tener is used as an active verb indicating possession^ (in which 
 case to have may generally be replaced by to hold or to possess with- 
 out affecting the meaning of the sentence). 
 
 Thus: 
 
 He comprado unos guantes, 
 
 I have bought some gloves (Compound tense). 
 No tengo guantes, I have no gloves {I do not possess any). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
148 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 interrogatively: 
 
 have I been? 
 have you been? 
 has he been? 
 have we been? 
 have you been? 
 have they been? 
 
 5. Is that all you need? (Literally: Is that (eso) aU 
 which (you) need (necesita)? 
 
 6. No, I have to buy some small things for my wife. 
 (Literally: No, (I) have also that^ to buy some 
 trifles (algunas frioleras) for my wife). 
 
 7. She needs hairpins, a hair-brush, a tooth-brush, a 
 
 comb and some other trifles. (Literally: She 
 
 needs some hairpins for the hair (unas horquillas 
 para el pelo), a brush of head (un cepillo de cabeza), 
 one for teeth (dientes), a comb (un peine) and 
 other trifles (otras chucherías). 
 
 Both verbs have peculiar idiomatic uses. (See Part X.) 
 
 1 The Past Participle^ which is used for the formation of com- 
 pound tenses, ends in the first conjugation in ado, and in the second 
 and third conjugation in ido. 
 
 If, therefore, we take hablar, vender and vivir as paradigms, 
 the past participles are hablado, spoken; vendido, sold; vivido, 
 lived. 
 
 The compound tenses are: he hablado, I have spoken; he ven- 
 dido, I have sold; he vivido, I have lived. 
 
 2 Usted and ustedes, like the other pronouns, used in interrogative 
 
 sentences with compound tenses stand directly after the participle. 
 I Ha recibido V. la carta? Have you received the letter? 
 
 I No me ha entendido V.? 
 
 Did you not understand me? (Have you not understood me) ? 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 00 roora. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 149 
 
 interrogativo: 
 
 I he estado yo?^ 
 
 ¿ ha estado V. ? 
 
 I ha estado él ? 
 
 ¿ hemos estado nosotros? 
 
 I han estado V. V. 
 
 ¿ han estado ellos? 
 
 5. ¿Es eso todo lo que necesita? (na-thá-se'-tá). 
 
 6. No, tengo^ también que comprar algimas frioleras 
 para mi esposa. (fre-O-lá'-rás) . 
 
 7. Ella necesita unas horquillas para el pelo, un ce- 
 pillo de cabeza, uno para dientes, un peine y otras 
 chucherías. (ór-kél'-yás thá-pel'-yo ká-va'-thá 
 de'^én'-tés pa"^é'-n^ chóó-cha-re'-ás). 
 
 ¿ Qué ha perdido V. ? What have you lost? 
 
 I Ha leído V. los periódicos? Have you read the papers? 
 
 3 There is no verb in Spanish corresponding to the English I must. 
 All expressions with “/ musty'" or “I have to,” or ‘T am obliged to” 
 are expressed by tener que with the verb in the infinitive, as: 
 Tengo que escribir cartas, I have letters to write. 
 
 Tenemos que salir. We must go out. 
 
 ¿ Tiene V. que enviar un despacho? Are you obliged to send a 
 
 dispatch? 
 
 There are a number of other constructions for the English must, 
 to he obliged to, as haber de or hay que, as: 
 
 He de hacer la correspondencia, I have to attend to the corre- 
 
 spondence. 
 
 I Qué hay que hacer? What is there to be done? 
 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 ISO 
 
 8. Please come along as I do not know where to get 
 all these things. (Literally: Pray to come (venir) 
 with me (conmigo^ as (pues) not (I) know in where 
 themselves can obtain (conseguir) all these things). 
 
 9. You can get them quite near. Do you want to go 
 
 at once? (Literally: You can find them near 
 
 (cerca de^) here. Will you go at once)? 
 
 10. Certainly, at once. My wife wishes to go out and 
 
 needs these articles. (Literally: Yes, directly. 
 
 My wife wants to go out and needs all these things). 
 
 11. All right; directly opposite is a very good shop, 
 where you can get everything you need. (Liter- 
 ally: (It) is well; here in front (en frente) there is 
 a good store in where can you obtain all which 
 (you) need). 
 
 12. Is that a cheap shop? 
 
 ^ The preposition con, withy is used in a peculiar manner with 
 the personal pronouns mi, mCy ti, theCy si, to hiniy viz., conmigo, 
 with me; contigo, with thee; consigo, with him. 
 
 2 Encontrar, to meety belongs to the same class of irregular verbs 
 which change the o of the second syllable into ue in the whole 
 of the singular and third person plural of the indicative and subjunc- 
 tive present, and in the corresponding persons in the imperative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 acerca de, concerningy about. 
 además de, beside. 
 
 3 The following prepositions require de 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Yo encuentro. 
 
 V. encuentra, 
 él encuentra, 
 nosotros encontramos. 
 V. V. encuentran, 
 ellos encuentran. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 encuentre, 
 encuentre, 
 encuentre, 
 encontremos, 
 encuentren, 
 encuentren, 
 iré de after them: 
 dentro de, withiny tw, into. 
 después de, after {time or order). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 151 
 
 8. Sírvase V. venir conmigo/ pues no sé en donde 
 se pueden conseguir todas estas cosas. (kOn-me'-go 
 kOn-sá-ghérr'). 
 
 9. V. puede encontrarlas^ cerca de® aquí ¿ Quiere V. 
 salir inmediatamente? (én-kon-trár'lás thérr-ká'). 
 
 10. Sí, inmediatamente. Mi señora quiere salir y ne- 
 cesita todas esas cosas. 
 
 11. Está bien; aquí en frente hay una buena tienda en 
 donde puede V. conseguir todo lo que necesita. 
 
 12. ¿Es una tienda barata? 
 
 alrededor de, around. 
 
 detras de, 
 
 behind. 
 
 antes de, before {time 
 
 encima de 
 
 on, over. 
 
 or order). 
 
 fuera de, 
 
 outside, beyond. 
 
 cerca de, near, about, 
 
 debajo de, under {place), 
 
 delante de, before {place). 
 
 lejos de. 
 
 far from. 
 
 The simple prepositions are: 
 
 a, at, to. 
 
 hacia. 
 
 toward. 
 
 ante, before. 
 
 hasta, 
 
 until. 
 
 bajo, under. 
 
 mediante, 
 
 by means of. 
 
 con, with. 
 
 menos. 
 
 but, except. 
 
 contra, against. 
 
 no obstante. 
 
 notwithstanding. 
 
 de, of, from. 
 
 para. 
 
 for, to. 
 
 desde, from. 
 
 por. 
 
 by, for, through. 
 
 durante, during. 
 
 según, 
 
 according to. 
 
 en, in, on, at. 
 
 sin. 
 
 without. 
 
 entre, between, among. 
 
 sobre. 
 
 on, upon. 
 
 excepto, except. 
 
 tras. 
 
 behind. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
Í52 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 13. Oh! yes, quite cheap. You know that toilet ar- 
 
 ticles are much cheaper here than in America. 
 (Literally: Yes, pretty (bastante) cheap. You 
 
 know very well that all those articles for toilet 
 (tocador) are here much more cheap than in Amer- 
 ica). 
 
 14. Here is our shop; pretty large, isn’t it? Yes, 
 quite large and pretty. (Literally: Here have you 
 the store; somewhat (algo) large, not is (it) truth 
 (no es verdad)? Yes, rather large and pretty 
 (bonita). 
 
 15. What do you want to buy first? Gloves. . (Liter- 
 ally: What wish you to buy first? Gloves). 
 
 16. I want two pairs of gloves, a pair of black ones 
 and a pair of brown ones. Please show me some 
 good kid gloves. (Literally: (I) want two pairs 
 (pares) of gloves, one (uno) black (negro) and 
 other brown (oscuro) . Pray to show me some 
 (unos) gloves of kid good). 
 
 17. Do you want a light-brown? (Literally: Them 
 want you very light (claros)? 
 
 ^ The comparative is formed by placing más, more, or menos, 
 less, before the adjectives, as: 
 
 caro, dear. más caro, dearer. menos caro, less dear. 
 
 The superlative is formed either by placing el, lo, la, más or 
 menos before the adjective, or by adding isimo, isima to the ad- 
 jective whose last vowel is then elided, as: 
 
 caro, dear; el más caro, the dearest. 
 
 ^ muy caro or carísimo, very dear. 
 
 The former is called the relative superlative^ and the latter the 
 absolute superlative. 
 
 The comparative is usually followed by que, thaUy as: 
 
 Es más hábil que su hermano, he is more skillful than his brother, 
 él tiene más dinero que yo, he has more money than I. 
 
 For further rules see Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 153 
 
 13. Si, bastante barata. V. sabe muy bien que todos 
 esos artículos para tocador son aquí mucho más^ 
 baratos que en América, (tó'ká-dorr'). 
 
 14. Aquí tiene V. la tienda, ¿ algo grande, no es ver- 
 dad Sí, bastante grande y bonita, (vérr-dád' 
 bó-né'-tá). 
 
 15* ¿ Qiié desea V. comprar primero? Guantes. 
 
 16. Quiero dos pares de guantes, uno negro y otro 
 oscuro.^ Sírvase enseñarme unos guantes de ca- 
 britilla buenos, (pá'-rés nag'-ró ós-koo'-ro ká-vré- 
 tel'-yá). 
 
 17. ^ ¿ Los quiere V. muy claros? (klá'-rós). 
 
 2 The Spanish mode of expression: “No es verdad?” is peculiar. 
 It resembles the German “nicht wahr ?”, or the French “n’est-ce pas?” 
 
 3 The principal colors are: — Los colores principales son: 
 
 Blacky negro. Pink. rosado or color 
 
 de rosa. 
 
 hluOy azul. 
 
 pale hlue^ azul claro. 
 
 dark hluey azul oscuro. 
 
 brown^ castaño. 
 
 crimson^ carmin. 
 
 greeny verde. 
 
 olive greeny verde olivo. 
 
 orangey naranja. 
 
 red y rojo. 
 
 purpUy púrpura. 
 
 lilaCy lila. 
 
 violety violeta. 
 
 yelloWy amarillo. 
 
 whitCy blanco. 
 
 flesh-color. encarnado. 
 ultramariney ultramarino. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
IS4 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 1 8. Not too light; give me a good medium color, if you 
 
 please. (Literally: Not very light. Give me 
 
 (déme) a color (un color) which not may be (sea) 
 very light). 
 
 19. What price do you wish to pay? — Not too dear, 
 please. (Literally: Of what price them want you? 
 — Not very dear). 
 
 20. For four pesetas I can give you a very good glove. 
 (Literally: For four pesetas to you (I) can give 
 some very good). 
 
 21. How much is that in American money (en mone- 
 da americana)? 
 
 22. A peseta is 20 cents (centavos). Five pesetas are 
 equal to a dollar. (Literally: One dollar has five 
 pesetas). 
 
 23. Five pesetas are equal to a dollar in American 
 money. That is cheap for these gloves, isn’t it? 
 (Literally: Five pesetas .are one dollar in money 
 American. Not you seem (they) to you (le pare- 
 cen a V.) cheap)? 
 
 24. Yes, that’s very cheap. For a dollar we can’t get 
 gloves like those in the United States. (Literally: 
 Yes, to me (they) seem very cheap. For a dollar 
 not (we) have gloves like (como) those in the States 
 United (los Estados Unidos). 
 
 1 The subjunctive mood must be employed here, as a wish and 
 consequently a possibility is implied. The subjunctive present of 
 ser, to he^ is conjugated; 
 
 Yo sea, I may he. 
 
 V. sea, you may he. 
 
 él sea, 
 
 nosotros seamos, 
 V. V. sean, 
 ellos sean, 
 
 he may he. 
 we may he. 
 you may he. 
 they may he. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room.. 
 
The Spanish Lcmguage, 155 
 
 18. No muy claros. Déme un color que no sea^ muy 
 claro. 
 
 19. ¿De qué precio los quiere V.? — No muy caros. 
 
 20. Por cuatro pesetas le puedo dar unos muy buenos, 
 (pá'sa'-tás). 
 
 íi. ¿ Cuánto es eso en moneda americana? (mó-na'- 
 dá). 
 
 22. Una peseta es veinte centavos. Un duro tiene cinco 
 pesetas, (thén-tá'-vós) . 
 
 23. Cinco pesetas son un duro en moneda americana. 
 ¿ No le parecen^ a V. baratos? (pá-rá'-thén). 
 
 24. Sí, me parecen muy baratos. Por un duro no 
 tenemos guantes como esos en los Estados Unidos, 
 (és-tá'-dos óo-né'-dos). 
 
 2 It seems to me, is expressed by me parece, as: 
 
 That seems very dear to me, Me parece demasiado caro. 
 
 It seems all right, Me parece bien. 
 
 In a similar way we say for: Doesn't it seem to you" or: "Don't 
 
 you think?" ¿No le parece a V.? 
 
 Don't you think the weather is ¿ No le parece a V. que el 
 
 going to clear? tiempo se va a aclarar? 
 
 No, I don't think so. No, no me parece así. 
 
 Don't you think it is going to <i No le parece a V. que va a 
 
 rain? Hover? 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
156 The Rosenthal M ethod, 
 
 25. Will you try on these gloves? (Literally: Will 
 you try to you them (probárselos)? 
 
 26. These gloves do not fit me; they are too tight 
 (estrechos); — too large (grandes). 
 
 27. How much does that amount to? (Literally: How 
 much amounts to (importa) all)? 
 
 28. That amounts to 15 pesetas in all. (Literally: 
 All amounts to 15 pesetas). 
 
 Salutations. 
 
 1. Good morning, how are you?^ 
 
 2. Thanks, I am pretty well. 
 
 3. And how is your wife (su señora)? 
 
 4. My wife is quite well, thank you. 
 
 5. And how are you, yourself? — Quite well, thanks. 
 (Literally: And you? How so?^ Perfectly well; 
 thanks) ? 
 
 6. And how is your brother? (Literally: And your 
 brother, how succeeds or follows (sigue^)? 
 
 ^ As estar, to he, is used to describe the temporal or accidental 
 state of persons or things, i.e,, when a change is likely to occur 
 at any time, it follows logically that it must be used to denote the 
 state of health, as: 
 
 How are you? ¿ Cómo está V. ? 
 
 I am well. Estoy bien. 
 
 How is your partner? ¿ Cómo está su socio? 
 
 He is better. Está mejor. 
 
 This young man is ill. Este joven está enfermo. 
 
 2 A strictly idiomatic expression, but very generally used. 
 
 3 Para servir a V., at your service (literally: in order to serve 
 you), an idiomatic phrase used as an expression of politeness. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 IS7 
 
 25. ¿Quiere V. probárselos? (pró-bárr'-sá-lOs). 
 
 26. Estos guantes no me sirven; me quedan muy estre- 
 chos; — me están muy grandes, (és-tra'-chos). 
 
 27. ¿Cuánto importa todo? (ém-pórr'-tá). 
 
 28. Todo importa quince pesetas. 
 
 1. Buenos días, ¿cómo está V.?^ 
 
 ¿Qué tal ?^ (ka tal). 
 
 2. Estoy muy bien, gracias. 
 
 3. ¿Y cómo está su señora? (sén-yó'-rá). 
 
 4. Mi señora está muy bien, gracias. 
 
 5. Y V., ¿qué tal? — Perfectamente bien; gracias, 
 (also: Para servir a V., gracias^). 
 
 6. Y su hermano, ¿ cómo sigue^? (sé'-gh}^). 
 
 ^ Another mode of expression used in inquiries in regard to health. 
 Seguir means literally to follow. It is conjugated thus: 
 
 Saludos. 
 
 sa-lóó'-dos. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Yo sigo. 
 
 V. sigue, 
 él sigue. 
 
 nosotros seguimos. 
 V. V. siguen, 
 ellos siguen. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 sigan. 
 
 sigan, 
 
 siga. 
 
 siga. 
 
 siga. 
 
 sigamos. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 158 
 
 7. I hope he has quite recovered. (Literally: (I) 
 
 hope (espero) (he) may be (esté^) already (ya) 
 well). 
 
 8. I am very well, thanks, but my poor brother, I am 
 sorry to say, can not yet go out. He is still very 
 weak. (Literally: I am very well, thanks, but my 
 poor (pobre) brother, (I) grieve (siento^) to say, 
 not can yet (atm) go out. Still (todavía) (he) is 
 very weak (débil). 
 
 9. I am very sorry for that. Have you a good physi- 
 cian? (Literally: It (I) grieve much (mucho^). 
 
 Have you a good physician (médico)? 
 
 ^ The subjunctive esté must be employed here, as a wish and 
 possibility is implied. The subjunctive of the present tense of estar 
 is conjugated: 
 
 Yo esté, 
 
 V. esté, 
 él esté, 
 
 nosotros estemos, 
 
 V. V. estén, 
 ellos estén, 
 
 2 Siento from sentir, to feel or to he sorry. I am very sorry, lo 
 siento mucho. It is conjugated thus in the 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Yo siento. sienta. 
 
 V. siente. sienta. 
 
 I may be. 
 you may he. 
 he may he. 
 we may be. 
 you may be. 
 they may be. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 1 59 
 
 7. Espero esté^ ya bueno. 
 
 8. Yo estoy muy bien, gracias, pero mi pobre her- 
 mano, siento* * decir, no puede aún salir. Todavía 
 está muy débil. (pOv'-r^ sé'~'an'-tó da-thérr' t 5 - 
 dá-vé'-á da'-vél). 
 
 9. Lo siento mucho.* ¿ Tiene V. un buen médico? 
 (ma'-de-ko). 
 
 él siente. 
 
 nosotros sentimos. 
 V. V. sienten, 
 ellos sienten. 
 
 sienta. 
 
 sintamos, 
 
 sientan. 
 
 sientan. 
 
 * The use of the adverbs muy and mucho must be noted by the 
 student. Muy can never qualify a verb and cannot stand alone. 
 Mucho, on the other hand, can be used with verbs only and stands 
 by itself. Mucho is always used in connection with hacer when 
 referring to the weather. 
 
 Hace mucho frío, 
 
 Hace mucho calor, 
 
 Hace mucho sol, 
 
 ¿Hace mucho frío hoy? Sí, 
 mucho, 
 
 I Habla muy bien ? Sí, muy 
 bien. 
 
 It is very cold. 
 
 It is very warm 
 It is very sunny. 
 
 It is very cold to-day? Yes, 
 very. 
 
 Does he speak very well ? Yes, 
 very. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
i6o 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 10. Yes, our physician is very good, but my brother 
 was (estuvo^) very ill (grave) and is, as I told you, 
 very weak as yet (=and as you (I) told (dije^) to 
 you still (aun) (he) is very weak). 
 
 11. But he will surely soon get well. He is quite young, 
 
 his constitution is good, and at his age, health is 
 recovered easily. (Literally: But soon (pronto) 
 
 (he) will become (se pondrá^) well. (He) is very 
 young (joven), his constitution (su constitución) 
 good and at (a) his age (edad) (it) recovers the 
 health easily (fácilmente). 
 
 12. Let us hope so. (Literally: God (Dios) it may will 
 (quiera). Or: Would to God (ojalá)! 
 
 13. To-morrow I will call again on you. I must see 
 
 how your brother is getting along. Meanwhile 
 give him my regards. (Literally: To-morrow I 
 
 shall return (volveré) to (a) see you to you, as (pues) 
 I desire to know how gets on (sigue) your brother. 
 Whilst so long (mientras tanto) give him you my 
 regards (mis recuerdos). 
 
 14. Goodbye! (Literally: Till the seen (hasta la vista). 
 
 ^ The Definido (past definite tense) denotes what occurred on 
 a certain occasion wholly past, whether it happened yesterday, 
 a few weeks before, or ages ago. It is, therefore, called the his- 
 torical tense and is used especially in narration. Estuve, I was, 
 is conjugated: 
 
 Yo estuve. 
 
 I was. 
 
 V. estuvo, 
 
 you were. 
 
 él estuvo. 
 
 he was. 
 
 nosotros estuvimos, 
 
 we were. 
 
 V. V. estuvieron. 
 
 you were. 
 
 ellos estuvieron. 
 
 they were. 
 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 2 Dije is the definido of the irregular verb decir, to say, to tell. 
 It is conjugated: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 i6i 
 
 10. Si, nuestro médico es muy bueno, pero mi hermano 
 estuvo^ muy grave, y como le dije^ a V. atm está 
 muy débil, (és-tóo'-vó grá'-^v^ dé'-^h^^). 
 
 11. Pero pronto se pondrá^ bueno. Es muy joven, su 
 constitución buena y a su edad se recobra la salud 
 fácilmente. (pOn-drá' ‘hó'-vén kón-sté-tóo-the^on' 
 a-dád'). 
 
 12. ¡Dios lo quiera! 
 
 13. Mañana volveré a verle a V., pues deseo saber 
 como sigue su hermano. Mientras tanto déle V. 
 mis recuerdos. 
 
 14. ¡Hasta la vista! 
 
 3 Pondrá is the future of the irregular verb poner, to put^ to place. 
 Ponerse means to become. The Future is conjugated: 
 
 ¡Ojalá! 
 
 nosotros dijimos, 
 V. V. dijeron, 
 ellos dijeron, 
 
 Yo dije, 
 V. dijo, 
 él dijo, 
 
 / said, 
 you said, 
 he said, 
 we said, 
 you said, 
 they said. 
 
 Yo pondré, 
 V. pondrá, 
 él pondrá, 
 
 I shall put. 
 you will put. 
 he will put. 
 we shall put. 
 you will put., 
 they will put. 
 
 nosotros pondremos, 
 V. V. pondrán, 
 ellos pondrán. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
IÓ2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Translate this exercise into Spanish and send it to our 
 Correspondence Department for correction. 
 
 In a Café. 
 
 Is this the ^^Café des Beaux-Arts’’?^ — ^Yes, sir. — K. 
 friend of mine^ made^ an appointment^ with me to meet® 
 him here, in the billiard-room.® — Please pass through 
 this^ room and go® through the door® on the left. — Hallo! 
 Here I am!^® — ^What do you think^^ of this café? — ^As 
 far as I have seen it,^^ it seems very fine to me. — Come^® 
 with me; just look^^ at the handsome mirrors. — Here 
 is^® the reading-room; the best papers of the world are 
 here on file.^® — Is it well patronized — Yes, sir; this is 
 not only a café, but a place for general amusement.^® 
 The most refined people of the city frequent it;^® literary 
 men, artists and the best pianists come here.^ — Some 
 one is now taking a seat at the piano.^^ — That is Mr. 
 Fernandez. Listen how^ well he interprets German 
 music. — ^Are you fond of German music — ^Very, but 
 I prefer Italian music.^ 
 
 ^¿El Café de las Bellas Artes? friend mine. ^Gave, dió. 
 ^ Una cita. ® For to meet us here, para encontramos aquí. ® La 
 sala de billares. ^ Este salón. ® Entrar. ^ La puerta. Here me 
 have you. l Qué le parece a V. ? For which I have seen (visto). 
 
 Venga. i Mire qué hermosos espejos! Here have you el salón 
 de lectura. Where are met the best papel» (periódicos) of all the 
 world (el mundo). Is (it) much frequented (frecuentado)? 
 
 But (sino) a place (un lugar) for to pass good times (ratos) and 
 enjoy one’s self (divertirse). The most select youth (la juventud 
 mas escogida) of the city come here, Among the which (entre los 
 cuales) there are literary men (literatos), artistas y muy buenos 
 pianistas. At the (al) piano. “ Hear you (oiga V.) how well 
 interprets (interpreta) the music (la música) German (alemana). 
 ^ ¿ Le gusta a V.? Me gusta mucho, pero prefiero 
 
LIBRARY 
 ■ THE 
 
 UNIVERSiTV Of ILLINO!? 
 
 ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 CONHON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRAaiCAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BV 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 R evised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK :: LONDON 
 The International College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT 1905. 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES 
 
 Entered at 
 
 Sttationers* Hall, London, Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 
 163 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Conversation 164 
 
 Importance of the Spanish Language 172 
 
 Use of Haber and Tener 175 
 
 Seasons.. 182 
 
 Spanish Characteristics 184 
 
 In a Café. (Exercise) 190 
 
 A Bank. (Exercise) 191 
 
 Vocabulary 192 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Conversation. 
 
 1. Do you understand Spanish? (Literally: Under- 
 stand you the Spanish)? 
 
 2. I can understand Spanish slightly but not very 
 well. (Literally: It (I) understand a little, but 
 not very well). 
 
 3. Do you understand me when I speak rapidly? 
 
 (Literally: Me understand you when (I) speak 
 
 fast) ? 
 
 4. I understand you when you talk slowly and dis- 
 tinctly; but when you commence to speak rapidly 
 or, I ought to say, when you talk naturally, I can 
 scarcely understand a word. (Literally: You (I) 
 understand when speak you slowly and distinctly, 
 but when commence you (empieza V.^ to (a) speak 
 fast, or better (mejor^) said (dicho) when speak 
 you naturally not (I) understand scarcely (casi) 
 one word). 
 
 1 Empezar, to begin, belongs to that large class of irregular verbs 
 which insert i before the stem- vowel e — ie throughout the singular 
 and in the third person plural of the present indicative and the 
 subjunctive and in the same persons in the imperative. 
 
 * Present. 
 
 Indicative, Subjunctive, 
 
 Yo empiezo. empiece. 
 
 V. empieza. empiece, 
 
 él empieza. empiece, 
 
 nosotros empezamos. empecemos. 
 
 V. V. empiezan. empiecen, 
 
 ellos empiezan. empiecen. 
 
 The subjunctive is written with a c, because all verbs ending in 
 zar change z into c before e. 
 
 2 Verbs of motion, destination, encouragement, inclination or 
 habit, or reflexive verbs strong moral decision or effort, require 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 Conversación. 
 
 
 1. I Entiende V. el español? 
 
 2. Lo entiendo un poco, pero no muy bien. 
 
 3. ¿ Me entiende V. cuando hablo aprisa? (á-pré'-sá). 
 
 4. Le entiendo cuando habla V. despacio y claro, 
 pero cuando empieza V.^ d? hablar aprisa, o mejor^ 
 dicho, cuando habla con naturalidad, no entiendo 
 casi una palabra. (ém-pé'^a'-thá ma-^hórr'dé'- 
 cho). 
 
 the preposition a before the infinitive of the verb they govern, 
 I only mention the following verbs: 
 
 animar a, 
 aprender a, 
 aspirar a, 
 comenzar a, 
 echar a, 
 empezar a, 
 enseñar a, 
 
 to encourage to. 
 to learn to. 
 to aspire to. 
 
 to begin to. 
 
 to teach to. 
 
 enviar a, 
 habituar a, 
 inclinar a, 
 ir a, 
 
 ponerse a, 
 tender a, 
 volver a, 
 
 to send to. 
 to accustom to. 
 to incline to. 
 to go to. 
 to begin to. 
 to aim to. 
 to return to^ 
 to — again. 
 
 For full list and examples see Part X. 
 
 ^ The following adjectives are compared irregularly: 
 
 Grande, large; mayor, larger; el, la, lo mayor, the largest. 
 
 pequeño, small; menor, smaller; el, la, lo menor, the smallest. 
 
 bueno, good; mejor, better; el, la, lo mejor, the best. 
 
 malo, bad; peor, worse; e.l, la, lo peor, the worst. 
 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 1 66 
 
 5. That's a great pity! (Literally: What pity (lás- 
 tima)! Or: That is a pity)! 
 
 6. Your ear lacks training. (Literally: To your ear 
 (oido) you^ (it) wants (falta) practice (práctica). 
 
 7. You ought to listen more to Spaniards when they 
 converse with each other. (Literally: Ought you 
 to listen (escuchar) more to the Spaniards when 
 (they) speak among themselves (entre sí). 
 
 8. I have tried to do that, but it seems to me that 
 the Spanish people talk a great deal faster than 
 we. (Literally: It (I) have tried (tratado) to (de) 
 do, but me (it) seems that the Spaniards speak 
 much more fast than we). 
 
 The following adverbs have also an irregular comparative and 
 superlative: 
 
 bien, well. 
 
 mejor, better; 
 
 mal, badly; 
 
 peor, worse; 
 
 mucho, much; 
 
 mas, more; 
 
 poco, little; 
 
 menos, less; 
 
 lo mejor, muy bien. 
 
 besty very well. 
 
 lo peor, muy mal. 
 
 ' worsty very badly. 
 
 lo más, muchísimo. 
 
 most. 
 
 lo menos, poquísimo. 
 
 least. 
 
 See Part X. 
 
 1 Usted is — as we have noticed before — ^frequently used in con- 
 
 nection with its substitute le 
 
 in the pleonastic construction, when 
 
 joined to the same verb: 
 
 Le diré a V., 
 
 / shall tell you. 
 
 1 qué le pasa a V. ? 
 
 what is the matter with you? 
 
 le busco a V., I am looking for you. 
 
 I le he servido a V. a su gusto ? have I served you according to 
 
 your taste? 
 
 Le and se are often used in Spanish, not only with usted, but 
 with a noun: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 167 
 
 5. ¡Qué lástima! 
 
 Eso es ima lástima, (lás'-té-má). 
 
 6. A su oido de V. le^ falta práctica, (ó'^é'-dó fál'- 
 tá prák'-té-ká). 
 
 7. Debe V. escuchar más a los españoles cuando ha- 
 blan entre sí. (és-kóo-chárr' sé). 
 
 8. Lo he tratado de^ hacer, pero me parece que los 
 españoles hablan mucho más aprisa que nosotros. 
 
 A mi padre le pareció muy caro. It seemed very dear to my father. 
 
 A mi hermana se lo había dicho. He had told it to my sister. 
 
 2 The following verbs require de before the infinitive: 
 
 acabar de, 
 
 to have just. 
 
 acordarse de, 
 
 to remember to. 
 
 alegrarse de, 
 
 to be glad. 
 
 cesar de. 
 
 to cease to. 
 
 dejar de. 
 
 to fail to. 
 
 desistir de, 
 
 to cease from. 
 
 disuadir de. 
 
 to dissuade from. 
 
 encargar de, 
 
 to commission to. 
 
 excusar de. 
 
 to excuse from. 
 
 eximir de. 
 
 to free from. 
 
 haber de. 
 
 to have to. 
 
 ocuparse de. 
 
 to busy one's self with. 
 
 olvidarse de. 
 
 to forget to. 
 
 tratar de. 
 
 to try to. 
 
 
 Ejemplos : 
 
 Acabo de llegar. 
 
 I have just arrived. 
 
 No me acuerdo de haberlo dicho, I do not remember saying so. 
 
 Se me olvidó de decirlo. 
 
 I forgot to tell it. 
 
 No deja de estudiar. 
 
 He does not cease studying. 
 
 Trataré de hacerlo. 
 
 I shall try to do it. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 1 68 
 
 9. That only seems so to you. In time and by prac- 
 tice your ear will get accustomed to it and you 
 will find it quite esay to. understand almost any 
 conversation. (Literally: That you seems to you. 
 With time and practice itself will accustom (se 
 acostumbrará) the ear and then (ya) will see you 
 (verá V.) the easy which is understand any (cual- 
 quiera) conversation). 
 
 10. I hope so. But pardon me, you have just used an 
 
 expression which is new to me. What is the literal 
 meaning of: ^‘Ya verá V.’’? (Literally: Would 
 
 to God (ojalá) ! But pardon you, finish you (acaba 
 V.) from (de) to use (usar) an expression which 
 me is new. What will say literally ^‘Ya verá V.”? 
 
 11. ‘^Ya verá means literally: ‘^Already (then) 
 
 will see you.’^ Do you understand now what ^‘Ya 
 verá means? (Literally: ^'Ya verá V.’’ will 
 say literally: ‘^Already (then) will see you.’^ Un- 
 derstand you already what will say: ‘‘Ya verá V.’O? 
 
 12. Yes, now I understand it and I wish that you would 
 always give me literal translations. (Literally: 
 Yes, already it (I) understand and wish that me 
 may give (dé) you always the translation literal 
 (la traducción literal). 
 
 1 Acostumbrar means to accustom; acostumbrarse (reflexive), 
 to get accustomed to, 
 
 2 Future of ver, to see. 
 
 3 Cualquiera, plural cualesquiera, any {whatever), is used both 
 as an adjective or as a substantive, relating to persons or things. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 169 
 
 9. Eso le parece a V. Con tiempo y práctica se acos- 
 tumbrará^ el oido y ya verá V.^ lo fácil que es en- 
 tender cualquiera^ conversación. (te"^am'-po á-kos- 
 tóom-brá-rá' vá-rá' kwál-ke^a'-rá). 
 
 10. ¡Ojalá! Pero dispense V., acaba V. de^ usar una 
 expresión que me es nueva. ¿ Qué quiere decir 
 literalmente ‘^Ya verá V.’’? 
 
 II. “Ya verá V.’’ quiere decir literalmente: “Already 
 (then) will see you.” ¿Entiende V. ya lo que 
 quiere decir: “Ya verá V.”? 
 
 -12. Sí, ya lo entiendo y deseo que me dé V. siempre 
 la traducción literal, (se^am'-pr^ trá-dóók-the^ 
 ón'). 
 
 ^ Acabar de corresponds to the French venir de and expresses 
 our justy just noWy as: 
 
 Acabo de recibir su carta, I have just received your letter. 
 
 Acabo de oir de su llegada, I have just heard of his arrival. 
 
 Acaban de dar las cuatro. It has just struck four {o'clock). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
170 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 13. Literal translations, my dear sir, are in the major- 
 ity of cases an impossibility. (Literally: Trans- . 
 lations literal, friend mine, (amigo mio^), are im- 
 possible in many cases (en muchos casos). 
 
 14. And why? 
 
 15. Because every language possesses its own pecu- 
 liarities, its own idioms and modes of expression 
 which can never be translated literally. (Liter- 
 ally: Because every (cada) language has its pecu- 
 liarities (peculiaridades), its idioms (modismos) and 
 forms (formas) of expression which never (nunca) 
 themselves can translate (traducir) literally). 
 
 16. Are there many idiomatic expressions in Spanish? 
 
 (Literally: Are there (hay) in Spanish many 
 
 idioms) ? 
 
 ^ The absolute possessive adjectives are: 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 mío, mía, míos, mías, my. 
 
 (tuyo, tuya, tuyos, tuyas, thy). 
 
 nuestro, nuestra, nuestros, nuestras, 
 
 (vuestro, vuestra, vuestros, vuestras. 
 
 suyo, suya, 
 
 suyos, suyas, 
 
 his. 
 
 her. 
 
 its, 
 
 your. 
 
 our. 
 
 your), 
 
 their. 
 
 suyo, suya. 
 
 suyos, suyas. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 171 
 
 13. Traducciones literales, amigo mío,^ son imposi- 
 bles en muchos casos, (ém-po-sé'-blés ká'-sós). 
 
 14. ¿ Y por qué? 
 
 1$. Porque cada idioma tiene sus peculiaridades, sus 
 modismos y formas de expresión que nunca se 
 pueden traducir literalmente.^ (ká'-dá e-dé"^o'-má 
 pá-kóo-lyá-ré-dá'-dés mo-dés'-mós éks-pra-se"^ón' 
 trá-dóó-thérr'). 
 
 16. ¿ Hay en español muchos modismos? 
 
 These absolute forms are employed in direct address, but without 
 the definite article: 
 
 amigo mío, my friend {my dear friend), 
 
 hijo mío, my son {my dear son), 
 
 muy señores míos. Gentlemen {Dear Sirs [in letters]). 
 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 2 Adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding mente to the 
 feminine form of the adjective, as: 
 
 Antiguo, old; 
 
 común, common; 
 
 fácil, easy; 
 
 fuerte, strong; 
 
 franco, frank; 
 
 Antiguamente, in olden times 
 comunmente, commonly, 
 fácilmente, easily. 
 
 fuertemente, strongly, 
 
 francamente, frankly. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
172 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 IMPORTANCE OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 
 
 17. The Spanish language, my dear sir, is one of the 
 richest tongues in the world. Among modem 
 tongues German and Spanish rank highest in ex- 
 pressions and, as a matter of course, contain many 
 idioms. (Literally: The language Spanish, friend 
 mine, is one of the richest (uno de los más ricos) 
 of the world (del mundo). Among (entre^) the 
 tongues modem (modernos) the German and the 
 Spanish are the richest and for that (por lo tanto) 
 have many idioms). 
 
 18. Would you have the kindness to mention some of 
 the most generally used idioms? I mean expres- 
 sions which come up in every-day conversation. 
 (Literally: Would you have the kindness (la bon- 
 dad) to quote (citar) some of the idioms most 
 used (usados) ? (I) will say those (los) which 
 themselves use in conversation daily (diaria). 
 
 19. With pleasure. You remember the verb, tener, 
 which we studied in our first book? (Literally: 
 With much pleasure (gusto). Yourself remember 
 you (se acuerda V.) of the verb ‘Tener’^ which we 
 studied (estudiamos^) in the first book)? 
 
 ^ Entre, between ^ among, belongs to the simple prepositions which 
 govern the accusative. Compare Part X. 
 
 2 The Definido, the use of which has already been explained, is 
 formed by adding the following endings to the stem of regular verbs: 
 
 I. 
 
 Definido. 
 
 2 and 3. 
 
 é. 
 
 ó. 
 
 ó. 
 
 amos. 
 
 aron. 
 
 aron. 
 
 irnos. 
 
 ieron. 
 
 ieron. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 
 
 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 173 
 
 IMPORTANCIA DEL IDIOMA ESPAÑOL. 
 
 17. El idioma español, amigo mío, es tmo de los más 
 ricos del mundo. Entre^ los idiomas modernos 
 el alemán y el español son los más ricos y por lo 
 tanto tienen muchos modismos. 
 
 18. ¿ Tendría V. la bondad de citar algunos de los mo- 
 dismos más usados? Quiero decir de los que se 
 usan en la conversación diaria, (thé-tárr' óo-sa'- 
 dós). 
 
 19. Con mucho gusto. ¿Se acuerda V. del verbo 
 ‘^tener’’ que estudiamos^ en el primer libro? (á- 
 kwérr'-dá). 
 
 The regular verbs of the second and third conjugation have the 
 same endings. If; therefore, we take hablar, to speaks vender, 
 to sell^ and vivir, to live^ as paradigms we have the following con- 
 jugations for the 
 
 Definido. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3 - 
 
 Yo hablé. 
 
 vendí. 
 
 viví. 
 
 V. habló. 
 
 vendió. 
 
 vivió. 
 
 él habló. 
 
 vendió. 
 
 vivió. 
 
 nosotros hablamos. 
 
 vendimos. 
 
 vivimos. 
 
 V. V. hablaron. 
 
 vendieron. 
 
 vivieron. 
 
 ellos hablaron. 
 
 vendieron. 
 
 vivieron. 
 
 Of course, this would be rendered: I spoke, you spoke, he spoke, 
 we spoke, you spoke, they spoke, etc., etc. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 174 
 
 20. Yes, I remember it perfectly, but we only studied 
 
 the indicative present. (Literally: Yes, myself 
 
 (I) remember perfectly, but not (we) studied ex- 
 cept (sino) the present of the indicative (el presente 
 del indicativo). 
 
 21. Well, you ought to study the whole verb, as the 
 use of it is very common and presents many diffi- 
 culties to English speaking persons. (Literally: 
 Well (pues bien), ought you to study all the verb,^ 
 as its use is very common (común) and presents 
 many difficulties (muchas dificultades) to the 
 English and Americans). 
 
 22. To begin with, we have two verbs for ‘^to have,’’ 
 “tener” and “haber.” (Literally: In the first place, 
 (primeramente) (we) have two verbs corresponding 
 to “to have,” namely (a saber^): tener and haber). 
 
 1 Acordarse, to remember^ is a reflexive verb. It belongs to that 
 numerous class of slightly irregular verbs which change the o of 
 the stem- vowel into ue throughout the whole singular and in the 
 second and third person plural of the present of indicative and 
 subjunctive, and in the same persons in the imperative mood: 
 
 2 Todo, toda, all, whole, every, when used as an adjective, is fol- 
 lowed by the definite article, as: 
 
 Present. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Yo me acuerdo. 
 
 V. se acuerda, 
 él se acuerda, 
 nosotros nos acordamos. 
 V. V. se acuerdan, 
 ellos se acuerdan. 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 me acuerde, 
 se acuerde, 
 se acuerde. 
 
 nos acordemos. 
 
 se acuerden, 
 se acuerden. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 175 
 
 20. Si, me acuerdo^ perfectamente, pero no estudiamos 
 sino el presente del indicativo, (se'-nó én-dé-ká- 
 té'-vo). 
 
 21. Pues bien, debe V. estudiar todo el verbo,^ pues 
 su uso es muy común y presenta muchas dificul- 
 tades a los ingleses y americanos, (ko-móón' pra- 
 sén'-tá de-fé-kóól-tá'-dés). 
 
 22. Primeramente, tenemos dos verbos correspondientes 
 a ‘‘to have,’’ a saber tener y haber. 
 
 Todo el día, 
 toda la noche, 
 todos los meses, 
 todas las mañanas, 
 todas las tardes, 
 todas las semanas, 
 todos los años, 
 
 The whole day^ all day, 
 
 the whole nighty all night, 
 
 every month. 
 
 every morning. 
 
 every afternoon. 
 
 every week. 
 
 every year. 
 
 3 The infinitive with a or al (dative) is employed in place of our 
 English sentences beginning with when^ after, as or if. 
 
 Al salir de casa encontré mi when I left the house I met my 
 
 agente, agent. 
 
 al haber yo sabido que él estaba if I had known he was here I 
 aquí hubiese venido, would have come. 
 
 al verle me fui, on seeing him I went away. 
 
 al ir a verle, le encontré, on going to see him 1 met him. 
 
 á fár; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
176 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 23. I know that; that was explained before. (Liter- 
 ally: It (I) know). 
 
 24. Consequently you know that '‘haber” is used 
 
 mainly for the formation of compound tenses, as 
 for instance: "I have sent you a dispatch.” "I 
 have explained this the last time.” "I have never 
 heard the like of it.” (Literally: Consequently 
 
 (por consiguiente) know you that haber itself (it) 
 uses only to (para) form (formar) the tenses com- 
 pound (los tiempos compuestos); for example (por 
 ejemplo): You (I) have sent (mandado) to you a 
 dispatch (un despacho). You it (I) have explained 
 to you the last time (la última vez). Never (I) 
 have heard (oido) such (tal) thing). 
 
 25. Yes, all this is clear to me and I also know that 
 "tener” is an active verb and can generally be 
 changed into "to possess” without affecting the 
 meaning of the sentence. (Literally: Yes, it (I) 
 see very clear and also (I) know that tener is a 
 verb active (activo) that itself can use for (por) 
 the verb to possess (poseer) without (sin) to alter 
 (alterar) in nothing the meaning (el significado) 
 of the sentence (la oración). 
 
 26. I am glad that this is clear to you. Have you 
 learned the whole conjugation of "tener”? (Lit- 
 erally: Myself (I) rejoice that it may see (vea^ 
 you so- clear. Have learned you already all the 
 conjugation (la conjugación) of tener) ? 
 
 ^ The subjunctive must be used after verbs denoting joy, grief, 
 vexation, surprise, etc., as: 
 
 a far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note: 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 23. Lo sé. Eso fué explicado antes. 
 
 177 
 
 24. Por consiguiente sabe V. que haber se usa solo 
 para formar los tiempos compuestos; por ejemplo: 
 Le he mandado a V. un despacho. Se lo he ex- 
 plicado a V. la última vez. Nunca he oido tai 
 cosa, (kón-sé-ghé'^én'-t}^ a-‘hémp'-lo) . 
 
 25. Sí, lo veo muy claro, y también sé que ‘^tener’^ es 
 im verbo activo que se puede usar por el verbo 
 ^^poseer’^ sin alterar en nada el significado de la 
 oración, (ák-té'-vo po-sa-érr' ség-ne-fé-ká-do ó-rá- 
 the^ón). 
 
 26. Me alegro que lo vea^ V. tan claro. ¿ Ha apren- 
 dido V. ya toda la conjugación de tener? (kOn- 
 ‘hóó-gá-the'^On') . 
 
 I am glad you know it, 
 
 I am glad it rains, 
 
 It is too had he will not come. 
 
 me alegro que lo sepa V. 
 me alegro que llueva. * 
 es una lástima que no venga. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
178 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 27. No, not yet. 
 
 28. Well, you must study it. You will find it in the 
 tenth book which contains the grammar of the 
 Spanish language. (Literally: Well ought you to 
 study it. It find you (encuentra V.^ in the book 
 number (número) ten in which (en el cual) is the 
 grammar (la gramática) of the language Spanish). 
 
 29. Study it well and in our next lesson I will teach 
 you the idioms of ^^tener.’’ Good bye, now. (Lit- 
 erally: Study it you well and in the next lesson 
 you (I) will teach (enseñaré) to you some idioms in 
 the which (en los que) itself employs (emplea) the 
 verb ^^tener.’’ For now good bye (Adiós). 
 
 30. Good bye, sir. (Literally: May go you (vaya 
 
 V.^) with God (con Dios). 
 
 1 Encontrar, to meet^ belongs to that numerous class of slightly 
 irregular verbs which change the stem- vowel o into ue in the whole 
 singular, and the second and third person plural in the present 
 indicative and subjunctive and in the same persons in the im- 
 perative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Yo encuentro.’ 
 
 V. encuentra, 
 él encuentra, 
 nosotros encontramos. 
 V. V. encuentran, 
 ellos encuentran. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 encuentre. 
 
 encuentre. 
 
 encuentre. 
 
 encontremos, 
 
 encuentren. 
 
 encuentren. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 179 
 
 27. No, todavía no. 
 
 28. Pues debe V. estudiarla. La encuentra V.^ en el 
 libro número diez, en el cual está la gramática del 
 idioma español, (én-kwén'-trá nób'-má-ró grá-má'- 
 te-ká). 
 
 29. Estúdiela V. bien y en la próxima lección le en- 
 señaré a V. algunos modismos en los que se emplea 
 el verbo ^^tener.^’ Por ahora, adiós, (és-tóo'- 
 dé"^á-lá lék-the"^ón' á-dé^ós'). 
 
 30. IVaya V.^ con Dios! (vá'-yá). 
 
 2 Vaya V. is the subjunctive (or imperative) of the irregular 
 verb ir. The present tense is conjugated: 
 
 Present. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Yo voy. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 V. va. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 él va. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 nosotros vamos. 
 
 vayamos. 
 
 V. V. van. 
 
 vayan. 
 
 ellos van. 
 
 vayan. 
 
 For full conjugation see Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
i8o 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 HACER AND TENER. 
 
 1. Ah, good morning, my dear sir! I am delighted 
 to see you. How are you? (Literally: Good day, 
 friend mine! How much (cuánto) I rejoice (me 
 alegro) to (de) see you to you. How are you) ? 
 
 2. Thanks, I am quite well. And how do you feel 
 to-day? (Literally: Very well, thanks. And you 
 how (qué tal) yourself feel (se siente) to-day)? 
 
 3. I am very well, thanlc you. This beautiful spring 
 
 weather just suits me. (Literally: (I) am very 
 
 well, thanks. This delicious (delicioso) weather 
 (tiempo) of spring (primavera) me pleases (gusta) 
 much). 
 
 4. Spring weather? Pardon me for repeating these 
 words after you, but the expression is new to me 
 and I don’t quite know what it means. (Liter- 
 ally: Weather of spring? Pardon you that (I) 
 may repeat (repita) those words, but as to me 
 (they) are unknown (desconocidas) not (I) know 
 what (they) will say). 
 
 1 Sentir, to feel, to perceive, is an irregular verb. The conjuga- 
 tion of the present tense is: 
 
 Present. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Yo siento, nosotros sentimos. 
 
 V. siente. V. V. sienten, 
 él siente. ellos sienten. 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 2 In the same way we say: 
 
 I Le gusta a V. la lengua caste- 
 llana? 
 
 Sí señor, a mi me gusta más que 
 ningún otro idioma, 
 
 I Le gusta a V. ? 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 sienta, sintamos, 
 sienta, sientan, 
 sienta, sientan. 
 
 Do you like the Spanish lan- 
 guage? 
 
 Yes, sir, I like it better than 
 any other language. 
 
 Do you like it? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; oO room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 i8i 
 
 Hacer y Tener, 
 
 1. Buenos días, amigo mío. ¡Cuánto me alegro de 
 
 verle a V. ! ¿ Cómo está V. ? 
 
 2. Muy bien, gracias. Y V., ¿ qué tal se siente^ hoy? 
 
 3. Estoy muy bien, gracias. Este delicioso tiempo 
 de primavera me gusta^ mucho, (da-lé-thé^o'- 
 sO pré-má-vá'-rá góos'-tá). 
 
 4. ¿ Tiempo de primavera? — Dispense V. que repita^ 
 esas palabras, pero como me son desconocidas no 
 sé lo que quieren decir, (rá-pe'-tá dés-kO-nO-thé'- 
 dás). 
 
 ¿ Qué le gusta a V. más, paneci- What do you like best: rollSy 
 líos, tostadas o pan? toast or bread? 
 
 2 Gustar, to please, to like, is nearly always used as an impersonal 
 verb. In Spanish, therefore, a person does not like a thing, but 
 the thing is pleasing to the person. ¿ Le gusta a V. ? means liter- 
 ally: Does it please you? 
 
 3 Repetir, to repeat, is an irregular verb. The conjugation of the 
 present tense is: 
 
 Present. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 Yo repito. 
 
 V. repite, 
 él repite. 
 
 nosotros repetimos. 
 V. V. repiten, 
 ellos repiten. 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 repitan. 
 
 repitan. 
 
 repitamos. 
 
 repita. 
 
 repita. 
 
 repita. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
i 82 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 5. You know, of course, that we have four seasons, 
 viz.: spring, summer, autumn and winter, but I 
 suppose our Spanish names for them are new to 
 you. (Literally: Know you for sure (por supuesto) 
 that (we) have four seasons (estaciones), to wit 
 (a saber): The spring (la primavera), the summer 
 (el verano), the auttunn (el otoño) and the winter 
 (el invierno), but (I) suppose (supongo) that their 
 names (nombres) in Spanish you are to you new). 
 
 6. Quite new. Please let me repeat them after you: 
 Spring, Slimmer, autumn and winter. (Literally: 
 It (they) are. Allow me (déjeme) you to repeat 
 them with you: the spring, the summer, the autumn 
 and the winter). 
 
 7. That was very good! Your pronunciation is ex- 
 cellent! (Literally: Well said (dicho^). Your pro- 
 nunciation is excellent (excelente). 
 
 8. You flatter me. Professor. You Spaniards are al- 
 ways so complimentary. (Literally: Me flatter 
 
 (lisonjea) you, Mr. Professor (profesor). You the 
 Spaniards are very nice (flnos) and very fond of 
 (amantes de) compliments (cumplimientos). 
 
 1 Suponer, to suppose, is an irregular verb. The verb from which 
 it is derived, is poner, to put, to place. The present tense is con- 
 jugated; Present. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Yo pongo. ponga. 
 
 V. pone. ponga, 
 
 él pone. ponga, 
 
 nosotros ponemos. pongamos. 
 
 V. V. ponen. pongan, 
 
 ellos ponen. pongan. 
 
 For full conjugation see Part X. 
 
 2 Dicho, said, is the irregular past participle of decir, to say, to 
 tell. The present tense is conjugated: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 183 
 
 5. Sabe V., por supuesto, que tenemos cuatro esta- 
 ciones, a saber: la primavera, el verano, el otoño 
 y el invierno, pero supongo^ que sus nombres en 
 español le son a V. nuevos, (és-tá-the^ó'-nés va- 
 rá'-nO O-ton'-yó én-ve^érr'-nO sóo-pon'-gO). 
 
 6. Lo son. Déjeme V. repetirlos con V.: la prima- 
 vera, el verano, el otoño y el invierno, (da'-^ha- 
 
 7. Bien dicho .2 Su pronunciación es excelente. 
 
 8. Me lisonjea V., señor profesor. Vds. los españoles 
 son muy ñnos y muy amantes de cumplimientos. 
 (Ié-s0n-‘há'-á fe'-nos). 
 
 mt) 
 
 Present. 
 
 \ 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 Yo digo. 
 
 V. dice, 
 él dice. 
 
 nosotros decimos. 
 V. V. dicen, 
 ellos dicen. 
 
 diga. 
 
 diga. 
 
 diga. 
 
 digan. 
 
 digan. 
 
 digamos. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 184 
 
 9. Not complimentary, but polite. The Spanish na- 
 tional character is so little understood in this coun- 
 try that people generally assert that Spaniards 
 possess the same sort of politeness as the French. 
 But that is a great mistake! Spanish politeness 
 is inborn and universal and is found among the 
 poorest as well as the richest. (Literally: Not 
 
 flattering (lisonjeros), but polite. (It) is known 
 (se conoce) so little in this country (pais) the charac- 
 ter (el carácter) Spanish that always (it) is said 
 (se dice) that the courtesy of the Spaniards is like 
 that of the French. Nothing of that. The cour- 
 tesy (la cortesía) of the Spaniards is inborn and gen- 
 eral, as (pues) it is found (se encuentra) the same 
 among the class poor as among the most high). 
 
 10. I wish I could say the same thing about my coun- 
 trymen. I am afraid our manners must appear 
 rather rude to you. (Literally: Would (ojalá) 
 
 one could (se puediese^) say the same thing (otro^ 
 tanto) of my countrymen (paisanos). I fear (temo) 
 that our manners (nuestros modales) must appear 
 (parécerles) to you somewhat rude (algo bruscos). 
 
 1 There are three words in Spanish for hut, viz. : Pero, mas and 
 sino. Pero and mas are placed at the beginning of adversative 
 sentences, as: 
 
 Quisiera salir, pero no puedo. I should like to go out, hut I can 
 not. Sino can be employed only when preceded by a negative 
 clause (no verb being expressed after hut), as: 
 
 No es bianco, sino pardo^ It is not white, hut gray. 
 
 No tengo hambre, sino sed, I am not hungry, hut thirsty. 
 
 2 The subjunctive mood must be used here, as a desire is ex- 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 185 
 
 9. No lisonjeros, sino^ politicos. Se conoce tan poco 
 en este país el carácter español que siempre se 
 dice que la cortesía de los españoles es como la de 
 los franceses. Nada de eso. La cortesía de los 
 españoles es innata y general, pues se encuentra lo 
 mismo entre la clase pobre que entre la más alta. 
 (lé-s 5 n-‘ha'-ros pá^^es' ká-rák-térr'). 
 
 10. Ojalá se pudiese^ decir otro^ tanto de mis paisanos. 
 Temo que nuestros modales deben parécerles a 
 Vds. algo bruscos, (pób-de'^a'-sj^ pá'^e-sá'-n 5 s 
 tá'-mO bróbs'-kos). 
 
 I 
 
 pressed. Pudiese is the second form of the subjunctive of the 
 imperfect of the irregular verb poder, to be able. It is conjugated: 
 
 Yo pudiese, 
 
 V. pudiese, 
 él pudiese, 
 
 nosotros pudiésemos, 
 
 V. V. pudiesen, 
 ellos pudiesen, 
 
 3 Otro, otra, another ^ other 
 
 I might he able, 
 you might he able, 
 he might he able, 
 we might he able, 
 you might he able, 
 they might he able, 
 
 (plural others) j is used of persons 
 
 and things and may be employed as a substantive or an adjective. 
 The indefinite article cannot be used with it, as in English. The 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
i86 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 II. Well, frankly speaking, I think that Americans in 
 this respect might learn something from us, while 
 we on the other hand, might learn many things 
 from you which are much more important than 
 politeness. But let us retiuii to our subject. 
 (Literally: Speaking (hablando^ with frankness 
 
 (franqueza) (I) believe (creo) that in general the 
 * people (el pueblo) American could (podría) learn 
 a little from us in this particular (este particular), 
 but also could we learn from you many things 
 still more useful (utiles) than the politeness. But 
 returning (volviendo) to our conversation). 
 
 definite article must be employed whenever a distinct person or 
 thing is to be specified. 
 
 Déme V. otro libro, Give me another hook. ^ 
 
 The following expressions with 
 Otro tanto, 
 
 Yo haría otro tanto, 
 una vez y otra, 
 una y otra vez, 
 el otro día, 
 al otro día, 
 otro día, 
 
 1 Hablando is the Gerund of h 
 The Gerund ends in 
 
 otro are peculiar: 
 
 The same thing. 
 
 I would do the same thing, 
 every other time, 
 repeatedly, 
 the other day. 
 the next day. 
 another day. 
 iblar, to speak. 
 
 I. 2. 3. 
 
 ■ ando. iendo. iendo. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 187 
 
 II. Hablando^ con franqueza creo que en general el 
 pueblo americano podría aprender un poco de noso- 
 tros en este particular, pero también podríamos 
 nosotros aprender de Vds. muchas cosas, aun más 
 útiles que la urbanidad. Pero volviendo a nuestra 
 conversación, (frán-ka'-thá ‘há-ná-rál' pár-té-kóo- 
 lárr' oó'-té-lés vol-vé'^én'-do). 
 
 We have, therefore, for our paradigms: hablando, speaking; 
 vendiendo, selling; viviendo, living. 
 
 The Gerund is used in connection with estar, to be, similar to 
 the progressive conjugation in English, and expresses the action 
 of the verb as continuing or unfinished: 
 
 Estoy leyendo, I am reading. 
 
 estaba escribiendo, he was writing, 
 
 está lloviendo, it is raining. 
 
 ¿ qué está V. haciendo? what are you doing? 
 
 The Gerund is frequently used, as in phrase ii, for the sake of 
 euphony or brevity, where we employ while, whilst, as, since, if, 
 although, etc., as: 
 
 Deseando ver a V. he venido 
 a Madrid. 
 
 Viendo que su socio no venía, 
 se fué. 
 
 For further rules see Part X. 
 
 As I wished to see you I came to 
 Madrid. 
 
 When he saw that his partner did 
 not come, he went away. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
i88 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 12. Now I have quite forgotten what we were talking 
 
 about. (Literally: (I) have forgotten (olvidado) 
 
 what we were speaking (hablábamos^). 
 
 13. We were talking about the seasons and I had just 
 
 mentioned their names to you. Do' you remember 
 them? (Literally: (We) were speaking of the 
 
 seasons of the year and finished (acababa) I of to 
 cite you to you their names (sus nombres). Re- 
 member you (se acuerda V.) of them)? 
 
 14. Oh, perfectly: spring, summer, autumn and winter. 
 
 15. Very good! How is the weather to-day? (Liter- 
 ally: Very well. What weather makes to-day)? 
 
 16. Pardon me for interrupting you; but why do you 
 say “makes”? (Literally: Pardon that it (I) in- 
 terrupt (interrumpa^) ; but why say you “makes”)? 
 
 1 The Imperfect adds the following endings to the stem: 
 
 I. 
 
 aba. 
 
 aba. 
 
 aba. 
 
 ábamos. 
 
 aban. 
 
 aban. 
 
 2. 
 
 ía. 
 
 ía. 
 
 ía. 
 
 íamos.' 
 
 ían. 
 
 ían. 
 
 3 * 
 
 ía. 
 
 — — ía. 
 
 ía. 
 
 íamos. 
 
 ían. 
 
 ían. 
 
 It will be seen that verbs of the second and third conjugations 
 add the same endings. For our three paradigms, hablar^ vender 
 and vivir y we have therefore the following conjugation in 
 The Imperfect. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Yo hablaba. 
 
 vendía. 
 
 vivía. 
 
 V. hablaba. 
 
 vendía. 
 
 vivía. 
 
 él hablaba. 
 
 vendía. 
 
 vivía. 
 
 nosotros hablábamos. 
 
 vendíamos. 
 
 vivíamos. 
 
 V. V. hablaban. 
 
 vendían. 
 
 vivían. 
 
 ellos hablaban. 
 
 vendían. 
 
 vivían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 189 
 
 12. He olvidado lo que hablábamos.^ (ól-ve-dá'-dó 
 á-blá'-bá-mós). 
 
 13. Hablábamos de las estaciones del año y acababa 
 yo de citarle a V. sus nombres. ¿ Se acuerda V. 
 de ellos? (á-ká-vá'-vá). 
 
 14. Perfectamente: la primavera, el verano, el otoño, 
 y el invierno. 
 
 15. Pues bien. ¿Qué tiempo hace hoy? 
 
 16. Dispense que lo interrumpa pero por qué dice V. 
 ‘‘hace’’? 
 
 This in English is: ^T was speaking/’ “you were speaking,” “he 
 was speaking,” etc. 
 
 This tense ought to be called the descriptive tense in Spanish. 
 It is used to describe the qualities of persons or things and the 
 state, disposition or place in which they were, as: 
 
 Las muchachas estaban vestidas The girls were dressed in 
 de bianco, y tenían flores en white and had flowers in 
 
 los cabellos. their hair. 
 
 For full rules in regard to the use of the Imperfect see Part X. 
 
 2 The Subjunctive is employed after verbs expressing entreaty, 
 permission, command, etc., as in phrase 16. 
 
 Permítame V. que le haga una Allow me to ask you a ques^ 
 pregunta. tion. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
IQO 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Translate this exercise into Spanish and send it to 
 our Correspondence Department for correction. 
 
 In a Café. 
 
 {Continuation). 
 
 But up to this time we have neglected to do the prin- 
 cipal thing, and that is to take coffee.^* — ^Just so.^ Let 
 us take a seat near the window so that we may have 
 some fresh air. — There is a little round table with two 
 chairs.^ — ^Waiter, bring us two cups of the best Mocha 
 coffee.^ — Don’t you want to smoke, gentlemen?® — Yes, 
 bring us two Havana cigars.® — Here they are, gentle- 
 men; the match-box is right at your side."^ — Now bring 
 us the evening papers. — Here, gentlemen. Anything 
 else, gentlemen.® — Nothing else at present. — Here, pay 
 the cashier and keep the change.^ — ^Very much obliged 
 to you.^® 
 
 1 But until (hasta) now not (we) have done (hecho) the prin- 
 cipal (lo principal) which is to take (tomar) coffee (café). — ^ Have 
 you right. Let us go (vamos) to seat ourselves (a sentarnos) near 
 to (junto a) the window, in order to be in the fresh (al fresco). — 
 3 There is a little table (una mesita) round (redonda) with two chairs 
 at the (al) side. — ^ Mozo, bring us two cups (tazas) of the best 
 coffee of Moka. — ^ To smoke, fumar. — ® Cigarros habanos. — 
 ' ^ At the side of you is the match-box, la fosforera. — * In what more 
 can I serve you ? — ^ And take (tome) the change (el vuelto) for 
 you. — Many thanks. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 191 
 
 Translate this exercise into Spanish and send it to 
 our Correspondence Department for correction. 
 
 A Bank.^ 
 
 Is this the Commercial Bank? — ^Yes, sir; what can I 
 do for you?2 — My . name is Charles T. Brown.^ — I think 
 you must have received a letter of instruction from 
 Chicago to pay me a draft.^ — Yes, sir; we received the 
 letter yesterday. — Here is the draft.^ — Please receipt 
 for it on the back.® — I wish to endorse it to a house in 
 Chili.^ — ^All right, sir; we can send it out for you, if 
 you wish. We have an agency at Santiago.* — But I 
 have to forward this money to Valparaiso. I suppose 
 that is all the same .^ — 'We have an agency also at Val- 
 paraiso. — ^What is your charge?^® — It will cost you 
 twelve dollars. — That is very dear. I have another 
 bill of exchange here.-^^ — Can you cash it now for me?^^ 
 — Certainly, sir; do you want bank-notes, gold or silver?^* 
 
 ^ Un banco. — ^ Jn what can I serve you? — ® Mi nombre es Carlos. — 
 ^ I believe that you will have received a letter of advice (aviso) 
 from Chicago in order to pay me a draft (una libranza). — ^ La 
 letra. — ® Put you the receipt on the back (al respaldo). — Endo- 
 sarla. — ® Is very well; if you wish can (you) send her through 
 agency our (por conducto nuestro). Una agencia. — ^ (It) is for 
 Valparaíso that (I) need send this money, but (I) suppose (supongo) 
 that (it) may be the same. — How much me ask you (pide V.) 
 for the operation (por la operación) ? — I have besides (además) 
 that to receive the value (el valor) of this other draft. — 
 you give me it now? — Billetes de banco, oro o plata. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; ó note; 6b room. 
 
192 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 VOCABULARIO. VOCABULARY. 
 
 {Continued), 
 
 El despacho. 
 
 El cajero (ká-^ha'-ró). 
 
 El despacho del cajero. 
 
 Pagar (pá-gárr'). 
 
 ¿ Cuánto importa eso? 
 
 El dinero (dé-ná'-ro). 
 
 El cambio (kám'-be^o). 
 
 No tengo cambio. 
 
 I Tiene V. cambio? 
 
 No me dio V. todo el cam- 
 bio (dé-ó'). 
 
 Cambiar (kám-bé^árr'). 
 
 ¿ Puede V. cambiar un bi- 
 llete de cien pesos? 
 
 El billete. 
 
 El papel moneda. 
 
 ¿ Quiere V. oro o billetes? 
 
 Vender (vén-dérr). 
 
 El vendedor (vén-dá-dorr'). 
 
 ¿ A qué precio vende V. 
 esto? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto pide V. por esto 
 (pe'-d^)? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto cobra V. por 
 esto? 
 
 Es demasiado caro. No 
 lo quiero a ese precio 
 (dá-má-sé'^á'-dó) . 
 
 The office. 
 
 The cashier. 
 
 The cashier’s desk. 
 
 To pay. 
 
 How much does that 
 amount (come) to? 
 
 The money. 
 
 The change. 
 
 I have no change with me. 
 
 Have you any change with 
 you? 
 
 You did not give me the 
 correct change. 
 
 To change, to exchange. 
 
 Can you change a hundred 
 dollar bill for me? 
 
 The bill. 
 
 The paper-money. 
 
 Do you want gold or paper? 
 
 To sell. 
 
 The salesman. 
 
 At what price do you sell 
 this ? 
 
 How much do you charge 
 for this? 
 
 How much do you ask for 
 this? 
 
 That is too dear; I don’t 
 want to take it at that 
 price. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 193 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 La calidad (ká-lé-dád'). 
 
 No me gusta esta calidad 
 (góós'-tá). 
 
 I Qué tal le gusta a V. ésta? 
 
 Me gusta más. 
 
 El paño (pán'-yó). 
 
 La seda (sa'-dá). 
 
 La lana (lá'-ná). 
 
 El algodón (ál-gó-dón'). 
 
 El vestido (vés-té'-do). 
 
 Los vestidos (vés-té'-dós). 
 
 Un vestido de seda. 
 
 Un vestido de lana. 
 
 Un vestido de algodón. 
 
 Usar; durar (óo'-sárr dóó- 
 rárr'). 
 
 Estos géneros duran mu- 
 cho (^ha'-na-rOs). 
 
 Dura mucho este género. 
 
 Los negocios (na-gó'-thé^ 
 os). 
 
 La tienda (te"^én'-dá). 
 
 La mercería (mérr-tha- 
 ré'-á) . 
 
 La tienda de ropas. 
 
 El sombrero. 
 
 El sombrerero. 
 
 La modista (mó-dés'-tá). 
 
 El taller de la modista 
 (tál-yérr'). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 The quality. 
 
 I don't like this quality 
 (=not me pleases this 
 quality). 
 
 How do you like this one? 
 
 I like it better. 
 
 The cloth. 
 
 The silk. 
 
 The wool. 
 
 Cotton. 
 
 The dress. 
 
 The dresses. 
 
 A silk dress. 
 
 A woolen dress. 
 
 A cotton dress. 
 
 To wear. 
 
 These goods wear very well. 
 The business. 
 
 The store. The shop. 
 
 The dry goods store: mer- 
 cery. 
 
 The hat. 
 
 The hatter. 
 
 The milliner. 
 
 The millinery shop. 
 
194 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 
 VOCABULARIO. VOCABULARY. 
 
 La librería (lé-bra-ré'-á). 
 
 El librero (lé-brá'-ró). 
 
 El papel; los papeles (pa- 
 pel'). 
 
 La papelería (pá-pá-la-ré'- 
 á). 
 
 El zapato (thá-pá'-to). 
 
 El zapatero (thá-pá-ta'-ró). 
 
 La zapatería (thá-pá-ta-ré'- 
 á). 
 
 El reloj (ra'-lo). 
 
 El relojero (rá-ló-^há'-ro). 
 
 El comerciante (kó-mérr- 
 thé^án'-t;J^). 
 
 El pan. 
 
 El panadero (pá-ná-dá-ró). 
 
 La panadería (pá-ná-dá- 
 ré'-á). 
 
 El bollo (ból'-yó). 
 
 El pastel. 
 
 El carnicero (kár-né-thá'- 
 ró). 
 
 La carne. 
 
 La carnicería- (kár-né-tha- 
 ré'-á). 
 
 El metro (má'-tró). 
 
 El kilo (ké-ló). 
 
 Una libra (lé'-brá). 
 
 The bookstore. 
 
 The bookseller. 
 
 The paper; the papers. 
 
 The stationery store. 
 
 I 
 
 The shoe. 
 
 The shoemaker. 
 
 The shoestore. 
 
 The watch. 
 
 The watchmaker. 
 
 The merchant. 
 
 The bread. 
 
 The baker. 
 
 The bakery. 
 
 The roll. 
 
 The cake. 
 
 The butcher. 
 
 The meat. 
 
 The butcher-shop. 
 
 The metre. 
 
 The kilo. 
 
 A pound. 
 
i 
 
1 
 
LIBRARY 
 ■ THE 
 
 UNIVERSiYY OF ILLINOIS 
 
 ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRAaiCAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BV 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc. 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Editiok 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK LONDON 
 The Int«national College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers’ Hall, London, £ng. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 Mil 
 
 rV-b 
 
 m 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Peculiarities of Hacer 196 
 
 South American Trade 206 
 
 The Weather 210 
 
 Peculiarities of Tener 21Ó 
 
 Vocabulary 222 
 
196 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Hacer and Tener. 
 
 17. Because ^'hacer’’ is used in reference to the weather. 
 
 (Literally: Because for (para) to speak of the 
 
 weather is used (se usa) the verb hacer). 
 
 18. How very peculiar! And yet it ought not to ap- 
 
 pear so strange to me, for the French language 
 uses the same construction. (Literally: How 
 
 strange (raro). But not me ought to surprise 
 (estrañar) that as in French is used the same verb). 
 
 19. Precisely so. Now in order that you may become 
 
 familiar with this verb, we will form a number of 
 sentences with it. (Literally: Have you right 
 
 (razon^), and in order to (para) accustom us to the 
 use of this verb, let us form (formemos^) a number 
 of phrases (unas cuantas frases) with it). 
 
 20. May I ask you a question, professor? (Literally: 
 Me permit you to make to you a question (una 
 pregunta), mister professor)? 
 
 21. As many as you like. (Literally: Those (las) 
 
 which you may please (guste^). 
 
 22. From which language is ^^hacer’’ derived? Is it 
 Arabic? It surely does not come from the Latin. 
 (Literally: Of what language is derived (se deriva) 
 the verb hacer? Is (it) Arabic (árabe)? Surely 
 (de seguro) that not (it) is from the Latin (latín). 
 
 1 An idiomatic expression. Other examples and complete rules 
 are to be found in the next lesson. 
 
 2 The imperative mood has, as a matter of fact, only two forms 
 of its own, viz.: the second person singular and plural; all the 
 others are taken from the subjunctive mood. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; ob room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 Hacer y Tener. 
 
 197 
 
 17. Porque para hablar del tiempo se usa el verbo 
 ‘^hacer/^ 
 
 18. ¡Qué raro! Pero no me debe estrañar eso pues 
 en francés se usa el mismo verbo. 
 
 19. Tiene V. razón^ y para acostumbramos al uso de 
 este verbo formemos^ unas cuantas frases con él. 
 (rá-thon' for-má'-mós). 
 
 20. ¿ Me deja V. hacerle una pregunta, señor profesor? 
 
 21. Las que V. guste.^ (góós'-tj^.) 
 
 22. ¿ De qué idioma se deriva el verbo ^^hacer’’? ¿ Es 
 árabe? De seguro que no es del latín, (da-re'-vá 
 á'-rá-vj^ lá-tén'). 
 
 3 The Subjunctive is used in relative sentences when the relative 
 refers to persons, objects or ideas which are mentioned in an in- 
 definite or uncertain sense, as: 
 
 Hay pocos que lo hagan. There are hut few who do it. 
 
 Venga lo que viniera. Come what wüll 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
198 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 23. And why not pray? Just substitute an / for the 
 h and then tell me what else this word is but Latin. 
 (Literally: And why not? Take you off (quítele 
 V.) the h (la h) and put you to it (póngale) in its 
 place (su lugar) an / (una /) and tell me (dígame) 
 then (después) what (it) can be except (sino) (it) 
 is Latin). 
 
 24. Ah now I see its Latin origin but I will not inter- 
 rupt you any more as I am anxious to form some 
 phrases about the weather so that I may learn to 
 use that verb correctly. (Literally: Already (I) 
 see its origin (origen) Latin, but not (I) will inter- 
 rupt you (internimpirle) more, as (I) wish to form 
 phrases about (a cerca) the weather in order to 
 (para) learn to (a) use that verb correctly). 
 
 Hacer and Tener {Continued). 
 
 I. Ah, good morning, my dear sir. Delighted to see 
 you! How have you been since I had the pleasure 
 of seeing you? The last time you were here you 
 were suffering from a headache. I trust you feel 
 better to-day. (Literally: Good days, friend mine. 
 How much myself (I) rejoice to see you! How so 
 goes since that I had (tuve) the pleasure of to see 
 you to you. The last time that you I saw (vi) had 
 you pain of the head (dolor de cabeza). (I) hope 
 that yourself find you (se halle V.) better to-day). 
 
 ^ Irregular imperative of poner. 2 Irregular imperative of decir. 
 
 3 Another mode of expression, similar to the German: “Wie 
 
 geht es Ihnen?” Thus: 
 
 I Qué tal {or cómo) le va a V.? How do you do? 
 
 ¿ Cómo le va a V. en los negocios ? How are you getting on in 
 
 business? 
 
 I Cómo va de salud? How is your health? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 199 
 
 23. ¿Y por qué no? Quítele V. la A y póngale^ en su 
 lugar una / y dígame^ después lo que puede ser 
 sino es latín, (ké-tá'-l^^ á'-tchey pón'-gá-l^ loó- 
 gárr' á'-fey de'-gá-mjr). 
 
 24. Ya veo su origen latino pero no quiero interrum- 
 pirle más, pues deseo formar frases a cerca del tiem- 
 po para aprender a usar ese verbo correctamente, 
 (o-ré-^hén'). 
 
 Hacer y Tener. 
 
 {Continued). 
 
 I. Buenos días, amigo mío. ¡Cuánto me alegro de 
 verle! ¿Qué tal va^ desde que tuve el gusto de 
 verle a V.? La última vez que le ví^ tenía V. 
 dolor de cabeza. Espero que se halle^ V. mejor 
 hoy. (tóó'-v^ vé ál'-yé). 
 
 ^ Vi is the Definite tense of the irregular verb ver, to see. It is 
 conjugated: 
 
 Yo VÍ, 
 
 I saw. 
 
 V. vió, 
 
 you saw. 
 
 él vió, 
 
 he saw. 
 
 nosotros vimos, 
 
 we saw. 
 
 V. V. vieron, 
 
 you saw. 
 
 ellos vieron. 
 
 they saw. 
 
 ®The subjunctive must be used here because possibility 's im- 
 plied. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
200 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 I had. 
 you had. 
 he had. 
 we had. 
 you had. 
 they had. 
 
 2. Thanks, I am a great deal better; in fact, I am 
 quite well and ready to go on with our lesson. 
 (Literally: Thanks, already (I) am better, better 
 said well and ready (dispuesto) to (a) continue 
 (continuar) our lesson). 
 
 3. I am very glad of that, but please take off your 
 
 overcoat and sit down. (Literally: Myself (I) 
 
 rejoice much, but take off (quítese) the overcoat 
 (el sobretodo) and seat yourself (siéntese^). 
 
 4. Where shall I sit, Professor? (Literally: In^ where 
 myself sit (I), Mr. Professor)? 
 
 5. On this chair please. And now let us commence. 
 What were we talking of the last time? (Liter- 
 ally: Seat yourself in this chair (esta silla) and 
 now let us commence (empezemos) . Of what 
 talked (we) the last time) ? 
 
 ^ Sentarse, to he seated, belongs to that numerous class of verbs 
 which are reflexive in Spanish. In English these are for the most 
 part passive verbs, as: equivocarse, to he mistaken; engañarse, 
 to he deceived; disgustarse, to he displeased, etc. Verbs compounded 
 in English with to get or to become are also used reflexively in Span- 
 ish, as: enfermarse, to get ill {to fall ill); enriquecerse, to become 
 rich, etc. 
 
 Sentar (and of course, sentarse) changes the stem-vowel into 
 ie throughout the singular and the third person plural of the pres- 
 ent indicative and subjunctive, and in the same persons in the 
 imperative. Present. 
 
 Indicative. Yo me siento. Subjunctive, me siente. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 6b room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 201 
 
 Yo tuve 
 V. tuvo 
 él tuvo 
 
 nosotros tuvinios 
 V. V. tuvieron 
 ellos tuvieron. 
 
 2. Gracias, ya estoy mejor, mejor dicho, bueno y 
 dispuesto a continuar nuestra lección, (des-póó^ 
 és'-tó kón-té-noó-árr'). 
 
 (too'-v^). 
 
 (tóó'-vó). 
 
 (tóo-vé'-mos). 
 
 (tóo-vé"^á'-rón). 
 
 3. Me alegro mucho, pero quítese el sobretodo y 
 siéntese.^ (ké'-ta-se só-bra-to'-do se^^én'-tá-sé). 
 
 4. ¿ En dónde^ me siento, señor profesor? 
 
 5. Siéntese en esta silla, y ahora empezemos. ¿ De 
 qué hablamos la última vez? (sel'-yá). 
 
 V. se sienta, 
 él se sienta, 
 nosotros nos sentamos. 
 V. V. se sientan, 
 ellos se sientan. 
 
 se siente, 
 se siente, 
 nos sentemos, 
 se sienten, 
 se sienten. 
 
 2 En, in, when placed before donde, where^ means within^ inside 
 of. When motion is expressed or implied where should be expressed 
 by a donde, where^ whereto^ whither, and de donde, wherefrom, 
 whence, as: 
 
 I A dónde va V. ? Where are you going? 
 
 I De dónde viene V. ? Where do you come from? 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
202 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 6. You had explained the use of ^^hacer/’ in reference 
 to the weather. (Literally: Me had you (habia 
 V.) explained (explicado) the use of the verb ‘ ‘hacer’ ^ 
 with reference to the weather). 
 
 7. Ah! yes, I remember. And have you learned the 
 conjugation of “hacer” by heart? (Literally: Ah 
 yes, already myself (I) remember. And have 
 learned you by (de) memory (memoria) the con- 
 jugation (la conjugación) of the verb “hacer”)? 
 
 8. Yes, sir. Hacer is very irregular, but I think I 
 know the whole conjugation. (Literally: Yes, sir. 
 “Hacer” is very irregular, but (I) believe that (I) 
 know all the conjugation). 
 
 9. Well, let us see (veamos) 1 Conjugate the indica- 
 tive present. 
 
 I make. we make, 
 
 you make. you make, 
 
 he makes. they make. 
 
 10. Very well. And now the present of the subjunc- 
 tive. 
 
 I may make, 
 you may make, 
 he may make, 
 we may make, 
 you may make, 
 they may make. 
 
 1 The pupil should study the whole conjugation of haber in 
 Part X. 
 
 Modo Indicativo del Verbo “Haber.” 
 
 {To have). 
 
 Yo. Usted. El. Nosotros. Ustedes. Ellos. 
 
 Presente: he. ha. ha. hemos. han. han. 
 
 Imperfecto: había, había, había, habíamos, habían, habían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
203 
 
 The Spanish Language.'-' 
 
 6. Me habia^ V. explicado el uso del verbo ^^hacer’’ 
 con referencia al tiempo. 
 
 7. Ah! si, ya me acuerdo. ¿ Y ha aprendido V. de 
 memoria la conjugación del verbo ^^hacer’’? (ma- 
 mo'-ré kón-^hóo-gá-the "^ón') . 
 
 8. Sí señor. Hacer es muy irregular, pero creo que 
 sé toda la conjugación, (ér-ra-góó-lárr'). 
 
 9. ¡Veamos! Conjugue V. 
 (kon-‘hóó'-gá). 
 
 Yo hago 
 V. hace 
 él hace, 
 nos.^ hacemos 
 V. V. hacen 
 ellos hacen. 
 
 . el indicativo presente. 
 
 (á'-gó), 
 
 (á'-th;^). 
 
 (á-tha'-mós). 
 
 (á'-thén). 
 
 10. Bien, muy bien. 
 Yo haga 
 V. haga, 
 él haga, 
 nos. hagamos 
 V. V. hagan 
 ellos hagan. 
 
 el subjtmctivo presente, 
 (á'-gá). 
 
 (á-gá'-mós). 
 
 (á'-gán). 
 
 Definido: hube. hubo. hubo, hubimos, hubieron, hubieron. 
 
 Futuro: habré, habrá, habrá, habremos habrán, habrán. 
 
 Condicional: habría, habría, habría, habríamos, habrían, habrían. 
 Gerundio : habiendo. 
 
 Participio : habido. 
 
 2 In future we shall abbreviate nosotros into nos. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
204 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 11. Excellent! And now the pa^. 
 
 I made, 
 you made, 
 he made, 
 we made, 
 you made, 
 they made. 
 
 12. Very well. And now the future. 
 
 I shall make, 
 you will make, 
 he will make, 
 we shall make, 
 you will make, 
 they will make. 
 
 13. Excellent! And the conditional. 
 
 I should make, 
 you would make. - 
 he would make, 
 we should make, 
 you would make, 
 they would make. 
 
 14. You are indeed a diligent student (el gran estu- 
 diante) ! Conjugate now the first form of the 
 imperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 I might make, 
 you might make, 
 he might make, 
 we might make, 
 you might make, 
 they might make. 
 
 ^ There is no material difference between the first and second 
 forms of the imperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 In either form it is employed after verbs in any past tense in 
 the indicative, and after the Conditional, as: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 205 
 
 II. ¡Bravo! Y ahora el definido, (dá-fé-né'-dó). 
 
 Yo hice 
 
 (e'-th^). 
 
 V. hizo 
 él hizo. 
 
 (é'-thO). 
 
 nos. hicimos 
 V. V. hicieron 
 ellos hicieron. 
 
 (é-the'-mos). 
 (é-the^ á'-rOn). 
 
 12. Bien, muy bien. Y ahora el futuro, (foo-too'-ro). 
 
 Yo haré 
 
 (á-ra'). 
 
 V. hará 
 él hará. 
 
 (á-rá'). 
 
 nos. haremos 
 V. V. harán 
 ellos harán. 
 
 (á-ra'-mós). 
 
 (á-rán'). 
 
 13. ¡Bravo! Y el condicional, (kón-dé-the^o-nál')* 
 
 Yo haría 
 
 (á-re'-á). 
 
 V. haría, 
 él haría, 
 nos. haríamos 
 V. V. harían 
 
 (á-ré'-á-mós). 
 
 (á-ré'-án). 
 
 ellos harían (á-ré'-án). 
 
 14. ¡Es Ve el gran estudiante! Conjugue V. el sub- 
 juntivo imperfecto,, la primera forma.^ 
 
 Yo hiciera (e-the ^ á'-rá) . 
 
 V. hiciera, 
 él hiciera, 
 nos. hiciéramos 
 V. V. hicieran 
 ellos hicieran. 
 
 (é-the^a'-rá-mós) . 
 (é-thé"^ á'-rán). 
 
 Desearía que V. me hiciera {pr I wish you would do me that 
 hiciese) ese favor, favor. 
 
 Le mandaron que fuese (or fuera) They ordered him to go to 
 a Veracruz. Veracruz. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
2o6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 15. Capital! And the second form! 
 
 I might make. we might make, 
 
 you might make. you might make, 
 
 he might make. they might make. 
 
 16. Bravo! I have no doubt that you will soon mas- 
 ter the intricacies of the Spanish language. (Lit- 
 erally: Bravo! Not have (I) doubt (duda) that 
 very soon will conquer you (vencerá V.) the diffi- 
 culties of the language Spanish). 
 
 17. You can’t imagine how anxious I am to master it. 
 No other tongue is so important for business-men 
 as the beautiful language of Cervantes. (Liter- 
 ally: Not can you imagine yourself the much that 
 (I) wish to learn it. Not is there (hay) language 
 which may be (sea^) more important (importante) 
 for (para) the man of business (el hombre de ne- 
 gocios) than the beautiful (hermoso) language of 
 Cervantes). 
 
 18. You are quite right. The natural outlet for Amer- 
 ican trade is to the South, and with the exception 
 of Brazil, where Portuguese is spoken, Spanish is 
 the language of the whole American Continent, 
 south of California. (Literally: Have you much 
 right. The market natural (el mercado natural) 
 of this country (pais) is in the South (el sur), and 
 with the exception (la excepción) of the (del) Brazil 
 in where is spoken the Portuguese (portugués), in 
 all the Continent (continente) American to the 
 south of California is spoken the Spanish). 
 
 1 The subjunctive mood is employed after impersonal expres- 
 sions, unless they denote positive certainty: 
 
 Es estraño que V. no lo sepa, It is strange that you do not know it. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 15. Muy bien. Y la segunda forma. 
 
 207 
 
 Yo hiciese 
 V. hiciese, 
 él hiciese. 
 
 (é-the^á'-s^). 
 
 nos. hiciésemos 
 V. V. hiciesen 
 
 (é-thé a'-sá-mos) . 
 (e-thé"^a'-sén). 
 
 ellos hiciesen. 
 
 16. ¡ Bravo! No tengo duda que muy pronto vencerá 
 V. todas las dificultades del idioma español, (dóó'- 
 da vén-thá-rá'). 
 
 17. No puede V. imaginarse lo mucho que quiero 
 aprenderlo. No hay idioma que sea^ más importante 
 para el hombre de negocios que el hermoso idioma 
 de Cervantes, (ém-porr-tán'-t^ óm'-bry ná-gó'- 
 thé^ os thérr-ván'-tés). 
 
 18. Tiene V. mucha razón. El mercado natural de 
 este país está en el sur, y con la excepción del Brasil 
 en donde se habla el portugués, en todo el conti- 
 nente americano al sur de California se habla el 
 español, (mérr-ká'-dó ná-tóó-rál' pórr-tóo-gas' kOn- 
 te-nén'-t}^ sóórr). 
 
 Es lástima que no venga, It is a pity that he does not come. 
 
 Es necesario que lo haga V., You must do it. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
2o8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 19. American statesmen and many business-people are 
 
 beginning to realize this fact, and in order to gain 
 the South American trade, we must know the 
 Spanish language and understand the commercial 
 needs of the country. (Literally: The men of 
 
 state (de estado) of this country and many men 
 of business, begin to see this, and in order to (para) 
 obtain (obtener) the markets South American (we) 
 must know (conocer) the language and the needs 
 commercial of those countries (las necesidades comer- 
 ciales). 
 
 20. No doubt about it! But now let us form some 
 
 idiomatic phrases with ^ ‘hacer. How would you 
 say: The weather was very bad yesterday? (Lit- 
 erally: Without (sin) doubt whatever (alguna). 
 
 But now let us form some (algunas) sentences idio- 
 matic (idiomáticas) with the verb “hacer. How 
 would say you (diría V.^): The weather was very 
 bad yesterday)? 
 
 21. Oh that is easy. Yesterday the weather was very 
 bad. (Literally: Oh, that (eso) is very easy. 
 Yesterday (ayer) (it) made very bad weather). 
 
 22. Very well, and now tell me something about to- 
 day’s weather. (Literally: Very well, and now 
 
 tell me something (algo) of the weather of (to-day). 
 
 ^ There are two verbs in Spanish for the English verb to know, 
 viz.: saber and conocer. Conocer denotes to he acquainted with, 
 to know by sight or from experience; saber means to know by 
 study, to have a knowledge of something, 
 
 2 The pupil should now study the irregular verb decir in Part 
 X. At any rate he should master the indicative mood as given 
 on the next page. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 2og 
 
 19. Los hombres de estado de este país y muchos hom- 
 bres de negocios empiezan a ver esto, y para obtener 
 los mercados sudamericanos debemos conocer^ el 
 idioma y las necesidades comerciales de esos paises. 
 (ém-pe^a'-zán ná-tha-sé-dá'-dés kó-mérr-the^á'- 
 lés). 
 
 20. Sin duda alguna. Pero ahora formemos algimas 
 oraciones idiomáticas con el verbo ‘^hacer.’’ ¿ Cómo 
 diría V. The weather was very bad yesterday? 
 (é-dé"T o-má'-té-kás de-re' -á). 
 
 21. Oh, eso es muy fácil. Ayer hizo muy mal tiempo, 
 (á-yérr'). 
 
 22. Muy bien. Y ahora dígame algo del tiempo de hoy. 
 
 Modo Indicativo del verbo “Decir.” 
 
 (To say^ to tell). 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 El. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 Presente: 
 
 digo. 
 
 dice. 
 
 dice. 
 
 decimos. 
 
 dicen. 
 
 dicen. 
 
 Imperfecto: 
 
 decía. 
 
 decía. 
 
 decía. 
 
 decíamos. 
 
 decían. 
 
 decían. 
 
 Definido: 
 
 dije. 
 
 dijo. 
 
 dijo. 
 
 dijimos. 
 
 dijeron. 
 
 dijeron. 
 
 Futuro: 
 
 diré. 
 
 dirá. 
 
 dirá. 
 
 diremos. 
 
 dirán. 
 
 dirán. 
 
 Condicional: 
 
 diría. 
 
 diría. 
 
 diría. 
 
 diríamos. 
 
 dirían. 
 
 dirían. 
 
 Gerundio: diciendo. 
 Participio pasado: dicho. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 6b room. 
 
210 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 23. Yesterday the weather was very bad, but to-day 
 it is very fine. It is pleasant and warm and yet 
 not too warm. (Literally: Yesterday (it) made 
 very bad weather, but to-day it makes very good. 
 (It) is very pleasant (agradable), (it) makes warmth 
 (calor), but not much). 
 
 24. Is it windy? (Literally: Makes (it) wind (viento) ? 
 
 25. It was quite windy last evening, but to-day there 
 
 is scarcely any breeze. (Literally: (It) made 
 
 much wind last night (anoche), but to-day not 
 makes scarcely (casi) nothing). 
 
 26. Have you read the papers? Do you know what 
 the weather probabilities for to-morrow are? (Lit- 
 erally: Have read you the journal (el periódico)? 
 What say (they) of the observatory (observatorio) 
 about (sobre) the weather for to-morrow) ? 
 
 27. I have the paper here. Let me see; here it is: 
 The probabilities for to-morrow are that there 
 will be strong westerly winds with showers. (Lit- 
 erally: Here (I) carry (traigo) the paper. Let me 
 (déjeme) see; here (it) is: The probabilities (las 
 probabilidades) for to-morrow are that (we) shall 
 have (tendremos) strong winds from the (del) 
 west (oeste) and showers (chubascos). 
 
 1 Anoche is rendered by last night; esta noche, by to-night. 
 
 2 The student should learn the whole conjugation of traer, to 
 bring. 
 
 Modo Indicativo Del Verbo “Traer.” 
 
 {To bring). 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 El. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. Ellos. 
 
 Presente: 
 
 traigo. 
 
 trae. 
 
 trae. 
 
 traemos. 
 
 traen. 
 
 traen. 
 
 Imperfecto: 
 
 traía. 
 
 traía. 
 
 traía. 
 
 traíamos. 
 
 traían. 
 
 traían. 
 
 Definido: 
 
 traje. 
 
 trajo. 
 
 trajo. 
 
 trajimos. 
 
 trajeron, trajeron. 
 
 Futuro: 
 
 traeré. 
 
 traerá. 
 
 traerá. 
 
 traeremos. 
 
 traerán, traerán. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 211 
 
 23. Ayer hizo muy mal tiempo, pero hoy lo hace muy 
 bueno. Está muy agradable; hace calor, pero no 
 mucho, (á-grá-dá'-bl^) . 
 
 24. I Hace viento? (ve'^én'-tó). 
 
 25* Hizo mucho viento anoche,^ pero hoy no hace casi 
 nada, (á-nó'-cha ká'-sé). 
 
 26. I Ha leido V. el periódico? ¿ Qué dicen del ob- 
 servatorio sobre el tiempo para mañana? (pa- 
 ré^ó'-dé-ko ob-sérr-vá-tó'-ré"^o). 
 
 27. Aquí traigo^ el periódico. Déjeme ver; ¡aquí 
 está! Las probabilidades para mañana son que 
 tendremos fuertes vientos del oeste y chubascos, 
 (pro-bá-bé-le-da'-dés o'^és'-t}^ chóó-bás'-kOs). 
 
 Cond: traería, traería, traería, traeríamos, traerían, traerían. 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 Pres: traiga, traiga, traiga, traigamos, traigan, traigan. 
 
 Imp: trajera, trajera, trajera, trajéramos, trajeran, trajeran. 
 
 Imp: trajese, trajese, trajese, trajésemos, trajesen, trajesen. 
 
 Fut: trajere, trajere, trajere, trajéremos, trajeren, trajeren. 
 
 Genmdio: trayendo. 
 
 Participio pasado: traido. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
212 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 28. You translated that very well. I will now give 
 you some phrases in regard to the weather with 
 “hacer.’’ (Literally: Translated you (tradujo V.) 
 that very well. Now I am going (voy) to give 
 you to you some phrases about the weather with 
 the verb “hacer”). 
 
 29. What kind of weather is it to-day? (Literally: 
 What sort (clase) of weather makes to-day)? 
 
 30. Splendid: the weather is delightful. (Literally: 
 
 It makes a weather delightful (delicioso). The 
 weather is (está) most beautiful (hermosísimo). 
 
 31. Open the window and see how the weather is. 
 (Literally: Open you (abra V.) the window (la 
 ventana) and look (mire) how is the weather). 
 
 32. The sun is shining beautifully, but it is quite cold. 
 (Literally: It makes a sun (un sol) splendid, but 
 makes much cold.) 
 
 33. It seems to me that we are going to have bad 
 weather; the barometer points to rain. (Liter- 
 ally: Me (it) seems that (we) go to have bad 
 weather; the barometer (el barómetro) signal 
 (señala) rain (lluvia). 
 
 34. You are quite right; the barometer has fallen; I 
 am afraid it is going to rain. (Literally: Have 
 you right; the barometer has fallen (bajado): (I) 
 fear that (we) may have water (agua) 
 
 35. Excellent! I see you understand these idioms 
 perfectly. 
 
 ^ Tradujo V. is the Definido of the irregular verb traducir, to 
 translate. The indicative is as follows: 
 
 Modo Indicativo Del Verbo “Traducir.” 
 
 {To translate). 
 
 Yo Usted. El. Nosotros. Ustedes. Ellos. 
 
 Fres: traduzco, traduce, traduce, traducimos, traducen, traducen. 
 Imp: traducía. — ía. — ía. — íamos. — ían. — ^ían. 
 
 Def: traduje, tradujo , tradujo, tradujimos, tradujeron, tradujeron. 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 213 
 
 28. Tradujo^ V. eso muy bien. Ahora voy a darle a 
 V. algunas frases sobre el tiempo con el verbo 
 ^^hacer.’^ (trá-doó'-'hó) . 
 
 29. I Qué clase de tiempo hace hoy? 
 
 30. Hace un tiempo delicioso. El tiempo está her- 
 mosísimo. (dá-le-thé'^ o'-só érr-mo-se'-se-mo). 
 
 31. Abra V. la ventana y mire como está el tiempo, 
 (á'-brá vén-tá'-ná mé'-ry). 
 
 32. Hace un sol espléndido, pero hace mucho frío, 
 (és-plén'-de-dó). 
 
 33. Me parece que vamos a tener mal tiempo; el baró- 
 metro señala lluvia. (sén-yá' 4 á lyóó'-ve"^á). 
 
 34. Tiene V. razón; el barómetro ha bajado;^ temo 
 que tengamos^ agua, (bá-^há'-do). 
 
 35. Muy bien! Veo que entiende V. estos modismos 
 perfectamente. 
 
 Futuro: 
 
 Condicional: 
 
 traduc-iré. — irá. — irá. — iremos, — irán. — irán, 
 
 traduc-iría. — iría. — iría. — iríamos. — irían. — irían. 
 
 2 The thermometer has riseriy el termómetro ha subido. The 
 thermometer has falletiy el termómetro ha bajado. 
 
 3 After verbs of doubt, fear and apprehension the subjunctive 
 mood must be used: 
 
 Temo que no vengan a tiempo, I am afraid they will not arrive 
 
 in time. 
 
 Dudaba que le hubiesen hecho 
 esa pregunta. 
 
 I doubted whether they would have 
 asked him this question. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
214 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 36. Are these all the idiomatic expressions in which 
 ^ ‘hacer’’ is employed? (Literally: Are these all 
 the idioms in the which (en los que) is used the 
 verb “hacer”)? 
 
 37. Oh no, we use the verb “hacer” impersonally in 
 the third person of the singular with phrases like 
 these: ^^Two years ago, two hours ago,” etc. You 
 understand me, don’t you? (Literally: Oh no, (we) 
 use the verb hacer” impersonally (impersonalmente) 
 in the third person of the singular in phrases like 
 (como) the following (las siguientes): “It makes 
 two years, it makes two hours,” etc. Me under- 
 stand you, not is truth) ? 
 
 38. Perfectly. 
 
 39. Then form a sentence, please. 
 
 40. Two hours ago the weather was fine, but now the 
 wind has changed and it is quite disagreeable. 
 (Literally: It makes two hours (it) made good 
 weather, but now has changed (cambiado) the 
 wind and (it) is disagreeable (desagradable). 
 
 1 The relative pronoun que is accompanied by the article el, la, 
 los, las, lo, according to gender and number in the following cases: 
 a. When the relative is accompanied by a preposition, as: 
 
 Me ha pagado, con lo que He has paid me and I am pleased 
 estoy contento, with it {literally: with which 
 
 I am pleased), 
 
 h. When the relative refers to a whole sentence, as: 
 
 He estado en el campo, lo que I have been in the country and it 
 me ha hecho bien, did me good {literally: which 
 
 has done me good). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 2IS 
 
 36. I Son estos todos los modismos en los que^ se usa 
 el verbo ‘^hacer”? 
 
 37. Oh no, usamos el verbo ^^hacer” impersonalmente 
 en la tercera persona del singular en frases como 
 las siguientes: “Hace dos años, hace dos horas,’’ 
 etc. Me entiende V., ¿no es verdad? (sé-ghé 
 ^én'-tés). 
 
 38. Perfectamente. 
 
 39. Entonces forme V. una oración, (o-rá-thé'^ón')- 
 
 40. Hace dos horas hacía buen tiempo, pero ahora ha 
 cambiado el viento y está desagradable, (kám- 
 bé'^á'-dó dés-á-grá"dá'-bly). 
 
 c. To avoid ambiguity, i.e. when the relative is separated from 
 the noun to which it refers, as: 
 
 Pidió la libertad de su hijo, la He asked for his sotí* s liberty and 
 que consiguió, obtained it {literally: which 
 
 he obtained). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
2i6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 41. Very well. I see you understand these idioms 
 perfectly and now we will go on with ‘‘tener.” 
 Have you learned this verb by heart? (Literally: 
 Very well. (I) see that understand you these 
 idioms perfectly and now let us pass (pasemos) 
 to the verb “tener.” Learned you by memory 
 (de memoria) this verb) ? 
 
 42. I think I know it, but I wish you wotdd ask me 
 
 some questions. (Literally: (I) believe that it 
 
 (I) know, but (I) wish that me may make you 
 some questions). 
 
 43. Well, give me the Past of the Indicative and 
 the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. 
 
 PAST (Indicative Mood). 
 
 I had. 
 you had. 
 he had. 
 we had. 
 you had. 
 they had. 
 
 IMPERFECT (Subjunctive Mood), 
 First Form. 
 
 I might have, 
 you might have, 
 he might have, 
 we might have, 
 you might have, 
 they might have. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 6b room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 217 
 
 41. Muy bien. Veo que entiende V. estos modismos 
 perfectamente, y ahora pasemos al verbo “tener/’ 
 ¿ Aprendió V. de memoria este verbo? (pá-sa'- 
 mOs á-prén-de^ó' ma-mó'-ré'^á). 
 
 42. Creo que lo sé; pero deseo que me haga V. algunas 
 preguntas. 
 
 43. Dígame el definido del indicativo y el imperfecto 
 del subjmitivo. 
 
 DEFINIDO (Modo indicativo) 
 
 Yo tuve 
 V. tuvo 
 él tuvo. 
 
 (too'-va). 
 
 (toó'-v 5 ): 
 
 nos. tuvimos 
 V. V. tuvieron 
 ellos tuvieron. 
 
 (too-vé'-mós). 
 (too-ve'V' á'-rón) . 
 
 IMPERFECTO (Modo subjuntivo) 
 
 Primera forma. 
 
 Yo tuviera 
 V. tuviera, 
 él tuviera. 
 
 (too-ve"T" a'-rá). 
 
 nos. tuviéramos 
 V. V. tuvieran 
 ellos tuvieran. 
 
 (tóó-vé^á'rá-mos) . 
 (tóo-vé^a'-rán) . 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
218 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Second Form. 
 
 43. Excellent! 
 
 I might have, 
 you might have, 
 he might have, 
 we might have, 
 you might have, 
 they might have. 
 
 And the Future! 
 
 I shall have, 
 you will have, 
 he will have, 
 we shall have, 
 you will have, 
 they will have. 
 
 44- Very well. And the Conditional. 
 
 45. Excellent! 
 
 I should have, 
 you would have, 
 he would have, 
 we should have, 
 you would have, 
 they would have. 
 
 And now the Present Subjunctive! 
 I may have, 
 you may have, 
 he may have, 
 we may have. 
 
 ^ you may have, 
 they may have. 
 
 á fax; a pale; 6 eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 Segimda forma. 
 
 219 
 
 Yo tuviese 
 V. tuviese, 
 él tuviese, 
 nos. tuviésemos 
 V. V. tuviesen 
 ellos tuviesen. 
 
 (too-ve '^a'-sé). 
 
 (tóó-vé^a'-sá-mos) . 
 (toó-ve'^á sén). 
 
 43. i Bravo! Y el Futuro. 
 Yo tendré 
 V. tendrá 
 él tendrá, 
 nos. -tendremos 
 V. V. tendrán 
 ellos tendrán. 
 
 (tén-dra'). 
 
 (tén-drá'). 
 
 (tén-dra'-mOs). 
 
 (tén-drán'). 
 
 44. Muy bien. Y el Condicional. 
 
 Yo tendría (tén-dre'-á). 
 
 V. tendría, 
 él tendría. 
 
 nos. tendríamos (tén-dre'-á-mós). 
 
 V. V. tendrían (tén-dre'-án). 
 
 ellos tendrían. 
 
 45. ¡ Bravo! Y ahora el presente del subjuntivo. 
 
 Yo tenga (tén'-gá). 
 
 V. tenga, 
 él tenga. 
 
 nos. tengamos (tén-gá'-mós). 
 
 V. V. tengan (tén'-gán). 
 
 ellos tengan. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
220 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 46. Very well indeed! Now let me give you some 
 rules in regard to the idiomatic use of ‘^tener/’ 
 (Literally: Well, very well. Now let me give you 
 some rules about (sobre) the use idiomatic of the 
 verb tener). 
 
 47. I have already explained to you that ‘^tener” in- 
 dicates possession. (Literally: Already to you (I) 
 have explained (explicado) to you that ‘^tener’^ 
 indicates (indica) possession (posesión). 
 
 48. Yes, I remember this rule perfectly, but let me 
 ask you a question. (Literally: Yes, myself (I) 
 remember of this rule perfectly, but let me make 
 you a question). 
 
 49. As many as you like. (Literally: The which you 
 may like (quiera^). 
 
 50. Is ‘Tener’’ used in this way in all tenses and moods? 
 (Literally: Is used thus (así) the verb “tener” in 
 all its tenses and moods (modos)? 
 
 51. Undoubtedly, throughout the whole conjugation, 
 as for instance: I have had the misfortune of los- 
 ing a great deal of money by the failure of the 
 Coliunbia Bank. (Literally: Without doubt any; 
 in aU its conjugation; for instance: (I) have had 
 the misfortune (la desgracia) of to lose (perder) 
 much money in the failure (la quiebra) of the 
 Bank (del Banco) of Columbia (Colombia). 
 
 ^ The pupil should now master the whole conjugation of querer, 
 to be willing. 
 
 Modo Indicativo Del Verbo “Querer.” 
 
 {To he willing; to wish). 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 El. Nosotros. Ustedes. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 quiero. 
 
 quiere. 
 
 quiere, queremos, quieren. 
 
 quieren. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 quería. 
 
 quería. 
 
 quería, queríamos, querían. 
 
 querían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 quise. 
 
 quiso. 
 
 quiso. quisimos. quisieron. 
 
 quisieron. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 querré. 
 
 querrá. 
 
 querrá, querremos, querrán. 
 
 querrán. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 querría. 
 
 querría. 
 
 querría, querríamos, querrían. 
 
 querrían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 221 
 
 46. Bien, muy bien! Ahora déjeme darle algunas 
 reglas sobre el uso idiomático del verbo ^^tener.’^ 
 (óó'-s 5 é-de'^ó-má'-té-kó). 
 
 47. Ya le he explicado a V. que ^^tener” indica posesión, 
 (én-de'-ká po-sa-sé^ón'). 
 
 48. Sí, me acuerdo de esta regla perfectamente, pero 
 déjeme hacerle una pregunta, (á-kwérr'-do da'- 
 ^ha-ma). 
 
 49. Las que V. quiera.^ (ké^a'-rá). 
 
 50. I Se usa así el verbo ^^tener’’ en todos sus tiempos 
 y modos? (á-sé'). 
 
 51. Sin duda alguna; .en toda su conjugación, por 
 ejemplo: He tenido la desgracia de perder mucho 
 dinero en la quiebra del Banco de Colombia, (dóo'- 
 dá a-^hém'-pl 5 dés-grá'-the'^á pérr-dérr' ké'^a'- 
 brá kó-lom'-be^á). 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 Presente : quiera. 
 
 quiera. 
 
 quisiera. 
 
 quisiese. 
 
 quiera. 
 
 quisiera, 
 
 quisiese. 
 
 quisiere. 
 
 Imperfecto: quisiera. 
 
 Imperfecto: quisiese. 
 
 Futuro: quisiere 
 
 queramos. 
 
 quisiere. 
 
 quieran. 
 
 quisieran. 
 
 quisiesen. 
 
 quisieren. 
 
 quieran. 
 
 quisieran. 
 
 quisiesen. 
 
 quisieren. 
 
 quisiéramos. 
 
 quisiésemos. 
 
 quisiéremos. 
 
 Gerundio: queriendo, 
 
 Participio: querido. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
222 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 52. Thanks; this makes everything clear and plain to 
 me. (Literally: Thanks; this me it explains per- 
 fectly). 
 
 53. Now please go on and give me the next rule in 
 regard to the idiomatic use of ^^tener.’’ (Literally: 
 Now pray you to continue (continuar) and tell 
 me the other rule about (acerca del) use idiomatic 
 of the verb ^'tener’O* 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 Comidas y Bebidas. 
 
 (kó-me'-dás é bá-bé'-das.) 
 
 Comer (kó-mérr'). 
 
 Beber (bá-bérr'). 
 
 Cenar (thá-nárr'). 
 
 El apetito (á-pá-té'-tó). 
 
 No tengo apetito. 
 
 Tener hambre (ám'-bry). 
 
 I Tiene V. hambre? 
 
 Sí, tengo hambre. 
 
 Tener sed (sád). 
 
 ¿ Tiene V. sed? 
 
 No, no tengo sed. 
 
 El Almuerzo. 
 
 (ál-móó-érr'-tho) . 
 
 El desayuno (dés-á-yoó'- The breakfast. 
 nO). 
 
 La merienda (má-re'T én'- The luncheon, 
 da). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 Eating and Drinking. 
 
 To eat; to dine. 
 
 To drink. 
 
 To sup. 
 
 The appetite. 
 
 I have no appetite. 
 
 To be hungry. 
 
 Are you hungry? 
 
 Yes, I am hungry. 
 
 To be thirsty. 
 
 Are you thirsty? 
 
 No, I am not thirsty. 
 The Breakfast. 
 
 ^ Almorzar belongs to the class of verbs which change o of the 
 stem-syllable into ue throughout the singular and third person 
 plural in the present indicative and subjunctive and in the same 
 persons in the imperative. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 223 
 
 52. Gracias, esto me lo explica perfectamente, (éx- 
 ple'-ká). 
 
 53. Ahora sírvase V. continuar y decirme la otra regla 
 acerca del uso idiomático del verbo ‘^tener.’^ (kon- 
 té-nóo-árr' á-thérr'-ká). 
 
 VOCABULARIO 
 
 El café (ká-fá'). 
 
 Una taza de café (tá'-thá). 
 
 El té (tá). 
 
 Una taza de té. 
 
 El chocolate (cho-kó-lá'- 
 
 t5^). 
 
 Almorzar (ál-mórr-thárr'). 
 
 I Qué almuerza V. ? Café, 
 té o chocolate? 
 
 Tomo café, pero mi señora 
 toma té. 
 
 ¡ No le gusta a V. el té? 
 
 Prefiero café (pra-féT^a'- 
 ro). 
 
 Pedir (pa-dérr'). 
 
 I Pidió V.? 
 
 ; Qué desea V. pedir? 
 
 El bistek (bé'-sták). 
 
 Bien cocido (ko-the'-do). 
 
 Mozo, tráigame un bistek 
 y una taza de café 
 (trá'Té-gá-m;^). 
 
 I Lo quiere V. bien cocido? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 The coffee. 
 
 A cup of coffee. 
 
 The tea. 
 
 A cup of tea. 
 
 The chocolate. 
 
 To breakfast. 
 
 What do you take for 
 breakfast ? Coffee, tea 
 or chocolate? 
 
 I drink coffee, but my wife 
 takes tea. 
 
 Don't you like tea? 
 
 I prefer coffee. 
 
 To order. 
 
 Did you order? 
 
 What do you wish to order? 
 The beefsteak. 
 
 Well done. 
 
 Waiter, bring me a steak 
 and a cup of coffee. 
 
 Do you want it well done? 
 
224 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 No, a la inglesa.^ 
 
 La costilla (kos-tel'-ya). 
 
 La costilla de camero (kárr- 
 na'-ró). 
 
 La chuleta de temerá (chóo- 
 lá'-tá térr-na'-rá). 
 
 La costilla de puerco (póó- 
 érr'-kó). 
 
 Las patatas (pá>tá'-tás). 
 
 Las papas (pá'-pás). 
 
 Patatas fritas (fre'-tás). 
 
 Tráigame una costilla de 
 camero y patatas fri- 
 tas. 
 
 El huevo; los huevos (hwá'- 
 
 v5). 
 
 Huevos pasados por agua 
 (ág'-wá). 
 
 Huevos tibios (té-'bé"^os) 
 (Mexican idiom). 
 
 Revoltillo de huevos (ra- 
 vol-tel'-yó). 
 
 Huevos cocidos (ko-the'- 
 dos). 
 
 Huevos duros (dóo'-rós). 
 
 Huevos fritos (fré'-tós). 
 
 Huevos escalfados (és-kál- 
 fá'-dós). 
 
 Huevos frescos (frés'-kós). 
 
 Una tortilla (tórr-tel'-yá). 
 
 i Cómo quiere V. los hue- 
 vos, tibios o duros? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 No, rare please. 
 
 The chop. 
 
 The mutton-chop. 
 
 The veal-cutlet. 
 
 The pork-chop. 
 
 ' The potatoes. 
 
 Fried potatoes. 
 
 Bring me a mutton-chop 
 and fried potatoes. 
 
 The egg; the eggs. 
 
 ‘ Soft boiled eggs. 
 
 Scrambled eggs. 
 
 1 
 
 I Hard boiled eggs. 
 
 Fried eggs. 
 
 Poached eggs. 
 
 Fresh eggs. 
 
 An omelette. 
 
 How do you want the eggs, 
 soft boiled or hard? 
 
 * Idiomatic expression. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 225 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 Cocidos en tres minutos 
 (mé-noó'-tos). 
 
 La sal (sal). 
 
 La pimienta (pé-mé^én'- 
 tá). 
 
 El azúcar (á-thóo-kárr'). 
 
 La leche (la'-cha). 
 
 La nata (ná'-tá). 
 
 La crema (kra'-ma). 
 
 El vinagre (vé-nág'-rá). 
 
 El aceite (á-tha^é'-t;^). 
 
 La mostaza (mos-tá'-thá). 
 
 El salero (sá-lá'-ró). 
 
 El azucarero (á-thóó-kárr- 
 rá'-ró). 
 
 La cafetera (ká-£a-ta'-rá). 
 
 La tetera (ta-tá'-rá). 
 
 La tacita para huevos (tá- 
 the'-tá). 
 
 Echar (a-chárr'). 
 
 Hágame favor de servirme 
 otra taza de té. 
 
 Agua fresca. 
 
 Sírvame un vaso de agua. 
 
 Agua fría (fré'-á). 
 
 Agua caliente (ká-le"^én'- 
 
 tj^). 
 
 Agua tibia (té'-bé^á). 
 
 Agua muy caliente. 
 
 Agua hirviendo (érr-vé"^ 
 én'-do). 
 
 Agua mineral (mg-ná-rál'). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Let them boil three min- 
 utes. 
 
 The salt. 
 
 The pepper. 
 
 The sugar. 
 
 The milk. 
 
 I The cream. 
 
 The vinegar. 
 
 The oil. 
 
 The mustard. 
 
 The salt-cellar. 
 
 The sugar-basin. 
 
 The coffee-um. 
 
 The tea-um. 
 
 The egg-cup. 
 
 To pour out. 
 
 Pray pour out another cup 
 of tea for me. 
 
 Fresh water. 
 
 Pour me out a glass of 
 water. 
 
 Cold water. 
 
 Warm water. 
 
 Lukewarm water. 
 
 Hot water. 
 
 Boiling water. 
 
 Mineral water. 
 
226 
 
 / 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 Agua con hielo (é'^á'-lo). 
 
 Un jarro ('hárr'-ro). 
 
 Los Platos, (los plá'-tos). 
 
 Poner la mesa (má'-sá). 
 
 El plato (plá'-tó). 
 
 Limpio (lém'-pé'^ó). 
 
 Sírvase poner platos lim- 
 pios. 
 
 El plato hondo (ón'-do). 
 
 El plato. 
 
 La fuente (foo^én'-t^). 
 
 El cucharón (kóó-chárr- 
 ron'). 
 
 La cuchara (koo^chárr'- 
 rá). 
 
 La cuchara grande. 
 
 La cucharita (kóó-chárr- 
 ré'-tá). 
 
 Una cucharada (koo-chárr'- 
 rá'-dá). 
 
 El tenedor (tá-na-dorr'). 
 
 El cuchillo (kóó-chel'-yó). 
 
 Déme un cuchillo limpio. 
 
 El mantel (mán-téll'). 
 
 La servilleta (sérr-vél-yá'- 
 tá). 
 
 No me trajo V. servilleta 
 (trá'-^hó). 
 
 El cubierto (kóo-vé'^érr'- 
 tó). 
 
 Ponga V. otro cubierto 
 (pón'-gá)'. 
 
 El vaso (vá'-so). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Ice-water (water with ice). 
 A pitcher. 
 
 The Dishes. 
 
 To lay the table. 
 
 The plate. 
 
 Clean. 
 
 Pray, serve clean plates. 
 
 The soup plate (i.e. the 
 plate deep). 
 
 I The dish. 
 
 " The spoon. 
 
 The large spoon. 
 
 The teaspoon. 
 
 A spoon-full. 
 
 The fork. 
 
 The knife. 
 
 Give me a clean knife. 
 
 The table-cloth. 
 
 The napkin. 
 
 You did not bring me a 
 napkin. 
 
 The cover. 
 
 Put on another cover. 
 
 The glass. 
 

■ THE 
 
 ü'NÍVERSiTV OF ILLINOiF 
 
 ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRACTICAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc,. 
 
 Haulhnbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK : : LONDON 
 The International Ciollege of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES. 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers^ Hall, London, Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language 
 
 227 
 
 ñ n ' 
 
 /f. ii- 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 iRules about Tener 228 
 
 Tener used idiomatically 230 
 
 Days of the Week 236 
 
 Months of the Year 236 
 
 Idiomatic expression for I must 247 
 
 Vocabulary 252 
 
228 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Tener. 
 
 {Continued), 
 
 1. With pleasure. The verb ^^tener’’ is used in the 
 sense of ^‘to be^’ in English, when it expresses de- 
 sire or sentiment. (Literally: With much pleasure. 
 The verb tener is used in the sense (el sentido) of 
 ^^to be’’ in English when (it) expresses desire (deseo) 
 or sentiment (sentimiento). 
 
 2. I regret to tell you that I can’t quite understand 
 
 what you mean by this. Kindly give me some 
 illustrations. (Literally: (I) regret to tell you 
 
 that not (I) understand very well what will say 
 that. Do me the favor of to put me (ponerme) 
 some examples), 
 
 3. You are quite right. We learn by practice and 
 
 through examples. (Literally: Have you right. 
 
 With examples one learns (se aprende) practi- 
 cally (prácticamente). 
 
 4. That is my opinion exactly. Grammarians gen- 
 erally make the mistake of being too abstract in 
 their rules. (Literally: Thus it (I) believe. The 
 error of many authors (autores) is that of to teach 
 (enseñar) the theory (la teoría) much more than 
 the practice (la práctica). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 Tener. 
 
 229 
 
 {Continued). 
 
 I. Con mucho gusto. El verbo ‘^tener’^ se usa en el 
 sentido de ‘^to be’’ en inglés cuando expresa deseo 
 o sentimiento, (sén-te'-dó sén-te-me^én'-tó). 
 
 2. Siento decirle que no entiendo muy bien lo que 
 quiere decir eso. Hágame el favor de ponerme 
 unos ejemplos, (á'-gá-má p 5 -nérr'-má á-^hém'-plos). 
 
 3. Tiene V. razón. Con ejemplos se aprende práo 
 ticamente. 
 
 4, Así lo creo. El error de muchos autores es el de 
 enseñar la teoría mucho más que la práctica. {áT^ 
 óó-to'-rés ta- 5 -re'-á). 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
230 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 5. In plain words then, ^‘tener’’^ is used in place of 
 
 our English verb “to be” in conjunction with the 
 following words: hunger, thirst, cold, warmth, 
 
 sleep, shame, right and fear. (Literally: In order 
 to speak clearly, “tener” is used in place of the 
 (en lugar del) verb English “to be” with the fol- 
 lowing (siguientes) words: hunger (hambre), thirst 
 (sed), cold (frío), warmth (calor), sleep (sueño), 
 shame (vergüenza), right (razón) and fear (miedo). 
 
 6. Ah, this I understand, but I am afraid it will be 
 quite difficult for me to remember such a number 
 of isolated words. (Literally: Already (I) under- 
 stand this, but I fear (temo) that itself me is going 
 to (se me va a) make difficult to remember so many 
 (tantas) words isolated (sueltas). 
 
 1 Tener is used idiomatically with the following words: 
 
 Tengo hambre, 
 
 I am hungry 
 
 (Literally: I have hunger). 
 
 tengo sed, 
 
 I am thirsty 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have thirst). 
 
 tengo calor, 
 
 I am warm 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have warmth) 
 
 tengo frío, 
 
 I am cold 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have cold). 
 
 tengo sueño. 
 
 I am sleepy 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have sleep). 
 
 tengo vergüenza. 
 
 I am ashamed 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have shame). 
 
 tengo miedo de. 
 
 I am afraid to 
 
 ( 
 
 I have fear to). 
 
 tengo razón. 
 
 I am right 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have right). 
 
 no tengo razón. 
 
 I am wrong 
 
 ( 
 
 “ I have not right). 
 
 tengo gana de. 
 
 I have a mind to^ I feel inclined to. 
 
 1 qué tiene V. ? 
 
 What is the matter with you? 
 
 no tengo nada. 
 
 nothing is the matter with me^ 
 
 tengo algo. 
 
 something is the matter with me^ 
 
 1 tiene V, algo? 
 
 is anything the matter with you? 
 
 2 This a somewhat confusing construction, as the infinitive 
 recordar is the subject of the sentence. The usual rule is that 
 the preposition de is used before the infinitive after nouns and 
 adjectives which govern the genitive: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 231 
 
 5. Para hablar claro: tener^ se usa en lugar del verbo 
 ingles ‘^to be/^ con las siguientes palabras: hambre, 
 sed, frío, calor, sueño, vergüenza, razón y miedo, 
 (se-ghe^én'-tés fré'-o swén'-yó vérr-gwen'-thá rá- 
 thón' me'^ñ'-dó). 
 
 6. Ya entiendo esto, pero temo que se me va a hacer 
 difícil recordar^ tantas palabras sueltas, (swél'- 
 tas). 
 
 Hágame V. el favor de venir 
 conmigo. 
 
 No tengo el gusto de conocer 
 a esa señora. 
 
 Tiene vergüenza de pedirlo. 
 
 Los verbos son difíciles de 
 aprender. 
 
 Es digno de hablar con ella. 
 
 Estoy deseoso de conseguirlo. 
 
 Do me the favor to come with me. 
 
 I have not the pleasure of know^ 
 ing that lady. 
 
 He is ashamed to ask for it. 
 Verbs are difficult to learn. 
 
 He is worthy to speak with her. 
 I am desirous to attain it. 
 
 All Adjectives which express worthiness^ unworthiness^ facility^ 
 difficulty t fulness, want, scarcity, anxiety, desire, exceptions, moral or 
 physical qualities, distance, certainty or uncertainty, or danger govern 
 the preposition de: 
 
 Fácil de hacer. 
 Penoso de hacer. 
 Lleno de soberbia. 
 Deseoso de trabajar. 
 Codicioso de dinero. 
 Gordo de talle. 
 Blandp de corazón. 
 Lejano de la ciudad. 
 Seguro de peligro. 
 
 Easy to do. 
 
 Difficult to do. 
 
 Full of pride. 
 Desirous of working. 
 Eager for money. 
 Stout in body. 
 
 Soft in heart. 
 
 Far from the city. 
 Sure of danger. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
232 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 7. Isolated words, my dear sir, are always hard to 
 remember. Disconnected words — as I say in my 
 preface — are not language. A person might learn 
 the whole dictionary by heart and yet would not 
 be able to carry on a conversation. Nattire teaches 
 by sentences, and sentences you will have to learn. 
 (Literally: Words isolated, friend mine, are very 
 difficult to remember. Words without connection 
 according to (según) (I) say in my preface (pre- 
 facio) not compose (componen) a language. Can 
 one learn itself (aprenderse) by memory the dic- 
 tionary entire (el diccionario entero) and not be 
 able to sustain (sostener) a conversation. The 
 nature (la naturaleza) us teaches with phrases and 
 these are which you must (tiene V. que) learn). 
 
 8. I am aware of that and should feel obliged to you 
 if you would form some sentences with these words 
 for me. (Literally: (I) am convinced (enterado) 
 of that and you (I) would thank (agradecería) if 
 me would form you (formase V.) some phrases with 
 these words). 
 
 9. With pleasure, but in order to derive the full bene- 
 fit of the examples which I am going to give you, 
 you ought to form a number of similar phrases at 
 home and bring them to me for correction. (Lit- 
 erally: With much pleasure, but in order to profit 
 (aprovecharse) of the examples which (I) go to 
 give you, ought you to make some similar (seme- 
 jantes) at home (en casa) and bring me them for 
 to (para) correct them). 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 233 
 
 7. Palabras sueltas, amigo mío, son muy difíciles de 
 recordar. Palabras sin conexión, según digo en 
 mi prefacio, no componen un idioma. Puede uno 
 aprenderse de memoria el diccionario entero, y no 
 poder sostener una conversación. La naturaleza 
 nos enseña con frases y estas son las que tiene V. 
 que aprender, (ko-nék-the'^on' sa-goón' pra-fá'- 
 thé'^o dék-thé^o-ná'-ré"^o én-ta'-ro ná-tóó-rá-la'- 
 thá én-sén'-yá). 
 
 8. Estoy enterado de eso y le agradecería si me for- 
 mase V. unas frases con estas palabras, (én-ta-rá'- 
 do ág-rá-dá-tha-re'-á forr-má'-s^). 
 
 9. Con mucho gusto, pero para aprovecharse de los 
 ejemplos que voy a darle, debe V. hacer unos seme- 
 jantes en casa y traérmelos para corregirlos, (a- 
 ‘hém'-plos sa-má-‘hán'-tés trá-érr'-ma-l 5 s korr-ré- 
 ^herr'-los). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
234 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 10. I will do so. I shall put the verbs of your sen- 
 tences into different tenses and persons. (Liter- 
 ally: It (I) will do. (I) shall use the verbs of 
 yoiu* phrases in its tenses (tiempos) and persons 
 different (diferentes). 
 
 11. Very well. Now let us begin. What is the mat- 
 ter with you? You do not look well. (Literally: 
 Very well. Now let us begin. What have you? 
 Have you bad coimtenance (mal semblante). 
 
 12. Now, form a similar sentence, but put it into the 
 past tense. (Literally: Now form you a phrase 
 similar (semejante) but put her in the past (el 
 pasado). 
 
 13. I met yoirr cousin yesterday and he seemed to 
 look very ill. Is anything the matter with him? 
 (Literally: (I) met yesterday yom* cousin (a su 
 primo) and (he) had very bad coimtenance. Has 
 (he) any thing (algo)? 
 
 14. Very well! Now please form a phrase with hambre 
 and sedj but don’t make it too short. (Literally: 
 Bravo! Now form you a phrase with hambre and 
 sed^ but that (it) not may be very short (corta). 
 
 ^ The subjunctive is used in principal sentences to supply the 
 negative form of the Imperative. 
 
 It also supplies the affirmative form of the Imperative in the 
 first and third person: 
 
 Que no escriba ella, Let her not write! 
 
 Que haga él eso, Let him do that. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 235 
 
 10. Lo haré. Usaré los verbos de sus frases en sus 
 tiempos y personas diferentes, (pérr-só'-nás dé-fa- 
 rén'-tés). 
 
 11. Muy bien. Ahora empezemos. ¿ Qué tiene V.? 
 Tiene V. mal semblante, (ém-pa-thá'-mos sém- 
 blán'-ty). 
 
 13 . Ahora forme V. una frase semejante, pero póngala 
 en el pasado, (sá-ma-^hán'-t}^ pon'-gá-lá pá-sá'- 
 dó). 
 
 13. Encontré ayer a su primo y tenía muy mal sem- 
 blante. ¿ Tiene algo? (á-yérr' pré'-mó tá-ne'-á). 
 
 14. Bravo! Ahora forme V. una frase con hambre 
 y sed, pero que no sea^ muy corta, (korr'-tá). 
 
 No trabajemos hoy, 
 No se lo dé V., 
 
 No se vaya V., 
 
 Sea yo! 
 
 Sea él! 
 
 No me lo diga, 
 
 Don't let us work to-day. 
 Don't you give it to him. 
 Don't you go away. 
 
 Let me he! 
 
 Let him he! 
 
 Don't tell me. 
 
 á far; a pale; & eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
236 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 15. Since last Monday, when I took a violent cold, I 
 
 have lost all appetite. This morning I only took 
 a cup of coffee. I could not eat anything at break- 
 fast. (Literally: Since (desde) the Monday (el 
 
 limesO p3<st that (I) took (tomé) a violent cold 
 (un fuerte resfriado) (I) have lost the appetite (el 
 apetito). This morning only (I) took (tomé) a 
 cup of coffee. Not (I) could (pude) breakfast 
 (almorzar) nothing). 
 
 16. Well, do you not feel hungry now? Would you 
 not like to eat lunch with me? (Literally: Well, 
 not have you hunger now? Not would like you 
 to lunch (almorzar) with me?) 
 
 17. No, thank you very much; I am not at all hun- 
 
 gry and could not eat a mouthful. But may I 
 trouble you for a glass of ice-water? I feel very 
 thirsty. (Literally: No, thanks; not (I) have 
 
 himger in absolute and not (I) could eat a mouth- 
 ful (un bocado). But me do you the favor of a 
 glass (un vaso) of water iced (agua helada). (I) 
 have much thirst). 
 
 ^ Days of the week: Months of the year: 
 
 Dias de la semana: Meses del año: 
 
 lunes, 
 
 Monday. 
 
 enero. 
 
 January. 
 
 martes, 
 
 Tuesday. 
 
 febrero. 
 
 February. 
 
 miércoles, 
 
 Wednesday. 
 
 marzo. 
 
 March. 
 
 jueves. 
 
 Thursday. 
 
 abril. 
 
 April. 
 
 viernes. 
 
 Friday. 
 
 mayo. 
 
 May. 
 
 sábado, 
 
 Saturday. 
 
 junio. 
 
 June. 
 
 domingo. 
 
 Sunday. 
 
 julio. 
 
 July- 
 
 
 
 agosto. 
 
 August. 
 
 
 
 septiembre. 
 
 September. 
 
 
 
 octubre. 
 
 October. 
 
 
 
 noviembre. 
 
 November. 
 
 
 
 diciembre, 
 
 December. 
 
 á far; a pale; B eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 m 
 
 15. Desde el lunes^ pasado que tomé un fuerte res- 
 friado he perdido el apetito {pr no tengo hambre). 
 Esta mañana solo tomé una taza de café. No 
 pude almorzar nada, (lóo'-nés rés-fre-á'-do á-pa- 
 té'-tO ál-mórr-thárr'). 
 
 16. ¿ Bien, no tiene V. hambre ahora? ¿ No quisiera 
 V. almorzar conmigo? 
 
 17. No gracias; no tengo hambre en absoluto y no 
 podría comer im bocado. Pero ¿ me hace V. el 
 favor de un vaso de agua helada? Tengo mucha 
 sed. (bo-ká'-dó á'-gwá á-lá'-dá). 
 
 The days are pronounced: loó'-nés; márr'-tés; me'^érr'-ko-lés; 
 hwé'-vés; ve^érr'-nés; sá'-bá'-do; do-men'-gó. 
 
 The article in Spanish takes the place of our preposition on, as 
 el lunes, on Monday; los lunes, on Mondays; el martes, on Tues- 
 day; los martes, on Tuesdays. 
 
 The months are pronounced: é-né-ro; fé-bré-ró; már-zo; á-brel; 
 má-y 5 ; hóó-nyO; hóó-lyó; á-gós-to; sé-te'^em'bré; Ok-tóó-bré; 
 nó-ve^em-bré; de-the"^em-bré. 
 
 The days of the week and months of the year are not written 
 with capitals. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
238 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 18. Now please form some sentences with miedo, ver- 
 güenza and ganas. I am curious to see how you 
 will get along in these words. (Literally: Now 
 pray you to form some phrases with miedo, ver- 
 güenza and ganas. I have desires (deseos) of to 
 see what make you with these words). 
 
 19. I have a good mind to take a journey into the in- 
 terior of Cuba, but to tell you the truth, I am 
 afraid of that bandit Martinez: I do not wish to 
 die^ yet. (Literally: (I) have minds of to make 
 a journey through the interior (el interior) of Cuba, 
 but to tell (a decir) the truth (I) have fear to the 
 bandit {al bandolero) Martinez: not wish (I) to 
 die yet). 
 
 20. What! You are afraid of that bandit? You who 
 
 have fought in the United States army imder 
 General Grant? You ought to be ashamed of your- 
 self! (Literally: What! You have you fear to 
 
 that bandit? You that fought (peleó) in the army 
 (ejército) American under (bajo) the General Grant? 
 Ought you (deberia V.) have shame). 
 
 1 The pupil should study the irregular verb ver, to see. 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 Él. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 veo. 
 
 ve. 
 
 ve. 
 
 vemos. 
 
 ven. 
 
 ven. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 veía. 
 
 veía. 
 
 veía. 
 
 veíamos. 
 
 veían. 
 
 veían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 vi. 
 
 vió. 
 
 vió. 
 
 vimos. 
 
 vieron. 
 
 vieron. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 veré. 
 
 verá. 
 
 verá. 
 
 veremos. 
 
 verán. 
 
 verán. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 vería. 
 
 vería. 
 
 vería. veríamos. 
 Modo Subjimtivo. 
 
 verían. 
 
 verían. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 vea. 
 
 vea. 
 
 vea. 
 
 veamos. 
 
 vean. 
 
 vean. 
 
 Imp:i 
 
 viera. 
 
 viera. 
 
 viera. 
 
 viéramos. 
 
 vieran. 
 
 vieran. 
 
 Imp:2 
 
 viese. 
 
 viese. 
 
 viese. 
 
 viésemos. 
 
 viesen. 
 
 viesen. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 viere. 
 
 viere. 
 
 viere. 
 
 viéremos. 
 
 vieren. 
 
 vieren. 
 
 Gerundio: viendo. Participio: visto, 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there: o note; óó room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 239 
 
 18. Ahora sírvase V. formar unas frases con miedo, 
 vergüenza y ganas. Tengo deseos de ver^ lo que 
 hace V.^ con estas palabras, (dá-sá'-os). 
 
 19. Tengo ganas de hacer un viaje por el interior de 
 
 Cuba, pero a decir la verdad, le tengo miedo al 
 bandolero Martínez: no deseo morir^ todavía, 
 
 (vé-á'-^h}^ en-ta-ré'^orr' kóo'-bá bán-do-lá'-ró márr- 
 te'-néth). 
 
 20. i Cómo! i Le tiene V. miedo a ese bandolero? 
 V. que peleó en el ejército americano bajo el gene- 
 ral Grant ? Debería V. tener vergüenza, (pá- 
 lá-o' a-‘hérr'-thé-to ‘há-ná-rál'). 
 
 2 The English Future is frequently replaced by the Present in 
 Spanish, especially after the conjunction si; 
 
 Voy al instante. FU go at once. 
 
 ¿ Me hace V. el favor? Will you do me the favor? 
 
 Si viene V. a mi casa saldremos If you will come to my house we 
 
 a dar un paseo. will take a walk. 
 
 I Tiene V. la bondad? Will you have the kindness? 
 
 On the other hand, the Future is often used in Spanish, es- 
 pecially in questions, when the speaker is convinced that his views 
 cannot be contradicted: 
 
 Veré muy pronto si V. sabe sus 
 . lecciones. 
 
 I Habrá felicidad semejante? 
 No habrá desgracia como la 
 mía. 
 
 I Será cierto lo que he oido? 
 
 I shall see very soon whether you 
 know your lessons. 
 
 Is there such happiness? 
 
 There is no misfortune like 
 mine. 
 
 Is it true what I have heard? 
 
 In the latter example the Future is used, because the speaker 
 is convinced that his statements do not admit of contradiction. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; do room. 
 
240 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 21. Indeed, you are quite wrong to sneer at this bold 
 bandit, whom you call half-starved. I am not at 
 all ashamed of myself, nor do I consider myself 
 a coward. I would rather meet three Western 
 desperadoes than this Cuban ^ ^terror’’ of whom 
 every one is afraid. (Literally: Well, not have 
 you right in (en) to sneer (burlarse) of that bold 
 (atrevido) bandit (bandolero) whom (a quien) call 
 you a half dead of hunger. Not have (I) not even 
 (ni) mite (pizca) of shame and not me (I) believe 
 a coward (un cobarde); but better (I) would fight 
 with three desperadoes (desesperados) of the West 
 (del oeste), than with that terror (terror) of Cuba 
 whom (a quien) all the world (todo el mundo) 
 fears). 
 
 3 Study the irregular verb morir, to die. 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. El. Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 muero. 
 
 muere, muere, morimos. 
 
 mueren. 
 
 mueren. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 moría. 
 
 moría, moría, moríamos. 
 
 morían. 
 
 morían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 morí. 
 
 murió, murió, morimos. 
 
 murieron. 
 
 murieron. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 moriré. 
 
 morirá, morirá, moriremos. 
 
 morirán. 
 
 morirán. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 morir-ía. 
 
 — ía. — ía. — oíamos. 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 — ían. 
 
 — ^ían. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 muera. 
 
 muera, muera, muramos. 
 
 mueran. 
 
 mueran. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 mur-iera. 
 
 — iera. — iera. — iéramos. 
 
 — ^ieran. 
 
 — ieran. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 mur-iese. 
 
 — -iese. — iese. — iésemos. 
 
 — iesen. 
 
 — iesen. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 mur-iere. 
 
 — iere. — iere. — iéremos. 
 
 — ieren. 
 
 — ieren. 
 
 Gerundio: muriendo. 
 
 Participio pasado: muerto. 
 
 ^ We cannot say in Spanish: ''I am wrongs' but must express 
 it by: have not rights As this mode of expression presents 
 
 difficulties to students, other examples will make it clear. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 241 
 
 21. Pues no tiene V. razón^ en burlarse de ese atrevido 
 bandolero, a quien^ llama V. un medio muerto de 
 hambre. No tengo ni pizca^ de vergüenza y no 
 me creo^ un cobarde, pero mejor lucharía con tres 
 desesperados del oeste que con ese terror de Cuba 
 a quien todo el mundo teme, (bóor-lárr'-sé á-tra> 
 vé'-do ko-várr'-dé má-‘horr' dársés-pá-rá'-dós o'^és'- 
 té térr-rorr' ké-én'). 
 
 V. no tiene razón, 
 Ellos no tienen razón, 
 Yo no tenía razón, 
 ¿No tengo yo razón? 
 El no tenía razón. 
 
 El tenía razón, 
 
 You are wrong. 
 They are wrong, 
 I was wrong. 
 Am I wrong? 
 He was wrong. 
 He was right. 
 
 2 Quien (sing.), quienes (plur.), who^ whom, whoever, whomso- 
 ever is a relative pronoun referring to both genders, and is used 
 in reference to persons only: 
 
 Los señores con quienes hablé, 
 han partido, 
 
 Las señoras a quienes vimos 
 son inglesas, 
 
 The gentlemen with whom I 
 • talked have left. 
 
 The ladies whom we saw are 
 English. 
 
 3 Ni pizca, not even a little hit. No tengo ni pizca de vergüenza, 
 I am not in the least ashamed of myself, is an idiomatic expression. 
 
 * Creer, to believe, is regular, except that the diphthong ie and io 
 must always be consonantized. Thus: 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
242 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 2 2. Now, here you have some examples of the idiom- 
 atic use of ‘‘tener.^' I trust they are quite clear 
 to you. (Literally: Already see you these ex- 
 
 amples of the use idiomatic of ‘ ‘tener. (I) hope 
 that it may see you clearly). 
 
 23. Oh perfectly so. But tell me, are there any other 
 expressions in which “tener^^ is used? 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Presente. 
 
 creo, 
 
 I believe. 
 
 crea. 
 
 I may believe. 
 
 crees, 
 
 thou helievest. 
 
 creas, 
 
 thou mayst believe. 
 
 cree. 
 
 he believes. 
 
 crea. 
 
 he may believe. 
 
 creemos 
 
 we believe. 
 
 creamos. 
 
 we may believe. 
 
 creéis. 
 
 ye believe. 
 
 creáis. 
 
 ye may believe. 
 
 creen. 
 
 they believe. 
 
 é 
 
 crean. 
 
 Imperfecto, 
 
 they may believe. 
 
 creía, 
 
 I believed. 
 
 creyera. 
 
 I might believe. 
 
 creías. 
 
 thou believedst. 
 
 creyeras. 
 
 thou mightst believe. 
 
 creía. 
 
 he believed. 
 
 creyera, 
 
 he might believe. 
 
 creíamos. 
 
 we believed. 
 
 creyéramos. 
 
 we might believe. 
 
 creíais. 
 
 ye believed. 
 
 creyerais, 
 
 ye might believe. 
 
 creían. 
 
 they believed. 
 
 creyeran. 
 
 Definido. 
 
 they might believe. 
 
 creí, 
 
 I believed. 
 
 creyese. 
 
 I might believe. 
 
 creiste, 
 
 thou believedst. 
 
 creyeses. 
 
 thou might believe. 
 
 creyó. 
 
 he believed. 
 
 creyese. 
 
 he might believe. 
 
 creimos. 
 
 we believed. 
 
 creyésemos. 
 
 we might believe. 
 
 creisteis, 
 
 ye believed. 
 
 creyeseis. 
 
 ye might believe. 
 
 creyeron. 
 
 they believed. 
 
 creyesen. 
 
 Futuro. 
 
 they might believe. 
 
 creeré. 
 
 I shall believe. 
 
 creyere. 
 
 I should believe. 
 
 creerás. 
 
 thou wilt believe. 
 
 creyeres. 
 
 thou wouldst believe. 
 
 creerá. 
 
 he will believe. 
 
 creyere. 
 
 he would believe. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; G note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 243 
 
 22. Ya ve V. estos ejemplos del uso idiomático de te- 
 ner. Espero que lo vea V, claro. 
 
 23. Sí, perfectamente. Pero dígame V., hay^ otras 
 expresiones con las que se usa el verbo tener? 
 
 creeremos, 
 
 creeréis, 
 
 creerán. 
 
 creería, 
 
 creerías, 
 
 creería, 
 
 creeríamos, 
 
 creeríais, 
 
 creerían. 
 
 we shall believe, 
 ye will believe, 
 they will believe. 
 Condicional, 
 
 I should believe, 
 thou wouldst believe, 
 he would believe, 
 we should believe, 
 ye would believe, 
 they would believe. 
 
 creyéremos, we should believe, 
 creyéreis, ye would believe, 
 
 creyeren, they would believe. 
 
 Imperativo, 
 
 cree (tú), 
 crea (él.), 
 crea V., 
 creamos, 
 creed. 
 
 believe, 
 
 let him believe, 
 believe, 
 let us believe, 
 believe {ye). 
 
 crean (ellos), let them believe. 
 
 1 The conjugation of “haber’ ^ when used impersonally, is per- 
 fectly regular. The present tense alone is irregular and forms hay, 
 there isy there are. 
 
 MODO INDICATIVO. 
 
 Hay, there is or there are. 
 
 Había, there was or there were. 
 Hubo, there was or there were. 
 Habrá, there will or shall be. 
 Habría, there should or would be. 
 
 MODO SUBJUNTIVO. 
 
 Haya, there may be. 
 
 Hubiera, there might be. 
 Hubiese, there might be. 
 
 Si hubiera, or si hubiese, if 
 there should be or if there 
 were. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Hay un hombre en la calle. 
 
 Hay dos mil personas el el teatro. 
 
 Hubo una exposición universal 
 en Chicago el año 1893. 
 Habría baile esta noche si hu- 
 biera (or hubiese) dinero 
 para pagar la música. 
 
 Hay is a contraction of ha witt 
 ha-y there is, there are (Fr. il y a) 
 
 There is a man in the street. 
 
 There are two thousand persons 
 in the theatre. 
 
 There was a universal exhibition 
 in Chicago in the year 1893. 
 
 There would be a ball this eve- 
 ning, if there were money 
 to pay for the music, 
 the now obsolete y (Lat. ihi, y) 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
244 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 24. Oh yes, we employ it for instance in regard to the 
 age of persons. Thus we say: How old are you? 
 How old may his sister be? I don’t know ex- 
 actly how old she is, but I think she is twenty- 
 one or twenty-two. I did not think she was as old 
 as that. (Literally: Yes, it we employ for instance 
 when (we) speak of the age (la edad) of the per- 
 sons, thus we say (verbigracia): How many years 
 have you? How many years can have his sister 
 (su hermana)? Not (I) know exactly how many 
 years (she) has, but (I) believe that (she) has some 
 twenty and one or twenty and two. Not (I) be- 
 lieved that (she) had so many). 
 
 25. This mode of expression is similar to the French 
 way. (Literally: This manner (manera) of to ex- 
 press one’s self is similar to the of the French). 
 
 26. Precisely so. We also use tener in regard to de- 
 scriptions of the size of rivers or dimensions gen- 
 erally, as for example: This river is eighty feet 
 broad and fifty feet deep. (Literally: Thus (it) 
 is. Also (we) use the verb ‘‘tener” when (v\re) 
 speak of the size (del tamaño) of the rivers (los 
 ríos) or dimensions (dimensiones) in general, for 
 example: this river has eighty feet (pies) of breadth 
 (ancho) and fifty feet of depth (profundidad). 
 
 The compound tenses are found 
 habido instead of hay habido, viz.: 
 MODO INDICATIVO. 
 
 Ha habido, there has been. 
 
 Había habido, there had been. 
 
 Hubo habido, there had been. 
 
 Habrá habido, there shall or will 
 have been. 
 
 regularly. The present is ha 
 
 MODO SUBJUNTIVO. 
 
 Hubiera habido, there might 
 have been. 
 
 Hubiese habido, there might 
 have been. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 5 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 245 
 
 24. Si, lo empleamos por ejemplo cuando hablamos de 
 
 la edad de las personas, verbigracia: ¿ cuántos 
 
 años tiene V.^? 
 
 I Cuántos años puede tener su hermana? No sé 
 exactamente cuantos años tiene, pero creo que 
 tiene unos veintiuno o veintidós. 
 
 No creía que tenía tantos. 
 
 25. Esta manera de expresarse es semejante a la de los 
 franceses, (má-na'-rá sá-má-‘hán'-t}^ frán-thá'-sés) . 
 
 26. Así es. También usamos el verbo tener cuando 
 hablamos del tamaño de los ríos o dimensiones en 
 general; por ejemplo: Este río tiene ochenta pies 
 de ancho y cincuenta pies de profimdidad. (ré "-5 
 án'-cho pro-fóbn-dé-dád'). 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Habría habido, there should or 
 would have been, 
 
 Haya habido, there may have 
 been. 
 
 Hoy ha habido un accidente en 
 la calle. 
 
 Habrá habido muchos cambios. 
 
 (Si) hubiera, or (si) hubiese 
 habido, (if) there had or 
 should have been. 
 
 There has been an accident in 
 the street to-day. 
 
 There will have been many 
 changes. 
 
 There would have been more 
 people in the theatre if it 
 had not rained. 
 
 1 Instead of: ¿Cuántos años tiene V.? we can also say: ¿Qué 
 edad tiene V.? 
 
 Habría habido más gente en el 
 teatro si no hubiese llovido. 
 
 Tengo treinta años, 
 
 En mil ochocientos ochenta y 
 ocho tenía ventiocho. 
 
 Mi hermano tendrá mañana diez 
 y siete años. 
 
 I am thirty years old. 
 
 In 1888 I was twenty-eight. 
 
 My brother will be seventeen to- 
 morrow. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
246 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 27. What are the dimensions of this room? — I think 
 
 it is about twenty-five feet long by fifteen wide. 
 (Literally: What dimensions (dimensiones) has 
 
 this room? — (I) believe that (it) will have some 
 twenty-five feet of length (largo) by (por) fifteen 
 of breadth). 
 
 28. This house is about sixty feet high, isn’t it? — ^At 
 least eighty! (Literally: This house has sixty feet 
 of height (alto), not is (it) so? — (It) has at least 
 (a lo menos) eighty feet). 
 
 29. Do I find all these idioms in the grammar? (Lit- 
 erally: Are found (se encuentran) all these idioms 
 in the grammar (la gramática)? 
 
 30. Certainly, and you ought to study them carefully 
 and practice them until they become quite familiar 
 to you. (Literally: Certainly (ciertamente), and 
 ought you to study them with attention (atención) 
 and practice them (practicarlos) until that (hasta 
 que) may familiarize yourself (se familiarice) with 
 them). 
 
 31. Another peculiarity of ^^tener” we have noted be- 
 fore, and that is the use of ^‘tengo que” for the 
 English must.” 
 
 32. Allow me to interrupt you for a moment. Is this 
 the only mode of expression you have for our ‘^must” ? 
 (la única forma de expresión). 
 
 ^ Other peculiarities in the use of tener are given in Part X. 
 Tener algo malo means to have a pain^ a sore or an ache some- 
 where f and is used with the definite article, as: 
 
 Tengo la mano mala, I have a sore hand. 
 
 Tiene los pies malos, His feet are sore. 
 
 Tengo la rodilla mala. I have a sore knee. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 247 
 
 27. ¿ Qué dimensiones tiene este cuarto? — Creo que 
 tendrá unos veinticinco pies de largo por quince 
 de ancho, (pé-és') . 
 
 28. Esta casa tiene sesenta pies de alto, ¿ no es así? — 
 Tiene^ a lo menos ochenta pies. 
 
 29. ¿Se encuentran todos estos modismos en la gra- 
 mática? 
 
 30. Ciertamente, y debe V. estudiarlos con atención y 
 practicarlos hasta que se familiarice V. con ellos, 
 (the^ érr-tá-mén'-ty fá-me-lé'^á-re'-thy). 
 
 31. Otra peculiaridad del verbo “tener’’ hemos ya 
 notado, y es el uso de “tengo que” por “/ musV^ 
 del inglés 
 
 32. Permítame interrumpirle un momento. ¿ Es esta 
 la única forma de expresión que tienen Vds. por 
 nuestro ^^musí ’ ? (oo'-né-ká) . 
 
 The definite article is also used 
 are described: 
 
 Ella tiene los ojos azules, 
 
 Tienen los pies grandes, 
 
 Tiene la nariz grande, 
 
 Tengo las manos y los pies fríos, 
 
 ¿ Tiene V. las manos frías? 
 
 when moral or physical qualities 
 
 She has blue eyes. 
 
 They have large feet. 
 
 He has a big nose. 
 
 My hands and feet are cold. 
 
 Are your hands cold? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
248 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 33. By no means. We use either tener que^ haber de, 
 hay que, es necesario, es preciso, es menester or deber, 
 The latter, however, can only be used when a 
 moral obligation or duty is expressed. In such 
 cases musV^ can always be changed to ought 
 to,^^ You understand me, don’t you? (Una obli- 
 gación moral. Un deber). 
 
 34. Yes, perfectly, and for this reason we say in our 
 Main Sentence: ^^Debo estarme aquí,” because a 
 duty is expressed and not a necessity (una necesi- 
 dad). 
 
 35. Precisely so. Now please form some examples 
 with tener que, haber de and hay que, 
 
 36. Allow me to ask you if there is any difference be- 
 tween these expressions. 
 
 37. There is no difference whatever between haber de 
 
 and tener que. Both expressions are as synonym- 
 ous as: am obliged to go to my office” and 
 
 must go to my office.” 
 
 38. But what about hay que? How is this expression 
 used? (=But how is used hay que)} 
 
 39. Hay que signifies must in a general sense and cor- 
 responds exactly to the French il faut when used 
 without a personal pronoun. For instance: It will 
 be necessary to read these books for they are stand- 
 ard works (=for (they) are of first order (órden). 
 
 1 Compare our Main Sentence on page 61. ¿ Qué quiere V. hacer 
 
 esta mañana? Quisiera salir para Méjico por el primer tren, pero 
 no me es posible, porque espero a un amigo de Chicago y debo 
 estarme en Veracruz hasta que llegue el vapor. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 249 
 
 33. Por supuesto que no. Usamos tener que, haber de, 
 hay que, es necesario, es preciso, es menester o el 
 verbo deber. Este se usa cuando se quiere expresar 
 una obligación moral o un deber. En estos casos 
 se puede cambiar el musV^ por ‘^7 ought to.” 
 ¿ Me entiende V., no es verdad? (na>tha-sá'-re^o 
 prá-th0'-so má-nés-térr' mó-rál'). 
 
 34. Sí, perfectamente, y por esta razón decimos en la 
 
 frase primera: ‘^Debo estarme aquí,” porque se 
 
 expresa un deber y no una necesidad.^ (ná-thá- 
 sé-dád'). 
 
 35. Justamente. Ahora sírvase formar unos ejemplos 
 con tener que, haber de y hay que. 
 
 36. Permítame preguntarle si hay alguna diferencia 
 entre estas expresiones. 
 
 37. No hay ninguna diferencia entre haber de y tener 
 que. Las dos expresiones son tan sinónimas como: 
 
 am obliged to go to my office” and must go to 
 my office.” “Tengo que ir al despacho” o “He de ir 
 al despacho.” 
 
 38. ¿ Pero cómo se usa hay que? 
 
 39. Hay que significa must en un sentido general y 
 corresponde exactamente al il faut del francés, 
 cuando se usa sin pronombre personal. Por ejem- 
 plo: Hay que leer^ estos libros pues son^ de primer 
 orden, (ség-né-fé'-ká él fo). 
 
 No actual necessity is expressed here, but a moral obligation, 
 consequently deber must be used. 
 
 2 See footnotes, pp. 250 and 251. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
2$0 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 40. Now let me give you some examples (put you 
 (ponerle) some exámples). 
 
 41. Pardon me if I ask you still another question. 
 
 How are es menester^ es necesario, es preciso used? 
 (Literally: Pardon you that you (I) may make 
 
 other question. How are used es menester, es 
 necesario, es preciso)? 
 
 1 Verbs ending in eer as creer, to believe, leer, to read, are irregular 
 in so far as they change the diphthongs ie and io into ye and yo 
 for euphony’s sake. In all other forms they are regular. 
 
 These irregularities appear in the Gerundio, Pasado Definido, 
 and the Imperfecto (ist and 2nd form) of the Subjunctive. 
 
 Pasado Definido. i. Imperfecto subjuntivo. 
 
 Yo lei. 
 
 I read. 
 
 Yo leyera. 
 
 I might read. 
 
 V. leyó. 
 
 you read. 
 
 V. leyera. 
 
 you might read. 
 
 él leyó. 
 
 he read. 
 
 él leyera. 
 
 he might read. 
 
 nos leimos. 
 
 we read. 
 
 nos. leyéramos. 
 
 we might read. 
 
 V. V. leyeron. 
 
 you read. 
 
 V. V. leyeran. 
 
 you might read. 
 
 ellos leyeron. 
 
 they read. 
 
 ellos leyeran. 
 
 they might read. 
 
 2. Imperfecto subjimtivo. 
 
 Yo leyese, 
 
 V. leyese, 
 él leyese, 
 nos leyésemos, 
 V. V. leyesen, 
 ellos leyesen-. 
 
 / might read, 
 you might read, 
 he might read, 
 we might read, 
 you might read, 
 they might read. 
 
 Gerundio: leyendo, reading. 
 
 Proveer, to provide, (Participio provisto), poseer, to possess, and 
 a few other verbs are conjugated in the same way. 
 
 2 The pupil should master the conjugations of ser and estar now. 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language^ 
 
 251 
 
 40. Ahora déjeme ponerle unos ejemplos. 
 
 41. Dispense V. que le haga otra pregunta. ¿ Cómo 
 se usan es menester, es necesario, es preciso? 
 
 
 Ser, 
 
 To be. 
 
 
 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 
 
 Pres : soy. 
 
 es. es. 
 
 somos. 
 
 son. 
 
 son. 
 
 Imp: era. 
 
 era. era. 
 
 éramos. 
 
 eran. 
 
 eran. 
 
 Def : fui. 
 
 fué. fué. 
 
 fuimos. 
 
 fueron. 
 
 fueron. 
 
 Fut: seré. 
 
 será. será. 
 
 seremos. 
 
 serán. 
 
 serán. 
 
 Cond: sería. 
 
 sería. sería. 
 
 seríamos. 
 
 serían. 
 
 serían. 
 
 
 Modo Subjtmtivo. 
 
 
 
 Pres: sea. 
 
 sea. sea. 
 
 seamos. 
 
 sean. 
 
 sean. 
 
 Imp:^ fuera. 
 
 fuera. fuera. 
 
 fuéramos. 
 
 fueran. 
 
 fueran. 
 
 Imp :2 fuese. 
 
 fuese. fuese. 
 
 fuésemos. 
 
 fuesen. 
 
 fuesen. 
 
 Fut: fuere. 
 
 fuere. fuere. 
 
 fuéremos. 
 
 fueren. 
 
 fueren. 
 
 
 Gerundio: 
 
 siendo 
 
 
 
 
 Participio; 
 
 ; sido. 
 
 
 
 
 Estar, 
 
 To be. 
 
 
 
 Modo indicativo. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 Imp: 
 
 Def: 
 
 Fut: 
 
 Cond: 
 
 estoy, está. está. estamos. están, 
 estaba, estaba, estaba, estábamos, estaban, 
 estuve, estuvo, estuvo, estuvimos, estuvieron, 
 estaré, estará, estará, estaremos, estarán, 
 estaría, estaría, estaría, estaríamos, estarían. 
 
 están. 
 
 estaban. 
 
 estuvieron. 
 
 estarán. 
 
 estarían. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 Imp:i 
 
 Imp:2 
 
 Fut: 
 
 Modo subjuntivo. 
 
 esté, esté, esté, estemos, 
 
 estén. 
 
 estuviera, estuviera, estuviera, estuviéramos, 
 estuvieran. 
 
 estuviese, estuviese, estuviese, estuviésemos, 
 estuviesen. 
 
 estuviere, estuviere, estuviere, estuviéremos, 
 estuvieren. 
 
 Genmdio: estando. 
 
 Participio : estado. 
 
 estén, 
 
 estuvieran, 
 
 estuviesen, 
 
 estuvieren. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
252 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABUI.ARIO. 
 
 Los Platos. 
 
 El jarro para la leche 
 (‘hárr'-ró pá'-rá la la'- 
 chS^). 
 
 El vaso para el vino (ve'- 
 no). 
 
 Un vaso de vino. 
 
 La taza (tá'-thá). 
 
 El plato (plá'-tó). 
 
 El tirabuzón (té-ra-boó- 
 thon'). 
 
 Sirva V. el café. 
 
 Quite V. la mesa (ké'-t^). 
 
 El Viaje. 
 
 Hacer un viaje. 
 
 Dar un viaje. 
 
 ¿ Va V. a hacer un viaje? 
 
 Estoy para^ salir para Eu 
 ropa (á"^oó-ró'-pá). 
 
 Hacer un viaje; partir; 
 salir; ir. 
 
 ¿ A dónde va V. ? 
 
 Parto para Alemania (á-la- 
 má'-ne'^á).* 
 
 Salir de la ciudad (the^^oo 
 dad'). 
 
 Salgo de la ciudad ma- 
 ñana. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 The Dishes. 
 
 The milk-jug. 
 
 The wine-glass. 
 
 A glass of wine. 
 
 The cup. 
 
 The saucer. 
 
 The corkscrew. 
 
 Serve the coffee. 
 
 Take off the things; clear 
 the table. 
 
 The Journey; the Voyage. 
 
 To make a journey. 
 
 To take a journey. 
 
 Are you going to take a 
 journey? 
 
 I am on the point of leaving 
 for Europe. 
 
 To take a journey; to de- 
 part; to leave; to go. 
 
 Where are you going? 
 
 I am leaving for Germany. 
 
 To go out of town. 
 
 I am going out of town to- 
 morrow. 
 
 1 Estar para means to he on the point of. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 253 
 
 I Está su esposo de V. fuera 
 de la ciudad? (foo'^ 
 á'-rá) . 
 
 I Tuvo V. buen viaje? 
 
 ¡Adiós; qué tenga V. feliz 
 viaje! (fa-lethO. 
 
 El Ferrocarril. 
 
 (ál férr'-ró-kárr-rel). 
 
 El paradero (pá-rá-dé'-ró). 
 
 La estación (és-tá-the^ 
 
 5n'). 
 
 I De cuál estación sale V.? 
 (sá'-lf). 
 
 Salgo de la estación Unión 
 (óó-ne^ón'). 
 
 El Billete. 
 
 El despacho de billetes (bo- 
 letos; boletas; papele- 
 tas). 
 
 I Me hace V. el favor de 
 decirme, en dónde está 
 el despacho de billetes? 
 
 I Dónde compro el billete? 
 
 La segunda puerta a la de- 
 recha (a la izquierda). 
 
 De este lado (lá'-do). 
 
 Al otro lado. 
 
 En frente. Siga V. dere- 
 cho (sé'-gá). 
 
 Is your husband out of 
 town? 
 
 Did you have a good jour- 
 ney? 
 
 Good-bye. I hope you will 
 have a pleasant jour- 
 ney! 
 
 The Railroad. 
 
 I The depot; the station. 
 The terminus. 
 
 From which station are you 
 going? 
 
 I leave from the Union De- 
 pot. 
 
 The Ticket. 
 
 The ticket-ofhce. 
 
 The booking-office. 
 
 Could you please tell me 
 where the ticket-office 
 is? 
 
 Where do I get my tickets 
 please? 
 
 Second door to the right 
 (to the left). 
 
 On this side. 
 
 On the other side. 
 
 Right opposite. Straight 
 before you (follow you 
 straight). 
 
254 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Sírvase darme un billete 
 para Veracruz. 
 
 Un billete de primera. 
 
 Un billete de segunda. 
 
 Un billete de tercera. 
 
 ¿ Desea V. un billete de pri- 
 mera o de segimda? 
 
 El billete de vuelta. 
 
 El billete de excursión (éx- 
 kóórr-thé"^ón). 
 
 El billete de ida y vuelta 
 (é'-dá). 
 
 ¿ Para cuánto tiempo sirve 
 la boleta de retomo 
 (ra-torr'-nó). 
 
 Los billetes de ida y vuelta 
 sirven para un mes. 
 
 El billete directo (dé-rék'- 
 tó). 
 
 ¿ Puede V. darme un billete 
 directo hasta Chihua- 
 hua (ché-hwá'-hwá) ? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto vale un billete de 
 aquí a Orizaba (o-ré- 
 thá'-vá) ? 
 
 El portero (porr-ta'-ro). 
 
 El mozo (mo'-tho). 
 
 Sírvase llamar al portero 
 (lyá-márr'). 
 
 Portero, sírvase facturar 
 (marcar) mi equipaje 
 (a-ké-pá'-^hj^). 
 
 Please give me a ticket to 
 Vera Cmz. 
 
 A first-class ticket. 
 
 A second-class ticket. 
 
 A third-class ticket. 
 
 Do you want a first or 
 second-class ticket? 
 
 The return ticket. 
 
 - The round-trip ticket. 
 
 For how long are retiun- 
 tickets good? 
 
 Return-tickets are good for 
 a month. 
 
 The through-ticket. 
 
 Can you give me a through 
 ticket to Chihuahua? 
 
 How much is a ticket from 
 here to Orizaba? 
 
 The porter. 
 
 The waiter. 
 
 Call the porter please. 
 
 Porter, please check my 
 baggage (my luggage). 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 255 
 
 I Cuánto equipaje tiene V. ? 
 
 El baúl; los baúles. 
 
 Sírvase V. poner placa a mi 
 baúl para Méjico (plá'- 
 ká). 
 
 Sírvase V. facturar mi baúl 
 para Méjico. 
 
 El mío es un baúl de cuero 
 (kwa'-ro). 
 
 Un baúl con cubierta de 
 lona (koó-ve^érr'-tá). 
 
 Un baúl de cuero de suelas 
 (swa'-lás). 
 
 Un baúl con cubierta de 
 metal (ma-tál'). 
 
 Un baúl pequeño (pa-kén'- 
 yó). 
 
 Un baúl grande. 
 
 Un baúl aladrado (kwá- 
 drá'-do) . 
 
 Este es mi baúl. 
 
 I Dónde se puso mi baúl? 
 (póo'-só). 
 
 La maleta (mádá'-tá). 
 
 El saco de noche. 
 
 La sombrerera (sóm-brá- 
 ra'-rá). 
 
 Tenga V. cuidado^ con mi 
 sombrerera (kwé-dá'- 
 do). 
 
 La placa^ (plá'-ká). 
 
 La contraseña. 
 
 El talon. ^ 
 
 How many pieces have you ? 
 The trunk; the trunks. 
 
 ^ Please check my trunk 
 for Mexico. 
 
 Mine is a leather-trunk. 
 
 A canvas-covered trunk. 
 
 A sole-leather trunk. 
 
 A metal-covered trunk. 
 
 A small trunk. 
 
 A large trunk. 
 
 A square trunk. 
 
 This is my trunk. 
 
 Where was my trunk put? 
 
 I The valise. 
 
 The hat-box. 
 
 Be careful with my hat- 
 box. 
 
 I The check. 
 
 Tenga V. cuidado! Take care! Look out! 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 256 
 
 Deme su billete y le traeré 
 su talón (contraseña) 
 inmediatamente (trá-ñ- 
 ra'). 
 
 El equipaje libre (lé'-br^). 
 
 Los ferrocarriles mejicanos 
 permiten solamente 
 cincuenta libras de 
 equipaje libre (pérr- 
 mé'-tén). 
 
 El peso (pá'-só). 
 
 El exceso de peso (ék-sá'- 
 
 só). 
 
 I Tengo exceso de peso? 
 
 Tiene V. dos cientas libras 
 de exceso. 
 
 No se debe viajar por Mé- 
 jico con mucho equi- 
 page; es demasiado cos- 
 toso (dá-má-sé'^á-dó 
 kós-to'-so). 
 
 Mi equipaje fué marcado 
 para Veracruz. He 
 perdido mi talón (pérr- 
 dé'-dó). 
 
 El salón de espera. 
 
 (sá-lón' da és-pá'-rá). 
 
 Sírvase decirme dónde está 
 el salón de espera. 
 
 Please give me your ticket; 
 I’ll bring you your 
 check at once. 
 
 The free baggage. 
 
 Mexican railroads allow 
 only fifty potmds of 
 baggage free. 
 
 The weight. 
 
 The overweight. 
 
 Have I any overweight? 
 
 You have two himdred 
 pounds overweight. 
 
 You ought not to travel 
 with much baggage in 
 Mexico; it is too dear. 
 
 My baggage was checked 
 for Vera Cruz. I have 
 lost my check. 
 
 The Waiting Room. 
 
 Pray, where is the waiting- 
 room? 
 
 1 Placa is the Mexican word for a railway baggage check; talón 
 is a receipt for baggage. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 257 
 
 Se abren las puertas diez 
 minutos antes de la 
 salida del tren (sá-lé'- 
 dá). 
 
 El buffet. 
 
 Entrar. Subir. Montar. 
 
 El viajero (vé'^á-^ha'-ro). 
 
 El pasajero (pá-sá-'ha'-ró). 
 
 i Pasageros, al tren! 
 
 ¡ Listos (lés'-tós)l 
 
 El Tren; los trenes. 
 
 El tren directo (dé-rék'-to). 
 
 El tren expreso (éks-pra'- 
 so). 
 
 El tren correo (kórr-ra'-o). 
 
 El tren mixto. 
 
 El tren de carga (kárr'-gá). 
 
 El conductor (kOn-dóok- 
 torr'). 
 
 ¿ Es este el tren para Vera- 
 cruz? 
 
 Salir. Partir. Ir. 
 
 El tren sale de aquí a un 
 minuto. 
 
 Sírvase entrar; el tren va 
 a salir. 
 
 ¿ Cuántos trenes hay al día 
 para Veracruz? 
 
 I Qué tren es el próximo 
 para Méjico? 
 
 The doors open ten min- 
 utes before the train 
 leaves (are opened the 
 doors ten minutes be- 
 fore the departure of 
 the train). 
 
 The Buffet. 
 
 To Get In. 
 
 The traveler. 
 
 The passenger. 
 
 All aboard. 
 
 The Train; the Trains. 
 
 I The express-train. 
 
 The mail train. 
 
 The mixed train. 
 
 The freight train. 
 
 The conductor. 
 
 Is this the Veracruz train? 
 
 To leave; to start; to go. 
 
 The train leaves in a min- 
 ute. 
 
 Pray get in; the train is 
 going to start. 
 
 How many trains a day are 
 there for Veracruz? 
 
 What is the next train for 
 Mexico? 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 258 
 
 ^ I Dónde está el tren para 
 Chihuahua? 
 
 El carro de ferrocarril. 
 
 El compartimiento (kom- 
 párr-té-mé'^én'-to) . 
 
 ¿ Dónde está el comparti- 
 miento de las señoras? 
 
 El asiento (á-sé'^én'-to). 
 
 Sentarse. 
 
 Sentémonos en este com- 
 partimiento. 
 
 Tomado; reservado. 
 
 Libre; desocupado. 
 
 ¿ Está tomado este asien- 
 to? No, está desocu- 
 pado. 
 
 La esquina (és-ke'-ná). 
 
 El asiento de esquina. 
 
 Tome V. un asiento de es- 
 quina. 
 
 Sentarse. 
 
 Cómodo. 
 
 Incómodo. 
 
 ¿ Está V. cómodo? 
 
 Sí no está V. cómodo tome 
 V. este asiento. 
 
 No entre V. CvSte comparti- 
 miento, es para se- 
 ñoras. 
 
 Where is the train for Chi- 
 huahua? 
 
 The railway carriage. 
 
 The compartment. 
 
 Where is the ladies’ com- 
 partment ? 
 
 The seat. 
 
 To Take a Seat. 
 
 Let us take a seat in this 
 compartment. 
 
 Taken; engaged. 
 
 Vacant, free, disengaged. 
 
 Is this seat taken? No, it 
 is vacant. 
 
 The comer. 
 
 The comer-seat. 
 
 Take a comer-seat. 
 
 To be seated. 
 
 Comfortable. 
 
 Uncomfortable. 
 
 Are you comfortable? 
 
 If you are not comfortable 
 take this seat. 
 
 Don’t get in here, this is a 
 ladies’ compartment. 
 

LiDHMnr 
 
 THE 
 
 UNiVERSilY OF ILLiNO!'' 
 
 ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRAaiCAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK : : LONDON 
 The International College of Langus^es 
 
COPYRIGHT 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES 
 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers' Hall. London. Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 259 
 
 m 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Tener que, hay que 261 
 
 Bank and Business Expressions 268 
 
 Time of Day 268 
 
 In a Store 270 
 
 Main Sentence 274 
 
 Dates 278 
 
 Boarding House 284 
 
 Vocabulary 288 
 
2ÓO The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 To Be Obliged, etc. Continuation. 
 
 42. Ah, I am glad you asked me this question. I ex- 
 plained to you before that impersonal verbs are 
 followed by the subjunctive mood, unless cer- 
 tainty is noted. (Literally; Ah! (vaya), I re- 
 joice (me alegro) that me may make you that 
 question. Already you (I) explained to you, that 
 to the verbs impersonal them follows always the 
 mood subjunctive, unless (a menos que) may be 
 denoted certainty (certeza). 
 
 43. And now since you understand everything in re- 
 gard to the various expressions which are em- 
 ployed for the English must, I want you to form 
 a number of sentences with them. But employ 
 different tenses and persons if you please. (Lit- 
 erally: And already that understand you all the 
 expressions which are employed for the must of 
 the English, (I) wish that may form you some 
 phrases with them. But have the goodness (la 
 bondad) of to employ different tenses and persons). 
 
 44. What shall they be about? (About (sobre) what 
 ought (they) be)? 
 
 45. About anything you like, provided they are prac- 
 
 tical phrases. Talk about business, for instance. 
 (Literally: About any subject (cualquier cosa) 
 
 which you may please, provided (con tal que) 
 (they) may be phrases practical. Talk about 
 business (negocios). 
 
 ^ The Present of the Subjunctive Mood is generally employed 
 when the preceding verb stands in the Present or Future Indica- 
 tive^ or in the Imperative. 
 
 Me alegro que el tiempo favo- I am glad the weather is favor- 
 rezca la fiesta. able to the festival. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 261 
 
 Tener Que, Hay Que, etc. 
 
 Continuación, 
 
 42. Vaya, me alegro que me haga V.^ esa pregunta. 
 Ya le expliqué a V. que a los verbos impersonales 
 les sigue siempre el Modo Subjuntivo, a menos 
 que se denote certeza, (sé'-ghj^ se"^ém'-pr^ thérr- 
 ta'-thá). 
 
 43. Y ya que entiende V. todas las expresiones que 
 se emplean por el must del inglés, quiero que forme 
 V. algunas frases con ellas. Pero tenga la bondad 
 de emplear diferentes tiempos y personas, (ém- 
 pla'-án). 
 
 44. ¿ Sobre qué deben ser? 
 
 45. Sobre cualquier cosa que V. guste,^ con tal que 
 sean frases prácticas. Hable V. de negocios, 
 (kwál-ke'^érr' na-go'-thé^ 5 s). 
 
 Será preciso que se quede, It will he necessary for him to 
 
 stay. 
 
 Dígaselo cuando le vea, Tell him so when you see him, 
 
 2 Cualquier followed by que, requires the verb in the subjunctive 
 mood: 
 
 Cualquier cosa que V. diga, Whatever you may say. 
 
 Cualquiera que V. guste, Whatever you please. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
2Ó2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 46. Shall I form single phrases, or would it be better 
 
 to work out a conversation? (Literally: Wish 
 
 you that (I) may form phrases isolated or would 
 (it) be better that (it) might be a conversation)? 
 
 47. In cases of this kind where it is desirable to em- 
 ploy practical sentences, a conversation would not 
 be so well adapted as disconnected phrases; for 
 you wiU of course understand that from isolated 
 phrases we can easily progress to an ordinary con- 
 versation. (Literally: In cases like this in which 
 (it) is desired to use phrases practical, a conver- 
 sation not would be as good as (como) phrases 
 isolated: since ought you to understand that of 
 phrases isolated can be passed easily to a conversa- 
 tion ordinary). 
 
 48. I will try to do the best I can. Let me think a 
 
 moment and then I will begin. (Literally: (I) 
 
 shall try to (de) do what (I) may be able. Let 
 me you think a moment and then (I) shall begin). 
 
 ^ The Imperfect of the Subjunctive in either form is employed 
 after verbs in any past tense in the Indicative or in the Conditional: 
 
 Le suplicaron que fuera (o 
 fuese) a su casa, 
 
 Fué - preciso que lo hiciera (o 
 hiciese), 
 
 Desearía que V. me hiciera ese 
 favor, 
 
 They begged him to go to his 
 house. 
 
 It was necessary for him to do 
 it. 
 
 I wish you would do me that 
 favor. 
 
 ® Pensar, to thinks and empezar, to commence ^ belong to the class 
 of slightly irregular verbs which change the stem-vowel e into ie 
 throughout the singular and in the third person plural of the present 
 indicative and subjunctive, and in the same persons in the im- 
 perative. 
 
 Pensar, pensando, pensado, to think. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 263 
 
 46. Quiere V., que forme frases sueltas o sería mejor 
 que fuese^ una conversación? (fóó-a'-sá). 
 
 47. En casos como este en que se desea usar frases 
 prácticas, una conversación no sería tan buena 
 como frases sueltas; pues debe V. comprender 
 que de frases sueltas puede pasarse fácilmente a 
 una conversación corriente. 
 
 48. Trataré de hacer lo que pueda. Déjeme V. pen- 
 sar^ im momento y entonces empezaré.^ 
 
 Pres. Ind: pienso. piensa. piensa. pensamos, piensan. 
 
 Pres. Sub: piense. piense. piense. pensemos, piensen. 
 
 Imperat: pensemos, piensen, piensen, pensemos, piensen. 
 
 Empezar, empezando, empezado, to begin. 
 
 Pres. Ind: empiezo. empieza. empieza. empezamos, 
 
 empiezan. empiezan. 
 
 Pres. Sub: empiece. empiece. empiece. empecemos, 
 
 empiecen. empiecen. 
 
 Imperat: empiecen. empecemos, empiecen. 
 
 The use of c has been explained before. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
2Ó4 
 
 T'he Rosenthal Method, 
 
 49. Where are you going? You seem to be in a hurry. 
 (Literally: To where go you? (It) seems that are 
 you of hurry (de pnsa) ? 
 
 50. Indeed I am in a hurry. I must go to the bank at 
 once. I have to pay a note and have but ten 
 minutes left to go there and transact my business. 
 (Pay a note (un pagaré) and not have but ten 
 minutes in order to arrive there and make the 
 business). 
 
 51. Now form a few phrases in regard to health. You 
 must employ our idioms. Put the phrase into 
 the past tense. 
 
 52. My wife was taken ill last night. I was obliged 
 to get up at two o’clock and get a physician. This 
 morning she feels a little better, but she will have 
 to stay in bed for at least a week. (Literally: 
 My wife fell (cayó) ill last night (anoche). At 
 two o’clock (a las dos) I had to get up (levantarme) 
 to get (buscar) the physician. Already (she) is a 
 little better, but (she) will have to stay (estarse) 
 in bed for at least (por lo menos) a week). 
 
 ^ Study now the whole conjugation of 
 
 It, To go. 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 voy. 
 
 va. 
 
 va. 
 
 vamos. 
 
 van. 
 
 van. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 iba. 
 
 iba. 
 
 iba. 
 
 íbamos. 
 
 iban. 
 
 iban. 
 
 Def: 
 
 fui. 
 
 fué. 
 
 fué. 
 
 fuimos. 
 
 fueron. 
 
 fueron. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 iré. 
 
 irá. 
 
 irá. 
 
 iremos. 
 
 irán. 
 
 irán. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 iría. 
 
 - iría. 
 
 iría. iríamos. 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 irían. 
 
 irían. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 vaya. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 vayamos. 
 
 vayan. 
 
 vayan. 
 
 Imp:^ 
 
 fuera. 
 
 fuera. 
 
 fuera. 
 
 fuéramos. 
 
 fueran. 
 
 fueran. 
 
 Imp *.2 
 
 fuese. 
 
 fuese. 
 
 fuese. 
 
 fuésemos. 
 
 fuesen. 
 
 fuesen. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 fuere. 
 
 fuere. fuere. 
 Gerundio: 
 Participio : 
 
 fuéremos. 
 : yendo. 
 
 : ido. 
 
 fueren. 
 
 fueren. 
 
 
 á far; 
 
 a pale; 
 
 e eve; é 
 
 there; ó note; 
 
 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 265 
 
 49. ¿A dónde va^ V.? Parece que está V. de prisa, 
 (pré'-sá). 
 
 50. Sí, estoy de prisa. He de ir al banco inmediata- 
 mente. Tengo que pagar un pagaré y no tengo 
 sino diez minutos para llegar allí y hacer el nego- 
 cio. 
 
 51. Ahora forme V. unas frases sobre la salud. Debe 
 V. emplear nuestros modismos. Ponga la frase 
 en el pasado. 
 
 52. Mi esposa cayó^ enferma anoche. A las dos tuve 
 que levantarme a buscar el médico. Ya está un , 
 poco mejor, pero tendrá que estarse en cama por 
 lo menos una semana. 
 
 2 Study the whole conjugation of the irregular verb. 
 
 Caer, To fall. 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 Él. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 Éllos. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 caigo. 
 
 cae. 
 
 cae. 
 
 caemos. 
 
 caen. 
 
 caen. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 caía. 
 
 caía. 
 
 caía. 
 
 caíamos. 
 
 caían. 
 
 caían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 cai. 
 
 cayó. 
 
 cayó. 
 
 caímos. 
 
 cayeron. 
 
 cayeron. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 caeré. 
 
 caerá. 
 
 caerá. 
 
 caeremos. 
 
 caerán. 
 
 caerán. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 caería. 
 
 caería. 
 
 caería, caeríamos. 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 caerían. 
 
 caerían. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 caiga. 
 
 caiga. 
 
 caiga. 
 
 caigamos. 
 
 caigan. 
 
 caigan. 
 
 Imp:i 
 
 cayera. 
 
 cayera. 
 
 cayera. 
 
 cayéremos. 
 
 cayeran. 
 
 cayeran. 
 
 Imp :2 
 
 cayese. 
 
 cayese. 
 
 cayese. 
 
 cayésemos. 
 
 cayesen. 
 
 cayesen. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 cayere. 
 
 cayere. 
 
 cayere. 
 
 cayéremos. 
 
 cayeren. 
 
 cayeren. 
 
 Gerundio: cayendo. 
 
 Participio pasado: caído. 
 
 Ya caigo en ello, now I see; now I understand. — Las ventanas 
 caen a la plaza, the windows look on {front) the square. — Caersele 
 a uno la cara de vergüenza, to blush with shame. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
266 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 53. The doctor says she must have change of climate. 
 He wants her to go to Mexico and pass the win- 
 ter there. (Literally: Says the physician that (she) 
 must change of climate (de clima) . He wants 
 that she may go to Mexico in order to pass there 
 the winter). 
 
 54. I am exceedingly sorry. Will you have to go 
 with her? 
 
 55. I must. It will be exceedingly diflScult for me to 
 leave my business for any length of time, but my 
 wife’s health is the first consideration and I must 
 make arrangements to accompany her. (Liter- 
 ally: Yes. Me (it) will be very difficult to leave 
 my affairs for much time, but the health of my 
 wife is first (primero) and for that (por lo tanto) 
 (I) ought to arrange (arreglar) the affairs (las 
 cosas) in order to be able to accompany her). 
 
 56. Now form a few phrases in regard to any subject 
 you like, but work in sometimes haber de and some- 
 times the other expressions for must, which I have 
 taught you. (Literally: Now form some few (unas 
 cuantas) phrases about any subject (cualquier 
 asunto) -which you please, but employ you the 
 verb haber de and sometimes (algunas veces) other 
 expressions in the which ought to be used the must 
 which you (I) have taught). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 267 
 
 53. Dice el médico que tiene que cambiár de clima. 
 El quiere que ella vaya a Méjico para pasar allí 
 el invierno, (klé'-má). 
 
 54. Lo siento mucho. ¿ Tendrá V. que ir con ella? 
 
 55. Sí. Me será muy difícil de dejar mis negocios por 
 mucho tiempo, pero la salud de mi señora es primero 
 y por lo tanto debo arreglar las cosas para poder 
 acompañarla. 
 
 56. Ahora forme unas cuantas frases sobre cualquier 
 asunto que V. guste, pero emplee V. el verbo haber 
 de y algimas veces otras expresiones en las que 
 debe usarse el must que le he enseñado. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; ó& room. 
 
268 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 57. Have we to go to the bank immediately? Yes, 
 sir, we must go at once, as the banks close at three 
 o^clock (a las tres^). I want to cash this draft. 
 I need some Mexican money. I have only Amer- 
 ican currency with me. ( = I want to make effect- 
 ive (hacer efectiva) this draft (esta letra). I need 
 (necesito) money Mexican and not have but (sino) 
 American). 
 
 58. When have I to send these goods? — ^At once. 
 
 59. Don’t you want to send a dispatch to your agent 
 first (antes)? — ^Yes, I have to send him a telegram 
 at once as I must leave this evening (because I 
 need to leave this evening). 
 
 1 Cerrar, to shut, to close, is regular except that i is inserted before 
 the stem-vowel e=ie throughout the singular and in the third 
 person plural of the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the 
 same persons in the imperative: 
 
 Yo. Usted. Él. Nosotros. Ustedes. Ellos. 
 
 Pres. Ind: cierro, cierra, cierra, cerramos, cierran, cierran. 
 
 Pres. Subj : cierre, cierre, cierre, cerremos, cierren, cierren. 
 
 ^ At, when relating to time, is expressed by a. 
 
 The word o'clock is not expressed in Spanish when the hour or 
 time of day is indicated. The article la is used before una to ex- 
 press one o'clock, and las before the other hours. The word 
 hora being understood, the feminine article must be used. Thus we 
 say: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 269 
 
 57. ¿ Hemos de ir al banco inmediatamente? — Sí 
 señor; tenemos que ir en seguida porque los bancos 
 cierran^ a las tres.^ Quiero hacer efectiva esta 
 letra. Necesito dinero mejicano y no tengo sino 
 americano, (sá-ghé'-dá thé'^érr'-rán a-fák-té'-va 
 ná-thá-se'-tó). 
 
 58. ¿ Cuándo he de enviar esos efectos? — Inmediata- 
 mente. 
 
 59. ¿No desea V. enviar antes tm despacho a su agente? 
 — Sí, he de enviarle un telegrama al momento, 
 porque necesito salir esta noche. 
 
 Es la una, 
 
 it is one o'clock. 
 
 Son las siete, 
 
 it is seven o'clock. 
 
 son las dos. 
 
 “ two 
 
 “ ocho. 
 
 “ eight “ 
 
 “ tres. 
 
 “ three “ 
 
 “ nueve, 
 
 , “ nine “ 
 
 “ cuatro. 
 
 “ four ‘‘ 
 
 ** diez. 
 
 “ ten 
 
 cinco. 
 
 “ five 
 
 “ once. 
 
 “ eleven “ 
 
 seis. 
 
 “ six “ 
 
 “ doce. 
 
 “ twelve ** 
 
 It is five minutes past one is expressed by es la una y cinco (mi- 
 nutos) ; it is ten minutes past two^ son las dos y diez ; it is a quarter 
 past two, son las dos y cuarto; it is half past two, son las dos y 
 media. — While thus far we add, we now begin to subtract: it is 
 twenty-five minutes to two, son las dos menos veinte y cinco: it is 
 a quarter to two, son las dos menos cuarto, etc. 
 
 Instead of las doce (12 o'clock), the Spaniards also say es mediodía 
 {it is mid-day), es medianoche {it is midnight). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
2)0 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 60. I have some shopping to do. Can’t you come^ 
 with me? — I am very sorry, but I have a great 
 deal to do. I am exceedingly busy to-day. I 
 have so much to do that I haven’t a moment to 
 spare (=to lose^). What have you to buy? 
 
 61. I should like to buy a dress. — My sister will be 
 delighted to accompany you on your shopping- 
 expedition. (Literally: My sister will have much 
 pleasure in to accompany you when (you) may 
 wish to do your shopping). 
 
 62. Let us enter here; this is a good store. It is always 
 advisable to buy in large establishments where all 
 goods are sold at fixed prices. (Literally: Let us 
 go to enter here; (it) is a good store. (It) is better 
 to buy always in the stores larg^ where is sold all 
 at price fixed). 
 
 63. Show me some cloth-samples for a dress. Show 
 me the finest you have. — Here are some samples, 
 sir. (Literally: Show me you samples (muestras) 
 of cloth for to make a dress. Show me the cloth 
 most fine which have you. Here have you samples 
 of cloth fine). 
 
 64. Is this the finest you have? 
 
 1 Venir, to come. 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 
 Yo. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 El. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. Ellos. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 vengo, 
 
 viene, 
 
 viene. 
 
 venimos. 
 
 vienen, vienen. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 venía, 
 
 venía, 
 
 venía. 
 
 veníamos. 
 
 venían, venían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 vine, 
 
 vino. 
 
 vino, 
 
 vinimos, 
 
 vinieron, vinieron. 
 
 Put: 
 
 vendré. 
 
 vendrá. 
 
 vendrá. 
 
 vendremos, 
 
 vendrán, vendrán, 
 
 Cond: 
 
 vendría. 
 
 vendría. 
 
 vendría. 
 
 vendríamos, vendrían, vendrían, 
 
 
 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 
 Pres: 
 
 venga. 
 
 venga. 
 
 venga. 
 
 vengamos, 
 
 vengan, vengan. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 271 
 
 60. Tengo que hacer algunas compras. ¿ No puede 
 V. venir^ conmigo? — Lo siento mucho, pero tengo 
 mucho que hacer. Hoy estoy muy ocupado. 
 Tengo tanto que hacer que no puedo perder^ un 
 instante. — ¿ Qué es lo que tiene V. que comprar? 
 
 61. Quisiera comprar un vestido. — Mi hermana tendrá 
 mucho gusto en acompañar a V., cuando desee^ 
 hacer sus compras. 
 
 62. Entremos aquí, es una buena tienda. Es mejor 
 comprar siempre en las tiendas grandes donde se 
 vende todo a precio fijo. 
 
 63. Enséñeme V. muestras de paño para hacer im 
 vestido. — Enséñeme el paño más fino que tiene V. 
 — ^Aquí tiene V. muestras de paños finos. 
 
 64. i Es este el mas fino que tiene V.? 
 
 Imp;! vin-iera. — ^iera. — ^iera. — iéramos. — ieran. — ieran. 
 
 Imp;2 vin-iese. — iese. — iese. — iésemos. — iesen. — iesen. 
 
 Fut: vin-iere. — iere. — iere. — iéremos. — ieren. — ieren. 
 
 Gerundio: viniendo. 
 
 Participio pasado : venido. 
 
 2 Perder, to lose, belongs to the same class of irregular verbs 
 noted above. The conjugation is therefore regular with the fol- 
 lowing exceptions: 
 
 Pres. Ind: pierdo, pierde, pierde, perdemos, pierden, pierden. 
 Pres. Subj : pierda, pierda, pierda, perdamos, pierdan. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 272 
 
 65. Examine the texture of this cloth, if you please. 
 It is impossible to find anything better; it is very 
 soft (flojo). 
 
 66. This cloth is very thin. 
 
 67. Here is another piece; this is very strong. 
 
 68. I don^t like this color; this color is not fast (=will 
 pass soon (pasará pronto). 
 
 69. Excuse me, sir, it will wear very well ( =it will last 
 (durará) well). 
 
 70. I depend on you. How much do you charge a 
 yard? Five dollars. (=Me I confide of you, 
 (me fío de V.). 
 
 71. That seems very dear to me; tell me the lowest 
 price, because I am not fond of bargaining (no me 
 gusta regatear). 
 
 72. I never ask too much, sir; I have only one price. 
 
 73. Can you let me have it at four dollars? — No, I 
 should lose money by it. Ill give it to you for 
 four dollars and a half; I cannot sell it any cheaper. 
 
 74. Very well! Let us split the difference. — Upon my 
 word you are getting it at cost. (=To the truth 
 that it may take you at price of cost). 
 
 75. Don’t you need anything else? — Nothing just now; 
 send me the package C. O. D. Here’s my address. 
 ( ==send me you the package with the receipt; here 
 have (you) the directions (las señas) of my house). 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language,' 
 
 273 
 
 6$. Exámine V. el tejido de este paño; es imposible 
 ver cosa mejor; es muy flojo, (ta-^hé'-dó). 
 
 66. Este paño es muy lijero. 
 
 67. Aquí hay otra pieza; es muy fuerte. 
 
 68. No me gusta el color; este color pasará pronto. 
 
 69. Perdóneme V. señor, durará mucho. 
 
 70. Me fío de V. ¿A cómo quiere V. por la vara? 
 (A cómo vende V. la vara)? — ^A cinco pesos. * 
 
 71. Me parece demasiado caro. Dígame V. el último 
 precio, porque no me gusta regatear. 
 
 72. Caballero, yo nunca pido más de lo justo; no tengo 
 más que un precio. 
 
 73. I Puede V. dármelo a cuatro pesos? — No señor, 
 perdería. Se le daré a V. por cuatro pesos y medio; 
 no le puedo vender por menos. 
 
 74. ¡ Muy bien! partamos la diferencia . — A la verdad, 
 que lo lleva V. al precio de costo. 
 
 75. I Nada más necesita V.? — Por ahora no; envíeme 
 V. el paquete con el recibo; aquí tiene las señas de 
 mi casa, (sén'-yás). 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
2 74 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 MAIN SENTENCE. 
 
 Concluded, 
 
 For I expect a friend from Chicago and must stay in 
 Vera Cruz till the steamer arrives. 
 
 For, because, as^ 
 
 I expect 
 
 a friend^ 
 
 from 
 
 Chicago 
 
 and must 
 
 stay 
 
 in 
 
 Vera Cruz 
 tills 
 
 may arrive 
 the steamer. 
 
 ^ Porque (written without accent) means because; por qué (two 
 words, the second accentuated) why? 
 
 2 The preposition a is used before personal objects after a transi- 
 tive verb: 
 
 Conozco a este hombre, I know this man. 
 
 Fueron a llamar a un médico, They went to call a physician, 
 
 I A quién busca V. ? Whom are you looking for? 
 
 But when the personal object is preceded by a cardinal num- 
 ber a is omitted: 
 
 He visto cuatro personas, I saw four persons. 
 
 When the personal object is indeterminate or unknown a is 
 also left out: 
 
 á far; a pale; B eve; é there; 0 note; oo room. 
 
275 
 
 The Spanish Language, 
 
 FRASE FUNDAMENTAL. 
 
 Conclusion, 
 
 Porque espero a un amigo de Chicago y debo estarme 
 
 en Veracruz hasta que llegue el vapor. 
 
 Porque^ 
 
 (porr'-ka). 
 
 espero 
 
 (és-pa'-ró). 
 
 a un amigo^ 
 
 (á óon á-me'-go). 
 
 de 
 
 (da). 
 
 Chicago 
 
 
 y debo 
 
 (o-da^-bo) • 
 
 estarme 
 
 (és-tárr'-má). 
 
 en 
 
 (én). 
 
 Veracruz 
 
 (vá-rá-króoth'). 
 
 hasta que^ 
 
 (ás'-tá ka). 
 
 llegue 
 
 (lyá'-ga). 
 
 el vapor. 
 
 (él vá-porr'). 
 
 Buscx) una criada, I am looking for a servant- girl. 
 
 After perder, to lose, a is omitted in some cases: 
 
 He perdido mi padre, I have lost my father. 
 
 After querer, we use a in the sense of to love, to like: 
 
 Quiero a esta muchacha, I like this girl. (/ am fond of 
 
 this girl.) 
 
 Querer, without a means to want, to wish: 
 
 Quiero un hombre honrado que / want an honest man who speaks 
 hable inglés. English. 
 
 ^ Hasta que belongs to the conjunctions which govern the sub- 
 junctive mood. See Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; oo room. 
 
276 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 1. Why do you stay in this town? The place is not 
 very interesting and there are but few sights in 
 it. (Literally: How is it that you are to be found 
 (se halla V.) in this town (esta ciudad)? Very 
 little attractive (atractiva) (it) is and not offers 
 (ofrece) much that (que) to see). 
 
 2. If I were not expecting some one from the North 
 the attractions of this place would not keep me 
 here (no me detendrían aquí). 
 
 3. Whom do you expect, if I may ask? (Literally: 
 Me allow you you (I) may ask (pregunte) whom 
 (a quién) expect)? 
 
 4. A young lady who will probably arrive by the next 
 steamer. (Literally: To a young lady (una joven) 
 who probably will arrive in the next steanier). 
 
 5. A young lady! That is interesting! I thought 
 you were married. (Literally: To a young lady 
 (una señorita)! Good (it) is! I that you believed 
 married (casado). 
 
 6. Certainly; I am miarried. The young lady is re- 
 lated to me; she is my cousin. (Literally: Clear 
 is that it (I) am. The young lady is my relative 
 (parienta); (she) is my cousin (prima). 
 
 ^ We have seen before that all verbs ending in cer and cir, pre- 
 ceded by a wwelf insert z before the stem-ending whenever the 
 stem meets an a or o: 
 
 Ind. Pres: parezco (but pareces, parece, parecemos, etc.). 
 
 Subj. Pres: parezca, parezca, parezca, parezcamos, parezcáis, 
 parezcan. 
 
 Lnperat: parezca V., parezcamos (pareced), parezcan. 
 
 2 Ofrecer has the same peculiarities as parecer. See Note i. 
 
 ® The Imperfect of the subjunctive is generally preceded by the 
 conjunction si, if: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 277 
 
 1. I Cómo es que se halla V. en esta ciudad? (¿ Por 
 qué permanece^ {or continúa) V. en la ciudad)? 
 Bien poco atractiva es y no ofrece^ mucho que ver. 
 (ál'-yá thé'^óó-dád' pérr-má-na'-thy kón-té-nóó'-á 
 O-fra'-thy). 
 
 2. Si no esperase^ a alguien del norte las diversiones 
 no me detendrían aquí, (és-pá-rá'-s^ ál'-ghe"^én 
 da-tén-dré'-án) 
 
 3. ¿ Me permite V. le pregimte a quiéa espera? 
 
 4. A una joven que probablemente llegará en el pró- 
 ximo vapor, (^hó'-vén). 
 
 5. ¡A una señorita! ¡Bueno está! Yo que le creía 
 casado. 
 
 6. Claro está que lo soy. La joven es mi parienta;^ 
 es mi prima, (pá-re^én'-tá pré'-má). 
 
 Si recibiésemos {or recibiéra- 
 mos) dinero, saldríamos 
 para la ciudad, 
 
 Si yo estuviera {or estuviese) 
 bueno, iría con V., 
 
 Tendría más dinero, si fuese 
 más prudente, 
 
 ^ El pariente, the kinsman^ the 
 kinswoman, the {female) relative, 
 la prima, the cousin {female). 
 
 If we should receive money we 
 would leave for town. 
 
 If I were in good health I would 
 go with you. 
 
 He would have more money if he 
 were more prudent, 
 
 {male) relative; la parienta, the 
 El primo, the cousin {male); 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
278 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 7. Have you been here long? (Literally: Makes (it) 
 time that are you here? Or: Arrived you long 
 ago? (= makes (it) much)? 
 
 8. I have been staying here since the 15th. (Literally: 
 Since (desde) the fifteenth (el quince^) that I stay 
 (me hallo) here). 
 
 9. At what hotel do you stop? (Literally: In where 
 board you (se hospeda V.)? 
 
 10. I am stopping at the Hotel de Madrid, I am sorry 
 to say. (Literally: I reside (resido) in the Hotel 
 of Madrid and am sorry for it (lo siento). Or: 
 My residence (residencia) is in the Hotel of Madrid, 
 which not me pleases (place^). Or: I am in the 
 Hotel of Madrid against my taste). 
 
 ^The present tense is used after hace in expressions referring 
 to time. 
 
 ¿Cuánto tiempo hace que está 
 V. aquí? 
 
 Hace mucho tiempo que no le 
 veo, 
 
 Hace tres años que no nos 
 hablamos, 
 
 Hace dos semanas que llueve. 
 
 Hace seis años que estoy aquí, 
 
 2 With the exception of primero, 
 cardinal numbers for dates: 
 
 ¿ Qué día del mes tenemos hoy? 1 
 ¿ A cuántos deb mes estamos r 
 hoy? J 
 
 Tenemos el doce de junio. 
 
 Estamos a tres de febrero, 
 
 How long have you been here? 
 
 It is a long time since I saw him. 
 
 It is three years since we spoke 
 to each other. 
 
 It has been raining for two weeks. 
 I have been here six years, 
 the first, the Spaniards use the 
 
 What date is to-day? 
 
 It is the I2th of June. 
 
 It is the 2)d of February. 
 
 3 All verbs ending in cer or cir preceded by a vowel insert before 
 the stem-ending a z as often as the stem meets an a or o, as: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 279 
 
 7. ¿ Hace^ tiempo que está V. aquí? 
 
 ¿ Llegó V. hace mucho? 
 
 8. Desde el quince^ que me hallo aquí. 
 
 9. ¿ En dónde se hospeda V.? (ós-pa'-dá). 
 
 10. Resido en el ‘^Hotel de Madrid’’ y lo siento. 
 
 Mi residencia es el “Hotel de Madrid,” que no 
 me place.^ 
 
 Estoy en el “Hotel de Madrid” contra mi gusto, 
 (rá-se'-dó rá-sé-dén'-the'^á). 
 
 
 Conocer, to know. 
 Pres, ind: 
 
 Pres. subj: 
 
 Yo, 
 
 conozco. 
 
 conozca. 
 
 Usted, 
 
 conoce. 
 
 conozca. 
 
 Él, 
 
 conoce. 
 
 conozca. 
 
 Nosotros, 
 
 conocemos. 
 
 conozcamos. 
 
 Ustedes, 
 
 conocen. 
 
 conozcan. 
 
 Ellos, 
 
 conocen. 
 
 conozcan. 
 
 Imperativo : 
 
 conozca, conozcamos, conozcan, 
 
 Lucir: To display, to shine. 
 
 
 Pres. ind: 
 
 Pres. subj: 
 
 Yo, 
 
 luzco. 
 
 luzca. 
 
 Usted, 
 
 luce. 
 
 luzca. 
 
 Él, 
 
 luce. 
 
 luzca. 
 
 Nosotros, 
 
 lucimos. 
 
 luzcamos. 
 
 Ustedes, 
 
 lucen. 
 
 luzcan. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 lucen. 
 
 luzcan. 
 
 Imperativo: luzca, luzcamos, luzcan. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
28o 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 11. Do you not like it? (Literally: Then not you 
 
 pleases it (gusta) to you? Or: Not is (it) to your 
 liking (de wsu gusto)? Or: Not you it pleases 
 
 (place) to stay in it)? 
 
 12. The guide-books recommend it as one of the best 
 hotels in Mexico. (Literally: The guide-books (las 
 guías de viajeros) it recommend (recomiendan) as 
 one of the best of Mexico. Or: It is said to be 
 (se dice ser) of the best of the country in the guide- 
 books. Or: Say the guide-books that (it) is of the 
 best of the country). 
 
 13. That may be, but it is conducted on the Spanish, 
 or rather the Mexican plan. (Literally: All shall 
 be able to be (podrá ser^), but its management 
 (su manejo) is in the Spanish style (a la española^), 
 or better said in the Mexican). 
 
 ^ Recomendar, to recomniendy inserts i before the stem- vowel e 
 — ie throughout the singular and in the third person plural of the 
 indicative and subjunctive present, and in the same persons in the 
 imperative. 
 
 
 Pres, ind: 
 
 Pres. subj: 
 
 Yo. 
 
 recomiendo. 
 
 recomiende. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 recomienda. 
 
 recomiende. 
 
 Él. 
 
 recomienda. 
 
 recomiende. 
 
 Nosotros. ■ 
 
 recomendamos. 
 
 recomendemos. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 recomiendan. 
 
 recomienden. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 recomiendan. 
 
 recomienden. 
 
 Imperativo: recomiende, recomendemos, recomienden. 
 
 2 May and can may be translated either by the Present Indica- 
 tive or Subjunctive of poder, to he able, or by the Future: Puedo 
 venir, I may come. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 6 b room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 281 
 
 II. < Pues no le gusta a V.? 
 
 ¿ Qué no le gusta? 
 
 ¿ No es de su gusto? 
 
 ¿ No le place estar en él? 
 
 12. Las guías de viajeros lo recomiendan^ como imo de 
 los mejores de Méjico. 
 
 Se dice ser de los mejores del país en las guías. 
 Dicen las guías que es de los mejores del país, 
 (ghé'-ás vé-á-^há'-r 5 s ra-kó-mé'^én'-dán paces'). 
 
 13. Todo podrá ser,^ pero su manejo es a la española,^ 
 o mejor dicho a la mejicana. 
 
 Deme V. el dinero para que Give me the money so that I 
 pueda pagar lo que debo, may pay what I owe. 
 
 Todo podrá ser, That may that might he, 
 
 3 An adverbial expression consisting of a feminine adjective in 
 the dative singular, the noun usanza, usage ^ fashion, being under- 
 stood: 
 
 a la francesa, in the French fashion, 
 
 a la española, in the Spanish style, 
 
 a la mejicana, in the Mexican style. 
 
 The same idea may be expressed by al estilo or al estilo de: 
 al estilo francés, in the French style, 
 
 al estilo de Méjico, after the manner of Mexico, 
 
 al estilo de Castilla, after the manner of Castile, 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room> 
 
282 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 14. Everything is Mexican there: The cooking, the 
 service, the language, and though I liked it at first, 
 I am now sick and tired of it. (Literally: There 
 everything is Mexican fashion (a la mejicana) : 
 the cooking (la cocina), the service (la servidum- 
 bre) and what is heard (se oye^ and although 
 this in the beginning (al principio) not me molested 
 (molestaba), already me gives headache (jaqueca). 
 
 15. I am longing for an American meal and would give 
 anything for a good juicy American steak and fried 
 potatoes. (Literally: I long (ansio) to eat in otu: 
 style (a nuestro modo) and would give — (I) do not 
 know how much! — ^for a tasteful (sabroso) steak 
 (bistec) with potatoes fried (patatas fritas) Amer- 
 ican fashion). 
 
 16. You don’t like Mexican cooking, do you? (Liter- 
 ally: Then not to you pleases the kitchen Mexican) ? 
 
 17. I liked it at first, but I have become tired of it. 
 (Literally: Not me (it) seemed bad at first, but 
 already me (it) annoys. Or: It used (solía) not 
 displease me, but myself tired (me cansé) of it). 
 
 lOir, to hear, is very irregular. The conjugation is as follows: 
 Modo indicativo. 
 
 
 Yo, 
 
 Usted, 
 
 EL 
 
 Pres: 
 
 oigo. 
 
 oye. 
 
 oye. 
 
 Imp: 
 
 oía, 
 
 oía. 
 
 oía. 
 
 Def: 
 
 oí, 
 
 oyó. 
 
 oyó. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 oiré. 
 
 oirá. 
 
 oirá. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 oiría. 
 
 oiría. 
 
 oiría, 
 
 
 á far; 
 
 a pale; 
 
 e eve; 
 
 Nosotros, 
 
 Ustedes, 
 
 Ellos, 
 
 oímos. 
 
 oyen. 
 
 oyen. 
 
 oíamos. 
 
 oían. 
 
 oían. 
 
 oímos. 
 
 oyeron. 
 
 oyeron. 
 
 oiremos, 
 
 oirán. 
 
 oirán. 
 
 oiríamos, 
 
 oirían. 
 
 oirían. 
 
 there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 283 
 
 14. Allí todo es a la mejicana: la cocina, la servi- 
 dumbre y lo que se oye,^ y aunque esto, al principio 
 no me molestaba ya me da jaqueca.^ (ko-thé'-ná 
 sérr-vé-dóóm'-br}^ O'-yé ^há-ka'-ká.) 
 
 15. Ansio comer a nuestro modo y daría — I no sé cuanto! 
 — por tm sabroso bistec con patatas fritas a la 
 americana, (án-se'-o bé'-sták fré'-tás). 
 
 16. I Pues no le gusta la cocina mejicana? 
 
 17. No me parecía mal primero pero ya me fastidia. 
 Solía no disgustarme, pero me cansé de ella. 
 
 Modo subjimtivo. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 oiga, 
 
 oiga. 
 
 oiga. 
 
 oigamos. 
 
 oigan. 
 
 oigan. 
 
 Imp:^ 
 
 oyera, 
 
 oyera. 
 
 oyera. 
 
 oyéramos, 
 
 oyeran. 
 
 oyeran, 
 
 Imp:2 
 
 oyese. 
 
 oyese. 
 
 oyese. 
 
 oyésemos, 
 
 oyesen. 
 
 oyesen, 
 
 Fut: 
 
 oyere. 
 
 oyere. 
 
 oyere. 
 
 oyéremos. 
 
 oyeren, 
 
 oyeren, 
 
 Gerundio: oyendo. 
 
 Participio: oído. 
 
 2 Jaqueca (see sentence 14) means literally headache. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 6b room. 
 
284 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 18. Everything is full of pepper. (Literally: It (they) 
 fill (Henan) all with so much red pepper (ají). Or: 
 Nothing (they) make without much red pepper 
 (ají). 
 
 19. Everything is full of pepper, oil and condiments. 
 (Literally: The pepper, the oil (el aceite) and the 
 spices (las especias) are used too much in all.) 
 
 20. My stomach can not stand these dishes. (Literally: 
 My stomach (estómago) not sustains (aguanta) 
 these dishes (platos). Or: There is no stomach 
 (no hay estómago) that endures (resista) these 
 dishes (guisos). 
 
 21. I have made up my mind to leave my hotel and 
 
 go to some Yankee or English boarding-house. 
 (Literally : (I) have resolved (resuelto^ to go 
 
 away (irme) from the hotel and pass to a boarding- 
 house (casa de huéspedes) Yankee or English. 
 Or: (I) determined (determiné) to transport myself 
 (trasladarme) to a house Yankee or English). 
 
 1 Resolver, to resolve, is conjugated like volver, to return. It 
 changes the stem-vowel o into ue throughout the singular and 
 third person plural of the indicative and subjunctive present, and 
 in the same persons in the imperative. 
 
 Yo, 
 
 Pres. Ind: 
 
 resuelvo. 
 
 Pres. Subj: 
 resuelva. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 285 
 
 18. Lo Henan todo con tanto ají. (lyá'-nán). 
 Nada hacen sin mucho ají. 
 
 19. El ají, el aceite y las especias se usan demasiado 
 en todo. 
 
 20. Mi estómago no aguanta estos platos. 
 
 No hay estómago que resista estos guisos, (á- 
 gwán'-tá ghé'-sós). 
 
 21. He resuelto^ irme del hotel y pasar a una casa de 
 huéspedes yanqui o inglesa. 
 
 Determiné trasladarme a una casa yankee o inglesa, 
 (rá-swél'-tó hwás'-pa-dés). 
 
 Usted. 
 
 ÉL 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 Ellos, 
 
 resuelve. 
 
 resuelve. 
 
 resolvemos, 
 
 resuelven. 
 
 resuelven. 
 
 resuelva. 
 
 resuelva. 
 
 resolvamos. 
 
 resuelvan. 
 
 resuelvan. 
 
 Imperativo: resuelva, resolvamos, resuelvan. 
 
 All other forms are regular, except the Participle resuelto, re- 
 solved. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
286 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 22. That will scarcely be worth while as the steamer, 
 I suppose, will arrive soon. (Literally: Not will 
 be worth (valdrá) the trouble (la pena) already be- 
 cause (pues) not will delay (tardará) in arriving 
 (en llegar) the steamer). 
 
 23. It was due here yesterday, but at this season of 
 
 the year, when there are so many hurricanes in 
 the Gulf of Mexico, one can never tell what may 
 happen. The steamer may come in to-day, or it 
 may not be here for a week. It all depends on 
 the weather. (Literally: It was expected (se 
 
 esperaba) yesterday, but in this season (está época) 
 of the year that so many hurricanes (tantas bo- 
 rrascas) occur (ocurren) in the Gulf (el Golfo), who 
 can say what is going to happen (pasar) ? Perhaps 
 (tal vez) it may arrive to-day or perhaps within 
 one week. We are (estamos) at mercy (a merced) 
 of the weather). 
 
 24. What do the agents say? (Literally: What say 
 the consignees (los consignatarios)? Or: What is 
 the opinion (el parecer) of the agents)? 
 
 Valer, to he worth, is but slightly irregular. 
 
 Modo indicativo. 
 
 
 Pres. . 
 
 Imp: 
 
 Yo. 
 
 valgo, 
 
 valía. 
 
 Usted. 
 
 vale. 
 
 valía. 
 
 Él. 
 
 vale. 
 
 valía. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 valemos. 
 
 valíamos. 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 valen. 
 
 valían. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 valen. 
 
 valían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 Fut: 
 
 Cond: 
 
 valí, 
 
 valdré, 
 
 valdría. 
 
 valió. 
 
 valdrá. 
 
 valdría. 
 
 valió. 
 
 valdrá. 
 
 valdría. 
 
 valimos, valdremos, valdríamos, 
 valieron, valdrán, valdrían, 
 valieron, valdrán, valdrían. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 287 
 
 22. No valdrá^ la pena ya pues no tardará en llegar el 
 vapor. 
 
 23. Se esperaba ayer, pero en esta época del año 
 que tantas borrascas ocurren en el Golfo, ¿ quién 
 puede decir lo que va a pasar? Tal vez llegue 
 hoy o quizá dentro de una semana. Estamos a 
 merced del tiempo. (a'-p 5 -ká borr-rás'-kás lyá'- 
 ge mérr-thad'). 
 
 24. I Qué dicen los consignatarios? 
 
 I Y los consignatarios qué creen? 
 
 I Cuál es el parecer de los consignatarios? 
 (kon-seg-ná-tá'-re^ós) . 
 
 Modo subjuntivo. 
 
 
 Pres: 
 
 I. Imp: 
 
 2. Imp: 
 
 Fut: 
 
 Yo. 
 
 valga, 
 
 val - iera. 
 
 val - iese. 
 
 v^ - iere, 
 
 Usted, 
 
 valga. 
 
 iera. 
 
 iese, 
 
 iere, 
 
 Él. 
 
 valga. 
 
 iera. 
 
 iese. 
 
 iere. 
 
 Nosotros. 
 
 valgamos, 
 
 iéramos. 
 
 iésemos. 
 
 iéremos, 
 
 Ustedes. 
 
 valgan, 
 
 ieran. 
 
 iesen. 
 
 ieren. 
 
 Ellos. 
 
 valgan. 
 
 ieran. 
 
 iesen, 
 
 ieren. 
 
 Gerundio: valiendo, 
 Participio pasado : valido. 
 
 á far; a pale; S eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
288 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 El Ferrocarril. 
 
 Vamos al carro de fumar 
 (fóó-márr'). 
 
 Prohibir (pro-e-vérr'). 
 
 No se permite fumar en 
 este compartimiento 
 (pérr-me'-ty). 
 
 Este no es un carro de 
 fumar. 
 
 Fumar. 
 
 El humo (oo'-mó). 
 
 Abrir (áb-rerr'). 
 
 Cerrar (thérr-rárr'). 
 
 Sírvase abrir la ventana. 
 
 Abra V. la puerta. 
 
 Sírvase cerrar la ventana. 
 
 La corriente de aire (korr- 
 re^én'-ty da á'^é-re). 
 
 Hay aquí una corriente de 
 aire. 
 
 ¿ Siente V. la corriente de 
 aire cuando abro la 
 ventana? 
 
 No, señor, el comparti- 
 miento está sofocante. 
 
 El polvo. 
 
 Hace mucho polvo. 
 
 Entra mucho polvo ; sírvase 
 cerrar la ventana. 
 
 ¿ Qué estación es esa? 
 
 ¿ Cómo se llama^ esta esta- 
 ción (lyá'-má). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 The Railroad. 
 
 Let us go to the smoker. 
 
 To forbid. 
 
 No smoking in this com- 
 partment. 
 
 No smoking allowed in 
 this compartment. 
 This is not a smoking car. 
 
 To smoke. 
 
 The smoke. 
 
 To open. 
 
 To close. 
 
 Please open the window. 
 Open the door please. 
 
 Pray shut the window. 
 
 The draught (the current 
 of air). 
 
 There is a draught here. 
 
 Do you feel the draught 
 when I open the win- 
 dow? 
 
 Not at all; it is close in 
 this compartment. 
 
 The dust 
 
 It is very dusty. 
 
 It is very dusty here; please 
 put the window down. 
 What station is that? 
 
 What is the name of this 
 station? 
 
 1 ¿ Cómo se llama V. ? What is your name? Me llamo Fernandez. 
 My name is Fernandez. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 I Cómo se llama la próxi- 
 ma estación? 
 
 Parar. 
 
 (pár-rárr'). 
 
 ¿ Cuánto tiempo pára aquí 
 el tren? 
 
 Conductor, ¿ cuándo para- 
 mos para almorzar? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto tiempo paramos 
 aquí? 
 
 ¡ Tampico ! Cinco minutos 
 de parada (pá-rá'-dá). 
 Cambiar de carros. 
 
 I Tengo que cambiar de^ 
 carros? 
 
 Déjeme ver su billete. 
 
 No, no tiene V. que cam- 
 biar; este tren va hasta 
 Méjico. 
 
 I Mudamos de carros aquí? 
 (móó-dá'-mós). 
 
 I Dónde mudamos de tren? 
 
 Tiene V. que cambiar de 
 carros en Aguasca- 
 lientes. 
 
 I Conecta este tren en Ori- 
 zaba? 
 
 I A dónde va V. ? A Mé- 
 jico. 
 
 Tiene V. que esperar cua- 
 tro horas en Orizaba 
 por el tren de Méjico. 
 
 289 
 
 What is the name of the 
 next station? 
 
 To Stop. 
 
 How long does this train 
 stop here? 
 
 When do we stop for break- 
 fast, conductor? 
 
 How long do we stop here? 
 
 Tampico! We stop here 
 five minutes. 
 
 To Change Cars. 
 
 Have I to change cars? 
 
 Let me see your ticket. 
 
 No, you don’t change; this 
 train goes through 
 to Mexico. 
 
 Do we change cars here? 
 
 Where do we change trains? 
 
 You’ll have to change cars 
 at Aguas Calientes. 
 
 Does this train connect in 
 Orizaba? 
 
 Where are you going? To 
 Mexico. 
 
 You’ll have to wait four 
 hours in Orizaba for 
 the Mexico train. 
 
 This de after cambiar or mudar is strictly idiomatic. 
 
290 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Este tren no conecta. 
 
 Debió V. haber cambiado 
 de tren en Aguascali- 
 entes; hubiera V. he- 
 cho conexión con el 
 otro tren (ko-nek-the'^ 
 on'). 
 
 El carro de dormir. 
 
 El carro de dormitorio 
 (dorr-me-to'-rg'^ó) . 
 
 ¿ Hay un carro de dormir 
 en el tren que va a 
 Orizaba? 
 
 I Cuál es el costo en el 
 carro de dormir? 
 
 Deseo encontrar el carro de 
 dormir. 
 
 La Frontera. 
 
 (la frón-ta'-rá). 
 
 La aduana (á-doo^^á'-ná). 
 
 I Dónde está la aduana? 
 
 El oficial de aduana (ó-fé- 
 the^ál'). 
 
 ¿ Es V. oficial de la 
 aduana? 
 
 Ya estamos en la frontera. 
 Aquí viene el oficial 
 de la aduana mejicana. 
 
 I Tiene V. algo que pague^ 
 derechos ? 
 
 This train does not connect. 
 
 You ought to have changed 
 in Aguas Calientes; you 
 would have made con- 
 nections there. 
 
 I The sleeping-car. 
 
 Is there a sleeping-car on 
 the train which goes to 
 Orizaba? 
 
 What is the charge on the 
 sleeping-car? 
 
 I wish to find the sleeping- 
 car. 
 
 The Frontier. 
 
 The custom-house. 
 
 Where is the custom-house? 
 
 The custom-house ofl&cer. 
 
 Are you a custom-house 
 officer? 
 
 Here we are at the fron- 
 tier. Here comes the 
 Mexican custom-offi- 
 cer. 
 
 Have you anything dutia- 
 ble with you? 
 
 ^ The u is added to preserve the hard sound of g before e. The 
 verb is pagar. 
 
/ 
 
LIBRARY 
 ■ THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY or ILLINOIS 
 
 ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 OF 
 
 PRACTICAL LINGUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BV 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK :: LONDON 
 The International College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT 1905. 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES 
 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers* Hall. London, £nc. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 MU 
 
 2gi 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Theatre, Concert 292 
 
 Main Sentence 302 
 
 The weather 306 
 
 Health 316 
 
 Vocabulary 320 
 
2Q2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Theatre. — Concert. 
 
 25. They think it will be here in a day or two, al- 
 though of course, they do not know any more 
 than I do. (Literally : That not it will fail (faltará) 
 within one or two days, {Or: That not it will 
 make itself expect more than two days), though 
 (aunque) the agents nothing know). 
 
 26. Well, you must have patience. (Literally: Then 
 well, resign yourself (resígnese V.). 
 
 27. It is all very fine to say that! Patience? Why, 
 
 I am as patient as a lamb! (Literally: That is 
 
 very easy to say (de decir). To resign one’s self! 
 {Or: To have calm (tener calma)! To me with 
 those things (con esas). 
 
 28. Vera Cruz is such a tiresome place that I do not 
 know how to kill time. (Literally: What is that 
 Vera Cruz is place so heavy (pesado) that not (I) 
 know how to kill (matar) the time. {Or: The 
 hours are difficult to pass in place so disagreeable 
 as Veracruz). 
 
 29. What? Are you so bored? Why do you not go 
 to theatres or shows? (Literally: And what? 
 Not know you what to do with yourself (hacerse) ? 
 Then go to the theatre or to the shows (los títeres). 
 
 1 The verbs hacer, to make^ to do^ and mandar, to send^ to order, 
 followed by another verb in the Infinitive, have the meaning of the 
 
 English verbs to cause, to let or 
 Hago hacer un vestido, 
 
 Mando lavar mi ropa, 
 
 Haga V. enviar este libro a la 
 librería. 
 
 ¿ En dónde piensa él hacerse la 
 ropa? 
 
 have : — 
 
 I am having a dress made. 
 
 I have my clothes washed. 
 
 Have this book sent to the book- 
 store. 
 
 Where does he intend to have his 
 clothes made? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 293 
 
 Teatro. — Concierto. 
 
 25. Que no faltará dentro de uno o dos días, {or: Que 
 no se hará^ esperar más de dos días), aunque los 
 consignatarios nada saben. 
 
 26. Pues bien, resígnese V. (rá-ség'-ná-sá). 
 
 27. ¡ Eso es muy fácil de decir resignarse! (Or: ¡ Tener 
 calma) 1^ ¡ A mí con esas!^ 
 
 28. Lo que es que Veracruz es lugar tan pesado, que 
 no sé como matar el tiempo. 
 
 Las horas son difíciles de pasar en lugar tan de- 
 sagradable como Veracruz. 
 
 29. ¿Y qué? ¿ No sabe V. que hacerse? Pues vá- 
 ya V. al teatro o a los títeres, (te-tá-rés). 
 
 2 This might be rendered: 
 Bonito es el consejo, 
 
 Poco cuesta aconsejarlo, 
 Fácil es la reflexión, 
 
 ¡ Qué sencillo lo ve V. I 
 
 The advice is good. 
 
 Advice is cheap {= costs little). 
 Meditation is easy. 
 
 How simply you view itl 
 
 Literal translations from one language into another are almost 
 impossible. 
 
 Other equivalents for this phrase would be: 
 
 I No encendersele a uno la 
 sangre! 
 
 ¡No apurarse! 
 
 2 This could be rendered: 
 
 i Sepa que tengo más calma 
 que Job! 
 
 ¡Yo que soy el padre de la 
 filosofía ! 
 
 ¿ A quién pedir calma, a Job? 
 
 Not to set one's blood on fire! 
 
 Not to get impatient! 
 
 Know that I possess more pa- 
 tience than Job! 
 
 I who am the father {the very em- 
 bodiment) of philosophy! 
 Whom do you ask to be patient^ 
 Job? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
294 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 30. I am passionately fond of going to the theatre, 
 but am afraid I shoiildn^t understand any thing. 
 (Literally: I am dying (me muero) to go (por 
 ir) to the theatre, but fear (I) not understand a 
 little bit (pizca). 
 
 31. Otherwise I should have gone long ago and wit- 
 nessed some of the pieces played here but I felt 
 sure that I would not be capable to understand 
 your witticisms and jokes. (Literally: If (it) were 
 not (fuera) for that I would already have gone to 
 see various pieces of those which (they) give; but 
 not me (I) feel capable (capaz) to thoroughly under- 
 stand (de caer en la cuenta de) your fun and jokes 
 (bromas). 
 
 32. I am afraid not. Witticisms are always hard to 
 understand and foreigners experience difficulties 
 in appreciating native fun and jokes. (Literally: 
 So me it seems. The jests (las agudezas or los 
 chistes) are always hard to (de) understand and 
 the foreigners understand with difficulty the 
 sallies (las salidas) and ideas (ocurrencias) of the 
 people of the country). 
 
 33. But why do you not attend concerts? (Liter- 
 ally: Then (entonces) why not go you to the 
 concerts) ? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 295 
 
 30. Me mttero por ir al teatro, pero temo no entender 
 pizca, (moo'^a'-ró péth'-ká). 
 
 31. Si no fuera por eso, hubiese ya ido a ver varias 
 piezas de las que dan; pero, no me siento capaz 
 de caer en la cuenta de los chistes y bromas de 
 Vds. (pé'^á'-thás ká-páth' ka-érr' bro-más). 
 
 32. Así me lo parece. Las agudezas {or los chistes) 
 son siempre difíciles de entender, y los extran- 
 jeros comprenden con dificultad las salidas y ocu- 
 rrencias de las gentes del país, (á-góó-dá'-thás 
 ches'-tés ex-trán-^há'-rós). 
 
 33. Entonces ¿ por qué no va V. a los conciertos? 
 (kón-the^érr'-tós) . 
 
 á far; a pale; 5 eve; é there; ó note; óó room. 
 
296 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 34. I am passionately fond of music and in Chicago 
 ' I used to attend the Symphony-Concerts every 
 
 Saturday. (Literally: So much me pleases the 
 music (la música) that in Chicago not (I) fail 
 (falto) never at the Hall Philharmonic (al Salon 
 Filarmónico or al Casino Musical) where there 
 is concert the Saturdays (los sábados). 
 
 35. Very well, then accompany me this evening. You 
 will hear some of our best melodies performed by 
 our most famous Band. (Literally: Is well, then 
 accompany me you'^this night. Will hear you the 
 best melodies (melodías) played by (ejecutadas 
 por) the most select of our bands). 
 
 36. The Mexicans are a very musical people, are they 
 not? (Literally: The Mexicans are people (gente) 
 of talent (talento) for the music, not is (it) so)? 
 
 1 Some personal verbs are used impersonally, i. e. in the third 
 person singular. The most important ones are: 
 
 Bastar, To suffice ^ to he sufficient. 
 
 Basta que V. se empeñe, It is sufficient that you persist 
 
 in it. 
 
 Su palabra basta, Your word is enough. 
 
 Basta que V. lo diga, It is sufficient that you say so. 
 
 Convenir, To agree ^ to suit. 
 
 Conviene hacer esto, It is expedient to do it. 
 
 Me conviene, * It suits me. 
 
 Gustar, To please. 
 
 Me gusta comer a la una, I like to dine at one. 
 
 El estudio de idiomas me gusta, I like to study languages. 
 
 Disgustar, To displease. 
 
 Me disgusta oir tal cosa, I dislike to hear such a thing. 
 
 Su conversación disgusta. His conversation is unpleasant. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 297 
 
 34. Tanto me place^ la música que en Chicago no 
 falto nunca al Salon Filarmónico donde hay con- 
 cierto los sábados, (fe-lárr-mo'-né-kó). 
 
 35. Está bien, pues acompáñeme V. esta noche. Escu- 
 chará V. las mejores melodías ejecutadas por la 
 más selecta de nuestras bandas, (és-koo-chá'-rá 
 noo-és'-trás ban'-dás). 
 
 36. i Los Mejicanos son gente de talento para la mú- 
 sica, no es así? (‘hén'-té). 
 
 Fastidiar, To annoy, to he tiresome. 
 
 Fastidia quedarse en casa, 
 Me fastidia guardar la cama, 
 
 Tanta lluvia fastidia. 
 
 It is tiresome to stay at home. 
 
 It is annoying that I have to stay 
 abed. 
 
 So much rain is annoying. 
 
 Importar, To 
 
 Importa decírselo, 
 
 No importa. 
 
 No me importa, 
 
 Placer, 
 
 Me place oirlo, 
 i Plegue a Dios! 
 
 of importance. 
 
 It is important to tell him so. 
 Never mind. 
 
 I don't care. 
 
 9 please. 
 
 It pleases me to hear it. 
 
 May it please God! 
 
 Valer, To he worth, to he better. 
 
 Más vale tarde que nunca. Better late than never. 
 
 El trabajo vale más que la Work is better than idleness. 
 
 ociosidad. 
 
 á far; a pale; é eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
298 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 37. Indeed they are. Every one, rich or poor, is fond 
 of music. They are natural musicians. Many 
 persons who understand nothing of music, who 
 do not even know one note from another are able 
 to play a piece of music correctly after hearing it a 
 few times. (Literally: (They) have fame (fama) 
 of it (ello). All from the most rich (pudiente) to 
 the most needy (menesteroso) have taste for (por) 
 the music. (They) are musicians bom (innatos). 
 Many who not understand nothing of music, that 
 not know even the notes, can play (tocar) a piece 
 (una pieza) admirably (admirablemente) after 
 (después de) to hear her some times). 
 
 38. Wonderful! I have often heard this, but I never 
 believed it. (Literally: Wonderful (cáspita)l (I) 
 have heard say it, but never it could believe). 
 
 39. It is an absolute fact which is tme not only of the 
 inhabitants of Mexico, but of the natives of South 
 America also. (Literally: Well (it) is thus, and 
 not only is (it) tmth of the natives (los naturales) 
 of Mexico, but of the South America (Sur- América). 
 
 40. And do they perform well? 
 
 1 The Infinitive stands after all prepositions: 
 
 Despues de oir a ámbas partes, After hearing both parties one is 
 es como se puede juzgar, able to judge. 
 
 Para aprender algo es preciso In order to learn anything one 
 estudiar. must study. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 299 
 
 37. Tienen fama de ello. Todos, desde el más pudiente 
 hasta el más menesteroso, tienen gusto por la 
 música. Son músicos innatos. Muchos que no 
 entienden nada de música, que no conocen ni aún 
 las notas pueden tocar una pieza admirablemente 
 después de oirla^ algunas veces. (póo-dé'T én'-té 
 má-nas-tá-ro'-so ne). 
 
 38. ¡ Cáspita! He oido decirlo, pero jamás lo pude 
 creer. 
 
 39. Pues es así, y no solo es verdad de los naturales 
 de Méjico, sino de los de Sur-América. (ná-toó- 
 rá'dés). 
 
 40. ¿ Ejecutan bien ? (a-‘ha-koo'-tán). 
 
 Sin preguntar no se puede 
 saber, 
 
 Para levantarse temprano es 
 necesario acostarse tem- 
 prano. 
 
 Without asking one cannot ob- 
 tain knowledge. 
 
 In order to get up early one must 
 retire early. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
300 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 41. Some of our bands are equal, if not superior to 
 those of the United States or Germany. They 
 play all music with great fire and expression and 
 give characteristic coloring not only to our national 
 melodies, but to the compositions of Verdi, Mas- 
 cagni and even of Wagner. (Literally: Some of our 
 orchestras (nuestras orquestas) equal (igualan) or 
 surpass (superan) to the of the States United or 
 Germany (Alemania). (They) perform (ejecutan) 
 all the pieces with much passion (mucha pasión) 
 and force (fuerza) and know to give especial 
 interpretation (especial interpretación) not only 
 to our songs local (canciones locales) but also to 
 the compositions (las composiciones) of the masters 
 (los maestros) Verdi, Mascagni and as far as (hasta) 
 to the of Wagner). 
 
 42. Well, I shall be delighted to accompany you this 
 evening. I hope they will have an interesting pro- 
 gram. (Literally: Go then; (I) me animate (me 
 animo) to go with you this night. Would (ojalá) 
 (they) may have good repertory). 
 
 ^ Nouns ending in cion or tion are of the feminine gender, as la 
 cuestión, the question: la meditación, the meditation. 
 
 The words are the same in both languages, except that in Spanish 
 the t of the termination tion is changed into c wherever it has the 
 sound of sh in English. 
 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 301 
 
 41. Algunas de nuestras orquestas igualan o superan 
 a las de los Estados Unidos o Alemania. Ejecutan 
 todas las piezas con mucha pasión^ y fuerza y 
 saben dar especial interpretación no sólo a nues- 
 tras canciones locales, sino también a las composi- 
 ciones de los maestros Verdi, Mascagni, y hasta 
 a las de Wagner, (ór-kés'-tás é-gwá'-lan). 
 
 42. Vaya pues; me animo a ir con V. esta noche. 
 Ojalá tengan buen repertorio, (rá-pér-tor'-yó). 
 
 Nouns ending in Spanish in tad or dad — terminations which 
 correspond to the English ty or the Latin tas, — are of the feminine 
 gender, as humanidad, humanity; puridad, purity; adversidad, 
 adversity. 
 
 General rule for Latin scholars: Nouns derived from the Latin 
 preserve their genders in Spanish, with this exception, that neuter 
 nouns in Latin become masculine in Spanish. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eye; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
302 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 MAIN SENTENCE 
 
 You ought not to have gone out without your over- 
 shoes in this changeable weather. In consequence of 
 your carelessness you have caught a bad cold and you 
 will be obliged to keep your room for some time before 
 you will be able to continue your journey. 
 
 Literal Translation. 
 
 Not ought you to have gone out without yoiu* shoes 
 of rubber making a weather so changeable. Owing to 
 your carelessness 3^ou has seized a tremendous cold which 
 you will oblige to keep bed for some time before that 
 (you) may be able to continue your journey. 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; ó note, ot) room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 303 
 
 FRASE FUNDAMENTAL. 
 
 No debió Vd. haber salido sin sus zapatos de goma 
 haciendo un tiempo tan variable. Debido a su descuido 
 le ha pillado un tremendo resfriado que le obligará a guardar 
 cama por algún tiempo antes que pueda continuar su 
 viaje. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 No da-bé^ó' óos-tád' á-bérr' sá-lé'-do sen sóos thá- 
 pá-tos dé gó'-má á-the^én'-do óón te^ém'-po tan 
 vá-re^á'-bl;^. Da-bé'-dó á sóo dés-kwé'-dó la á pél- 
 yá'-dó óón trá-mén'-dó rés-fré"^á'-dó ka la ob-lé-gá-rá' á 
 gwárr-dárr' ká'-má porr al-góón' té'^ém'-pó án'-tés ká 
 póó"^á'“da kón-té-nóó-árr' sóó ve'^á'-‘hj^. 
 
 1 The study of this sentence will enable the student to master 
 some difficult idiomatic constructions in regard to the use of the 
 Subjunctive Mood, the omission of que before the Subjunctive, 
 the Infinitive, Prepositions, etc. The pupil will also observe that 
 this phrase will lead to a new series of important conversational 
 themes. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
304 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 You ought not to have gone out without your over- 
 shoes in this changeable weather. 
 
 Not ought you 
 
 to have gone out 
 
 without 
 
 your overshoes 
 
 making 
 
 a weather 
 
 so 
 
 changeable. 
 
 ^ Study the whole conjugation of the irregular verb. 
 
 Salir, To go out. 
 
 Modo indicativo. 
 
 
 Yo, 
 
 Usted, 
 
 El, 
 
 Nosotros, 
 
 Ustedes, 
 
 Ellos, 
 
 Pres: 
 
 salgo, 
 
 sale. 
 
 sale. 
 
 salimos. 
 
 salen. 
 
 salen, 
 
 Imp: 
 
 salía. 
 
 salía. 
 
 salía. 
 
 salíamos. 
 
 salían. 
 
 salían. 
 
 Def: 
 
 salí. 
 
 salió. 
 
 salió. 
 
 salimos. 
 
 salieron. 
 
 salieron. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 saldré. 
 
 saldrá. 
 
 saldrá. 
 
 saldremos. 
 
 saldrán. 
 
 saldrán. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 saldría. 
 
 saldría. 
 
 saldría, saldríamos. 
 
 Modo subjuntivo. 
 
 saldrían, 
 
 saldrían. 
 
 Pres: 
 
 salga. 
 
 salga. 
 
 salga. 
 
 salgamos. 
 
 salgan, 
 
 salgan. 
 
 Imp:^ 
 
 saliera. 
 
 saliera. 
 
 saliera. 
 
 saliéramos. 
 
 salieran. 
 
 salieran. 
 
 Imp:2 
 
 saliese. 
 
 saliese. 
 
 saliese. 
 
 saliésemos. 
 
 saliesen. 
 
 saliesen. 
 
 Fut: 
 
 saliere. 
 
 saliere. 
 
 saliere. 
 
 saliéremos. 
 
 salieren. 
 
 salieren. 
 
 Gerundio: saliendo. 
 Participio: salido. 
 
 2 The Gerund is invariable in gender and number, and is used to 
 denote a continuation of the action or state: 
 
 Andan entrando y saliendo, 
 Canta bailando. 
 
 Los dejé durmiendo, 
 
 El lo dijo riendo, 
 
 Habla durmiendo. 
 
 They continue coming and going. 
 He sings while dancing, 
 
 I left them sleeping. 
 
 He said so laughing. 
 
 He talks in his sleep {whilst 
 sleeping). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 3^5 
 
 No debió V. haber salido sin sus zapatos 
 
 no da-bé"^ó' óós-tad' á-bérr' sá-lé'-do sen sóós thá-pá-tós 
 de goma haciendo un tiempo tan variable, 
 
 dé gO'-má á-the^én'-dó oón té'^ém'-po tan vá-ré'^á'-bljr. 
 No debió V. (no dá-bé^ó' óbs-tád') 
 haber salido^ (á-bérr' sá-le'-dó) 
 sin (sen) 
 
 sus zapatos de goma 
 haciendo^ (á-thé'^én'-dó) 
 un tiempo (óón te"^ém'-po) 
 tan (tan) 
 
 variable (vá-re^á'-bl^^). 
 
 The Gerund is, therefore, frequently used for the sake of brevity 
 or euphony where we in English employ while^ whilst^ aSy since, 
 although, if or hy\ 
 
 One learns by teaching, 
 
 A cough is cured by perspiring. 
 Since it is so, I don't want to do it. 
 If I give him permission he will 
 go out. 
 
 When he saw his brother was not 
 coming he went away. 
 
 As he has a sore foot he cannot 
 get up. 
 
 Enseñando se aprende. 
 
 La tos se cura sudando. 
 
 Siendo así no quiero hacerlo. 
 
 Dándole yo licencia, saldrá. 
 
 Viendo que su hermano no 
 venía, se fué. 
 
 Teniendo malo el pie no puede 
 levantarse. 
 
 The Gerund is used in connection with the verb estar, similar 
 to the progressive conjugation in English, to express the action 
 of the verb as unfinished and continuing* 
 
 I De qué está V. hablando? Of what are you speaking? 
 
 I Qué está V. haciendo? What are you doing? 
 
 Estoy escribiendo una carta, I am writing a letter. 
 
 He estado leyendo todo el día, I have been reading all day long. 
 The verb estar cannot be used with the Gerund of ser, to be; 
 ir, and venir, to come. Thus we must say: 
 
 Voy, I am going. Viene, He is coming, etc. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; oo room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 306 
 
 1. Why did you go out in this changeable weather 
 without your overshoes? You ought not to have 
 done that. (Literally: Why went out you without 
 your shoes of rubber with a weather so changeable? 
 Not ought you to have done such (tal). 
 
 2. I surely would not have done so if I had not thought 
 the weather would clear. (Literally: The truth 
 that not it (I) would have done in not to believe 
 (a no creer) that the weather was going to clear 
 (aclarar). 
 
 3. How could you have supposed such a thing? The 
 weather has been bad for some days. (Literally: 
 How coiild you imagine it (figurárselo^) ? It 
 makes much that we have bad weather). 
 
 ^ Many verbs are reflexive in Spanish which are not so in English, 
 as: 
 
 Alegrarse, to rejoice, equivocarse, to he mistaken. 
 
 figurarse, to imagine. engañarse, to he deceived. 
 
 disgustarse, to he displeased. burlarse, to laugh at. 
 
 It must also be observed that permanently reflexive verbs, may 
 be conjugated impersonally with se (the dative of the pronoun 
 serving to distinguish the person) as: 
 
 Personal Inflection. Impersonal Inflection, 
 
 me figuro, se me figura, I imagine. 
 
 (te figuraos), (se te figura), {thou imaginest). 
 
 se figura, se le figura, he imagines. 
 
 V. se figura, se le figura a V., you imagine. 
 
 nos figuramos, * se nos figura, we imagine. 
 
 (os figuráis), (se os figura), {ye imagine). 
 
 se figuran, se les figura, they imagine. 
 
 V. V. se figuran, se les figura a Vds., you imagine. 
 
 The pupil ought also to remember that almost all passive verbs 
 in English and all verbs compounded with to get ov to become, are 
 reflexive in Spanish. The following examples will make this clear: 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 307 
 
 I. ¿ Por qué salió V. sin sus zapatos de goma con un 
 tiempo tan variable ? No debió V. haber hecho tal. 
 
 2. La verdad que no lo hubiese hecho a no creer que 
 el tiempo iba a aclarar. (óó-be"^é'-s^ é'-bá). 
 
 3. ¿ Cómo pudo V. figurárselo Hace mucho que 
 tenemos mal tiempo, (fe-góó-rárr'-sa-ló). 
 
 Llamarse, to he called. 
 
 I Cómo se llama V.? What is your name? 
 
 Me llamo José. My name is Joseph. 
 
 Equivocarse, to he mistaken. 
 
 V. se equivoca, You are mistaken. 
 
 Sentarse, to he seated. 
 
 Siéntese V. señor, Sit down^ sir. 
 
 Levantarse, to get up, to arise. 
 
 I A qué hora se levanta V.? At what time do you get up? 
 
 Me levanto a las cinco, I rise at five o'clock. 
 
 Acostarse, to retire, to go to hed. 
 
 I Está V. acostándose? Are you getting into hed? 
 
 No estoy acostándome todavía, I am not getting into hed yet, hut 
 pero me acostaré pronto, I shall do so soon. 
 
 Enfadarse, to get angry. 
 
 No se enfade V., Don't get angry. 
 
 Calentarse, to get warm. 
 
 Caliéntese V., Get warm. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
3o8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 4. Yes, for this season of the year it was bad enough, 
 nevertheless I thought it would clear. (Literally: 
 Thus (it) is, for the season (la estación) in which 
 we are (it) has been very bad, this notwithstanding 
 (esto no obstante) believed (I) that (it) would clear 
 (despejaría). 
 
 5. An erroneous supposition, my dear sir. You don’t 
 
 know our climate yet. (Literally: Thought you 
 
 badly, my dear sir (señor mío). Well it is seen 
 that still not are you familiar (familiarizado) with 
 our climate (nuestro clima). 
 
 6. I always understood that the Mexican climate was 
 good, and according to the weather-reports I sup- 
 posed that it surely was going to clear. (Literally: 
 (I) had (tenia^) understood that the climate of 
 Mexico not was bad and according to (según) the 
 reports (los avisos) to be hoped (it) ought (meaning 
 really: It was to be hoped) that (it) would clear 
 (aclarase). 
 
 7. According to the weather-reports? Do you belong 
 to the few who believe in them? (Literally: The 
 reports meteorological (meteorológicos) ? Belong you 
 (pertenece V.) to the few which trust (se fian) of 
 them? 
 
 Enfermarse, to get sick. 
 
 El se enfermó al salir del tea- 
 tro, 
 
 He became sick when leaving the 
 theatre. 
 
 Irse, to go away. 
 
 Váyase V., 
 Me voy, 
 
 Go away. 
 
 I am going away. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 309 
 
 4. Así es, para la estación en que estamos ha sido bien 
 malo, esto no obstante creí que despejaría, (sé'- 
 dó kra-é' dés-pa-^há-ré'-á). 
 
 5. Pensó V. mal, señor mío. Bien se ve que aún no 
 está V. familiarizado con nuestro clima, (fá-me- 
 lé'^á-re-thá'-dó klé'-má). 
 
 6. Tenía^ entendido que el clima de Méjico no era 
 malo y según los avisos esperarse debía que acla- 
 rase. (kle'-má á-vé'-sós). 
 
 7. ¿ Los pronósticos meteorológicos ? ¿ Pertenece V. 
 
 a los pocos que se fían de ellos? (pró-nos'-té-kos 
 ma-ta-ó-ró-lo'-he-kós fe'-án). 
 
 Acordarse, to remember. 
 
 Me acordaré siempre de eso, I shall always remember it. 
 
 Pasearse, to go for a walk (a promenade). 
 
 ¿Quiere V. pasearse conmigo? Will you take a walk with me? 
 
 No tengo tiempo de pasearme, I have no time for promenades. 
 
 ^ Strictly idiomatic and frequently used. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
310 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 8. As a general thing, I am not so credulous, and I 
 
 only regret to have placed my confidence in weather 
 forecasts. (Literally: Generally (por lo general) 
 
 not (I) am credulous (crédulo) and regret to have 
 me confided now of prognostics). 
 
 9. Yes, you ought not to have done that. You have 
 
 been imposed upon. (Literally: Clearly never 
 
 ought you to have it done. You have taken (se- 
 ha llevado V.) disappointment (chasco). 
 
 10. Most likely we shall have to stay in all the after- 
 noon. Just look how it rains. (Literally: The 
 probable will be that (we) may have to remain 
 here all the afternoon. See you that rain (esa 
 lluvia). 
 
 11. Yes, it is really pouring. It is useless to think 
 about going out in this fearful weather. A great 
 pity, isn’t it? (Literally: Yes, torrent-like (to- 
 rrencial). Folly (tontería) to think in to go out 
 with such storm (borrasca). Pity, not is (it) thus)? 
 
 12. Yes, it is too bad. But what about a drive? 
 (= and in carriage)? 
 
 13. Be advised by me. Don’t venture out in this hor- 
 
 rid weather. Just see how it lightens! (Liter- 
 ally: Follow you my advice (mi consejo). Not 
 
 venture out (se aventure) with the tempest (la 
 tormenta). What flashes of lightning (qué de 
 relámpagos) 1 
 
 1 To advise is generally rendered by aconsejar, as: 
 
 I Qué me aconseja V. hacer? What would you advise me to do? 
 
 ¿ Que lugares me aconseja V. What places would you advise 
 
 visitar? me to visit? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 311 
 
 8. Por lo general no soy crédulo y siento haberme fiado 
 ahora de pronósticos, (^há-ná-rál') 
 
 9. ¡ Claro ! jamás debía V. haberlo hecho. Se ha 
 llevado V. chasco, (^há-más' lya-vá'-do chás'>kó). 
 
 10. Lo probable será que tengamos que permanecer 
 aquí toda la tarde. Vea V. esa lluvia, (pérr-má- 
 na-thérr' vá'-á lyób'-vé"^á). 
 
 11. Sí, torrencial. Tontería pensar en salir con tal 
 borrasca. Lástima, ¿ no es así? (torr-rén'the'^ál' 
 tOn-tá-re'-á lás'-té-má). 
 
 12. De veras. Pero, ¿ y en coche? 
 
 13. Siga V. mi consejo.^ No se aventure con la tor- 
 menta. ¡ Qué de relámpagos ! (sé'-gá kon-sa'- 
 hó ra-lam'-pá-gós). 
 
 ¿Quién le ha aconsejado a V. 
 esto? 
 
 Si yo estuviera en su lugar, pro- 
 cedería según su consejo. 
 Yo estoy seguro que lo sentirá 
 V. si no sigue su consejo. 
 
 Who has given you this advice? 
 
 If I were in your place I should 
 act upon his advice. 
 
 I am sure you will be sorry if you 
 act against his advice. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
312 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 14. And now it is commencing to thunder. Goodness! 
 what a clap of thunder; that must have struck 
 near by. (Literally: Now commence the thunder- 
 claps (los truenos). Goodness (canastos), what 
 noise (estruendo) ! Must have struck (caído) near 
 here (por aquí). 
 
 15. But what is that? A carriage in this storm at our 
 door? (Literally: What was (that)? There stops 
 (se detiene) here a carriage with that storm) ? 
 
 16. If I am not greatly mistaken it is yoiu: compatriot 
 (supaisano). 
 
 17. What can bring him here in this fearful weather? 
 (Literally: What him brings here with this weather 
 so terrible) ? 
 
 18. There he is! ( = There (he) comes). 
 
 19. But, my dear Lewis, what brings you here in this 
 horrible weather? And oh, you are wet to the 
 skin! (Literally: Say, Lewis (Luis) dear, what 
 deuce (qué diantre) you brings with this bad 
 weather? And are you made a sop). 
 
 20. I only went across the street to get a cab and got 
 wet to the skin. (Literally: Well only (I) crossed 
 (atravesé) the street in order to take the cab 
 (coche) and became wet (empapé). 
 
 1 A few sentences may give more clearness in regard to the use 
 
 of this verb: 
 
 Si no me equivoco, creo que 
 tengo el honor de dirijirme 
 al señor Sir vent, 
 
 El se equivocó al hacer esta 
 declaración. 
 
 If I am not mistaken, I think 
 I have the honor of addressing 
 Mr. Sirvent. 
 
 He was greatly mistaken when he 
 made this statement. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 313 
 
 14. Ahora empiezan los truenos. ¡Canastos, qué es- 
 truendo! Debe haber caído por aquí. 
 
 15. I Qué fué? ¿ Se detiene aquí un carruaje con esa 
 tormenta? 
 
 16. Si no me equivoco^ es su paisano, (á-ké-vo'-ko). 
 
 17. ¿ Qué le trae aquí con este tiempo tan terrible? 
 
 18. Allí viene. 
 
 19. Diga, Luis querido, ¿ qué diantre le trae con este 
 mal tiempo? Y está V. hecho una sopa, (lóó'-es 
 ka-re'-dó dé^án'-trá so-pá). 
 
 20. Pues solo atravesé la calle para tomar el coche 
 y me empapé. 
 
 ¿No está V. equivocado? 
 
 Esta es una equivocación, 
 
 Hay una gran equivocación en 
 esta cuenta, 
 
 Dispénseme; V. ha cometido 
 una equivocación ; permí- 
 tame V. corregirla. 
 
 Are you not mistaken? 
 
 This is a mistake. 
 
 There is a great mistake in this 
 hill. 
 
 Pardon we, you have made a 
 mistake. Allow me to cor- 
 rect it. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 314 
 
 21. Change your clothes or you will catch your death 
 of cold. (Literally: Change (múdese) the cloth- 
 ing (la ropa) if not go you to take a cold). 
 
 22. Lie down on my bed and hang your clothes. 
 
 (Literally: Retire (acuéstese) in my bed and 
 
 hang up (cuelgue) your things (su vestido). 
 
 23. But I was to bring you an invitation. Our friend 
 sends his regards to you and. . . . 
 
 24. Pardon me for interrupting you, but your health 
 
 is of supreme importance. (Literally: Permit 
 
 (that I) you interrupt, but your health is first of 
 nothing). 
 
 25. Just as you like. But I really do not catch cold 
 
 as easily as you imagine. (Literally: As you 
 
 may say. Despite of which (a pesar de que) not 
 (I) take cold (me resfrío) so easily as you yourself 
 imagine). 
 
 26. Here is everything you need. Fortunately we are 
 of the same size and everything will fit you splen- 
 didly. (Literally: Here is whatever (cuanto) you 
 makes need (falta). Thanks that (a que) (we) are 
 of equal stature (igual estatiura) all you wül fit 
 (sentará) well). 
 
 ^ The conjugation of acostar has been given before. Always 
 remember that when a verb has ue in the stem-syllable the Infin- 
 itive must have an o in place of it. Colgar has the same irregu- 
 larities; the euphonic changes of g have been explained before. 
 Compare Part X. 
 
 2 There are numerous ways of expressing this phrase: 
 
 Muchos recados en su casa de My regards at home. 
 
 Vd., 
 
 Dígale mil cosas de mi parte, Give my regards to her. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 315 
 
 21. Múdese la ropa, si no va V. a tomar un resfriado. 
 
 22. Acuéstese^ en mi cama y cuelgue^ su vestido, (á* 
 kwés'-tá-sa kwél'-ga). 
 
 23. Le traía una invitación. El amigo envia saludos^ 
 y. . . . (en-vé-tá-thé^ón'). 
 
 24. Permita le interrumpa pero su salud es primero 
 que nada. 
 
 25. Como V. diga. A pesar de que no me resfrío tan 
 fácilmente como usted se imagina. 
 
 26. Aquí está cuanto le hace falta. Gracias a que so- 
 mos de igual estatura todo le sentará bien, (é- 
 gwál' és-tá-too'-rá). 
 
 Póngame a los pies de su señora 
 de Vd., 
 
 Presente V. mis respetos a su 
 madre, 
 
 Muchas memorias de mi parte 
 a su hermana, 
 
 Memorias a todos en casa, 
 Muchas expresiones al Sr 
 Gómez, 
 
 Recuérdeme bondadosamente a 
 su esposa, 
 
 Gracias, las apreciará mucho, 
 Gracias, las estimará mucho, 
 Gracias, quedará V. servido. 
 
 Please give my kindest regards to 
 your wife. 
 
 Present my respects to your 
 mother. 
 
 Give my regards to your sister. 
 
 Remember me to all at home. 
 
 My regards to Mr. Gomez. 
 
 Remember me kindly to your 
 wife. 
 
 Thanks (= she will appreciate 
 them greatly). 
 
 Thanks (= she will esteem them 
 greatly). 
 
 Thanks ( = you will remain 
 served). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
3i6 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 27. Take off all your damp clothes and put on 'mine 
 
 at once. (Literally: Take off yourself (quítese), 
 
 your clothes (ropa) wet (mojada) and put on your- 
 self (póngase) immediately the mine). 
 
 28. As soon as you are dressed I will ring for the servant. 
 He shall see that your clothes are dried. (Literally: 
 As soon as (tan luego) (you) may be ready (listo) 
 (I) shall call the servant. He will make (that) may 
 gets dry (se seque) the yours (la suya). 
 
 In consequence of your carelessness you have contracted 
 a bad cold. 
 
 Owing to 
 your carelessness 
 you has seized 
 a fearful cold. 
 
 1. What is the subject of to-day’s lesson? (Liter- 
 ally: Of what treats (trata) the lesson of to-day)? 
 
 2. In to-day’s lesson we will talk about diseases and 
 
 health, a most important theme. (Literally: We 
 
 shall occupy ourselves (nos ocuparemos) of the 
 health and of the disease (la enfermedad), subject 
 highly important (asunto capital). 
 
 3. And the consideration of this theme will probably 
 lead to many new expressions? (Literally: And 
 the study of this theme us will lead to the many 
 expressions new) ? 
 
 1 From secar, to dry. The euphonic changes have been explained 
 before. It will be observed that que is frequently omitted before 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 317 
 
 27. Quítese su ropa mojada y póngase inmediatamente 
 la mía. 
 
 28. Tan luego esté listo llamaré al criado. El hará 
 se seque^ la suya. 
 
 Debido a su descuido le ha pillado un 
 
 dá-bé'-dó á soó dés-kwe'-dó la á pel-yá'-do óón 
 
 tremendo resfriado, 
 tra-mén'-do rés-fré^á'-dó. 
 
 Debido a (dá-be'-do á) 
 su descuido (soo dés-kwe'-dó). 
 le ha pillado (la á pel-yá'-dó) 
 
 un tremendo resfriado (óon tra-mén'-dó rés-fre"^á'- 
 dó). 
 
 I. ¿De qué trata la lección de hoy? (lék-the^on'). 
 
 2. Nos ocuparemos de la salud y de la enfermedad, 
 asunto capital. 
 
 3. ¿Y el estudio de ese tema nos conducirá al de 
 muchas expresiones nuevas? 
 
 the Subjunctive Mood. This often happens in every day con- 
 versation and the pupil ought to accustom himself to it. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 3i3 
 
 4. Without doubt. Now let us see. How are you 
 to-day? You look somewhat fatigued and ill. 
 (Literally: Clear it is. Let us go to see then. 
 How are you to-day? Have you face (cara) of 
 to be dejected (abatido) and even (hasta) ill). 
 
 5. I do not feel well. I think I took cold last night 
 on leaving the theatre. (Literally: Not I feel 
 (me siento) well. I fear to have caught (haber 
 agarrado) a cold last night at the departure (a la 
 salida) from the theatre). 
 
 6. I am exceedingly sorry to hear that. Did you not 
 v/ear your overshoes? (Literally: Much me troubles 
 (apena) . Had you put on the shoes of rubber) ? 
 
 7. In going to the theatre the idea of an umbrella or 
 overshoes never occurred to me. (Literally: In 
 going (al ir) to the theatre not me occurred to take 
 neither umbrella nor shoes of rubber? {Or: Who 
 could have thought in to take neither (ni) umbrella 
 or (o) shoes of rubber)? 
 
 8. You have a bad cough. You really seem to have 
 a wretched cold. (Literally: Your cough (su tos) 
 not me pleases. It seems that it seized (agarró) 
 to you in truth (de veras). 
 
 ^ Parecer has many idiomatic meanings, 
 will help to explain them: 
 
 É1 parece un perfecto caballero, 
 y más que eso, lo es, 
 
 Él pareció muy incomodado a 
 su demanda. 
 
 No me parece que iré a verle 
 esta mañana, 
 
 ¿Qué le parece a V. esta ac- 
 triz? 
 
 The following phrases 
 
 He seems a perfect gentleman^ 
 and what is more^ he is one. 
 
 He seemed greatly annoyed at 
 your request. 
 
 I don't think I shall call on him 
 this morning. 
 
 What do you think of this ac- 
 tress? 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 319 
 
 4. Claro está. Vamos a ver pues. ¿ Qué tal está V. 
 hoy? Tiene V. cara de estar abatido y hasta en- 
 fermo. (á-bá-te'-dó) . 
 
 5. No me siento bien. Temo haber agarrado un res- 
 friado anoche a la salida del teatro. 
 
 6. Mucho me apena. ¿ Tenía V. puestos los zapatos 
 de goma? (á-pá'-ná). 
 
 7. Al ir al teatro no se me ocurrió llevar ni paraguas 
 ni zapatos de goma. {Or: Quién hubiera pensado 
 en llevar ni paraguas o zapatos de goma) ? 
 
 8. Su tos no me place. Parece^ que lo agarró a V. de 
 veras, (á-gárr-ró' va'-rás). 
 
 ¿ No le parece a V. muy linda 
 esa dama? 
 
 Este retrato no se parece a Vd., 
 
 ¿No cree Vd. que esta fotografía 
 se parece mucho a ella? 
 
 Parece un aleman (un meji- 
 cano), 
 
 i Se parece a él ! 
 
 ¡ Se parece a ella ! 
 
 i Que mal parecía su madre 
 anoche ! 
 
 ¡ Que bien parecía el señor Bar- 
 bozo cuando llegó de Bue- 
 nos Aires! 
 
 DonH you think that lady is very 
 pretty? 
 
 This picture does not resemble you 
 {does not look like you). 
 
 Don't you think this photograph 
 is very much like her? 
 
 He looks like a German {a Mex- 
 ican). 
 
 That's just like him! 
 
 That's just like her! 
 
 How ill your mother looked last 
 night! 
 
 How well Mr. Barbozo was look- 
 ing when he arrived from 
 Buenos Aires! 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
320 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 I Sobre qué artículos hay 
 que pagar derechos? 
 
 Solamente en los puros 
 (póó'-ros). 
 
 No traigo ni puros, ni ci- 
 garros. 
 
 Sírvase abrir el baúl. 
 
 ¿ Qué hay en este baúl? 
 
 No hay sino ropa de uso. 
 
 Llegar. 
 
 La llegada (lyá-gá'-dá). 
 
 ¿ Cuándo llega este tren a 
 Méjico? 
 
 Este tren viene atrasado 
 hora y media (á-trá- 
 sá'-dó o'-rá ma'-de^ 
 á). 
 
 ¿ A qué hora llegaremos? 
 
 ¿ Encontraremos coches en 
 la estación? 
 
 Por supuesto. El policía 
 le dara a V. un billete 
 con el número de su 
 coche (po-lé-thé'-á) . 
 
 ¿ Cuál es el precio del ca- 
 rruaje hasta el hotel 
 de Inglaterra? (kárr- 
 roó-á'-^h;^). 
 
 ¿ En dónde recojo mi equi- 
 paje? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 On which articles do you 
 have to pay duty? 
 
 On cigars only. 
 
 I carry neither cigars, nor 
 cigarettes. 
 
 Pray open your trunk. 
 
 What does this trunk con- 
 tain? 
 
 Nothing but wearing ap- 
 parel. 
 
 To Arrive. 
 
 The arrival. 
 
 When is this train due in 
 Mexico? 
 
 The train is an hour and 
 30 minutes late. 
 
 At what o’clock shall we 
 arrive? 
 
 Shall we find cabs at the 
 station? 
 
 Most certainly. The police- 
 man will hand you a 
 check with the number 
 of your cab. 
 
 What is the cab fare to 
 the Hotel of England? 
 
 Where do I get my bag- 
 gage? 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 321 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 No tiene V. necesidad de 
 molestarse (na-tha-sé- 
 dád'). 
 
 Déle V. la contraseña al 
 portero. 
 
 Él traerá el equipaje al 
 coche. 
 
 Cochero, al hotel de Ma- 
 drid. 
 
 Ande pronto; tengo ham- 
 bre y estoy cansado. 
 
 El Hotel; la posada; 
 cuartos; muebles. 
 
 Un hotel de primera clase. 
 
 Un hotel de segunda clase. 
 
 ¿ Puede V. dirigirme a un 
 buen hotel ? (dé-re- 
 ‘hérr'-me). 
 
 ¿ Puede V. dirigirme a un 
 hotel donde se hable 
 inglés? 
 
 Le recomiendo a V. este 
 hotel. 
 
 La casa de huéspedes 
 (ób ^as-pá'-dés) . 
 
 I Recibe V. huéspedes? 
 
 El casero (ká-sá'-ró). 
 
 La casera. 
 
 El portero. 
 
 El mozo. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 You don^t need to trouble 
 yourself. 
 
 Just give your check to 
 the porter. 
 
 He will bring the baggage 
 directly to your cab. 
 
 Cabman, to the Hotel of 
 Madrid. 
 
 Drive quickly; I am hun- 
 gry and tired. 
 
 Hotel; Inn; Rooms; 
 
 Furniture. 
 
 A first class hotel. 
 
 A second class hotel. 
 
 Can you direct me to a 
 good hotel? 
 
 Can you direct me to a 
 hotel where English 
 is spoken? 
 
 I can recommend this hotel. 
 
 The boarding-house (= the 
 house of guests). 
 
 Do you take boarders? 
 
 The landlord. 
 
 The landlady. 
 
 The porter. 
 
 The waiter. 
 
322 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 VOCABULARIO. 
 
 La sirvienta (sérr-vé'^én'- 
 tá). 
 
 La criada (kré-á'-dá). 
 
 El criado. 
 
 El limpiabotas. 
 
 El portero. 
 
 Limpiar (lém-pé^árr'). 
 
 Sírvase limpiar mi cuarto 
 inmediatamente. 
 
 Sírvase hacer la cama. 
 
 Sírvase acepillar mi ropa, 
 (á-tha-pel-yárr') . 
 
 Límpieme las botas (lem'- 
 pé^a-mé). 
 
 Acepillar (á-tha-pél-yárr') . 
 
 Sírvase acepillarme. 
 
 I Ha acepillado V. mi ro- 
 pa? 
 
 El ascensor (ás-thén-sorr'). 
 
 El cuarto. 
 
 Este cuarto es demasiado 
 grande. 
 
 Este cuarto es demasiado 
 pequeño (pá-kén'-yo). 
 
 Este cuarto es caliente (frío). 
 
 Este cuarto es oscuro (hú- 
 medo) (óó'-má-do). 
 
 Este cuarto es demasiado 
 alto. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 The chamber-maid. 
 
 The man-servant; boots, 
 porter. 
 
 To clean. 
 
 Please clean my room at 
 once. 
 
 Pray make my bed. 
 
 Please brush my clothes. 
 
 Shine (polish) my boots. 
 
 To brush off. 
 
 Pray brush me off. 
 
 Have you brushed my 
 clothes? 
 
 The elevator. 
 
 The Room. 
 
 This room is too large. 
 
 This room is too small. 
 
 This room is hot (cold). 
 This room is dark (damp). 
 
 This room is too high 
 up. 
 
I 
 
ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 PRACTICAL LINQUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc. 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK : : LONDON 
 The International College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 THE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES. 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers^ Hall, London, Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 323 
 
 ({12^ 
 
 /in 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Health, cont 324 
 
 With a physician 338 
 
 Anecdotes 358 
 
 Proverbs, Fables, etc., 361 
 
 Vocabulary 371 
 
324 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 9. Yes, I caught a miserable cold. 
 
 10. I trust it is nothing more than a cold. Be sure 
 to be careful and dress warm, for a cold becomes 
 easily serious here. (Literally: Let us hope (ojalá) 
 it may not be more than a cold. Not neglect you 
 to protect yourself well; observe (mire) that here 
 they happen to become (suelen) complicated the 
 colds). 
 
 11. Quite true and I’ll take better care of myself in 
 future. My throat pains me. (Literally: So it 
 is and not me I shall neglect (me descuidaré) more. 
 Me pains the throat (la garganta). 
 
 12. If I were in your place, I would consult a phy- 
 sician. You are quite hoarse. (Literally: In your 
 place (lugar), I would call a physician. Are you 
 very hoarse (ronco). 
 
 13. Being hoarse does not trouble me much, for I 
 easily get in that condition. But the pains in my 
 throat make me uneasy. (Literally: The hoarse- 
 ness (la ronquera) seizes me (me da) rapidly, but 
 not me troubles (molesta). The pain (el dolor) of 
 throat me disquiets (inquieta). 
 
 ^ Soler is a defective verb. In general only the following tenses 
 and persons are used: 
 
 Suelo, I am accustomed to; sueles, suele, solemos, soléis, suelen. 
 
 Solía, I was accustomed to; solías, solía, solíamos, solíais, solían. 
 Its other tenses are but rarely used; the first Imperfect of the 
 subjunctive and the conditional are never employed. 
 
 2 Doler belongs to that numerous class of slightly irregular verbs 
 which change the stem-vowel o into ue throughout the singular 
 and in the third person plural of the present indicative and sub- 
 junctive, and in the same persons in the imperative. 
 
 Doler, doliendo, dolido, to pain. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 32s 
 
 9. He agarrado un fuerte resfriado. 
 
 10. Ojalá no sea más que un resfriado. No descuide 
 V. abrigarse bien, mire que aquí suelen^ complicarse 
 los resfriados. 
 
 11. Así es y no me descuidaré más. Me duele^ la gar- 
 ganta. (dwa'-ly). 
 
 12. En su lugar yo llamaría a un médico. Está V. 
 muy ronco. 
 
 13. La ronquera me dá pronto, pero no me molesta. 
 El dolor de garganta me inquieta. (rón-ka'-rá 
 én-ke^á'-tá). 
 
 Pres. Ind: duelo, dueles, duele, dolemos, doléis, duelen. 
 
 Pres. Subj: duela, duelas, duela, dolamos, doláis, duelan. 
 
 Imperat: duele, duela, dolamos, doled, duelan. 
 
 Regular: dolía, dolí, doliera, doliese, doliere, doleré, dolería. 
 
 ^ A few sentences may facilitate the mastery of this construc- 
 tion. 
 
 ¿Qué haría V. si se encontrase 
 en mi lugar ? 
 
 ¿ Lo haría V. o no ? 
 
 Si me encontrase en su lugar no 
 lo haría. 
 
 Si yo estuviera en su lugar, pro- 
 cedería de acuerdo con su 
 consejo. 
 
 What would you do if you were 
 in my place? 
 
 Would you do it or not? 
 
 If I were in your place I would 
 not do it. 
 
 If I were in your place I should 
 act upon his advice. 
 
 á far: a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
326 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 ■ 14. I am afraid I have made you nervous, but that 
 was not my intention. My sole object was to 
 warn you not to neglect your cold. (Literally: 
 I fear to have you alarmed (alarmado) against 
 (contra) my will (voluntad) ; my only object was 
 to forewarn vou (prevenirle). 
 
 1 5. Oh no, I do not get nervous as easily as that. Never- 
 theless I shall do as you say and consult a physician. 
 (Literally: Why, man! (cá hombre), I don’t get 
 frightened (no me asusto) so, so (así, así). Never- 
 theless (sin embargo) I shall follow your advice and 
 shall call to a doctor). 
 
 16. What are you? Do you belong to the old school 
 or the new? (Literally: You, what are (you)? 
 of the old (de la antigua) or of the new school 
 (nueva escuela). 
 
 17. You mean am I an allopath or homeopath? (Liter- 
 ally: If (I) am allopath (alópata) or (u) homeopath 
 (homeópata) ? 
 
 18. That is what I wanted to know, for we have some 
 excellent physicians of both schools. (Literally: 
 That same, for (pues) there are good physicians of 
 one and other school). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 327 
 
 X4. Temo haberle alarmado contra mi volimtad; mi 
 único objeto era prevenirle, (á-lár-má-dó ób-'há'- 
 to). 
 
 15. i Cá, hombre! no me asusto así, así. Sin embargo 
 seguiré su consejo y llamaré a un doctor or: consul- 
 taré con un médico. (sa-ghe-raO . 
 
 16. Vd., ¿ qué es? ¿ de la antigua o de la nueva escuela? 
 
 17. ¿Si soy alópata u^ homeópata? (á-ló-pá-tá 00 ó- 
 má-ó-pá-tá). 
 
 18. Eso mismo, pues hay buenos médicos de una y 
 otra escuela. 
 
 1 O, or is changed into u before words beginning with 0 or ho, as: 
 Uno u otro, One or the other. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
328 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 19. In Chicago I generally take homeopathic rem- 
 edies but I made the acquaintance of Dr. Reyes 
 here and have great confidence in him. (Liter- 
 ally: In Chicago (I) choose (opto por) the home- 
 opathy (la homeopatía), but in this (town) I made 
 friendship (amistad) with the Doctor Reyes and 
 place all my confidence (mi confianza) in him). 
 
 20. The gentleman is an allopath and has an exten- 
 sive practice among Americans. He comes from 
 Chicago, if I am not mistaken. (Literally: That 
 gentleman is allopath and possesses numerous 
 clientele (numerosa clientela) among the Ameri- 
 cans. If not I am mistaken, (he) is from Chicago). 
 
 21. Yes, his brother is one of the first lawyers in our 
 
 Western metropolis. (Literally: Exactly (justo); 
 
 his brother is one of the lawyers (abogados) most 
 popular (populares) of that metropolis (aquella 
 metrópoli). 
 
 22. And the gentleman, who, during that bad weather, 
 
 sent you an invitation to dinner, is also a lawyer, 
 is he not? (Literally: Not is also lawyer the 
 
 gentleman that you invited to dine when it made 
 such bad weather) ? 
 
 23. Yes, he is also a lawyer. He promised to call for 
 
 me. He was to be here at eleven sharp. He is 
 generally very punctual and wiU be here soon. 
 (Literaliy: Oh yes, the gentleman also is lawyer. 
 
 He promised to come for me (venir a buscarme). 
 He was to come (pasar) at the eleven precisely (en 
 punto) and not will delay (tardará) because he is 
 very punctual (puntual). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 329 
 
 19. En Chicago opto por la homeopatía, pero en esta 
 hice amistad con el Doctor Reyes y pongo toda mi 
 confianza en él. (o-ma-ó-pá-té'-á é'-thy ra'-yés 
 kón-fe-án'-thá). 
 
 20. Ese caballero es alópata y tiene numerosa clien- 
 tela entre los americanos. Si no me equivoco, es 
 de Chicago, (nóó-má-ró'-sa klé-án-ta'-lá) . 
 
 21. Justo, su hermano es uno de los abogados más 
 populares de aquella metrópoli, (^hóós'-tó po-pob- 
 lá'-rés á-kél'-yá má-tró'-pó-lé) . 
 
 22. ¿No es también abogado eb señor que lo invitó 
 a comer cuando hacía tan mal tiempo? (á-the'-á). 
 
 23. Oh sí, el señor también es abogado. Me prometió 
 venir a buscarme. Debía pasar a las once en punto, 
 y no tardará porque él es muy puntual. 
 
 1 The Spaniards use instead of Mr. and Mrs. Don (mase.), and 
 Doña (fern.), before Christian names, and el Señor and la Señora 
 before family names: 
 
 El Señor Hernández, 
 La Señora Monsanto, 
 Don Juan, 
 
 Doña María, 
 
 El Sr. D. Carlos Rosa, 
 
 Mr. Hernandez. 
 Mrs. Monsanto. 
 Mr. John. 
 
 Mrs. Mary. 
 
 Mr. Charles Ross. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
'330 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 24. There goes the bell. I am sure it is he, for it is 
 just striking eleven. (Literally : Already rings (toca) 
 the bell (la campanilla); of sure (de seguro) that 
 is he, because precisely it strikes eleven (dan las 
 once). 
 
 25. Ah my dear friend! Always punctual, never late! 
 ( = never fail you) . 
 
 26. We were just talking of you. 
 
 27. “Speak of angels!”. . . . (Literally: To speak of 
 the wolf (lobo) and immediately (luego) he ap- 
 pears). 
 
 28. Pray, don’t joke. I don’t feel like joking. (Lit- 
 erally: Come! (vamos^), don’t joke (juegue^). Not 
 I am for that (para ello), nor is (it) amusing (di- 
 vertido). 
 
 29. What is the matter? (Literally: What passes). 
 
 30. I took a violent cold and my throat pains fright- 
 fully. (Literally: I took a violent (fuerte) cold 
 and me aches very much (muchísimo) the throat). 
 
 31. Then consult Dr. Reyes. You can’t find a bet- 
 ter physician in all Mexico. 
 
 32. I shall do so, and would like you to accompany 
 me to his house. (Literally: Thus it (I) shall do 
 and would like (that) might go you (fuera V.) v/ith 
 me to his house). 
 
 ^ Dar is used idiomatically 
 following examples: 
 
 ¿Qué hora es? — Las tres están 
 para dar {or Pronto darán 
 las tres), 
 
 ¿Sabe V. qué hora es? — Han 
 dado las cinco, 
 
 in this connection. Compare the 
 
 What time is it? — It is just going 
 to strike three. 
 
 Do you know what 0^ clock it is? 
 — It has struck jive. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 331 
 
 24. Ya toca la campanilla; de seguro que es él, por- 
 que precisamente dan^ las once, (kám-pá-nél'-yá). 
 
 25. ¿ Qué hay, mi amigo? Siempre puntual; nunca 
 falta Vd. 
 
 26. Hablando de V. estábamos. 
 
 27. ‘^Hablar del lobo y luego aparece.’’ 
 
 28. Vamos ,2 no juegue.^ No estoy para ello, ni es 
 divertido, (dé-vérr-te'-do) . 
 
 29. ¿ Qué pasa? 
 
 30. Tomé un fuerte resfriado y me duele muchísimo 
 la garganta. 
 
 31. Pues vea al Doctor Reyes. No hay otro mejor en 
 Méjico, (vá'-á má-^horr'). 
 
 32. Así lo haré y quisiera fuera V. conmigo a su casa, 
 (á-rá' fóó-á'-rá). 
 
 I Qué hora podrá ser? — Acaban 
 de dar las tres, 
 
 ¿Qué hora está dando? — Las 
 seis, 
 
 ¿ No ha oido V. dar la hora? 
 Aquí no se oye ningún reloj. 
 No he oido dar la hora. 
 
 What o'clock may it he? — It has 
 just struck three. 
 
 What time is it striking there? 
 — Six. 
 
 Didn't you hear the clock strike? 
 One never hears any clock here. 
 I did not hear the clock strike. 
 
 2 Vamos is frequently used as an interjection. Compare Part X. 
 
 3 Jugar, to playy to gamhlOy to joke^ follows the irregularities of 
 verbs whose stem- vowel is o and changes u into ue in the singular 
 and third person plural of the present indicative and subjunctive 
 and the same persons in the imperative. The euphonic changes 
 of g have been explained before. 
 
 Pres. Ind: juego, (juegas), juega, jugamos, (jugáis), juegan. 
 Pres. Sub: juegue, (juegues), juegue, juguemos, (juguéis), jueguen. 
 Imp: (juega), juegue, juguemos, .(jugad), jueguen» 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
332 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 33. With pleasure. But you must put a muffler around 
 your throat and button up your overcoat for the 
 wind is blowing again and it has grown quite 
 cold. (Literally: With the greatest pleasure, only 
 that you must cover yourself (taparse) well the 
 neck (el cuello) with a muffler (con una bufanda) 
 and button yourself (abotonarse) the overcoat 
 (el sobretodo) because (it) blows (sopla) again (de 
 nuevo) the wind and is growing cold (va enfriando) 
 the weather). 
 
 34. Then it has stopped raining? (Literally: Stopped it 
 (paró) already from raining (Hover) ? 
 
 1 Llover, lloviendo, llovido, to rain, is of course an impersonal 
 verb and is conjugated: 
 
 Modo indicativo. Modo subjuntivo. 
 
 llueve, 
 
 it rains. 
 
 llueva. 
 
 it may rain. 
 
 llovía, 
 
 it was raining. 
 
 lloviera. 
 
 it might rain. 
 
 llovió. 
 
 it rained. 
 
 lloviese. 
 
 it might rain. 
 
 lloverá. 
 
 it will rain. 
 
 lloviere. 
 
 it should rain. 
 
 llovería, 
 
 it would rain. 
 
 lloviera. 
 
 (if) it rained. 
 
 Nevar, 
 
 nevando, nevado, to snow, is conjugated similarly: 
 
 Modo indicativo. 
 
 Modo subjuntivo. 
 
 nieva. 
 
 it snows. 
 
 nieve. 
 
 it may snow. 
 
 nevaba. 
 
 it was snowing. 
 
 nevara, 
 
 it might snow. 
 
 nevó. 
 
 it snowed. 
 
 nevase. 
 
 it might snow. 
 
 nevará. 
 
 it will snow. 
 
 nevare, 
 
 it should snow. 
 
 nevaría. 
 
 it would snow. 
 
 nevara, 
 
 (if) it snowed. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 333 
 
 33. Con el mayor gusto, solo que V. debe taparse bien 
 el cuello con una bufanda y abotonarse el sobretodo 
 porque sopla de nuevo el viento y va enfriando el 
 tiempo, (má-yorr' kwél'-yó én-fré-án'-do). 
 
 34. I Paró ya de llover?^ (lyo-vérr). 
 
 The following are the most commonly used 
 
 Impersonal Verbs: 
 
 Infinitivo. Indicat. Presente. Participio. 
 
 amanecer, 
 
 to dawn. 
 
 amanece. 
 
 amanecido. 
 
 anochecer, 
 
 to grow dark. 
 
 anochese. 
 
 anochecido. 
 
 oscurecer. 
 
 to grow dark. 
 
 oscurece. 
 
 oscurecido. 
 
 granizar. 
 
 to hail. 
 
 graniza. 
 
 granizado. 
 
 helar, 
 
 to freeze. 
 
 hiela. 
 
 helado. 
 
 deshelar. 
 
 to thaw. 
 
 deshiela. 
 
 deshelado. 
 
 llover, 
 
 to rain. 
 
 llueve. 
 
 llovido. 
 
 lloviznar, 
 
 to drizzle. 
 
 llovizna. 
 
 lloviznado. 
 
 nevar, 
 
 to snow. 
 
 nieva. 
 
 nevado. 
 
 relampaguear. 
 
 to lighten. 
 
 relampaguea. 
 
 relampagueado. 
 
 tronar. 
 
 to thunder. 
 
 truena. 
 
 tronado. 
 
 ventiscar. 
 
 to storm. 
 
 ventisca. 
 
 ventiscado. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
334 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 35. An hour ago. Now tie this muffler around and. 
 button your overcoat up tightly so as not to take a 
 fresh cold. (Literally: It makes already one hour. 
 Protect yourself (abrigúese) with this muffler and 
 close (cierre) well the overcoat in order not to cold 
 yourself again). 
 
 36. Be assured I will take care of myself. (Literally: 
 You I assure that me I shall care). 
 
 37. Be sure to do so. Nothing is so disagreeable as 
 illness when in a strange town. (Literally: Not 
 it forget (olvide). Nothing there is worse than 
 a vexatious (molesta) illness in a place unknown 
 (desconocido). 
 
 38. Are you going to walk? — ^A walk might do me 
 good. (= The walking (el caminar) me will do 
 good). 
 
 39. What are you thinking of? A walk with your 
 cold would be the greatest indiscretion. No, no, 
 we are going to ride. (Literally: In what think 
 you? It would be unpardonable (imperdonable) 
 to go afoot with the cold of you. No, no, we shall 
 take cab). 
 
 40. You are a cautious man, but you are quite right. 
 It would be most disagreeable if I were laid up 
 here. (Literally: Are you careful (precavido) and 
 do (you) well in being so. It would be the most 
 bad (lo peor) that I had to keep (que tuviera que 
 guardar) bed). 
 
 41. Let us take a cab. 
 
 42. There is one. Hail it. 
 
 1 Cerrar, cerrando, cerrado, to shut, to close, is conjugated: 
 
 Pres. Ind: cierro, (cierras), cierra, cerramos, (cerráis), 
 
 cierran. \ 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; óó room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 335 
 
 35. Hace ya una hora. Abrigúese con esta bufanda 
 y cierre^ bien el sobretodo para no resfriarse de nuevo, 
 (á-bré'-ga-sá the^érr'-ré). 
 
 36. Le aseguro que me cuidaré. 
 
 37. No lo olvide. Nada hay peor que tma molesta 
 enfermedad en un lugar desconocido. 
 
 38. ¿ Va Vd. a pie? — El caminar me hará bien, (pé"^ 
 
 a'). 
 
 39. I En qué piensa^ V.? Sería imperdonable ir a pie 
 con el resfriado de V. No, no, tomaremos coche. 
 
 40. Es Vd. precavido y hace bien en serlo. Sería lo 
 peor’ que tuviera que guardar cama. 
 
 41. Tomemos carruaje. (kárr-róo-á'-‘hé). 
 
 42. Allá va uno. Le llamaré. 
 
 Pres. Sub: ciérre, (cierres), cierre, cerremos, (cerréis), 
 
 cierren. 
 
 Imperat: (cierra), cierre, cerremos, (cerrad), 
 
 cierren. 
 
 Reg: cerraba, cerré, cerrara, cerrase, cerrare, cerraré, cerraría. 
 
 2 Pensar, pensando, pensado, to think, belongs to the same class 
 of irregular verbs so frequently explained before and forms: 
 
 Pres. Ind: pienso, (piensas), piensa, pensamos, (pensáis), piensan. 
 Pres. Sub: piense, (pienses), piense, pensemos, (penséis), piensen. 
 Imperat: (piensa), piense, pensemos, (penséis), piensen. 
 
 Reg: pensaba, pensé, pensara, pensase, pensare, pensaré, pensaría. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
336 The Rosenthal Method» 
 
 43. But that is an open carriage. That would expose 
 
 me more than walking. (Literally: (It) is open 
 
 (abierto); (it) would be more exposed (arriesgado) 
 than to go afoot) . 
 
 44. That is true enough, but the driver will close it. 
 (Literally: Truth that it is, but the driver it will 
 close) . 
 
 45. Driver, close your carriage tight. This gentleman is 
 ill and must not be exposed to any draught. (Liter- 
 ally: Driver, close well the carriage. The gentle- 
 man not himself finds well and not ought to give 
 himself the draught (el aire). 
 
 46. All right, sir! Just wait a moment before getting 
 in. (Literally: Is well, sir. In a moment (you) 
 will be able to enter). 
 
 47. There you are, gentlemen; everything is all right; 
 please get in. Where to? (Literally: Ready; al- 
 ready (it) is to your liking; enter. Whither go (you) ? 
 
 48. Drive as quickly as you can to No. 42 San Fran- 
 cisco Street. 
 
 49. By the hour, gentlemen? — Certainly; according to 
 my watch it is a quarter past eleven. Drive quickly! 
 
 50. Do you always engage a cab by time? — That de- 
 
 pends on circumstances; on general principles it 
 is preferable. (Literally: Hire you (alquila V.) 
 
 always per hour? — ^Who knows? That depends of 
 the circumstances. In general (por lo general) 
 is better). 
 
 1 The following verbs form 
 
 Irregular participles. 
 
 Abrir, to open; abierto, opened» 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 337 
 
 43. Es abierto;^ sería más arriesgado que ir a pie. (á- 
 bé'^err'-to árr-ré'^és-gá'-do). 
 
 44. Verdad que lo es, pero el cochero lo cerrará. 
 
 45. Cochero, cierre bien el carruaje. El caballero no 
 se halla bien y no debe darle el aire. 
 
 46. ¡ Está bien, señor! , En un momento podrán en- 
 trar. 
 
 47. Listo; ya está a su gusto; entren. ¿ A dónde 
 van? 
 
 48. Lo más aprisa que pueda al No. 42 de la calle de San 
 Francisco. 
 
 49. I Por hora? — Es claro; por mi reloj son las once 
 y cuarto . ¡ Apúrese 1 
 
 50. I Alquila V. siempre por hora? — ¿Quién sabe? Eso 
 depende de las circunstancias. Por lo general es 
 mejor. 
 
 Cubrir, to cover. 
 Decir, to say^ to tell. 
 Escribir, to write. 
 Hacer, to make, to do. 
 Morir, to die. 
 
 Poner, to put. 
 
 Ver, to see. 
 
 Volver, to return. 
 
 cubierto, covered. 
 dicho, said, told. 
 escrito, written. 
 hecho, made, done. 
 muerto, died. 
 puesto, put. 
 visto, seen. 
 vuelto, returned. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
338 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 You will have to keep your room for days before you 
 can continue your journey. 
 
 Which you will oblige 
 
 to keep 
 
 bed 
 
 for some time 
 before that 
 
 you may be able to continue 
 your journey. 
 
 I. I would like to consult you, doctor. Since last 
 evening I have felt so badly, that I am afraid I 
 shall be seriously ill. (Literally: Doctor, I should 
 like to consult you. I have felt so bad since last 
 night (anoche) that (I) fear (it) may be something 
 grave (cosa grave). 
 
 1 Sentir, to feel^ to perceive, belongs to a class of irregular verbs 
 of the third conjugation, which insert i before the stem-vowel e 
 throughout the singular and in the third person plural of the present 
 indicative and subjunctive, and in the same persons in the im- 
 perative. 
 
 In the first and second persons plural of the present subjunctive 
 and in the first person plural of the imperative, the stem-vowel e 
 is changed into i — sintamos, sintáis. 
 
 In the preterite stem — including the gerund — the stem-vowel e 
 is changed into i whenever the inflection contains the diphthongs 
 ie or io. 
 
 Sentir, sintiendo, sentido, to feel, to perceive. 
 
 Pres. Ind: sient-o, sient-es, sient-e, sent-imos, sent-is, sient-en. 
 
 Pres. Sub: sient-a, sient-as, sieht-a, sint-amos, sint-áis, sient-an. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 339 
 
 Que le obligará a guardar cama por algún 
 
 ká la ob-le-gá-rá' á gwárr-dárr' ká'-má porr ál-góón' 
 tiempo antes que pueda continuar 
 té^ém'-pó án'-tés ká poo-á'-dá kon-té-nóó-árr' 
 su viaje, 
 sóó ve'^á'-^há. 
 
 Que le obligará (ká lá obdé-gárr-rá') 
 a guardar (á gwárr-dárr') 
 cama (ká'-má) 
 
 por algún tiempo (porr ál-góon' té"^ém'-po) 
 antes que (án'-tés ká) 
 pueda continuar (poo-á'-dá kon-té-nóo-árr') 
 su viaje (sóó vó"^á'-‘há). 
 
 I. Doctor, quisiera consultarle. Me he sentido^ tan 
 mal desde anoche que temo^ sea cosa grave. 
 
 Imperat; sient-e, sient-a, sint-amos, sent-id, sient-an. 
 
 Imperf: sent-ía, — ías, — ía, — ^íamos, — ^íais, — ^ían. 
 
 Preterite Stem; Sint (before ie and ió). 
 
 Gerund: sintiendo. 
 
 Past Def : sent-i, — iste, sintió, sentimos, — isteis, sintieron. 
 
 Imp. Subj sint-iera, — ieras, — iera, — iéramos, — ^ierais, — ieran. 
 
 Imp. Subj sint-iese, — ieses, — iese, — iésemos, — ^ieseis, — iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj: sint-iere, — ieres, — iere, — iéremos, — iereis, — ^ieren. 
 
 Future Stem. — Regular. 
 
 Fut: sentir-é, — ás, — á, — emos, — éis, — án. 
 
 Cond: sentir-ía, — ^ías, — ^ía, — oíamos, — ^íais, — ^ían. 
 
 2 Que is omitted here before the subjunctive. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; ót) room. 
 
340 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 2. What is the matter with you?^ 
 
 3. At first I fancied I only had a cold. Since this 
 morning, however, I feel violent pains in my throat 
 and it is hard for me to get my breath. (Literally: 
 At first I imagined (me figuré) that only was a cold, 
 but this morning to me commenced (= entered) pains 
 of throat and it is rendered difficult to me (se me 
 dificulta) to breathe (respirar). 
 
 4. Have you noticed any other symptoms? (Liter- 
 ally: Not have noted you some other symptoms)? 
 
 5. I feel as if all my limbs were broken and my feet 
 seem so heavy that I can scarcely drag myself along. 
 (Literally: I feel (me siento) as if (I) were broken 
 (estuviera quebrantado) and so heavy (pesados) 
 the feet that scarcely (apenas) (I) can lift them). 
 
 6. How is your head? 
 
 7. My head feels heavy, but I can not say that I have 
 
 a headache. (Literally: It (I) feel heavy, but 
 
 without pain). 
 
 8. And how is your appetite? (= Your appetite)? 
 
 9. My appetite seems to have left me entirely. I 
 really had to force myself to take a cup of coffee, 
 and I have not eaten anything to-day. (Literally: 
 It (I) have lost entirely (por completo) . Only exert- 
 ing myself (esforzándome) I obtained (logré) to 
 take a cup of coffee and nothing (I) have eaten 
 to-day). 
 
 1 Similarly we say: 
 
 What is the matter with you? ¿Qué tiene V.? 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 341 
 
 2. ¿ Qué le pasa?^ 
 
 3. Primero me figuré que solo era un resfriado, pero 
 esta mañana me entraron dolores de garganta y se 
 me dificulta respirar. 
 
 4. ¿ No ha notado V. algunos otros síntomas? 
 
 5. Me siento como si estuviera quebrantado y tan pesa- 
 dos los pies que apenas puedo levantarlos. 
 
 6. ¿ Como está su cabeza? 
 
 7. La siento pesada, pero sin dolor. 
 
 8. ¿Su apetito? 
 
 9. Lo he perdido por completo. Sólo esforzándome 
 logré tomar una taza de café y nada he comido hoy. 
 
 What ails you? 
 
 Is anything the matter with him? 
 
 What was the matter with him? 
 
 I Qué es lo que tiene V. ? 
 I Qué le duele a V. ? 
 ¿Tiene él algo? 
 
 ¿ Le pasa algo? 
 
 ¿ Qué tuvo él ? 
 
 ¿Qué le pasó? 
 
 ¿ Qué le sucedió? 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
342 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 lo. Do you cough? — I commenced to cough an hour 
 ago. (Literally: Have you cough (tos)P — (I) com- 
 menced to cough makes one hour) . 
 
 II. Did you feel any pain in coughing? (Literally: 
 Felt you (sintió V.) pain in coughing (al toser) ? 
 
 12. Yes, especially in the chest (el pecho) or rather in 
 the bronchial tubes (los tubos bronquiales). 
 
 13. Please take a seat here at the window so that I may 
 have a good light for my examination. (Literally: 
 Let us see, seat yourself near to (cerca de) the window 
 (la ventana) in order that I may be able (pueda) 
 to see well). 
 
 14. Show me (muéstreme^) your tongue. Put it out 
 (sáquela) a little farther. 
 
 ^ Mostrar, mostrando, mostrado, to show. 
 
 Pres. Ind: muestro, muestras, muestra, mostramos, 
 
 mostráis, muestran. 
 
 Pres. Subj: muestre, muestres, muestre, mostremos, 
 
 mostréis, muestren. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; óó room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 343 
 
 10. I Tiene V. tos? — Comencé a toser hace una hora. 
 
 11. I Sintió V. dolor al toser? 
 
 12. Ya lo creo, particularmente en el pecho, o mejor 
 dicho en los tubos bronquiales. 
 
 13. Veamos, siéntese cerca de la ventana para que yo 
 pueda ver bien. 
 
 14. Muéstreme^ la lengua. Sáquela^ im poco más. 
 (sá'-ká-lá). 
 
 Imperat: muestra, muestre, 
 
 mostremos, mostrad, muestren. 
 
 Reg, mostraba, mostré, mostrara, mostrase, mostrare, mostraré, 
 mostraría. 
 
 2 Sacar, to stretch outy to pull out. The change from c into q has 
 been explained before. Compare Part X. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
344 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 15. Your tongue is rather coated. When did you catch 
 cold? (Literally: You have the tongue somewhat 
 coated (sucia). When caught you (pilló V.) the 
 cold)?^ 
 
 16. The night before last, I think. I went home from 
 the theatre without overshoes or overcoat. (Lit- 
 erally: (It) seems to me night before last (antea- 
 noche) . I went from (desde) the theatre home 
 (a casa) without overshoes nor overcoat). 
 
 17. What! The night before last in that frightful storm! 
 How could you be guilty of such carelessness? (Lit- 
 erally: Go (vaya)! Night before last with that 
 great storm! Is possible such carelessness (tanto 
 abandono) ? 
 
 18. It was exceedingly hot and sultry in the theatre. 
 The house was packed; not a single seat was va- 
 cant. (Literally: (It) made a heat and humidity 
 (humedad) extreme (extremos) ^ within (dentro) 
 the theatre. The theatre was full (lleno), nor one 
 stall (una luneta) remained empty (quedó). 
 
 ^ I have taken cold^ 
 
 Last gening on coming out of 
 the theatre^ I took a fearful 
 coldj 
 
 1 am very sorry to hear it; noth- 
 ing serious I hope? 
 
 I hope not^ 
 
 The physician attends me every 
 day, but he hopes that it 
 will have no serious conse- 
 quences, 
 
 So much the better, 
 
 Have you quite recovered from 
 your illness? 
 
 He cogido im resfriado. 
 
 Anoche al salir del teatro, tome 
 un fuerte resfriado. 
 
 Lo siento mucho; espero que no 
 será nada serio. 
 
 Espero que no. 
 
 El médico me visita (atiende) 
 todos los días, pero él cree 
 que no tendrá serias con- 
 secuencias. 
 
 Tanto mejor. 
 
 I Está V. enteramente restable- 
 cido de su enfermedad? 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 345 
 
 15. Tiene V. la lengua algo sucia. ¿ Cuándo pilló V. 
 el resfriado?^ 
 
 16. Me parece que anteanoche. Fui desde el teatro a 
 casa sin zapatos de goma ni sobretodo. 
 
 17. i Vaya! i Anteanoche con aquel gran chubasco! 
 I Es posible tanto abandono? 
 
 18. Hacía un calor y humedad extremos^ dentro del 
 teatro. El teatro estaba lleno, ni ima luneta quedó. 
 
 Thanks, I have quite recovered, 
 
 I feel stronger than ever, 
 
 I have not had the pleasure of 
 seeing your wife for a long 
 time. 
 
 She is ill, 
 
 Is she laid up? — No, hut she 
 cannot leave the room. 
 
 Give my regards to her, 
 
 Gracias, estoy enteramente res- 
 tablecido. 
 
 Me siento más fuerte que nunca. 
 
 Ha tiempo ya que no tengo el 
 gusto de ver a su señora 
 de Vd. 
 
 Está mala. 
 
 ¿Ha tenido que hacer cama? — 
 No, pero no puede dejar el 
 cuarto. 
 
 Dígale mil cosas de mi parte. 
 Póngame a los pies de su 
 señora de V. 
 
 2 An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different genders 
 is put in the masculine plural: 
 
 The father and the mother are El padre y la madre son ricos. 
 rich. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
346 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 19. I was glad to get out into the fresh air. I wanted to 
 cool off on my way home. (Literally: Me (it) was 
 pleasant (grato) to go out to the air free. (I) wanted 
 to refresh myself (refrescarme) in returning to home) . 
 
 20. That was a piece of carelessness of which I really 
 did not think you capable. Why didn’t you take 
 a cab? (Literally: That was a carelessness (un 
 abandono) of which never (I) believed you capable 
 (capaz). Why not took you a cab) ? 
 
 21. I wanted to cool off as I have just told you. 
 
 22. That was imprudent. Now please lay aside your 
 coat and vest, I must examine your lungs. (Lit- 
 erally: (It) was an imprudence (una impruden- 
 cia). Come (vaya), take off (quítese) your coat (su 
 saco) and your vest (chaleco). To you (I) shall ex- 
 amine the lungs (los pulmones). 
 
 23. You frighten me, doctor. I trust my lungs are not 
 affected? (Literally: Doctor, me alarm you. (I) 
 hope that my lungs not are affected). 
 
 24. I hope not, but I have to examine them carefully. 
 Now take a deep breath. (Literally: Not it (I) 
 believe, but (it) is necessary (preciso) to make a 
 careful examination (un detenido exámen). Make 
 an inspiration deep). 
 
 25. Oh! that pains! — ^Where? Please point with your 
 finger to the spot. (Literally: How much me (it) 
 pains ! — In where? Mark (marque^ with the finger 
 (el dedo) where). 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 347 
 
 19. Me fué grato salir al aire libre. Quise refrescarme 
 al regresar a casa, (ké'-s^). 
 
 20. Eso fué un abandono de que jamás creí a Vd. capaz. 
 ¿ Por qué no tomó Vd. un coche? 
 
 21. Quise refrescarme, como le dije. 
 
 22. Fué una imprudencia. Vaya, quítese su saco y 
 su chaleco. Le examinaré los pulmones, (ke'-tá- 
 s^). 
 
 23. Doctor, me alarma V. Espero que mis pulmones 
 no estén afectados. 
 
 24. No lo creo, pero es preciso hacer un detenido exa- 
 men. Haga una inspiración profimda. 
 
 25. t Cuánto me duele! — ¿En dónde? Marque^ con el 
 dedo donde, (márr'-ké). 
 
 ^ Marcar, to point out. The use of q for c has been explained 
 before. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; 00 room. 
 
34^ The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 26. Now take another breath, but a deep one. As deep 
 as you can. (Literally: Breathe (respire) again 
 (de nuevo) but deeply, as deeply as you can). 
 
 27. And now turn around (dé media vuelta), so that I 
 can examine your back ( =the back, la espalda). 
 
 28. Does it look serious, doctor? (Literally: Doctor, is 
 thing serious) ? 
 
 29. I will tell you as soon as I have finished my ex- 
 amination. (Literally: You it (I) shall tell as soon 
 as (tan luego como) I may finish (termine) the 
 examination) . 
 
 30. How did you sleep (durmió V.^)P — Badly and rest- 
 lessly. 
 
 31. Did you feel thirsty? — ^Yes, at times I felt very 
 thirsty and drank a great deal of water. (Liter- 
 ally: You gave (it) to you thirst? — ^At times (a ratos) 
 much and (I) took much water). 
 
 ^ Dormir, durmiendo, dormido, to sleep. 
 
 Pres. Ind: duermo, duermes, duerme, dormimos, 
 
 dormis, duermen. 
 
 Pres. Sub: duerma, duermas, duerma, durmamos, 
 
 durmáis, duerman. 
 
 Imperat: duerme, duerma, durmamos, 
 
 dormid, duerman. 
 
 Imperf ; dorm-ía, — ías, — ía, — íamos, — íais, — ían. 
 
 Past! dorm-í, — iste, durmió, dorm-imos, — isteis, durmieron. 
 
 Imp. Sub :^durm-iera, — ieras, — iera, — iéramos, — ierais, — ieran. 
 
 Imp. Sub ‘.^durm-iese, — ieses, — iese, — iésemos, — ieseis, — iesen. 
 
 Fut. Sub: durm-iere, — ieres, — iere, — iéremos, — iereis, — ieren. 
 
 Future: dormir-é, — ás, — á, — emos, — éis, — án, 
 
 Cond: dormir-ía, — ^ías, — ía, — íamos, — íais, — ían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 349 
 
 26. Respire de nuevo pero profundamente, tan profun- 
 damente como pueda. 
 
 27. Dé media vuelta para que le pueda observar la es- 
 palda. 
 
 28. Doctor, ¿ Es cosa seria? 
 
 29. Se lo diré tan luego como termine el reconocimiento. 
 
 30. ¿ Qué tal durmió Vd.?^ — Mal y estuve inquieto 
 
 31. ¿Le dió^ a Vd. sed ? — A ratos, mucha, y tomé mucha 
 agua. 
 
 2 Dar, dando, dado, to give. 
 
 Free. Ind: 
 
 doy, das, 
 
 da. 
 
 damos. 
 
 dais. 
 
 dan. 
 
 Pres. Subj; 
 
 dé, dés. 
 
 dé. 
 
 demos. 
 
 deis. 
 
 den. 
 
 Imperat: 
 
 da. 
 
 dé. 
 
 demos. 
 
 dad. 
 
 den. 
 
 Imperf: 
 
 daba, dabas. 
 
 daba. 
 
 dábamos, 
 
 dabais. 
 
 daban. 
 
 Past: 
 
 di, diste. 
 
 dió. 
 
 dimos. 
 
 disteis. 
 
 dieron. 
 
 Imp. Subj*.! 
 
 diera, dieras. 
 
 diera. 
 
 diéramos. 
 
 dierais. 
 
 dieran. 
 
 Imp. Subj:2 
 
 diese, dieses. 
 
 diese. 
 
 diésemos. 
 
 dieseis. 
 
 diesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj; 
 
 diere, dieres. 
 
 diere. 
 
 diéremos. 
 
 diereis. 
 
 dieren. 
 
 Future : 
 
 dar-é, — ás. 
 
 — á. 
 
 — emos. 
 
 — éis. 
 
 — án. 
 
 Cond: 
 
 dar-ía, — ías. 
 
 — ía. 
 
 — íamos. 
 
 — íais. 
 
 -^ían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
350 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 32. Allow me to feel your pulse. Your pulse is changed. 
 You are feverish. (Literally: Allow (that) you (I) 
 may take the pulse (el pulso). Yoxir pulse is altered. 
 Are you with fever (fiebre). 
 
 33. Now take this thermometer for a few minutes in 
 your mouth. I must know how your temperature 
 is. (Literally: Put you (póngase) this thermometer 
 in the mouth (la boca) for a moment (un rato). (I) 
 go to see how is (sigue) your temperature). 
 
 34. You- have quite an attack of bronchitis. You must 
 go home at once and get to bed. Did you walk 
 here? (Literally: Have you the bronchial tubes 
 (los bronquios) rather affected (afectados). Go you 
 at once to home (a casa) and lie down (acuéstese). 
 Came you afoot) ? 
 
 35. No, I came in a cab. — Not in an open one, I trust? 
 — Oh no, it was closed tightly. (Literally: (I) came 
 in coach. — But not open? — No, tightly (bien) closed). 
 
 1 Venir, viniendo, venido, to come. 
 
 Pres. Ind: vengo, vienes, viene, venimos, venís, vienen. 
 
 Pres. Subj: venga, vengas, venga, vengamos, vengáis, vengan. 
 
 Imperat: ven, venga, vengamos, venid, vengan, 
 
 Imperf: ven-ía, — ías, — ía, — íamos, — íais, — ^ían. 
 
 Past: vine, viniste, vino, vin- irnos, — ísteis, — ^ieron. 
 
 Imp. Subj:^ vin-iera, — ieras, — iera, iéramos, — ierais, — ieran. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; O note; 00 room. 
 
The S'^anisih Language, 
 
 351 
 
 32. Permíta le tome el pulso. Su pulso está alterado. 
 Esta V. con fiebre, (fe^a'-bré). 
 
 33. Póngase este termómetro en la boca por un rato. 
 Voy a ver como sigue su temperatura. 
 
 34. Tiene V. los bronquios bastante afectados. Váyase 
 al punto a casa y acuéstese. ¿ Vino^ Vd. a pie? 
 
 35. Vine en coche. — Pero, ¿ no abierto? — No; bien 
 cerrado. 
 
 Imp. Subj: 
 
 2 vin-iese, 
 
 — ^ieses, 
 
 — ^iese, 
 
 — ^iésemoSj 
 
 , — ieseis, 
 
 — ^iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj: 
 
 vin-iere, 
 
 — ieres, 
 
 — iere, 
 
 — iéremoSj 
 
 , — iereis, 
 
 — ieren. 
 
 
 
 Future Stem.— 
 
 -Vendr. 
 
 
 
 Future: 
 
 vendr-é, 
 
 — ás, 
 
 -á, 
 
 — emos, 
 
 — éis, 
 
 — án, 
 
 Cond: 
 
 vendr-ía, 
 
 — ías, 
 
 — ^ía, 
 
 — oíamos, 
 
 — ^íais, 
 
 — ían. 
 
 á 
 
 far; a pale; e eve; 
 
 é there; ó note; 
 
 óó room. 
 
 
352 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 36. That was sensible. Avoid any draught or cold, 
 I shall prescribe some medicine for you. You have 
 to take it punctually every two hours. (Literally: 
 (It) was sensible (acertado). Avoid (huya) of the 
 air and of the cold. To you (I) shall prescribe (rece- 
 taré) something. It (you) will take every (cada) 
 two hours without fail (sin falta). 
 
 37. Do not stop on your way, but drive home at once. 
 (Literally: Not stop yourself (se detenga) on the 
 way, go without delay to your home). 
 
 38. Have I to stay in bed? (Literally: Shall (I) keep 
 bed)? 
 
 39. I told you already that you will have to go to bed 
 at once. Without any doubt you will be obliged 
 to keep your room for some days, for bronchitis 
 in our climate is not to be trifled with. (Liter- 
 ally: Already you (I) told that (you) put your- 
 self (se meta) in the bed on arriving (al llegar). 
 Without doubt (sin duda) that not will go out you 
 from your room for some days; in our climate the 
 bronchitis not is thing simple). 
 
 40. Then I am seriously ill? (Literally: Am (I) then 
 of seriousness (gravedad) ? 
 
 41. Not dangerously so, but you will have to stay in 
 bed for a week at least. (Literally: Not offers dan- 
 ger (peligro), but will have you to (que tendrá que) 
 keep bed for a week at leavSt (al menos). 
 
 Huir, huyendo, huido, to flee. 
 Pres. Ind: huyo, huyes, huye. 
 
 huimos, 
 
 huís. 
 
 huyen. 
 
 Pres. Sub: huya. 
 
 huyas. 
 
 huya. 
 
 huyamos. 
 
 huyáis, 
 
 huyan. 
 
 Imperat: — 
 
 huye. 
 
 huya. 
 
 huyamos, 
 
 huid. 
 
 huyan. 
 
 Imp erf : hu-ia, 
 
 — ías, 
 
 — ía, 
 
 — íamos. 
 
 — íais. 
 
 — ían. 
 
 Past: hu-i, 
 
 — iste, 
 
 —yo, 
 
 — irnos. 
 
 — isteis, 
 
 — oyeron. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 353 
 
 36. Estuvo acertado. Huya^ del aire y del frío. Le 
 recetaré algo. Lo tomará cada dos horas sin falta. 
 
 37. No se detenga en el camino, váyase sin demora a 
 su casa. 
 
 38. ¿ Guardaré cama? 
 
 39. Ya le dije que se meta en la cama al llegar. Sin 
 duda que no saldrá V. de su cuarto por algimos 
 días; en nuestro clima la bronquitis no es cosa sencilla. 
 
 40. ¿ Estoy pues de gravedad? 
 
 41. No ofrece peligro, pero tendrá que guardar cama 
 por una semana al menos. 
 
 Imp. Subj hu-yera, — oyeras, — ^yera, — oyéramos, — oyerais, — oyeran. 
 
 Imp. Subj hu-yese, — oyeses, — ^yese, — oyésemos, — oyeseis, — oyesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj: hu-yere, — ayeres, — ^yere, — oyéremos, — oyereis, — oyeren. 
 
 Future: huir-é, — ás, — á, — emos, — éis, — án. 
 
 Cond: huir-ía, — ías, — ía, — íamos, — íais, — ían. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 5 note; 6 b room. 
 
354 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 42. And when do you think I can continue my jour- 
 ney? (Literally: When believe you that I shall be 
 able (I) to follow (seguir) my journey)? 
 
 43. That is impossible to tell. In the first place we 
 must get rid of your fever. At any rate you must 
 be prepared to spend a week here. (Literally: Who 
 knows ! Above all (antetodo) it is necessary to 
 get rid (quitar) the fever. However it may be (como 
 quiera que sea) prepare yourself (prepárese) to 
 pass here a week). 
 
 44. And when will you call on me? (Literally: When 
 will return you to see me) ? 
 
 45. It is now a quarter to twelve. My office hours 
 last till two. After that I have three patients to 
 visit, who are dangerously ill. (Literally: Are the 
 twelve less quarter. My hours of consultation 
 last (duran) till the two. Immediately (after) (I) 
 visit three patients (clientes) of gravity). 
 
 46. You seem to be very busy? — Unfortunately so; 
 there is much sickness in town. (Literally: Have 
 you much what to do (que hacer)? Unfortunately 
 (por desgracia); (we) have many sicknesses). 
 
 47. And when may I expect you? (Literally: When 
 come (you) then)? 
 
 1 Seguir, siguiendo, seguido, to follow. 
 
 Pres. Ind: sigo, sigues, sigue, seguimos, seguís, siguen. 
 
 Pres. Sub : siga, sigas, siga, sigamos, sigáis, sigan. 
 
 Imperat: — ^ sigue, siga, sigamos, seguid, sigan. 
 
 Imperf: segu-ía, — ías, — ía, — íamos, — íais, — ían. 
 
 Past: segu-í, — iste, siguió, segu-imos, — ^isteis, siguieron. 
 
 Imp. Sub : ^ sigu-iera, — ieras, — iera, — iéramos, — ierais, — ieran. 
 
 Imp. Sub : ^ sigu-iese, — ieses, — iese, — iésemos, — ieseis, — iesen. 
 
 Fut. Sub: sigu-iere, — ieres, — iere, — iéremos, — iereis, — ieren. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 355 
 
 42. ¿ Cuándo cree V. que podré seguir^ mi viaje? 
 
 43. i Quién sabe! Antetodo hay que quitar la fiebre. 
 Como quiera que sea, prepárese a pasar aquí una 
 semana, (ké-tárr') 
 
 44. ¿ Cuándo volverá^ V. a verme? 
 
 45. Son las doce menos cuarto. Mis horas de consulta 
 duran hasta las dos. Luego visito a tres clientes 
 de gravedad, (kle-én'-tés). 
 
 46. ¿ Tiene V. muchd que hacer? — Por desgracia; tene- 
 mos muchas enfermedades, (dés-grá'-the T" á) . 
 
 47. ¿ Cuándo viene, pues? 
 
 Future: seguir-é, — ás, — á, — emos, — éis, — án. 
 
 Cond: seguir-ía, — ías, — ía, — íamos, — íais, — ían. 
 
 Verbs of this class ending in guir, lose the u before a and 0. 
 2 Volver, volviendo, vuelto, to return. 
 
 Pres. Ind: vuelvo, vuelves, vuelve, volvemos, volvéis, vuelven. 
 
 Pres. Sub : vuelva, vuelvas, vuelva, volvamos, volváis, vuelvan. 
 
 Imperat: vuelve, vuelva, volvamos, volved, vuelvan. 
 
 Reg: volvía, volví, volviera, volviese, volviere, volveré, volvería. 
 
 á fs.r; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 356 
 
 48. I will call on you between four and five without 
 fail. In the meanwhile take the medicine I pre- 
 scribed for you; a tablespoonful every two hours. 
 (Literally: (I) will call (volveré) without fail from 
 four to five. In the meanwhile (entretanto) keep 
 on (siga) with the medicine prescribed (recetada), 
 a tablespoon (una cucharada) every (cada) two 
 hours). 
 
 49. Keep the proper temperature in your room. You 
 had better have a fire. (Literally: Keep (conserve) 
 the same temperature in yotir room. Better (it) 
 is to light (encender) fire (fuego). 
 
 50. Keep yourself warm and avoid catching cold. I 
 will be with you between four and five. Good- 
 bye! I trust you soon will be better. (Literally: 
 Protect yourself and avoid the cold. (I) shall return 
 from four to five. That to you may go well and 
 that yourself may restore you soon) ! 
 
 á far; a pale; 6 eve; é there; 0 note; 6b room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 357 
 
 j.8. Volveré sin falta de cuatro a cinco. Entretanto 
 siga con la medicina recetada, tma cucharada cada 
 dos horas, (se'-gá). 
 
 \g. Conserve la misma temperatura en su cuarto. Mejor 
 es encender fuego. 
 
 30. Abrigúese y evite el frío. Volveré de cuatro a cinco. 
 
 ¡Que le vaya bien y que se restablezca V. pronto! 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
358 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 ANÉCDOTAS. 
 
 Continuando las disputas entre Francisco primero, 
 rey de Francia, y Enrique octavo, rey de Inglaterra,^ 
 resolvió éste^ de enviar al primero un embajador^ por- 
 tador de palabras fieras y amenazas;^ para lo cual hizo 
 elección del obispo^ Bonner en quien tenía gran con- 
 fianza. Este obispo le dijo que ponía su vida en gran 
 peligro,® si daba tales recados^ a un rey tan altivo^ como 
 Francisco primero. No temas,”® le dijo el rey. Si 
 el rey de Francia hiciese^® tal, yo haría caer muchas 
 cabezas de franceses que están aquí.” Pero cuál de 
 esas cabezas me vendría^^ tan bien sobre los hombros^^ 
 como ésta? ” le replicó poniendo el dedo a la suya. 
 
 ^ England. 2 The latter. ® Ambassador. ^ Threatening. ^ Bishop. 
 ® Danger. ^ Messages. * Haughty. ® Imperative of temer ^ to fear. 
 From hacer. Me vendría^ would become me. ^2 Shoulders. 
 
 á far; á pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 359 
 
 Luis doce, rey de Francia, cuando no era sino duque ^ 
 de Orleans, había padecido^ muchos agravios^ de dos 
 personas que habían sido favoritos en el reinado^ prece- 
 dente. Uno de sus allegados^ procuraba® inducirlo a 
 que les mostrase resentimiento. No,’’ respondió Su 
 Majestad, que indigno es de un rey de Francia tomar 
 parte en la venganza del duque de Orleans.” 
 
 La reina Isabel observando el donaire de un español 
 en un torneo,^ le suplicó un día que le dijese® el nombre 
 de su dama. El español se resistió algún tiempo. En 
 fin, cediendo a la curiosidad de Su Majestad, prometió 
 enviarle el retrato^ de la dama. Al día siguiente hizo 
 presentar a Su Majestad un paquetillo,^® donde la reina, 
 no^^ hallando sino^^ un espejito,^^ quedo sonrojada al 
 punto. 
 
 1 Duke. 2 Padecer, to suffer. ^ Injuries. ^ Reign. ® Followers. 
 6 Procurar, to try. ^ Tournament. ® From decir. ® Picture. Little 
 package, n * * * sino, only. ^2 Little mirror. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
36o 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 El caballero^ Tomás Morus,^ famoso canciller de Ingla- 
 terra, puesto^ en prisión por Enrique^ octavo, dejó crecer 
 sus cabellos® y su barba, y viniendo® un barbero para 
 cortarlos*^ y afeitarle,® Amigo,’’ le dijo, el rey y yo 
 discutimos sobre mi cabeza; y yo no quiero hacer el 
 menor gasto en este pleito,® sin saber antes quien de los 
 dos ha^® de disponer de ella.” 
 
 Los cortesanos del rey Felipe^^ le aconsejaban que 
 se vengase de un hombre que había hablado mal de él. 
 ‘‘Antes es menester saber, si yo no le he dado razón,’' 
 dijo Felipe, y, habiéndose averiguado que el tal hom- 
 bre jamás había recibido cosa alguna, le envió ricos 
 presentes. Supo el rey poco después que el mismo le 
 llenaba de alabanzas. “ Mirad pues,” dijo a los corte- 
 sanos,^2 “ que yo sé mejor que vosotros apaciguar^® 
 una lengua mala.” 
 
 ^ Knight (Sir). 2 Thomas More, ^ From poner, ^ Henry. ® Hair. 
 * From venir, ’ Cut them. ® Shave him. ® Pleito, law-suit, dispute. 
 Is to. Philip. ^ Courtiers. Silence. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 361 
 
 PROVERBIOS. 
 
 Más^ vale tarde que nunca. 
 
 El que calla, 2 otorga.^ 
 
 El que tarde llega, caldo^ bebe. 
 
 La necesidad carece^ de ley. 
 
 Lo que no se puede remediar se ha de aguantar.® 
 
 Más vale un pajaro en la mano que ciento volando. 
 
 Al hierro caliente, batir^ de repente.® 
 
 Amor con amor se paga.® 
 
 Cada oveja^® con su pareja.^^ 
 i Donde fuego se hace, htuno sale. 
 
 Donde hay gana^^ hay maña.^® 
 
 De la mano a la^^ boca desaparece la sopa. 
 
 I Piedra movediza no coje musgo.^® 
 
 * Salir de llamas^® y caer en brasas.^^ 
 
 I No es todo oro lo que reluce. 
 
 I Sobre gustó no hay disputa. 
 
 A quien madruga^® Dios ayuda. 
 
 Donde^® fueres, haz^ como vieres. 
 
 La caridad bien ordenada empieza^^ por uno mismo. 
 
 Más vale buen callar que mal hablar. 
 
 Obra de común,^^ obra de ningún. 
 
 A lo hecho, pecho.^ 
 
 1 Más valer — to be worth more, to be better than. ^ Callar — ^to 
 be silent. ® Consents. “First come, first served.” ® Carecer de — 
 lack. “Necessity knows no law.” ® Aguantar — endure. Batir ^ 
 
 Infinitive instead of Imperative. ® At once. ® Is paid. “One 
 good turn deserves another.” Oveja — ewe. Mate. p)esire 
 
 . or will. Dexterity, “way.” From hand to mouth. ^ There’s 
 
 many a slip, etc.” Moss. Flames. Live coals. Madrugar 
 — to get up early. Donde fueres — wherever you may be. 
 
 ' 20 Imp. of hacer f to do. “When at Rome, do as the Romans do.” 
 21 Empieza por — ^begins with. 22 Everybody. *What cannot be 
 cured must be endured.” 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
3Ó2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 LA INDIA. 
 
 / La India! i Hay en esta palabra algo de grande y 
 de venerable, de vago y de misterioso, aun después 
 de tantos siglos! / La India, la más antigua porción 
 civilizada del antiguo mundo, cuna de las creencias^ 
 religiosas que, en su unidad, su simplicidad y su gran- 
 deza primitivas, parece ha abrazado, como una vasta 
 fórmula, todos los cultos que después profesaron los 
 pueblos ) la I ndia, el teatro de los acontecimientos his- 
 tóricos más inesperados, más grandes, más maravillo- 
 sos; la India, que han visitado a su vez los dioses, los 
 héroes, los filósofos, los hombres ávidos de ciencia y 
 los especuladores^ más atrevidos en todos los siglos; 
 la India, cuya conquista han soñado, intentado o llevado 
 a cabo o en parte Sesostris, Darío, Alejandro, Gen- 
 giskán,» Timur, Báber, Nader-Shas,^ Napoleón! Su 
 pasado y su porvenir interesan en el más alto grado-^ 
 a la humanidad entera, porque el pasado de la India 
 encierra en sus profimdidades algunos de los principales 
 rasgos de la historia del mundo, y su porvenir se liga 
 de una manera cada vez más íntima a la suerte de las 
 grandes naciones europeas. — De Jancigny. 
 
 ‘Creencia, belief. = Especulador, speculator. ^ Jenghiz- Khan. 
 
 ^ Nadir Shah, ^ Grado, degree. 
 
 á far; a pale; 0 eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 363 
 
 FÁBULA. 
 
 Las Dos Zorras.^ 
 
 Una noche entraron dos zorras furtivamente en un 
 gallinero,^ mataron el gallo, ^ las gallinas,^ y los pollos.® 
 Después de esta matanza,® empezaron^ a devorar su 
 presa.^ Una que era joven y sin reflexión, propuso® comer- 
 los todos de una vez. La otra, vieja y codiciosa^®, quería 
 ahorrar^^ para otro día. ‘‘Hija,’’ dijo la vieja, “la expe- 
 riencia me hizo^^ sabia; en mi tiempo he visto mucho mun- 
 do. No consumamos a la vez pródigamente todo nuestro 
 caudal;^® tuvimos buen suceso, y debemos cuidar^^ de no 
 mal gastarlo.”^® 
 
 Replicó la joven Estoy resuelta a recrearme mien- 
 tras lo tengo por delante, y saciar mi apetito por toda 
 una semana; por lo^® que toca a venir aquí mañana, es 
 cuento eso es exponemos. Mañana vendrá aquí el 
 amo,^® y por vengar la muerte de sus pollos, nos dará^® 
 con una tranca^® en la cabeza.” 
 
 Después de esta réplica, cada una de ellas obre^^ como 
 le parece más propio. La joven come hasta que revienta,^^ 
 sin poder apenas arrastrarse^® a su cueva^^ antes de morir. 
 La vieja que le pareció mucho más pmdente gobernar 
 su apetito, y ser fmgal, fué el día siguiente al gallinero, 
 y la mató el labrador. 
 
 Así cada edad tiene su vicio favorito: los jóvenes 
 son fogosos^® e insaciables en sus placeres; y los viejos 
 incorregibles en su avaricia. 
 
 ^ Foxes. 2 Hen-coop. ^ Cock. ^ Hen. ® Chicken. ® Slaughter. 
 ^ Begun. ® Prey. ^ From proponer, Miserly. Save. From 
 
 hacer. Stock. Take care to. To spend it. ^^ Por lo que 
 
 toca a venir y as for coming. Nonsense. Master. Nos dara 
 
 cony he will give us. p^r, stick. 21 Acts. 22 Reventary to burst. 
 23 To drag. 24 Den. 25 Impetuous. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
3^4 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 REFLEXIONES MORALES. 
 
 El temor de la justicia divina es el principio que hizo 
 nacer en la imaginación de varios libertinos^ las 
 horribles ideas filosóficas, ya de negari a Dios la exis- 
 tencia, ya de despojar^ de su inmortalidad al alma.^ 
 Toda la desdicha^ de estos miserables viene de que, 
 lejos de contemplar al Omnipotente como a un padre 
 cariñoso,® sólo se figuran en él un juez severo; y para 
 sacudiri de sí el temor que esta calidad les inspira, force- 
 jan® a persuadirse, o con la primera de estas dos 
 quimeras,^ que no hay Dios que los castigue, o con la 
 segunda, que sólo pueden temer de él un castigo leve 
 y de corta duración, como lo es cualquiera pena tem- 
 poral. Pero ¿que logran con esto? Puntualmente lo 
 que el reo,^® que huyendo de la justicia, se arroja^^ por 
 un despeñadero,^ y por evitar un suplicio^® con- 
 tingente,^^ abraza^® una muerte indubitable. Por el 
 precipicio mayor de todos, que es el de la impiedad, 
 procuran huir^® de la justicia divina. Y aún los que 
 niegan a Dios la existencia, no tanto aspiran a huir de 
 la justicia divina, como que la justicia divina huya de 
 ellos, pretendiendo que el soberano juez se desaparezca 
 de aquel augusto trono, en que los ha^^ de sentenciar. 
 
 — FeijÓo. 
 
 ^ Free-thinkers. ^ Deny. ® Despoil. ^ Soul. ® Unhappiness. 
 ® Affectionate. ^ Shake off. ^ Try to. ® Fancies. Culprit. 
 
 Arrojarse, to throw one’s self. Cliff. Punishment. Near 
 at hand. Embrace. Flee from. Is to. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language, 365 
 
 REFLEXIONES MORALES H. 
 
 El ambicioso^ es un esclavo^ de todo^ el mundo; del 
 príncipe, porque conceda el empleo;^ del valido,^ 
 porque interceda; de los demás porque no estorben.® 
 Tiene el alma y el cuerpo en continuo movimiento, 
 porque es menesterí no perder instante. A todos 
 teme, porque ninguno hay que con una acusación no 
 pueda desvanecer® toda su solicitud, i O cuánto forceja 
 con su semblante^ por que muestre^® agrado^^ a los mis- 
 mos a quienes profesa mortal odio! Cuánto trabajo 
 le cuesta^^ reprimir todas aquellas inclinaciones viciosas 
 que pueden dificultar sus medras!^® De la pasión do-, 
 minante son víctimas todas las demás pasiones; y el vicio 
 de la ambición, como tirano dueño, sobre atormentarle 
 por sí mismo, le prohíbe todos aquellos gustos a que 
 le lleva el deseo. Ve al que va a la comedia, al que logra 
 el paseo honesto, al que asiste al banquete, al que goza 
 el sarao; todo lo ve y lo envidia pero los apetitos están 
 en él, atmque furiosos, aprisionados como los vientos en 
 la cárcel^® de Eolo.^® 
 
 — ^PeijÓo. 
 
 ^ Ambitious man. ^ Slave. * Todo el mundo, everybody. ^ Em- 
 ployment. ® Powerful man. ® Disturb. ^ Necessary. ® Undo, 
 ® Countenance. From mostrar, Liking. Prom costar. 
 Progress. Envidiar, to envy. Cave. Aeolus. 
 
 á far; a pale; 5 eve; é there; o note; 00 room. 
 
366 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 ¡EXCELSIOR! 
 
 I Por qué los corazones miserables, 
 
 Por qué las almas^ viles, 
 
 En los fieros^ combates de la vida 
 Ni luchan^ ni resisten? 
 
 El espíritu^ humano es más constante 
 Cuanto^ más se levanta: 
 
 Dios puso® el fango^ en la llanura,^ y puso® 
 
 La roca en la montaña. 
 
 La blanca nieve® que en los hondos^® valles 
 Derrítese^^ ligera, 
 
 En las altivas cumbres^^ permanece 
 Inmutable y eterna. 
 
 — Gaspar Nuñez de Arce. 
 
 1 Alma, soul. 2 fiero, fierce. ^ fuchar, to struggle. * Espíritu, 
 spirit. ® Cuanto más, the more. ® Puso, from poner, ^ Mud. 
 ® Plain. ^ Snow. Hondo, deep. Derretirse, to melt. ^2 Lightly. 
 Peaks. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; ó note; 00 room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 REFLEXIONES MORALES III. 
 
 367 
 
 La modestia es la prenda^ más amable* de una don- 
 •ella,® aún en cotejo^ de la hermosura.® Esta, no hay 
 luda, halaga® y solicita^ mucho más la pasión del hom- 
 bre, pero aquella se granjea su mayor estimación y 
 precio. La pasión nace® de los atractivos que le 
 uacen amar aquello que la provoca: mas® el aprecio y 
 stimación que infunde el decoro de la modestia, pro- 
 eden del respeto que adorna en la exterior compostura 
 ie un rostro la belleza interior del alma, a quien aquella 
 jetrata.“ Aquella misma es también seguro indicio de 
 .i dulzura^i de genio, y de la suavidad del carácter 
 j. quien sirve de alma, de la cual espera su mayor satis- 
 jacción y dicha'® en el casamiento'^ el hombre que pre- 
 ende poseerla. La hermosura es don'® accidental de la 
 laturaleza, que entre pocos la reparte;'® pero la her- 
 mosura interior del alma, la de la virtud'^ sola, a cual- 
 uiera'® que desea conseguirla. 
 
 > Gift. 2 Lovable. ’ Girl. * Comparison. ® Beauty. * Cajoles. 
 Wins to itself, s jg born of. » But. to picture, to 
 
 oage. “ Sweetness. 12 Temperament. “ Happiness. “ Marriage. 
 1 Gift. Repartir, to distribute. ” Virtue, Before a cualquiera, 
 understand: la reparte. 
 
 n 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; do room. 
 
368 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 LA TUMBA Y LA ROSA. 
 
 {Traducción libre de Victor Hugo). 
 
 Dice la Tumba^ a la Rosa: 
 
 ¿ Qué haces tú, preciada flor, 
 
 Del llanto^ que el alba^ hermosa 
 Vierte en tu cáliz^ de amor? 
 
 Y la Rosa le responde: 
 
 ¿ Qué haces, di,^ Tumba sombría, 
 
 De lo que tu seno® esconde"^ 
 
 Y devora® cada día? 
 
 Yo perfumes doy^ al suelo^® 
 
 Con el llanto matinal. 
 
 ¡ Y yo im alma mando al délo, 
 
 De cada cuerpo mortal! 
 
 — Gertrudis Gómez de Avellaneda. 
 
 ^ Tomb. 2 Tears. ® Dawn. ^ Chalice. ® Tell me. 
 ’ Esconder, to hide. ® Devorar, to devour. ® Obj. of dar. 
 
 • Bosom. 
 Ground. 
 
 á far; a pale; e eve; é there; 0 note; oo room. 
 
The Spanish Language. 369 
 
 LETRILLA QUE LLEVABA POR REGISTRO^ EN SU 
 BREVIARIO. — Santa Teresa de Jesús. 
 
 Nada te turbe 
 Nada te espante; 
 
 Todo se pasa; 
 
 Dios no se muda,^ 
 
 La paciencia todo lo alcanza.^ 
 
 Quien a Dios tiene. 
 
 Nada le falta. 
 
 Solo Dios basta.^ 
 
 ^ Book-mark. 2 Turbar, to disturb. * Mudarse, to change. 
 ^ Alcanzar, to attain. ® Bastar, to suffice. 
 
370 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 COLLOQUIAL EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 ¿No puede V. ir más li- 
 gero? Estoy muy de 
 prisa. 
 
 Deseo guardar esto como 
 recuerdo. 
 
 ¿Está ocupado este asien- 
 to? 
 
 ¿ Cómo puedo llegar al 
 otro lado sin pasar el 
 puente? 
 
 He estado otra vez esta 
 mañana en la parte 
 baja de la iciudad. 
 
 Alto, todavia me corres- 
 ponden 20 centavos. 
 Di a V. medio dólar 
 y V. sólo me ha 
 devuelto diez centa- 
 vos. 
 
 ¿Hombre, de donde viene? 
 
 ¿ Hombre, puede V. de- 
 cirme qué es esto? 
 
 Can’t you go any faster? 
 I am in a terrible 
 hurry. 
 
 I want this for a souvenir. 
 
 Is this seat taken? 
 
 How can I get across 
 without using (cross- 
 ing) the bridge? 
 
 I have been downtown 
 again this morning. 
 
 Here, there are 20 cents 
 coming to me yet. I 
 gave you a half-dollar 
 and you have given 
 me only 10 cents 
 back. 
 
 vSay, where have you 
 been? 
 
 Say, can you tell me what 
 this is? 
 
The Spanish Language 
 
 371 
 
 VOCABULARIO 
 Comiendo y Bebiendo 
 
 Tráigame la carta (lista). 
 
 Quiero huevos frescos, 
 una taza de café, 
 mantequilla y tosta- 
 das. 
 
 Alcánceme la pimienta y 
 la mostaza. 
 
 Tráiganos dos cigarros 
 habanos. 
 
 ¿ Que tiene V. para cenas? 
 
 Basta eso; pero denos V. 
 buen vino y frutas. 
 
 Déme V. un poco de pan. 
 
 Déme cerveza fuerte. 
 
 Muchacho, danos pan 
 caliente. 
 
 Muchacho, da de beber al 
 señor. 
 
 Veamos, ahora, ¿ que nos 
 dará V. de cenar? 
 
 He comido muy bien. 
 
 Y yo también. 
 
 Probemos el vino. 
 
 Destape esa botella. 
 
 No tengo tirabuzón. 
 
 ¿ Que quiere Vd. más, una 
 ala o una pierna? 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Eating and Drinking. 
 
 Bring me the bill of fare. 
 
 I want fresh eggs, a cup 
 of coffee, butter and 
 toast. 
 
 Reach me the pepper and 
 the mustard. 
 
 Bring us two Havana ci- 
 gars. 
 
 What have you for sup- 
 per? 
 
 That is enough; but give 
 us some good wine 
 and some fruit. 
 
 Give me a little bread. 
 
 Give me some strong 
 beer. 
 
 Boy, give us new bread. 
 
 Boy, give the gentleman 
 some drink. 
 
 Now let us see, what will 
 you give us for sup- 
 per? 
 
 I have dined very well. 
 
 So have I. 
 
 Let us taste the wine. 
 
 Uncork that bottle. 
 
 I have no corkscrew. 
 
 Which do you like best, a 
 wing or a leg? 
 
372 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Para mi es todo uno. 
 
 El hambre es la mejor 
 salsa. 
 
 Vamos, señor, por la 
 salud del Presidente. 
 
 Le corresponderé con mucho 
 gusto. 
 
 El vino es muy exquisito. 
 
 I Sabe V. trinchar? 
 
 DEL COMER Y 
 BEBER. 
 
 La comida. 
 
 La cena. 
 
 El convidado. 
 
 El convite. 
 
 El pastel. 
 
 El jarabe. 
 
 La bebida. 
 
 El aguardiente. 
 
 La cerveza. 
 
 La sidra. 
 
 La limonada. 
 
 El cuarto. 
 
 ¿ Tiene V. un cuarto de 
 alquiler? (ál-ke-lérr'). 
 
 I Cuál es el precio de este 
 cuarto? 
 
 No quiero un cuarto os- 
 curo ni húmedo. 
 
 El cuarto del frente (frén'- 
 té). - 
 
 It is all one to me. 
 
 Hunger is the best sauce. 
 
 Come, sir, to the health of 
 the President. 
 
 I will pledge you with a 
 great deal of pleas- 
 ure. 
 
 The wine is very exquisite. 
 Can you carve? 
 
 OF EATING AND 
 DRINKING. 
 
 dinner. 
 
 supper. 
 
 guest. 
 
 feast. 
 
 pie, pastry. 
 
 syrup. 
 
 drink. 
 
 brandy. 
 
 beer. 
 
 cider. 
 
 lemonade. 
 
 The Room. 
 
 Have you a room to let? 
 
 What is the price of this 
 room? 
 
 I don’t want a dark or 
 damp room. 
 
 The front-room. 
 
The, Spanish Language. 
 
 El cuarto del fondo (fon'- 
 do). 
 
 ¿ Da este cuarto al frente 
 o al fondo? 
 
 Este cuarto da al fondo, 
 pero puedo darle uno 
 del frente si lo desea 
 
 V. 
 
 Prefiero un cuarto con 
 vista al patio (vés'- 
 tá pá'-té"^o). 
 
 Quiero un cuarto con vista 
 a la calle (kál'-yé). 
 
 El piso (pe'-s5). 
 
 ¿ En qué piso está este 
 cuarto? 
 
 Déme dos cuartos que se 
 comuniquen. 
 
 Déjeme V. ver el cuarto. 
 
 Enséñeme V. sus mejores 
 cuartos (má-^hó'- 
 rés). 
 
 Tomaré este cuarto. 
 
 La puerta. 
 
 Esta puerta no cierra. 
 
 ¿ A dónde da esta 
 
 puerta? 
 
 Esta puerta comunica con 
 la sala. 
 
 La ventana. 
 
 373 
 
 The rear-room. 
 
 Does this room lie to the 
 front or to the rear? 
 
 This room lies to the rear, 
 but I can give you a 
 front-room if you 
 wish. 
 
 I prefer a room that looks 
 on the court. 
 
 I want a room that looks 
 on the street. 
 
 The floor; the story. 
 
 On which floor is this 
 room located? 
 
 Give me two adjoining 
 rooms (which com- 
 municate). 
 
 Please let me see the 
 room. 
 
 Show me your best 
 rooms. 
 
 I will take this room. 
 
 The Doofo 
 
 This door will not shut. 
 
 Where does this door 
 lead to? 
 
 This door communicates 
 with the sitting 
 room. 
 
 The window. 
 
374 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Con una ventana; con dos 
 ventanas. 
 
 Déme V. un cuarto con dos 
 ventanas; cuartos con 
 una ventana son muy 
 oscuros. 
 
 El piso, (de un cuarto). 
 
 La alfombra. 
 
 Un tapete. \ 
 
 Una estera. / 
 
 Nosotros no tenemos más 
 que esteras junto a las 
 camas. 
 
 Es raro encontrar alfom- 
 bras que cubran todo 
 el suelo en Méjico, 
 
 La cama. 
 
 Limpio. 
 
 Fresco. 
 
 La frazada. 
 
 El travesero. 
 
 Un colchón. 
 
 Un colchón de muelle. 
 
 Una sábana. 
 
 Haga poner sábanas lim- 
 pias. 
 
 Las sábanas no están bien 
 limpias. 
 
 Esta frazada no me abriga, 
 déme V. otra. 
 
 Me gusta que la cabeza 
 esté alta; déme otra 
 almohada. 
 
 With one window; with 
 two windows. 
 
 Give me a room with two 
 windows, rooms with 
 one window are too 
 dark. 
 
 The floor (of a room). 
 
 The carpet. 
 
 A bed-carpet; a mat. 
 
 We have only mats before 
 the beds. 
 
 One rarely finds carpets 
 covering the whole 
 room in Mexico. 
 
 The Bed. 
 
 Clean. 
 
 Fresh. 
 
 The blanket. 
 
 The bolster. 
 
 A mattress. 
 
 A spring-mattress. 
 
 A sheet. 
 
 Have clean sheets put 
 on. 
 
 The sheets are not quite 
 clean. 
 
 This blanket does not keep 
 me warm ; give me 
 another. 
 
 I like my head to be high; 
 give me another pil- 
 low. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 375 
 
 Dormir. 
 
 I Reposó V. bien? 1 
 
 ¿ Durmió V. bien? J 
 
 Generalmente duermo muy 
 bien, pero anoche dor- 
 mí mal. 
 
 Hacer la cama. 
 
 Sírvase hacer mi cama. 
 
 Estoy muy cansado y 
 deseo ir a la cama 
 ahora mismo. 
 
 I A qué hora se acostó? 
 
 Él se acostó a las diez. 
 
 Yo no he cerrado ojos en 
 toda la noche. 
 
 Llamar. 
 
 Llámeme temprano, quiero 
 salir por el primer 
 tren. 
 
 Quiero descansar toda la 
 noche. No permita a 
 ninguno que me per- 
 turbe. 
 
 La Mesa. 
 
 El mantel. 
 
 La silla. 
 
 El guardaropa. 
 
 La cómoda. 
 
 El espejo. 
 
 El sofa. 
 
 La lámpara. 
 
 To Sleep. 
 
 Did you rest well? 
 
 Generally I sleep very 
 well, but last night I 
 slept badly. 
 
 To make the bed. 
 
 Pray fix my bed. 
 
 I am very tired and wish 
 to go to bed at once. 
 
 At what time did he go to 
 bed? 
 
 He went to bed at ten. 
 
 I have not slept a wink 
 the whole night. 
 
 To Call; To Awaken. 
 
 Call me early; I want to 
 leave by the first 
 train. 
 
 I want to have a long 
 night’s rest; don’t al- 
 low any one to dis- 
 turb me. 
 
 The Table. 
 
 The table-cloth. 
 
 The chair. 
 
 The wardrobe. 
 
 The chest of drawers. 
 
 The mirror. 
 
 The sofa. 
 
 The lamp. 
 
37Ó 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 No tiene aceite dentro. 
 
 La mecha no está bien 
 despabilada. 
 
 Una pantalla de lámpara. 
 
 La chimenéa. 
 
 El candelero. 1 
 
 El candelabro. J 
 
 La vela. 
 
 El gas. 
 
 La luz. 
 
 Encender. 
 
 Apagar. 
 
 Encienda el gas. 
 
 Apague el gas. 
 
 Un fósforo. 
 
 Fósforos. 
 
 Tráigame agua fresca para 
 beber. 
 
 Tráigame agua fresca para 
 lavarme. 
 
 Llene la jarra. 
 
 I Dónde está la campana? 
 
 Cepille esta ropa, mozo. 
 
 Mi vestido y botas están 
 mo j ados ; sírvase se- 
 carlos. 
 
 Encienda fuego. 
 
 Tráigame un comisionista, 
 si es posible, uno que 
 hable inglés. 
 
 I No hay cartas para mí? 
 
 ¿ Preguntó alguién por 
 mí? 
 
 There is no oil in it. 
 
 The wick is not cut 
 evenly. 
 
 A shade (of a lamp). 
 
 The chimney. 
 
 The chandelier. 
 
 The candle. 
 
 The gas. 
 
 The light. 
 
 To light. 
 
 To put out. , 
 
 Light the gas. 
 
 Turn off the gas. 
 
 A match. 
 
 Matches. 
 
 Bring me fresh water to 
 drink. 
 
 Bring me fresh water to 
 wash with. 
 
 Fill the pitcher. 
 
 Where is the bell? 
 
 Brush these clothes, waiter. 
 
 My clothes and boots are 
 wet, please dry them. 
 
 Light a fire. 
 
 Get me a messenger-boy, 
 if possible, someone 
 who speaks English. 
 
 Are there any letters for 
 me? 
 
 Did anyone inquire for 
 me? 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 377 
 
 Si alguien pregunta por 
 mí, dígale que espero 
 volver a las seis. 
 
 Si alguien pregunta por 
 mí, dígale que me he 
 ido a casa del señor 
 Martínez, donde me es- 
 taré hasta las cuatro. 
 
 Si el sastre me trajera mi 
 chaqueta, dígale que 
 vuelva mañana por la 
 mañana. 
 
 Si algunos paquetes vinie- 
 sen para mí, sírvase 
 hacer que se pongan 
 en mi cuarto. 
 
 I Podría yo escribir al- 
 gunas líneas en la 
 oficina? 
 
 Sírvase darme algunos 
 efectos para escribir. 
 
 Yo parto mañana por el 
 tren de la seis, esta- 
 ción del Este. ¿ Irá el 
 omnibus allá? 
 
 I Que se me llame a tiempo! 
 
 Tráigame un coche a . 
 tiempo y haga bajar 
 mi equipaje. 
 
 Haz que me hagan mi 
 cuenta. 
 
 Sírvase darme mi cuenta. 
 
 If anyone asks for me, 
 tell them that I ex- 
 pect to be back at six. 
 
 If anyone inquires for me, 
 tell them that I have 
 gone to Mr. Mar- 
 tinez’s where I can be 
 found till four o’clock. 
 
 If the tailor should bring 
 me my coat, tell him 
 to call again to-mor- 
 row morning. 
 
 If any packages should 
 come for me, have 
 them put into my 
 room, please. 
 
 Could I write a few lines 
 in the office? 
 
 Please give me some 
 writing materials. 
 
 I start to-morrow by the 
 six o’clock train. 
 Eastern Station. Will 
 the ominibus go 
 there? 
 
 Let me be called in time! 
 
 Get me a carriage in good 
 time and have my 
 baggage brought 
 down. 
 
 Have my bill made out. 
 
 Please give me my bill. 
 
378 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Yo no he tenido esto. 
 
 Eso ha sido ya pagado. 
 
 Encuentro este precio 
 muy alto. 
 
 Llámeme a las cinco 
 mañana; toque fuerte 
 a la puerta. Yo sen- 
 tiría mucho perder el 
 tren. 
 
 Vestirse. 
 
 El vestido. 
 
 Un vestido; un vestido 
 completo. 
 
 El sobretodo o gabán. 
 
 Un sobretodo de verano. 
 
 Un sobretodo de invier- 
 no. 
 
 Una casaca; un vestido. 
 
 Una levita. 
 
 La chaqueta. 
 
 El frac. 
 
 Una casaca. 
 
 Un chaleco. 
 
 Un chaleco blanco. 
 
 Un pantalón. 
 
 Los tirantes (te-rán'-tés). 
 
 La bolsa. Y 
 
 El bolsillo. > 
 
 La faltriquera. J 
 
 Un pañuelo. 
 
 El botón. 
 
 I have not had this. 
 
 That has already been 
 paid. 
 
 I find this charge too 
 high. 
 
 Call me at five to-mor- 
 row; knock loudly at 
 my door. I should 
 be sorry to lose the 
 train. 
 
 To Dress. 
 
 The suit of clothes. 
 
 A suit; a complete suit of 
 clothes. 
 
 The overcoat. 
 
 A summer overcoat. 
 
 A winter overcoat. 
 
 A coat. 
 
 A dress-coat. 
 
 The (close-fitting) coat. 
 
 The frock-coat; evening 
 dress. 
 
 A dress-coat. 
 
 A waist-coat. 
 
 A white waist-coat. 
 
 Trousers. 
 
 Suspenders. Braces. 
 
 The pocket. 
 
 A handkerchief. 
 
 The button. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 379 
 
 Un botón se ha caído de 
 aquí. 
 
 Haga que se ponga un 
 botón, pero bien cosi- 
 do. 
 
 Abróchese su sobretodo. 
 
 Desabróchese su cha- 
 queta. 
 
 El ojal. 
 
 El ojal está descosido; 
 tenga la bondad de 
 remendarlo. 
 
 El abotonador. 
 
 La camisa, (ká-mé'-sá). 
 
 La camisa de dormir. 
 
 Ponerse una camisa lim- 
 pia. 
 
 El cuello (de camisa). 
 
 Abotonar. 
 
 Un cuello alto. 
 
 Un cuello doblado. 
 
 Los puños. 
 
 La corbata. 
 
 Anudar; amarrar. 
 
 Hacer un nudo. 
 
 Ropa interior. 
 
 El chaleco de franela. 
 
 Los calzoncillos (kál- 
 thon-thel'-yós). 
 
 Las medias. 
 
 Los calcetines (kál-thá-té'- 
 nés). 
 
 Las botas. 
 
 Un par de botas. 
 
 A button is off here. 
 
 Please have a button put 
 on, but strongly. 
 
 Button your overcoat. 
 Unbutton your coat. 
 
 The buttonhole. 
 
 The buttonhole is tom; 
 please mend it. 
 
 The button-hook. 
 
 The shirt. 
 
 The night-shirt. 
 
 To put on a clean shirt. 
 
 The (shirt) collar. 
 
 To button on. 
 
 A stand-up collar. 
 
 A turn-down collar. 
 
 The cuffs. 
 
 The neck-tie. 
 
 To tie. 
 
 To tie a knot. 
 
 Underwear. 
 
 The flannel waist-coat. 
 
 The drawers. 
 
 The stockings. 
 
 The socks. 
 
 The boots. 
 
 A pair of boots. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 380 
 
 Los zapatos. 
 
 Un par de zapatos. 
 Botines. 
 
 Tómeme la medida para 
 un par de botas. 
 
 Las zapatillas (zá-pá- 
 tél'-yás). 
 
 Las chinelas. 
 
 Los pantuflos. 
 
 Un vestido. 
 
 La bata. 
 
 Unas enaguas. 
 
 , El zagalejo. 
 
 La basquiña. 
 
 El corsé. 
 
 El jubón. Chóo-bón'). 
 
 La camiseta. 
 
 Los guantes. 
 
 Un par de guantes. 
 
 Guantes de cabritilla (ká- 
 bré-tél'~yá). 
 
 La capa. 
 
 Una capa de pelo; una 
 pelisa. 
 
 El manguito. 
 
 A casa del Sastre. 
 
 ¿ Puede V. recomendarme 
 un buen sastre? 
 
 I Es su trabajo bueno? 
 Enséñeme V. sus mode- 
 los (sus muestras). 
 Quiero un sobretodo. 
 
 The shoes. 
 
 A pair of shoes. 
 
 High shoes. 
 
 Measure me for a pair of 
 boots. 
 
 The slippers; pantofles. 
 
 A dress. 
 
 The wrapper; morning 
 dress. 
 
 The petticoat. 
 
 The corset. 
 
 The under-waist. 
 
 The undershirt. 
 
 The gloves. 
 
 A pair of gloves. 
 Kid-gloves. 
 
 The cloak. 
 
 The fur cloak. 
 
 The muff. 
 
 At a Tailor’s. 
 
 Can you recommend me a 
 good tailor? 
 
 Is his workmanship good? 
 Show me your patterns 
 (samples). 
 
 I want an overcoat. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 Tómeme V. la medida 
 para un vestido en- 
 tero. 
 
 A la última moda. 
 
 No muy ajustado. 
 
 No muy ancho. 
 
 Un poco más largo. 
 
 No tan largo. 
 
 Quiero una chaqueta de 
 una botonadura. 
 
 El forro. 
 
 I Cuándo puedo tener este 
 sobretodo? 
 
 I No antes? 
 
 No puedo esperarme tan- 
 to tiempo; debo te- 
 nerlo para el mártes. 
 
 Mándemelo con el recibo. 
 
 I Puede V. recomendarme 
 un fabricante de pa- 
 ños? 
 
 Enséñeme un paño claro 
 (oscirro) 
 
 I Cómo me cae? 1 
 
 I Cómo me sienta? / 
 
 Está muy ajustado en la 
 cintura. 
 
 Está muy ajustado en los 
 sobacos. 
 
 ¿No están las mangas muy 
 largas? 
 
 Me gusta el pantalón ajus- 
 tado. 
 
 381 
 
 Measure me for a com- 
 plete suit. 
 
 In the latest fashion. 
 
 Not too tight. 
 
 Not too wide. 
 
 A little longer. 
 
 Not quite so long. 
 
 I want a single-breasted 
 coat. 
 
 The lining. 
 
 When can I have this 
 overcoat? 
 
 Not before? 
 
 I can not wait so long; I 
 must have it by 
 Tuesday. 
 
 Send it to me C. O. D. 
 (with the receipt). 
 
 Can you recommend me a 
 clothier? 
 
 Show me light (dark) goods 
 (cloth). 
 
 How does it fit me? 
 
 It is too tight in the waist. 
 
 It is too tight under the 
 arms (in the arm-pits). 
 
 Are not the sleeves too 
 large? 
 
 I like my trousers to be 
 close fitting. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 382 
 
 I Toma V. vestidos para 
 reparar? 
 
 El pantalón está gastado 
 abajo; voltéelo un poco 
 por dentro. 
 
 Póngale cinta a mi sobre- 
 todo. 
 
 Póngale botones a mi 
 chaleco. 
 
 Quítele esas manchas. 
 
 Una Modista. 
 
 Yo quiero me haga un 
 vestido. 
 
 Enséñeme algunos modelos. 
 
 Déjeme ver unos figurines 
 (modelos de modas). 
 
 Hágame el vestido por 
 este estilo. 
 
 Tome mi medida. 
 
 El frente. 
 
 La espalda. 
 
 La enagua. 
 
 Yo pondré mis propios 
 materiales. 
 
 I Cuántas varas se nece- 
 sitan? 
 
 ¿ Cuánto costará este ves- 
 tido completo? 
 
 ¿ Está este figurín todavía 
 de moda? 
 
 Yo deseo una enagua cor- 
 ta (una enagua larga). 
 
 Do you undertake re- 
 pairs? 
 
 The trousers are worn at 
 the bottom; turn them 
 in a little. 
 
 Rebind my overcoat (put 
 binding on my over- 
 coat) . 
 
 Put buttons on my waist- 
 coat. 
 
 Remove those stains. 
 
 A Dressmaker. 
 
 I wish to have a dress 
 made. 
 
 Show me some patterns. 
 
 Let me see some fashion- 
 plates. 
 
 Make the dress from this 
 style. 
 
 Take rny measure. 
 
 The front. 
 
 The back. 
 
 The skirt. 
 
 I shall supply my own 
 materials. 
 
 How many yards will it 
 take? 
 
 What would this dress 
 cost complete? 
 
 Is this pattern still fash- 
 ionable? 
 
 I wish to have a short 
 skirt (a long skirt). 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 3S3 
 
 No debe entrar muy apre- 
 tada; me gusta sen- 
 tirme cómoda. 
 
 La guarnición de vestido. 
 
 Ponga botones de marfil 
 en este vestido. 
 
 Desearía tener el vestido 
 temprano el sábado. 
 
 ¿ Cuándo puedo venir para 
 probármelo? 
 
 La cintura. 1 
 
 La blusa. / 
 
 Póngase la blusa. 
 
 Le viene bien en la cin- ' 
 tura. 
 
 La blusa le queda muy 
 bien. 
 
 Alterar; cambiar. 
 
 Cambie el cuerpo, no me 
 queda bien. 
 
 El hombro. 
 
 El vestido me queda mal 
 en los hombros ; sír- 
 vase cambiarlo. 
 
 Las mangas están muy 
 angostas (muy an- 
 chas, muy largas; 
 muy cortas). 
 
 Arrugar. 
 
 La manga se arruga allí; 
 sírvase cambiarla. 
 
 El cuello está muy bajo 
 (kwél'-yó). 
 
 It must not fit too 
 tightly; I like to feel 
 comfortable. 
 
 The trimming. 
 
 Put ivory buttons on this 
 dress. 
 
 I should like to have this 
 dress early on Satur- 
 day. 
 
 When can I call to try it 
 on? 
 
 The waist. 
 
 Try on the waist. 
 
 It fits you well in the 
 waist. 
 
 To alter; to change. 
 
 Alter the waist; it does 
 not fit. 
 
 The shoulder. 
 
 The dress fits badly in the 
 shoulders; please alter 
 it. 
 
 The sleeves are too nar- 
 row (too wide; too 
 long; too short). 
 
 To wrinkle. 
 
 The sleeve wrinkles right 
 there; change it, pray. 
 
 The collar is too low. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 3S4 
 
 El cuello no está bastante 
 alto. 
 
 ¿ Cuándo estará hecho mi 
 vestido? 
 
 Estará hecho mañana sin 
 falta. 
 
 El Tocador. 
 
 Vestirse. 
 
 Él se está vistiendo. 
 
 ¿ Qué no se ha vestido V. 
 todavía? 
 
 ¿ Qué no está V. listo to- 
 davía? 
 
 Ella se está cambiando su 
 vestido. 
 
 Él se está desvistiendo. 
 
 El gusto. 
 
 Ella se viste con grandísi- 
 mo gusto (estilo). 
 
 I Cree Vd. que este som- 
 brero me viene bien? 
 
 Este sombrero le queda a 
 Vd. muy bien. 
 
 El color. 
 
 Este color no me está a 
 mí bien. 
 
 La cara. 
 
 La tez; el cutis. 
 
 Delicado. 
 
 Sonrosado. 
 
 Claro. 
 
 Pálido. 
 
 The collar is not high 
 enough. 
 
 When will my dress be 
 done? 
 
 It will be done to-morrow 
 without fail. 
 
 The Toilet. 
 
 To dress. 
 
 He is dressing. 
 
 Aren’t you dressed yet? 
 
 Aren’t you ready yet? 
 
 She is changing her dress. 
 
 He is undressing. 
 
 The taste. 
 
 She dresses with a great 
 deal of taste (of 
 style). 
 
 Do you think this hat is 
 becoming to me? 
 
 This hat is very becoming 
 to you. 
 
 The color. 
 
 This color is not becoming 
 to me. 
 
 The face. 
 
 The complexion. 
 
 Delicate. 
 
 Rosy. 
 
 Light; pale. 
 
 Pale; pallid. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 38s 
 
 Ella tiene un delicado 
 color sonrosado; no 
 puede usar un color tan 
 subido. 
 
 Este color está muy su- 
 bido; este es el pro- 
 pio. 
 
 Lavar. 
 
 Quisiera lavarme las ma- 
 nos. 
 
 Quisiera lavarme y acepi- 
 llarme. 
 
 Tráigame agua, jabón y 
 toallas (tó-ál'-yás). 
 
 I Hay agua en mi cuarto? 
 
 Primero que todo debo la- 
 varme. 
 
 La palangana. 
 
 La jarra (^hárr'-rá). 
 
 Una pastilla de jabón. 
 
 Una esponja (és-pon'- 
 ‘há). 
 
 Una toalla (tó-ál'-yá). 
 
 Secar. 
 
 Me estoy secando las ma- 
 nos. 
 
 Séquese Vd. las manos con 
 esta toalla. 
 
 Limpiarse la boca. 
 
 Me estoy limpiando la 
 boca. 
 
 El diente; los dientes. 
 
 Un cepillo de dientes. 
 
 She has a delicate, rosy 
 complexion; she can 
 not wear such a loud 
 color. 
 
 This color is too loud; this 
 is the right one. 
 
 To Wash. 
 
 I should like to wash my 
 hands. 
 
 I should like a wash and 
 brush up. 
 
 Bring me some water, 
 soap and towels. 
 
 Is there any water in my 
 room? 
 
 First of all I must have a 
 wash. 
 
 The wash-basin. 
 
 The pitcher. 
 
 A cake of soap. 
 
 A sponge. 
 
 A towel. 
 
 To dry. 
 
 I am drying my hands. 
 
 Dry your hands with this 
 towel. 
 
 To clean one’s mouth. 
 
 I am cleaning my mouth. 
 
 The tooth; the teeth. 
 
 A tooth-brush. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 386 
 
 Me estoy limpiando los 
 dientes. 
 
 Un cepillo de cabeza. 
 
 Un cepillo para las uñas 
 (óon'-yás). 
 
 Él está peinándose. 
 
 Un peine. 
 
 Un batidor. 
 
 Me estoy peinando el pelo 
 {or los cabellos). 
 
 La raya. 
 
 La raya está derecha. 
 
 La raya no está derecha. 
 
 El aceite. 
 
 La pomada. 
 
 La lima (lé'-má). 
 
 Me estoy limando las 
 uñas. 
 
 El polvo. 
 
 El polvo de tocador. 
 
 Los polvos de dientes. 
 
 La caja de polvo. 
 
 La mota para empolvarse. 
 Ella se empolvó la cara. 
 Bañarse; tomar im baño. 
 
 Él está bañándose; él 
 toma un baño. 
 Afeitarse; rasurarse. 
 Siempre me rasuro solo. 
 
 El Barbero. 
 
 Sírvase afeitarme. 
 
 Quíteme toda la barba. 
 
 I am brushing my teeth. 
 
 A hair-brush. 
 
 A nail-brush. 
 
 He is combing his hair. 
 
 A comb. 
 
 A large comb. 
 
 I am combing my hair. 
 
 The parting. 
 
 The parting is straight. 
 The parting is crooked. 
 The oil. 
 
 The pomatum. 
 
 The ñle. 
 
 I am filing my nails. 
 
 The powder. 
 
 Toilet-powder. 
 
 Tooth-powder. 
 
 The powder-box. 
 
 The powder-puff. 
 
 She powdered her face. 
 
 To bathe; to take a bath 
 He is bathing; he takes a 
 bath. 
 
 To shave. 
 
 I always shave myself. 
 
 The Barber. 
 
 Please shave me. 
 
 Take off the whole of my 
 beard. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 387 
 
 Las patillas. 
 
 La barba. 
 
 La barba entera. 
 
 El bigote. 
 
 Mi barba es muy recia. 
 
 Su navaja no está bastante 
 afilada (ná-vá'-‘há). 
 
 No tenemos grandes bar- 
 berías en Europa. 
 
 Los barberos van a los do- 
 micilios de sus parro- 
 quianos. 
 
 El Peluquero. 
 
 Quiero que se me corte 
 los cabellos {or el 
 pelo). 
 
 Corto detrás, algo más 
 largo en frente. 
 
 Quite solamente un poco; 
 yo estoy perdiendo mi 
 pelo. 
 
 Hágame el favor de 
 arreglarme el cabello. 
 
 Parta mi pelo por en 
 medio. 
 
 Pártame el pelo por tm 
 lado. 
 
 Cepílleme el pelo. 
 
 Sírvase rizarme el pelo. 
 
 Las tijeras (té-^ha'-rás). 
 
 La Ropa Limpia. 
 
 Sucio, sucia. 
 
 The whiskers. 
 
 The beard. 
 
 The full-beard. 
 
 The moustache. 
 
 My beard is very stub- 
 born. 
 
 Your razor is not sharp 
 enough. 
 
 We haven’t any large bar- 
 ber-shops in Europe. 
 
 The barbers go to their 
 customers’ houses. 
 
 The Hair-dresser. 
 
 I wish to have my hair 
 cut. 
 
 Short behind, a little 
 longer in front. 
 
 Take off only a little; I 
 am losing my hair. 
 
 Dress my hair, please. 
 
 Part my hair in the mid- 
 dle. 
 
 Part my hair on the side. 
 
 Brush myliair. 
 
 Curl my hair, please. 
 
 The scissors. 
 
 Clean Linen. 
 
 Soiled. 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 388 
 
 Mande esta ropa a la 
 lavandera. 
 
 La lista está ahí. 
 
 ¿ Cuándo puede Vd. man- 
 darla a casa? 
 
 Debo tener la ropa para el 
 jueves. 
 
 No se olvide de remendar 
 las camisas. 
 
 El almidón. 
 
 Almidonar. 
 
 Planchar. 
 
 No planche tanto mis 
 cuellos. 
 
 Artículos de Tocador 
 
 Joyas (‘ho'-yás). 
 
 Diamantes (dé-á-mán'- 
 tés). 
 
 La perla; las perlas. 
 
 El anillo; la sortija. 
 
 El anillo de diamantes. 
 
 Los pendientes; los zar- 
 cillos. 
 
 Un brazalete; tma pul- 
 sera. 
 
 Un collar. 
 
 Un broche. 
 
 El reloj. 
 
 Una cadena. 
 
 La llave. 
 
 Los botones de camisa. 
 
 Los anteojos. 
 
 Los lentes. 
 
 Send these clothes to the 
 laundress. 
 
 The washing-list is there. 
 When can you send it 
 home? 
 
 I must have the washing 
 by Thursday. 
 
 Do not forget to mend the 
 shirts. 
 
 The starch. 
 
 To starch. 
 
 To iron. 
 
 Do not iron my collars so 
 stiff. 
 
 Ornaments. 
 
 Jewels. 
 
 Diamonds. 
 
 The pearl; the pearls 
 The ring. 
 
 The diamond ring. 
 
 The ear-rings. 
 
 A bracelet. 
 
 A necklace. 
 
 A brooch. 
 
 The watch. 
 
 A chain. 
 
 The key. 
 
 The studs. 
 
 The spectacles. 
 
 The eye-glasses. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 389 
 
 El binóculo. 
 
 El bastón. 
 
 Una sombrilla; un para- 
 sol. 
 
 Un paraguas. 
 
 El abanico. 
 
 El Tiempo. 
 
 La hora. 
 
 El compás. 
 
 Seguir el tiempo. 
 
 Perder el tiempo. 
 
 Tres veces. 
 
 Otra vez; otra vuelta. 
 
 En ese tiempo. 
 
 Al presente. 
 
 Al mismo tiempo. 
 
 Por largo tiempo; por 
 mucho tiempo. 
 
 No le he visto a Vd. por 
 mucho tiempo. 
 
 En buen tiempo. 
 
 En mis tiempos. 
 
 Por algún tiempo. 
 
 De tiempo en tiempo. 
 
 Venir a tiempo. 
 
 Eso viene a buen tiempo. 
 
 I Llegaremos a tiempo? 1 
 ¿ Estaremos a tiempo? / 
 
 I A qué hora sale el tren 
 para Querétaro? 
 
 The opera-glasses. 
 
 The cañe. 
 
 A parasol. 
 
 An umbrella. 
 
 The fan. 
 
 The Time. 
 
 The time; the hour. 
 
 The time (in music). 
 
 To keep time. 
 
 To get out of time. 
 
 Three times. 
 
 Another time, again. 
 
 At that time. 
 
 At the present time. 
 
 At the same time. 
 
 For a long time. 
 
 I have not seen you for a 
 long time. 
 
 In good time. 
 
 In my time. 
 
 For some time. 
 
 From time to time. 
 
 To come in time. 
 
 That comes just at the 
 right time. 
 
 Shall we be in time? 
 
 At what time does the 
 train start for Quere- 
 taro? 
 
390 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 ¿ Estamos a tiempo para 
 el tren? 
 
 ¿ Dónde tendré tiempo de 
 comer algo? 
 
 ¿ Tenemos tiempo para 
 ello? 
 
 ¿ Tiene Vd. tiempo de 
 acompañarme? 
 
 La Hora. 
 
 ¿ Qué hora es? 
 
 ¿ Puede V. decirme qué 
 hora es? 
 
 No puedo decirselo exac- 
 tamente. 
 
 ¿ Sabe V. qué hora es? — 
 No lo sé. 
 
 Es la una. 
 
 Es la una y cuarto. 
 
 Es la una y media. 
 
 Son las dos menos cuarto. 
 
 Son las dos menos veinte 
 y cinco minutos. 
 
 Son las dos en punto. 
 
 Son cerca de las cinco. 
 
 Van a dar las tres. 1 
 
 Pronto darán las tres. / 
 
 Han dado las ocho. 
 
 ¿ Qué hora está dando? — 
 Las once. 
 
 ¿ Qué hora podrá ser? — 
 Acaban de dar las 
 siete. 
 
 Are we in time for the 
 train? 
 
 Where shall I have time 
 to eat something? 
 
 Have we (got) time for 
 it? 
 
 Have you time to accom- 
 pany me? 
 
 The Time; The Hour. 
 
 What o’clock is it? (What 
 time is it)? 
 
 Can you tell me what time 
 it is? 
 
 I cannot tell you pre- 
 cisely. 
 
 Do you know what time it 
 is? — No, I don’t. 
 
 It is one o’clock. 
 
 It is a quarter past one. 
 
 It is half past one. 
 
 It is a quarter to two. 
 
 It is twenty-five minutes 
 to two. 
 
 It is precisely two o’clock. 
 
 It is about five. 
 
 It is just going to strike 
 three. 
 
 It has struck eight. 
 
 What time is it striking? 
 — Eleven. 
 
 What o’clock may it be? 
 — It just struck 
 
 seven. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 391 
 
 Hágame el favor de decir- 
 me que hora es. Creo 
 que mi reloj está 
 atrasado (adelanta- 
 do). 
 
 División del Tiempo. 
 
 Hoy. 
 
 Mañana. 
 
 Pasado mañana. 
 
 Ayer. 
 
 Anteayer. "1 
 Antes'de ayer. / 
 
 Mañana por la mañana. 
 Mañana en la tarde. 
 Anoche. 
 
 Esta semana. 
 
 La semana pasada. 
 
 La semana que entra. 
 
 Por una semana. 
 
 En una semana. 
 
 De mañana en ocho días. 
 Quince días. \ 
 
 Una quincena. J 
 Un mes. 
 
 Un año. 
 
 Un siglo. 
 
 El año pasado. 
 
 El año que viene. 
 
 El principio. 
 
 El medio. 
 
 El fin. 
 
 Have the kindness to tell 
 me what time it is. I 
 think my watch is 
 slow (fast). 
 
 Division of Time. 
 
 To-day. 
 
 To-morrow. 
 
 The day after to-morrow. 
 Yesterday. 
 
 The day before yesterday. 
 
 To-morrow morning. 
 To-morrow afternoon. 
 
 Last night. 
 
 This week. 
 
 Last week. 
 
 Next week. 
 
 For a week. 
 
 In a week. 
 
 A week from to-morrow. 
 
 A fortnight. 
 
 A month. 
 
 A year. 
 
 A century. 
 
 Last year. 
 
 Next year. 
 
 The beginning. 
 
 The middle. 
 
 The end. 
 
rVJAhi*: ■ 
 
 
ROSENTHAL’S 
 
 COMMON-SENSE METHOD 
 
 PRACTICAL LINOUISTRY 
 
 THE 
 
 Spanish Language 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL 
 
 Author of the Meisterschaft System, etc., etc. 
 
 Haulenbeek Corrected Edition 
 Revised 1917 
 
 IN TEN PARTS 
 
 NEW YORK : : LONDON 
 The International College of Languages 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1905, 
 
 BY 
 
 FHE INTERNATIONAL COLLEGE OF LANGUAGES. 
 Entered at 
 
 Stationers^ Hall, London, Eng, 
 
FRENCH. GERMAN, 
 SPANISHor ITALIAN 
 
 q To S P E A K it, to under- 
 stand it, to read it, to write it. 
 there is but one best way. 
 
 ^ You must hear it SPOKEN 
 correctly, over and over, till 
 your EAR knows it. 
 
 You must see it printed cor- 
 rectly till your eye knows it. 
 
 ^ You must T A E K it and 
 write it. 
 
 ^ All this can be done best by 
 the 
 
 Language-Phone Method 
 
 In connection with Dr. Rosenthal’s Common 
 Sense Method of Practical Linguistry 
 
 q With this method you buy a native professor outright. You own him 
 He SPEAKS as you choose, slowly or quickly ; when you choose, night 
 or day ; for a few minutes or hours at a time. 
 
 ^ Any one can learn a foreign language who HEARS it SPOKEN often 
 enough ; and by this method you can HEAR it as often as you like. 
 The method has been recommended by well-known members of the 
 faculties of the following universities and colleges: Yale, Celumbia, 
 Fordham, Brown, Harvard, Pennsylvania, Boston, Princeton, Cornell, 
 Syracuse, Manhattan, Johns Hopkins, Virginia, Colorado, Michigan, 
 Chicago, Minnesota, De La Salle, St. Josephs, St. Francis Xavier. 
 
 We ask you to investigate this marvelous system^ and read what its 
 users say. Mail Inquiry Coupon and it will bring you booklet^ 
 explanatory literature and facsimile letters from men who know. 
 
 Please mail to me full particulars concerning the Language- 
 Phone Method for Acquiring French, German, Spanish or Italian. 
 
 NAME 
 
 POST OFFICE 
 
 STATE 
 
 THR l^ANGUAGK PHONE METHOD 
 
 223 Hess Building, 354 Fourth Avenue, New York 
 
iV1 
 
 r/jb 
 
 111:1:/,! V . 
 iirin'iM'n'M í^íí' '^; 
 
 THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 
 
 X. 
 
 THE SPANISH GRAMMAR. 
 

 fe:: 
 
 I f ' 
 
 
 
 
 '■'^15 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 393 
 
 SPANISH ALPHABET 
 
 a, b, c, ch, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, 11, m, n, ñ, o, p, q, r, rr, s, t, u, v, x, y, z 
 
 a 
 
 más 
 
 more 
 
 like *‘a*’ in ah 
 
 
 hablar 
 
 to speak 
 
 U tt it 
 
 b 
 
 beber 
 
 to drink 
 
 like bv. 
 
 
 escribir 
 
 to write 
 
 H n 
 
 c 
 
 casa 
 
 house 
 
 hard 
 
 
 carcajadas 
 
 laugh 
 
 
 
 decir 
 
 to say- 
 
 soft 
 
 
 entonces 
 
 then 
 
 It 
 
 ch 
 
 noche 
 
 night 
 
 always like “tch** 
 
 
 mucho 
 
 much 
 
 It tt tt 
 
 
 chico 
 
 little 
 
 tt tt It 
 
 d 
 
 marido 
 
 husband 
 
 always soft, sometimes silent 
 
 
 verdad 
 
 truth 
 
 « a 
 
 
 usted 
 
 you 
 
 *6 tt 
 
 e 
 
 médico 
 
 doctor 
 
 long 
 
 
 placer 
 
 pleasure 
 
 tt 
 
 
 triste 
 
 sad 
 
 short 
 
 f 
 
 fábula 
 
 fable 
 
 as in English 
 
 
 jefe 
 
 chief 
 
 tt tt tt 
 
 g 
 
 lugar 
 
 place 
 
 hard 
 
 
 gala 
 
 gala 
 
 tt 
 
 
 guerra 
 
 war 
 
 tt 
 
 
 lengua 
 
 tongue 
 
 combined with ua 
 
 
 antigüedad 
 
 antiquity 
 
 úe 
 
 
 general 
 
 general 
 
 guttural 
 
 
 gitano 
 
 gypsy 
 
 tt 
 
 h 
 
 hacer 
 
 to do 
 
 silent 
 
 
 hueco 
 
 hollow 
 
 slightly pronounced 
 
 i 
 
 sí 
 
 yes 
 
 like “ee” 
 
 
 infirmar 
 
 to weaken 
 
 tt tt 
 
 Copyright, 190S, by The International College of Languages. 
 Entered at Stationers’ Hall, London, Eng. 
 
394 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 i 
 
 mujer 
 
 woman 
 
 guttural 
 
 
 hijo 
 
 son 
 
 14 
 
 
 José 
 
 Joseph 
 
 U 
 
 k 
 
 kilo 
 
 kilo 
 
 as in English 
 
 1 
 
 alma 
 
 soul 
 
 It it it 
 
 
 lana 
 
 wool 
 
 a ii n 
 
 U 
 
 llamar 
 
 to call 
 
 liquid sound 
 
 
 calle 
 
 street 
 
 ii it 
 
 m 
 
 mundo 
 
 world 
 
 as in English 
 
 
 mamá 
 
 mamma 
 
 it ii it 
 
 n 
 
 nuevo 
 
 new 
 
 it it it 
 
 
 uno 
 
 one 
 
 it it it 
 
 ñ 
 
 mañana 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 as *‘ni” in onion 
 
 
 señora 
 
 lady 
 
 ii it it it 
 
 0 
 
 otorgar 
 
 furnish 
 
 long 
 
 
 otro 
 
 other 
 
 
 
 por 
 
 for 
 
 tt 
 
 
 nación 
 
 nation 
 
 short 
 
 P 
 
 punto 
 
 point 
 
 as in English 
 
 
 popular 
 
 popular 
 
 it it it 
 
 q 
 
 quinto 
 
 fifth 
 
 like “k’" 
 
 
 por qué 
 
 why 
 
 ii it 
 
 r 
 
 quiero 
 
 I will 
 
 soft; not rolled 
 
 
 rama 
 
 branch 
 
 it it a 
 
 
 error 
 
 error 
 
 tt tt tt 
 
 s 
 
 sesos 
 
 brains 
 
 sibilant 
 
 
 susto 
 
 fright 
 
 it 
 
 t 
 
 tío 
 
 uncle 
 
 as in English 
 
 
 virtud 
 
 virtue 
 
 it it it 
 
 u 
 
 único 
 
 only 
 
 like English “00” 
 
 
 muñeca 
 
 doll 
 
 it a it 
 
 V 
 
 vale 
 
 farewell 
 
 as in English 
 
 X 
 
 exacto 
 
 exact 
 
 like English “ks'* 
 
 
 Xefxes 
 
 Xerxes 
 
 it a tt 
 
 y 
 
 yo 
 
 I 
 
 consonant 
 
 
 leyes 
 
 laws 
 
 vowel 
 
 z 
 
 zapatos 
 
 shoes 
 
 like English “th’* 
 
 
 azúcar 
 
 sugar 
 
 it it it 
 
 Copyright, 1905, by The International College of Languages. 
 Entered at Stationers’ Hall, London, Eng. 
 
The Spanish Language 
 
 COMBINATIONS 
 
 395 
 
 ai 
 
 baile 
 
 dance 
 
 ay 
 
 ay! 
 
 alas! 
 
 au 
 
 causa 
 
 cause 
 
 
 laudatorio 
 
 commendatory 
 
 ea 
 
 línea 
 
 line 
 
 ei 
 
 reina 
 
 queen 
 
 ey 
 
 rey 
 
 king 
 
 io 
 
 idioma 
 
 language 
 
 eu 
 
 Teutón 
 
 Teuton 
 
 ia 
 
 noticia 
 
 notice 
 
 ie 
 
 siento 
 
 I regret 
 
 io 
 
 estudio 
 
 study 
 
 iu 
 
 ciudad 
 
 city 
 
 oi 
 
 oiga 
 
 hear 
 
 oy 
 
 hoy 
 
 to-day 
 
 ua 
 
 lengua 
 
 language 
 
 ue 
 
 buena 
 
 good 
 
 ui 
 
 cuidado 
 
 care 
 
 uy 
 
 muy 
 
 very 
 
 uo 
 
 antiguo 
 
 ancient 
 
 iai 
 
 cambiáis 
 
 you changed 
 
 eis 
 
 cambiéis 
 
 that you changed 
 
 uay 
 
 guay! 
 
 Oh! 
 
 uey 
 
 buey 
 
 ox 
 
 Copyright, 1905, by The International College of Languages. 
 Entered at Stationers’ Hall, London, Eng. 
 
396 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 The Articles. 
 
 There are two articles: the definite el, the, for the 
 masculine, la, the, for the feminine form, and the in- 
 definite un, a, an (masculine), una, a, an (feminine). 
 Declension of the Articles. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 el. 
 
 los. 
 
 la. 
 
 las. 
 
 the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 del. 
 
 de los. 
 
 de la. 
 
 de las. 
 
 of the, or frotn the. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 al. 
 
 a los. 
 
 a la. 
 
 a las. 
 
 to the, or at the. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 el. 
 
 los. 
 
 la. 
 
 las, 
 
 the. 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 un. 
 
 
 una. 
 
 
 a. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 de un. 
 
 . 
 
 de una. 
 
 
 of a, or from a. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 a un. 
 
 
 a una 
 
 
 to, or at a. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 un. 
 
 
 una. 
 
 
 a. 
 
 Remarks on the Article. 
 
 I. There are three genders in the Spanish language: 
 masculine, feminine, and neuter. The definite article has 
 in the singular a distinct form for each gender: mascu- 
 line, el; feminine la; neuter, lo. 
 
 El padre, the father. La madre, the mother. Lo bueno, the good. 
 
 Remarks — i. The neuter gender is applicable only to adjectives 
 taken in an unlimited or indefinite sense, as: lo bueno, the good or 
 that which is good; lo peor, the worst or what is worsts etc. 
 
 This neuter gender, which has no plural, is therefore never applied 
 to persons or things, but only to adjectives taken substantively, 
 and to substantives taken adjectively: Todo era grande en San 
 
 Luis, lo rey, lo santo, lo capitán, everything was great in St. Luis 
 {Louis IX)y the king, the saint y the captain. 
 
 2. The neuter article is not placed indifferently before all ad- 
 jectives, taken substantively. Thus, in the following sentences: 
 El malo será castigado, the wicked shall he punished; el azul de este 
 paño es demasiado oscuro, the blue of this cloth is too dark ; — the neuter 
 article lo, would not be used, because these adjectives are taken 
 substantively and are sufficiently determinate. It is evident that 
 in the first sentence, the word hombre, man^ is understood, before 
 malo, wicked; and in the second sentence, the word color, color, 
 before azul, blue. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 397 
 
 2. Although the article el belongs only to the mas- 
 culine gender, it may be placed, for the sake of euphony, 
 before feminine nouns beginning with a long a, that is 
 to say, whenever the stress of voice rests on that initial 
 letter: el agua, the water; el alma, the soul; el ala, the 
 wing; el águila, the eagle; el ave, the bird. This change 
 of article is, however, only allowed in the singular, and the 
 plural is las aguas, las almas, las alas, etc. 
 
 Adjectives accompanying the singular of such nouns 
 must be placed in the feminine: el agua está fría, the water 
 is cold. 
 
 The same rules apply to words beginning with an h, 
 as: el hacha es pesada, the axe is heavy; las hachas, the 
 axes, etc. 
 
 Nouns like América, America; alegría, habitación, 
 habitation, etc., take the feminine article la, because the 
 first a is not accented: La América, la habitación, etc. 
 
 3. The indefinite article a, an, or the numeral one, is 
 rendered by un before a masculine noun (the o of uno 
 being dropped before a noun), and by una before a femi- 
 nine noun. 
 
 Un hermano, a brother, Una hermana, a sister, 
 
 Un libro, a book, Una mesa, a table, 
 
 4. The definite article should always be repeated before 
 the nouns it defines: 
 
 El padre y la madre. The father and mother. 
 
 La casa y el jardín. The house and garden, 
 
 El buen lápiz y la buena pluma, The good pencil and pen, 
 
 5. The definite article is used in Spanish in place of 
 the possessive pronoun in English whenever the sense 
 of the sentence indicates who the possessor is. This is 
 especially the case when parts of the body are mentioned: 
 
3Q8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Tengo algo en el ojo^ 
 
 I Qué tiene V. en la mano? 
 Deme V. la mano, 
 
 El tiene su sombrero en la mano, 
 Este soldado ha perdido el brazo, 
 
 I have something in my eye. 
 What have you in your hand? 
 Give me your hand. 
 
 He has his hat in his hand. 
 This soldier has lost his arm. 
 
 Peculiarities in the Use of the Definite Article. 
 
 The Definite Article is very often used in Spanish: 
 
 I. Before masculine and feminine geographical names: 
 
 La Habana es más grande que 
 Veracruz, 
 
 La India tiene altas montañas. 
 El Canada está al Norte de los 
 Estados Unidos de América, 
 La Guaira es una ciudad. 
 
 Los Alpes y los Pirineos son muy 
 altos. 
 
 El Vesuvio es un volcan. 
 
 El Danubio es un rio grande. 
 
 Havana is larger than Ver a- Cruz. 
 
 India has lofty mountains. 
 Canada is north of the United 
 States of America. 
 
 Guaira is a city. 
 
 The Alps and the Pyrenees are 
 very high. 
 
 Vesuvius is a volcano. 
 
 The Danube is a large river. 
 
 2. Before names of days and seasons: 
 
 El domingo es un día de des- 
 canso. 
 
 El sábado es el último día de la 
 semana. 
 
 El invierno es muy frío en este 
 país, 
 
 3. Beiore abstract nouns: 
 
 La juventud es imprudente, 
 
 La virtud es amable. 
 
 La esperanza sostiene al hombre. 
 
 Sunday is a day of rest. 
 
 Saturday is the last day of the 
 week. 
 
 Winter is very cold in this coun- 
 try. 
 
 Youth is imprudent. 
 Virtue is amiable. 
 Hope sustains man. 
 
 4. Before names of metals, colors, substances, elements, 
 dignities, systems of doctrine, arts, and sciences: 
 
 El oro y el plomo son metales. Gold and lead are metals. 
 
 El bianco y el negro son colores, White and black are colors. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 399 
 
 El fuego y el agua son elementos, 
 La geografía es la descripción de 
 la tierra, 
 
 El azúcar es dulce. 
 
 La música y la danza son her- 
 manas. 
 
 El catolicismo y el protestan- 
 tismo, 
 
 5. Before Adjectives, or 
 substantively: 
 
 Los ricos y los pobres. 
 
 El comer y el beber. 
 
 El sí y el no. 
 
 El pro y el contra. 
 
 El bien y el mal. 
 
 Fire and water are elements. 
 Geography is the description of 
 the earth. 
 
 Sugar is sweet. 
 
 Music and dancing are sisters. 
 Catholicism and Protestantism, 
 
 other parts of speech, used 
 
 The rich and the poor. 
 
 Eating and drinking. 
 
 Yes and no. 
 
 Pro and con. 
 
 Good and evil. 
 
 6. Before nouns representing a whole species of ob- 
 jects, and before every noun taken in a general sense: 
 
 El hombre es mortal. 
 
 La vida es corta. 
 
 El tiempo es precioso. 
 
 Los perros son fieles. 
 
 Los sombreros redondos son de 
 moda. 
 
 Las flores son el adorno de la 
 naturaleza. 
 
 Man is mortal, 
 
 Life is short. 
 
 Time is precious. 
 
 Dogs are faithful. 
 
 Round hats are in fashion. 
 
 Flowers are the ornament of na- 
 ture. 
 
 7. Before titles prefixed to names: 
 
 El emperador Don Pedro, Emperor Don Pedro. 
 
 El rey Luis Catorce, King Louis the Fourteenth. 
 
 El presidente Lincoln, President Lincoln. 
 
 El general Washington, General Washington. 
 
 El señor Fernández, Mr. Fernandez. 
 
 8. Before proper names preceded by adjectives: 
 
 El pequeño Juan, Little John. 
 
 La vieja María, Old Mary. 
 
 g. Before nouns specifying quantity or measure: 
 
 Tres pesos la libra. Three dollars a pound. 
 
 Un peso la vara. One dollar a yard. 
 
 10. Before the four Cardinal Points of the compass: 
 
400 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 El Norte, North, 
 
 El Sur, sud or mediodía. South, 
 
 El Este, or Oriente, East. 
 
 El Oeste, Poniente or Occidente, West. 
 
 II. The definite article may also be used before a 
 whole sentence, when the latter serves as the subject of 
 another sentence: 
 
 Mucho me alegra el que venga V., I am very glad that you come. 
 
 12. When several noims follow each other, the article 
 is placed before every one of them, to give more expression 
 to each one, and when they are of different genders. 
 
 Cuando la justicia, la fidelidad. When justice ^ fidelity ^ honor ^ com- 
 
 el honor, la compasión, la passion^ modesty^ and all 
 
 vergüenza, y todos los senti- feelings which can move a 
 
 mientos que pueden mover generous hearty etc. 
 
 un corazón generoso, etc. 
 
 13. It may happen that the article is separated from 
 its noun by several other words, as in the following sen- 
 tences: 
 
 La nunca bastante ponderada The never sufficiently praised vir- 
 virtud, tue. 
 
 El sobrado paseo. Excessive walking. 
 
 14. The definite article is placed before titles or other 
 designations preceding proper names: 
 
 El Exmo. (excelentísimo) señor His Excellency the duke of ,, , 
 duque de . . . 
 
 If the word su precedes the honorific designation, the 
 article is placed before the title. 
 
 15. In describing the characteristic features of persons 
 or things, the definite article is also used: 
 
 Carlos tiene los ojos negros. Charles has black eyes. 
 
 Luis tiene la nariz grande, Lewis has a large nose. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 The definite article (and in some cases, the indefinite 
 article) is omitted: 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 401 
 
 I. When the name of the country figures as the place 
 of origin, or is preceded by a prepOvSition: 
 
 He recibido una carta de Francia, 
 
 Mi hermano está en Alemania, 
 La reina de Inglaterra es viuda. 
 Este vino es de España, 
 
 I have received a letter from 
 France. 
 
 My brother is in Germany. 
 
 The queen of England is a widow. 
 This wine is from Spain. 
 
 2, Before names of countries the capital of which has 
 the same name as the country itself: 
 
 Nápoles, Naples. Méjico, Mexico. 
 
 . Before a few locutions, as: 
 
 Voy a casa — a misa — a palacio, 
 etc., 
 
 Voy a casa de mi amigo, 
 
 4. With a substantive in 
 substantive: 
 
 Juan, hermano de Enrique, 
 
 Paris, capital de Francia, 
 Alejandro, emperador de Rusia, 
 Hablamos de Pedro, hombre de 
 gran talento, 
 
 I am going home — to mass — to 
 the palace^ etc. 
 
 I am going to my friend's house. 
 
 apposition with a preceding 
 
 JohUf the brother of Henry. 
 
 Paris f the capital of France. 
 Alexander^ the emperor of Russia, 
 We speak of Peter , a man of great 
 talent. 
 
 5. Before titles of books, headings of chapters, etc. 
 
 Vida de Cervantes, The Life of Cervantes. 
 
 Historia de Roma, A History of Rome. 
 
 Capítulo tercero. Third Chapter. 
 
 6. For the use of the article with the relative pronoun 
 and the Infinitive compare the respective chapters. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Spanish nouns have two genders, — masculine and 
 feminine. 
 
 The gender of a noun may be determined partly by its 
 signification, and partly by its ending. 
 
 Nouns ending in 0 are generally masculine, and those 
 ending in a, feminine (except those which designate males). 
 Compare the examples given. 
 
402 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Plural of Nouns. 
 
 Nouns ending in an unaccented vowel form their 
 
 Plural by adding s, as: 
 
 
 
 El padre, 
 
 the father. 
 
 los padres. 
 
 the fathers. 
 
 el niño, 
 
 the child. 
 
 los niños. 
 
 the children. 
 
 la tía. 
 
 the aunt. 
 
 las tías. 
 
 the aunts. 
 
 2. Nouns ending in a consonant, or : 
 
 in an accented 
 
 vowel (except e) form their plural by adding es, as: 
 
 el general. 
 
 the general. 
 
 los generales. 
 
 the generals. 
 
 la mujer. 
 
 the woman. 
 
 las mujeres. 
 
 the women. 
 
 el pan. 
 
 the bread. 
 
 los panes. 
 
 theloaves of bread. 
 
 la ñor. 
 
 the flower. 
 
 las flores. 
 
 the flowers. 
 
 el tisú. 
 
 the tissue. 
 
 los tisúes, 
 
 the tissues. 
 
 el rubí. 
 
 the ruby. 
 
 los rubíes. 
 
 the rubies. 
 
 3. Nouns ending in s remain unchanged, provided their 
 
 last syllable is short. 
 
 
 
 If the last syllable is long they add es. 
 
 
 la crisis. 
 
 the crisis. 
 
 las crisis. 
 
 the crisis. 
 
 el jueves. 
 
 Thursday. 
 
 los jueves. 
 
 on Thursdays.* 
 
 el martes. 
 
 Tuesday. 
 
 los martes, 
 
 on Tuesdays. 
 
 el francés. 
 
 the Frenchman. 
 
 los franceses. 
 
 the Frenchmen. 
 
 el inglés. 
 
 the Englishman. 
 
 los ingleses. 
 
 the Englishmen. 
 
 4. Nouns ending in z change the same 
 
 into c and add 
 
 es in the plural, as: 
 
 
 
 el juez, 
 
 the judge. 
 
 los jueces. 
 
 the judges. 
 
 la voz. 
 
 - the voice. 
 
 las voces. 
 
 the voices. 
 
 la paz. 
 
 the peace. 
 
 las paces, the 
 
 conditions of peace. 
 
 la luz. 
 
 the light. 
 
 las luces, 
 
 the lights 
 
 5. Words ending in y add es, as: 
 
 
 el rey. 
 
 the king. 
 
 los reyes. 
 
 the kings. 
 
 el buey. 
 
 the ox. 
 
 los bueyes. 
 
 the oxen. 
 
 la ley, 
 
 the law. 
 
 las leyes. 
 
 the laws. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 403 
 
 6. Forms of salutation are used in the plural only: 
 
 buenos días, good day, 
 
 buenas tardes, good evening, 
 
 buenas noches, good night, ^ 
 
 The Gender of Nouns. 
 
 The gender of nouns is generally determined by their 
 endings. 
 
 1. Nouns ending in 0 are masculine. 
 
 Except mano, hand; and nao, vessel, 
 
 2. Notms ending in a are generally feminine. 
 
 Those expressing rank, titles and professions, as papa, 
 pope; profeta, prophet, etc., and those ending in ma 
 derived from the Greek, as clima, climate; idioma, idiom; 
 poema, poem; dilema, dilemma; diploma, diploma; dogma, 
 dogma, etc., are, however, of the masculine gender. 
 
 A few of these words may be used either as masculine 
 or as feminine. 
 
 3. Nouns ending in cion or tion are of the feminine 
 gender, as cuestión, question; meditación, meditation. 
 
 These words are the same in both languages, except 
 that in Spanish, the t of the termination -tion of the 
 English word is changed into a c whenever it has the sound 
 of sh. 
 
 4. Nouns ending in Spanish in tad or dad, — termi- 
 nations which correspond to the Latin tas, and to the 
 English ty, — are of the feminine gender, as humanidad, 
 humanity; puridad, purity; adversidad, adversity. 
 
 General Rule for Latin Scholars. — Nouns derived 
 from the Latin preserve in Spanish the same gender they 
 have in Latin, with the exception that those which are 
 neuter in Latin are masculine in Spanish. 
 
404 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 5. Compound nouns take the gender of the second 
 word if the same is in the singular. Thus, the words 
 aguamiel, honey and water; contrahaz, wrong side, are 
 feminine; whilst archilaud, a kind of lute; and portafusil, 
 gun-belt, are masculine. 
 
 6. Compound words of which the second word is in 
 the plural are always masculine, even if the second word 
 is feminine, as: cortaplumas, pen-knife; mondadientes, 
 tooth-pick; sacabotas, boot-jack. 
 
 Observations on other Terminations. — Nouns hav- 
 ing other terminations are subject to so many exceptions 
 that it is impossible to establish satisfactory rules in 
 regard to them. 
 
 Thus, mar, sea, is of both genders, but words com- 
 potmded with mar are always feminine, as bajamar, 
 low-tide; pleamar, high-tide. Mar, joined to a proper 
 noun, should be in the masculine, as el mar Báltico, 
 the Baltic sea. 
 
 Augmentative and Diminutive Nouns {and Adjectives). 
 
 1. The Spanish language has many Diminutives and 
 Augmentatives. 
 
 2. The Diminutives serve to decrease or spften the 
 signification of the word from which they are derived. 
 
 Those most in use end in ico, illo, cilio, ito, cito, uelo, 
 ejo, and zuelo, for the masculine, as: hombrecico, hom- 
 brecillo, hombrecito, hombrezuelo, little man; and in ica, 
 ilia, cilia, ita, cita, zuda, eta, eja, for the feminine, as: 
 muj 3 rcilla, mujercita, mujercica, mujerzuela, little wo- 
 man, 
 
 a. Diminutives ending in zuelo always denote con- 
 tempt or irony. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 405 
 
 b. Diminutives ending in cilio and illo often express 
 contempt, pity, or ugliness; while those in ito generally 
 express affection, gentleness, or beauty. 
 
 Mujercilla, Contemptible little woman, 
 
 Pobrecillo, Poor little fellow. 
 
 Hijito mío, My dear little son. 
 
 Pobrecito, Poor good little fellow. 
 
 c. The Diminutives ito, ita, may be used with differ- 
 ent parts of speech to give a special expression to the 
 words: 
 
 Vengo solito, I come quite alone. 
 
 d. Diminutives in eto, ejo, etc., are comparatively 
 little used. 
 
 3. The Augmentatives serve to increase the significa- 
 tion of the words from which they are derived. They end 
 in: onj achbn^ azo, onazo, or ote for the masculine; and in: 
 ona, azaj onaza, or ota for the feminine, as: 
 
 Hombrón, hombrachón, hombronazo (from hombre, man)^ hig^ 
 strong man. 
 
 Grandón, grandote, grandazo, grandonazo (from grande, large)^ 
 very large. 
 
 Mujerona, mujeraza, mujeronaza (from mujer, woman) y large, 
 strong woman. 
 
 a. There are many words, however, ending in azo, 
 which express an action, motion, or result, and are, 
 therefore, not augmentatives: 
 
 Pusil, rifle, gun. fusilazo, a shot from a rifle? 
 
 Pistola, pistol. pistoletazo, a shot from a pistol. 
 
 Cañón, gun. cañonazo, a shot from a gun. 
 
 4. Formation of Diminutives and Augmentatives. 
 — Words ending in o or a drop the last letter and 
 add ito, ita; ico, ica; illo, ilia; according to their gender: 
 Herman-ito, herman-ico, herman-illo, little brother; from hermano, 
 
 brother. 
 
 Cas-ita, cas-ica, cas-illa, little house; from casa, house. 
 
4o6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Note. — ^Words ending in go, besides dropping the o, 
 insert u after the g to preserve the soft sound of this 
 letter: 
 
 Un amigo, a friend. un amiguito, a little friend. 
 
 Those ending in co change the c into qu to preserve 
 the hard sound of the c : 
 
 Un barco, a ship. un barquito, a little ship. 
 
 A few words ending in o and a, after dropping the last 
 letter, add, however, the termination ecico, ecillo, etc. 
 Un huevo, an egg. un huevecillo, a small egg. 
 
 Una mano, a hand. una manecita, a small hand. 
 
 5. Monosyllables ending with a consonant form their 
 diminutive by adding ecito, ecico, ecillo, or ezuelo: 
 
 Una flor, 
 Una cruz, 
 Un pez, 
 Un rey. 
 
 a flower; 
 a cross; 
 a fish; 
 a king; 
 
 una florecita, 
 una crucecita, 
 un pececito, 
 un reyezuelo. 
 
 a little flower, 
 a little cross. , 
 a little fish, 
 a king {with a 
 small kingdom). 
 
 Note. — C ruz and pez change the final z into c. 
 
 6. Words of two or more syllables ending with a con- 
 sonant form their diminutive by adding ito, ico, illo, 
 ejo: 
 
 Un papel, a paper. un papelito, a small paper. 
 
 Un reloj, a watch. un relojito, a small watch. 
 
 7. Words of two syllables ending with an e, and 
 those of several syllables ending with an n or a z, add 
 cito, cico, cilio, or zuelo: 
 
 Un sastre, 
 Una nube, 
 Un capitán, 
 Un autor, 
 
 Una mujer. 
 
 a tailor; 
 a cloud; 
 a captain; 
 an author; 
 
 a woman; 
 
 un sastrecillo, 
 una nubecilla, 
 un capitancillo, 
 un autorzuelo, 
 
 una mujercita. 
 
 a little tailor, 
 a little cloud, 
 a little captain, 
 an insignificant 
 author. 
 
 a little woman. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 407 
 
 Exceptions. — ^Juanito, from Juan, John; volcanejo, 
 from volcán, volcano; and all words ending in in, form 
 an exception to this rule, the latter adding ito, etc. 
 Thus: 
 
 Jardín, garden, serafín, seraph. 
 
 Rocín, jade, 
 
 form in the diminutive jardinito, rocinito, and serafinito. 
 Jardincito is, however, often used. 
 
 8. Diminutives may also be decreased in the following 
 way: 
 
 From chico, small; chiquillo or chiquito, chiquitillo, chiquitito, 
 chiquituelo, chiquitilluelo, chiquitillito, chiquirritín, chiquirritito, 
 chiquirritillo, chiquirrituelo, etc. 
 
 In English we should say very, very small. 
 
 Even augmentatives may be decreased in the same 
 way: 
 
 Picaron, hig rogue; picaronzillo or picaronzuelo, little rogue. 
 
 9. Many diminutives as well as augmentatives drop 
 or preserve the letter i in the diphthong ie : 
 
 Un ciego, a blind man; un cieguecillo or ceguecillo, a little blind man. 
 Un diente, a tooth; tm dientecillo or dentecillo, a small tooth. 
 Una piedra, a stone; una piedrezuela or pedrezuela, a small stone. 
 
 10. Other words change the diphthong ue into o or 
 remain unchanged. 
 
 Un buey, an ox; un bueyecillo or boyecillo, small ox. 
 
 Un hueso, a bone; un huesecillo or osecillo, a small bone. 
 
 11. There are words in Spanish with diminutive and 
 augmentative terminations, which may have been used 
 formerly as such, but which at present have a determined 
 signification: 
 
 Matón, bravo ^ cut-throat. Islilla, side. 
 
 Cegato, short-sighted. Peluquín, wig. 
 
 Espadín, sword of the state ^ etc.^ etc. 
 
4o8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 General Observations. — The words pequeño, small, 
 and grande, large, may be used at all times with the 
 noun, but in many cases they would not be according to 
 the genius of the Spanish language, which requires di- 
 minutives or augmentatives. This is especially the case 
 with diminutives. 
 
 The pronunciation of diminutives or augmentatives 
 is generally different from that of the word from which 
 they are derived, and the written accent of the primitive 
 word is left out in the derived word, as: 
 
 Árbol, tree, arbolito, small tree. 
 
 Pájaro, bird, pajarito, small bird, etc. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb Haber, To Have. 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 he. 
 
 I have. 
 
 haya. 
 
 I may have. 
 
 has. 
 
 thou hast. 
 
 hayas. 
 
 thou mayest have. 
 
 ha. 
 
 he has. 
 
 haya. 
 
 he may have. 
 
 hemos. 
 
 we have. 
 
 hayamos, 
 
 we may have. 
 
 habéis. 
 
 ye have. 
 
 hayáis. 
 
 ye may have. 
 
 han. 
 
 they have. 
 
 hayan. 
 
 they may have. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 había, 
 
 I had. 
 
 hubiera. 
 
 I might have. 
 
 habías, 
 
 thou hadst. 
 
 hubieras. 
 
 thou mightest have. 
 
 había. 
 
 he had. 
 
 hubiera. 
 
 he might have. 
 
 habíamos, 
 
 we had. 
 
 hubiéramos. 
 
 we might have. 
 
 habíais. 
 
 ye had. 
 
 hubierais. 
 
 ye might have. 
 
 habían. 
 
 they had. 
 
 hubieran. 
 
 they might have. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 409 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Past. Imperfect {second form). 
 
 hube. 
 
 I had. 
 
 hubiese. 
 
 I might have. 
 
 hubiste. 
 
 thou hadst. 
 
 hubieses. 
 
 thou mightest have, 
 
 hubo. 
 
 he had. 
 
 hubiese. 
 
 he might have. 
 
 hubimos. 
 
 we had. 
 
 hubiésemos. 
 
 we might have. 
 
 hubisteis. 
 
 ye had. 
 
 hubieseis, 
 
 ye might have. 
 
 hubieron. 
 
 they had. 
 
 hubiesen, 
 
 they might have. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future. 
 
 habré. 
 
 I shall have. 
 
 hubiere, 
 
 I should have. 
 
 habrás. 
 
 thou wilt have. 
 
 hubieres. 
 
 thou shouldst have. 
 
 habrá. 
 
 he will have. 
 
 hubiere. 
 
 he should have. 
 
 habremos. 
 
 we shall have. 
 
 hubiéremos. 
 
 we should have. 
 
 habréis. 
 
 ye will have. 
 
 hubiereis. 
 
 ye should have. 
 
 habrán. 
 
 they will have. 
 
 hubieren, , 
 
 they should have. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 habría. 
 
 I should have. 
 
 hubiera. 
 
 or hubiese. 
 
 habrías. 
 
 thou wouldst have, hubieras 
 
 or hubieses, . 
 
 habría. 
 
 he would have. 
 
 hubiera. 
 
 or hubiese. 
 
 habríamos. 
 
 we should have. 
 
 hubiéramos. 
 
 or hubiésemos. 
 
 habríais. 
 
 ye would have. 
 
 hubierais 
 
 or hubieseis. 
 
 habrían. 
 
 they would have. 
 
 hubieran 
 
 or hubiesen. 
 
 Infinitive. * Gerund. Past Participle. 
 
 haber, to have, habiendo, having, habido, had. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. Present Perfect. 
 
 he habido, I have had, 
 has habido, thou hast had. 
 ha habido, he has had. 
 hemos habido, we have had. 
 habéis habido, ye have had. 
 han habido, they have had. 
 
 haya habido, I may have had. 
 hayas habido, thou mayst have had. 
 haya habido, he may have had. 
 hayamos habido, we may have had. 
 hayáis habido, ye may have had. 
 hayan habido, they may have had. 
 
 If I hadj etc. 
 
410 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Past Perfect. Past Perfect (first form), 
 
 había habido, I had had hubiera habido, I might have had, 
 
 habías habido, thou hadst had, hubieras habido, thou mightest 
 etc, etc, etc. have had, etc. 
 
 Past Anterior. Past Perfect (second form). 
 
 hube habido, I had had. hubiese habido, I might have had. 
 
 hubiste habido, thou hadst had, hubieses habido, thou mightest have 
 etc. etc. etc. had, etc. 
 
 Future Perfect. Future Perfect. 
 
 habré habido, I shall have had. habiere habido, I shall have had. 
 habrás habido, thou wilt have hubieres habido, thou wilt have had, 
 etc. had, etc. etc. etc. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 , , ^ - { I should have 
 
 habna habido, < 
 
 . , ^ 11.-, Í thou wouldst 
 
 habrías habido, < , , , 
 
 [ have had, 
 
 etc, etc. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 hubiera or hubiese / I should have 
 habido. 1 had. 
 
 hubieras or hubieses Í thou shouldst 
 habido, \ have had, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Remarks on Haber. 
 
 1. Haber can only be used as an auxiliary verb pre- 
 ceding the past participle, as: 
 
 He recibido una carta, I have received a letter. 
 
 Hemos venido de París, We have come from Paris. 
 
 I Han llegado V.V. solos? Have you (pi.) arrived alone? 
 
 2. In interrogative sentences haber must always stand 
 next to the principal verb, as: 
 
 I Ha venido su hermano? Has your brother come? 
 
 I Ha pagado V.? Have you paid? 
 
 3. Haber de with the infinitive of another verb sig- 
 nifies — ^like tener que — duty or obligation, and must 
 be translated by to have to, must, to be to, etc., as: 
 He de hacer la correspondencia, I have to attend to the correspond- 
 ence. 
 
 Había de escribir una carta, I had to write a letter. 
 
 I Qué había de hacer yo? What was I to do? 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 411 
 
 4. Haber can be used impersonally, i. e., in the third 
 person singular. When followed by que and the infinitive 
 of some other verb it expresses necessity or obligation, 
 and is rendered by to be necessary, as: 
 
 I Qué hay que hacer? What is to he done? 
 
 Ha habido que salir, It was necessary to go out. 
 
 5. When used impersonally, haber has many idio- 
 matic meanings and corresponds: 
 
 a. to the English there is, 
 
 Presente: Hay hombres en el 
 jardín, 
 
 Imperfecto : Había fiestas en 
 
 la ciudad. 
 
 Definido: Hubo baile en pala- 
 cio. 
 
 Futuro: ¿ Habrá un baile ma- 
 ñana? 
 
 (Condicional: Habría paz en 
 
 Francia, si. . . . 
 
 there are, as: 
 
 There are some men in the garden. 
 There were some festivities in town. 
 There was a hall at the palace. 
 Will there he a hall to-morrow? 
 
 There would he peace in France, 
 
 if. .. . 
 
 Note. — The Present Perfect is ha habido. 
 
 b. Hay, etc., signifies time and is frequently trans- 
 
 lated by ago, as: 
 
 I Cuánto tiempo hay que están 
 V.V. aquí? 
 
 Hay muy poco tiempo que he- 
 mos llegado, 
 
 Hay ocho diás que le he visto, \ 
 Ocho días há que le he visto, J 
 Murió hay mucho tiempb. 
 
 Hay ocho años que está malo, 
 
 c. Hay expresses distance, 
 ¿ Qué distancia hay de aquí a 
 Chihuahua? 
 
 No hay lejos. 
 
 Hay treinta millas. 
 
 Since when are you here? or how 
 long have you been here? 
 
 We arrived a very short time ago. 
 
 I saw him a week ago. 
 
 He died a long time ago. 
 
 He has been ill these eight years. 
 
 as: 
 
 How far is it from here to Chihua- 
 hua! 
 
 It is not far. 
 
 It is thirty miles. 
 
412 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb. 
 
 Haber Que, To he necessary. 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 Hay que, it is necessary. 
 
 Había que, it was or it used to he 
 necessary. 
 
 Hubo que, it was necessary. 
 Habrá que, it will he necessary. 
 Habría que, it should or would he 
 necessary. 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 Haya que, it may he necessary. 
 Hubiera que, it might he necessary. 
 
 Hubiese que, it might be neces- 
 sary. 
 
 Si hubiera, or si hubiese que, if it 
 were or should he necessary. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Hay que ir al correo, It is necessary to go to the post- 
 
 office. 
 
 Habrá que leer los libros. It will he necessary to read the 
 
 hooks. 
 
 Si hubiese cartas habría que con- If there were any letters it would 
 testarlas, he necessary to answer them. 
 
 The compound tenses are formed in the same w'ay as 
 their corresponding forms with haber adding que, thus: 
 
 Modo Indicativo. 
 
 Ha habido que. It has been 
 Había habido que, necessary 
 
 Hubo habido que, /a, etc. 
 
 Habrá habido que. 
 
 Habría habido que. 
 
 Modo Subjuntivo. 
 
 Haya habido que. It may have 
 Hubiera habido que, heen neces- 
 Hubiese habido que, sary to^ etc. 
 Si hubiera or si hubiese 
 habido que. 
 
 Example. 
 
 Ha habido que ir a la aduana, It has heen necessary to go to the 
 
 Custom-House. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb Tener, To Have. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 tener, to have. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Gerund. 
 teniendo, having. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 tenido, had. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 413 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 tengo, 
 
 I have. 
 
 tenga. 
 
 I may have. 
 
 tienes, 
 
 thou hast. 
 
 tengas. 
 
 thou mayst have. 
 
 tiene. 
 
 he has. 
 
 tenga. 
 
 he may have. 
 
 tenemos, 
 
 we have. 
 
 tengamos. 
 
 we may have. 
 
 tenéis. 
 
 ye have. 
 
 tengáis. 
 
 ye may have. 
 
 tienen, 
 
 they have. 
 
 tengan. 
 
 they may have. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 tenía. 
 
 / had. 
 
 tuviera. 
 
 I should have. 
 
 tenías. 
 
 thou hadst. 
 
 tuvieras. 
 
 thou shouldst have. 
 
 tenía. 
 
 he had. 
 
 tuviera. 
 
 he should have. 
 
 teníamos. 
 
 we had. 
 
 tuviéramos. 
 
 we should have. 
 
 teníais, 
 
 ye hod. 
 
 tuvierais. 
 
 ye should have. 
 
 tenían. 
 
 they had. 
 
 tuvieran, 
 
 they should have. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 Imperfect {second form) . 
 
 tuve. 
 
 I had. 
 
 tuviese. 
 
 I might or should have 
 
 tuviste. 
 
 thou hadst. 
 
 tuvieses. 
 
 thou mightest have. 
 
 tuvo. 
 
 he had. 
 
 tuviese. 
 
 he might have. 
 
 tuvimos. 
 
 we had. 
 
 tuviésemos. 
 
 we might have. 
 
 tuvisteis. 
 
 we had. 
 
 tuvieseis. 
 
 ye might have. 
 
 tuvieron. 
 
 they had. 
 
 tuviesen. 
 
 they might have. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 tendré. 
 
 I shall have. 
 
 tuviere. 
 
 I shall have. 
 
 tendrás. 
 
 thou wilt have. 
 
 tuvieres. 
 
 thou wilt have. 
 
 tendrá. 
 
 he will have. 
 
 tuviere. 
 
 he will have. 
 
 tendremos. 
 
 , we shall have. 
 
 tuviéremos. 
 
 we shall have. 
 
 tendréis. 
 
 ye will have. 
 
 tuviereis. 
 
 ye will have. 
 
 tendrán. 
 
 they will have. 
 
 tuvieren, 
 
 they will have. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 tendría, I should have. 
 
 tendrías, thou wouldst have, 
 
 tendría, he would have. 
 
 tendríamos, we should have. 
 
 tendríais, ye would have. 
 
 tendrían, they would have. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 tuviera, or tuviese, 
 
 tuvieras, or tuvieses, 
 
 tuviera, or tuviese, 
 
 tuviéramos, or tuviésemos 
 
 tuvierais or tuvieseis, 
 
 tuvieran, or tuviesen. 
 
 If I should have. 
 
414 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 ten (tú), have {thou). 
 
 tenga (él), let him have. 
 
 tenga V., have {you). 
 
 tengamos, let us have. 
 tened, have {ye). 
 
 tengan, let them have. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 Present Perfect. 
 he tenido, I have had. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 había tenido, I had had. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 hube tenido, I had had. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 habré tenido, I shall have had. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 habría tenido, I should have had. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 Present Perfect. 
 haya tenido, I may have had. 
 
 Past Perfect {first form). 
 hubiera tenido, I might have had. 
 
 Past Perfect {second form). 
 hubiese tenido, I shall have had. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 hubiere tenido, I shall have had. 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 hubiera or hu- 
 biese tenido 
 
 I should have had. 
 
 Remarks on Tener, To Have. 
 
 I. There are two verbs in Spanish corresponding to 
 our to have — ^haber and tener. 
 
 2. Haber is used exclusively in the formation of com- 
 pound tenses, while tener is used as an active verb indi- 
 cating possession; (in which case to have may generally 
 be replaced by to possess or to hold^ without affecting the 
 meaning of the sentence). 
 
 Thus: 
 
 He comprado un sombrero, I have bought a hat {compound tense) 
 
 Tengo un sombrero, I have a hat {i. e., I possess a hat). 
 
 Tuvo amigos, He had {i. e., he possessed) friends. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 415 
 
 3. Tener is used idiomatically with the following 
 words: 
 
 Tengo hambre, 
 tengo sed, 
 tengo calor, 
 tengo frío, 
 tengo sueño, 
 tengo vergüenza, 
 tengo miedo de . . 
 tengo razón, 
 no tengo razón, 
 tengo gana de . . 
 
 I am hungry. 
 
 I am thirsty. 
 
 I am warm. 
 
 I am cold. 
 
 I am sleepy. 
 
 I am ashamed. 
 
 I am afraid to 
 I am right. 
 
 I am wrong. 
 
 I have a mind to 
 
 {Literally ^ I have hunger) ^ 
 
 I have thirst). 
 
 I have warmth). 
 I have cold). 
 
 I have sleep). 
 
 I have shame). 
 
 I have fear to . 
 
 I have right). 
 
 I have not right). 
 
 •). 
 
 ¿Qué tiene V.? What is the matter with you? {What have you)? 
 No tengo nada. Nothing is the matter with me {I have nothing). 
 Tengo algo. Something is the matter with me {I have something). 
 ¿Tiene V. algo? Is anything the matter with you? {Have you 
 something)? 
 
 4. Tener is used in statements or inquiries about the 
 age of persons, etc. 
 
 ¿ Qué edad or 1 y p How old are you? {What age [or^ 
 I Cuántos años / ‘ ’ how many years] have you) ? 
 
 Tengo cuarenta y cinco años, I am forty-five years old. 
 
 5. Tener is used in speaking of the size or dimension 
 of objects, as: 
 
 Este río tiene ochenta pies de This river is 80 feet broad {has 80 
 ancho. feet of breadth). 
 
 6. Tener que with the infinitive of another verb ex- 
 presses necessity or obligation, as: 
 
 Tengo que escribir una carta, I must write a letter. 
 
 Tenía que hacer una visita, I was obliged to make a call. 
 Tenemos que salir, We have to start. 
 
 7. The verb tener is also used in Spanish to express 
 
4i6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 the age; and, in inquiring about the age of a person, 
 they say: 
 
 I Qué edad tiene . . . . ? What age has 
 
 ¿ Cuántos años tiene . . . . ? How many years has . . . . ? 
 
 The word años, years, must not be left out either in the 
 question or in the answer, unless expressed in the last part 
 of the sentence; 
 
 I Cuántos años tiene V. ? How old are you? 
 
 Tengo veinte años y mi hermano / am twenty and my brother is 
 diez y ocho, eighteen. 
 
 Observation. — Tener más edad, or ser de más edad 
 is used for older, when comparing the age of persons who 
 are not really old. 
 
 8. Tener ^Igo malo means to have a pain, a sore, or 
 ache somewhere, and is used in Spanish with the definite 
 article: 
 
 Tengo el ojo malo, / have a sore eye. 
 
 Tenemos los pies malos. We have sore feet. 
 
 El tiene la rodilla mala. He has a sore knee. 
 
 9. The definite article is also used before verbs express- 
 ing moral or physical properties: 
 
 Tiene los ojos azules. He has blue eyes. 
 
 Tienen los pies grandes, They have large feet. 
 
 Observation. — The same article is used in the singu- 
 lar, when speaking of several persons, if the property 
 spoken of is single: 
 
 É1 tiene la nariz larga. He has a long nose. 
 
 Elios tienen la nariz larga. They have long noses, 
 
 10. In speaking of the dimensions or size of objects, 
 the Spanish use the verb tener, to have: 
 
 Este árbol tiene cien pies de This tree is a hundred feet high. 
 alto. 
 
 La calle tiene cincuenta pies de The street is fifty feet wide. 
 ancho, 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 417 
 
 II. The verb tener is used before an infinitive with the 
 conjunction que when obligation or necessity is expressed: 
 
 I Qué tiene V. ? — Tengo dolor de cabeza. — ^Tuve la 
 satisfacción de verla ayer. — Tenemos el honor de anun- 
 ciarlo a V. — Tengo que hablar con V. cuando V. tenga 
 tiempo . — I Qué ha estudiado V. hoy? — He estado muy 
 ocupado escribiendo la correspondencia. — ¿ Ha escrito 
 V. las cartas en español? — No señor, yo he hecho la co- 
 rrespondencia alemana, y el corresponsal español escribió 
 la española. — ¿ Hay mucha correspondecia española en 
 su casa de V.? — Sí, tenemos relaciones comerciales con la 
 América del Sur. — ¿ Quiere V. hacerme efectiva esta letra? 
 Necesito dinero mejicano y no tengo sino americano. — 
 Con mucho gusto, señor. ¿ Cuánto desea V. ? — ¿Hemos de 
 ir al banco inmediatamente? — Si señor, hemos de ir en 
 seguida, porque los bancos cierran a las tres. — ^Tengo que 
 ir al correo ahora, pues espero algunas cartas. — ¿ Espera 
 V. unas de Bóston? — Sí; necesito tener un poder^ de 
 nuestra casa. — El poder tiene que ser firmado y ates- 
 tiguado^ por un notário público;^ de otra manera^ no 
 es válido . — I Quiere V. venir conmigo a la ciudad? — 
 Con mucho gusto. ¿ Qué tiene V. que hacer? — Tengo 
 que ir a la mercería. Tengo que hacer algimas com- 
 pras. — ¿ Qué es lo que tiene V. que comprar? — De- 
 seo comprar unas bagatelas.® — ¿ Cuándo habrá vapor 
 correo® para Barcelona? — Hay correo para España los 
 días cinco, quince y veinticinco de cada mes. 
 
 ^ A power of attorney. 2 Must be signed and witnessed. ^ A 
 Notary Public. ^ Otherwise. ® Trifles. ® Mail-steamer. 
 
 Tengo que escribir cartas, 
 Tenemos que salir, 
 
 I have letters to write. 
 We have to go out. 
 
 EXERCISE, 
 
4i8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb Ser, To be. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Infinitive. Gerund. Past Participle. 
 
 ser, to he, siendo, being, sido, been. 
 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 soy, 
 
 I am. 
 
 sea. 
 
 I mcCy be. 
 
 eres, 
 
 thou art. 
 
 seas. 
 
 thou mayst be. 
 
 es, 
 
 he is. 
 
 sea. 
 
 he may be. 
 
 somos, 
 
 we are. 
 
 seamos 
 
 , we may be. 
 
 sois, 
 
 ye are. 
 
 seáis. 
 
 ye may be. ^ 
 
 son. 
 
 they are. 
 
 sean. 
 
 they may be. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 era. 
 
 I was. 
 
 fuera. 
 
 I might be. 
 
 eras. 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 fueras. 
 
 thou mightest be. 
 
 era. 
 
 he was. 
 
 fuera. 
 
 he might be. 
 
 éramos. 
 
 we were. 
 
 fuéramos, we might be. 
 
 erais. 
 
 ye were. 
 
 fuerais. 
 
 ye might be. 
 
 eran. 
 
 they were. 
 
 fueran. 
 
 they might be. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 Imperfect {second form). 
 
 fui. 
 
 / was. 
 
 fuese. 
 
 I might be. 
 
 fuiste. 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 fueses. 
 
 thou mightest be. 
 
 fué. 
 
 he was. 
 
 fuese. 
 
 he might be. 
 
 fuimos. 
 
 we were. 
 
 fuésemos, we might be. 
 
 fuisteis. 
 
 ye were. 
 
 fueseis, 
 
 ye might be. 
 
 fueron. 
 
 they were. 
 
 fuesen. 
 
 they might be. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 seré. 
 
 I shall be. 
 
 fuere. 
 
 I should be. 
 
 serás. 
 
 thou wilt be. 
 
 fueres. 
 
 thou shouldst be. 
 
 será. 
 
 he will be. 
 
 fuere. 
 
 he should be. 
 
 seremos. 
 
 we shall be. 
 
 fuéremos, we should be. 
 
 sereis. 
 
 ye will be. 
 
 fuereis. 
 
 ye should be. 
 
 serán. 
 
 they will be. 
 
 fueren. 
 
 they should be. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 419 
 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 sería, 
 
 I should be. 
 
 fuera 
 
 or fuese. 
 
 serías, 
 
 thou wouldst be. 
 
 fueras 
 
 or fueses. 
 
 sería, 
 
 he would be. 
 
 fuera 
 
 or fuese. 
 
 seríamos, we should be. 
 
 fuéramos. 
 
 or fuésemos. 
 
 seríais, 
 
 ye would be. 
 
 fuerais 
 
 or fueseis. 
 
 serían. 
 
 they would be. 
 
 fueran 
 
 or fuesen. 
 
 
 Imperative Mode. 
 
 
 sé. 
 
 be {thou). 
 
 séamos. 
 
 let us be. 
 
 sea. 
 
 let him be. 
 
 sed. 
 
 be {ye). 
 
 sea V., 
 
 be {you). 
 
 sean. 
 
 let them be. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. Present Perfect. 
 
 he sido, I have been, haya sido, I may have been. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 había sido, I had been. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 hube sido, I had been. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 habré sido, I shall have been. 
 
 Past Perfect {first form). 
 hubiera sido, I might have been. 
 Past Perfect {second form). 
 hubiese sido, I might have been, 
 Future Perfect. 
 hubiere sido, I shall have been. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 habría sido, I should have been. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 hubiera or hu- \ I should have 
 biese sido, J been. 
 
 The Auxiliary Verb Estar, To be. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 estar, to be. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Gerund. 
 estando, being. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 estado, been. 
 
420 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present. 
 
 estoy, 
 
 / am. 
 
 estás. 
 
 thou art. 
 
 está. 
 
 he is. 
 
 estamos. 
 
 we are. 
 
 estáis. 
 
 ye are. 
 
 están. 
 
 they are. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 estaba. 
 
 I was. 
 
 estabas. 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 estaba. 
 
 he was. 
 
 estábamos. 
 
 we were. 
 
 estabais. 
 
 ye were. 
 
 estaban. 
 
 they were. 
 Past. 
 
 estuve. 
 
 I was. 
 
 estuviste. 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 estuvo. 
 
 he was. 
 
 estuvimos. 
 
 we were. 
 
 estuvisteis. 
 
 we were. 
 
 estuvieron. 
 
 they were. 
 Future. 
 
 estaré. 
 
 I shall he. 
 
 estarás. 
 
 thou wilt he. 
 
 estará. 
 
 he will he. 
 
 estaremos. 
 
 we shall he. 
 
 estaréis. 
 
 ye will he. 
 
 estarán. 
 
 they will he. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 estaría. 
 
 - I should he. 
 
 estarías. 
 
 thou wouldst he. 
 
 estaría. 
 
 he would he. 
 
 estaríamos. 
 
 we should he. 
 
 estaríais. 
 
 ye would he. 
 
 estarían. 
 
 they would he. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present. 
 
 esté. 
 
 I may he. 
 
 estés. 
 
 thou mayst he. 
 
 esté. 
 
 he may he. 
 
 estemos. 
 
 we may he. 
 
 estéis. 
 
 ye may he. 
 
 estén. 
 
 they may he. 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 estuviera. 
 
 I might he. 
 
 estuvieras. 
 
 thou mightest he. 
 
 estuviera. 
 
 he might he. 
 
 estuviéramos. 
 
 we might he. 
 
 estuvierais. 
 
 ye might he. 
 
 estuvieran. 
 
 they might he. 
 
 Imperfect {second form). 
 
 estuviese. 
 
 I might he. 
 
 estuvieses. 
 
 thou mightest he. 
 
 estuviese. 
 
 he might he. 
 
 estuviésemos. 
 
 we might he. 
 
 estuvieseis. 
 
 ye might he. 
 
 estuviesen. 
 
 they might he. 
 
 Future. 
 
 estuviere. 
 
 I should he. 
 
 estuvieres. 
 
 thou shouldst he. 
 
 estuviere. 
 
 he should he. 
 
 estuviéremos, we should he, 
 estuviereis, ye should he. 
 estuvieren, they should he. 
 
 Conditional. 
 estuviera or estuviese, 
 estuvieras oy estuvieses, 
 estuviera or estuviese, 
 estuviéramos 
 
 or estuviésemos, 
 estuvierais or estuvieseis, 
 estuvieran or estuviesen, 
 
 {if) I had heeUf etc. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 421 
 
 está, 
 esté, 
 esté V., 
 
 he {thou), 
 let him he, 
 he {you). 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 estemos, let us he, 
 
 estad, he {ye), 
 
 estén, let them he. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 he estado, I have been. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 
 había estado, I had been. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 hube estado, I had been. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 habré estado, I shall have been. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 , , ^ - (’/ should have 
 
 habna estado, •< 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 haya estado, I may have been. 
 Past Perfect {first form), 
 hubiera estado, I might have been. 
 Past Perfect {second form), 
 huviese estado, I might have been. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 hubiere estado, I should have been. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 hubiera or hubiesel r-r\ n j t 
 estado, \(.rf)Ihadbeen. 
 
 Remarks on Ser and Estar. 
 
 There are two verbs in Spanish corresponding to our 
 verb to be , — ser and estar. Their proper use presents 
 great difficulty to English-speaking persons, which-^ 
 to a certain extent — will be removed if the following rules 
 are mastered: 
 
 I. Ser is used when the attribute is natural, inherent, 
 or essential, that is to say when the person or thing spoken 
 of is likely to remain where it is, what it is, or as it is. 
 It therefore must always be employed when the national- 
 ity, rank, profession, employment, dignity, inherent men- 
 tal or bodily quality is described, as: 
 
 Este señor es juez. This gentleman is a judge. 
 
 Este señor es francés. This gentleman is a Frenchman. 
 
 Este señor es librero, This gentleman is a bookseller. 
 
422 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Este señor es alto, 
 
 Este señor es pequeño, 
 El hierro es duro, 
 
 Esta planta es venenosa, 
 Esta niña es bonita. 
 
 This gentleman is tall. 
 This gentleman is small. 
 Iron is hard. 
 
 This plant is poisonous. 
 This girl is pretty. 
 
 a. Ser is used to indicate possession, origin, or ma- 
 
 terial, as: 
 
 Aquella casa es mía, y esta es de 
 Don Pedro, 
 
 Esas plumas son de Juan, y esta 
 carta es para V., 
 
 El sombrero es de aquel caba- 
 llero. 
 
 La casa es de marmol. 
 
 El reloj es de oro. 
 
 That house is mine and this is Don 
 Pedro's {or, this belongs to 
 Don Pedro). 
 
 These pens belong to John, and 
 this letter is for you. 
 
 The hat belongs to that gentleman. 
 
 The house is marble {of marble). 
 The watch is gold. 
 
 b. Ser is used when speaking of the time of day or 
 night or to express the number of things or persons, as: 
 
 I Qué hora es? 
 
 Es la una, 
 
 Son las diez y cuarto. 
 
 Es de día. 
 
 Es de noche. 
 
 Es tarde, 
 
 Es temprano. 
 
 Eran noventa discípulos. 
 
 What timeds it? 
 
 It is one o'clock. 
 
 It is a quarter past ten {=ten and 
 a quarter). 
 
 It is day. 
 
 It is night. 
 
 It is late. 
 
 It is early. 
 
 There were ninety pupils. 
 
 2. Estar must always be employed when the attribute 
 is only temporary or accidental, that is to say when a 
 change may take place or may, at least, be reasonably 
 expected. Thus we say: Yo estoy aquí, / am here, that 
 is to say: I am here just now, but at any moment it may 
 occur to me, or I may be obliged to go somewhere else. But: 
 I Quién es aquella señora? Who is this lady? Ser must 
 be employed, and not estar, because whoever the lady 
 may be, she will remain a female. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 423 
 
 How do you do? 
 
 I am well. 
 
 Since when have you been ill? 
 
 a. Estar is used therefore to express the state of health, 
 as: 
 
 I Cómo está V. ? 
 
 Estoy bueno, 
 
 I Desde cuándo está V. malo? 
 
 b. Estar is used in connection with certain adjectives 
 
 to express emotions, feelings, or a state of being, as: 
 
 Estoy contento, I am satisfied. 
 
 Estoy triste, / am sad. 
 
 Esta sopa está caliente, This soup is hot. 
 
 Este pan está frío. This bread is cold, 
 
 El vino está agrio. The wine is sour. 
 
 c. Estar is used to express temporary existence in a 
 certain locality, as : 
 
 Está en el café, 
 
 Yo estoy aquí, 
 
 Los soldados estarán aquí ma- 
 ñana, 
 
 Él estaba a la puerta. 
 
 He is at the cafe. 
 
 I am here. 
 
 The soldiers will be here to- 
 morrow. 
 
 He was at the door. 
 
 d. Estar is used to express intention or willingness to 
 do a thing, as: 
 
 Estoy para salir, I intend to go out. 
 
 e. Estar is used before adverbs or adverbial expressions 
 denoting condition, as: 
 
 Mi sombrero está de moda. My hat is the fashion {in the 
 
 fashion). 
 
 I Está V. de prisa? Are you in a hurry? 
 
 f. Estar is used as auxiliary in the conjugation of verbs 
 in the Gerund, as: 
 
 Estoy leyendo un libro, 
 
 Juan está escribiendo una carta. 
 Los discípulos estaban estudian- 
 do su lección. 
 
 Los barqueros estarán cargan- 
 do sus navios con naranjas, 
 
 I am reading a book. 
 
 John is writing a letter. 
 
 The pupils were studying their 
 lesson. 
 
 The bargemen will be loading their 
 vessels with oranges. 
 
424 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Ser and Estar Compared. 
 
 To make the difference between ser and estar still 
 clearer we give the following examples: 
 
 Esta puerta es alta, This door is high. 
 
 Esta puerta está cerrada, This door is locked. 
 
 We must say es alta, because its height is an inherent 
 and almost unchangeable attribute of the door in question. 
 But we must use está cerrada, because its being locked is 
 merely temporary. 
 
 For this reason many adjectives have an entirely differ- 
 ent meaning when used with ser or estar. 
 
 Inherent Quality. Temporary Stííte. 
 
 Ser bueno, to he good; to he kind- 
 hearted. 
 
 Ser malo, to he had. 
 
 Ser vivo, to he lively. 
 
 Ser contento, to he of a contented 
 nature. 
 
 Esto es muy alto, this is very high. 
 
 El vind de Concord es agrio. Con- 
 cord wine is sour. 
 
 Estar bueno, to he well; to he in 
 good health. 
 
 Estar malo, to he ill. 
 
 Estar vivo, to he alive. 
 
 Estar contento, {to happen) to he 
 satisfied. 
 
 Esto está muy alto, this happens 
 to he placed very high. 
 
 Este vino está agrio, this wine is 
 {happens to he) sour. 
 
 / 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 ¿ Cómo está V., señor? — Muy bien, gracias. — ¿ Es V. 
 el maestro de idiomas? — Sí, señor. — Quiero aprender el 
 idioma español. Mi hermano me dijo que V. en- 
 seña este idioma y yo deseo hablar y comprenderlo muy 
 pronto, porque voy a Méjico. Mi hermana está en 
 España con mi padre y yo, que soy el hijo menor, he 
 quedado aquí solo. ¿ Qué está V. haciendo tan tarde? 
 — Estoy escribiendo una carta a mi agente. — ¿Y su. 
 hermano de V. qué hace? — Está estudiando el caste- 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 425 
 
 llano y al mismo tiempo hace la correspondencia para 
 nuestra casa en alemán. — ¿ Quién es ese hombre? — Es 
 el tenedor de libros de mi casa. — ¿ Y qué vende V.? — 
 Soy fabricante de mesas para comedor . — ¿ No está la 
 casa del general López en la calle de Madrid? — El general 
 no tiene casa aquí. 
 
 ¿ Qué edificio es este? — ^Es una posada. — Entremos. 
 Denos un cuarto con dos camas. Estoy muy cansado 
 y deseo descansar .^ — ¿ Qué es la gramática? — Es el 
 arte^ de expresarnos correctamente por medio^ de pala- 
 bras . — ¿ Qué son palabras? — Son los sonidos articula- 
 dos^ con que nos expresamos. — ¿ De qué se componen 
 las palabras? — De sílabas. — ¿ Y las sílabas? — De letras. 
 — ¿ En qué se dividen estas? — En vocales y consonantes. — 
 ¿ Cuáles son las partes de la oración? — Nombre, adjetivo, 
 artículo, pronombre, verbo, adverbio, participio, pre- 
 posición, conjunción e^ interjección. — ¿ Qué quiere V. 
 comprar esta mañana? — Lléveme a casa d.e un sastre. — 
 Vamos a casa del sastre Parisiense .® — ¿ A qué distancia 
 de aquí está esa sastrería? — Como a una milla. Vamos a 
 tomar el tranvía; aquí viene. ¡Conductor, pare V.P — 
 Sentémonos; aquí hay lugar para los dos. — Esta es la 
 sastrería. Aquí encontrará V. el surtido® más completo 
 de ropa hecha^ que hay en la ciudad. 
 
 Conjugation of the Regular Verbs. 
 
 1. All verbs in Spanish end in ar, er, or ir. 
 
 2. Verbs of the first conjugation end in ar. 
 
 Verbs of the second conjugation end in er. 
 
 Verbs of ihe third conjugation end in ir. 
 
 ^To rest. ^The art. ^By means of. ^Articulated sounds. 
 ® Before words commencing with i or hi the conjunction y is changed 
 into e, as verano e invierno, summer and winter; padre e hijo, father 
 and son. ® Parisian. ^ Stop. * The stock. ^ Ready made cloth- 
 ing. 
 
42Ó 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 3. By striking off these endings we get the stem of 
 the verb, as: am-ar, to love (stem am-); com-er, to eat 
 (stem com-); recib-ir, to receive (stem recib-). 
 
 4. To the stem we add the verb-endings of the differ- 
 ent tenses, persons, and modes. 
 
 Table of Verb-Endings. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Gerund. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 1. — 
 
 -ar. 
 
 
 -ando, 
 
 — ado, 
 
 2. — er. 
 
 
 -iendo, 
 
 — ido. 
 
 3- - 
 
 ■b', 
 
 
 -iendo, 
 
 — ido. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3* 
 
 — 0. 
 
 — 0. 
 
 — 0. 
 
 — e. 
 
 — a. 
 
 — a. 
 
 — ^as. 
 
 — es. 
 
 — es. 
 
 — es. 
 
 — as. 
 
 — as. 
 
 — a.. 
 
 — e. 
 
 — e. 
 
 — e. 
 
 — a. 
 
 — a. 
 
 — amos. 
 
 — emos. 
 
 — ^imos. 
 
 — emos. 
 
 — amos. 
 
 — amos. 
 
 — áis. 
 
 — éis. 
 
 — ^is. 
 
 — éis. 
 
 — áis. 
 
 — áis. 
 
 — ^an. 
 
 — en. 
 
 — en. 
 
 — en. 
 
 — an. 
 
 — ^an. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 — aba. 
 
 — ia. 
 
 — ^ia. 
 
 — ^ara. 
 
 — iera. 
 
 — iera. 
 
 — abas. 
 
 — ias. 
 
 — ias. 
 
 — ^aras. 
 
 — ieras. 
 
 — ieras. 
 
 — aba. 
 
 — ia. 
 
 — ia. 
 
 — ara. 
 
 — iera. 
 
 — iera. 
 
 — ábamos 
 
 . — iamos. 
 
 — iamos, 
 
 — áramos. 
 
 — iéramos. 
 
 — iéramos. 
 
 — ^abais. 
 
 — iais. 
 
 — iais. 
 
 -^arais. 
 
 — ierais. 
 
 — ierais. 
 
 — aban. 
 
 — fan. 
 
 — ian. 
 
 — ^aran. 
 
 — ieran. 
 
 — ieran. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 Imperfect {second form). 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3* 
 
 — é. 
 
 — Í. 
 
 — i. 
 
 — ase. 
 
 — iese. 
 
 — iese. 
 
 — aste. 
 
 — iste. 
 
 — iste. 
 
 — ^ases. 
 
 — ieses. 
 
 — ieses. 
 
 — Ó. 
 
 — ió. 
 
 — ió. 
 
 — ase. 
 
 — iese. 
 
 — iese. 
 
 — amos. 
 
 — irnos. 
 
 — irnos. 
 
 — ásemos. 
 
 — iésemos. 
 
 — iésemos. 
 
 — ^asteis. 
 
 — isteis. 
 
 — ^isteis. 
 
 — ^aseis. 
 
 — ieseis. 
 
 — ieseis. 
 
 — ^aron. 
 
 — ieron. 
 
 — ieron. 
 
 — asen. 
 
 — iesen. 
 
 — iesen. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 427 
 
 Future. Future. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 3* 
 
 —aré. 
 
 — eré. 
 
 — iré. 
 
 — ^are. 
 
 — iere. 
 
 — iere. 
 
 — arás. 
 
 — erás. 
 
 — irás. 
 
 — ares. 
 
 — ieres. 
 
 — ieres. 
 
 — ará. 
 
 — erá. 
 
 — irá. 
 
 — are. 
 
 — iere. 
 
 — iere. 
 
 — aremos. 
 
 —eremos. 
 
 — iremos. 
 
 — áremos 
 
 . — iéremos. 
 
 — iéremos. 
 
 — aréis. 
 
 — eréis. 
 
 — iréis. 
 
 — ^areis. 
 
 — iereis. 
 
 — iereis. 
 
 — arán. 
 
 — erán. 
 
 — irán. 
 
 — aren. 
 
 — ieren. 
 
 — ieren. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 i. 
 
 2. 
 
 3- 
 
 i. 
 
 2. 
 
 3 . 
 
 — aria. 
 
 — eria. 
 
 — iría. 
 
 — a. 
 
 — e. 
 
 — e. 
 
 — ^arías. 
 
 — erias. 
 
 — irias. 
 
 -e (V.). 
 
 — a(V.). ■ 
 
 -a (V.). 
 
 — aria. 
 
 — eria. 
 
 — iria. 
 
 — emos. 
 
 — amos. 
 
 — amos. 
 
 — ariamos 
 
 . — eriamos. 
 
 — iríamos. 
 
 — ad. 
 
 — ed. 
 
 — id. 
 
 — ariais. 
 
 — eriais. 
 
 — iriais. 
 
 — en(V.V.).— an(V.V.). 
 
 — an(V.V. 
 
 — arian 
 
 — erian 
 
 — irian 
 
 
 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 Model Verb — Hablar, To Speak. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Infinitive. Gerund. Past Participle. 
 
 habl-ar, to speak. habl-ando, speaking, habl-ado, spoken. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. 
 
 habl-o, 
 
 habl-as, 
 
 habl-a, 
 
 habl-amos, 
 
 habl-áis, 
 
 habl-an, 
 
 I speak, 
 thou speakest. 
 he speaks, 
 we speak, 
 ye speak, 
 they speak. 
 
 habl-e, 
 
 habl-es, 
 
 habl-e, 
 
 habl-emos, 
 
 habl-éis, 
 
 habl-en, 
 
 I may speak, 
 thou mayst speak, 
 he may speak, 
 we may speak, 
 ye may speak, 
 they may speak. 
 
428 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Imperfect. Imperfect {first form). 
 
 habl-aba, 
 
 I was speaking. 
 
 habl-ara. 
 
 I might speak. 
 
 habl-abas, 
 
 thou wast speaking. 
 
 habl-aras, 
 
 thou mighest speak. 
 
 habl-aba, 
 
 he was speaking. 
 
 habl-ara. 
 
 he might speak. 
 
 habl-ábamos. 
 
 we were speaking. 
 
 habl-áramos, 
 
 we might speak. 
 
 habl-abais, 
 
 ye were speaking. 
 
 habl-arais. 
 
 ye might speak. 
 
 habl-aban, 
 
 they were speaking. 
 
 habl-aran. 
 
 they might speak. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 {second form). 
 
 habl-é. 
 
 I spoke. 
 
 habl-ase, 
 
 I might speak. 
 
 habl-aste, 
 
 thou spokest. 
 
 habl-ases, 
 
 thou mightest speak. 
 
 habl-o. 
 
 he spoke. 
 
 habl-ase. 
 
 he might speak. 
 
 habl-amos. 
 
 we spoke. 
 
 habl-ásemos. 
 
 we might speak. 
 
 habl-asteis. 
 
 ye spoke. 
 
 habl-aseis. 
 
 ye might speak. 
 
 habl-aron. 
 
 they spoke. 
 
 habl-asen, 
 
 they might speak. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future. 
 
 habl-are, 
 
 habl-arás, 
 
 habl-ará, 
 
 habl-aremos, 
 
 habl-aréis, 
 
 habl-arán, 
 
 I shall speak, 
 thou wilt speak, 
 he will speak, 
 he shall speak, 
 ye will speak, 
 they will speak. 
 
 habl-are, 
 
 habl-ares, 
 
 habl-are, 
 
 habl-áremos, 
 
 habl-areis, 
 
 habl-aren, 
 
 I should speak, 
 thou shouldst speak, 
 he should speak, 
 we should speak, 
 ye should speak, 
 they should speak. 
 
 Conditional. Conditional. 
 
 habl-aria. 
 
 I should speak. 
 
 hablara 
 
 or hablase. 
 
 habl-arias. 
 
 thou wouldst speak. 
 
 hablaras 
 
 or hablases. 
 
 habl-aria, 
 
 he would speak. 
 
 hablara 
 
 or hablase. 
 
 habl-ariamos. 
 
 we should speak. 
 
 habláramos, 
 
 or hablásemos, 
 
 habl-ariais. 
 
 ye would speak. 
 
 hablarais 
 
 or hablaseis. 
 
 habl-arian, 
 
 they would speak. 
 
 hablaran 
 
 or hablasen. 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 habl-a. 
 
 speak {thou). 
 
 habl-emos. 
 
 let US speak. 
 
 habl-e, 
 
 let him speak. 
 
 habl-ad. 
 
 speak {ye). 
 
 habl-e V., 
 
 speak. 
 
 habl-en, 
 
 let them speak. 
 
 If I spokej etc. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 429 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 Present Perfect. 
 he hablado, / have spoken. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 
 había hablado, I had spoken. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 hube hablado, I had spoken. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 habré hablado, I shall have 
 spoken. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 habría hablado, I should have 
 ^ spoken. 
 
 Subjtmctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 haya hablado, I may have 
 spoken. 
 
 Past Perfect {first form). 
 hubiera hablado, I might have 
 spoken. 
 
 Past Perfect {second form). 
 hubiese hablado, I might have 
 spoken. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 hubiere hablado, I shall have 
 spoken. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 hubiera or hubiese hablado, {if) 
 I had spoken. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 Model Verb Vender, To Sell. 
 
 Infinitive. Gerund. Past Participle. 
 
 vend-er, to sell. vend-iendo, selling. vend-ido, sold. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present. 
 
 vend-o, I sell. 
 
 vend-es, thou sellest. 
 vend-e, he sells. 
 
 (vend-emos, we sell. 
 
 vend-éis, ye sell. 
 
 vend-en, they sell. 
 
 Present. 
 
 vend-a, 
 
 vend-as, 
 
 vend-a, 
 
 vend-amos, 
 
 vend-áis, 
 
 vend-an. 
 
 I may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 ye may 
 they may 
 
430 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 vend-ia, 
 
 I was 
 
 
 vend-iera, 
 
 I might 
 
 vend-ias, 
 
 thou wast 
 
 
 vend-ieras, 
 
 thou mightest 
 
 vend-ia, 
 
 he was 
 
 % 
 
 »• ^ 
 
 vend-iera, 
 
 he might 
 
 vend-iamos, 
 
 we were 
 
 0^ 
 
 vend-iéramos. 
 
 we might 
 
 vend-iais, 
 
 ye were 
 
 
 vend-ierais. 
 
 ye might 
 
 vend-ian, 
 
 they were 
 
 
 vend-ieran. 
 
 they might 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 {second form) . 
 
 vend-i 
 
 / sold. 
 
 
 vend-iese. 
 
 I might 
 
 vend-iste, 
 
 thou soldest. 
 
 vend-ieses. 
 
 thou mightest 
 
 vend-io, 
 
 he sold. 
 
 
 vend-iese. 
 
 he might 
 
 vend-imos, 
 
 we sold. 
 
 
 vend-iesemos. 
 
 we might 
 
 vend-isteis, 
 
 ye sold. 
 
 
 vend-ieseis. 
 
 ye might 
 
 vend-ieron, 
 
 they sold. 
 
 
 vend-iesen. 
 
 they might 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future. 
 
 vend-eré. 
 
 I shall 
 
 
 
 vend-iere. 
 
 I should 
 
 vend-erás. 
 
 thou wilt 
 
 
 
 vend-ieres. 
 
 thou shouldst 
 
 vend-erá. 
 
 he will 
 
 e 
 
 L c 
 
 
 vend-iere. 
 
 he should 
 
 vend-eremos. 
 
 we shall 
 
 
 vend-ieremos, we should 
 
 vend-eréis. 
 
 ye wilt 
 
 
 
 vend-iereis. 
 
 ye should 
 
 vend-erán, 
 
 they will 
 
 
 
 vend-ieren. 
 
 they should 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 vend-ería. 
 
 I should 
 
 
 
 vendiera 
 
 or vendiese. 
 
 vend-erías. 
 
 thou wouldst 
 
 
 vendieras 
 
 or vendieses. 
 
 vend-ería. 
 
 he would 
 
 
 to 
 
 ► 
 
 vendiera 
 
 or vendiese. 
 
 vend-eríamos. 
 
 we should 
 
 
 
 vendiéramos 
 
 or vendiésemos 
 
 vend-eríais. 
 
 ye would 
 
 
 
 vendierais 
 
 or vendieseis, 
 
 vend-erían. 
 
 they would 
 
 
 
 vendieran 
 
 or vendiesen, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 vend-e, 
 vend-a, 
 vend-a V., 
 
 sell {thou), 
 let him sell, 
 sell {you). 
 
 vend-amos, 
 
 vend-ed, 
 
 vend-an, 
 
 let us sell, 
 sell {ye), 
 let them sell. 
 
 {if) I sold, etc. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 431 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 he vendido, I have sold. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 había- vendido, / had sold. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 hube vendido, I had sold. 
 Future Perfect. 
 habré vendido, I shall have sold. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 habría vendido, I should have 
 sold. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 haya vendido, I may have sold 
 Past Perfect (first form). 
 hubiera vendido, I might have sold 
 Past Perfect (second form) . 
 hubiese vendido, I might have sold 
 Future Perfect. 
 hubiere vendido, I should have 
 sold. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 hubiera or hubiese vendido, (if) 
 I had sold. 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 Model Verb Vivir, To Live. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Infinitive. Gerund. Past Participle. 
 
 viv-ir, 
 
 to live. viv-iendo, 
 
 living. 
 
 viv-ido, lived. 
 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 viv-o. 
 
 I live. 
 
 yiv-a. 
 
 I may live. 
 
 viv-es. 
 
 thou livest. 
 
 viv-as. 
 
 thou mayst live. 
 
 viv-e. 
 
 he lives. 
 
 viv-a. 
 
 he may live. 
 
 viv-imos, we live. 
 
 viv-amos. 
 
 we may live. 
 
 viv-is. 
 
 ye live. 
 
 viv-áis. 
 
 ye may live. 
 
 viv-en. 
 
 they live. 
 
 viv-an. 
 
 they may live. 
 
432 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Imperfect. Imperfect {first form). 
 
 viv-ia, 
 
 I was living. 
 
 
 viv-iera. 
 
 I might Uve, 
 
 viv-ias, 
 
 thou wast living. 
 
 viv-ieras. 
 
 thou mightest Uve, 
 
 viv-ia, 
 
 he waSy etc. 
 
 
 viv-iera. 
 
 he mighty etc. 
 
 viv-iamos, 
 
 we werey etc. 
 
 
 viv-iéramos. 
 
 y we mighty etc. 
 
 viv-iais, 
 
 ye werey etc. 
 
 
 viv-ierais. 
 
 ye mighty etc. 
 
 viv-ian, 
 
 they werey 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 viv-ieran. 
 
 they mighty etc. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect (second form), 
 
 viv-i, 
 
 / lived. 
 
 
 
 viv-iese. 
 
 I might 
 
 
 viv-iste, 
 
 thou livedst. 
 
 
 viv-ieses. 
 
 thou mightest 
 
 
 viv-ió, 
 
 he lived. 
 
 
 
 viv-iese. 
 
 he might 
 
 
 viv-imos, 
 
 we lived. 
 
 
 
 viv-iésemos, 
 
 , we might 
 
 < 
 
 viv-isteis, 
 
 ye lived. 
 
 
 
 viv-ieseis, 
 
 ye might 
 
 
 viv-ieron, 
 
 they lived. 
 
 
 
 viv-iesen. 
 
 they might 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 viv-iré, 
 
 I shall 
 
 
 
 viv-iere. 
 
 ’ I should 
 
 
 viv-irás, 
 
 thou wilt 
 
 
 
 viv-ieres. 
 
 thou wouldst 
 
 
 viv-irá, 
 
 he will 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 viv-iere. 
 
 he would 
 
 
 viv-iremos, 
 
 we shall 
 
 
 viv-ieremos, we should 
 
 " ¡ 
 
 viv-iréis, 
 
 ye will 
 
 
 
 viv-iereis. 
 
 ye would 
 
 
 viv-irán, 
 
 they will 
 
 
 
 viv-ieren. 
 
 they would 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 viv-iría, 
 
 I should 
 
 1 
 
 viviera 
 
 or viviese. 
 
 c 
 
 viv-irías, 
 
 thou wouldst 
 
 
 vivieras 
 
 or vivieses. 
 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 viv-iría, 
 
 he would 
 
 
 
 viviera 
 
 or viviese. 
 
 
 viv-iríamos, 
 
 , we should 
 
 
 
 viviéramos 
 
 or viviésemos. 
 
 J 
 
 viv-iríais, * 
 
 ye would 
 
 
 
 vivierais 
 
 or vivieseis. 
 
 
 viv-irían, 
 
 they would 
 
 
 vivieran 
 
 or viviesen, 
 
 
 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 
 viv-e. 
 
 live (thou). 
 
 
 viv-amos. 
 
 let us live. 
 
 viv-a. 
 
 let him live. 
 
 
 viv-id. 
 
 live (ye). 
 
 viv-a V. 
 
 live (you). 
 
 
 
 viv-an. 
 
 let them live. 
 
 live, live, (if) I livedy etc. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 433 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 he vivido, I have lived. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 había vivido, I had lived. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 hube vivido, I had lived. 
 Future Perfect. 
 habré vivido, I shall have lived. 
 Past Conditional. 
 habría vivido, I should have lived. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 haya vivido, / may have lived. 
 Past Perfect {first form). 
 hubiera vivido, I might have lived. 
 Past Perfect {second form), 
 hubiese vivido-, I might have lived. 
 Future Perfect. 
 hubiere vivido, I should have lived. 
 Past Conditional. 
 hubiera or hubiese vivido, {if) 1 
 had lived. 
 
 Observations on Certain Regular Verbs. 
 
 Certain orthographical changes take place in the 
 following regular verbs: 
 
 I. Verbs ending in gar insert u before e, as: 
 
 Infinitive. Subjunctive Pres. Past. 
 
 pagar, to pay. pague, pagues, pague, etc. pagué. 
 
 2. Verbs ending in car change c into qu before e, as: 
 
 Infinitive. Subjunctive Pres. Past. 
 
 tocar, to play. toque, toques, toque, etc. toqué. 
 
 3. Verbs ending in zar change z into c before e, as: 
 
 Infinitive. Subjunctive Pres. Past. 
 
 rezar, to pray, rece, reces, rece, etc. recé. 
 
 4. Verbs ending in cer or cir change c into z before o or a, 
 , to preserve the soft sound, as: 
 
 Infinitive. 
 veneer, to vanquish. 
 
 resarcir, to compensate. 
 
 Present Indicat. 
 venzo, etc. 
 
 Subjunctive Pres. 
 venza, etc. 
 resarza, etc. 
 
 resarzo. 
 
434 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 5. Verbs ending in ger or gir change g into j before 
 o or a, as: 
 
 Infinitive. Ind. Present. Subj. Present. 
 
 coger, to take cojo, etc. coja, etc. 
 
 erigir, to erect. erijo, etc. erija, etc. 
 
 6. Verbs ending in guir change gu into g, and verbs 
 ending in quir change qu into c before o or a, as: 
 
 Infinitive. Ind. Present. Subj. Present. 
 
 distinguir, to distinguish distingo, etc. distinga, etc. 
 
 delinquir, to offend. delinco, etc. delinca, etc. 
 
 7. Verbs ending in cer or cir preceded by a vowel insert 
 before the stem-ending a z as often as the stem meets 
 an a or an o, as: 
 
 conocer, to know. 
 
 Indicat. Pres, conozco {hut: conoces, conoce, conocemos, etc.). 
 SuBjUNCT. Pres, conozca, conozcas, conozca, conozcamos, conoz- 
 cáis, conozcan. 
 
 Imperative. conozca, conozcamos, conozcan. 
 
 lucir, to shine, to display. 
 
 Indicat. Pres, luzco {hut: luces, luce, lucimos, etc.). 
 
 SuBjUNCT. Pres, luzca, luzcas, luzca, luzcamos, luzcáis, luzcan. 
 Imperative. luzca, luzcamos, luzcan. 
 
 8. The following six regular verbs have an irregular 
 past participle: 
 
 Infinitive. Past Participle. 
 
 abrir, 
 
 to open. 
 
 abierto. 
 
 opened. 
 
 cubrir, 
 
 to cover. 
 
 cubierto. 
 
 covered. 
 
 descubrir, 
 
 to discover. 
 
 descubierto. 
 
 discovered. 
 
 escribir. 
 
 to write. 
 
 escrito. 
 
 written. 
 
 imprimir. 
 
 to print. 
 
 impreso. 
 
 printed. 
 
 romper. 
 
 to break. 
 
 roto. 
 
 broken. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 43S 
 
 Conjugation of the Passive Verb. 
 Model Verb, Ser Llamado.— To be called. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 ser 
 
 Infinitive. 
 j llamado, a 
 \ llamados, as 
 
 Gerund. 
 
 to be called. 
 
 siendo | ^ called, 
 
 [ llamados, as J 
 
 Participle. 
 
 llamado, llamada; llamados, llamadas, having been called. 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present. 
 r am called^ etc, 
 soy llamado, a. 
 eres llamado, a. 
 es llamado, a. 
 somos llamados, as. 
 sois llamados, as. 
 son llamados, as. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 r was called^ etc, 
 era llamado, a. 
 éramos llamados, as. 
 
 Past. 
 
 r was called^ etc, 
 fui llamado, a. 
 fuimos llamados, as. 
 
 Future. 
 r shall be called^ etc, 
 seré llamado, a. 
 seremos llamados, as. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I may be called^ etc, 
 sea llamado, a. 
 seas llamado, a. 
 sea Uamado, a. 
 seamos llamados, as. 
 seáis llamados, as. 
 sean llamados, as. 
 
 Imperfect (first form), 
 
 I might be called ^ etc, 
 fuera Uamado, a. 
 fuéramos llamados, as. 
 
 Imperfect (second form), 
 I might be called^ etc, 
 fuese Uamado, a. 
 fuésemos Uamados, as. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I should be called^ etc, 
 fuere Uamado, a. 
 fuéremos Uamados, as. 
 
436 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 1 should he called^ etc, 
 sería llamado, a. 
 seríamos llamados, as. 
 
 Compound 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 I have been called^ etc. 
 he sido llamada, a. 
 hemos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 
 I had been called^ etc. 
 había sido llamado, a. 
 habíamos sido llamados, as.' 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 I had been called^ etc. 
 hube sido llamado, a. 
 hubimos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I shall have been called^ etc. 
 habré sido llamado, a. 
 habremos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 I should have been called^ etc. 
 habría sido llamado, a. 
 habríamos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 (If) I were called, etc. 
 
 fuera or fuese llamado, a. 
 fuéramos or fuésemos llama- | 
 dos, as. 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 I may have been called, etc. 
 haya sido llamado, a. 
 hayamos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Past Perfect (first form). 
 
 I might have been called, etc. 
 hubiera sido llamado, a. 
 hubiéramos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Past Perfect (second form). 
 
 I might have been called, etc. 
 hubiese sido llamado, a. 
 hubiésemos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I should have been called. 
 hubiere sido llamado, a. 
 hubiéremos sido llamados, as. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 (If) I had been called, etc. 
 
 hubiera or hubiese sido llama- i 
 do, a. 
 
 hubiéramos or hubiésemos 
 sido llamados, as- 
 
 Remarks on the Passive. 
 
 I. The passive participle must agree in gender and num- 
 ber with the subject of the sentence, as: 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 437 
 
 Estos niños son amados, These children are loved. 
 
 Estas señoras han sido siempre These ladies have always been very 
 muy estimadas, much esteemed. 
 
 2 . By, after passive verbs or participles, is rendered by 
 por, except when the verb denotes feeling or emotion, 
 when it is rendered by de, as: 
 
 Este libro fué escrito por Cas- Thü hook was written by Castelar, 
 telar, 
 
 Este cuadro fué pintado por This picture was painted by 
 
 Murillo, Murillo. 
 
 Este escritor es estimado de This writer is esteemed by many, 
 
 muchos, 
 
 3. Active verbs are often used passively with the 
 pronoun se in the third person singular or plural, as: 
 Estas manzanas se venden a These apples are sold at very high 
 
 precios muy altos, prices. 
 
 Esta casa se alquiló hace más de This house was let more than a 
 un mes, month ago. 
 
 No se puede ver nada, Nothing can he seen. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 I Cómo está V.? Tengo mucho gusto en ver a V. — 
 Estoy muy bien, gracias. ¿Y V.? — Para servir a V., 
 gracias. — ¿ Viene V. a pasar mucho tiempo en Nueva 
 York? — No, señor, vengo solamente por algunos días 
 por asuntos comerciales . — ¿ Tiene V. relaciones comercia- 
 les con países españoles? — Sí, tenemos negocios con la 
 América del Sur . — ¿ Desearía V. importar algo en los 
 Estados Unidos? — Desearía importar café, tabaco, azúcar, 
 cedro,^ lana algunas frutas. — ¿ Desea V. vender al con- 
 tado^ o a crédito? — ^A algunos comerciantes les venderé a 
 un corto plazo,^ o cambiaré mis productos por efectos 
 
 ^ Cedar- wood. — ^ por cash. — ^ Plazo corresponds to our Eng- 
 lish expression terms ^ a plazo, on credit; a largo plazo, on long 
 credit; a corto plazo, on short credit. — ^ A branch. — ® At the head 
 of which. — ® One of my brothers. — A power of attorney. — ®To 
 
43S 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 americanos. — ¿ Cómo piensa V. hacer esas importaciones? 
 — Mi idea es establecer aquí una sucursal^ de mi casa de 
 Valparaíso, a cuyo frente^ estará un hermano mío.® — Él 
 necesitará un poder^ para hacer legales^ esas transac- 
 ciones. — ¿ Quién tiene que firmar® un poder para que 
 sea válido? — Un poder para ser válido tiene que ser 
 firmado ante un notario público y por dos testigos.^® 
 — Tengo que ir al correo ahora pues espero algunas car- 
 tas. I No quiere V. venir conmigo? — Bien pues, vamos 
 abajo^^ de la ciudad . — ¿ Cuánto pedirá un cochero por 
 llevarnos^^ a la parte baja de la ciudad? Los cocheros 
 de Nueva York piden muy caro; el tren elevado cuesta 
 solamente cinco centavos. 
 
 The Reflexive Conjugation. 
 
 Reflexive or pronominal verbs are conjugated with 
 two personal pronouns, the first (expressed or under- 
 stood) being the subject, and the second the object, 
 
 as: 
 
 Yo me divierto or me divierto, I amuse myself. 
 
 É1 se engaña or se engaña, He deceives himself. 
 
 Pronouns Accompanying the Reflexive Verb. 
 
 me, 
 
 te, 
 
 se. 
 
 myself. nos, 
 
 thyself. os, 
 
 / himself f herself. 
 
 \ itself f yourself. ’ 
 
 ourselves. 
 
 yourselves. 
 
 { themselves, 
 yourselves. 
 
 legalize. — ^ To sign. — Witnesses. — Abajo, down; arriba, up; 
 abajo de la ciudad or a la parte baja de la ciudad, down town; arriba 
 de la ciudad or a la parte alta de la ciudad, uptown. — For driving 
 us. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 439 
 
 Almost any verb may be used reflexively in Spanish, 
 which sometimes occasions a slight modification in their 
 meaning, as: 
 
 Dormir; dormirse, To sleep; to go to sleep. 
 
 Ir; irse, To go; to go away. 
 
 Caer; caerse. To fall \ to fall down. 
 
 Model Verb: Alabarse, to Praise One^s self. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 alabarse, to praise one^s self. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I praise myself, etc. 
 me alabo, 
 te alabas, 
 se alaba, 
 nos alabamos, 
 os alabáis, 
 se alaban. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I praised myself, etc. 
 me alababa, 
 te alababas, 
 se alababa, etc. 
 
 Past. 
 
 I praised myself, etc. 
 me alabé, 
 te alabaste, 
 se alabó, etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I shall praise myself, etc. 
 me alabaré, 
 te alabarás, 
 se alabará, etc. 
 
 Gerund 
 
 alabándose, praising one's self. 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 Present. 
 
 I may praise myself, etc. 
 me alabe, 
 te alabes, 
 se alabe, 
 nos alabemos, 
 os alabéis, 
 se alaben. 
 
 Imperfect {first form). 
 
 I might praise myself, etc. 
 me alabara, 
 te alabaras, 
 se alabara, etc. 
 
 Imperfect {second form ) c 
 I might praise myself, etc. 
 me alabase, 
 te alabases, 
 se alabase, etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I should praise myself, etc. 
 me alabare, 
 te alabares, 
 se alabare, etc. 
 
440 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 I should praise myself y etc, 
 me alabaría, 
 te alabarías, 
 se alabaría, etc. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 {If) I praised my self y etc, 
 me alabara or alabase, 
 te alabaras or alabases, 
 se alabara or alabase, etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 alábate, praise thyself, 
 alábese, let him praise himself. 
 alábese, praise yourself. 
 
 alabémonos, let us praise our 
 selves. 
 
 alabaos, praise yourselves. 
 alábense, let them praise them- 
 selves. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 I have praised myself, etc. 
 me he alabado, 
 te has alabado, 
 se ha alabado, 
 nos hemos alabado, 
 os habéis alabado, 
 se han alabado. 
 
 Past Perfect. 
 
 I had praised myself y etc. 
 me había alabado, etc. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 I had praised myself y etc. 
 me hube alabado, etc. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 Present Perfect. 
 
 I may have praised myself y etc. 
 me haya alabado, 
 te hayas alabado, 
 se haya alabado, 
 nos hayamos alabado, 
 os hayáis alabado, 
 se hayan alabado. 
 
 Past Perfect {first form). 
 
 I might have praised myself y etc. 
 me hubiere alabado, etc. 
 
 Past Perfect {second form). 
 
 I might have praised myself y etc. 
 me hubiese alabado, etc. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 441 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I shall have praised myself ^ etc. 
 me habré alabado, etc. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 I should have praised myself ^ etc. 
 me habría alabado, etc. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 I should have praised myself^ etc. 
 me hubiere alabado, etc. 
 
 Past Conditional. 
 
 (//) I had praised my self ^ etc. 
 me hubiera or hubiese ala- 
 bado, etc. 
 
 Observations on the Reflexive and the Passive Verb. 
 
 I. The pronouns which are generally placed before 
 the verb may also stand after it, forming but one word 
 
 with the verb, as: 
 Divertimonos, 
 Equivoqueme, 
 Equivocóse, 
 
 Heme equivocado, 
 
 We amuse ourselves, 
 
 I made a mistake. 
 
 He made a mistake. 
 
 I have made a mistake. 
 
 2. The s of the first person plural and the d of the 
 second person plural are dropped in the Imperative, 
 as: 
 
 Figurémonos {for figurémomos). Let us imagine. 
 
 Amémonos {for amemomos). Lei us love each other. 
 
 Figuraos {for figurados). Imagine {ye)l 
 
 3. The number of essentially reflexive verbs is small, 
 but accidentally reflexive verbs may be formed in an un- 
 limited number, as almost any verb can be used reflexive- 
 ly in Spanish. 
 
 4. Many verbs are reflexive in Spanish which are not 
 so in English, as: 
 
 alegrarse, to rejoice. equivocarse, to he mistaken. 
 
 figurarse, to imagine. engañarse, to he deceived.. 
 
 disgustarse, to he displeased. burlarse, to laugh at. 
 
442 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 5. Permanently reflexive verbs may be conjugated 
 impersonally with se (the dative of the pronoun serving 
 to distinguish the person, etc.). 
 
 Personal Inflection. Impersonal Inflection. , 
 
 me figuro. 
 
 
 se me figura. 
 
 
 I imagine. 
 
 te figuras. 
 
 se te figura. 
 
 (/o 
 
 thou imaginest. 
 
 se figura. 
 
 
 se le figura. 
 
 
 he imagines. 
 
 V. se figura. 
 
 Ci 
 — s 
 
 se le figura a V., 
 
 
 you imagine. 
 
 nos figuramos. 
 
 I ^ 
 Vi 
 
 se nos figura. 
 
 
 we imagine. 
 
 os figuráis. 
 
 ío 
 
 Ci 
 
 se os figura. 
 
 0 
 
 ye imagine. 
 
 se figuran. 
 
 
 se les figura. 
 
 
 they imagine. 
 
 V. V. se figuran. 
 
 
 se les figura a V. V., 
 
 
 you imagine. 
 
 6. The passive voice is little used nowadays. It is 
 mostly replaced by the particle se and the verb in its 
 active form, as: 
 
 El dinero se ganó, 
 
 El dinero se perdió, 
 
 Las casas se han vendido. 
 
 Eso no se puede decir. 
 
 Aquí se habla español. 
 
 Se hacen cobros y pagos. 
 
 Se cambia toda clase de moneda. 
 Se compran valores de la deuda 
 pública. 
 
 Se prohibe fijar carteles. 
 
 The money was won. 
 
 The money was lost. 
 
 The houses have been sold. 
 
 That cannot he said. 
 
 Spanish spoken here. 
 
 Collections and payments made. 
 All kinds of coin exchanged. 
 Government securities bought. 
 
 *‘Post no bills.'' 
 
 7. Reflexive verbs, when used with plural persons, 
 express sometimes a mutual or reciprocal action in 
 Spanish, as: 
 
 Se han escrito muchas cartas. They have written many letters to 
 
 each other. 
 
 Todos los individuos de esta All the members of this family are 
 familia se quieren, fond of one another. 
 
 8. In such cases uno a otro or mutuamente is fre- 
 quently added for distinctness’ sake, as: 
 
 Se aman el uno al otro. They love each other. 
 
 Nos amamos mutuamente, We love each other. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 443 
 
 9. The reflexive pronoun is used in Spanish when 
 the object of the verb is a part of the body or refers 
 to articles of dress, as: 
 
 La mesa está servida. Pasemos al comedor. — ¿ En- 
 contraremos coches en la estación?— Sí, señor; se ha 
 establecido un servicio de ómnibus para todos los pueblos 
 a cuatro leguas a la redonda. — La lengua alemana se 
 habla en una gran parte de Europa. El idioma español 
 se habla en España, en Méjico, en la América central y 
 del sur, y en muchas colonias del Asia y del Africa. — 
 Yo acostumbro levantarme temprano y acostarme tarde. — 
 Este paño se vende en la tienda del señor Palma. — ¿ Qué 
 se dice en la ciudad? Se dice que el azúcar se venderá 
 muy bien este año. — La hacienda ha sido vendida después 
 de la muerte del dueño. ¿ Por qué no se sienta V.? — No 
 estoy cansado, prefiero quedarme parado. — ¿ Se levanta 
 V. temprano? — Me levanto tan pronto como me despier- 
 to . — I Por qué no va V. al jardín a divertirse con las 
 muchachas? — No me siento bien, quiero ir a acostarme. — 
 I Se acuerda V. de lo que dijo este hombre? — Me acuerdo 
 de todo lo que dijo. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs are employed in the third person 
 singular, without any pronoun. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs are inflected according to the con- 
 jugation indicated by their infinitive. 
 
 Me pongo el sombrero, 
 El se lava la cara, 
 
 Me quito los guantes. 
 
 I put on my hat. 
 
 He ivashes his face, 
 I take off my gloves. 
 
 EXERCISE, 
 
 Impersonal Verbs. 
 
444 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 I. Nevar, nevando, nevado, to snow. 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 nieva, 
 nevaba, 
 nevó, 
 nevará, 
 nevaría, 
 ha nevado, 
 había nevado, 
 hubo nevado, 
 habrá nevado, 
 habría nevado. 
 
 it snows, 
 it was snowing, 
 it snowed, 
 it will snow, 
 it would snow, 
 it has 
 it had 
 
 {when) it had 
 it will have 
 it would have 
 
 nieve, 
 nevara, 
 nevase, 
 nevare, 
 nevara, 
 haya nevado, 
 hubiera nevado, 
 hubiese nevado, 
 hubiere nevado, 
 hubiera nevado. 
 
 it may snow, 
 it might snow, 
 it might snow, 
 it should snow, 
 {if) it snowed, 
 it may ) ^ 
 it might I § 
 it might I i ^ 
 it should J 
 {if) it had snowed. 
 
 2. Llover, lloviendo, llovido, to rain. 
 Indicative Mode. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 llueve. 
 
 it rains. 
 
 llueva. 
 
 it may rain. 
 
 llovía. 
 
 it was raining. 
 
 lloviera. 
 
 it might rain. 
 
 llovió. 
 
 it rained. 
 
 lloviese. 
 
 it might rain. 
 
 lloverá. 
 
 it will rain. 
 
 lloviere. 
 
 it should rain. 
 
 llovería. 
 
 it would rain. 
 
 lloviera. 
 
 {if) it rained. 
 
 3. Amanecer, amaneciendo, amanecido, to dawn. 
 
 Indicative Mode. Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 amanece, 
 
 amanecía, 
 
 ameneció, 
 
 amanecerá, 
 
 amanecería. 
 
 it dawns, 
 it was dawning, 
 it dawned . . 
 it will dawn, 
 it would dawn. 
 
 amanezca, 
 
 amaneciera, 
 
 amaneciese, 
 
 amaneciere, 
 
 amaneciera. 
 
 it may dawn, 
 it might dawn, 
 it might dawn, 
 it should dawn, 
 {if) it dawned. 
 
 4. List of the most common Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 Infinitive. Indicat. Present. Participle. 
 
 amanecer. 
 
 to dawn. 
 
 amanece. 
 
 amanecido. 
 
 anochecer. 
 
 to grow dark. 
 
 anochece. 
 
 anochecido. 
 
 oscurecer. 
 
 to grow dark. 
 
 oscurece. 
 
 oscurecido. 
 
 granizar. 
 
 to hail. 
 
 graniza. 
 
 granizado. 
 
 helar. 
 
 to freeze. 
 
 hiela. 
 
 helado. 
 
 deshelar. 
 
 to thaw. 
 
 deshiela. 
 
 deshelado. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 44S 
 
 Hover, 
 
 lloviznar, 
 
 nevar, 
 
 relampaguear, 
 
 tronar, 
 
 ventiscar. 
 
 to rain, 
 to drizzle, 
 to snow, 
 to lighten, 
 to thunder, 
 to storm. 
 
 llueve. 
 
 llovizna. 
 
 nieva. 
 
 relampaguea. 
 
 truena. 
 
 ventisca. 
 
 Uovido. 
 
 lloviznado. 
 
 nevado. 
 
 relampagueado. 
 
 tronado. 
 
 ventiscado. 
 
 5 . Some personal verbs are used impersonally, as: 
 
 Bastar, to suffice. 
 
 Convenir, to agree; 
 to suit. 
 
 Gustar, to please. 
 
 Disgustar, to dis- 
 please. 
 
 Fastidiar, to vex. 
 
 Importar, to he of 
 importance. 
 
 Parecer, to seem. 
 
 Placer, to please. 
 
 Displacer, to dis- 
 please. 
 
 suceder, to happen. 
 
 valer, to he worth. 
 
 Basta que V. lo diga, it is sufficient that you 
 say so. 
 
 Conviene hacer esto, it is expedient to doit. 
 
 Juan me conviene, John suits me. 
 
 Me gusta comer a la una, I like to dine at one. 
 
 Me disgusta oir tal cosa, it displeases me to 
 hear such a thing. 
 
 Me fastidia guardar la cama, it vexes me that 
 I have to keep ahed. 
 
 Importa decírselo, it is important to tell him it. 
 
 Parece hacer frío hoy, it seems to he cold to-day. 
 
 Me place, it pleases me; I like to. 
 
 Me displace, it displeases me; I dislike to. 
 
 Sucede muchas veces que...., it happens 
 often that. . . . 
 
 Más vale tarde que nunca, better late than never. 
 
 6 . The English impersonal expression is’^ is vari- 
 ously rendered: 
 
 a. By es with adjectives, adverbs, or nouns, as: 
 
 Es cierto; así es. It is certain; so it is. 
 
 Es menester; es preciso. It is necessary. 
 
 Es de día, It is daylight, 
 
 b. By está to denote accidental state, as: 
 
 Está lloviendo. It is raining. 
 
 c. By hace, it makes, with reference to the weather, as: 
 
The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 44Ó 
 
 I Qué tiempo hace? What kind of weather is it? 
 
 Hace buen tiempo. It is fine weather. 
 
 d. By hay with reference to a distance. 
 
 I Cuánto hay de aquí al banco? How far is it from here to the hank? 
 
 Government of Verbs. 
 
 1. The object of a transitive verb stands in the accu- 
 sative (objective) case without a preposition when it 
 denotes things. 
 
 2. When persons or animals are designated, the prep- 
 osition a is used before the object. 
 
 Conozco a este hombre, I know this man. 
 
 3. When the personal object is preceded by a cardinal 
 number, a is generally omitted. 
 
 He visto cuatro mujeres, I saw four women. 
 
 4. A is also left out when the personal object is unknown 
 or indeterminate: 
 
 He convidado algunos amigos, I have invited a few friends. 
 
 Busca una criada. She is looking for a servant girl. 
 
 5. After tener in the sense of to have, to possess, a 
 is omitted: 
 
 Tengo un buen hijo, I have a good son. 
 
 But when tener is used in the sense of to be, a is used : 
 Tengo a mi hijo enfermo. My son is ill. 
 
 6. After the verb querer, a is used in the sense to love, 
 to like: 
 
 Quiero a esta muchacha, I like this girl. 
 
 Querer without a means to want, to wish : 
 
 Quiero un hombre honrado que I want an honest man who speaks 
 hable inglés, English. 
 
 7. A is omitted after perder, to lose (perder a, means 
 to ruin): 
 
 He perdido mi padre, 
 
 I have lost my father. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 447 
 
 8. Many verbs are followed in Spanish by a, de, con, 
 por, para, sobre, etc., where in English no preposition is 
 used. Some of these verbs may, without changing their 
 meaning, govern different prepositions. 
 
 9. Most reflective verbs, and those expressing con- 
 ditions of the mind, abundance, want, separation, de- 
 privation, blame, etc., are generally followed by the 
 preposition de. Such verbs are: 
 
 Abusar de, to abuse. 
 acordarse de, to remember. 
 admirarse de, to wonder at. 
 alegrarse de, to rejoice at. 
 aprovecharse de, to use. 
 avergonzarse de, to be ashamed of. 
 dudar de, to doubt. 
 fiarse de, to trust. 
 gozar de, to enjoy. 
 jactarse de, to boast. 
 lamentarse de, to lament. 
 mofarse de, to scoff at. 
 necesitar de, to need. 
 olvidarse de, to forget. 
 preciarse de, to boast. 
 prescindir de, to do without. 
 
 burlarse de, to laugh at. 
 carecer de, to want^ to be with- 
 out. 
 
 compadecerse de, to pity. 
 condolerse de, to pity. 
 desconfiar de, to distrust. 
 privarse de, to deprive. 
 reírse de, to laugh at. 
 renegar de, to abominate. 
 servirse de, to use. 
 tener lástima de, to pity. 
 tener vergüenza de, to be ashamed 
 of. 
 
 usar de, to use. 
 
 valerse de, to avail one's self of. 
 zafarse de, to get rid of. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 In our conversational lessons we have given the prin- 
 cipal irregular verbs. The Spanish language contains a 
 very large number of irregularly inflected verbs, — about 
 850; but as these irregularities occur in certain modes, 
 tenses and persons only, they may easily be reduced to a 
 few classes. 
 
448 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Observe that in the following tables only deviation 
 from the three model regular conjugations are printed ii 
 heavy type. 
 
 A long mark O has been placed over the vov/el c 
 the tonic syllable. 
 
 First Class. 
 
 a. E Stems. — (First Conjugation). 
 
 The characteristic of this class is that i is inserted befor 
 the stem-vowel e=ie throughout the singular and ii 
 the third person plural of the present indicative and sub 
 junctive, and in the same persons in the imperative 
 To this class belong a number of verbs of the first and seci 
 ond conjugation. 
 
 1. Pensar, pensando, pensado, to think. 
 
 Pres. Ind. piens-o, piens-as, piens-a, pens-amos, pens-áis, piens-ai 
 Pres. 5w¿>j.piens-e, piens-es, piens-e, pens-emos, pens-éis, piens-ei 
 Imperat. piens-a, piens-e, pens-emos, pens-ad, piens-ei 
 
 Note. — All other forms are regular: 
 pensaba, pensé, pensara, pensase, pensare, pensaré, pensaría.^ 
 
 2. Acertar, acertando, acertado, to hit the mark. 
 
 Pres. Ind. acierto, aciertas, acierta, acertamos, acertáis, aciertai 
 Pres. Suhj. acierte, aciertes, acierte, acertemos, acertéis, aciertei 
 
 Imperat. acierta, acierte, acertemos, acertad, aciertei 
 
 Reg. acertaba, acerté, acertara, acertase, acertare, acertaré, acertaría 
 
 3. Alentar, alentando, alentado, to encourage^ to cheey 
 to breathe. 
 
 Pres. Ind. aliento, alientas, alienta, alentamos, alentáis, alientai 
 
 Pres. Suhj. aliente, alientes, aliente, alentemos, alentéis, alientei 
 
 Imperat. alienta, aliente, alentemos, alentad, alientei 
 
 Reg. alentaba, alenté, alentara, alentase, alentare, alentaré, alentar!; 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 449 
 
 4. Apretar, apretando, apretado, to grasp tightly. 
 
 Pres, Ind. aprieto, aprietas, aprieta, apretamos, apretáis, aprietan. 
 Pres. Suhj. apriete, aprietes, apriete, apretemos, apretéis, aprieten. 
 
 Imperat, aprieta, apriete, apretemos, apretad, aprieten. 
 
 i^e^.apretaba, apreté, apretara, apretase, apretare, apretaré, apretaría 
 
 5. Atestar, atestando, atestado, to crowds to attest. 
 
 Pres, Ind, atiesto, atiestas, atiesta, atestamos, atestáis, atiestan. 
 
 Pres, Suhj, atieste, atiestes, atieste, atestemos, atestéis, atiesten. 
 
 Imperat, atiesta, atieste, atestemos, atestad, atiesten. 
 
 Reg, atestaba, atesté, atestara, atestase, atestare, atestaré, atestaría. 
 
 6. Cerrar, cerrando, cerrado, to shut, to close. 
 
 Pres, Ind, cierro, cierras, cierra, cerramos, cerráis, cierran. 
 
 Pres, Suhj, cierre, cierres, cierre, cerremos, cerréis, cierren. 
 
 Imperat, cierra, cierre, cerremos, cerrad, cierren. 
 
 Reg, cerraba, cerré, cerrara, cerrase, cerrare, cerraré, cerraría. 
 
 7. Empezar, empezando, empezado, to begin, 
 
 Pres, Ind, empiezo, empiezas, empieza, empezamos, empezáis, 
 
 empiezan 
 
 Pres, Suhj, empiece, empieces, empiece, empecemos, empecéis, 
 
 empiecen 
 
 Imperat, empieza, empiece, empecemos, empezad, empiecen 
 
 Reg. empezaba, empecé, empezara, empezase, etc. 
 
 8. Helar, helando, helado, to freeze, 
 
 Pres. Ind, hielo, hielas, hiela, helamos, heláis, hielan. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. hiele, liieles, hiele, helemos, heléis, hielen. 
 
 Imperat. hiela, hiele, helemos, helad, hielen. 
 
 Reg. helaba, helé, helara, helase, helare, helaré, helaría. 
 
 9. Negar, negando, negado, to deny, 
 
 Pres. Ind. niego, niegas, niega, negamos, negáis, niegan. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. niegue, niegues, niegue, neguemos, neguéis, nieguen. 
 
 Imperat, niega, niegue, neguemos, negad, nieguen. 
 
 Reg. negaba, negué, negara, negase, etc. 
 
450 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 lo. Sembrar, sembrando, sembrado, to sow. 
 
 Pr. Ind. 
 
 siembro. 
 
 siembras. 
 
 siembra. 
 
 sembramos, sembráis, 
 
 siembran. 
 
 Pr. Suhj. 
 Imperat. 
 
 siembre. 
 
 siembres, 
 
 siembra. 
 
 siembre, 
 
 siembre. 
 
 sembremos, sembréis, 
 siembren, 
 sembremos, sembrad, 
 
 siembren. 
 
 • 
 
 Reg. sembraba, sembré, sembrara, sembrase, etc. 
 
 11. Errar, errando, errado, to err. 
 
 This verb may be included in this class. It takes y in the same 
 tenses and persons where the other verbs of this class insert i before 
 the stem- vowel. 
 
 Pres. Ind. yerro, yerras, yerra, erramos, erráis, yerran. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. yerre, yerres, yerre, erremos, erréis, yerren. 
 
 Imperat. yerra, yerre, erremos, errad, yerren. 
 
 Reg. erraba, erré, errara, errase, errare, etc. 
 
 b. E Stems. — (Second Conjugation). 
 
 12. Perder, perdiendo, perdido, to lose. 
 
 Pres. Ind. pierdo, pierdes, pierde, perdemos, perdéis, pierden. 
 Pres. Stthj. pierda, pierdas, pierda, perdamos, perdáis, pierdan. 
 
 Imperat. pierde, pierda, perdamos, perded, pierdan. 
 
 Reg. perdía, perdí, perdiera, perdiese, perdiere, perderé, perdería. 
 
 13. Entender, entendiendo, entendido, to understand. 
 
 Pr. Ind. entiendo, entiendes, entiende, entendemos, entendéis, 
 entienden. 
 
 Pr. Suhj. entienda, entiendas, entienda, entendamos, entendáis, 
 entiendan. 
 
 Imperat. entiende, entienda, entendemos, entended, 
 
 entiendan. 
 
 Reg. entendía, entendí, entendiera, entendiese, entendiere, etc. 
 
 c. O Stems. — (First Conjugation). 
 
 The characteristic of this class is that the stem- 
 vowel o is changed into ue throughout the singular 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 451 
 
 and in the third person plural of the present indicative 
 and subjunctive, and in the same persons in ‘ the im- 
 perative. Many verbs of the first and second conjuga- 
 tion belong to this class. 
 
 14. Acordar, acordando, acordado, to agree ^ to remind y 
 to remember, 
 
 Pr, Ind. acuerdo, acuerdas, acuerda, acordamos, acordáis, 
 
 acuerdan. 
 
 Pr. Subj. acuerde, acuerdes, acuerde, acordemos, acordéis, 
 
 acuerden. 
 
 Imperat, acuerda, acuerde, acordemos, acordad, acuerden. 
 
 Reg. acordaba, acordé, acordara, acordase, acordare, etc. 
 
 15. Contar, contando, contado, to count. 
 
 Pres. Ind. cuento, cuentas, cuenta, contamos, contáis, cuentan. 
 Pres. Subj. cuente, cuentes, cuente, contemos, contéis, cuenten. 
 
 Imperat. cuenta, cuente, contemos, contad, cuenten. 
 
 Reg. contaba, conté, contara, contase, contare, contaré, contaría. 
 
 16. Costar, costando, costado, to cost. 
 
 Pres. Ind. cuesto, cuestas, cuesta, costamos, costáis, cuestan. 
 Pres. Subj. cueste, cuestes, cueste, costemos, costéis, cuesten. 
 
 Imperat. cuesta, cueste, costemos, costad, cuesten. 
 
 Reg. costaba, costé, costara, costase, costare, costaré, costaría. 
 
 17. Hollar, hollando, hollado, to trample. 
 
 Pres. Ind. huello, huellas, huella, hollamos, holláis, huellan. 
 Pres. Subj. huelle, huelles, huelle, hollemos, holléis, huellen. 
 
 Imperat. huella, huelle, hollemos, hollad, huellen. 
 
 Reg. hollaba, hollé, hollara, hollase, hollare, hollaré, hollaría. 
 
 18. Probar, probando, probado, to prove. 
 
 Pres. Ind. pruebo, pruebas, prueba, probamos, probáis, prueban. 
 Pres. Subj. pruebe, pruebes, pruebe, probemos, probéis, prueben. 
 
 Imperat. prueba, pruebe, probemos, probad, prueben. 
 
 Reg. probaba, probé, probara, probase, probare, probaré, probaría. 
 
4S2 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 19. Sonar, sonando, sonado, to sound. 
 
 Pres. Ind. sueno, suenas, suena, sonamos, sonáis, suenan. 
 
 Fres. Subj. suene, suenes, suene, sonemos, sonéis, suenen. 
 
 Imperat. suena, suene, sonemos, sonad, suenen. 
 
 Reg. sonaba, soné, sonara, sonase, sonare, sonaré, sonaría. 
 
 20. Volar, volando, volado, to fly. 
 
 Pres. Ind. vuelo, vuelas, vuela, volamos, voláis, vuelan. 
 
 Fres. Subj. vuele, vueles, vuele, volemos, voléis, vuelen. 
 
 Imperat. vuela, vuele, volemos, volad, vuelen. 
 
 Reg. volaba, volé, volara, volase, volare, volaré, volaría. 
 
 21. Forzar, forzando, forzado, to force, to compel. 
 
 Pres. Ind. fuerzo, fuerzas, fuerza, forzamos, forzáis, fuerzan. 
 PreSy Subj. fuerce, fuerces, fuerce, forcemos, forcéis, fuercen. 
 
 Imperat. fuerza, fuerce, forcemos, forzad, fuercen. 
 
 Reg. forzaba, forcé, forzara, forzase, forzare, forzaré, forzaría. 
 
 22. Rogar, rogando, rogado, to request, to beg. 
 
 Pres. Ind. ruego, ruegas, ruega, rogamos, rogáis, ruegan. 
 
 Fres. Subj. ruegue, ruegues, ruegue, roguemos, roguéis, rueguen. 
 
 Imperat. ruega, ruegue, roguemos, rogad, rueguen. 
 
 Reg. rogaba, rogué, rogara, rogase, rogare, rogaré, rogaría. 
 
 23. Trocar, trocando, trocado, to barter. 
 
 Pr. Ind. trueco, truecas, trueca, .trocamos, trocáis, truecan. 
 Pr. Subj. trueque, trueques, trueque, troquemos, troquéis, 
 
 truequen. 
 
 Imperat. trueca, trueque, troquemos, trocad, truequen. 
 
 Reg. trocába, troqué, trocara, trocase, trocare, trocaré, trocaría. 
 
 24. Jugar, jugando, jugado, to play, to gamble. 
 
 Pres. Ind. juego, juegas, juega, jugamos, jugáis, juegan. 
 
 Fres. Subj. juegue, juegues, juegue, juguemos, juguéis, jueguen. 
 
 Imperat. juega, juegue, juguemos, jugad, jueguen. 
 
 jugaba, jugué, jugara, jugase, jugare, jugaré, jugaría. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 453 
 
 25. Agorar, agorando, agorado, to divine. 
 
 Fres, Ind, agüero, agüeras, agüera, agoramos, agoráis, agüeran. 
 
 Fres, Subj. agüere, agüeres, agüere, agoremos, agoréis, agüeren. 
 
 Imperat, agüera, agüere, agoremos, agorad, agüeren. 
 
 Reg. agoraba, agoré, agorara, agorase, agorare, agoraré, agoraría. 
 
 d, O Stems. — (Second Conjugation). 
 
 26. Moler, moliendo, molido, to grind. 
 
 Fres. Ind. muelo, mueles, muele, molemos, moléis, muelen. 
 
 Fres. Subj. muela, muelas, muela, molamos, moláis, muelan. 
 
 Imperat. muele, muela, molamos, moled, muelan. 
 
 Reg. molía, molí, moliera, moliese, moliere, moleré, molería. 
 
 27. Mover, moviendo, movido, to move. 
 
 Fres. Ind. muevo, mueves, mueve, movemos, movéis, mueven. 
 
 Fres. Subj. mueva, muevas, mueva, movamos, mováis, muevan. 
 
 Imperat, mueve, mueva, movamos, moved, muevan. 
 
 Reg. movía, moví, moviera, moviese, moviere, moveré, movería. 
 
 28. Morder, mordiendo, mordido, to bite. 
 
 Fr. Ind. muerdo, muerdes, muerde, mordemos, mordéis, muerden. 
 Pr. Subj. muerda, muerdas, muerda, mordamos, mordáis, muerdan. 
 
 Imperat. muerde, muerda, mordamos, morded, muerdan. 
 
 Reg. mordía, mordí, mordiera, mordiese, mordiere, morderé, mor- 
 dería. 
 
 29. Volver, volviendo, vuelto, to return. 
 
 ^res. Ind. vuelvo, vuelves, vuelve, volvemos, volvéis, vuelven. 
 "^res. Subj. vuelva, vuelvas, vuelva, volvamos, volváis, vuelvan. 
 
 ^mperat. vuelve, vuelva, volvamos, volved, vuelvan. 
 
 volvía, volví, volviera, volviese, volviere, volveré, volvería. 
 
 30. Cocer, cociendo, cocido, to boil, to cook. 
 
454 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Pres. Ind. cuezo, cueces, cuece, cocemos, cocéis, cuecen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. cueza, cuezas, cueza, cozamos, cozáis, cuezan. 
 
 Imperat. cuece, cueza, cozamos, coced, cuezan. 
 
 Reg. cocía, cocí, cociera, cociese, cociere, coceré, cocería. 
 
 31. Torcer, torciendo, torcido, to twist. 
 
 Pres. Ind. tuerzo, tuerces, tuerce, torcemos, torcéis, tuercen. 
 Pres. Subj. tuerza, tuerzas, tuerza, torzamos, torzáis, tuerzan. 
 
 Imperat. tuerce, tuerza, torzamos, torced, tuerzan. 
 
 Reg. torcía, torcí, torciera, torciese, torciere, torceré, torcería. 
 
 32. Oler, oliendo, olido, to smelly to scent. 
 
 Pres. Ind. huelo, hueles, huele, olemos, oléis, huelen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. huela, huelas, huela, olamos, oláis, huelan. 
 
 Imperat. huele, huela, olamos, oled, huelan. 
 
 Reg. olía, olí, oliera, oliese, oliere, oleré, olería. 
 
 Second Class. 
 
 This class contains verbs of the third conjugation 
 only with the stem-vowels e and 0. 
 
 a. E. Stems. 
 
 Verbs of this class insert i before the stem-vowel e 
 throughout the singular and in the third person plural 
 of the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the 
 same persons in the imperative (siento, sientes, etc.). 
 
 In the first and second persons plural of the present 
 subjunctive, and in the first person plural of the im- 
 perative, the stem-vowel e is changed into i (sintamos, 
 sintáis). 
 
 In the past stem, including the gerund, the stem- 
 vowel e is changed into i whenever the inflection con- 
 tains the diphthongs ie or io. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 455 
 
 33. Sentir, sintiendo, sentido, to feel, to perceive. 
 
 Pres. Ind. sient-o, sient-es, sient-e, sent-imos, sent-is, sient-en. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. sient-a, sient-as, sient-a, sint>amos, sint-áis, sient-an. 
 
 Imperat. sient-e, sient-a, sint-amos, sent-id, sient-an. 
 
 Imperf. sent-ia, -ias, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -fan. 
 
 Past Stem. — sint (before ie or ió). 
 
 Gerund. sintiendo. 
 
 Past. sent-i, -iste, -sintió, sentimos, -isteis, sintieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. sint-iera, -ieras, -iéra, -iéramos, -ierais, -iéran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. sint-iése, -iéses, -iése, -iésemos, -ieseis, -iésen. 
 
 Fut. Suh. sint-iére, -iéres, -iére, -iéremos, -iereis, -iéren. 
 
 Future Stem. — Regular. 
 
 Future, sentir-é, -ás, -á, -emos, -éis, -án. 
 
 Condit. sentir-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 34. Advertir, advirtiendo, advertido, to observe, to advise. 
 
 Pr. Ind. advierto, adviertes, 
 
 Pr. Suhj. advierta, adviertas, 
 
 Imperat. advierte, 
 
 Imperf. advert-ía, -ías. 
 
 Gerund. advirtiendo. 
 
 Past, advert-í, -iste, advirtió, 
 ^Imp. Sj. advirt-iéra, -iéras, 
 ^Imp. Sj. advirt-iese, -iéses, 
 
 Fut. Suh. advirt-iere, -isres, 
 Future. advertir-é, -ás, 
 Condit. advertir-ía, -ías. 
 
 advierte, advertimos, advertís, 
 advierten. 
 
 advierta, advirtamos, advirtáis, 
 
 adviertan. 
 
 advierta, advirtamos, advertid, 
 adviertan. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 advert-lmos, -isteis, -advirtieron, 
 -iéra, -iéramos, -ierais, -iéran. 
 -iése, -iésemos, -ieseis, -iésen. 
 
 -iere, -iéremos, -iereis, -iéren. 
 
 -á, -emos, -éis, -án. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 35. Herir, hiriendo, herido, to wound, to strike. 
 
 Pres. Ind. hiero. 
 
 hieres. 
 
 hiere, 
 
 herimos. 
 
 herís, 
 
 hieren, 
 
 Pres. Suhj. hiera. 
 
 hieras. 
 
 hiera. 
 
 hiramos. 
 
 hiráis. 
 
 hieran, 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 hiere. 
 
 hiera. 
 
 hiramos. 
 
 herid. 
 
 hieran. 
 
 Imperf. her-ia. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
45*5 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Past. her-i. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 hirió. 
 
 her-imos, -ísteis. 
 
 hirieron, 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. hir-iera. 
 
 -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. hir-iese. 
 
 -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. hir-iere. 
 
 -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. herir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. herir-ia, 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 36. Hervir, hirviendo, 
 
 hervido, to boil. 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. hiervo. 
 
 hierves, 
 
 , hierve, 
 
 hervimos, hervís. 
 
 hierven. 
 
 Pres. Subj. hierva. 
 
 hiervas, 
 
 , hierva. 
 
 , hirvamos, hirváis, hiervan. 
 
 Imperat. ' 
 
 hierve. 
 
 hierva. 
 
 , hirvamos, hervid, hiervan. 
 
 Past. herv-i. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 hirvió. 
 
 herv-imos, -isteis. 
 
 hirvieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. hirv-iera. 
 
 “ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 , -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. hirv-iese. 
 
 -ieses. 
 
 -iese, 
 
 -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. hirv-iere. 
 
 -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. hervir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, 
 
 -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. hervir-ia. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos, -ías. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 37. Erguir, irguiendo, erguido, to throw back, haughtily 
 {the head), to swell with pride. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like sentir. The stem being initial, 
 the vowel i may either be consonantized or may replace the diph- 
 thong in the present tenses: — 
 
 Pres. Ind. yergo, yergues, yergue, 
 irgo, irgues, irgue. 
 
 Fres. Sj. yerga, yergas, yerga, 
 irga, irgas, irga, 
 
 Imperat. yergue, yerga, 
 
 irgue, irga. 
 
 Past. erguí, erguiste, irguió, erguimos, erguisteis, irguieron. 
 '^Imp. Sj. irguiera, irguieras, irguiera, irguiéramos, irguierais, 
 
 irguieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. irguiese, irguieses, irguiese, irguiésemos, irguieseis, 
 
 irguiesen. 
 
 Fut. Sj. irguiere, irguieres, irguiere, irguiéremos, irguiereis, 
 
 irguieren. 
 
 erguimos, erguís. 
 
 irgamos, irgáis. 
 
 irgamos, erguid. 
 
 yerguen. 
 
 irguen. 
 
 yergan. 
 
 irgan. 
 
 yergan. 
 
 irgan. 
 
 Future, erguir-é, -ás, -á, -emos, -éis, -án. 
 
 Condit. erguir-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 38. Adquirir, adqtiiríendo, adquirido, to obtain, to ac- 
 quire. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 457 
 
 Verbs in -quirir, which are derived from the Latin quaerere, 
 have the usual diphthong ie in the present stem (when tonic), 
 but preserve their characteristic i in all other tenses. 
 
 Pres. Ind. adquiero, adquieres, adquiere, adquirimos, adquirís, 
 adquieren. 
 
 Fres. Subj. adquiera, adquieras, adquiera, adquiramos, adquiráis, 
 adquieran. 
 
 ImperaL adquiere, adquiera, adquiramos, adquirid, 
 
 adquieran. 
 
 adquiría, adquirí, adquiriera, adquiriese, adquiriere, 
 adquiriré, etc. 
 
 O Stems. 
 
 The stem-vowel o is changed into ue in the singular, 
 and in the third person plural of the present indicative 
 and subjunctive, and also of the imperative. 
 
 Observe, furthermore, that o is changed into u in 
 the first and second persons plural of the present sub- 
 junctive, and in the first person plural of the impera- 
 tive. 
 
 In the preterite stem, including the gerund, o is 
 changed into u as often as the ending contains the diph- 
 thong ie or io. 
 
 39. Dormir, durmiendo, dormido, to sleep. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 duermo, 
 
 duermes, duerme, dormimos, 
 
 dormís, 
 
 
 duermen. 
 
 
 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 duerm.a, 
 
 duermas, duerma, durmamos. 
 
 durmáis, 
 
 
 duerman. 
 
 
 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 duerme, duerma, durmamos, 
 
 dormid, 
 
 
 duerman. 
 
 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 dorm-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, 
 
 -íamos, -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 dorm-í, -iste, durmió, 
 
 dorm-lmos, -Isteis, durmieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 durm-iera, 
 
 , -ieras, -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 durm-iese 
 
 , -ieses, -iese, 
 
 , -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 durm-iere, 
 
 , -ieres, -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 dormir-é, 
 
 .1 
 
 1 
 
 -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 dormir-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 40. Morir, muriendo, muerto. 
 
 , to die. 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 muero, mueres, muere, 
 
 morimos, morís. 
 
 mueren. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 muera, mueras, muera. 
 
 muramos, muráis. 
 
 mueran. 
 
4S8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Imperat. muere, 
 
 muera. 
 
 muramos. 
 
 morid, 
 
 mueran. 
 
 Imperf. mor-ía, -ías, 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. mor-í, -iste, 
 
 murió. 
 
 mor-ímos. 
 
 -ísteis. 
 
 murieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. mur-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. mur-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos. 
 
 -ieseis, 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. 5w&j.mur-iere, -ieres. 
 
 "iere. 
 
 -iéremos. 
 
 -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. morir-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. morir-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Third Class. 
 
 Only Verbs of the third conjugation with the stem- 
 vowel e belong to this class. The gerund belongs gen- 
 erally to the preterite stem. 
 
 In the present stem, the vowel e is changed into i 
 throughout the present indicative, subjunctive, and 
 the imperative, except the first and second persons 
 plural of the indicative, and the second person plural 
 of the imperative. 
 
 In the preterite stem, the vowel e — as in e stems of 
 the preceding class — ^is changed into i when the per- 
 sonal ending contains a diphthong; i.e., in the gerund, 
 in the third persons singular and plural of the past (defi- 
 nido) and. throughout the derivative tenses (i and 2 im- 
 perfect subjunctive and future subjunctive). 
 
 41. Pedir, pidiendo, pedido, to ask. 
 
 Pres. Ind. pido, pides, pide, pedimos, pedís, piden. 
 
 Fres. Subj. pida, pidas, pida, pidamos, pidáis, pidan. 
 
 Imperat. pide, pida, pidamos, pedid, pidan, 
 
 Imperf. ped-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 Past. ped-í, -iste, pidió, ped-imos, -isteis, pidieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. pid-iera, -ieras, -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. pid-iese, -ieses, -iese. 
 
 -iésemos, -ieseis, 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fuf. Subj. pid-iere, -ieres, -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. pedir-é, -ás, -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. pedir-ía, -ías, -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
The Spanish Language, 459 
 
 42. Servir, sirviendo, servido, to serve. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 sirvo, 
 
 sirves, sirve, servimos, servís. 
 
 sirven. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 Imperat. 
 
 sirva, 
 
 sirvas, sirva, sirvamos, sirváis, 
 sirve, sirva, sirvamos, servid. 
 
 sirvan. 
 
 sirvan. 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 serv-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 serv-í. 
 
 -iste, sirvió, serv-ímos, -isteis, 
 
 sirvieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sirv-iera, 
 
 -ieras, -iera, -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sirv-iese. 
 
 -ieses, -iese, -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 sirv-iere, 
 
 -ieres, -iere, -iéremos, -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 servir-é. 
 
 -ás, -á, -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 servir-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, íamos, -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 43. Regir, rigiendo, regido, to rule} 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 rijo, 
 
 riges, rige, regimos, regís. 
 
 rigen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 Imperat. 
 
 rija. 
 
 rijas, rija, rijamos, rijáis, 
 
 rige, rija, rijamos, regid. 
 
 rijan. 
 
 rijan. 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 reg-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 reg-í. 
 
 -iste, rigió, reg-imos, -isteis, ^ 
 
 rigieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 rig-iera. 
 
 -ieras, -iera, -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 rig-iese. 
 
 -ieses, -iese, -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 rig-iere. 
 
 -ieres, -iere, -iéremos, -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 regir-é. 
 
 -ás, -á, -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 regir-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 44. Segxxir, siguiendo, seguido, to follow} 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 sigo. 
 
 sigues, sigue, seguimos, seguís. 
 
 siguen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 Imperat. 
 
 siga. 
 
 sigas, siga, sigamos, sigáis, 
 sigue, siga, sigamos, seguid. 
 
 sigan. 
 
 sigan. 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 segu-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 segu-í. 
 
 -iste, siguió, segu-imos, -isteis. 
 
 siguieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sigu-iera¿ 
 
 -ieras, -iera, -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sigu-iese. 
 
 -ieses, -iese, -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 sigu-iere. 
 
 -ieres, -iere, -iéremos, -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 seguir-é. 
 
 -ás, -á, -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 seguir-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 ^ Verbs of this class, ending in gir^ must change g into j before 
 a or o. 
 
 2 Verbs of this class, ending in guir^ lose the u before a and 0. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 460 
 
 45. Reir, riendo, reido, to laugh} 
 
 Pres. Ind. río, 
 
 ríes. 
 
 ríe. 
 
 reimos. 
 
 reís, 
 
 ríen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. ría, 
 
 rías, 
 
 ría. 
 
 riamos, 
 
 riáis, 
 
 rían. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 ríe. 
 
 ría. 
 
 riamos, 
 
 reíd, 
 
 rían. 
 
 Imperf. re-ia, 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. re-i. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 rió, 
 
 re-imos, 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 rieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. ri-era, 
 
 -eras. 
 
 -era. 
 
 , -éramos, 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. ri-ese. 
 
 -eses. 
 
 -ese. 
 
 , -ésemos, 
 
 -eseis. 
 
 -esen. 
 
 Put. Subj. ri-ere. 
 
 -eres. 
 
 -ere, 
 
 , -éremos. 
 
 -ereis. 
 
 -eren. 
 
 Future. reir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. reir-ia. 
 
 -ías, 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 46. Ceñir, ciñendo, ceñido, 
 
 to gird.^ 
 
 
 - 
 
 Pres. Ind. ciño, 
 
 ciñes. 
 
 ciñe. 
 
 ceñimos, 
 
 ceñís, 
 
 ciñen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. ciña. 
 
 ciñas. 
 
 ciña. 
 
 ciñamos. 
 
 ciñáis. 
 
 ciñan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 ciñe, 
 
 ciña, 
 
 ciñamos, 
 
 ceñid, 
 
 ciñan. 
 
 Imperf. ceñ-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. ceñ-í. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 ciñó. 
 
 ceñ-imos, 
 
 -isteis, 
 
 ciñeron, 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. ciñ-era. 
 
 -eras. 
 
 -era, 
 
 , -éramos. 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. ciñ-ese, 
 
 -eses. 
 
 -ese. 
 
 1 -ésemos. 
 
 -eseis. 
 
 -esen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. ciñ-ere. 
 
 -eres, 
 
 -ere. 
 
 -éremos, 
 
 -ereis. 
 
 -eren. 
 
 Future. ceñir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis, 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. ceñir-ía, 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Fourth Class. 
 
 All verbs ending in uir, including those in giiir (but 
 not those in guir), belong to this class. 
 
 The gerund uniformly belongs to the preterite stem. 
 
 1 Verbs of this class, ending in eir, lose the i of the diphthongs 
 ie and io throughout the preterite stem. 
 
 2 Verbs of this class, ending in ñir, drop the i of the diphthongs 
 ie and io in the gerund, in the third persons singular and plural 
 of the past (definido) and in the derivative tenses. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 461 
 
 The consonant y is inserted throughout the present 
 indicative, subjunctive and the imperative, except in 
 the first and second persons plural of the indicative, 
 and in the second person plural of the imperative. 
 
 In the preterite stems, including the gerund, the 
 diphthongs ie and io are consonantized throughout = 
 ye, yo. 
 
 47. Atribuir, atribuyendo, atribuido, to ascribe. 
 
 Pres. Ind. atribuyo, atribuyes, atribuye, atribuimos, atribuís, 
 
 atribuyen. 
 
 Fres. Sj, 
 
 atribu-ya. 
 
 -yas, 
 
 -ya, -yamos, -yáis, -yan. 
 
 Imperat, 
 
 
 atribu-ye, -ya, -yamos, atribuid,atribuyan. 
 
 Imperf, 
 
 atribu-ia. 
 
 -ías, 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 atribu-i. 
 
 -iste, 
 
 -yó, -Irnos, -isteis, -yeron. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj, 
 
 atribu-yera,-yeras, 
 
 -yera,-yéramos,-yerais,-yeran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 atribu-yese,-yeses, 
 
 -yese , -y ésemos , -y eseis , -yesen . 
 
 Fut. Sj. 
 
 atribu-yere,-yeres, 
 
 -y ere , -y éremos , -y ereis , -y eren . 
 
 Future. 
 
 atribuir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, -emos, -éis, -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 atribuir-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 48. Huir, huyendo, huido, to flee. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 huyo. 
 
 huyes. 
 
 huye, huimos, huís, huyen. 
 
 Pres. Suhj, 
 
 huya. 
 
 huyas. 
 
 huya, huyamos, huyáis, huyan. 
 
 Jmperat. 
 
 
 huye. 
 
 huya, huyamos, huid, huyan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 hu-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 hu-í. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 -yó, -irnos, -isteis, -yeron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 hu-yera. 
 
 -y eras. 
 
 -yera, -yéramos, -yerais, -yeran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 hu-yese. 
 
 -yeses. 
 
 -yese, -yésemos, -yeseis, -yesen. 
 
 Ful. Suhj. 
 
 hu-yére. 
 
 -yeres. 
 
 -yere, -yéremos, -yereis, -yeren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 huir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, -emos, -éis, -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 huir-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 49. Instituir, instituyendo 
 
 instituido, to establish. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 institu-yo. 
 
 -yes. 
 
 -ye, -irnos, -ís, institu-yen. 
 
 Pres. Sj. 
 
 institu-ya. 
 
 -yas. 
 
 -ya, -yamos, -yáis, institu-yan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 
 institu-ye, -ya, -yamos, -id, institu-yan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 institu-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
462 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 institu-i, -Iste, -yó, -Irnos, 
 
 -Isteis, 
 
 -yeron. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 institu-yera, -yeras, -yera, -yéramos. 
 
 , -yerais, 
 
 , -yeran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 institu-yese, -yeses, -yese, -yesemos. 
 
 , -yeseis, 
 
 , -yesen. 
 
 Put. Sj. 
 
 institu-yere, -yeres, -yere, -yéremos, -yereis, 
 
 , -yeren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 instituir-é, -ás, -á, -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 instituir-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 50. Argüir, arguyendo, argüido, to argue. ^ 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 argu-yo, -yes, -ye, argü-lmos. 
 
 ■ís. 
 
 argu-yen. 
 
 Pres. Sj. 
 
 argu-ya, -yas, -ya, argu-yamos, • 
 
 ■yáis. 
 
 argu-yan. 
 
 Imperat 
 
 -ye, -ya, argu-yámos, argü-id. 
 
 argu-yan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 argü-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 argü-í, -íste, argüyó, argü-imos. 
 
 -Isteis, 
 
 argüyeron. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 argu-yera. 
 
 -yer^s, -yera, -yéramos. 
 
 -yerais. 
 
 -yeran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 argu-yese. 
 
 -yeses, -yese, -yésemos. 
 
 -yeseis. 
 
 -yesen. 
 
 Fut. Sj. 
 
 argu-yere. 
 
 -yeres, -yere, -yéremos. 
 
 -yereis. 
 
 -yeren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 argüir-é. 
 
 -ás, -á, -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 argüir-ía. 
 
 -ías, -ía, . -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Fifth Class. 
 
 All verbs belonging to this class have irregular pre- 
 terite stems, generally derived from the Latin. The 
 tonic accent is on the radical in the first and third per- 
 sons singular of the past tense. 
 
 Their present and future stems are mostly irregular. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 51. Andar, andando, andado, 
 
 ^ Verbs in güir lose the diaeresis as often as the consonant y is 
 admitted. 
 
 2 Andar expresses the manner of going, or going for an indefi- 
 nite purpose; ir means to go in a specific direction. Andar is there- 
 fore used of machines, watches, and inanimate objects, or animals 
 generally, while ir is used of persons. 
 

 
 The Spanish Language. 
 
 
 463 
 
 
 
 Present Stem.- 
 
 -Regular. 
 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 ando, 
 
 andas. 
 
 anda. 
 
 andamos. 
 
 andáis, 
 
 andan. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 Jmperat. 
 
 ande. 
 
 andes, 
 - anda. 
 
 ande, 
 
 ande. 
 
 andemos, 
 
 andemos. 
 
 andéis, 
 
 andad. 
 
 anden. 
 
 anden. 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 and-aba, -abas, 
 
 -aba. 
 
 -ábamos. 
 
 -abais. 
 
 -aban. 
 
 Past Stem. — anduv (Irregular). 
 
 Past. anduve, anduviste, anduvo, anduv-imos, -ísteis, -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 anduv-iera. 
 
 -eras, -iera, -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 anduv-iese. 
 
 -ieses, -iese, -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 anduv-iere. 
 
 -ieres, -iere, -iéremos, -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future Stem. — R egular. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 andar-é. 
 
 -ás, -á, -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 andar-ía, 
 
 -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 52. Caber, cabiendo, cabido, to he contained in (en), 
 to hold} 
 
 Present Stems. — quep (strong) ; cab (weak). 
 
 Pres. Ind. quepo, cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabéis, caben. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. quepa, quepas, quepa, quepamos, quepais,quepan. 
 
 Imperat. cabe, quepa, quepamos, cabed, quepan. 
 
 Past Stem.-^cup (Irregular). 
 
 Past. 
 
 cupe. 
 
 cupiste. 
 
 cupo, cup-imos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 cup-iera, 
 
 -ieras. 
 
 -iera, -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 cup-iese, 
 
 -ieses. 
 
 -iese, -iésemos, 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 cup-iere, 
 
 -ieres, 
 
 -iere, -iéremos. 
 
 -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 
 Future Stem. — cabr. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 cabr-é, 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 cabr-ía, 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 ^ Cabe is 
 
 used impersonally, in 
 
 the sense of it is 
 
 possible; 
 
 si cabe, 
 
 if it is possible^ if it may he; no cabe duda, there is no possible doubt. 
 
464 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 53. Hacer, haciendo, hecho, to make, to do (Latin, 
 f acere). 
 
 Present Stems. — hag (strong); hac (weak). 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 hago, haces. 
 
 hace. 
 
 hacemos, hacéis. 
 
 hacen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 haga, hagas. 
 
 haga. 
 
 hagamos, hagáis. 
 
 hagan. ' 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 haz. 
 
 haga. 
 
 hagamos, haced. 
 
 hagan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 hacía, hacías. 
 
 hacía. 
 
 hacíamos, hacíais. 
 
 hacían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. 
 
 — hic (Irregular). 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 hice, hiciste. 
 
 hizo. 
 
 hicimos, hicisteis hicieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 hic-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 hic-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 hic-iere, -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future Stem.- 
 
 — har. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 har-é, -ás. 
 
 -á, 
 
 -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 har-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 54. Satisfacer, satisfaciendo, satisfecho, to satisfy. 
 
 
 satis- 
 
 
 satis- 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 fago, faces, 
 
 face, 
 
 facemos, facéis. 
 
 facen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 faga, fagas, 
 
 faga. 
 
 fagam.os, fagáis. 
 
 fagan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 face or faz, faga. 
 
 fagamos, faced. 
 
 fagan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 fac-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 fice, ficiste. 
 
 fizo. 
 
 ficimos, ficisteis. 
 
 ficieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 fic-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 fic-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos, -ieseis, 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 fic-iere, -ieres. 
 
 -iere, 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 faré, etc. 
 
 
 Condit. faría, etc. 
 
 
 55. Poder, pudiendo, podido, to be able. 
 
 Present Stems. — pued and pod. 
 
 Pres. Ind. puedo, puedes, puede. 
 Pres. Stíbj. pueda, puedas, pueda, 
 
 Imperat, 
 
 Imperf, pod-ía, -ías, -ía, 
 
 podemos, podéis, 
 podamos, podáis, 
 
 pueden. 
 
 puedan. 
 
 ■íamos, 
 
 dais, 
 
 -lan. 
 
The Spanish Language, 465 
 
 Past Stem. — pud (Irregular). 
 
 Past 
 
 pude, pudiste. 
 
 pudo. 
 
 pud-imos. 
 
 -isteis, 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 pud-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 pud-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos. 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 pud-iere, -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos. 
 
 -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future 
 
 Stem.- 
 
 — podr. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 podr-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis, 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 podr-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 56. Poner, poniendo, puesto. 
 
 to put, to place. 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 pongo, pones. 
 
 pone. 
 
 ponemos. 
 
 ponéis. 
 
 ponen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 ponga, pongas. 
 
 ponga. 
 
 pongamos, pongáis,pongan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 pon. 
 
 ponga. 
 
 pongamos, poned. 
 
 pongan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 pon-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem.- 
 
 — pus (Irregular). 
 
 
 
 ‘ Past 
 
 puse, pusiste. 
 
 puso. 
 
 pus-irnos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 pus-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^^Imp. Subj. 
 
 pus-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos. 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 pus-iere, -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos. 
 
 -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future 
 
 Stem.- 
 
 -pondr. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 pondr-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 pondr-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 57. Querer, queriendo, querido, to will, to wish. 
 
 Present Stems. — quier and quer. 
 
 Pres. Ind. quiero, quieres, quiere, queremos, queréis, quieren. 
 
 Pres. Subj. quiera, quieras, quiera, queramos, queráis, quieran. 
 
 Imperat. quiere, quiera, queramos, quered, quieran. 
 
 Imperf. quer-ía, -ías, -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past Stem. — quis (Irregular). 
 
 
 
 Past quise, quisiste, quiso. 
 
 quis-imos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. quis-iera, -ieras, -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ’^Imp. Subj. quis-iese, -ieses, -iese. 
 
 -iésemos. 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. quis-iere, -ieres, -iere. 
 
 -iéremos. 
 
 -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
466 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Future Stem. — querr. 
 
 Future, querr-é, -ás, -á, -emos, éis, -án. 
 
 CondiL querr-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 
 58. Saber, sabiendo, sabido, to know {things). 
 
 Present Stems. — sep and sab. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 sé, 
 
 sabes, 
 
 sabe. 
 
 sabemos. 
 
 sabéis. 
 
 saben. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 sepa, 
 
 sepas. 
 
 sepa. 
 
 sepamos. 
 
 sepáis. 
 
 sepan, 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 
 sabe. 
 
 sepa. 
 
 sepamos. 
 
 sabed, 
 
 sepan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 sab-ía, 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. 
 
 — sup (Irregular). 
 
 
 
 Past 
 
 supe, 
 
 supiste. 
 
 supo. 
 
 sup-imos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sup-iera, 
 
 -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sup-iese, 
 
 -ieses, 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos. 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 sup-iere, 
 
 -ieres, 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos. 
 
 -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 
 Future Stem.- 
 
 — sabr. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 sabr-é, 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis, 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 sabr-ia, 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 59. Traer, trayendo, traído, to bring. 
 
 Present St^ms. — traig and tra. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 traigo, traes. 
 
 trae, traemos. 
 
 traéis. 
 
 traen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 traiga, traigas. 
 
 traiga, traigamos. 
 
 traigáis, traigan, 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 trae. 
 
 traiga, traigamos. 
 
 traed. 
 
 traigan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 tra-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos. 
 
 -íais^ 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. — traj. 
 
 
 
 Past 
 
 traje, trajiste. 
 
 trajo, traj-imos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -eron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 traj -era, -eras. 
 
 -era, -éramos. 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 traj -ese, -eses. 
 
 -ese, -ésemos. 
 
 -eseis. 
 
 -esen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 traj-ere, -eres. 
 
 -ere, -éremos. 
 
 -ereis. 
 
 -eren. 
 
 
 Future Stem. — R egular. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 traer-é, -ás. 
 
 -á, -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 traer-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
The Spanish Language, 467 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 60. Conducir, conduciendo, conducido, to conduct. 
 
 Present Stems. — conduzc and conduc (Irregular). 
 
 Pres. Ind. conduzco, conduces, conduce, conducimos, conducís, 
 
 conducen. 
 
 Pres. Sj. conduzca, conduzcas, conduzca, conduzcamos, conduz- 
 cáis, conduzcan. 
 
 Imperat. conduce, conduzca, conduzcamos, conducid, 
 
 conduzcan. 
 
 Imperf. conduc-ía, -ías, -ía, -íamos, -íais, -ían. 
 Past Stem. — conduj (Irregular). 
 
 Past. conduje, condujiste, condujo, conduj -irnos, -isteis, -eron. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 conduj -era, -eras. 
 
 -era, 
 
 -éramos. 
 
 -erais, -eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Sj. 
 
 conduj -ese, -eses. 
 
 -ese. 
 
 -ésemos. 
 
 -eseis, -esen. 
 
 Put. Sj. 
 
 conduj -ere, -eres. 
 
 -ere. 
 
 -éremos. 
 
 -ereis, -eren. 
 
 
 Future Stem. — Regular. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 conducir-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis, -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 conducir-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, -ían. 
 
 61. Decir, diciendo, dicho, to say, to tell. 
 
 Present Stems. — dig, die and dec. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 digo, 
 
 dices, 
 
 dice. 
 
 decimos, 
 
 decís, 
 
 dicen. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. 
 
 diga, 
 
 digas, 
 
 diga. 
 
 digamos. 
 
 digáis. 
 
 digan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 
 di. 
 
 diga. 
 
 digamos. 
 
 decid. 
 
 digan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 dec-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. 
 
 — dij (Irregular). 
 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 dije, 
 
 dijiste. 
 
 dijo, 
 
 dij-imos. 
 
 -isteis, 
 
 -eron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 di j -era. 
 
 -eras. 
 
 -era. 
 
 -éramos. 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 dij-ese. 
 
 -eses. 
 
 -ese, 
 
 -ésemos. 
 
 -eseis. 
 
 -esen. 
 
 Ful. Suhj. 
 
 dij-ere. 
 
 -eres. 
 
 -ere. 
 
 -éremos. 
 
 -ereis. 
 
 -eren. 
 
 
 
 Future Stem.- 
 
 -dir. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 dir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 dir-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
468 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 62. Bendecir, bendiciendo, bendecido (and bendito), 
 to bless. 
 
 
 ben- 
 
 
 ben- 
 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 digo, dices, 
 
 dice. 
 
 decimos. 
 
 decís. 
 
 dicen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 diga, digas. 
 
 diga, 
 
 digamos. 
 
 digáis. 
 
 digan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 dice. 
 
 diga, 
 
 digamos. 
 
 decid. 
 
 digan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 decía, -ías, 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 dije, dijiste, 
 
 dijo. 
 
 dij-ímos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -eron, 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 dij-era, -eras. 
 
 -era. 
 
 -éramos. 
 
 -erais. 
 
 -eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 dij-ese, -eses. 
 
 -ese. 
 
 -ésemos. 
 
 -eseis. 
 
 -esen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 dij-ere, -eres. 
 
 -ere. 
 
 -éremos. 
 
 -ereis. 
 
 -eren, 
 
 Future. 
 
 decir-é, -ás, 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 decir-ía, -ías, 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 63. Venir, viniendo, venido, to come. 
 
 Present Stems. — vin, vien, and ven. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 vengo, vienes. 
 
 viene. 
 
 venimos. 
 
 venís. 
 
 vienen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 venga, vengas. 
 
 venga. 
 
 vengamos. 
 
 vengáis, vengan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 ven. 
 
 venga. 
 
 vengamos, venid. 
 
 vengan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 ven-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. 
 
 — vin (Irregular). 
 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 vine, viniste. 
 
 vino. 
 
 vin-imos. 
 
 -isteis 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 vin-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais, 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 vin-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos. 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 vin-iere, -ieres, 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, 
 
 -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future 
 
 Stem.- 
 
 -vendr. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 vendr-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 vendr-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Sixth Class. 
 
 This class contains a few verbs not reducible to any 
 of the foregoing. 
 
The Spanish Language, 469 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 64. Dar, dando, dado, to give. 
 
 
 
 Present Stem.— 
 
 -Regular. 
 
 
 
 1 Pres. Ind. 
 
 doy, 
 
 das. 
 
 da. 
 
 damos. 
 
 dáis. 
 
 dan. 
 
 1 Pres. Subj. 
 
 dé, 
 
 des, 
 
 dé. 
 
 demos. 
 
 deis. 
 
 den. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 
 - da. 
 
 dé. 
 
 demos. 
 
 dad. 
 
 den. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 daba. 
 
 dalias. 
 
 daba. 
 
 dábamos, 
 
 , dabais. 
 
 daban. 
 
 Past Stem. — Second Conjugation.— 
 
 -Irregular. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 di. 
 
 diste. 
 
 dio. 
 
 dimos. 
 
 disteis. 
 
 dieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 diera. 
 
 dieras. 
 
 diera. 
 
 diéramos, 
 
 dierais. 
 
 dieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. diese, dieses, diese, diésemos, dieseis, diesen. 
 
 Fut, Subj. 
 
 diere. 
 
 dieres. 
 
 diere, diéremos. 
 
 diereis. 
 
 dieren. 
 
 
 
 Future 
 
 Stem. — Regular. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 dar-é. 
 
 “ás. 
 
 -á, -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 dar-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, -íamos, 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 
 
 65. Caer, cayendo, caído, to fall. 
 
 Present Stems. — caig and ca. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 caigo. 
 
 caes. 
 
 cae. 
 
 caemos, caéis. 
 
 caen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 Imperat. 
 
 caiga. 
 
 caigas, 
 
 cae. 
 
 caiga, 
 
 caiga. 
 
 caigamos, caigáis, 
 caigamos, caed. 
 
 caigan 
 
 caigan. 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 ca-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 
 Past Stem. — Regular. 
 
 
 Past 
 
 caí. 
 
 caíste. 
 
 cayó. 
 
 ca-ímos, -ísteis. 
 
 -yeron, 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 ca-yera, 
 
 , -yeras, 
 
 -yera. 
 
 -yéramos, -yerais, 
 
 -y eran. 
 
 ’^Imp. Subj. 
 
 ca-yese. 
 
 -yeses. 
 
 -yese, 
 
 -yésemos, -yeseis. 
 
 -yesen. 
 
 Fut. Subj. 
 
 ca-yere. 
 
 -yeres. 
 
 -yere. 
 
 -yéremos, -yereis. 
 
 -y eren. 
 
 
 
 Future 
 
 Stem.— 
 
 -Regular. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 caer-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, 
 
 -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 caer-ía. 
 
 -ías, 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
470 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 66. Valer, valiendo, valido, to be worth. 
 
 Present Stems. — valg and val. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 valgo, vales, 
 
 vale, 
 
 , valemos, 
 
 valéis. 
 
 valen. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. 
 
 valga, valgas. 
 
 valga, valgamos, 
 
 valgáis, valgan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 val and vale, valga, valgamos. 
 
 valed. 
 
 valgan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 val-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. — R egular. 
 
 
 
 Past 
 
 val-í, -iste. 
 
 -ió. 
 
 -Irnos, 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 val-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos. 
 
 -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 val-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos, 
 
 -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. Suhj. 
 
 val-iere, -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, 
 
 -iereis. 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future Stem.- 
 
 — valdr. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 valdr-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos, 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 valdr-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 67. Vet; 
 
 , viendo, visto, 
 
 to see. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present Stems.— 
 
 -ve and v. 
 
 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 veo, ves. 
 
 ve. 
 
 vemos. 
 
 veis. 
 
 ven. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. 
 
 vea, veas. 
 
 vea. 
 
 veamos. 
 
 veáis. 
 
 vean. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 ve. 
 
 vea. 
 
 veamos. 
 
 ved, 
 
 vean. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 ve-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past Stem. — I rregular. 
 
 Past vi. 
 
 viste. 
 
 vió. 
 
 Vimos, 
 
 visteis. 
 
 vieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. viera. 
 
 vieras. 
 
 viera. 
 
 viéramos. 
 
 vierais. 
 
 vieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. viese. 
 
 vieses. 
 
 viese, 
 
 viésemos. 
 
 vieseis, 
 
 viesen. 
 
 Fut. Suhj. viere. 
 
 vieres. 
 
 viere. 
 
 viéremos. 
 
 viereis. 
 
 vieren. 
 
 
 Future Stem.- 
 
 -Regular. 
 
 
 
 Future. ver-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á, 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. ver-ía, 
 
 -ías, 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
The Spanish Language. 471 
 
 68. Proveer, proveyendo, proveído or provisto, to 
 provide. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 Pres. Suhj. 
 Imperat. 
 Imperf. 
 Past. 
 
 ^Imp, Suhj. 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 Put. Suhj. 
 Future. 
 Condit. 
 
 proveo, provees, provee, proveemos, proveéis, proveen, 
 provea, proveas, provea, proveamos, proveáis, provean. 
 provee, provea, proveamos, proveed, provean. 
 
 prove-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 prove-í, -iste. 
 
 -yó, 
 
 -irnos. 
 
 -Tsteis, 
 
 -yeron. 
 
 prove-yera, -yeras. 
 
 -yera, 
 
 -yéramos. 
 
 -yerais. 
 
 -y eran. 
 
 prove-yese, -yeses. 
 
 -yese. 
 
 -yésemos. 
 
 -yeseis. 
 
 -yesen. 
 
 prove-yere, -yeres. 
 
 -yere. 
 
 . -yéremos. 
 
 -yereis. 
 
 -yeren. 
 
 proveer-é, -as. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos, 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 proveer-ía, -ías, 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 69. Creer, creyendo, creído, to believe. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 creo. 
 
 crees. 
 
 cree. 
 
 creemos. 
 
 creéis. 
 
 creen. 
 
 Pres. Suhj. 
 
 crea. 
 
 creas. 
 
 crea. 
 
 creamos. 
 
 creáis. 
 
 crean. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 
 cree. 
 
 crea. 
 
 creamos. 
 
 creed. 
 
 crean. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 cre-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 cre-í. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 -yó. 
 
 -irnos. 
 
 -isteis. 
 
 -yeron. 
 
 '^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 cre-yera, 
 
 , -yeras. 
 
 -yera. 
 
 -yéramos. 
 
 -yerais. 
 
 -y eran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 cre-yese. 
 
 -yeses. 
 
 -yese. 
 
 -yésemos. 
 
 -yeseis. 
 
 -yesen. 
 
 Fut. Suhj. 
 
 cre-yere. 
 
 -yeres. 
 
 -yere. 
 
 -yéremos. 
 
 -yereis. 
 
 -yeren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 creer-é, etc. 
 
 
 Condit. creer-ía, etc. 
 
 70. Poseer, poseyendo, poseído, to possess. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 Pres. Suhj. 
 Imperat. 
 
 poseo, 
 
 posea. 
 
 posees, 
 
 poseas, 
 
 posee. 
 
 posee, 
 
 posea, 
 
 posea. 
 
 poseemos, 
 
 poseamos, 
 
 poseamos. 
 
 poseéis, poseen, 
 poseáis, posean, 
 poseed, posean. 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 pose-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais, -ían. 
 
 Past. 
 
 pose-í. 
 
 -iste. 
 
 -yó. 
 
 -irnos. 
 
 -isteis, -yeron. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 pose-yera, 
 
 , -yeras. 
 
 -yera. 
 
 -yéramos. 
 
 -yerais, -yeran. 
 
 ^Imp. Suhj. 
 
 pose-yese. 
 
 -yeses. 
 
 -yese. 
 
 -yésemos. 
 
 -yeseis, -yesen. 
 
 Fut. Suhj. 
 
 pose-yere. 
 
 -yeres. 
 
 -yere, 
 
 -yéremos. 
 
 -yereis, -yeren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 poseer-é, etc. 
 
 
 Condit. poseer-ía, etc. 
 
472 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 71. Yacer, yaciendo, yacido, to he situated, to lie in the 
 
 grave. 
 
 yazco, 
 
 Pres. Ind. i yazgo, yaces, yace, 
 
 I yago, 
 
 ¡ yazca, yazcas, yazca, 
 yazga, yazgas, yazga, 
 yaga, yagas, yaga. 
 
 yacemos, yacéis, yacen. 
 
 yazcamos, yazcáis, yazcan, 
 yazgamos, yazgáis, yazgan, 
 yagamos, yagáis, yagan. 
 
 Imperat. yace or yaz, yaced. 
 
 yacía, yací, yaciera, yaciese, yaciere, yaceré, yacería. 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 72. Asir, asiendo, asido, to lay hold of. 
 
 Present Stems. — asg and as. 
 
 Pres. Ind. . asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asís. 
 
 Pres. Subj. asga, asgas, asga, asgamos, asgáis, 
 
 Imperat. ase, asga, asgamos, asid, 
 
 asía, así, asiera, asiese, asiere, asiré, asiría. 
 
 73. Ir, yendo, ido, to go {for a definite purpose). 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 voy. 
 
 vas. 
 
 va. 
 
 vamos, 
 
 vais. 
 
 van. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 vayas. 
 
 vaya. 
 
 vayamos, vayáis. 
 
 vayan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 iba. 
 
 ve, 
 
 ibas. 
 
 vaya, 
 
 iba. 
 
 vayamos^ id, 
 íbamos, ibais. 
 
 vayan. 
 
 iban. 
 
 Past. 
 
 fui. 
 
 fuiste. 
 
 fué. 
 
 fuimos. 
 
 fuisteis. 
 
 fueron. 
 
 '^Imp. Subj. 
 
 fuera. 
 
 fueras. 
 
 fuera. 
 
 fuéramos, fuerais. 
 
 fueran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 fuese. 
 
 fueses. 
 
 fuese. 
 
 fuésemos, fueseis. 
 
 fuesen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 fuere. 
 
 fueres. 
 
 fuere. 
 
 fuéremos, fuereis. 
 
 fueren. 
 
 Future. 
 
 ir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 ir-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 74. Oir, oyendo, oido, to hear. 
 
 Present Stems. — oig, oy, and o. 
 
 Pres. Ind. 
 
 oigo. 
 
 oyes. 
 
 Oye, 
 
 oimos. 
 
 oís. 
 
 oyen. 
 
 Pres. Subj. 
 
 oiga. 
 
 oigas. 
 
 Oiga, 
 
 oigamos. 
 
 oigáis. 
 
 oigan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 
 ■ oye. 
 
 Oiga, 
 
 oigamos. 
 
 oid. 
 
 Oigan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 o-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -íamos. 
 
 -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 asen. 
 
 asgan. 
 
 asgan. 
 
I 
 
 The Spanish Language, 
 
 473 
 
 Past Stem. — o (Diphthongs ie and ió consonan tized.) 
 
 Past. 
 
 OÍ, 
 
 oíste. 
 
 oyó, 
 
 olmos. 
 
 oísteis. 
 
 oyeron. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 oyera, 
 
 oyeras. 
 
 oyera. 
 
 oyéramos. 
 
 oyerais. 
 
 oyeran. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 oyese, 
 
 oyeses. 
 
 oyese. 
 
 oyésemos. 
 
 oyeseis, 
 
 oyesen. 
 
 Put. Subj. 
 
 oyere. 
 
 oyeres. 
 
 oyere. 
 
 oyéremos. 
 
 oyereis, 
 
 oyeren. 
 
 
 
 Future Stem.— 
 
 -Ps^egular. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 oir-é. 
 
 -ás. 
 
 -a. 
 
 -emos. 
 
 -éis, 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 oir-ía. 
 
 -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -ían. 
 
 75. Salir, saliendo, salido, to go out 
 
 Present Stems. — salg and sal. 
 
 Fres. Ind. 
 
 salgo, sales. 
 
 sale, 
 
 salimos, salís. 
 
 salen. 
 
 Fres. Subj. 
 
 salga, salgas. 
 
 salga. 
 
 salgamos, salgáis. 
 
 salgan. 
 
 Imperat. 
 
 sal. 
 
 salga. 
 
 salgamos, salid. 
 
 salgan. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 sal-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 
 Past Stem. — R egular. 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 sal-í, -Iste, 
 
 -ió. 
 
 -Irnos, -isteis. 
 
 -ieron. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sal-iera, -ieras. 
 
 -iera. 
 
 -iéramos, -ierais. 
 
 -ieran. 
 
 ^Imp. Subj. 
 
 sal-iese, -ieses. 
 
 -iese. 
 
 -iésemos, -ieseis. 
 
 -iesen. 
 
 Put. Subj, 
 
 sal-iere, -ieres. 
 
 -iere. 
 
 -iéremos, -iereis, 
 
 -ieren. 
 
 
 Future Stem. — saldr. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 saldr-é, -ás. 
 
 -á. 
 
 -emos, -éis. 
 
 -án. 
 
 Condit. 
 
 saldr-ía, -ías. 
 
 -ía. 
 
 -íamos, -íais. 
 
 -ían. 
 
474 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 The Use of the Tenses. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 1. The Present of the Indicative Mode expresses an 
 action occurring or a state existing at the present time: 
 
 Yo escribo y ella dibuja, I write and she draws. 
 
 Estoy escribiendo una carta, I am writing a letter. 
 
 ¿ Qué está V. haciendo? What are you doing? 
 
 2. It sometimes replaces the Past Tense, especially 
 in lively narration: 
 
 Apenas dada la orden, se avan- Hardly was the order given ^ 
 za la caballería, ataca al when the cavalry advanced, 
 enemigo, que presto queda attacked the enemy, who 
 completamente derrotado. soon was completely routed. 
 
 3. It sometimes replaces the future, especially after 
 the conjunction si: 
 
 Voy al instante, I will go at once. 
 
 ¿ Me hace V. el favor? Will you do me the favor? 
 
 4. It is used after hace, it is, when expressing time: 
 
 I Cuánto tiempo hace que está How long have you been in 
 V. en Méjico? Mexico? 
 
 Hace mucho tiempo que no le It is a long time since I saw 
 veo, him. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 1. The Imperfect of the Indicative Mode is employed 
 to express an action or event which was going on or 
 existing, when another past action took place: 
 
 Yo estaba escribiendo cuando I was writing when my friend 
 mi amigo Carlos entró, Charles came in. 
 
 2. It denotes customary or habitual action, and may 
 in such cases be translated by ‘‘used to”: 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 475 
 
 Cuando era joven me alegraba When I was youngs I used to 
 de cosas que no me gustan take pleasure in things 
 
 aliora, which do not please me 
 
 now. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 1. The Past Tense of the Indicative Mode denotes 
 what occurred within a period of time wholly elapsed. 
 It may have happened yesterday, a few weeks before or 
 ages ago: 
 
 Fui á verle ayer, I went to see him yesterday. 
 
 Murió hace dos meses, He died two months ago, 
 
 Cervantes nació a mediados Cervantes was horn in the mid- 
 del siglo dieciseis, y murió die of the sixteenth century, 
 
 en Madrid a principios del and died at Madrid in the he- 
 
 siglo diecisiete, ginning of the seventeenth cen- 
 
 tury. 
 
 2. It is therefore called the historical tense, and is 
 used especially in narration: 
 
 Entregaron la ciudad a los They delivered the town to the 
 enemigos, pero estos no se enemies, hut they at first did 
 atrevieron al principio a not venture to enter it, 
 entrar en ella, 
 
 Present Perfect Tense. 
 
 1. The Indicative of the Present Perfect Tense denotes 
 what is past without stating a specific period: 
 
 He comprado un caballo, I have bought a horse. 
 
 2. It denotes an action in the past belonging to a 
 period of time (day, week, month, year, etc.), not en- 
 tirely elapsed: 
 
476 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 He estado aquí dos horas, I have been here for two hours, 
 
 Muchas cosas nuevas han sido Many new things have been 
 inventadas en el siglo invented during the present 
 presente, century. 
 
 Past Perfect Tense. 
 
 The Past Perfect Tense denotes an action which is 
 not only past in itself, but also past with reference to 
 some other past action expressed or implied: 
 
 Habia acabado de almorzar I had breakfasted before he 
 antes que él viniese, came. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 The Past Anterior is used in the same manner as 
 the Past Perfect, but is always preceded by a conjtmction 
 of time, as cuando, when; despues que, after; luego que, 
 así que, tan pronto como, as soon as; no bien, no sooner; 
 apenas, hardly, scarcely, etc.: 
 
 Como hube leído el libro le When I had read the book, I 
 volví, returned it. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 1. The Future denotes future time: 
 
 El será elegido mañana. He will be elected to-morrow. 
 
 2. It is frequently used in questions, especially when 
 the interrogator is convinced that his query cannot be 
 denied: 
 
 I Habrá desgracia mayor que Can there be a greater misfortune 
 la mía? than mim? 
 
 ¿ Se habrá visto cosa más Has ever anything more beautiful 
 primorosa? been seen? 
 
The Spanish Language. 477 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 
 ! This tense is used in the same manner as the corre- 
 sponding English form: 
 
 7a habré terminado la tarea I shall have finished my task 
 cuando llegue el invierno, when the winter comes, 
 
 ; Conditional. 
 
 • I. The Conditional is used chiefly in conditional sen- 
 tences of which it forms the conclusions, while the clause 
 j vvith si, if, forms the condition: 
 
 (¡Compraría libros si tuviese I should buy hooks if I had 
 {or tuviera) dinero, money. 
 
 j 2. In the conditional clauses with si, the forms in 
 
 i]-se and -ra are interchangeable: 
 
 !' 
 
 Habríamos ido a ver los fue- We should have gone to see the 
 j gos artificiales, si hubiése- fire-works if we had known 
 
 ’ mos {or hubiéramos) sa- that there were any. 
 
 bido que los había, 
 
 3. The conditional is used to express a wish or modest 
 I request: 
 
 j Desearía que mis hijos apren- I would desire my children to learn 
 ! diesen {or aprendieran) al- some languages. 
 
 gunas lenguas. 
 
 i 
 
 i 4. It denotes an uncertain and approximate statement 
 ; in narrations: 
 
 i Las once y media serían cuan- It may have been {it was 
 
 I do nos acostamos anoche, about) half-past eleven when 
 
 we went to bed last night. 
 
 \ 5. It expresses possibility or fitness: 
 
 j I Sería verdad eso? Could that be true? 
 
 É1 podría venir. He might come. 
 
47& 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 The Use of the Subjunctive Mode. 
 
 1. The Subjunctive Mode expresses possibility, doubt, 
 apprehension, prohibition, entreaty, surprise, neces- 
 sity, advice, etc. It is chiefly used in dependent 
 clauses connected with the principal sentence by the 
 conjunction que, that, 
 
 2. The tense of the subjunctive mode, being subordi- 
 nate to the preceding verb, is regulated by it. 
 
 3. The subjunctive mode is used in principal sen- 
 tences to supply the negative form of the imperative 
 which can never be employed in Spanish. 
 
 It also supplies the affirmative form of the impera- 
 tive in the first and third persons: 
 
 Sea yo, let me he. No sea yo, let me not he. 
 
 Sea él, let him he. No sea él, let him not he. ; 
 
 No me lo diga, do not tell it No se vaya V., do not go away. j 
 me! I 
 
 4. The Subjunctive Mode must be used after verbs ex- | 
 pressive of wish, desire, entreaty, command, permission, | 
 expectation, hope, doubt, fear, apprehension, joy, grief, ^ 
 
 vexation, and surprise: 
 
 Temo que no vengan a tiempo, 
 para ir al teatro, 
 
 Quiere que lo haga yo. 
 
 Todos desean que vuelva hoy. 
 
 Me alegro que lo sepa. 
 
 Espero que llegue mi hermano. 
 Me alegro que llueva. 
 
 Le mandaron que fuese a Chi- 
 huahua, 
 
 Permítame V. que le haga una 
 pregunta. 
 
 Siento que no hayamos po- 
 dido venir. 
 
 I am afraid they will not ar- 
 rive in time to go to the 
 theatre. 
 
 He wants me to do this. 
 
 Every one desires him to return 
 to-day. 
 
 I am glad you know it. 
 
 I hope my brother will arrive. 
 
 I am glad it rains. 
 
 They ordered him to go to 
 Chihuahua. 
 
 Allow me to ask you a ques- 
 tion. 
 
 I regret we could not come. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 479 
 
 I 5. The subjiinctive mode is employed after imper- 
 sonal expressions, unless they denote positive cer- 
 tainty: 
 
 Conviene que lo sepa, It is proper for him to know 
 
 iL 
 
 Es justo que sea V. premiado It is right you should he re^ 
 por su obra, warded for your work. 
 
 Es lástima que no venga. It is a pity that he does not 
 
 come, 
 
 Es menester que vaya V. a You must go for the physi- 
 buscar al medico, dan. 
 
 6. The subjunctive mode is used in relative sen- 
 itences when the relative refers to persons, objects, of 
 ideas which are mentioned in an uncertain or indefinite 
 sense: 
 
 ¡ \^enga lo que viniere, Come what will. 
 
 2uien quiera que sea. Whoever he may he. 
 
 Haga V. lo que más le gus- Do what you like {best) I 
 I tare! 
 
 7. The subjunctive is also used when a futiure, pos- 
 sible, or contingent effect is expressed: 
 
 Lo compraré cuando tenga I will huy it when I have 
 dinero, money. 
 
 8. After verbs of saying, thinking, believing, etc., 
 the subjunctive mode is used in negative or interrogative 
 sentences: 
 
 N^o crea V. que mi amigo haya Do not believe that my friend did 
 hecho esto, this! 
 
 ¿ Piensa V. que ella salga hoy ? Do you think she will go out 
 
 to-day? 
 
 a. In affirmative sentences, however the indicative 
 mode must be used after these verbs: 
 
 La criada dice que la sopa The maid says that the soup is on 
 está en la mesa, the table. 
 
48o 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Correspondence of Tenses. 
 
 1. The Present of the Subjunctive Mode is generally 
 employed when the preceding verb stands in the Present, 
 Present Perfect, Future Indicative, or in the Imperative: 
 
 Me alegro que el tiempo fa- I am glad the weather is favorable 
 vorezca la fiesta, to the festival. 
 
 2. The Imperfect of the Subjunctive in either form 
 is employed after verbs in any past tense in the Indica- 
 tive : 
 
 Quise que viniese {or viniera), I wished him to come. 
 
 3. The Present Perfect of the Subjunctive is used after 
 verbs in the Present or the Future Indicative: 
 
 No volveré hasta que me haya I shall not return till I am 
 restablecido, well. 
 
 4. The Past Perfect Subjunctive in either form is used 
 after verbs of any past tense in the indicative: 
 
 Creíamos que ya hubiera {or We thought he had already 
 hubiese) dado este libro a given this hook to little 
 Juanita, Jane. 
 
 5. The Future and Future Perfect of the Subjunctive 
 is used after si, if; cuando, when; mientras, while; or after 
 a relative pronoun or adverb in sentences denoting future 
 contingency : 
 
 Si él tuviere dinero, compraría If he had money he would buy 
 libros, books. 
 
 Yo traeré a V. los libros que me I will bring you the books they 
 dieren, may give me. 
 
 Note that, instead of this tense, the present or Past 
 Perfect Subjunctive may be used: 
 
 Yo traeré a V. los libros que me I will bring you the books they 
 den, may give me. 
 
481 
 
 The Spanish Language. 
 
 The Use of the Infinitive. 
 
 1. The Infinitive may be used, and consequently in- 
 flected, like a noun: 
 
 Hablar mucho es un vicio, To talk much is a bad habit. 
 
 The definite article is generally, but not necessarily, 
 employed with the Infinitive. 
 
 2. The Infinitive stands after all prepositions: 
 
 Despues de oir a ambas par- After hearing both parties, one is 
 tes, es como se puede juz- able to judge. 
 
 i 
 
 ( Para aprender algo es preciso In order to learn anything, one 
 estudiar, must study. 
 
 3. The Infinitive with a or al (dative case) is em- 
 ployed in place of English sentences beginning with 
 when, after, as, or if: 
 
 Al salir de casa me encontré con When I left the house I met my 
 mi agente, agent. 
 
 A saber yo que había venido, no If I had known he had come, 
 hubiera salido, I should not have gone out. 
 
 4. The Infinitive without any preposition is used 
 after verbs denoting fear, doubt, wish, desire, need, 
 duty, thought, etc., when both verbs have the same 
 subject. 
 
 After verbs of command, or forbidding, causing, pre- 
 venting, etc. either the infinitive or subjunctive may 
 follow. 
 
482 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Verbs requiring no Preposition before the following Infinitive* 
 
 Aconsejar, to advise, 
 acostumbrar, to accustom, 
 afirmar, to affirm, 
 agradar, to he agreeable, 
 concebir, to conceive, 
 confesar, to confess, 
 contar, to relate, 
 conviene, it is convenient to, 
 creer, to believe, 
 deber, to owe^ must, 
 declarar, to declare, 
 dejar, to let^ to leave, 
 desear, to desire, 
 determinar, to resolve to, 
 esperar, to hope^ to expect to, 
 gustar, to like to, 
 hacer, to make^ to cause to, 
 imaginar, to imagine, 
 impedir, to prevent from, 
 intentar, to intend, 
 mandar, to order, 
 manifestar, to manifest. 
 
 más vale, it is better to, 
 necesitar, to want to, 
 negar, to deny, 
 oir, to hear, 
 
 osar, to dare^ to venture to, 
 parecer, to appear. 
 pensar, to thinks to intend, 
 poder, to be able, 
 preferir, to prefer, 
 presumir, to presume, 
 pretender, to pretend^ to claim, 
 procurar, to try to, 
 prohibir, to forbid to, 
 prometer, to promise, 
 proponer, to propose, 
 protestar, to protest, 
 querer, to wish, 
 
 saber, to know hoWy to be able, 
 sentir, to feely to regret, 
 soler, to be accustomed to, 
 temer, to fear to, 
 ver, to see. 
 
 Decir, to say, to tell, according to the Grammar of 
 the Spanish Academy, must never be followed by an 
 Infinitive. This rule, however, is frequently disre- 
 garded. 
 
 5. Verbs of motion, destination, encouragement, in- 
 clination, habit, or reflexive verbs expressive of strong 
 moral decision or effort, require the preposition a before 
 the infinitive of the verb they govern. 
 
 Verbs requiring a before the Infinitive. 
 
 Animar a, to encourage to, 
 aprender a, to learn to, 
 aspirar a, to aspire to. 
 
 enviar a, to send to, 
 esforzarse a, to try to, 
 habituar a, to accustom to. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 483 
 
 lutorizar a, to authorize to, 
 
 it reverse a, to dare to, 
 
 lyndar a, to help to. 
 
 x>inenzar a, to commence to, 
 
 condenar a, to condemn to. 
 
 ponsentir a, to consent to. 
 
 convidar a, to invite to. 
 
 iar a, to give to. 
 
 decidirse a, to resolve to. 
 
 echar a, 1,7-, 
 
 > to begin to, 
 empezar a, j 
 
 enseñar a, to teach to. 
 
 inclinar a, to incline to. 
 invitar a, to invite to 
 ir a, to go to. 
 negarse a, to refuse to. 
 obligar a, to compel to. 
 pasar a, to go to^ to come to. 
 ponerse a, to begin to. 
 resistirse a, to resist. 
 salir a, to start for. 
 tender a, to aim at. 
 venir a, to come to. 
 volver a, to return to^ to 
 again. 
 
 ^ 6. The Preposition a before the Infinitive is used in 
 
 | 3 , number of elliptical phrases, as: 
 
 '¡A. decir la verdad, to speak truly. 
 
 ^ saber, namely. 
 
 1 7 . The Preposition de is used before the Infinitive 
 after nouns and adjectives: 
 
 Hágame V. el favor de venir Do me the favor to come with 
 conmigo, me. 
 
 No tengo el gusto de conocer I have not the pleasure of knowing 
 a V., you. 
 
 j Es difícil de aprender. It is difficult to learn. 
 
 I 
 
 8. Verbs requiring de 
 
 ! Aicabar de, to have just. 
 acordarse de, to be glad to. 
 alegrarse de, to be glad to. 
 arrepentirse de, to repent of. 
 pesar de, to cease to. 
 iejar de, to fail to^ to leave off. 
 iesistir de, to cease from. 
 iisuadir de, to dissuade from. 
 
 before the Infinitive. 
 
 encargar de, to commission to. 
 excusar de, to excuse from. 
 
 . eximir de, to free from. 
 haber de, to be about to. 
 ocuparse de, to busy one's self 
 with. 
 
 olvidarse de, to forget to. 
 tratar de, to try to. 
 
484 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 9. De must be used after ser, to be, when used im- 
 personally: 
 
 Es de esperar, It is to he hoped. 
 
 Es de desear que no venga, It is desirable he should not 
 
 come. 
 
 10. The Preposition en is required before the Infinitive 
 after verbs denoting occupation or insistence: 
 
 Se ocupa en leer, en escribir, He occupies himself with reading, 
 
 with writing. 
 
 11. The Preposition con is required before the In- 
 finitive after verbs which signify diversion or amuse- 
 ment: 
 
 Le entretengo con leerle algo I entertain him by reading some 
 gracioso, merry piece to him. 
 
 The Gerund is generally used in such cases : 
 
 Divierto a mi hermana tocán- I entertain my sister by play- 
 dole algunas arias al ing some airs on the piano , 
 piano, to her. 
 
 The Gerund. 
 
 1. The Gerund is invariable in gender and number. j 
 It is used in connection with the verb estar, similar to 
 the progressive conjugation in English, and expresses 
 the action of the verb as continuing or unfinished: 
 
 Estoy comiendo, I am eating. 
 
 Estaba leyendo. He was reading. 
 
 Estará escribiendo. He will be writing. 
 
 Observe that estar cannot be used with the Gerund 
 of ser, to be; ir, to go; and venir, to come. Thus we say 
 voy, I am going; vengo, I am coming. 
 
 2. The Gerund is used when it denotes the state of 
 the subject: 
 
 Habla durmiendo, He speaks in his sleep {while he is 
 
 asleep). 
 
 ' 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 485 
 
 3. The Gerund is frequently used for the sake of 
 uphony or brevity where we have to employ while, 
 whilst, as, since, if, although, or by: 
 
 listando escribiendo una carta Whilst writing a letter to my agents 
 a mi agente, entró él mismo he entered himself into my 
 en mi cuarto, room. 
 
 ?eniendo malo el pie no puede He cannot rise as he has a sore 
 levantarse, foot. 
 
 t 
 
 4. The Gerund is also used with the preposition en. 
 • t is to be observed that the Gerund with or without en 
 nay have an indefinite personal subject: 
 
 in diciendo esto, se marchó, Having said so y he went away. 
 in llegando a Veracruz, es- As soon as I arrive in Vera CruZy 
 cribiré, I shall write. 
 
 Í 
 
 I 
 
 ■ 5. The Gerund naturally partakes of the nature of 
 |he verb from which it is derived, and governs the same 
 ases: 
 
 rozando de buena salud. Enjoying good health. 
 
 )lvidándose de lo pasado. Forgetting the past. 
 
 3 
 
 ' The Past Participle. 
 
 I. The Past Participle of all verbs joined to the aux- 
 liary haber is invariable: 
 
 lemos visto dos señoritas. We have seen two young ladies. 
 
 '/as señoritas que hemos visto The young ladies we saw are ver^ 
 ^ son muy lindas, pretty. 
 
 ' 2. Llevar or tener, when used as substitutes of haber, 
 equire the past participles accompanying them to agree 
 !n number and gender with their object: 
 
486 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Tengo escrita una carta, I have written a letter. 
 
 Llevan escritas dos cartas, They have written two letters, 
 
 3. In the tenses of the passive voice the past participle 
 is inflected and agrees in gender and number with its 
 subject. It is also inflected when joined to the verbs 
 ser or estar, to be: 
 
 Estos hombres están' cansados, These men are tired. 
 
 Estas mui eres están cansadas. These women are tired, 
 
 4. Separated from the auxiliary, the past participle 
 is inflected like any adjective, agreeing in gender and 
 number with the noun qualified: 
 
 Una mujer casada, A married woman, 
 
 Un hombre perdido, A lost man. 
 
 Se vieron vencidos del enmigo, They saw themselves defeated by 
 
 the enemy. 
 
 5. The Past Participle may be used absolutely: 
 
 Muerta la reina, su hijo tomó el The queen having died, her son 
 titulo de rey, took the title of king. 
 
 Concluido este negocio, se The business concluded, he took 
 despidió, leave. 
 
 The Imperative. 
 
 1. There are only two forms in the Imperative, viz.,| 
 the second person singular and plural. AU the others 
 are simply taken from the Subjunctive Mode: 
 
 habla, speak {thou). hablad, speak {ye). 
 
 2. The Impera ive proper can never be used nega- 
 
 tively. In its place the corresponding subjunctive forms 
 must be employed: ' 
 
 No hable, let him not speak. No hable V., do not speak. , 
 
 No hablemos, let us not speak. No hablen V. V., do not speak. j 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 487 
 
 I. Adjectives agree in number and gender with the 
 aoun they qualify, as: 
 
 ^E1 libro nuevo, the new hook. 
 Libros nuevos, new hooks. 
 
 Una casa nueva, a new house. 
 Casas nuevas, new houses. 
 
 I 
 
 2. The plural of adjectives is formed like the plural 
 noims, viz., by adding s to vowel-endings, and es to 
 'X)nsonant or accented vowel-endings, always changing z 
 \nto c before es, as: 
 
 Singular. 
 
 resco, 
 
 :‘eliz. 
 
 fresca 
 
 feliz, 
 
 frescos, 
 
 felices. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 frescas, 
 
 felices. 
 
 fresh. 
 
 happy. 
 
 Formation of the Feminine. 
 
 j I. The feminine of adjectives is generally formed by 
 changing the final o into a, or by adding a to the con- 
 ^sonant terminations an, on, and or, as: 
 
 Bueno, buena, good. 
 
 Holgazán, holgazana, lazy. 
 
 Mayor, greater, menor, smaller, and anterior, anterior, 
 \brm an exception to this rule; they don’t vary. 
 
 " 2. Adjectives referring to nationahty and ending in 
 i consonant add a for the feminine, as: 
 
 francés, francesa, French. 
 
 Inglés, inglesa, English. 
 
 3. Adjectives ending in any other letter remain un- 
 hanged in the feminine, as: 
 
 I Jn hombre cortés, 
 [7na mujer cortés. 
 
 A polite man. 
 
 A polite woman. 
 
488 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 4. When an adjective refers to two or more nouns 
 in the singular, it must be placed in the plural, and 
 in the masculine plural when the nouns are of different 
 genders, as: 
 
 El padre y su hijo son buenos, The father and his son are ] 
 
 good. I 
 
 El padre y la madre son hue- The father and the mother are 
 nos, good. 
 
 Peculiarities of some Adjectives. 
 
 I. The following adjectives lose the final o when 
 standing before a masculine noun singular, as: 
 
 Bueno, good. 
 
 Malo, had. 
 
 Postrero, latter^ last. 
 Primero, first. 
 
 Tercero, third. 
 
 Uno, one. 
 
 Alguno, some^ any. 
 Ninguno, none^ not any. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Un buen hombre, a good man. El tercer día, the third day. 
 
 Un mal caballo, a bad horse. Un perro, one dog. 
 
 2. Grande, great, large, santo, holy, and ciento, a hun- 
 dred, lose the last syllable: 
 
 Un gran^ peligro, a great peril. San Pedro, St. Peter. 
 
 Una gran casa, a great house. Cien soldados, a hundred sol- 
 diers. 
 
 Note. — Santo is not abbreviated before the following 
 four names of Saints: 
 
 Santo Domingo, St. Domin- Santo Toribio, St. Torihius. 
 igue. 
 
 Santo Tomé, St. Timothy. Santo Tomás, St. Thomas. 
 
 1 Grande loses the final syllable before any noun beginning with a 
 consonant. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 Position of the Adjective. 
 
 489 
 
 I. The adjective stands generally after the noun 
 qualified, as: 
 
 hombre prudente, The prudent man. 
 
 planta venenosa, The poisonous plant. 
 
 I 2. There are many cases when the adjectives are 
 Solaced before the norms, though a satisfactory reason 
 I :annot always be adduced for them. It is almost en- 
 :irely a matter of style. 
 
 The following rules will be found useful: 
 a. Numeral adjectives are generally placed before the 
 
 lotm: 
 
 jLa tercera casa, The third house. 
 
 <S1 primer tomo. The first volume. 
 
 I h. Adjectives which are used in a figurative sense, 
 or when used in an explanatory manner are usually 
 placed before the noun, as: 
 
 Un delicioso viaje, A delightful journey. 
 
 . Admirable acción! Admirable action! 
 
 3. All adjectives denoting color, nationality, taste. 
 Dr shape, and all participles used adjectively are placed 
 after the noun, as: 
 
 31 músico alemán, The German musician. 
 
 .Jna madre amada, A beloved mother. 
 
 ’Jna posición perdida, A lost position. 
 
 4. Some adjectives have different significations ac- 
 cording to their position, as: 
 
 Jna buena noche, a good night. Noche buena, Christinas. 
 
 Jn malo joven, a sick young man. Un joven malo, a wicked youth. 
 Negra acción, dark deed. Un vestido negro, a black dress. 
 
 "/arios papeles, various papers. Papeles varios, miscellaneous 
 
 papers. 
 
490 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Pobre autor, a miserable Autor pobre, a poor author, 
 writer. 
 
 Cierta época, a certain period. Noticia cierta, reliable news. 
 
 These rules may serve merely to guide the student. 
 By placing the adjectives before the nouns more weight 
 and emphasis is given. 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 1. The Comparative is formed by placing más, morey 
 or menos, less, before the positive, as: 
 
 caro, dear; más caro, dearer; menos caro, less dear. 
 
 2. The Superlative is formed, either by placing el, lo, 
 la más or menos before the positive, or by adding isimo, 
 isima to the positive with the elision of its last vowel, 
 as: 
 
 Caro, dear; el más caro, the dearest; 
 muy caro or carísimo, very dear. 
 
 The former is called the relative superlative, and the 
 latter the absolute superlative. 
 
 The superlative is also formed by placing before the 
 adjective the adverbs muy, grandemente, enormemente, 
 sumamente, etc., and in a few cases by using the prefix 
 archi, as: 
 
 muy grande, very large. enormemente rico, enormously rich. 
 
 archimillonario, many times millionaire. 
 
 Positive. 
 
 docto, doctos, 1 , , 
 
 - ^ ^ r learned. 
 
 docta, doctas, J 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 más docto, más doctos, 
 más docta, más doctas. 
 
 I more learned. 
 
 Relative Superlative. Absolute Superlative. 
 
 el or lo más docto, 
 la más docta, 
 los más doctos, 
 las más doctas. 
 
 doctísimo, 
 the most doctísima, 
 learned, doctísimos, 
 doctísimas, 
 
 very learned. 
 
 3. The comparative is followed by que, than, as: 
 Tengo menos libros que V., / have fewer books than you. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 491 
 
 Note. — After más and menos, than, is rendered by de 
 /hen a numeral follows, as: 
 
 'uve más de cien duros, I had more than a hundred doU 
 
 I lars, 
 
 I 4. If the sentence which contains the comparison is 
 ollowed by a verb, de lo que must be employed in place 
 l>f que, as: 
 
 i )on Felipe es mayor de lo que Don Philip is older than he 
 parece. seems, 
 
 £ste comerciante tiene menos This merchant has less money than 
 \ dinero de lo que V. cree, you think, 
 
 5. The Comparative of equality — as — as — is given 
 >y tan — como with adjectives or adverbs, and by tanto 
 [tantos, tanta, tantas) — como with nouns (or tanto — 
 nanto when a verb follows), as: 
 
 I El es tan instruido como V., He is as educated as you, 
 
 6. Four adjectives have, besides their regular com- 
 )aratives and superlatives, a Latin or irregular form. 
 They are: 
 
 Positive. 
 
 meno, a, good, 
 aalo, a, had^ poor, 
 ;rande, greaty large. 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 mejor {rarely más bueno), better, 
 peor {rarely más malo), worse y poorer, 
 mayor or más grande, greater y larger. 
 
 >equeño, a, smally little, menor or más pequeño, smaller y less. 
 
 Relative Superlative. 
 
 mejor; 
 
 6 
 
 oT 
 
 <D 
 
 peor; 
 
 to 
 
 fiS 
 
 mayor; w 
 
 menor; 
 
 mejores, {rarely el, la, lo más, bueno, a,) the 
 best, 
 
 peores, {rarely el, la, lo más malo, a,) the worsts 
 poorest, 
 
 mayores, or, el, la, lo más grande, the greatest, 
 los, las más grandes, largest y oldest, 
 menores, or y el, la, lo más pequeño, a, the smallest,. 
 los, las más pequeños, as, leasty youngest. 
 
492 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Absolute Superlative. 
 
 bonísimo, a, or muy bueno, a, {rarely óptimo, a,) very good. 
 malísimo, a, or muy malo, a, {rarely pésimo, a,) very bad, poor. 
 grandísimo, a, or muy grande, {rarely máximo, a,) very large, 
 great. 
 
 pequeñísimo, a, muy pequeño, a, {rarely minimo, a,) very small, 
 little. 
 
 The Absolute Superlative. 
 
 Observe that 
 
 1. Adjectives ending in co or go form their superlative 
 in quisimo and guisimo to preserve their original sotmds 
 of c and g, as: 
 
 rico, rich; riquísimo, very rich. 
 vago, vague; vaguísimo, very vague. 
 
 2. Adjectives ending in z change z into c, as: 
 
 feliz, happy; felicísimo, very happy. 
 
 3. Adjectives ending in io drop these letters, so that 
 the repetition of i may be avoided in the superlative, 
 as: 
 
 limpio, clean; limpísimo, very clean. 
 necesario, necessary; necesarísimo, very necessary. 
 
 Exceptions are: 
 
 agrio, sour; agriisimo, very sour. 
 frío, cold; friísimo, very cold. 
 pio, pious; piísimo, very pious. 
 
 4. Adjectives ending in ble change it into bilisimOj 
 as: 
 
 afable, affable; afabilísimo, very affable. 
 noble, noble; nobilísimo, very noble. 
 
 5. Adjectives which have ie in the syllable before the 
 last elide the i, as: 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 493 
 
 cierto, certain; certísimo, very certain. 
 tierno, tender; ternísimo, very tender. 
 
 6. A few superlatives in 
 derivation, as: 
 
 acre, acrimonious; acérrimo, 
 áspero, harsh; aspérrimo. 
 célebre, celebrated; celebérrimo, 
 libre, free; libérrimo, 
 pobre, poor; paupérrimo, 
 salubre, healthful; salubérrimo, 
 fuerte, strong; tortísimo, 
 nuevo, new; novísimo. 
 
 > devoted; pientísimo. 
 piadoso, J 
 
 érrimo and ísimo are of Latin 
 
 antiguo, ancient; antiquísimo, 
 benévolo, benevolent; benevolent- 
 ísimo. 
 
 fiel, faithful; fidelísimo, 
 magnífico, magnificent; magnifi- 
 centísimo. 
 
 bueno, good; bonísimo, 
 sabio, wise; sapientísimo. 
 
 > sacred; sacratísimo, 
 sagrado, J 
 
 7 . The superlative in ísimo is always stronger and 
 more emphatic than that formed with muy. If the 
 superlative is preceded by the indefinite article, the 
 form in ísimo is employed for elegance’ sake, as: es un 
 valentísimo hombre, he is a very brave man (not: es un 
 hombre muy valiente). 
 
 THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 I. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 There are two classes of personal pronouns, viz.: pro- 
 nombres absolutos or absolute pronoims and pronombres 
 subjuntivos or conjunctive pronouns. The latter are 
 used in the dative and accusative only. 
 
494 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 First Person. 
 
 ABSOLUTOS. 
 
 CONJUNTIVOS. 
 
 ABSOLUTOS. 
 
 conjuntivos. 
 
 Nom. yo. 
 
 — I. 
 
 nosotros, 
 
 as, 
 
 , — we. 
 
 Gen. de mi. 
 
 — of me. 
 
 de nosotros. 
 
 a 
 
 — of us. 
 
 Dat. a mi. 
 
 me, to me. 
 
 a nosotros. 
 
 u 
 
 nos, to us. 
 
 Acc. — 
 
 me, me. 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 nos, us. 
 
 
 Second Person. 
 
 
 
 Nom. tú. 
 
 — thou. 
 
 vosotros. 
 
 as, 
 
 , — ye. 
 
 Gen. de ti, 
 
 — of thee. 
 
 de vosotros. 
 
 u 
 
 — of ye. 
 
 Dat. a ti, 
 
 te, to thee. 
 
 a vosotros. 
 
 u 
 
 os, to ye. 
 
 Acc. — 
 
 te, thee. 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 os, ye. 
 
 
 Third Person {masculine). 
 
 
 
 Nom. él. 
 
 — he^ it. 
 
 ellos. 
 
 
 — they. 
 
 Gen. de él, 
 
 — of himy of it. 
 
 de ellos. 
 
 
 — of them. 
 
 Dat. a él, 
 
 le, to himy to it. 
 
 a ellos. 
 
 
 les, to them. 
 
 Acc. — 
 
 le, lo, hiniy it. 
 
 — 
 
 
 los, them. 
 
 
 Third Person {feminine). 
 
 
 
 Nom. ella. 
 
 — shCy it. 
 
 ellas. 
 
 
 — they. 
 
 Gen. de ella, 
 
 — of hery of it. 
 
 de ellas. 
 
 
 — of them. 
 
 Dat. a ella. 
 
 le, to hery to it. 
 
 a ellas. 
 
 
 les, to them. 
 
 Acc. — 
 
 la, hery it. 
 
 — 
 
 
 las, them. 
 
 
 Second Person {address). 
 
 
 
 {When there 
 
 is not familiarity between the person 
 
 who speaks and 
 
 the one spoken to.Y 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. V. 
 
 — you. 
 
 V. V. 
 
 
 — you. 
 
 Gen. de V., 
 
 — of you. 
 
 de V. V. 
 
 
 — of you. 
 
 Dat. a V., 
 
 le, to you. 
 
 a V. V. 
 
 
 les, to you. 
 
 Acc. — 
 
 le, la, you. 
 
 — 
 
 
 los, las, you. 
 
 THIRD PERSON {neuter). 
 
 REFLEX. SUB. 
 
 OF THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Nom. ello. 
 
 lo, it. se, 
 
 one^s self y — 
 
 ihemselvesy itself. 
 
 Gen. de ello. 
 
 — of it. de si. 
 
 « 
 
 of himself y herself. 
 
 Dat. a ella. 
 
 le, to it. a si. 
 
 " se, to himself y herself. 
 
 Acc. — 
 
 lo, it. — 
 
 se. 
 
 himself y etc. 
 
 1 The word usted (abbreviated Vd., or V.) derives from the re- 
 spectful expression vuestra merced, your mercy, your worship, 
 which, of course, governed the third person singular; afterwards 
 that expression was contracted first in usarsed arid, at last, in usted; 
 hence comes the peculiarity of the Spanish language in using the 
 third person of the verbs with a word that refers to the second. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 495 
 
 I. The nominative of the personal pronouns yo, tu, 
 él, ella, etc., is generally suppressed. 
 
 ; It must be expressed in questions, in cases of am- 
 biguity and on account of emphasis or contrast, as: 
 
 I Pago yo o paga él? Do I pay^ or he? 
 
 ¿ qué he de hacer yo? what have I to do? 
 
 ' él estudia y ella escribe. he studies and she writes. 
 
 2. The absolute personal pronouns must be used 
 when governed by a preposition or when standing alone 
 jm answer to questions, as: 
 
 ■ I Quién manda aquí ? 
 
 ¿ él, ella, V., o quién? 
 i I a quién llama V. ? 
 
 ^ ¿ a mí, a él, a nosotros? 
 
 Who commands here? 
 he, she, you, or who? 
 whom are you calling? 
 me, him, us? 
 
 3. The conjunctive forms me, te, le, la, lo, se and 
 their plurals nos, os, les, las, los, are placed before the 
 verb in Spanish, except in affirmative imperative sen- 
 tences, or if the verb stands in the infinitive or in the 
 present participle (gerund), or at the beginning of the 
 sentence. 
 
 In the latter four cases the pronouns are placed after 
 the verb, and merged into one word with it. 
 
 ! Ella me paga, 
 
 1 él nos dió la noticia, 
 i yo le he escrito la carta, 
 ■ voy a darle la carta, 
 enséñeme V. el libro, 
 
 ' preguntaránme a caso. 
 
 She pays me. 
 he gave us the news. 
 
 I have written the letter to him. 
 
 I am going to give him the letter, 
 
 show me the hook. 
 
 they perhaps will ask me. 
 
 4. The English expressions it is /, it is he^ etc., are 
 given by soy yo, es él, etc. 
 
 " Soy yo que V. vió ayer, 
 ¿ Quién llama? Soy yo, 
 
 It is I whom you saw yesterday. 
 Who is knocking? It is I. 
 
4q6 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 5. When mi, ti, si are governed by the preposition 
 con, with, they form conmigo, with me; contigo, with thee; 
 consigo, with himself, itself, them. 
 
 1, To give emphasis, or to amplify the phrase, the 
 conjimctive and disjunctive pronouns are used together. 
 The disjunctive forms are placed first to give greater 
 intensity to the meaning, as: 
 
 yo le escribí a él con pre- I preferred to write to him, 
 ferencia, 
 
 2. Any substantive may replace the disjunctive pro- | 
 noun while the pleonastic construction with the con- ! 
 junctive pronoim remains unchanged, as: i 
 
 A nosotros españoles nos gusta We Spaniards like to gossipy | 
 charlar, or, it pleases us Spaniards to 
 
 Inflection and Use of “Usted.^^ 
 
 1. Usted is inflected like any notm. 
 
 2. The datives and accusatives of él and ella, to- 
 gether with the reflexive pronoun of the third person, 
 are frequently substituted for usted. This is done to 
 avoid repetition, as: 
 
 Oigo a V. mas no le veo, I hear you, hut I do not see 
 
 Pleonastic Construction, 
 
 me pagan a mi, 
 a mi me pagan, 
 
 ¿ a mi qué me importa? 
 
 what do I care? 
 
 le aseguro al comerciante. 
 
 gossip, 
 
 I assure the merchant. 
 
 you, 
 
 I come to see you and to tell 
 you. 
 
 vengo a ver a V. y a decirle, 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 497 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. usted, you. 
 
 Gen. de usted, of you. 
 
 Dat. a usted, le (subst.) to you. 
 
 Acc. (a) usted, le, la, you. 
 
 I Nom. 
 
 Gen. de si, of yourself . 
 
 Dat. se, a si, to yourself. 
 
 Acc. se, a si, yourself. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ustedes, you. 
 
 de ustedes, of you. 
 
 a ustedes, les (subst.), to you. 
 
 (a) ustedes, los, las, {les), you. 
 
 de si, of yourselves. 
 
 se, a si, to yourselves. 
 
 se, a si, yourselves.^ 
 
 3. The substitutes of usted follow the general rules of 
 position laid down for conjunctive pronouns: 
 
 Le digo, 
 les digo, 
 j voy a decirles, 
 yo se lo ruego. 
 
 I tell you (singular). 
 
 I tell you (plural). 
 
 I am going to tell you. 
 I beg you for it. 
 
 4. Usted and its substitutes are used in the pleonastic 
 I construction, as: 
 
 . Le diré a V., I shall tell you. 
 
 I ¿ qué le pasa a V. ? what is the matter with you? (sin- 
 
 I guiar). 
 
 I qué les pasa a V. V.? what is the matter with you? (plu- 
 
 ral). 
 
 I puedo pedirle a V. un favor? may I ask a favor of you? 
 
 I le parece a V. que yo deba ir do you think that I must go to the 
 al Banco? hank? 
 
 5. The genitive and dative of usted may take the place 
 of the possessive adjective: 
 
 A los pies de V., señora. At your feet, lady.^ 
 
 beso a V. la mano, caballero, I kiss your hand, sir.^ 
 
 6 . Usted, as subject, may stand before or after the verb: 
 
 1 Properly speaking, the inñexions de si, se, a si, etc., mean of 
 himself, to himself, himself, of yourselves, to yourselves, and your- 
 selves. They, however, may be used in connection with usted as 
 
 i explained in note, page 494. 
 
 2 These are formal, but very frequently used, modes of salu- 
 ' tation. 
 
498 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 V. no sabe, no sabe V., you do not know, 
 
 ¿ ha recibido V. la carta? have you received the letter? 
 
 The Reflexive Pronoun. 
 
 I. The pronouns of the first and second persons have, 
 as we have seen in the reflexive conjugation, a reflexive 
 meaning when they refer to the same person as the 
 subject: 
 
 Nos preguntamos, we ask ourselves, 
 
 me hallo ocupado, I find myself ( = J am) busy, 
 
 2. Pronouns of the third person, including usted, 
 refer, in the oblique cases, to a different person (or thing) 
 from the subject. Each gender employs the regular 
 substitute se to express reflexive or reciprocal action 
 on the subject: 
 
 Le engaña, 
 se engaña, 
 
 V. la engaña, 
 V. se engaña. 
 
 he deceives him, 
 he deceives himself, 
 you deceive her. 
 you deceive yourself. 
 
 3. The translation of se 
 fluous in English: 
 
 Lléveselo, 
 se propone, 
 se rompe, 
 se abre, 
 se cierra, 
 
 is generally omitted as super- 
 
 take it, 
 he proposes, 
 it breaks, 
 ii opens, 
 it shuts. 
 
 Two Objective Pronouns. 
 
 I. When a verb governs two objective pronouns, 
 the dative must precede the accusative, with the ex- 
 ception of the reflexive pronoun se, which always stands 
 first, whatever may be its case, as: 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 499 
 
 V. me lo dará, 
 él nos lo ha dado, 
 
 I me lo dará V. ? 
 
 se lo escribiré esta tarde, 
 
 you will give it to me. 
 he has given it to us. 
 will you give it to me? 
 
 I will write him so this after- 
 noon. 
 
 2: For euphony’s sake, the Spaniards never say le lo, 
 le le, le la, le les, le los, le las, les lo, les le, les la, etc., 
 but change it into se lo, se le, se la, etc. 
 
 There are, therefore, the following: 
 
 Le le and les le become se le. 
 
 le la 
 
 u 
 
 les la 
 
 u 
 
 se la. 
 
 le lo 
 
 u 
 
 les lo 
 
 u 
 
 se lo. 
 
 le les 
 
 u 
 
 les les 
 
 a 
 
 se les. 
 
 le los 
 
 u 
 
 les los 
 
 u 
 
 se los. 
 
 le las 
 
 u 
 
 les las 
 
 u 
 
 se las. 
 
 3. The pleonastic construction is the same for two 
 objectives as for one: 
 
 Se lo doy a V., 
 
 Se lo doy a V. V., 
 
 A mi me lo han escrito, 
 
 Él se lo habia dicho a mi her- 
 mana, 
 
 A mi hermana se lo había 
 dicho. 
 
 1 I give it to you (sing, and plu- 
 J ral). 
 
 They wrote me so. 
 
 ' He had said so to my sister. 
 
 Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns. 
 
 1. Possessive adjectives are either conjunctive or ab- 
 solute. The conjunctive forms stand before the noun 
 they qualify, while the absolute adjectives stand after 
 it. They are inflected like adjectives. 
 
 2. They are varied as follows: 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 500 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 CONJUNCT. 
 
 ABSOLUTE. 
 
 CONJUNCT. 
 
 ABSOLUTE. 
 
 mi, 
 
 mío, mía. 
 
 mis. 
 
 míos, mías. 
 
 my. 
 
 tu. 
 
 tuyo, tuya. 
 
 tus. 
 
 tuyos, tuyas. 
 
 thy. 
 
 her, 
 
 his. 
 
 su, 
 
 suyo, suya. 
 
 sus. 
 
 suyos, suyas, * 
 
 its, 
 
 your. 
 
 nuestro, -a, nuestro, nuestra, nuestros,-as, nuestros, nuestras, our, 
 vuestro,-a, vuestro, vuestra, vuestros,-as, vuestros, vuestras, your, 
 
 ( their. 
 
 su, suyo, suya, sus, suyos, suyas, < 
 
 3. Since su, sus can mean his, her, its, their, and your 
 and may therefore be dubious as regards its meaning, 
 the genitive case of the appropriate personal pronoun 
 is frequently added. Instead of su or sus, el, la, los, 
 or las may be used, as: 
 
 Su libro de él. 
 
 Su libro de ella. 
 
 El libro de él, de ella. 
 
 Su libro de ellos, de ellas. 
 
 El libro de ellos, de ellas, 
 
 4. Your is expressed by su, sus when the sense of 
 the sentence sufficiently indicates to what person su 
 refers. It can also be expressed pleonastically by su 
 (sus) de V. or de V. V., as: 
 
 I / have your hook. 
 
 Have you your hook? 
 
 Tengo su libro de V., 
 Tengo el libro de V., 
 I Tiene V. su libro? 
 
 His hook. 
 
 Her hook, 
 
 His hookf her hook, 
 I their hook. 
 
 5. When parts of the body or articles of dress are 
 mentioned, the definite article is employed instead of 
 the possessive adjective, as: 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 I Qué tiene V. en la mano? 
 Me duele la cabeza, 
 
 Se quita los zapatos, 
 
 SOI 
 
 What have you in your hand? 
 My head aches. 
 
 He takes his shoes off. 
 
 6. The absolute forms mío, tuyo, suyo, etc., stand al- 
 ways after the noun. They are used to express greater 
 intensity or rhetorical effect, as: 
 
 Es culpa suya y no mía, It is his faulty and not mine, 
 
 Es costumbre suya de pagar al It is a habit of his to pay cash, 
 contado. 
 
 7. The absolute forms are used in the address and 
 when used with nouns in an indeterminate sense (with 
 a, an, or some, of mine, of thine, etc.), as: 
 
 i Padre mío! 
 i Madre mía! 
 i Pobre muchacho mío! 
 ¡ Querido amigo mío! 
 Carlos es amigo mío, 
 
 My father! 
 
 My mother! 
 
 My poor hoy! 
 
 My dear friend! 
 
 Charles is a friend of mine. 
 
 8. It is mine, thine, etc., or it belongs to me, to thee, 
 etc., are expressed by ser, to be, with the possessive 
 pronoun, as: 
 
 Esta casa es mía, This house is mine; belongs to 
 
 me. 
 
 Este cuadro es suyo. This picture belongs to him. 
 
 Estos papeles son mios^y no These papers are mine and not 
 de V., yours. 
 
 The Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 I. The demonstrative pronouns or adjectives agree 
 in gender and number with the noun they limit, except 
 the neuter forms, as: 
 
502 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 MASC. FEM. 
 
 NEUT. 
 
 
 MASC. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 
 este, esta. 
 
 esto. 
 
 this. 
 
 estos. 
 
 estas. 
 
 these. 
 
 ese, esa. 
 
 eso. 
 
 that. 
 
 esos. 
 
 esas, 
 
 those. 
 
 aquel, aquella, aquello, that yonder, aquellos, aquellas, those yonder. 
 
 2. Este, esta, designates the person or object nearest 
 to the speaker; ese, esa, that which is near the person 
 addressed; aquel, aquella, that which is remote from 
 both: 
 
 Este libro que estoy leyendo.... This hook which I am read- 
 ing.... 
 
 Ese tratado que tiene V. en That treatise which you have 
 la mano.... in your hand.... ' 
 
 Aquel folleto que está sobre la That pamphlet which lies upon 
 mesa.... the table.... 
 
 3. The demonstratives must be repeated before every | 
 
 noun, as: | 
 
 I 
 
 Este hombre, esta mujer, y This man^ this woman^ and this 1 
 este muchacho están ma- child are ill. 
 los, I 
 
 4. Although the demonstratives naturally precede the 
 
 nouns, they are placed after them to express sarcasm 1 
 and contempt, as: 1 
 
 I 
 
 El hombre este, This man here. \ 
 
 , 5. The words ciudad, city, and plaza, market, are 
 usually committed with esta and esa after the preposi- 
 tion en, in. En esta means, therefore, here, and en esa, 
 there : 
 
 En esta no hay novedad. There is nothing new here {vnth j 
 
 us). \ 
 
 I Cómo van los negocios en How is business there {with \ 
 
 esa? you)? \ 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 503 
 
 6. In reference to time, este denotes the present; 
 ese, a past period within our recollection; aquel, the 
 past generally: 
 
 Este es el siglo de la ilustra- This is the age of progress. 
 ción, 
 
 Me acuerdo bien de ese día, I re)nemher that day well. 
 
 Aquellos eran tiempos de mucho Those were days of great bar^ 
 barbarismo, harism. 
 
 7. The neuter forms are esto, this (what is near to the 
 person who speaks) ; eso, that (what is nearer to the person 
 to whom one speaks than to the one who speaks) ; aquello, 
 that (what is remote either from the one who speaks and 
 from the one spoken to), as: 
 
 Esto es verdad, This is the truth. 
 
 Eso es increible, That is incredible. 
 
 Aquello fué una lástima, That was a pity. 
 
 8. The definite article is often used as a demonstrative 
 pronoun, assuming the gender and number of the noun 
 it replaces: 
 
 Este caballo y el de mi amigo. This horse and that of my friend. 
 
 Esta casa y la de mi vecino. This house and that of my neigh- 
 
 bor. 
 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 The relative pronouns are: 
 
 Que, whOf whoMy whichy thaty what. 
 
 quien (sing.); quienes (plur.), who; whom; whoever; whomsoever. 
 el cual; la cual; los cuales; las cuales, 
 el que; la que; los que; las que, 
 lo cual or lo que, that; which; what. 
 cuyo; cuya; cuyos; cuyas, whose y of which; which. 
 aquel que; aquella que, the one who; the one which. 
 aquellos que; aquellas que, the ones who; those who. 
 
 Que. 
 
 I. Que refers to persons or things in the nominative 
 and accusative only; in the other cases it can refer to 
 things only: 
 
 I who; which. 
 
504 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 El hombre que viene es mi tío, The man who comes is my 
 
 uncle. 
 
 Es una mujer que sabe mucho, She is a woman who knows many 
 
 things. 
 
 Los libros que leemos son The books we are reading are 
 buenos, good. 
 
 2. Que relating to an accusative does not require 
 the prepositión a, even when referring to a person. Ob- 
 serve that the relative must always be expressed in 
 Spanish, as: 
 
 He visto al niño que V. es- I have seen the hoy {whom) you 
 pera, expect. 
 
 Quien. 
 
 1. Quien, quienes — for both genders — ^refers only to 
 persons: 
 
 Los señores con quienes hablé The gentlemen with whom I talked 
 han partido, have left. 
 
 Las señoras a quienes vimos The ladies whom we saw are 
 son inglesas, English. 
 
 2, If the noun is immediately followed by the rela- 
 tive pronoun, it is preferable to use que even of per- 
 sons, as: 
 
 Este es el hombre que me dió This is the man who gave ine the 
 el libro, hook. 
 
 El cual, el que. 
 
 I. El cual, la cual, lo cual, los cuales, and las cuales; 
 el que, la que, lo que, los que and las que, are substi- 
 tutes for quien and que, and relate, therefore, both to 
 persons and things. They are employed to avoid am- 
 biguity. Observe that they take the preposition a when 
 they refer to persons: 
 
 La hija de nuestro vecino, la que Our neighbor's daughter , who spoke 
 {or, la cual) nos habló ayer, to us yesterday, died to-day. 
 
 ha muerto hoy. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 505 
 
 Este es el criado de Doña This is Doña Janeas servant^ of 
 Juana del cual (or, del whom we have heard very had 
 que) hemos oído cosas things. 
 muy malas, 
 
 2. The article is omitted, in cual, cuales: 
 
 a. When the relative is separated from the noun by 
 a verb: 
 
 Nunca hemos sabido cual era We have never known what the 
 la verdadera causa de su real cause of his misfortune 
 desgracia, was. 
 
 b. When it introduces an indirect question: 
 
 Es difícil saber cual de los It is difficult to know who of the 
 dos ha ganado más, two has gained most. 
 
 c. To express a comparison: 
 
 Estas frutas son tales cuales These fruits are such as we 
 esperábamos, expected. 
 
 d. In exclamations: 
 
 I Cuál sería mi alegría! What would he my joy! 
 
 Lo que. 
 
 Lo que, that which, what, and todo lo que, all that, 
 relates to an idea, not to a word: 
 
 Lo que él dice no es lo que V. What he says is not what you 
 piensa, think. 
 
 No creo nada de todo lo que I do not helieve anything of all 
 Pedro nos ha dicho, that Peter has told us. 
 
 Cuyo, cuya. 
 
 Cuyo, cuya, whose, of whose, which, refers to both 
 persons and things, and takes the gender and the num- 
 ber of the noun which it precedes: 
 
5 o6 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 El hombre de cuyas desgracias The man, of whose misfortunes 
 V. habló, es amigo mío, you spoke, is a friend of 
 
 mine. 
 
 La señora N. es mujer de cuya Mrs. N. is a woman whose no- 
 nobleza hay mucho que hility of spirit may he strongly 
 dudar, doubted. 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 1. The interrogative pronouns are distinguished from 
 the relatives by being written with an acute accent. 
 They are applied in direct and indirect questions. They 
 are: 
 
 Quién, pi. quiénes, who? 
 cuyo, cúya, | 
 
 cuyos, cúyas, > whose? 
 
 de quién; de quiénes, J 
 
 2. Quién, quiénes, who? is used only in connection 
 with persons: 
 
 I Quién llama a la puerta? Who is knocking at the door? 
 
 I De quién habla V.? Of whom are you speaking? 
 
 3. Cuál, which j is used where one or several objects 
 are referred to. It is more definite than que: 
 
 ¿ Cuál es mi sombrero? Which {one) is my hat? 
 
 No sé cuál es el mío, I do not know which one is 
 
 mine, 
 
 4. Whose, used interrogatively, is expressed by cuya, 
 or by de quién: 
 
 I Cúyo es este libro ? 
 
 ¿ Cúyo libro es este? 
 
 I De quién es este libro ? 
 
 I Cúyos zapatos son estos? — De Whose shoes are these? — My 
 mi padre. father's. 
 
 5. Qué, what? can refer to persons or things and can 
 be used with or without a noun: 
 
 1 T0 whom does this hooi. 
 belong? 
 
 qué, what? 
 cuál 
 cuáles, 
 
 1, 1 
 
 ■les, J 
 
 which? what? 
 
The Spanish Langv.age, 
 
 507 
 
 I Qué hombre es este? What kind of a man is this? 
 
 I A qué mujer ha visto V.? Which woman have you seen? 
 
 I Qué hay de nuevo? What is the news? 
 
 Note. — Qué is also used in exclamations: 
 
 ¡ Qué de burlas! What fun! 
 
 ¡ Qué bella vista! What a beautiful view! 
 
 The Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 The indefinite pronouns are in fact adjectives. When 
 used as pronouns they stand without nouns and are in- 
 flected by de and a. They are: 
 
 1. Ajeno, ajena, another^ of other^s^ other people^ s. 
 The neuter, lo ajeno, signifies other people^s property: 
 
 Debemos respetar lo ajeno, We must respect other people^ s 
 
 property. 
 
 Ajeno de signifies foreign to, as: 
 
 Esto es ajeno de mi carácter, This is foreign to my character, 
 
 2. Alguien, some one, any one, somebody, anybody, can 
 be used of persons only, as: 
 
 Alguien ha estado aquí, Some one has been here. 
 
 Alguien preguntó por V., Some one inquired for you, 
 
 I Lo ha visto alguien? Has any one seen it? 
 
 3. Alguno, alguna, as relating to persons, means 
 somebody, some one, anybody, any one, some, any, a 
 few: 
 
 Alguno ha estado aquí. Some one has been here. 
 
 Algunos han venido, los otros Some (a few) came^ but not the 
 no, others. 
 
So8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Alguno, as relating to things, signifies some^ any^ a 
 few: 
 
 Necesito algún dinero y algunas I need some money and some hills 
 letras de cambio, of exchange. 
 
 Observe that the final o in alguno is dropped before 
 masculine nouns. 
 
 4. Algo or alguna cosa, something, anything. 
 
 Tengo algo {or alguna cosa) que I have something to tell you. 
 decide, 
 
 ¿ Le falta a V. algo? — Sí, me Do you want anything ? — Yes, I 
 falta algo, want something. 
 
 Algo is frequently employed as an adverb and signifies 
 somewhat, rather: 
 
 Esta carne es algo cara. This meat is rather dear. 
 
 5. Ambos, ambas, both, is used either as a substantive 
 or as an adjective. It refers to persons or things, and 
 can be replaced by los dos, las dos: 
 
 Es menester oir ambas partes, One must hear both parties. 
 
 Entrambos, entrambas, are used in the same sense: 
 Xos VÍ a entrambos, I saw both {of them). 
 
 6. Cada, each, every, is only employed in the singular 
 and is an invariable adjective: 
 
 Cada país tiene sus costum- Every country has its habits. 
 bres. 
 
 Cada hombre; cada mujer, Every man; every woman, 
 
 a. Cada may be used before plural nouns when ac- 
 companied by numerals: 
 
 Cada dos días. Every two days. 
 
 Cada tres años. Every three years, 
 
 b. Cada is often accompanied by uno or cual, forming 
 cada uno, (cada una), cada cual: 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 509 
 
 Cada uno tiene sus quehaceres, Every one has his occupations. 
 Cada una de estas señoritas es Each of these young ladies is very 
 muy rica y muy amable, rich and very amiable. 
 
 Cada cual sabe lo que le duele. Every one knows what ails him. 
 
 c. Every may also be expressed by todos los (fern, 
 todas las) agreeing with a plural noun, referring to a 
 period of time, as: 
 
 Todos los años. 
 Todos los días. 
 Todas las semanas, 
 Todas las veces, 
 
 Every year. 
 Every day. 
 Every week. 
 Every time. 
 
 7. Cierto, cierta, a certain, ciertos, ciertas, certain, is 
 used with nouns without article, as: 
 
 Cierto hombre, A certain man. 
 
 Cierta señora, A certain lady. 
 
 Bajo ciertas condiciones, Under certain conditions. 
 
 a. Cierto, if standing after a noun, means sure, au- 
 thentic, certain. 
 
 Noticias ciertas. Authentic news. 
 
 La noticia es cierta. The intelligence is certain {true). 
 
 8. Cosa is used meaning something, anything; and 
 with a negative, nothing. 
 
 Es cosa muy de ver. It is something well worth seeing. 
 
 No quiero otra cosa, I do not want anything else. 
 
 Esta es otra cosa. That is something quite different. 
 
 g. Fulano, fulana, means so and so, such a one. It 
 is also used of persons whose names we do not know, 
 remember, or care to give. If used alone, it commonly 
 takes the form, of fulano de tal; of two persons, fulano 
 y mengano; of three, fulano, mengano y zutano = '‘Tom, 
 Dick and Harry/’ as: 
 
 ¿ Quién lo dijo? ¿ Qué sé yo? Who said so? How do I know? 
 Fulano de tal. So and so. 
 
The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 Sio 
 
 V. dijo que fulano y zutano ya You said that so and so knew it 
 lo sabían, already. 
 
 9. Mismo, standing before a noun, means the same. It 
 is accompanied either by the definite or indefinite article, 
 or by a demonstrative or possessive pronoun; after a 
 noun, however, it serves to emphasize some idea: 
 
 El mismo día, 
 
 La misma noche. 
 
 Mis mismos enemigos, 
 Hoy mismo. 
 
 Aquí mismo. 
 
 But: 
 
 Yo mismo, 
 
 V. mismo. 
 
 El rey mismo lo ordenó. 
 
 The same day. 
 
 The same night. 
 
 My very enemies. 
 
 This very day. 
 
 In this very place. 
 
 I myself. 
 
 You yourself. 
 
 It was ordered hy the king himself. 
 
 10. Nada, nothing, not anything, stands either before 
 the verb without a negative, or after the verb, with 
 
 no: 
 
 Nada tengo or no tengo nada. Nothing is the matter with me. 
 
 Nada vale or no vale nada. It is worth nothing or it is not 
 
 worth anything. 
 
 a. Instead of nada, the forms ninguna cosa or cosa 
 alguna are frequently used. Only ninguna cosa can 
 be used with an adjective, while cosa alguna must always 
 be employed in connection with a negative verb: 
 Ninguna cosa tengo, 1 
 
 No tengo ninguna cosa, [ I have not anything. 
 
 No tengo cosa alguna, j 
 
 II. Nadie, no one, fiobody, is the negative of alguien. 
 It is an invariable substantive, referring to persons only. 
 It requires the negative no when standing after the verb: 
 
 Nadie ha venido todavía, 
 
 No ha venido nadie todavía, 
 Nadie lo sabe, 
 
 I Nobody has come as yet. 
 No one knows it. 
 
 a. Nadie, after a verb and without no, may be used 
 in the meaning of anybody: 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 Sii 
 
 i Salió sin que nadie le viese, He went out without anybody 
 
 seeing him, 
 
 12. Ninguno, ninguna, nobody, no one, none, no, is 
 used of persons and things and may be employed as a 
 
 I substantive or an adjective. Unlike nadie, it may be 
 followed by de. It requires an additional negative when 
 ^ standing after the verb. The final o is dropped before 
 masculine nouns: 
 
 Ninguna mujer es más her- No woman is handsomer, 
 mosa, 
 
 No lo he dicho a ninguno, I have told it to no one, 
 
 j Ninguno de los que V. conoce, None of those whom you know is 
 
 I está aquí, here. 
 
 13. The unemphatic no, not any, is simply expressed 
 i by a verb made negative by no, and followed by a noun 
 * without an article: 
 
 No tengo tiempo, I have no time. 
 
 I No tengo dinero conmigo, I have no money with me. 
 
 14. Otro, otra, another, other (plur. others), is used 
 of persons and things, and may be employed as a sub- 
 stantive or as an adjective. It does not admit of the 
 indefinite article as in English, but requires the defi- 
 nite article whenever a distinct person or thing is to be 
 specified: 
 
 Déme V. otro libro. Give me another hook. 
 
 a. Otro signifies frequently a second, more, addi- 
 tional : 
 
 Es otro Don Juan, He is a second Don Juan, 
 
 b. Observe the following expressions: 
 
 El otro día, The other day. 
 
 A1 otro día. The next day. 
 
 Otro día, Another day. 
 
 Una vez y otra. Every other time. 
 
512 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Una y otra vez, Repeatedly, 
 
 Yo haría otro tanto, I should do the same thing. 
 
 He ganado otro tanto, I have made {gained) as much. 
 
 c, Ni uno, ni otro, neither one: 
 
 Ni lino ni otro me gusta. Neither pleases me, 
 
 15. Propio, propia, self, own, is used like mismo: 
 
 Este dinero es suyo propio. This money is his own, 
 
 16. Quienquiera, whoever, any one whatever, relates 
 only to persons, and in an absolute sense: 
 
 Puede hablar con quienquiera You may speak with whomsoever 
 que V. guste, you please, 
 
 17. Cualquiera, plur. cualesquiera, any {whatever), 
 any {you please), is used both as an adjective or as a 
 substantive, relating to persons or things: 
 
 Cualquiera lo creería, Any one would believe it, 
 
 a. Cualquiera followed by que, requires the verb in the 
 subjunctive: 
 
 Cualquier cosa que V. diga. Whatever you may say, 
 
 b. Whatever may also be expressed by sea el que, 
 plur. sean los que, las que, with a noun and the verb 
 in the subjunctive: 
 
 Sea el que quiera el motivo que Whatever reason may he as- 
 se presente, signed, 
 
 c. Whatever, as a neutral substantive, is rendered by 
 todo lo que or por más que with the subjunctive: 
 
 Por más que- diga, no lo creo. Whatever he may say^ I do not 
 
 believe it, 
 
 18. Tal, plur. tales, such, such a, is used both as a 
 substantive and an adjective of persons and things: 
 
 Tal hombre, Such a man. 
 
 Tal mujer, Such a woman. 
 
 No creo tal, I do not believe such a thing. 
 
The Spanish Language, 513 
 
 a, Un tal, una tal means a certain {indefinite) person: 
 
 Un tal me lo ha dicho, A certain person told me so. 
 
 Una tal me lo ha contado, A certain female related it to 
 
 me. 
 
 b. Con tal or a tal means on condition: 
 
 Lo haré con tal que V. no lo I will do it on condition that you 
 diga a mi hermano, do not tell my brother. 
 
 19. Todo, toda, all, whole, every, anything, is used 
 either as an adjective, a substantive, or an indefinite 
 pronoun: as an adjective it is followed by the definite 
 article, but in the sense of every or all in the plural, it 
 is accompanied by the noun directly: 
 
 Todo el día. The whole day; all day. 
 
 Toda la noche. The whole night; all night. 
 
 Todos los hombres, All men. 
 
 In the singular it means all, everything: 
 
 % 
 
 Todo tiene su fin. Everything has its end. 
 
 20. Uno, una, is an adjective, a substantive, and a 
 pronoim, signifying in the singular a, one, each other; 
 and in the plural, some, each other, one another: 
 
 Si V. quiere una pluma, puedo If you want a pen, I can give you 1 
 darle una, one. 
 
 a. Uno a otro, uno u otro, uno y otro, each other: 
 
 Se aman uno a otro, They love each other. 
 
 b. Uno, one; se, they, you; gente, people, are used 
 in the vague sense of some one, any one; or the verb 
 may be placed in the third person plural: 
 
 I Qué pudo uno hacer en tal What could one do in such a 
 caso? case? 
 
 Llama gente, Somebody knocks. 
 
 No se habe qué hacer. One does not know what to do. 
 
5U 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 The Adverb. 
 
 I. The adverbs are divided into primitives and de- 
 rivatives. 
 
 2. Primitive adverbs are expressed by an originally 
 single word, as: bien, más, menos, mal. 
 
 a. Observe that many primitive adverbs are really 
 neuter adjectives used adverbially, as: alto, aloud; bajo, 
 low; solo, only; poco, little; mucho, much. 
 
 3. Derivative adverbs are formed by adding -mente 
 to the feminine form of the adjective: 
 
 antiguo, old. 
 franco, frank. 
 común, common ^ 
 constante, constant. 
 fácil, easy. 
 fuerte, strong. 
 feliz, happy. 
 mayor, greater. 
 
 antiguamente, in olden times. 
 francamente, frankly. 
 comúnmente, commonly. 
 constantemente, constantly. 
 fácilmente, easily. 
 fuertemente, vehemently. 
 felizmente, happily. 
 mayormente, for the greater part. 
 
 4. Some neuter adjectives are used adverbially, their 
 derivative adverbs in -mente being employed in a dif- 
 ferent sense, as: 
 
 Adjetivos. 
 alto, high. 
 bajo, low. 
 bastante, com- 
 petent. 
 bueno, good. 
 caro, dear. 
 claro, clear. ' 
 cierto, certain. 
 demasiado, 
 holdj exces- 
 sive. 
 
 derecho, right. 
 fuerte, strong. 
 malo, hady ill. 
 
 Adverbios. 
 alto, loud. 
 bajo, softly. 
 bastante, rather. 
 
 bien, well. 
 caro, dearly. 
 claro, clearly. 
 cierto, certainly. 
 demasiado, ex- 
 cessively. 
 
 derecho, rightly. 
 fuerte, strongly. 
 malo, badly. 
 
 Derivados. 
 altamente, proudly. 
 bajamente, meanly. 
 bastantemente, sufficiently. 
 
 buenamente, spontaneously, freely. 
 caramente, exceedingly. 
 claramente, openly, conspicuously. 
 ciertamente, surely, forsooth. 
 demasiadamente, too. 
 
 derechamente, directly, expressly. 
 fuertemente, vehemently. 
 malamente, wickedly. 
 
The Spanish Language. 515 
 
 primero, ^nmeroy firstly, primeramente, in the first place, 
 
 [mainly. 
 
 pronto, quick, pronto, soon. prontamente, promptly, nimbly. 
 recio, strong, recio, power- reciamente, stoutly, forcibly, 
 fully. 
 
 5. Compound adverbs, or rather adverbial expressions, 
 are formed in the following manner: 
 
 a. With the article: 
 a la verdad, truly. 
 al contado, cash, in cash, 
 al momento, instantly. 
 al punto, immediately. 
 por lo más, at most. 
 
 a la derecha, to the right. 
 a la izquierda, to the left, 
 al vivo, to the life. 
 en el acto, instantly. 
 por lo menos, at least. 
 
 b. Without the article: 
 a caballo, on horseback. 
 a escape, in haste. 
 a pie, on foot. 
 a una, together. 
 con todo, notwithstanding. 
 de continuo, continually. 
 de día, by day. 
 de golpe, suddenly. 
 de hecho, truly, de facto. 
 
 Comparison 
 
 de lance, at a bargain. 
 de noche, by night. 
 de nuevo, anew. 
 de prisa, in haste. 
 de pronto, quickly. 
 de propósito, purposely. 
 de seguro, surely. 
 de suyo, of one's own accord. 
 de todo punto, wholly. 
 
 of Adverbs. 
 
 I. Adverbs have three degrees of comparison (but 
 without variation for gender and number): 
 lejos, far off; más lejos, further off; (lo) más lejos, the furthest off; 
 lejisimo, very far off. 
 
 2. Four adverbs have an irregular comparison: 
 
 Positive Comparative. Superl. (relative), 
 
 mucho, much. más, m.ore. 
 
 poco, little. menos, less. 
 
 bien, well. mejor, better. 
 
 mal, badly. peor, worse. 
 
 (lo) más, the most. 
 (lo) menos, the least. 
 (lo) mejor, the best. 
 (lo) peor, the worst. 
 
 Superl. (absolute). 
 
 muchísimo, very much. 
 poquísimo, very little. 
 
 malísimo, very badly. 
 
The Rosenthal Method 
 
 Si6 
 
 Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation, 
 
 1. After verbs of saying, believing, declaring, sus- 
 pecting, etc., yes and no are expressed by que sí, que 
 no, as: 
 
 Yo digo que sí, él dice que no, I say yes^ he says no, 
 
 2. No, not, stands always before the verb: 
 
 No lo tengo. — V. no la ama. 
 
 I have it not- 
 her. 
 
 You do not love 
 
 I do not want anything. 
 Nobody knows it, 
 
 I have never seen it, 
 
 I have neither pen nor paper. 
 
 3. The Spaniards use a double negative to render 
 the negation stronger: 
 
 No quiero nada. 
 
 No lo sabe nadie. 
 
 No lo he visto jamás, 
 
 No tengo ni pluma, ni papel, 
 
 The negation no is omitted when these negative ad- 
 verbs stand at the beginning of the sentence: 
 
 Nada quiero, I do not want anything. 
 
 Nadie lo sabe. Nobody knows it. 
 
 Jamás lo he visto, I have never seen it, 
 
 Ni pluma, ni papel tengo, I have neither pen nor paper, 
 
 4. Jamás and nunca have the same meaning, and are 
 generally placed at the beginning of sentences: 
 
 Jamás 
 
 Nunca 
 
 vi tal cosa. 
 
 I never saw such a thing. 
 
 5. Jamás, in connection with por siempre or para 
 siempre, means forever: 
 
 Me acordaré de él por siempre I shall remember him forever, 
 jamás, (or para siempre 
 jamás), 
 
 6. Jamás, when not accompanied by no and not, at 
 the beginning of sentences, means ever: 
 
 I Ha visto V. jamás tal pro- Did you ever see such behavior? 
 ceder? 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 517 
 
 7. No is sometimes used after comparatives, losing 
 thereby its negative quality: 
 
 Mejor es el trabajo que no la Work is better than idleness. 
 ociosidad, 
 
 8. Ya, already, now, signifies, with a negative, no 
 longer, not any more, not now: 
 
 Lo sabía ya, I knew it already. 
 
 I Me entiende V. ya? Do you understand me now? 
 
 Si, ya le entiendo, YeSy I understand you now. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 I. The simple prepositions are: 
 
 a, to, at. 
 
 ante, beforOy in presence of. 
 
 bajo, under. 
 
 con, with. 
 
 contra, against. 
 
 fie, ofy from. 
 
 desde, from, since. 
 
 durante, during. 
 
 en, iny aty on. 
 
 entre, betweeny among. 
 
 excepto, except. 
 
 hacia, towards. 
 
 hasta, tilly untily up tOy to. 
 mediante, throughy by means of. 
 menos, excepty but. 
 no obstante, notwithstanding. 
 para, /or, tOy in order to. 
 por, byy throughy for. 
 según, according to, as. 
 sin, without. 
 so, under. 
 
 sobre, 0», upony abouty above. 
 tras, after y behindy besides. 
 
 2. The complex prepositions requiring de after them 
 are: 
 
 acerca de, concerning, about. 
 además de, beside. 
 alrededor de, around. 
 antes de, before {time or 
 order). 
 
 cerca de, near, about. 
 debajo de, under {place). 
 delante de, before {place). 
 
 dentro de, within, in, into. 
 después de, after {time or 
 order). 
 
 detrás de, behind {place). 
 encima de, on, over. 
 fuera de, outside, beyond. 
 lejos de, far from. 
 
5i8 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 3. Complex prepositions 
 
 conforme a, according to. 
 contrario a, contrary to. 
 frente a, opposite^ in front of. 
 
 requiring a after them are: 
 
 junto a, wear, close by. 
 con respecto a, with respect to, 
 tocante a, touching. 
 
 4. Prepositional expressions followed by de are: 
 
 a casa de, to the house of. 
 a causa de, on account of. 
 a excepción de, with the ex- 
 ception of. 
 
 a fuerza de, by dint of. 
 a la vista de, within sight of, 
 al cabo de, at the expiration of, 
 al lado de, at the side of. 
 en medio de, in the midst of. 
 en vez de, instead of. 
 en virtud de, by virtue of, 
 en vista de, in view of, 
 ma.s allá de, beyond. 
 
 en casa de, at the house of. 
 en frente de, opposite. 
 en lugar de, instead of. 
 al través de, across^ through. 
 a pesar de, in spite of. 
 a razón de, at the rate of. 
 de casa de, from the house of. 
 de parte de, on the part of. 
 por causa de, on account of. 
 por el lado de, on the side of. 
 por razón de, by reason of. 
 sin embargo de, notwithstanding. 
 
 5. Prepositional expressions followed by a are: 
 
 en cuanto a, with respect to. en orden a, with respect to. 
 
 Use of Certain Prepositions. 
 
 1. A is used after transitive verbs to mark the per- 
 sonal object, as: 
 
 ‘Amo a Juan, I like John. 
 
 2. A signifies motion toward a given locality, while 
 en refers to rest in a given place: 
 
 Voy a Inglatera, / am going to England. 
 
 Está en casa. He is at home. 
 
 3. A is used in reference to time, price, or rate: 
 
 Vendrá a la noche, He will come in the eveningi 
 
 A veinte centavos la vara. At twenty cents a yard. 
 
The Spanish Language. 519 
 
 4. A is used after certain verbs to show the purpose 
 or aim: 
 
 Voy a leer, I am going to read. 
 
 5. A signifies distance off or from, or temporary sit- 
 uation: 
 
 Le cogieron a la puerta, They caught him at the door. 
 
 He venido de Cádiz a Madrid, I came from Cadiz to Madrid. 
 
 6. A between two infinitives signifies the difference of 
 their results: 
 
 Va mucho de decir a hacer, de There is a great difference he-- 
 prometer a cumplir ¿ no es tween saying and doings 
 verdad? between promising and ful- 
 
 filling f is there not? 
 
 Ante. 
 
 1. Ante signifies in the presence of: 
 
 Compareció ante el juez, He appeared before the fudge. 
 
 2. Ante is used in regard to order or preference: 
 
 Nuestro deber es ante todo. Our duty comes first of all. 
 
 3. Instead of ante, the Spaniards frequently use antes 
 de (denoting priority of order, rank, or time): 
 
 Antes de los condes van los Marquises go before counts. 
 marqueses, 
 
 Antes de la comida, Before dinner. 
 
 Bajo. 
 
 Bajo, under ^ below, underneath, beneath, denotes situa- 
 tion; figuratively it signifies guarantee, protection, or 
 subordination: 
 
 La puerta está bajo la ventana, The door is under the window. 
 Estoy bajo sus órdenes, I am under his orders. 
 
520 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Con. 
 
 1. Con, with, denotes accompaniment or means: 
 
 Salió con su padre, He went out with his father, 
 
 Le hirió con una espada, He wounded him with a sword. 
 
 2. Con, in connection with dar, forms idiomatic mean- 
 ings: 
 
 Dió con ella en la calle. He met her in the street, 
 
 Le dió con la puerta en la He shut the door in his face. 
 
 cara, 
 
 3. Con, with the infinitive, means by or although: 
 
 Con enseñar se aprende, One learns by teaching. 
 
 De. 
 
 1. De signifies of or from: 
 
 Lo he recibido de él, I received it from him. 
 
 2. It often connects words which in English are given 
 by compoimd expressions: 
 
 Un buzón de correos, A letter-box, 
 
 Un reloj de oro, A gold watch, 
 
 El tren del norte. The northern train, 
 
 3. De denotes cause — ^for, with, from: 
 
 No podia moverme de frío, / could not move on account of 
 
 the cold. 
 
 4. De IS used especially after a number of adjectives 
 and participles to express physical or moral peculiarity, 
 the way of dressing, or abundance and scarcity: 
 
 Está ciego de furor. 
 
 Estaba vestido de luto. 
 Este país es pobre de agua. 
 Es sordo de un oído. 
 
 La niña de los ojos negros. 
 
 He is blind with fury. 
 
 He was dressed in mourning. 
 This country is poor in water. 
 He is deaf in one ear. 
 
 The girl with the black eyes. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 521 
 
 5. De must be used with the passive instead of por 
 * when a feeling or mental action is referred to: 
 
 Es amado de sus amigos y He is beloved by his friends and 
 odiado de sus enemigos, hated by his enemies, 
 
 I. 
 
 6. De is used in exclama'^ions: 
 
 : ¡ Infeliz de mí! 0/t, l unhappy man! 
 
 7. De is used before infinitives, especially after haber, 
 ^ acabar, etc.: 
 
 ! Ha de venir, He must come. 
 
 Acabo de llegar, / just arrived. 
 
 ' Es de esperar. It is to be hoped, 
 
 j 
 
 8. De signifies office or profession: 
 
 Papá es médico de profesión. My father is a physician by pro- 
 I fession. 
 
 [ Está de embajador de Suiza en He is ambassador of Switzerland 
 Paris, in Paris, 
 
 ^ Desde. 
 
 Desde signifies from as a starting-point of either place 
 or time: 
 
 Me acompañó desde su casa He accompanied me from his 
 hasta el teatro, house to the theatre. 
 
 En. 
 
 1. En signifies rest in, at, on; or relates to place or 
 time: 
 
 El señor Don Julio vive en Mr. Julius lives in Barcelona. 
 Barcelona, 
 
 Llegaré de hoy en ocho días, I shall arrive a week from to- 
 day. 
 
 I Salimos en el mes de julio, y We start in the month of July^ 
 volveremos en octubre, aíid shall return in October, 
 
 2, En refers to occupation; 
 
522 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Don Julio trabaja en relojes, Don Julio works in watches. 
 
 3. En is used idiomatically: 
 
 De día en día, 
 
 De año en año, 
 
 De tiempo en tiempo. 
 De hoy en quince días. 
 De cuando en cuando. 
 En general, 
 
 En particular. 
 
 From day to day. 
 
 From year to year. 
 
 From time to time, 
 
 A fortnight from to-day. 
 Sometimes, Every now and then. 
 Generally, 
 
 Especially, 
 
 Hacia. 
 
 Hacia, towards, denotes direction in the material and 
 moral sense: 
 
 Voy hacia casa, I am going homewards. 
 
 Hacia mediodía, Towards noon. 
 
 Hasta. 
 
 Hasta, tül, until, up to, as far as, denotes time, place, 
 or degree: 
 
 Till to-morrow. 
 
 I go as far as Madrid, 
 
 Au revoir, till I see you again, 
 
 Para. 
 
 1. Para, for, to, denotes direction or destination: 
 
 Esta carta es para Don Carlos, This letter is for Don Carlos, 
 
 Pienso partir para Italia, I think of starting for Italy, 
 
 Es hombre para mucho. He is a clever man. 
 
 No es hombre para nada. He is good for nothing, 
 
 2. Para denotes aim or purpose: 
 
 I study in order to learn. 
 
 Hasta mañana. 
 Voy hasta Madrid, 
 Hasta la vista. 
 Hasta luego, 
 
 Estudio para aprender, 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 523 
 
 3. Para con is used in comparisons: 
 
 I Qtté soy yo para con su her- What am I in comparison with 
 mano? your brother? 
 
 4. Para, in connection with estar, denotes to be on 
 the point of. 
 
 Estoy para partir, I am on the point of leaving. 
 
 Estaba para decirle que callase, I was on the point of telling him 
 
 to be silent. 
 
 Por. 
 
 1. Por, for, by, is used — like par in French — ^with 
 passive verbs, denoting bodily, and not mental, ac- 
 tions: 
 
 Este cuadro fué pintado por This picture was painted by 
 Murillo, Murillo. 
 
 Mental actions are expressed by de. Compare re- 
 marks on de. 
 
 2. Por denotes the motive, aim, or manner of an 
 action: 
 
 Lo hace por temor. He does it from fear. 
 
 3. Por refers to local descriptions: 
 
 Fuimos por Cádiz a Madrid, Madrid by way of 
 
 Cadiz. 
 
 Perdí mi sortija por la calle, I lost my ring in the street. 
 
 4. Por denotes price, exchange, buying, selling, 
 equality, etc.: 
 
 Prestan dinero a cinco o a seis They loan money at five or six 
 por ciento, per cent. 
 
 5. Por, in connection with estar, denotes an action 
 which is or ought to be done: 
 
 Este cuarto está por alquilar. This room is {still) to be let. 
 
524 
 
 The Rosenthal Method, 
 
 6. Por, in connection with an adjective and que gov- 
 erns the subjunctive mood and signifies although^ 
 though: 
 
 Por rico que sea, no le puedo Rich though Qiowever rich) he may 
 estimar, he, I cannot esteem him, 
 
 7. Observe the peculiar expressions: 
 
 Enviar por el médico. To send for the physician. 
 
 Mandar por vino, To send for wine. 
 
 Venir por algo, por alguien. To call for someone. 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 Spanish grammarians divide the conjunctions into the 
 following nine classes: 
 
 1. Conjunciones Copulativas. 
 
 Y, and, que, that, 
 
 ni, noty not even, también, alsOy too, 
 
 ni — ni, neither — nor, tampoco, neither, not either, 
 
 2 , Conjunciones Disjuntivas. 
 
 o, or, ya — ya, now — now, 
 
 o — o, either — or, sea que, whether, while. 
 
 ya, already, si quiera, at least, although, 
 
 though. 
 
 3. Conjunciones Adversativas. 
 
 pero, hut, 
 mas, hut. 
 
 sólo que, only that, 
 sólo si que, only that. 
 
 sino, hut. 
 no sino, hut. 
 aunque, although. 
 bienque, though, although. 
 
 como, as. 
 así como, 
 tal como. 
 
 4. Conjunciones Comparativas. 
 
 tanto — como, as well — as. 
 que, as. 
 
 según, as, according to. 
 
 as. 
 
525 
 
 The Spanish Language. 
 
 5. Conjunciones Ilativas. 
 
 pues, aSf since^ therefore. 
 por lo mismo, therefore. 
 por lo tanto, therefore. 
 con que, so, therefore. 
 luego, then, furthermore. 
 
 de or por consiguiente, conse^ 
 quently. 
 
 de modo que, 1 therefore. 
 de manera que, / consequently. 
 
 6. Conjunciones Continuativas. 
 
 así que, so that, so. entre tanto que, while. 
 
 a más de, besides, except. mientras que, while. 
 
 además de, moreover. mientras tanto, as long as. 
 
 7, Conjunciones Condicionales. 
 como, if. 
 
 con tal que, provided that. 
 
 8. Conjunciones Causales. 
 
 que, for. puesto que, since, supposed that. 
 
 porque, because, as. supuesto que, provided that. 
 
 pues, because, as, for. ya que, as therefore, since. 
 
 si, if, whether. 
 cuando, when. 
 
 9. Conjunciones Finales. 
 
 que, that, in order that. a fin de que, in order that. 
 
 para que, in order that. con que, so then. 
 
 It will be seen that one and the same conjunction 
 may belong to different classes, and that most of the 
 conjunctions are, in fact, prepositions or adverbs (with 
 or without que). 
 
 Principal Conjunctions formed with que. 
 
 A fin de que, in order that. 
 
 a no ser que, \ , 
 
 ^ > unless. 
 
 a menos que, J 
 
 antes que, before. 
 
 así que, so that, so. 
 
 En vez de que, instead of. 
 entre tanto que, while. 
 excepto que, excepting. 
 hasta que, urUil. 
 luego que, as soon as. 
 
526 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 aunque, 1 although. 
 
 bien que, J 
 
 caso que, in case that. 
 
 como quiera que, however. 
 
 con que, so, therefore. 
 
 con motivo que, so that. 
 
 con tal que, provided that. 
 
 cuanto más que, the more since. 
 
 dado que, in case that. 
 
 dado caso que, supposing that. 
 
 de manera que, 1 
 
 de modo que, so that. 
 
 de suerte que, j 
 
 desde que, since. 
 
 mientras que, while. 
 
 no obstante que, notwithstanding. 
 
 para que, in order that. 
 
 por — que, however. 
 
 porque, because, in order that. 
 
 por más que, however much. 
 
 por ménos que, 1 , , 
 
 > however httle. 
 
 por poco que, 
 puesto que, 
 pues que, 
 
 sea que, whether, while. 
 siempre que, wherever. 
 sin que, without. 
 supuesto que, since. 
 
 Remarks on Certain Conjunctions. 
 
 1. Y, and^ is changed into e when followed by a word 
 beginning with the vowel i or the syllable hi: 
 
 Es hábil e ingenioso, He is clever and inventive. 
 
 Padres e hijos. Parents and children. 
 
 2. Pero and mas are placed at the beginning of ad- 
 versative sentences, while sino can be employed only 
 when preceded by a negative clause: 
 
 No es bianco sino pardo, It is not white, hut gray. 
 
 Me dijo que lo sabiá, pero {pr He told me he knew it, hut it does 
 mas), parece que no es not seem to he true, 
 verdad, 
 
 3. After the following conjunctions, 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood 
 
 is used when uncertainty, doubt, possibility, or an in- 
 definite future time is expressed: 
 
 Antes que, before. en caso de que, in case that. 
 
 a menos que, unless. hasta que, until. 
 
 a fin de que, to the end that. hasta donde, as far as. 
 
 aunque, although. luego que, as soon as. 
 
The Spanish Language. 
 
 527 
 
 bien que, although. 
 como, wherif as. 
 
 como quiera que, notwithstand- 
 ing. 
 
 con tal que, provided that. 
 
 cuando, when. 
 
 dado que, granted that. 
 
 mientras, while. 
 no sea que, lest. 
 ojalá, would that. 
 para que, in order that. 
 por — que, however. 
 
 siempre que, whenever. 
 sin que, without. 
 supuesto que, supposing that. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Aunque me lo haya dicho el Although he may have told me 
 otro día, no me acuerdo ya so the other day^ I do not re- 
 de ello, member it. 
 
 No volveré hasta que me ha- I shall not return till they have 
 yan entregado el dinero, handed me the money. 
 
 Cuando sea tiempo le daré a V. When the time comes I shall gm 
 los géneros, you the goods. 
 
 Iré aimque llueva, I shall go^ though it may rain. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Of Joy. 
 
 I Ah, Ah! Ah^ Ah! 
 ¡^.quéaleg^-l ^ 
 i Ay qué gozo! J 
 ¡ Bueno! Good! 
 
 I Gracias a Dios! Thank God! 
 ¡ Bendito sea Dios! 1 God he 
 I Alabado sea Dios! J praised! 
 
 ¡ Vaya, vaya! WeU now! 
 
 Of Sadness. 
 
 ¡ Ah, ay! Ah^ ay! 
 
 ¡ Ay qué pena! What a pain! 
 ¡ Ay de mi! Woe to me! 
 
 ¡ Ay de mi! Poor me! 
 
 \ Dios mío! Good heavens! 
 
 I Válgame Dios! May . God help 
 me! 
 
 i Virgen santísima! Holy Virgin! 
 ¡ Ave María! God forbid! 
 
528 
 
 The Rosenlhal Method. 
 
 Of Approbation and Surprise. 
 
 i Muy bien! Very well! 
 
 ¡ Bien hecho! Well done! 
 i Me alegro mucho! I am very 
 glad! 
 
 ¡ Grandemente! Splendid! 
 i Excelente! Excellent! 
 
 ¡Esun pasmo! 
 
 . ^ *11 I r Beauhful! 
 
 i Es una maravilla! J 
 
 ¡ Está muy bien! It is very well! 
 
 ¡ Es milagro! Wonderful! 
 i Bravo! Magnificent! 
 
 ¡ Viva, viva! Hurrah, hurrah! 
 
 ¡ Otra vez! Another time! En- 
 core! 
 
 Zounds! 
 
 i Cáspita! 
 
 ¡ Chispas! 
 
 ¡ Cáscaras! 
 
 ¡ Caracoles! 
 i Fuego! 
 
 I Ascuas! 
 i Bravo! Bravo! 
 
 i Oiga! i calle! You don't say so! 
 i Hola! Hallo! 
 
 ¡ Mire V. ! Do you see! 
 
 ¡ Caramba! Plague! 
 
 ¡ Toma! Indeed! {Ironically), 
 
 Of Contempt, Blame, and Disgust. 
 
 ¡ Dios mío! Good heavens! i Guapa cosa! A fine thing! 
 
 I Eso no vale nada! That is I Qué vergüenza! What a shame! 
 good for nothing! 
 
 ¡ Eso es bueno! That is good ¡ Quita allá! Get away! 
 
 indeed! i Oxte! Shame! 
 
 i Vaya, vaya! Well, now! I Calle, qué es 1 That is 
 
 i Que asco! How disgusting! bueno! \ very fine! 
 
 I Grande hazaña! A great feat! ¡ Vaya en gracia! J {Iron,) 
 
 Of Anger. 
 
 i Voto a! I si me enfado! Don't i Diantre! Hang it! 
 make me mad! 
 
 j Voto a chápiro! I tell you, sir! i Vaya V. a pasear! 1 Get 
 i Por diez! 1 The plague take i Anda enhoramala! / away! 
 I Caramba! J you! i Ascuas! That's too bad! 
 
 Of Exhortation and Encouragement. 
 
 i Vaya, vaya! Bravely! 
 
 ¡ Vamos, vamos! Come on! 
 
 i Guarda, guarda! Look out! 
 ¡ A un ladito! Step aside! 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 529 
 
 i Alerta! Wide awake! 
 
 ¡ Ea, venga alguien! Somebody 
 here! 
 
 i Ea pues! Well now! 
 i Ea, ánimo! Courage! 
 i Basta, basta! Enough! 
 
 ¡ Quedo, quedo! Gently! 
 
 \ Cuidado! Take care! 
 
 ¡ Fuera, fuera! Out with him! 
 
 ¡ Fuego, fuego! Fire! 
 
 ¡ Ay, que me matan! Murder! 
 ¡ Cógele, cógele! Hold him! 
 
 ¡ Acabóse! It is all over! 
 
 Of Silence. 
 
 ¡ Que callen! Quiet! 
 i Calla, calla! Be silent! 
 
 ¡ Silencio! Silence! 
 
 ¡ Chito, chitón! Hush! 
 
530 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 The references are to pages, 
 a, pronunciation of, 47. 
 
 a, see prepositions; verbs followed by a, 482; a and al with the 
 infinitive, 175, 481. 
 
 Accent, 56, 58. 
 
 Adjectives, 487; formation of the feminine, 487; peculiarities of 
 some adjectives, 488; position, 489; comparison, 490; absolute 
 superlative, 492; possessive adjectives and pronouns, 499; 
 demonstrative adjectives, 501; adjectives followed by de, 231. 
 Adverbs, 514; comparison, 515; adverbs of affirmation and negation, 
 516; adverbial expressions, 281. 
 
 Age, mode of expression of, 244, 415. 
 ai, pronunciation of, 51. 
 
 Alphabet, 46, 393, a, b, c. 
 
 Article, 396; definite article used in place of our possessive pronoun, 
 247, 397; omission of article, 400. 
 au, pronunciation of, 51. 
 
 Augmentative nouns and adjectives, 404. 
 
 Auxiliary verbs, 408. 
 ay, pronunciation of, 51. 
 
 B, pronunciation of, 51. 
 
 C, pronunciation of, 51; c before vowels, 49. 
 
 Cardinal numbers, 100. 
 
 fee, pronunciation of, 52. 
 
 ch, pronunciation of, 52; ch considered a single consonant, 59. 
 
 Colors, 151. 
 
 Comparative of adjectives, 490; of adverbs, 515. 
 
 Compound forms of the verbs with auxiliaries, see auxiliary verbs. 
 Con, see prepositions and infinitive. 
 
 Conditional, 477. 
 
 Conjugation, see verbs, 425. 
 
 Conjxmctions, 524; conjunctions requiring the subjunctive mood, 
 526. 
 
 Conmigo, see personal pronouns, 150, 496. 
 
 Conocer and saber, 208. 
 
 Consigo, see personal pronouns, 150, 496. 
 
 Contigo, see personal pronouns, 150, 496. 
 
 Consonants, 51-56. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 S3I 
 
 D, pronunciation of, 52; when suppressed in reflective verbs, 441. 
 Days of the week, 236. 
 
 De, see prepositions; de used with haber, 410; de used before the 
 infinitive, 483; de employed after ser, 484; de as complement of 
 an adjective, 231; de used after a partitive noun, 401. 
 
 Definite article, see article. 
 
 Demonstrative adjectives or pronouns, see pronotms. 
 
 Diminutive nouns and adjectives, see nouns. 
 
 Diphthongs, 50. 
 
 Division of words, 58. 
 
 Divisions of time, 391. 
 
 Don, 329. 
 
 Doña, 329. 
 
 Double letters, 59. 
 
 E, pronunciation of, 47. 
 
 E and y, 526. 
 
 El used by euphony instead of la, 397; el, de el (de ella, de ellos, de 
 ellas). 
 
 En, see prepositions and infinitive; en donde, 201. 
 
 Estar, see auxiliary verbs. 
 
 Feminine gender, see nouns. 
 
 Future perfect, 477. 
 
 Future tense, 108; 120; 239; 476. 
 
 G, pronunciation of, 52, 53. 
 
 Genders, see nouns. 
 
 Gerund, 187; 304; 484. 
 
 Government of verbs, 446. 
 
 H, pronunciation of, 53. 
 
 Haber, see auxiliary verbs, 408. 
 
 Hacer, 180; 214; the present tense used after hace, 278; hacer, to 
 cause, to let, 292. 
 
 Hasta, 1 12; see prepositions. 
 
 Hay, 243-245; 41 1. 
 
 Hé and he, 132. 
 
 I, pronunciation of, 48. 
 
 Imperative Mood, 486. 
 
 Imperfect tense, 188; 474; imperfect of the subjimctive (ist and 2nd 
 form), 480. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns, 507. 
 
 Indefinite article, see article, 396. 
 
532 
 
 The Rosenthal Method. 
 
 Indicative mood, 474. 
 
 Infinitive mood, 298; 481. 
 
 Interjections, 527. 
 
 Interrogative pronouns, 506. 
 
 Irregular verbs, 447. 
 
 J, pronunciation of, 53. 
 
 L, pronunciation of, 54. 
 
 LI, pronunciation of, 54, 59. 
 
 Mandar, to send, 292. 
 
 Mas, 184. 
 
 Masculine gender, see nouns. 
 
 May and can, 280. 
 
 Months of the year, 236. 
 
 Moods, see Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative and Infinitive. 
 Mucho and muy, 159. 
 
 Narrative tense, 160; 475. 
 
 Negative, 516. 
 
 Neuter article, 396. 
 
 Neuter gender, 396. 
 
 No, 66; 118; 516. 
 
 Nouns, 401; plural, 402; gender, 403; augmentative and diminutive 
 nouns, 404. 
 
 Numbers, cardinal, 100; ordinal numbers, 138. 
 
 Ñ, pronunciation of, 54. 
 
 O, pronunciation of, 48. 
 
 Ordinal numbers, 138. 
 
 Otro, 185. 
 
 Para, 122; 522. 
 
 Parecer, 155; 318. 
 
 Participle, 148; 485. 
 
 Passive verbs, 435. 
 
 Past Anterior, 476. 
 
 Past or '‘Definido,*’ 160; 475. 
 
 Pero, 184. 
 
 Personal verbs used impersonally, 296. 
 
 Personal pronoims, 64; 493; pleonastic construction, 496; use of 
 usted and its substitutes, 496; reflexive pronouns, 498; objective 
 pronouns, 498. 
 
 Plural of nouns and adjectives, see nouns and adjectives. 
 
 Por, see prepositions, 122. 
 
The Spanish Language, 
 
 533 
 
 Porque and por qué, 72. 
 
 Possessive pronouns, see pronouns. 
 
 Prepositions, 517. 
 
 Present indicative, 120; 278; 470. 
 
 Present participle, see Gerund. 
 
 Present subjunctive, see Subjunctive. 
 
 Pronotms, personal, 64; 493; possessive pronouns, 499; demonstra- 
 tive pronouns, 501; relative pronouns, 503; interrogative pro- 
 nouns, 506; indefinite pronouns, 507. 
 
 Pronunciation, 46-59. 
 
 Punctuation, 59. 
 
 Q, pronunciation of, 54. 
 
 Que, see pronouns and conjunctions. 
 
 R, pronimciation of, 54. 
 
 Reflexive pronouns, see pronouns. 
 
 Reflexive verbs, see verbs. 
 
 Regular verbs, see verbs. 
 
 Relative pronouns, see pronouns. 
 
 Rr, 59. 
 
 S, pronimciation of, 55; when suppressed in reflexive verbs, 441. 
 Saber and conocer, 208. 
 
 Seasons, 182. 
 
 Ser, see auxiliary veros, 97, 408. 
 
 Si and si, 91. 
 
 Sino, 184. 
 
 Subjunctive mood, 134-137; 474, 526. 
 
 Superlative, see adjectives and adverbs. 
 
 Syllables, 58. 
 
 Tener, 228; see auxiliary verbs, 408. 
 
 Time of the day, 268. 
 
 Triphthongs, 50. 
 
 U, pronunciation of, 48. 
 
 Usted, 62; 72; 86; 148; 166. 
 
 Verbs, regular, 425; verb-endings, 426; ist conjugation, 427; 2nd 
 conjugation, 429; 3d conjugation, 431; passive verbs, 435; use 
 of passive verbs, 439; reflexive verbs, 438; use of reflexive verbs, 
 441; impersonal verbs, 442; irregular verbs, 447. 
 
 Vez, veces, 146. 
 
 Y, pronunciation of, 55. See conjunctions, 524. 
 
 Z, pronunciation of, 56. 
 
1 / )¡ i' I